CLI Descriptions ML 6600

CLI Descriptions
MINI-LINK 6693
Description
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L

Copyright
© Ericsson AB 2018, 2019. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be
reproduced in any form without the written permission of the copyright owner.
Disclaimer
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to
continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall
have no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this
document.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
Contents
1 Introduction 1
2 Typographic Conventions 2
3 CLI Command Definition Structure 4
4 Installation Mode Commands 5

4.1 copy 5
4.2 disable 6
4.3 enable 6
4.4 erase startup-config 7
4.5 investigation-mode 7
4.6 reload 7
4.7 show backplane 8
4.8 show config-validation-info 8
4.9 show version 9
4.10 telecom-standard 9
5 Basic and Navigation Commands 11

5.1 ? 11
5.2 TAB 12
5.3 cli compatibility 13
5.4 configure 14
5.5 disable 14
5.6 enable 15
5.7 in-service 15
5.8 ping 16
5.9 ping6 18
5.10 ssh 20
5.11 telnet 21
5.12 traceroute 22
5.13 traceroute6 23
5.14 write 24
6 User Access Commands 26

6.1 investigation-mode 26
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
7 Firewall Commands 27
7.1 clear iptables 28
7.2 clear ip6tables 28
7.3 close ip 29
7.4 close6 ip 30
7.5 close msm 31
7.6 close netman 31
7.7 close ping 32
7.8 close6 ping 32
7.9 close PORT 33
7.10 close6 PORT 34
7.11 close syn_cookies 35
7.12 open ip 35
7.13 open6 ip 36
7.14 open msm 37
7.15 open netman 38
7.16 open ping 38
7.17 open6 ping 39
7.18 open PORT 39
7.19 open6 PORT 40
7.20 open syn_cookies 41
8 Security Commands 43
8.1 aaa accounting network 45
8.2 aaa authentication login 46
8.3 ftp active ntp-key-server 47
8.4 ntp get-ntp-key 47
8.5 ntp set-ntp-protocol 48
8.6 passwd 48
8.7 radius-server 49
8.8 restart 51
8.9 secure-ssh 52
8.10 set_radius_address_Type 53
8.11 set_tacacs_address_Type 53
8.12 setbruteforcethreshold 54
8.13 setcliprotocol 55
8.14 setenablelocalusers 55
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
8.15 setlegalnotice 56
8.16 setlocaluseridletimer 56
8.17 setsecureprotocols 57
8.18 setsnmpv3authprotocol 58
8.19 setsnmpv3privprotocol 59
8.20 setsnmpv3protocol 59
8.21 setstrongpasswd 60
8.22 set-file-integrity-alarm 61
8.23 set ssh_keys 61
8.24 snmp-server access 62
8.25 snmp-server community 63
8.26 snmp-server trap 64
8.27 tacacs-server 66
9 Software, Configuration, and Log File Handling Commands 68

9.1 activate 68
9.2 autobackup 69
9.3 copy 70
9.4 erase startup-config 71
9.5 ftp active 71
9.6 ftp activeftp 73
9.7 ftp server 73
9.8 reload 75
10 License Handling Commands 77

10.1 add 78
10.2 license install 78
10.3 license restrict-unlocked-period 79
10.4 license request 80
10.5 license unlockedperiod enter 80
10.6 license unlockedperiod exit 81
10.7 modify 82
10.8 remove 82
10.9 reset 83
10.10 upload 83
11 License Handling Commands in Monitoring Mode 85

11.1 add 85
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
11.2 license monitoring 86

11.3 modify 87
11.4 monitoring-auto-unlock 87
11.5 remove 88
11.6 reset 88
12 Basic Configuration Commands 90

12.1 clock set 90
12.2 config-changed-timer 91
12.3 ntp server 92
12.4 snmp-server syscontact 93
12.5 snmp-server syslocation 93
12.6 snmp-server sysname 94
12.7 snmp-server trapenable 95
12.8 sys_notes 95
12.9 timezone 96
13 DCN Basic Commands 98

13.1 dcn-lan-ctag 98
13.2 dcn-mode 99
13.3 pingtargethost 100
14 LAN-DCN IP Commands 102

14.1 lan-dcn ip dhcp relayaddress 102
14.2 lan-dcn ip domainname 103
14.3 lan-dcn ip dscp 104
14.4 lan-dcn ip name-server 104
14.5 lan-dcn ip route 105
15 LAN-DCN IPv6 Commands 107

15.1 lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress 107
15.2 lan-dcn ipv6 domainname 108
15.3 lan-dcn ipv6 dscp 109
15.4 lan-dcn ipv6 name-server 109
15.5 lan-dcn ipv6 route 110
16 LAN-DCN Interface Commands 112

16.1 interface ip 112
16.2 interface lan-dcn 113
16.3 ip address 113
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
16.4 ipv6 address 114

16.5 mtu 115
16.6 trapenable 116
17 DCN Loopback Interface Commands 117

17.1 interface lo-dcn 117
17.2 ip address 118
18 DCN Local Access (USB) Interface Commands 121

18.1 interface local-access 121
18.3 pingtargethost 123
18.4 shutdown 123
19 Router Basic Commands 125

19.1 access-list 127
19.2 capability 129
19.3 debug 130
19.4 match as-path 131
19.5 match community 132
19.6 match extcommunity 133
19.7 match interface 134
19.8 match ip address 135
19.9 match ip address prefix-list 136
19.10 match ip next-hop 136
19.11 match ip next-hop prefix-list 137
19.12 match ip peer 138
19.13 match metric 139
19.14 match origin 139
19.15 match route-type 141
19.16 match tag 141
19.17 router-id 142
19.18 route-map 143
19.19 set aggregator 144
19.20 set as-path 145
19.21 set atomic-aggregate 145
19.22 set comm-list 146
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
19.23 set community 147

19.24 set dampening 148
19.25 set extcommunity 149
19.26 set extcomm-list 150
19.27 set ip next-hop 151
19.28 set level 151
19.29 set local-preference 152
19.30 set metric 153
19.31 set metric-type 153
19.32 set origin 154
19.33 set originator-id 155
19.34 set tag 156
19.35 set vpnv4 next-hop 156
19.36 set weight 157
20 Router IP Commands 159

20.1 clear arp-cache 160
20.2 ip host interface 160
20.3 ip host mtu 161
20.4 ip prefix-list 162
20.5 ip route 164
20.6 ip vrf 165
21 IP VRF Commands 167

21.1 description 167
21.2 rd 168
21.3 route-target 168
22 Serial (PPP) Interface Commands 170

22.1 interface serial 170
22.2 ip address 171
22.3 ip unnumbered 172
22.4 mru 173
22.5 shutdown 173
22.6 trapenable 174
23 Router Loopback Interface Commands 175

23.1 interface ip lo 175
23.2 ip address 176
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
24 L3 Interface Commands 178

24.1 interface ip 179
24.2 ip address 180
24.3 ip unnumbered 181
24.4 ip vrf forwarding 181
24.5 l3enable (VLAN) 182
24.6 l3enable (Ethernet Port) 183
24.7 mtu 184
24.8 name 185
24.9 shutdown 185
24.10 trapenable 186
25 BFD Configuration Commands 187

25.1 bfd multihop-peer 187
26 BFD Interface Commands 189

26.1 bfd disable 189
26.2 bfd interval 190
26.3 bfd session 191
26.4 bfd slow-timer 191
27 OSPF Configuration Commands 193

27.1 area authentication 195
27.2 area default-cost 196
27.3 area filter-list 196
27.4 area multi-area-adjacency 197
27.5 area nssa 198
27.6 area range 200
27.7 area shortcut 201
27.8 area stub 202
27.9 area virtual-link 203
27.10 auto-cost 205
27.11 bfd all-interfaces 205
27.12 clear ip ospf 206
27.13 compatible 206
27.14 default-information 207
27.15 default-metric 208
27.16 distance 209
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
27.17 distribute-list 210

27.18 domain-id 211
27.19 dscp 212
27.20 enable db-summary-opt 213
27.21 host 213
27.22 neighbor 214
27.23 network 215
27.24 ospf abr-type 216
27.25 ospf router-id 217
27.26 passive-interface 218
27.27 redistribute 219
27.28 router ospf 220
27.29 router-id 221
27.30 summary-address 221
27.31 timers 222
28 OSPF Interface Commands 224

28.1 ip ospf authentication 225
28.2 ip ospf authentication-key 226
28.3 ip ospf bfd 226
28.4 ip ospf cost 227
28.5 ip ospf databse-filter 228
28.6 ip ospf dead-interval 229
28.7 ip ospf disable 229
28.8 ip ospf hello-interval 230
28.9 ip ospf message-digest-key 230
28.10 ip ospf mtu 231
28.11 ip ospf mtu-ignore 232
28.12 ip ospf network 233
28.13 ip ospf priority 234
28.14 ip ospf retransmit-interval 234
28.15 ip ospf transmit-delay 235
29 IS-IS Commands 236

29.1 accept-lifetime 238
29.2 area-password 239
29.3 authentication key-chain 240
29.4 authentication mode 241
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
29.5 authentication send-only 242

29.6 bfd all-interfaces 243
29.7 clear clns is-neighbors 244
29.8 clear clns neighbors 244
29.9 clear ip isis 245
29.10 clear isis 245
29.11 domain-password 246
29.12 ip route high-priority 247
29.13 is-type 247
29.14 key 248
29.15 key chain 249
29.16 key-string 250
29.17 lsp-gen-interval 251
29.18 lsp-mtu 252
29.19 lsp-refresh-interval 253
29.20 max-area-address 253
29.21 max-lsp-lifetime 254
29.22 metric-style 255
29.23 net 256
29.25 router isis 258
29.26 send-lifetime 259
29.27 set-overload-bit 260
29.28 spf-interval-exp 262
29.29 summary-address 263
30 IS-IS Interface Commands 264

30.1 ip router isis 265
30.2 isis authentication key-chain 266
30.3 isis authentication mode 267
30.4 isis authentication send-only 268
30.5 isis circuit-type 269
30.6 isis csnp-interval 270
30.7 isis hello 271
30.8 isis hello-interval 272
30.9 isis hello-multiplier 273
30.10 isis metric 274
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
30.11 isis network 275

30.12 isis password 276
30.13 isis priority 277
30.14 isis retransmit-interval 278
30.15 isis tag 278
30.16 isis wide-metric 279
31 LDP Configuration Commands 281

31.1 advertisement-mode 283
31.2 clear ldp adjacency 284
31.3 clear ldp session 285
31.4 clear ldp statistics 285
31.5 control-mode 286
31.6 dscp 287
31.7 explicit-null 287
31.8 global-merge-capability 288
31.9 hello-interval 289
31.10 hold-time 289
31.11 import-bgp-routes 290
31.12 inter-area-lsp 290
31.13 keepalive-interval 291
31.14 keepalive-timeout 292
31.15 label-retention-mode 292
31.16 ldp-optimization 293
31.17 loop-detection 294
31.18 loop-detection-hop-count 294
31.19 loop-detection-path-vec-count 295
31.20 neighbor auth md5 password 295
31.21 multicast-hellos 296
31.22 propagate-release 297
31.23 request-retry 297
31.24 request-retry-timeout 298
31.25 router ldp 299
31.26 router-id 299
31.27 targeted-peer hello-interval 300
31.28 targeted-peer hold-time 300
31.29 transport-address ipv4 301
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
32 LDP Interface Commands 303

32.1 disable-ldp 304
32.2 enable-ldp 304
32.3 ldp advertisement-mode 305
32.4 ldp hello-interval 306
32.5 ldp hold-time 307
32.6 ldp keepalive-interval 307
32.7 ldp keepalive-timeout 308
32.8 ldp label-retention-mode 309
32.9 ldp multicast-hellos 309
32.10 mpls ldp-igp sync 310
32.11 mpls ldp-igp sync-delay 311
33 BGP Commands 312

33.1 address-family 316
33.2 aggregate-address 318
33.3 auto-summary 319
33.4 bgp additional-paths install 319
33.5 bgp dampening 320
33.6 bgp default ipv4-unicast 321
33.7 bgp default local-preference 322
33.8 bgp inbound-route-filter 323
33.9 bgp nexthop-trigger delay 323
33.10 bgp nexthop-trigger enable 324
33.11 clear bgp * 324
33.12 clear bgp ASN 325
33.13 clear bgp external 326
33.14 clear bgp ipv4 327
33.15 clear bgp peer-group 328
33.16 default-information 329
33.17 distance bgp 330
33.18 dscp 331
33.19 ip as-path access-list 332
33.20 ip community-list (standard) 332
33.21 ip community-list (expanded) 334
33.22 ip extcommunity-list (standard) 335
33.23 ip extcommunity-list (expanded) 336
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
33.24 neighbor activate 336

33.25 neighbor advertisement-interval 337
33.26 neighbor allow-ebgp-vpn 338
33.27 neighbor allowas-in 339
33.28 neighbor as-origination-interval 340
33.29 neighbor as-override 340
33.30 neighbor attribute-unchanged 341
33.31 neighbor capability dynamic 342
33.32 neighbor capability orf 343
33.33 neighbor capability route-refresh 344
33.34 neighbor collide-established 344
33.35 neighbor default-originate 345
33.36 neighbor description 346
33.37 neighbor disallow-infinite-holdtime 346
33.38 neighbor dont-capability-negotiate 347
33.39 neighbor ebgp-multihop 348
33.40 neighbor enforce-multihop 348
33.41 neighbor fall-over bfd 349
33.42 neighbor filter-list 350
33.43 neighbor local-as 351
33.44 neighbor maximum-prefix 352
33.45 neighbor next-hop-self 353
33.46 neighbor override-capability 354
33.47 neighbor passive 354
33.48 neighbor password 355
33.49 neighbor peer-group 356
33.50 neighbor port 356
33.51 neighbor prefix-list 357
33.52 neighbor remote-as 358
33.53 neighbor remove-private-as 359
33.54 neighbor route-reflector-client 359
33.55 neighbor route-server-client 360
33.56 neighbor send-community 361
33.57 neighbor shutdown 362
33.58 neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound 363
33.59 neighbor soo 364
33.60 neighbor strict-capability-match 364
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
33.61 neighbor timers 365

33.62 neighbor update-source 366
33.63 neighbor version 367
33.64 neighbor weight 368
33.65 network 369
33.67 router bgp 371
33.68 synchronization 371
33.69 timers bgp 372
34 MPLS Basic Commands 374

34.1 ping mpls 374
34.2 traceroute mpls 376
35 MPLS Configuration Commands 379

35.1 mpls ac-group 380
35.2 mpls admin-groups 381
35.3 mpls bfd 382
35.4 mpls disable-all-interfaces 383
35.5 mpls egress-ttl 384
35.6 mpls enable-all-interfaces 384
35.7 mpls ftn-entry 385
35.8 mpls ilm-entry pop 386
35.9 mpls ilm-entry swap 387
35.10 mpls ilm-entry vpnpop 389
35.11 mpls ingress-ttl 390
35.12 mpls label mode 391
35.13 mpls label-range 392
35.14 mpls map-route 392
35.15 mpls propagate-ttl 393
35.16 mpls traffic-eng 394
36 MPLS Interface Commands 395

36.1 label-switching 395
37 RSVP-TE Commands 397

37.1 <IPADDR> 400
37.2 ack-wait-timeout 401
37.3 clear rsvp session 401
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
37.4 clear rsvp statistics 402

37.5 clear rsvp trunk 403
37.6 detour-identification 404
37.7 dscp 405
37.8 explicit-null 405
37.9 ext-tunnel-id 406
37.10 from <IPADDR> 406
37.11 hello-interval 407
37.12 hello-timeout 408
37.13 keep-multiplier 409
37.14 loop-detection 409
37.15 map-route 410
37.16 mpls traffic-eng reoptimize 411
37.17 php 411
37.18 primary affinity 412
37.19 primary exclude-any 412
37.20 primary fast-reroute exclude-any 413
37.21 primary fast-reroute hop-limit 414
37.22 primary fast-reroute include-any 414
37.23 primary fast-reroute protection one-to-one 415
37.24 primary hop-limit 415
37.25 primary include-any 416
37.26 primary label-record 417
37.27 primary path 417
37.28 primary record 418
37.29 refresh-path-parsing 419
37.30 refresh-resv-parsing 419
37.31 refresh-time 420
37.32 reoptimize-lockdown 421
37.33 reoptimize timers frequency 421
37.34 router rsvp 422
37.35 rsvp-path 423
37.36 rsvp-trunk 423
37.37 rsvp-trunk-restart 424
37.38 select-preference 425
37.39 to <IPADDR> 425
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
38 RSVP-TE Interface Commands 427

38.1 admin-group 428
38.2 disable-rsvp 429
38.3 enable-rsvp 429
38.4 rsvp ack-wait-timeout 430
38.5 rsvp bfd 431
38.6 rsvp hello 431
38.7 rsvp hello-interval 432
38.8 rsvp hello-timeout 433
38.9 rsvp keep-multiplier 433
38.10 rsvp refresh-reduction 434
38.11 rsvp refresh-time 434
39 DCN Remote Syslog Commands 436

39.1 rsyslog enable 436
39.2 rsyslog server 437
39.3 rsyslog6 server 437
39.4 rsyslog trapseverity 438
40 Security Remote Syslog Commands 440

40.1 rsyslogsec enable 441
40.2 rsyslogsec events auditlog globalsettings 441
40.3 rsyslogsec events localauth 442
40.4 rsyslogsec events login 443
40.5 rsyslogsec events protocols 443
40.6 rsyslogsec events radius 444
40.7 rsyslogsec events tacacs 445
40.8 rsyslogsec server 446
40.9 rsyslogsec6 server 447
41 Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 -

RLT 448
41.1 aes-encryption-oth 449
41.2 aes-encryption-oth-mk 450
41.3 eqp-protection-switch-mode 450
41.4 eqp-active-unit 451
41.5 expected-far-end-id 452
41.6 fade-notification-timer 452
41.7 far-end-id-check 453
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
41.8 ferlt 454

41.9 id 455
41.10 manual-switch 455
41.11 mode 456
41.12 protection-switch-mode 457
41.13 reset 457
41.14 reset-tx-switch-alarm 458
41.15 revertive-preferred-tx 459
41.16 revertive-wait-to-restore 459
41.17 rlt 460
41.18 tx-switch-far-end 460
42 Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1002 - XPIC 462

42.1 mode 462
42.2 xpic 463
42.3 xpic-auto-restore 464
42.4 xpic-recovery 464
42.5 xpic-restore 465
43 Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 -

TDM 467
43.1 fetdm 467
43.2 rx-loop 468
43.3 tdm 469
43.4 tdm-connect 469
43.5 wanted-tdm-tributaries-allocation 470
44 Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 472

44.1 ct 472
44.2 farend 473
45 Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 -

Carrier 474
45.1 auto-remove-loop 475
45.2 ber-alarm-threshold 475
45.3 carrier-id 476
45.4 continuous_wave_mode 477
45.6 frame-id 478
45.7 if-loop 479
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
45.8 polarization 479

45.9 reference-sec 480
45.10 reset 481
45.11 restore 482
45.12 rf-loop 482
45.13 sel-minAcm-maxAcm-Rsec 483
45.14 selected-max-acm 485
45.15 selected-min-acm 487
45.16 wanted-licensed-capacity 489

Frequency 490
46.1 duplex-configuration 490
46.2 duplex-distance 491
46.3 rx-frequency 492
46.4 tx-admin-status 492
46.5 tx-frequency 493

Spectrum Diagnostics 495
47.1 spectrum_diagnostics scan_start 495
47.2 spectrum_diagnostics scan_stop 496

Power 497
48.1 input-power-alarm-threshold 497
48.2 selected-max-output-power 498
48.3 selected-min-output-power 499
48.4 selected-output-power 499
48.5 selected-output-power-type 500
48.6 taps 501
48.7 target-input-power-far-end 501
49 Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Interfaces 503

49.1 alarm-enable 504
49.2 autoneg 504
49.3 flowcontrol 505
49.4 interface ethernet 506
49.5 lan 506
49.6 lock-to-service 507
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
49.7 mdix 507

49.8 name 508
49.9 qos 508
49.10 shutdown 509
49.11 speed 509
49.12 sync-enable 510
49.14 wan 512
50 Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Bridging and Switching 513

50.1 add 514
50.2 add-egressports 516
50.3 add-untagged-ports 517
50.4 bridge mode 517
50.5 bridge-port 518
50.6 bridge tp-agingtime 518
50.7 clear mac-address-table 519
50.8 egressports 520
50.9 ethernet-epl 521
50.10 fdb 522
50.11 forward-unregistered-multicast 522
50.12 llf-enable 523
50.13 maxfs 523
50.14 name 524
50.15 port-ether-type 525
50.16 qinqtermination 525
50.17 remove 526
50.18 role 527
50.19 static-multicast 528
50.20 static-unicast 528
50.21 untagged-ports 529
50.22 vlan 530
50.23 vlans 531
50.24 vlan-statistics-enable 532
51 Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Ring Protection 533

51.1 alarm 534
51.2 clear-counters 534
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents

51.4 enable 535
51.5 erp-group 536
51.6 erp-port 537
51.7 mode 538
51.8 propagateTC 538
51.9 raps 539
51.10 switchover 540
51.11 timer 541
51.12 traffic-channel 542
52 Ethernet Commands: RSTP 544

52.1 spanning-tree admin-edgeport 545
52.2 spanning-tree admin-pointtopoint 545
52.3 spanning-tree autoedge 546
52.4 spanning-tree enable 547
52.5 spanning-tree force-version 547
52.6 spanning-tree forward-delay 548
52.7 spanning-tree mac-enable 549
52.8 spanning-tree max-age 549
52.9 spanning-tree max-hops 550
52.10 spanning-tree path-cost 551
52.11 spanning-tree port-enable 551
52.12 spanning-tree port-priority 552
52.13 spanning-tree priority 552
52.14 spanning-tree protocol-migration 553
52.15 spanning-tree restricted-role 554
52.16 spanning-tree restricted-tcn 554
52.17 spanning-tree transmit-holdcount 555
52.18 spanning-tree type 555
53 Ethernet Commands: MSTP 557

53.1 instance 557
53.2 name 558
53.3 revision 559
53.4 reset 560
53.5 spanning-tree cist-path-cost 560
53.6 spanning-tree mst path-cost 561
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
53.7 spanning-tree mst port-enable 561

53.8 spanning-tree mst priority 562
54 Ethernet Commands: Security and Admission Control 564

54.1 admit 565
54.2 bridge customer-BPDU 566
54.3 bridge l2cpmacdesttunnel 567
54.4 bridge l2cppriority 567
54.5 ethernet-alarms 568
54.6 forbidden-egressports 568
54.7 l2cp 569
54.8 loop-alarm 573
54.9 maclearning (per port) 574
54.10 mac-whitelist 575
54.11 max-learned-addresses 575
54.12 stormctrl bc 576
54.13 stormctrl dlf 577
54.14 stormctrl mc 578
54.15 stormctrl maxbcbw 578
54.16 stormctrl maxdlfbw 579
54.17 stormctrl maxmcbw 580
55 Ethernet Commands: Buffering 582

55.1 deep-buffering 582
56 Ethernet Commands: Traffic Classes 583

56.1 bridge priority-mapping map 583
56.2 bridge priority-mapping type 584
57 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Aging 586

57.1 bridge aging 586
57.2 bridge aging enable 587
58 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Scheduling 588

58.1 bridge scheduler-profile 589
58.2 ethernet-profiles 589
58.3 name 590
58.4 scheduler-profile 590
58.5 scheduler-profile 591
58.6 tc-scheduler-type-and-weight 592
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
59 Ethernet Commands: QoS - WRED 593

59.1 exponentWeight 594
59.2 maxThreshold 594
59.3 minThreshold 595
59.4 name 596
59.5 p-mark 596
59.6 wred-profile 597
60 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Queue-Set 599

60.1 bridge queue-set-profile 599
60.2 name 600
60.3 queue-set-profile 601
60.4 queue-set-profile 601
60.5 tc-queue 602
61 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Policing and Color Marking 604

61.1 cbs 605
61.2 cir 606
61.3 default-cos 606
61.4 ebs 607
61.5 eir 608
61.6 mode 608
61.7 policing 609
61.8 policing-bandwidth-profile 609
61.9 policing-cos-group 610
61.10 policing-cos-group-mapping 611
61.11 policing-vlan-group 611
61.12 policing-vlan-group-mapping 612
61.13 pol-cos-and-cos-group 612
61.14 pol-cos-group-and-bandwidth-profile 613
61.15 pol-vlan-and-vlan-group 614
61.16 pol-vlan-group-and-bandwidth-profile 614
61.17 port-bandwidth-profile 615
62 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Port Shaping 616

62.1 shaper 616
63 Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Node and Profile Configuration

Commands 618
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
63.1 child-node 619

63.2 hqos-node 620
63.3 hqos-profile 622
63.4 h-scheduler 623
63.5 map 624
63.6 name 625
63.7 order 626
63.8 shaper 626
64 Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Profile Assignment Commands 628

64.1 hqos-profile 628
65 Ethernet Commands: Diagnostics Tools 630

65.1 mirror mirrored-port 630
65.2 mirror mode 630
65.3 mirror mtp-vlan 631
66 Ethernet Commands: Classification and Tagging 633

66.1 bridge network-pcp-selection 633
66.2 cep-pvid 634
66.3 cvid-registration 635
66.4 default-network-priority 635
66.5 trusted 636
66.6 user-priority-mapping 637
67 Ethernet Commands: LAG 639

67.1 alarm-enable-degraded-service 640
67.2 alarm-enable-no-traffic 640
67.3 alarm-enable-unable-to-protect 641
67.4 clear lag counters 641
67.5 hash-type 642
67.6 lacp activity 643
67.7 lacp controlmode 643
67.8 lacp lag-sys-priority 644
67.9 lacp max-delay 645
67.10 lacp revertive 646
67.11 lacp timeout 646
67.12 lag 647
67.13 members 647
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
68 Ethernet Commands: LLDP 649

68.1 admin-status 650
68.2 clear counters 651
68.3 clear lldp counters 651
68.4 lldp dest-mac-address nearest-bridge 652
68.5 lldp message-fast-tx 652
68.6 lldp message-tx-hold-multiplier 653
68.7 lldp message-tx-interval 654
68.8 lldp notification-enable 654
68.9 lldp notification-interval 655
68.10 lldp tx-fast-init 656
68.11 tlvs-tx-enable 656
69 Ethernet Commands: L1 Bonding 658

69.1 alarm-enable-degraded-service 658
69.2 alarm-enable-no-traffic 659
69.3 enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping 659
69.4 l1-bonding 661
69.5 mapping 661
69.6 members 664
69.7 set-dynamic-vlan-mapping-list 665
70 TDM Cross-Connection Commands 666

70.1 connect-cc 666
71 CES Commands 668

71.1 ces server 670
71.2 ces tdm-profile 670
71.3 clock-recovery-mode 671
71.5 encap 672
71.6 jitter-buffer-playout-level 673
71.7 jitter-buffer-size 673
71.8 lops-clear-threshold 674
71.9 lops-set-threshold 674
71.10 mac-address 675
71.11 name (PW) 675
71.12 name (TDM Profile) 676
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
71.13 pw 676
71.14 packet-reorder 677
71.15 packet-replace-policy 678
71.16 payload-size 679
71.17 payload-suppression 679
71.18 receive-ecid 680
71.19 remote-mac 680
71.20 shutdown 681
71.21 tdm-profile 681
71.22 timing-input 682
71.23 transmit-ecid 683
71.25 vlanid 684
71.26 vlan-priority 684
72 Performance Monitoring Commands 686

72.1 clear 687
72.2 clear-if-counters 687
72.3 ethernet-pm 688
72.4 ethernet-pm clear-all 689
72.5 pm 689
72.6 pmalarmview 690
72.7 pm15minsetthreshold 690
72.8 pm24hsetthreshold 692
72.9 pm-start-time 694
73 TWAMP Commands 696

73.1 twamp-reflector-light 696
73.2 twamp reset-statistics 698
74 Ethernet MAC White List Commands 699

74.1 ethernet-mac-whitelist 699
74.2 mac 700
74.3 name 700
75 ETU 1002 Commands: Equipment 702

75.1 board 702
76 LTU 1002 Commands: Equipment 704

76.1 activeunit 704
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
76.2 board 705

76.3 controller xfprotection-equipment 706
76.4 mode 706
76.5 trapenable 707
77 LTU 1002 Commands: SDH STM-1 709

77.1 admstatus 709
77.2 controller sdhstm1porttable 710
78 LTU 1002 Commands: Line 712

78.1 controller xfprotection-line 712
78.2 working-rx 713
79 LTU 1002 Commands: RS 714

79.1 am-severity-lof 714
79.2 am-severity-tim 715
79.3 am-severity-uastne 716
79.4 controller rsttp 717
79.5 enable-pm-point 718
79.6 if-link-trap-enabled 718
79.7 name 719
79.8 reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 720
79.9 reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 720
79.10 trail-trace-enabled 721
79.11 trail-trace-expected 721
79.12 trail-trace-send 722
80 LTU 1002 Commands: MS 724

80.1 am-severity-ais 725
80.2 am-severity-deg 726
80.3 am-severity-exc 727
80.4 am-severity-k2mis 727
80.5 am-severity-rdi 728
80.6 am-severity-uastfe 729
80.8 controller msttp 731
80.9 degm 731
80.10 degthr 732
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions

80.13 lineloop 734
80.14 name 735
80.15 rei 735
80.16 reset-cur-15min-fe-regs 736
80.18 reset-cur-24h-fe-regs 737
80.20 squelch 738
81 LTU 1002 Commands: MSP 740

81.4 am-severity-k2mis 743
81.8 controller msp 746
81.11 name 748
82 LTU 1002 Commands: AU-4 and VC-4 752

82.1 controller au4ctp-vc4ttp 753
82.2 degm 754
82.3 degthr 754
82.5 name 755
82.9 vc4-am-severity-ais 758
82.10 vc4-am-severity-deg 759
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
82.11 vc4-am-severity-exc 760

82.12 vc4-am-severity-lom 760
82.13 vc4-am-severity-lop 761
82.14 vc4-am-severity-plm 762
82.15 vc4-am-severity-rdi 763
82.16 vc4-am-severity-tim 764
82.17 vc4-am-severity-uastfe 765
82.18 vc4-am-severity-uastne 765
82.19 vc4-am-severity-uneq 766
82.20 vc4-enable-pm-point 767
82.21 vc4-reset-cur-15min-fe-regs 768
82.22 vc4-reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 768
82.23 vc4-reset-cur-24h-fe-regs 769
82.24 vc4-reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 770
83 LTU 1002 Commands: VC-12 771

83.4 am-severity-lom 775
83.5 am-severity-lop 775
83.6 am-severity-plm 776
83.8 am-severity-tim 778
83.11 am-severity-uneq 780
83.12 controller vc12ttp 781
83.13 degm 782
83.14 degthr 782
83.17 name 784
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions

84 Synchronization Commands 790

84.1 assigned-qlevel 790
84.2 holdoff-time 792
84.3 lockout 792
84.4 network-synch enable 793
84.5 network-synch forced-switch 793
84.6 network-synch node-clock 794
84.7 network-synch nominee 794
84.8 network-synch selection-mode 795
84.9 network-synch squelch 796
84.10 priority 796
84.11 signal-degrade 797
84.12 wait-to-restore-time 797
85 Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: General

Configuration 799
85.1 alarm-enable 800
85.2 clear ptp clock-port statistics 801
85.3 clock 801
85.4 clock-local-priority 802
85.5 clock-port 803
85.6 domain 804
85.7 event-enable 804
85.8 holdover-timeout 805
85.9 interface 806
85.10 link-delay-compensation 807
85.11 log-clock-servo 807
85.12 network-synch-assistance 808
85.13 priority1 809
85.14 priority2 809
85.15 ptp 810
85.16 sync-port 810
86 Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Clock Port

Configuration 812
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
86.1 delay-mechanism 813

86.2 dscp 813
86.3 enabled 814
86.4 inner-tag 814
86.5 interface 815
86.6 ip-interface 816
86.7 local-priority 816
86.8 multicast-configuration 817
86.9 not-slave 817
86.10 port 818
86.11 unicast-configuration 819
86.12 vlan 819
86.13 vlan-priority 820
87 Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast and

Multicast Configuration 821
87.1 announce-interval 822
87.2 announce-timeout 823
87.3 delay-resp-interval 823
87.4 delay-resp-timeout 824
87.5 duration 825
87.6 min-delay-req-interval 826
87.7 query-interval 827
87.8 sync-interval 828
87.9 sync-timeout 828
87.10 unicast-master 829
87.11 wait-to-restore-time 830
88 Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast Master

Configuration 831
88.1 address 831
88.2 enabled 832
88.3 local-priority 832
89 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: General Configuration 834

89.1 cfm 834
89.2 soam logmask 834
90 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Domain

Configuration 836
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
90.1 md 836
91 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Association

Configuration 838
91.1 interface-tlv-enable 838
91.2 ma 839
91.3 port-tlv-enable 840
92 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance End Point and

Maintenance Intermediate Point Configuration 842
92.1 alarm 842
92.2 mep 843
92.3 mep-list 845
92.4 mip 845
93 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Linktrace and Loopback

Configuration 847
93.1 ccm-enable 847
93.2 ccm-state-update-enable 848
93.3 linktrace 849
93.4 loopback 849
93.5 pm 850
94 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Ethernet Bandwidth

Notification 852
94.1 bandwidth-notification 853
94.2 enable 853
94.3 failed-link-message 854
94.4 format 854
94.5 full-link-speed-message 855
94.6 hold-time 856
94.7 interface 856
94.8 interval 857
94.9 level 857
94.10 port-id 858
94.11 priority 859
94.12 send-frequently-after-hold-time 859
94.13 send-options 860
95 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Session Configuration 861

95.1 dm 861
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
96 IGMP and MLD Snooping Commands 863

96.1 clear snooping counters 864
96.2 igmp snooping config-clear 865
96.3 igmp snooping enable 865
96.4 igmp snooping vlan 866
96.5 immediate-leave 867
96.6 mfib alarm-enable 868
96.7 mld snooping config-clear 869
96.8 mld snooping enable 869
96.9 mld snooping vlan 870
96.10 proxy-reporting 871
96.11 query-interval 871
96.12 robust 873
97 SFP Commands 874

97.1 alarm-threshold 874
97.2 als 875
97.3 reset 877
97.4 select 877
97.5 sfp 878
97.6 shutdown 879
97.7 trapenable 879
98 Report Commands 881

98.1 bug-report 881
98.2 generate-report 883
99 Show Commands 884

99.1 show (PW) 896
99.2 show (Ethernet alarms) 897
99.3 show (license) 897
99.4 show (license monitoring) 898
99.5 show aaa accounting network default group 900
99.6 show aaaPolicyStatus 901
99.7 show access-list 901
99.8 show alarms 902
99.9 show arp 902
99.10 show backplane 903
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
99.11 show bandwidth-notification 904

99.12 show bandwidth-notification brief 905
99.13 show bgp 906
99.14 show bgp community 907
99.15 show bgp community-list 908
99.16 show bgp dampening 909
99.17 show bgp filter-list 910
99.18 show bgp inconsistent-as 911
99.19 show bgp ipv4 911
99.20 show bgp label mode globals 912
99.21 show bgp mpls label mode 913
99.22 show bgp neighbors 913
99.23 show bgp nexthop-tracking 914
99.24 show bgp nexthop-tree-details 915
99.25 show bgp paths 916
99.26 show bgp prefix-list 916
99.27 show bgp quote-regexp 917
99.28 show bgp regexp 918
99.29 show bgp summary 919
99.30 show bgp vpnv4 all 920
99.31 show bgp vpnv4 details 920
99.32 show bgp vpnv4 rd 921
99.33 show bgp vpnv4 vrf 922
99.34 show board 922
99.35 show bridge-basics 924
99.36 show bridge-port 925
99.37 show bridge-port 925
99.38 show capability vrf-lite 926
99.39 show carrier-termination 926
99.40 show carrier-termination-capability 927
99.41 show ces server 928
99.42 show ces tdm-profile 930
99.43 show cfm alarms 931
99.44 show cfm ma 932
99.45 show cfm md 932
99.46 show cfm mep 933
99.47 show cfm mep-peer 934
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
99.48 show cfm mip 935

99.49 show cliprotocol 936
99.50 show clns is-neighbors 937
99.51 show clns neighbors 938
99.52 show clock 939
99.53 show config 939
99.54 show config-changed-timer 940
99.55 show config-validation-info 940
99.56 show confirm 941
99.57 show confirm timer 942
99.58 show connect-cc 943
99.59 show copy 944
99.60 show counters 944
99.61 show current 945
99.62 show dcn-mode 948
99.63 show dcn-lan-ctag 948
99.64 show debug 949
99.65 show dm 950
99.66 show enableLocalUsers 951
99.67 show epl 952
99.68 show erp-group 952
99.69 show ferlt 953
99.70 show fetdm 954
99.71 show file-integrity-alarm 955
99.72 show ftpprotocol 955
99.73 show ftp active 956
99.74 show ftp activeftp 956
99.75 show ftp configtable 957
99.76 show history 957
99.77 show igmp snooping 958
99.78 show igmp snooping config 958
99.79 show igmp snooping group 959
99.80 show igmp snooping mrouter 960
99.81 show igmp snooping vlan 961
99.82 show interface 962
99.83 show interface (PTP) 965
99.84 show interface ethernet 966
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
99.85 show interface ethernet-pm 967

99.86 show interface ethernet status 968
99.87 show interface ip 969
99.88 show interface serial 971
99.89 show investigation-mode 972
99.90 show ip forwarding 973
99.91 show ip host interface 973
99.92 show ip host mtu 974
99.93 show ip interface host 974
99.94 show ip isis igp-shortcut-lsp 975
99.95 show ip isis route 976
99.96 show ip isis route igp-shortcut 977
99.97 show ip ospf 977
99.98 show ip ospf border-routers 978
99.99 show ip ospf database 979
99.100 show ip ospf igp-shortcut-lsp 980
99.101 show ip ospf igp-shortcut-route 981
99.102 show ip ospf interface 982
99.103 show ip ospf multi-area-adjacencies 983
99.104 show ip ospf neighbor 983
99.105 show ip ospf route 984
99.106 show ip ospf virtual-links 985
99.107 show ip prefix-list 986
99.108 show ip route 986
99.109 show ip vrf 988
99.110 show iptables 989
99.111 show ip6tables 989
99.112 show isis counter 990
99.113 show isis database 991
99.114 show isis interface 992
99.115 show isis topology 994
99.116 show l1-bonding 994
99.117 show lag 995
99.118 show lag lacpstats 996
99.119 show lag status 996
99.120 show lan-dcn 998
99.121 show lan-dcn ip 999
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
99.122 show lan-dcn ipv6 1000

99.123 show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress 1001
99.124 show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp status 1002
99.125 show ldp 1002
99.126 show ldp adjacency 1003
99.127 show ldp downstream 1004
99.128 show ldp fec 1005
99.129 show ldp inter-area-fecs 1006
99.130 show ldp interface 1007
99.131 show ldp lsp 1008
99.132 show ldp session 1009
99.133 show ldp statistics 1010
99.134 show ldp targeted-peers 1011
99.135 show ldp upstream 1012
99.136 show legalnotice 1013
99.137 show license install status 1013
99.138 show license restrict-unlocked-period 1014
99.139 show license status 1014
99.140 show license status ports 1016
99.141 show license unlockedperiod 1017
99.142 show license upload status 1018
99.143 show linktrace 1019
99.144 show lldp config 1020
99.145 show lldp counters 1021
99.146 show lldp local-info 1022
99.147 show lldp neighbors 1023
99.148 show local-info 1024
99.149 show localuseridletimer 1024
99.150 show loopback 1025
99.151 show mac-address-table 1026
99.152 show mac-whitelist 1027
99.153 show memory 1028
99.154 show mfib status 1029
99.155 show mld snooping 1029
99.156 show mld snooping config 1030
99.157 show mld snooping group 1031
99.158 show mld snooping mrouter 1032
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
99.159 show mld snooping vlan 1033

99.160 show mpls 1034
99.161 show mpls cross-connect-table 1035
99.162 show mpls forwarding-table 1035
99.163 show mpls ftn-table 1036
99.164 show mpls ilm-table 1037
99.165 show mpls in-segment-table 1038
99.166 show mpls interface 1038
99.167 show mpls ldp 1039
99.168 show mpls mapped-routes 1041
99.169 show mpls out-segment-table 1041
99.170 show mpls vc-table 1042
99.171 show mpls vrf-table 1043
99.172 show mst 1044
99.173 show neighbors 1044
99.174 show netstat 1045
99.175 show network-synch status 1046
99.176 show notification-log 1047
99.177 show ntp-status 1047
99.178 show pingtargethost 1048
99.179 show policing 1049
99.180 show policing-bandwidth-profile 1049
99.181 show policing-cos-groups 1050
99.182 show policing-cos-group-mapping 1051
99.183 show policing-vlan-groups 1051
99.184 show policing-vlan-group-mapping 1052
99.185 show processes 1053
99.186 show ptp alarms-and-events 1053
99.187 show ptp clock 1054
99.188 show ptp clock current-ds 1055
99.189 show ptp clock default-ds 1055
99.190 show ptp clock parent-ds 1056
99.191 show ptp clock settings 1057
99.192 show ptp clock time-properties-ds 1057
99.193 show ptp clock-port 1058
99.194 show ptp config 1060
99.195 show ptp interface 1061
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Contents
99.196 show ptp peers 1062

99.197 show ptp sync 1063
99.198 show qos 1064
99.199 show queue-set-profile 1064
99.200 show radius_address_Type 1065
99.201 show radius-server config 1065
99.202 show radius-server statistics 1066
99.203 show radius-server status 1067
99.204 show rf-frequency 1068
99.205 show rf-power 1069
99.206 show rlt 1070
99.207 show route-map 1071
99.208 show router-id 1072
99.209 show rsvp 1072
99.210 show rsvp admin-groups 1073
99.211 show rsvp interface 1073
99.212 show rsvp neighbor 1074
99.213 show rsvp nexthop-cache 1075
99.214 show rsvp path 1075
99.215 show rsvp session 1076
99.216 show rsvp session count 1076
99.217 show rsvp session egress 1077
99.218 show rsvp session ingress 1078
99.219 show rsvp session <LSP-NAME> 1079
99.220 show rsvp session transit 1080
99.221 show rsvp statistics 1080
99.222 show rsvp summary-refresh 1081
99.223 show rsvp trunk 1081
99.224 show rsvp version 1082
99.225 show rsyslog 1082
99.226 show rsyslog6 1083
99.227 show rsyslogsec 1084
99.228 show rsyslogsec6 1085
99.229 show running-config 1086
99.230 show running-config router 1087
99.231 show rx-frequency 1088
99.232 show scheduler-profile 1089
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions
99.233 show secure-ssh 1089

99.234 show sfph 1090
99.235 show slot-capacity 1092
99.236 show snmpv3authprotocol 1093
99.237 show snmpv3privprotocol 1093
99.238 show snmpv3protocol 1094
99.239 show spanning-tree 1095
99.240 show spectrum-diagnostics-result 1096
99.241 show spectrum-diagnostics-status 1096
99.242 show startup-config 1097
99.243 show status 1098
99.244 show strongpasswd 1100
99.245 show subrack 1100
99.246 show system 1101
99.247 show sys_notes 1101
99.248 show tacacs_address_Type 1102
99.249 show tacacs-server config 1103
99.250 show tacacs-server statistics 1103
99.251 show tacacs-server status 1104
99.252 show taps 1105
99.253 show tdm 1106
99.254 show tdm-interfaces 1106
99.255 show temp 1107
99.256 show timezone 1108
99.257 show twamp sessions 1108
99.258 show twamp statistics 1109
99.259 show tx-frequency 1110
99.260 show userio 1110
99.261 show version 1111
99.262 show vlan 1112
99.263 show wred-profile 1112
99.264 show x 1113
99.265 show xpic 1114
100 Appendix 1115

100.1 DCN over IPv4 Address Limitations 1115
100.2 DCN over IPv6 Address Limitations 1117
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Introduction
1 Introduction
This description provides detailed information about all Command Line Interface
(CLI) commands for MINI-LINK 6693 with NPU 1002 or NPU 1003.
For an introduction to the CLI and installation instructions, see CLI User Guide.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1

CLI Descriptions
2 Typographic Conventions
Typographic conventions for the command syntax used in this document are
given in the following table.
Table 1 Typographic Conventions
Convention Description Example

Monospaced A command string entered on the ML66>show ip forwarding
font command line or a system response.
IP forwarding is off
Lowercase An option - often specifying the part of show networks
the system that a command will affect.
It must be typed exactly as shown.
Uppercase, An operand - specifying, for example, a telnet <HOST>
often within remote host to which the command
angle brackets creates a connection. The user must
type a valid value in place of the
operand.
| Delimits options or operands. Do not { events | status | timers }
enter the vertical bar as part of the
command.
{} Contains options or operands. Select { events | status | timers }
one from the list. Do not enter the
curved brackets as part of the
command.
[] Contains optional options or operands. [ detail | recv | send ]
Select none, one, or more from the list.
Do not enter the square brackets as
part of the command.
= Separates, for example, an operand <PROCESSID = 0-65535>
from a text string indicating
appropriate values. Do not enter the
equal sign as part of the command.
"" Operands must be surrounded by ML66(config)#network-synch
quotation marks in the examples if the nominee "1/4/1 NS"
operand contains space characters.
// Indicates that a line in an output Interface lo//
example was too long to fit the page Hardware is//
and has been wrapped. Loopback index 1//
metric 1 mtu//
16436 duplex-half//
arp ageing timeout 0
2 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Typographic Conventions
Convention Description Example

! Indicates that a line is a comment line ! In Global Configuration
and ignored by CLI. mode, configure adaptive
modulation
Note: Unless otherwise stated, press Enter after each command entry.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 3

CLI Descriptions
3 CLI Command Definition Structure
In the following sections, all CLI commands are described using the same
structure. This structure is divided into subsections as shown in the following
table.
Table 2 Sections
Section Name Description Mandatory?

Synopsis Contains the syntax of the command. The syntax is Yes
defined using the following templates:
<command name>
<command name> <OPERAND>
<command> { <option1> | <option2> | <option3> }
<command> [ <option1> | <option2> | <option3> ]
Many commands accept the option no placed before the
main command word. Using this option typically cancels
the effects of an earlier use of the command.
Example:
[no] ip domainname <DOMAINNAME>
For more information on typographic convections, see
Typographic Conventions on page 2.
Description Describes the purpose of the command and how it is Yes
used. If the command accepts the common no option,
this is mentioned in this section.
Command Mode Lists the command modes in which the command is Yes
available and can be used.
Options Lists relevant options together with an explanation. No
Options often specify the part of the system that a
command will affect.
Operands Lists relevant operands together with an explanation. No
Operands specify, for example, a remote host to which
the command creates a connection.
Examples Gives examples of how to use the command together Yes
with the system response (if any).
See Also Contains references to related commands. No
4 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Installation Mode Commands
4 Installation Mode Commands
This section contains detailed information about the commands listed in Table 3.
The following command modes are applicable for the installation mode
commands:
— Exec Installation mode
— Privileged Exec Installation mode
Table 3 Installation Mode Commands Overview

copy copy configuration files
disable exit from Privileged Exec Installation mode
to Exec Installation mode
enable change to Privileged Exec Installation mode
from Exec Installation mode
erase startup-config erase the startup configuration file
investigation-mode enable additional troubleshooting
possibilities for Ericsson engineers
reload reload on the selected configuration
show backplane display configuration information for a
backplane
show config-validation-info display the configuration information list
show version display software and hardware revision
information
telecom-standard select ETSI or ANSI standard
4.1 copy
Synopsis
copy ftp filename <FILENAME> startup-config
Description
Use this command to copy a configuration file from an FTP server to startup
configuration file. To copy load modules and SBLs, see copy on page 70.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 5

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Privileged Exec Installation mode
Operands
FILENAME The name of the file on the FTP to copy.
Examples
Copying a configuration file from on FTP server to startup configuration file:
ML66(installation-mode)#copy ftp filename Config1 startup-config
4.2 disable
Synopsis
disable
Description
Use this command to exit from Privileged Exec Installation mode to Exec
Installation mode.
Command Mode
Examples
Exiting from Privileged Exec Installation mode:
ML66(installation-mode)#disable
ML66(installation-mode)>
4.3 enable
Synopsis
enable
Description
Use this command to switch to Privileged Exec Installation mode from Exec
Installation mode.
6 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Exec Installation mode
Examples
Switching to Privileged Exec Installation mode:
ML66(installation-mode)>enable
ML66(installation-mode)#
4.4 erase startup-config

For a detailed description of this command, see erase startup-config on page
71.
4.5 investigation-mode
Synopsis
investigation-mode
Description
Use this command to temporarily enable additional troubleshooting possibilities
for Ericsson engineers in Installation mode.
For enabling additional troubleshooting possibilities in operational mode, see

investigation-mode on page 26.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling additional troubleshooting possibilities in installation mode:
ML66(installation-mode)#investigation-mode
4.6 reload
Synopsis
reload [ rmm | ftp ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 7

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to exit installation mode and reload the configuration file. Use
the options to load configuration from an alternative source instead of current
startup-config.
Command Mode
Options
rmm Restarts on configuration stored on Removable Memory

Module (RMM).
ftp Restarts on configuration downloaded from FTP.
Examples
Reloading the configuration from RMM and exiting from Installation mode:
ML66(installation-mode)#reload rmm
4.7 show backplane

For a detailed description of this command, see show backplane on page 903.
4.8 show config-validation-info
Synopsis
In Exec Installation mode:
— show config-validation-info source current
In Privileged Exec Installation mode:
— show config-validation-info source { ftp | rmm }
Description
Use this command to view information about the configuration file copied to the
node before applying the configuration.
Command Mode
Exec Installation mode and Privileged Exec Installation mode
8 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
current Current startup configuration.
ftp Configuration file from local FTP.
rmm Configuration file from Removable Memory Module

(RMM).
Examples
Displaying startup-configuration on local FTP:
ML66(installation-mode)#show config-validation-info source ftp
----------------------------------------
File: Loaded from FTP
----------------------------------------
NE Name: ML66-192-168-0-1
Created: Default
----------------------------------------
DCN Settings
IP Host address: 10.80.45.214
IP Host Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
IPv6 Host address: 2006::12
IPv6 Host prefix length: 128
----------------------------------------
Hardware Inventory
Backplane Product Number: ROJR 609 006/1
Backplane Revision: R1E
Position Product Number Release

1 ROJR 219 014/1 R1A
3 ROJ 208 357/1 R1A
4 ROJ 208 357/1 R1C
7 ROJR 211 006/2 R1A
8 ROJR 211 007/1 P1B
----------------------------------------
4.9 show version

For a detailed description of this command, see show version on page 1111.
4.10 telecom-standard
Synopsis
telecom-standard { etsi | ansi }
Description
Use this command to select ANSI or ETSI standard.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 9

CLI Descriptions
Note: Configuring the telecom standard clears the startup configuration file
and causes a warm restart of the NE. Plug-in units not supporting the
configured telecom standard are set Out of Service.
Command Mode
Options
etsi Selects ETSI standard.
ansi Selects ANSI standard.
Examples
Selecting ETSI standard:
ML66(installation-mode)#telecom-standard etsi
10 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Basic and Navigation Commands
5 Basic and Navigation Commands
The following command modes are applicable for the basic and navigation
commands:
— Exec mode — >
— Privileged Exec mode — #
— Global Configuration mode — (config)
Table 4 Basic and Navigation Commands Overview

? display help
TAB complete commands and display help
cli compatibility switch to or from CLI compatibility mode
configure change to Global Configuration mode
disable exit from Privileged Exec mode to Exec mode
enable change to Privileged Exec mode from Exec
mode
in-service set physical unit to in service
ping ping an IP remote host
ping6 ping an IPv6 remote host
ssh initiate a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to a
remote host
telnet initiate a telnet connection to a remote host
traceroute verify IP routing
traceroute6 verify IPv6 routing
write confirm configuration changes that could
disturb traffic
5.1 ?
Synopsis
?
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 11

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display help for commands, options, and operands. Like
TAB, but unlike other commands, ? runs without pressing Enter.
Command Mode
All modes
Examples
Displaying help for all commands in a command mode:
ML66(config)#?
memory
snmp-server Configure SNMPv3
autobackup Enable automatic configure file backup
config-changed-timer Config changed event timer
sys_notes Config specific information related to site. Max →
allowed numbers of characters is 800
sfp SFP configuration
pm Configure PM data
controller Configure a specific controller
network-synch Configure network synch
ftp Configure FTP parameters
interface Configure interfaces
ip Configure IP settings
lan-dcn Configure LAN-DCN
rsyslog Configure remote syslog
rsyslog6 Configure remote syslog servers with IPv6 addres →
s
show Display status and configuration information
timezone Configure time zone
in-service Set the module inService
...
end Exit configuration mode
exit Exit configuration mode
Displaying all commands beginning with in in the current command mode:

ML66(config)#in?
interface Configure interfaces
in-service Set the module inService
Displaying help for all options that can follow the command interface:
ML66(config)#interface ?
ip Configure IP interface (defaults to LAN-DCN)
local-access Configure the Local Access (USB) interface
ethernet-eps Configure ethernet interface (EPS)
Displaying help for all options that can follow interface ip:
ML66(config)#interface ip ?
<IFNAME_RSP> Interface name (R/S/P)
<cr> Configure IP interface (defaults to LAN-DCN)
In the last example, <cr> means that interface ip does not necessarily need
further options and that it is possible to press Enter to run the command.
5.2 TAB
12 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
TAB
Description
Use the TAB key to complete a command, see CLI User Guide. It can also be used
just like the ? command to display help for commands, options, and operands.
Like the ? command, but unlike other commands, TAB runs without pressing
Enter.
Command Mode
All modes
See Also
?
5.3 cli compatibility
Synopsis
— cli compatibility { verbose | silent }
— no cli compatibility
Description
Use this command to change to or from CLI compatibility mode. In compatibility
mode unidentified parameters are ignored.
Use the no option to exit CLI compatibility mode.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
verbose Displays information on ignored parameters.
silent Suppress the output information.
Examples
Changing to CLI compatibility mode:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 13

CLI Descriptions
ML66>cli compatibility silent
5.4 configure
Synopsis
configure [terminal]
Description
Use this command to change to Global Configuration mode.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec mode — #
Examples
Changing to Global Configuration mode:
ML66#configure
ML66(config)#
5.5 disable
Synopsis
disable
Description
Use this command to exit from Privileged Exec mode to Exec mode.
Command Mode
Examples
Exiting from Privileged Exec mode:
ML66#disable
ML66>
14 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

5.6 enable
Synopsis
enable [user <USERNAME> ]
Description
Use this command to change to Privileged Exec mode from Exec mode.
Use this command without any parameter to authenticate as control_user. Use

this command with user <USERNAME> parameter to authenticate as a specified
user.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
USERNAME The name of the user.
Examples
Authenticating as admin_user:
ML66>enable user admin_user
5.7 in-service
Synopsis
[no] in-service <UNIT>
Description
Use this command to set the admin state of a unit to in service.
Use the no option to set the unit to out of service.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode — (config)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 15

CLI Descriptions
Operands
UNIT The physical unit to set to in service. The format of the

specified parameter is rack/slot/port.
Examples
Setting the admin state to in service for unit 1/6:
ML66(config)#in-service 1/6
5.8 ping
Synopsis
— ping [<IPADDR> [vrf <VRF>] [source <SOURCE>] [ttl <TTL>] [count

<COUNT>] [timeout <TIMEOUT>] [size <SIZE>] [df-set {no | yes}] [tos
<TOS>] [interval <INTERVAL>]]
— ping lan-dcn {<IPADDR> | <HOSTNAME>} [source {lan-dcn | local-

access | lo-dcn | <SOURCE>}] [ttl <TTL>] [count <COUNT>] [timeout
<TIMEOUT>] [size <SIZE>] [df-set {no | yes}] [interval <INTERVAL>]
Description
Use this command to ping an IP remote host on the LAN-DCN or the router
network. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets are sent to the other
host and the results are displayed.
Running the command without options opens an interactive ping session, where
all required parameters can be entered one by one. The ping is done on the router
network in this case. The command can be terminated by pressing the CTRL+C
key combination.
Note: Type of Service for LAN-DCN networks is controlled by the lan-dcn ip

dscp command.
The related commands are the following:
— lan-dcn ip dscp
— ping mpls
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
16 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
IPADDR IPv4 address, where the format is <A.B.C.D>.
VRF The name of the Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)

instance.
HOSTNAME The name of the host.
SOURCE The source IPv4 address, where the format is <A.B.C.D>.
TTL The Time To Live (TTL) value, which specifies the hop
limit of data in the network. The valid range is 1–255.
The default value is 64.
COUNT The count value, which specifies the number of echo

requests sent. The valid range is 1–65535. The default
value is 5.
TIMEOUT The timeout value which specifies the maximum interval

for each ping as waiting for answers in seconds. The valid
range is 1–2147 s.
SIZE The size of the packet. The valid range is 36–18024.
TOS Type of Service value. The valid range is 0–255.
INTERVAL The time interval between sending two packets in

seconds. The valid range is 1–1000 s.
Options
vrf Specifies the VRF instance.
lan-dcn Selects the LAN-DCN network to ping. Otherwise, the

router network is selected to ping.
source Specifies the source LAN-DCN interface or IP address

from which the requests are sent to the destination.
ttl Specifies the TTL value.
count Specifies the number of echo requests sent.
timeout Specifies the maximum interval for each ping as waiting

for answers.
size Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 17

CLI Descriptions
df-set Sets the “Don’t Fragment” (DF) bit in the IP header. The
valid operands are yes and no.
tos Set the Type of Service value.
interval Set the interval time in seconds.
Examples
Testing the IP connection to a remote host on the LAN-DCN network:
ML66>ping lan-dcn 192.168.1.1
PING 192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1): 56 octets data
64 octets from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=14.9 ms
--- 192.168.1.1 ping statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 14.3/14.4/14.9 ms
ML66#ping lan-dcn 172.31.28.238 ttl 34 source lan-dcn
Testing the IP connection to a remote host on the router network:

ML66#ping
Protocol [ip]: ip
Target IP address: 10.2.3.3
Name of the VRF :
Repeat count [5]: 3
Datagram size [100]: 100
Timeout in seconds [2]: 1
Extended commands [n]:
PING 10.2.3.3 (10.2.3.3) 100(128) bytes of data.
108 bytes from 10.2.3.3: icmp_req=1 ttl=64 time=1.18 ms
--- 10.2.3.3 ping statistics ---
3 packets transmitted, 3 received, 0% packet loss, time 2003ms
rtt min/avg/max/mdev = 0.857/1.027/1.186/0.139 ms
5.9 ping6
Synopsis
ping6 lan-dcn {<IPV6ADDR> | <HOSTNAME>} [source {lan-dcn | local-
access | lo-dcn | <SOURCE>}] [ttl <TTL>] [count <COUNT>] [timeout
<TIMEOUT>] [size <SIZE>] [interval <INTERVAL>]
Description
Use this command to ping an IPv6 remote host on the LAN-DCN network.
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) packets are sent to the other host,
and the results are displayed.
18 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: Type of Service for LAN-DCN networks is controlled by the lan-dcn

ipv6 dscp command.
— lan-dcn ipv6 dscp
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPV6ADDR IPv6 address, where the format is <X:X::X:X>.
SOURCE The source IPv6 address, where the format is <X:X::X:X>.
TTL The Time To Live (TTL) value, which specifies the hop
limit of data in the network. The valid range is 1–255.
COUNT The count value, which specifies the number of echo

requests sent. The valid range is 1–65535. The default
value is 5.
TIMEOUT The timeout value, which specifies the maximum interval

for each ping as waiting for answers in seconds. The valid
range is 1–2147 s.
SIZE The size of the packet. The valid range is 36–18024.
INTERVAL The time interval between sending two packets in

seconds. The valid range is 1–1000 s.
Options
lan-dcn Selects the LAN-DCN network to ping.
source Specifies the source LAN-DCN interface or IPv6 address

from which the requests are sent to the destination.
ttl Specifies the TTL value.
count Specifies the number of echo requests sent.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 19

CLI Descriptions
timeout Specifies the maximum interval for each ping as waiting

for answers.
size Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent.
interval Set the interval time in seconds.
Examples
Testing the IP connection to an IPv6 remote host:
ML66>ping6 lan-dcn 2001:1b70:8180:c001::1011
ML66>ping6 lan-dcn fe80::7c71:a7c4:d012:4acc ttl 34 source lan-dcn
5.10 ssh
Synopsis
— ssh [ -l <USERNAME> ] { <IPADDR> | <IP6ADDR> | <HOSTNAME> }
— ssh -d
— ssh cli@ { <IPADDR> | <IP6ADDR> }
— ssh -1 -c des cli@ { <IPADDR> | <IP6ADDR> }
Description
Use this command to establish a Secure Shell (SSH) session to another NE or to
get access to a shell on a remote server. To start a CLI session in local
authentication mode, the default user name is cli. To start a CLI session in
centralized authentication mode, enter your personal user ID and password.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
-d Deletes the locally saved host key. This action may be

necessary if a remote host changes its host key. Requires
Privileged Exec mode.
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of the remote host, where the format is
<A.B.C.D> .
20 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IP6ADDR The IPv6 address of the remote host, where the format is
<X:X::X:X> .
HOSTNAME The name of the remote host or alias name. The format of
the alias name is <ferlt-R-S-P>, where R-S-P is the Rack,
Slot, and Port value of the near end radio.
USERNAME The name of the user.
Examples
Establishing an SSH session to a remote host:
ML66#ssh -l operator1 192.168.1.1
% WARNING CLI idle timer stopped while in ssh session
Establishing an SSH session when DCN connection to the far end is down:
ML66#ssh -l cli ferlt-1-1-1
Deleting known_host for SSH:

ML66#ssh -l view_user 192.168.1.1
% WARNING CLI idle timer stopped while in ssh session
ML66-192-168-1-1>enable
Password: ********
ML66-192-168-1-1#ssh -d known_host
5.11 telnet
Synopsis
telnet { <IPADDR> | <IP6ADDR> | <HOSTNAME> }
Description
Use this command to establish a telnet session to another NE. Both IPv4 and
IPv6 host addresses are supported.
When DCN connection to the far end is down, enter an alias name as hostname,
then change the configuration of the far end to restore the DCN connection.
To start a CLI session in local authentication mode, the default user name is
view_user. To start a CLI session in centralized authentication mode, enter your
personal user ID and password.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 21

CLI Descriptions
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
IP6ADDR The IPv6 address, where the format is <X:X::X:X> .
HOSTNAME The name of the host or the alias name.
The format of the alias name is <ferlt-R-S-P>, where <R-

S-P> is the Rack, Slot, and Port values of the near end
radio.
Examples
Establishing a telnet session to a remote IPv4 host:
ML66#telnet 192.168.1.1
% WARNING CLI idle timer stopped while in telnet session
Trying 192.168.1.1...
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
Escape character is '^]'.
CLI interface:
Password:
Establishing a telnet session when DCN connection to the far end is down:
ML66#telnet ferlt-1-1-1
Establishing a telnet session to a remote IPv6 host:

ML66#telnet 2001::53
5.12 traceroute
Synopsis
— traceroute {<IPADDR> } [vrf <VRF> ]
— traceroute lan-dcn { <IPADDR> | <HOSTNAME> }
Description
Use this command to verify routing in an IP network. UDP/IP packets are sent to
the other host and, if the connection is successful, the IP systems visited on the
way are listed.
Running the command without options opens an interactive traceroute session,

where all required parameters can be entered one by one. The traceroute is done
on the router network in this case. The command can be terminated by pressing
the CTRL+C key combination.
22 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

During the interactive traceroute session, it is possible to specify the source IP

address.
— traceroute mpls
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .

instance.
Options
lan-dcn Selects the LAN-DCN network to route. Otherwise, the

router network is selected to route.
Examples
Verifying the IP route to a remote host on the LAN-DCN network:
ML66>traceroute lan-dcn 192.168.1.1
traceroute to 192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1), 30 hops max, 38 byte packets
1 192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1) 12.561 ms 12.417 ms 12.848 ms
Verifying the IP route to a remote host on the router network:

ML66#traceroute 10.41.97.24
1 10.41.97.24 (10.41.97.24) 1.355 ms 1.257 ms 1.270 ms
5.13 traceroute6
Synopsis
traceroute6 { <HOSTNAME> | <IP6ADDR> }
Description
Use this command to verify IPv6 routing to a remote host.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 23

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IP6ADDR The IPv6 address, where the format is <X:X::X:X> .
Examples
Verifying IPv6 routing:
ML66>traceroute6 fe80::7c71:a7c4:d012:4acc
5.14 write
Synopsis
write [ sf | all ]
Description
Use this command to confirm and write the configuration that could cause loss of
the Data Communication Network (DCN). Only the changed configuration files
are updated by default.
Note: If the configurations are not saved within 15 minutes, the NE makes a
warm restart, restoring the saved configurations, and the unconfirmed
changes are lost. For more information, see CLI User Guide.
Command Mode
Options
sf Saves the changed configuration as single-file.
all Forces to save all configuration files.
Examples
Confirming configuration changes:
ML66#write
24 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

See Also
show confirm timer
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 25

CLI Descriptions
6 User Access Commands
Table 5 User Access Commands Overview

investigation-mode enable additional troubleshooting
possibilities for Ericsson engineers
The related show commands are the following:
— show investigation-mode
For a detailed description of the show commands, see Show Commands on page
884.
6.1 investigation-mode
Synopsis
[no] investigation-mode
Description
Use this command to enable additional troubleshooting possibilities for Ericsson
engineers. By default, additional troubleshooting possibilities are disabled.
For enabling additional troubleshooting possibilities in installation mode, see

investigation-mode on page 7.
Use the no option to disable additional troubleshooting possibilities.
Note: After enabling or disabling this feature, File Integrity Violation alarm is
raised, if it was previously enabled. A warm restart clears the alarm.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode at admin level
Examples
Enabling additional troubleshooting possibilities in operational mode:
ML66(config)#investigation-mode
26 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
7 Firewall Commands
The following command mode is applicable for the firewall commands:
— Global Configuration mode, at admin level — (config)
Table 6 Firewall Commands Overview

clear iptables clear the IPv4 firewall
clear ip6tables clear the IPv6 firewall
close ip close a firewall port using an IPv4
service
close6 ip close a firewall port using an IPv6
service
close msm close the <3002-3021> port range
close netman close the <4002-4021> port range
close ping disable the incoming IPv4 ping
requests
close6 ping disable the incoming IPv6 ping
requests
close PORT close a TCP or a UDP port for nodes
with IPv4 support
close6 PORT close a TCP or a UDP port for nodes
with IPv6 support
close syn_cookies disable SYN cookies for nodes with
IPv4 support
open ip open a firewall port using an IPv4
service
open6 ip open a firewall port using an IPv6
service
open msm open the <3002-3021> port range
open netman open the <4002-4021> port range
open ping enable the incoming IPv4 ping
requests
open6 ping enable the incoming IPv6 ping
requests
open PORT open a TCP or a UDP port for nodes
with IPv4 support
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 27

CLI Descriptions
open6 PORT open a TCP or a UDP port for nodes

with IPv6 support
open syn_cookies enable SYN cookies for nodes with
IPv4 support
— show iptables
— show ip6tables
884.
7.1 clear iptables
Synopsis
clear iptables config
Description
Use this command to clear the IPv4 firewall by removing all user-defined rules.
Command Mode
Global Configuration mode, at admin level — (config)
Examples
Removing all IPv4 firewall user-defined rules:
ML66(config)#clear iptables config
7.2 clear ip6tables
Synopsis
clear ip6tables config
Description
Use this command to clear the IPv6 firewall by removing all user-defined rules.
28 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
Command Mode
Examples
Removing all IPv6 firewall user-defined rules:
ML66(config)#clear ip6tables config
7.3 close ip
Synopsis
[no] close ip <SERVICE> [<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use this command to close a firewall port using an IPv4 service.
Use the no option to remove the firewall rule.
Note: Only admin_user can enable or disable ports.
The following ports can be closed only with the close ip <SERVICE> command:
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
Command Mode
Operands
SERVICE The type of the protocol. The available types are the
following:
— ssh
— telnet
— snmp
— snmptrap
IPADDR The IP address of the source host, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 29

CLI Descriptions
IPADDR/PREFIX The IP address and prefix length of the source network.

Specified in decimal notation <A.B.C.D/P> , for example,
1.2.3.4/24.
Examples
Closing an SSH service for 192.168.2.0/24 IPv4 subnetwork:
ML66(config)#close ip ssh 192.168.2.0/24
7.4 close6 ip
Synopsis
[no] close6 ip <SERVICE> [<IP6ADDR> | <IP6ADDR/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use this command to close a firewall port using an IPv6 service.
The following ports can be closed only with close6 ip <SERVICE> command:
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
Command Mode
Operands
following:
— ssh
— telnet
— snmp
— snmptrap
IP6ADDR The IPv6 address of the source host. Specified in

<X:X::X:X> format, for example, 2005::31.
30 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
IP6ADDR/PREFIX
The IPv6 address and prefix length of the source
network. Specified in <X:X::X:X/P> format, for example,
2005::/127.
Examples
Closing an SSH service for IPv6 host 2001:db8::1:
ML66(config)#close6 ip ssh 2001:db8::1
7.5 close msm
Synopsis
[no] close msm
Description
Use this command to close the <3002-3021> port range for MINI-LINK Service
Manager (MSM) system, which is a legacy management SW. By default, the port
range is closed.
Command Mode
Examples
Closing the <3002-3021> port range:
ML66(config)#close msm
7.6 close netman
Synopsis
[no] close netman
Description
Use this command to close the <4002-4021> port range for Network Manager
(Netman) system, which is a legacy management SW. By default, the port range
is closed.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 31

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Closing the <4002-4021> port range:
ML66(config)#close netman
7.7 close ping
Synopsis
[no] close ping
Description
Use this command to disable the incoming IPv4 ping requests.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling the incoming IPv4 ping requests:
ML66(config)#close ping
7.8 close6 ping
Synopsis
[no] close6 ping
Description
Use this command to disable the incoming IPv6 ping requests.
32 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling the incoming IPv6 ping requests:
ML66(config)#close6 ping
7.9 close PORT
Synopsis
[no] close { tcp | udp } <PORT> [<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use this command to close a TCP or a UDP port for nodes with IPv4 support.
The following ports cannot be closed with close { tcp | udp } command:
— Port 0
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
— Ports above 1023
To close these ports, see close ip command.
Command Mode
Operands
PORT The number of the port or a range of ports in port:port

format.

<A.B.C.D> .

1.2.3.4/24.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 33

CLI Descriptions
Options
tcp Selects a TCP port to close.
udp Selects a UDP port to close.
Examples
Closing TCP port 21 for 192.168.2.0/24 IPv4 subnetwork:
ML66(config)#close tcp 21 192.168.2.0/24
7.10 close6 PORT
Synopsis
[no] close6 { tcp | udp } <PORT> [<IP6ADDR> | <IP6ADDR/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use this command to close a TCP or a UDP port for nodes with IPv6 support.
The following ports cannot be closed with close6 { tcp | udp } command:
— Port 0
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
To close these ports, see close6 ip command.
Command Mode
Operands

format.

IP6ADDR/PREFIX
34 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands

2005::/127.
Options
tcp Selects a TCP port to close.
udp Selects a UDP port to close.
Examples
Closing TCP port 21 for IPv6 host 2005::31:
ML66(config)#close6 tcp 21 2005::31
7.11 close syn_cookies
Synopsis
[no] close syn_cookies
Description
Use this command to disable SYN cookies for nodes with IPv4 support.
Use the no option to remove the disable rule for SYN cookies.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling SYN cookies for a node with IPv4 support:
ML66(config)#close syn_cookies
7.12 open ip
Synopsis
[no] open ip <SERVICE> [<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 35

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to open a firewall port using an IPv4 service.
The following ports can be opened only with the open ip <SERVICE> command:
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
Command Mode
Operands
following:
— ssh
— telnet
— snmp
— snmptrap

<A.B.C.D> .

1.2.3.4/24.
Examples
Opening an SSH service for 192.168.2.0/24 IPv4 subnetwork:
ML66(config)#open ip ssh 192.168.2.0/24
7.13 open6 ip
Synopsis
[no] open6 ip <SERVICE> [<IP6ADDR> | <IP6ADDR/PREFIX> ]
36 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
Description
Use this command to open a firewall port using an IPv6 service.
The following ports can be opened only with open6 ip <SERVICE> command:
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
Command Mode
Operands
following:
— ssh
— telnet
— snmp
— snmptrap

IP6ADDR/PREFIX
2005::/127.
Examples
Opening an SSH service for IPv6 host 2001:db8::1:
ML66(config)#open6 ip ssh 2001:db8::1
7.14 open msm
Synopsis
[no] open msm
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 37

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to open the <3002-3021> port range for MINI-LINK Service
Manager (MSM) system, which is a legacy management SW. By default, the port
range is closed.
Command Mode
Examples
Opening the <3002-3021> port range:
ML66(config)#open msm
7.15 open netman
Synopsis
[no] open netman
Description
Use this command to open the <4002-4021> port range for Network Manager
(Netman) system, which is a legacy management SW. By default, the port range
is closed.
Command Mode
Examples
Opening the <4002-4021> port range:
ML66(config)#open netman
7.16 open ping
Synopsis
[no] open ping
38 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
Description
Use this command to enable the incoming IPv4 ping requests.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the incoming IPv4 ping requests:
ML66(config)#open ping
7.17 open6 ping
Synopsis
[no] open6 ping
Description
Use this command to enable the incoming IPv6 ping requests.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the incoming IPv6 ping requests:
ML66(config)#open6 ping
7.18 open PORT
Synopsis
[no] open { tcp | udp } <PORT> [<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 39

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to open a TCP or a UDP port for nodes with IPv4 support.
The following ports cannot be opened with open { tcp | udp } command:
— Port 0
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
To open these ports, see open ip command.
Command Mode
Operands

format.

<A.B.C.D> .

1.2.3.4/24.
Options
tcp Selects a TCP port to open.
udp Selects a UDP port to open.
Examples
Opening TCP port 21 for 192.168.2.0/24 IPv4 subnetwork:
ML66(config)#open tcp 21 192.168.2.0/24
7.19 open6 PORT
Synopsis
[no] open6 { tcp | udp } <PORT> [<IP6ADDR> | <IP6ADDR/PREFIX> ]
40 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Firewall Commands
Description
Use this command to open a TCP or a UDP port for nodes with IPv6 support.
The following ports cannot be opened with open6 { tcp | udp } command:
— Port 0
— Port 22, 23, 161, and 162
To open these ports, see open6 ip command.
Command Mode
Operands

format.

IP6ADDR/PREFIX
2005::/127.
Options
tcp Selects a TCP port to open.
udp Selects a UDP port to open.
Examples
Opening TCP port 21 for IPv6 host 2005::31:
ML66(config)#open6 tcp 21 2005::31
7.20 open syn_cookies
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 41

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
[no] open syn_cookies
Description
Use this command to enable SYN cookies for nodes with IPv4 support.
Use the no option to remove the enable rule for SYN cookies.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling SYN cookies for a node with IPv4 support:
ML66(config)#open syn_cookies
42 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
8 Security Commands
The following command modes are applicable for the security commands:
Table 7 Security Commands Overview

aaa accounting network default group enable and configure session
accounting
aaa authentication login set authentication mode
ftp active ntp-key-server set the active FTP server for NTP key
file download
ntp get-ntp-key trigger the download of the ntp.keys
file from the selected FTP server
ntp set-ntp-protocol set the NTP protocol
passwd change password for a selected user
radius-server create a Remote Authentication Dial
In User Service (RADIUS) server
restart perform an Application Plug-In Unit
(APU) or a Network Element (NE)
restart
secure-ssh disable the use of weak SSH
encryption algorithms
set_radius_address_Type set the IP protocol type of the RADIUS
address
set_tacacs_address_Type set the IP protocol type of the
Terminal Access Controller Access
Control System Plus (TACACS+)
address
setbruteforcethreshold set the maximum allowed number of
authentication login errors
setcliprotocol apply CLI protocol change between
Telnet and SSH
setenablelocalusers enable or disable local users
(admin_user, view_user, control_user,
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 43

CLI Descriptions
and oper_user) when centralized

authentication (RADIUS or TACACS+)
is configured
setlegalnotice add or modify a legal notice
setlocaluseridletimer set the inactivity timer for local users
setsecureprotocols set secure level
setsnmpv3authprotocol set the SNMPv3 authentication
protocol
setsnmpv3privprotocol (1) set the SNMPv3 privacy protocol
setsnmpv3protocol set SNMPv3 with data encryption
setstrongpasswd set strong password enforcement
set-file-integrity-alarm enable or disable file integrity
monitoring function
set ssh_keys generate SSH keys
snmp-server access configure a Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) access
group
snmp-server community permit access to the SNMP protocol
snmp-server trap configure SNMP trap destination and
trap parameters
tacacs-server create a TACACS+ server
(1) If data encryption is set to noPriv, privacy protocol cannot be set.
— show aaa accounting network default group
— show aaaPolicyStatus
— show enableLocalUsers
— show file-integrity-alarm
— show legalnotice
— show localuseridletimer
— show ntp-status
— show radius_address_Type
— show radius-server config
— show radius-server statistics
44 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
— show radius-server status
— show secure-ssh
— show strongpasswd
— show snmpv3authprotocol
— show snmpv3privprotocol
— show snmpv3protocol
— show tacacs_address_Type
— show tacacs-server config
— show tacacs-server statistics
— show tacacs-server status
— show temp
— show x
884.
8.1 aaa accounting network
Synopsis
— aaa accounting network default {start-stop | stop-only} group

{tacacs+ | radius}
— no aaa accounting network default group
Description
Use this command to enable and configure session accounting for the NE.
Use the no option to disable session accounting for the NE.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 45

CLI Descriptions
Options
start-stop Enables session accounting of the starting and ending of

management sessions.
stop-only Enables session accounting of the ending of management

sessions only.
group Configures AAA Policy type.
tacacs+ Configures the AAA Policy type to Terminal Access

Controller Access-Control System Plus (TACACS+).
radius Configures the AAA Policy type to Remote Authentication

Dial In User Service (RADIUS).
Examples
Setting accounting mode to TACACS+ with session accounting of start and stop
of management sessions:
ML66(config)#aaa accounting network default start-stop group tacacs+
8.2 aaa authentication login
Synopsis
aaa authentication login [ local | radius | tacacs+ ]
Description
Use this command to set authentication mode.
Command Mode
Options
local Sets authentication mode to local.
tacacs Sets authentication mode to Terminal Access Controller

Access-Control System Plus (TACACS+).
radius Sets authentication mode to Remote Authentication Dial

In User Service (RADIUS).
46 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
Examples
Setting authentication mode to RADIUS:
ML66#aaa authentication login radius
8.3 ftp active ntp-key-server
Synopsis
ftp active ntp-key-server <FTPSERVERNAME>
Description
Use this command to set the active FTP server for NTP key file download.
Command Mode
Operands
FTPSERVERNAME
The name of the FTP server, which is used for NTP key file
download.
Examples
Setting the active FTP server for NTP key file download:
ML66(config)#ftp active ntp-key-server ftpserver
8.4 ntp get-ntp-key
Synopsis
ntp get-ntp-key
Description
Use this command to trigger the download of the ntp.keys file from the selected
FTP server.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 47

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Triggering the download of the ntp.keys file from the selected FTP server:
ML66(config)#ntp get-ntp-key
8.5 ntp set-ntp-protocol
Synopsis
ntp set-ntp-protocol { noauth | v4auth }
Description
Use this command to set the NTP protocol. The default value is no
authentication.
Command Mode
Options
noauth Sets no authentication.
v4auth Sets the NTP protocol to secure authentication (v4).
Examples
Setting no authentication:
ML66(config)#ntp set-ntp-protocol noauth
8.6 passwd
Synopsis
passwd {admin_user | view_user | oper_user | control_user}
Description
Use this command to allow the admin_user to change password for admin_user,
control_user, oper_user, and view_user accounts.
48 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
Note: Only admin_user is allowed to change password.
The length of the new password must be at least 12 characters and

must contain at least three of the following categories:
— Lowercase letters
— Uppercase letters
— Numbers
— Special characters
Command Mode
Options
admin_user Sets the password for the admin_user.
control_user Sets the password for the control_user.
oper_user Sets the password for the oper_user.
view_user Sets the password for the view_user.
Examples
Changing password for oper_user:
ML66(config)#passwd oper_user
New user password: ************
Confirm new password: ************
8.7 radius-server
Synopsis
— radius-server ipaddress <IPADDRESS> key <KEY> port <PORT>

enable {false | true} priority <PRIORITY> deadtime <DEADTIME>
maxretries <MAXRETRIES> timeout <TIMEOUT> acct-port
<ACCTPORT>
— no radius-server ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to create a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
(RADIUS) server.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 49

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to delete a RADIUS server.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDRESS The IP address in <A.B.C.D> format.
KEY The authentication key value. The length of the string

must be between 1 and 64 characters.
PORT The port number. The valid range is 1–65535.
PRIORITY The priority of the server. The valid range is 1–6.
DEADTIME The dead time value in minutes. The valid range is 0–

1440 in minutes.
MAXRETRIES The maximum retry count value. The valid range is 0–3.
TIMEOUT The time out period in seconds. The valid range is 1–10.
ACCTPORT The port number for session accounting packets. The

default value is UDP port 1813.
Options
ipaddress Specifies the IP address.
key Specifies the authentication key.
port Specifies the port number.
enable false Disables the NE to contact the RADIUS server.
enable true Enables the NE to contact the RADIUS server.
priority Specifies the priority of the server.
deadtime Specifies the dead time.
maxretries Specifies the maximum retry count.
timeout Specifies the time out period.
50 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
acct-port Specifies the port number for session accounting packets.
Examples
Creating a RADIUS server:
ML66(config)#radius-server ipaddress 10.58.28.225 key 4d6d8d6d4bcd6d8d2d //
port 1812 enable true priority 1 deadtime 5 maxretries 3 timeout 5 acct-port 1813
8.8 restart
Synopsis
restart {apu_cold <R/S> | node_cold | node_warm}
Description
Use this command to perform an Application Plug-In Unit (APU) cold restart or a
Network Element (NE) restart, which can be either a cold or a warm restart.
Attention!
A cold restart disturbs the traffic.
Attention!
During a warm restart on NPU 1003 the traffic forwarding is still in operation but active
Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols (for example SOAM, xSTP, ERP, 1588, OSPF, BGP) are
impacted which might result in traffic disturbance.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S The rack and slot value of the selected APU where the
format is Rack/Slot.
Options
apu_cold Performs an APU cold restart.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 51

CLI Descriptions
node_cold Performs an NE cold restart.
node_warm Performs an NE warm restart.
Examples
Performing an NE warm restart:
ML66#restart node_warm
8.9 secure-ssh
Synopsis
— secure-ssh enable
— no secure-ssh
Description
Use this command to disable the use of weak SSH encryption algorithms.
The supported secure algorithms are the following:
— aes256-ctr
— aes192-ctr
— aes128-ctr
— arcfour256
— arcfour128
— arcfour
Use the no option to enable the use of weak SSH encryption algorithms.
Note: After executing this command, the SSH server is restarted and the
connection with the server may be lost.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling the use of weak SSH encryption algorithms:
52 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
ML66(config)#secure-ssh enable
Enabling the use of weak SSH encryption algorithms:

ML66(config)#no secure-ssh
8.10 set_radius_address_Type
Synopsis
set_radius_address_Type <TYPE>
Description
Use this command to set the IP protocol type of the Remote Authentication Dial
In User Service (RADIUS) address.
Command Mode
Operands
TYPE 1 — Set the IP protocol to IPv4.
2 — Set the IP protocol to IPv6.
Examples
Setting the IP protocol type of the RADIUS address to IPv4:
ML66(config)#set_radius_address_Type 1
8.11 set_tacacs_address_Type
Synopsis
set_tacacs_address_Type <TYPE>
Description
Use this command to set the IP protocol type of the Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) address.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 53

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
TYPE 1 — Set the IP protocol to IPv4.
2 — Set the IP protocol to IPv6.
Examples
Setting the IP protocol type of the TACACS+ address to IPv4:
ML66(config)#set_tacacs_address_Type 1
8.12 setbruteforcethreshold
Synopsis
setbruteforcethreshold <THRESHOLD>
Description
Use this command to set the maximum allowed number of authentication login
errors before the NE is considered to be under brute force attack.
Set the <THRESHOLD> value to 0 to disable the protection against brute force
attack.
Command Mode
Operands
THRESHOLD The maximum allowed number of authentication login

errors.
0 value disables the protection against brute force attack.
Examples
Setting the maximum allowed number of authentication login errors to 5:
ML66#setbruteforcethreshold 5
Disabling the protection against brute force attack:
54 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
ML66#setbruteforcethreshold 0
8.13 setcliprotocol
Synopsis
setcliprotocol { telnet | ssh }
Description
Use this command to apply CLI protocol change between Telnet and Secure Shell
(SSH). For information regarding the behavior of the NE when changing CLI
protocol, see CLI User Guide.
Command Mode
Options
telnet Set the CLI protocol to Telnet.
ssh Set the CLI protocol to SSH.
Examples
Setting the CLI protocol to Telnet:
ML66(config)#setcliprotocol telnet
8.14 setenablelocalusers
Synopsis
setenablelocalusers { 1 | 2 }
Description
Use this command to enable or disable local users (admin_user, view_user,
control_user, and oper_user) when centralized authentication (RADIUS or
TACACS+) is configured.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 55

CLI Descriptions
Options
1 Enables local users (admin_user, view_user, control_user,

and oper_user) when centralized authentication is
configured.
2 Disables local users (admin_user, view_user, control_user,

and oper_user) when centralized authentication is
configured.
Examples
Disabling local users (admin_user, view_user, control_user, and oper_user) when
centralized authentication is configured:
ML66(config)#setenablelocalusers 2
8.15 setlegalnotice
Synopsis
setlegalnotice <NOTICE>
Description
Use this command to add or modify a legal notice.
Use the show legalnotice command to display the added information.
Command Mode
Operands
NOTICE The customized legal notice. The maximum length of the

string is 512 characters.
Examples
Adding a legal notice:
ML66(config)#setlegalnotice "This is a customized legal notice for the node."
8.16 setlocaluseridletimer
56 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
Synopsis
setlocaluseridletimer <IDLE>
Description
Use this command to set the inactivity timer in minutes for the local users.
Command Mode
Operands
IDLE The inactivity timer value in minutes. The valid range is

0–30. The default value is 15 minutes.
When the operand is set to 0 the inactivity timer is

disabled.
Note: For centralized users, the <IDLE> operand is

provided by the remote server, which is used for
authentication.
Examples
Setting the inactivity timer for the local users to 15 minutes:
ML66(config)#setlocaluseridletimer 15
8.17 setsecureprotocols
Synopsis
setsecureprotocols {enabled | disabled}
Description
Use setsecureprotocols enabled command to set the most secure level for all
protocols (Secure Shell (SSH) and Simple Network Management Protocol version
3 (SNMPv3) with privacy) automatically at the same time.
Use setsecureprotocols disabled command to set the secure level for each
protocol (SSH and SNMPv3 with privacy), using the setcliprotocol and
setsnmpv3protocol commands respectively.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 57

CLI Descriptions
Note: — Executing setsecureprotocols enabled command causes a

warm restart of the node.
— Executing setsecureprotocols disabled command does not

cause a warm restart of the node.
Command Mode
Options
enabled Set the most secure level for all protocols.
disabled Set the secure level for each protocol.
Examples
Setting the most secure level for all protocols:
ML66(config)#setsecureprotocols enabled
8.18 setsnmpv3authprotocol
Synopsis
setsnmpv3authprotocol {md5 | sha1 | sha2}
Description
Use this command to set the Simple Network Management Protocol version 3
(SNMPv3) authentication protocol.
Note: Set data encryption to either noPriv or desPriv using

setsnmpv3protocol command.
Command Mode
Options
md5 Sets MD5 authentication protocol.
sha1 Sets SHA-1 authentication protocol.
sha2 Sets SHA-2 authentication protocol.
58 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
Examples
Setting the SNMPv3 authentication protocol to SHA-1:
ML66(config)#setsnmpv3authprotocol sha1
8.19 setsnmpv3privprotocol
Synopsis
setsnmpv3privprotocol {des | aes128 | aes256}
Description
Use this command to set the Simple Network Management Protocol version 3
(SNMPv3) privacy protocol.
Note: Set data encryption to desPriv using setsnmpv3protocol command. If

data encryption is set to noPriv, privacy protocol cannot be set.
Command Mode
Options
des Sets DES privacy protocol.
aes128 Sets AES-128 privacy protocol.
aes256 Sets AES-256 privacy protocol. Available only if the

authentication protocol is sha2.
Examples
Setting the SNMPv3 privacy protocol to AES-128:
ML66(config)#setsnmpv3privprotocol aes128
8.20 setsnmpv3protocol
Synopsis
setsnmpv3protocol {noPriv | desPriv}
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 59

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set Simple Network Management Protocol version 3
(SNMPv3) with data encryption.
Note: Executing the command causes a warm restart of the node.
Command Mode
Options
noPriv Sets no data encryption.
desPriv Sets data encryption.
Examples
Setting SNMPv3 with data encryption:
ML66(config)#setsnmpv3protocol desPriv
8.21 setstrongpasswd
Synopsis
setstrongpasswd { enabled | disabled }
Description
Use this command to set strong password enforcement. The default value is
enabled.
Note: Only available for admin_user.
Command Mode
Options
Enabled Sets strong password enforced.
Disabled Sets strong password not enforced.
60 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
Examples
Setting enforced:
ML66(config)#setstrongpasswd enabled
8.22 set-file-integrity-alarm
Synopsis
set-file-integrity-alarm { on | off }
Description
Use this command to enable or disable file integrity monitoring function.
Command Mode
Options
on Enables file integrity monitoring function.
off Disables file integrity monitoring function.
Examples
Enabling file integrity monitoring function:
ML66(config)#set-file-integrity-alarm on
8.23 set ssh_keys
Synopsis
set ssh_keys
Description
Use this command to generate new SSH keys. Two pairs of SSH keys are
generated, one pair with RSA algorithm and 2028 bit length, and another pair
with DSA algorithm and 1024 bits length.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 61

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Privileged Exec mode, at admin level
Examples
Generating an SSH key:
ML66#set ssh_keys
8.24 snmp-server access
Synopsis
snmp-server access <ACCESS>
Use the following synopsis for ACCESS:
ACCESS { <GRP> <PRE> <MATCH> <MODEL> <LVL> <R> <W>

<N> <STAT> <STORAGE> }
Description
Use this command to configure a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
access group.
Command Mode
Operands
GRP The name of the access group.
PRE The prefix value of the access group.
MATCH The match value of the access group.
MODEL The model value of the access group.
LVL The level of the access group.
R Sets read permission for the access group.
W Sets write permission for the access group.
N Sets notification permission for the access group.
62 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
STAT The status value of the access group.
STORAGE The storage value of the access group.
Examples
Configuring SNMP access group:
ML66(config)#snmp-server access "writeGroup" 0 1 0 1 "completeView1" //
"completeView1" "0" 1 3
8.25 snmp-server community
Synopsis
snmp-server community <STRING>
Use the following synopsis for STRING:
STRING { <INDEX> <COMNAME> <SECNAME> <TRTAG>

<STORAGE> <STAT> }
Description
Use this command to permit access to the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).
Command Mode
Operands
INDEX The community index.
COMNAME The community name.
SECNAME The community security name.
TRTAG The community transport tag.
STORAGE The community storage.
STAT The community status.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 63

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Permitting access to the SNMP protocol:
ML66(config)#snmp-server community "index3" "YTFC45ff" //
"ext_priv" "external" 3 1
8.26 snmp-server trap
Synopsis
snmp-server { targetaddr <ADDR> | targetparams <PARAMS> | targetext
<EXT> }
Use the following synopsis for the filters:
ADDR { <NAME> <TD> <TA> <TIMEOUT> <RET> <TLIST>

<PAR> <STAT> <STORAGE> }
PARAMS { <NAME> <MP> <SECM> <SECN> <SECL> <STAT>

<STORAGE> }
EXT { <NAME> <MASK> <MMS> }
Description
Use this command to configure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
trap destination and trap parameters.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME Specifies the identifier of the table.
TD Specifies the transport domain of the address. The

allowed values are the following:
— UDP Domain — 1.3.6.1.6.1.1
— Transport Domain UDP IPv4 —

1.3.6.1.2.1.100.1.1
— Transport Domain UDP IPv6 —

1.3.6.1.2.1.100.1.2
64 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
— TCP — 1.3.6.1.4.1.1977.200.1
— TCP persistent — 1.3.6.1.4.1.1977.200.2
TA Specifies the target address. The target address must be

consistent with the transport domain address.
TIMEOUT Sets a timeout value. The agent waits this amount of time
for a response before attempting again.
RET Sets the number of times that the agent resends the
message.
TLIST Provides the correlation between address and notify

tables.
PAR Indexes the row in the parameter table.
STAT Controls row creation and deletion.
STORAGE Specifies how to store the row.
MP Specifies the message processing model.
SECM Specifies the security model.
SECN Specifies the security name.
SECL Specifies the security level.
MASK Specifies the mask address in hexadecimal format.
MMS Specifies the maximum message size.
Options
targetaddr Configures SNMP trap destination.
targetparams Configures SNMP trap parameters.
targetext Configures SNMP extension table.
Examples
Configuring SNMP IPv4 trap destination:
ML66(config)#snmp-server targetaddr Mgr1 1.3.6.1.2.1.100.1.1 //
10.20.30.40:162 1500 3 trap Param1 1 3
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 65

CLI Descriptions
Configuring SNMP IPv6 trap destination:

ML66(config)#snmp-server targetaddr Mgr1 1.3.6.1.2.1.100.1.2 //
2010::4@162 1500 3 trap Param1 1 3
Configuring SNMP trap parameters:

ML66(config)#snmp-server targetparams Param1 1 2 ext_trap 1 1 3
Configuring SNMP extension table:

ML66(config)#snmp-server targetext Mgr1 000000000000 484
8.27 tacacs-server
Synopsis
— tacacs-server ipaddress <IPADDRESS> key <KEY> port <PORT>

enable {false | true} priority <PRIORITY> deadtime <DEADTIME>
maxretries <MAXRETRIES> timeout <TIMEOUT> acct-port
<ACCTPORT>
— no tacacs-server ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to create a Terminal Access Controller Access Control System
Plus (TACACS+) server.
Use the no option to delete a TACACS+ server.
Command Mode
Operands
KEY The authentication key. The valid range is 1–128.
PORT The port number. The valid range is 1–65535.
PRIORITY The priority of the server. The valid range is 1–6.
DEADTIME The dead time value in minutes. The valid range is 0–

1440 in minutes.
MAXRETRIES The maximum retry count value. The valid range is 0–3.
66 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Commands
TIMEOUT The time out period in seconds. The valid range is 1–15.
ACCTPORT The port number for session accounting packets. The

default value is TCP port 49.
Options
key Specifies the authentication key.
port Specifies the port number.
enable false Disables the NE to contact the TACACS+ server.
enable true Enables the NE to contact the TACACS+ server.
priority Specifies the priority of the server.
deadtime Specifies the dead time.
maxretries Specifies the maximum retry count.
timeout Specifies the time out period.
acct-port Specifies the port number for session accounting packets.
Examples
Creating a TACACS+ server:
ML66(config)#tacacs-server ipaddress 10.58.28.225 key 4d6d8d6d4bcd6d8d2d //
port 49 enable true priority 1 deadtime 5 maxretries 3 timeout 5 acct-port 49
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 67

CLI Descriptions
9 Software, Configuration, and Log File

Handling Commands
The following command modes are applicable for the software-configuration

and log file handling commands:
— Exec mode — >
Table 8 Software, Configuration, and Log File Handling Commands Overview

activate activate the downloaded software in the
passive bank
autobackup enable or disable automatic backup
copy copy load modules and SBLs
erase startup-config erase the startup configuration file
ftp active associate a defined FTP server with a service
ftp activeftp set the FTP server to be used as default
ftp server define an FTP server in NE list of FTP servers
reload restart on selected configuration
— show config-validation-info
— show copy
— show ftp active
— show ftp activeftp
— show ftp configtable
884.
9.1 activate
68 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Software, Configuration, and Log File Handling Commands
Synopsis
activate
Description
Use this command to activate the downloaded software in the passive bank. To
download the software to the passive bank, use the copy command.
Note: After executing the activate command, the NE is restarted and the
current session is closed.
Command Mode
Examples
Activating software:
ML66#activate
9.2 autobackup
Synopsis
[no] autobackup
Description
Use this command to enable FTP active autobackup-configuration.
Use the no option to disable the automatic backup.
Note: The autobackup files are named as ML66<ip_address>_.cfg. For

example, ML6610-41-104-230_.cfg.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling autobackup-configuration:
ML66(config)#autobackup
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 69

CLI Descriptions
9.3 copy
Synopsis
copy { ftp {<FTPNAME> | filename} <FILEPATH> flash [nowait] | abort |
persistency }
Description
Use this command to copy load modules and SBLs from an FTP server to the
node. To copy configuration files, see copy on page 5.
Command Mode
Operands
FTPNAME The name of the FTP server configuration to get the file
from.
FILEPATH The path to the file on the FTP to copy.
Options
ftp Copies a file from an FTP server given by the

<FTPNAME> operand.
filename Copies a file from the FTP server set as active FTP for
software upgrade.
flash Copies a file to the passive bank.
nowait Returns immediately for some of the commands while the

copy operation is still ongoing.
abort Cancels ongoing copy operations.
persistency Copies persistency files.
Examples
Copying software modules:
ML66#copy ftp remotehost /tn_system_release/ml_tn_software/CXP9036600_1/CXP9036600 →
_1_MINI-LINK_6600_6366_1.3_R4A190 flash
70 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

9.4 erase startup-config
Synopsis
erase startup-config
Description
Use this command to erase the startup configuration file.
Use this command also to return to factory settings.
Command Mode
Examples
Erasing the startup configuration file:
ML66#erase startup-config
9.5 ftp active
Synopsis
— ftp active { audit-log | autobackup-configuration | backup-

configuration | configuration-report | diagnostic-logs | dir-list |
error-log | fint-upload-report | fint-view-report | license-install
| license-report | ne-pm | ntp-key-server | soam-pm | software-
upgrade } <FTPSERVERNAME>
— no ftp active { audit-log | autobackup-configuration | backup-

configuration | configuration-report | diagnostic-logs | dir-list |
error-log | fint-upload-report | fint-view-report | license-install
| license-report | ne-pm | ntp-key-server | soam-pm | software-
upgrade }
Description
Use this command to associate a defined FTP server with a service.
Use the no option to reset to the default setting. The default FTP server is set by
the ftp activeftp command.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 71

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
FTPSERVERNAME
The name of the FTP in the FTP server table.
Options
audit-log Sets active FTP for upload of the audit log.
autobackup-configuration
Sets active FTP used for automatic configuration backup.
backup-configuration
Sets active FTP for upload and download of configuration
files.
configuration-report
Sets active FTP for configuration report.
diagnostic-logs Sets active FTP for uploading node log files.
dir-list Sets active FTP used for listing directories in Simple

Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
error-log Sets active FTP for uploading the error log.
fint-upload-report
Sets active FTP server to upload the file integrity report.
fint-view-report
Sets active FTP server to view the file integrity report.
license-install Sets active FTP for license file installation.
license-report Sets active FTP for license report.
ne-pm Sets active FTP used for PM xml data.
ntp-key-server Sets active FTP for downloading a Network Time

Protocol (NTP) key file.
soam-pm Sets active FTP used for Service OAM PM xml data.
software-upgrade
72 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Sets active FTP for software upgrade.
Examples
Selecting FTP server named localhost for license file installation:
ML66(config)#ftp active license-install localhost
9.6 ftp activeftp
Synopsis
— ftp activeftp <FTPSERVERNAME>
— no ftp activeftp
Description
Use this command to set the FTP server to be used as default. This command
also sets all services to use this default FTP server, see ftp active .
Use the no option to reset to the default FTP server.
Command Mode
Operands
FTPSERVERNAME
The name of the FTP in the FTP server table.
Examples
Setting FTP server named localhost for all services:
ML66(config)#ftp activeftp localhost
9.7 ftp server
Synopsis
— ftp server name <NAME> address <ADDRESS> {user <USER> [password

<PASS> ]} [port <PORT> ] [servertype <PROTOCOL> ] [reserved
<USERGROUP> ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 73

CLI Descriptions
— no ftp server name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to define an FTP server in NE list of FTP servers.
Note: The command does not check if the host IP address exists or not.
Use the no option to remove an FTP definition. Any service associated with this
FTP server is changed to use the default FTP server set by the ftp activeftp
command.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The identifier of the selected FTP setting.
ADDRESS IP address or host name of the destination FTP server.

Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses can be used.
PORT Destination TCP port on the server.
Note: — Default value is 21.
— The ports of local and remote servers cannot

be changed immediately.
— The port value is aligned with the given

protocol as follows:
• 21 for FTP
• 22 for SFTP
USER FTP login name.
Default value is anonymous.
PASS FTP login password in unencrypted format.
PROTOCOL The type of the server. It can be either FTP or Secure FTP
(SFTP).
74 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: — Default protocol is FTP.
— The protocol type is automatically aligned

with the port value if the protocol type is not
given.
USERGROUP The user group having exclusive authority to configure

the selected FTP server. The only available user is
admin_user and the operand must be set to ADMIN.
Options
name Specifies the unique name of the FTP server.
address Specifies the IP address of the FTP server.
port Specifies the destination TCP port on the FTP server.
user Specifies the FTP login name.
servertype Specifies the type of the server.
password Specifies the FTP login password.
reserved Specifies the user group having exclusive authority to

configure the selected FTP server.
Note: Only admin_user can specify this option. Once

an FTP server is reserved for security tasks, only
admin_user can modify it. To restore the access
rights of other users, the server needs to be
removed then created again without the admin
reserved flag enabled.
Examples
Defining generic FTP settings:
ML66(config)#ftp server name backupftp address 192.168.0.102 user anonymous passwo →
rd anonymous port 21 servertype ftp
Defining an FTP server reserved for admin_user:

ML66(config)#ftp server name newftp address 192.168.0.103 user anonymous password →
anonymous port 21 servertype ftp reserved admin
9.8 reload
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 75

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
reload
Description
Use this command to reload the current configuration and to perform a node
warm restart.
Attention!
Restarting the node may cause traffic disturbances and the loss of the Data
Communication Network (DCN) connection for a few minutes.
Command Mode
Examples
Reloading the current configuration and performing a node warm restart:
ML66#reload
76 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

License Handling Commands
10 License Handling Commands
The following command modes are applicable for the license handling
commands:
— License Request submode — (license-request)
Table 9 License Handling Commands Overview

add increase the number of requests for
the given license
license install download and install a License Key
File (LKF)
license restrict-unlocked-period disable or enable access to Emergency
and Maintenance unlocked period for
control_user
license request change to the (license-request)
submode
license unlockedperiod enter manually enter an unlocked period
license unlockedperiod exit manually exit from the current
unlocked period
modify modify the number of requests for the
given license
remove decrease the number of requests for
the given license
reset reset the number of the requested
licenses
upload upload the License Request File (LRF)
— show (license)
— show license install status
— show license restrict-unlocked-period
— show license status
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 77

CLI Descriptions
— show license status ports
— show license unlockedperiod
— show license upload status
884.
10.1 add
Synopsis
add <FAL> <QUANTITY>
Description
Use this command to increase the number of requests for the given license.
Command Mode
License Request submode — (license-request)
Operands
FAL The license product FAL number.
QUANTITY The number of the licenses that is added to the number of

the actual licenses. The value of the operand must be
greater than or equal to 0.
Examples
Increasing the number of the requested capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) by 2:
ML66(license-request)#add FAL1241115 2
10.2 license install
Synopsis
license install <FILENAME>
78 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to download and install a License Key File (LKF) using the
default license installation FTP server. To display the status of the LKF
installation, use show license install status command.
Note: — Executing the command causes a warm restart of the NE if the NE

License Status is Degraded before or after the license installation.
— The license installation is performed in the background and could

take a few minutes in case of slow DCN connection.
Command Mode
Operands
FILENAME The name of the LKF.
Examples
Downloading and installing an LKF:
ML66#license install my_license_file
10.3 license restrict-unlocked-period
Synopsis
license restrict-unlocked-period { disable | enable }
Description
Use this command to disable or enable access to Emergency and Maintenance
unlocked period for control_user.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec mode, at admin level — #
Options
disable Provides access to Emergency and Maintenance unlocked

period for control_user.
enable Denies access to Emergency and Maintenance unlocked

period for control_user.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 79

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Providing access to Emergency and Maintenance unlocked period for
control_user:
ML66#license restrict-unlocked-period disable
10.4 license request
Synopsis
license request
Description
Use this command to change to the (license-request) submode. In the (license-
request) submode it is possible to view and modify the number of the requested
licenses.
Note: The modifications are not stored in any configuration file and only
available in the uploaded License Request File (LRF). Therefore, avoid
any restart operation during the license request modification phase.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (license-request) submode:
ML66#license request
ML66(license-request)#
10.5 license unlockedperiod enter
Synopsis
license unlockedperiod enter { integration | maintenance | emergency }
Description
Use this command to manually enter an unlocked period.
80 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: — To execute the command, the token of the selected unlocked period
must be available.
— Executing the command causes a warm restart of the NE if the NE

License Status is Degraded.
Command Mode
Options
integration Enters Integration Unlocked Period.
maintenance Enters Maintenance Unlocked Period.
emergency Enters Emergency Unlocked Period.
Examples
Entering the Maintenance Unlocked Period:
ML66#license unlockedperiod enter maintenance
10.6 license unlockedperiod exit
Synopsis
license unlockedperiod exit
Description
Use this command to manually exit from the current unlocked period.
Note: Exiting manually from an unlocked period is only possible if no licenses

are missing.
Command Mode
Examples
Exiting from the current unlocked period:
ML66#license unlockedperiod exit
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 81

CLI Descriptions
10.7 modify
Synopsis
modify <FAL> <QUANTITY>
Description
Use this command to modify the number of requests for the given license.
Command Mode
Operands
QUANTITY The number of the licenses that need to be modified. The

value of the operand must be greater than or equal to 0.
Examples
Modifying the number of the requested capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) to 3:
ML66(license-request)#modify FAL1241115 3
10.8 remove
Synopsis
remove <FAL> <QUANTITY>
Description
Use this command to decrease the number of requests for the given license.
Command Mode
Operands
82 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

QUANTITY The number of the licenses that is removed from the

number of the actual licenses. The value of the operand
must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the
current value.
Examples
Decreasing the number of the requested capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) by 1:
ML66(license-request)#remove FAL1241115 1
10.9 reset
Synopsis
reset
Description
Use this command to reset the number of the requested licenses to the minimum
number of licenses, which is needed for the actual configuration.
Command Mode
Examples
Resetting the number of all requested licenses:
ML66(license-request)#reset
10.10 upload
Synopsis
upload [ file <FILENAME> ] [ server <FTPSERVERNAME> ]
Description
Use this command to upload the License Request File (LRF) to the tn_licenses
directory on the FTP server. To display the status of the LRF upload, use show
license upload status command.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 83

CLI Descriptions
Note: The upload of the LRF could take a few minutes in case of slow DCN
connection.
Command Mode
Operands
FILENAME The name of the LRF. The file name must have .xml file
extension and must contain at least one of the following
characters:
— A–Z (English alphabet)
— a–z (English alphabet)
— 0–9 (numerical numbers)
— - (hyphen)
— _ (underscore)
— . (dot)
Executing the command without the <FILENAME>

operand, the file name is automatically generated using
the name of the NE.
FTPSERVERNAME
The name of the FTP server.
Executing the command without the

<FTPSERVERNAME> operand the LRF is uploaded to the
FTP server, which has been set as active for license
installation.
Examples
Uploading the LRF to the tn_licenses directory on the FTP server:
ML66(license-request)#upload
84 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

License Handling Commands in Monitoring Mode
11 License Handling Commands in Monitoring

Mode
This section contains detailed information about the commands listed in Table
10.
The following command modes are applicable for the license handling
commands in monitoring mode:
— Privileged Exec mode — # , at admin level
— License Monitoring submode — (license-monitoring) , at admin level
Table 10 Monitoring Mode License Handling Commands Overview

add increase the number of the monitored
licenses
license monitoring change to the (license-monitoring)
submode
modify modify the number of the monitored
licenses
monitoring-auto-unlock enable or disable automatic license
provisioning
remove decrease the number of the monitored
licenses
reset set the number of the currently
monitored licenses to 0 or clear all
monitored licenses
The related show command is the following:
— show (license monitoring)
884.
11.1 add
Synopsis
add <FAL> <QUANTITY>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 85

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to increase the number of the monitored licenses.
Command Mode
License Monitoring submode — (license-monitoring) , at admin level
Operands
QUANTITY The number of the licenses that is added to the number of

the actual licenses. The value of the operand must be
greater than or equal to 0.
Examples
Increasing the number of the monitored capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) by 2:
ML66(license-monitoring)#add FAL1241115 2
11.2 license monitoring
Synopsis
license monitoring
Description
Use this command to change to the (license-monitoring) submode. In the
(license-monitoring) submode it is possible to view and modify the number of the
requested licenses.
Note: To enforce the modifications for the monitored licenses, perform a

manual warm restart.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec mode — # , at admin level
Examples
Changing to the (license-monitoring) submode:
ML66#license monitoring
ML66(license-monitoring)#
86 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

11.3 modify
Synopsis
modify <FAL> <QUANTITY>
Description
Use this command to modify the number of the monitored licenses.
Command Mode
Operands
QUANTITY The number of the licenses that need to be modified. The

value of the operand must be greater than or equal to 0.
Examples
Modifying the number of the monitored capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) to 3:
ML66(license-monitoring)#modify FAL1241115 3
11.4 monitoring-auto-unlock
Synopsis
monitoring-auto-unlock {disable | enable}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable automatic license provisioning.
Command Mode
Options
disable Disables automatic license provisioning.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 87

CLI Descriptions
enable Enables automatic license provisioning.
Examples
Enabling automatic license provisioning:
ML66(license-monitoring)#monitoring-auto-unlock enable
11.5 remove
Synopsis
remove <FAL> <QUANTITY>
Description
Use this command to decrease the number of the monitored licenses.
Command Mode
Operands
QUANTITY The number of the licenses that is removed from the

number of the actual licenses. The value of the operand
must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the
current value.
Examples
Decreasing the number of the monitored capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) by 1:
ML66(license-monitoring)#remove FAL1241115 1
11.6 reset
Synopsis
reset [<FAL> ]
Description
Use this command to set the number of the currently monitored licenses to 0.
88 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Executing the command without the <FAL> operand, all monitored licenses are
cleared.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
Setting the number of the monitored capacity licenses (FAL 124 1115) to 0:
ML66(license-monitoring)#reset FAL1241115
Clearing all monitored licenses:

ML66(license-monitoring)#reset
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 89

CLI Descriptions
12 Basic Configuration Commands
11.
The following command modes are applicable for the basic configuration
commands:
Table 11 Basic Configuration Commands Overview

clock set configure date and time
config-changed-timer set the timer value for the NE Configuration Changed
event
ntp server specify a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server
snmp-server syscontact set NE contact
snmp-server syslocation set NE location
snmp-server sysname set NE name
snmp-server trapenable enable or disable sending notifications
sys_notes add information related to the site
timezone set the time zone
— show clock
— show config-changed-timer
— show sys_notes
— show timezone
884.
12.1 clock set
90 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Basic Configuration Commands
Synopsis
clock set <HH:MM:SS DAY MONTH YEAR>
Description
Use this command to configure date and time.
Note: A warm restart by using the restart node_warm command is required

before the new system time and date changes take effect.
Command Mode
Operands
HH Hour using two digits.
MM Minute using two digits.
SS Second using two digits.
DAY Day of the month.
MONTH Month of the year using the first three letters of the
month.
YEAR Year using four digits.
Examples
Configuring date and time:
ML66#clock set 16:42:36 19 dec 2011
Then perform a warm restart for the NE:

ML66#reload
See Also
restart node_warm
12.2 config-changed-timer
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 91

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
config-changed-timer <SECONDS>
Description
Use this command to set the timer value for the NE Configuration Changed event.
When a setting is changed in the node, the timer starts to count. When the set
timer value is reached, the NE sends the NE Configuration Changed event. If a
setting is changed during the counting period, the timer restarts and starts to
count from 0.
Note: To be able to send NE Configuration Changed events, enable sending

notifications using snmp-server trapenable command.
Command Mode
Operands
SECONDS The value of the timer in seconds. The valid range is 30–
86400 seconds. The default value is 900 seconds.
Examples
Setting the timer value for the NE Configuration Changed event to 900 seconds:
ML66(config)#config-changed-timer 900
12.3 ntp server
Synopsis
ntp server <NTPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to specify the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server for clock
synchronization.
Command Mode
92 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
NTPADDRESS Address of the NTP server, where the format is <A.B.C.D>

for IPv4 and <X:X::X:X> for IPv6.
Examples
Specifying an IPv4 NTP server:
ML66(config)#ntp server 192.168.1.1
12.4 snmp-server syscontact
Synopsis
snmp-server syscontact <CONTACT>
Description
Use this command to set NE contact.
Command Mode
Operands
CONTACT Name of the system contact. The length of the parameter

cannot be over 255 characters.
Examples
Setting NE contact:
ML66(config)#snmp-server syscontact ContactName
12.5 snmp-server syslocation
Synopsis
snmp-server syslocation <LOCATION>
Description
Use this command to set NE location.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 93

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
LOCATION Name of system location. The length of the parameter

cannot be over 255 characters.
Examples
Setting NE location:
ML66(config)#snmp-server syslocation Budapest
12.6 snmp-server sysname
Synopsis
— snmp-server sysname <NODENAME>
— snmp-server no sysname
Description
Use this command to set the NE name.
Use the no option to set the NE name to default (auto-generated).
Command Mode
Operands
NODENAME Name of the system. The length of the parameter is

limited to 63 characters.
When entering free text, the following characters are

accepted:
— A–Z (English alphabet)
— a–z (English alphabet)
— 0–9 (numerical numbers)
— - (hyphen)
94 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— . (dot)
The first character must be A–Z or a–z.
The last character must be A–Z, a–z, or 0–9.
Examples
Setting NE name:
ML66(config)#snmp-server sysname ML66-10-41-16-41
12.7 snmp-server trapenable
Synopsis
snmp-server trapenable <ENABLE>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable sending notifications, such as alarms or
events from the NE.
Command Mode
Operands
ENABLE 1 — Enable
2 — Disable
Examples
Enabling sending notifications:
ML66(config)#snmp-server trapenable 1
12.8 sys_notes
Synopsis
sys_notes <NOTES>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 95

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to add any kind of information related to the site, for example
logging a site visit.
Use show sys_notes command to display the added information.
Command Mode
Operands
NOTES The entered site related information.
Note: Maximum 800 characters are allowed to enter.
Examples
Adding site related information:
ML66(config)#sys_notes "This is notes for the node"
12.9 timezone
Synopsis
timezone <CONTINENT> <CITY>
Description
Use this command to set the time zone.
There is no TAB command completion for the <CONTINENT> and <CITY>

operands, but all possible choices are listed when pressing TAB. The operands
have to be typed in full.
Note: A warm restart by using the restart node_warm command is required

before the new time zone changes take effect.
Command Mode
Operands
CONTINENT The continent of the time zone.
96 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CITY The city of the time zone.
Examples
Setting the time zone:
ML66(config)#timezone Europe Stockholm
Then return to Privileged Exec mode and perform a warm restart for the NE:
ML66(config)#exit
ML66#restart node_warm
See Also
restart node_warm
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 97

CLI Descriptions
13 DCN Basic Commands
12.
The following command mode is applicable for the DCN basic commands:
Table 12 DCN Basic Commands Overview

dcn-lan-ctag enable double tagged Data Communication Network
(DCN) traffic on Provider Bridge
dcn-mode change between DCN-Mode VLAN and DCN-Mode
Routed
pingtargethost define a Ping Target Host that is pinged
— show dcn-lan-ctag
— show dcn-mode
— show pingtargethost
884.
13.1 dcn-lan-ctag
Synopsis
— dcn-lan-ctag ctag <C-TAG> [ priority <PRIORITY> ]
— no dcn-lan-ctag
Description
Use this command to enable double tagged Data Communication Network (DCN)
traffic on Provider Bridge.
Use the no option to disable double tagged DCN traffic.
98 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Basic Commands
Note: The feature is automatically disabled when the DCN VLAN configuration
is changed.
Command Mode
Operands
C-TAG Sets the VLAN C-tag (0x8100) used for DCN double
tagged traffic.
The valid range is 1–4094.
PRIORITY Sets the VLAN priority bits used for DCN traffic.
The valid range is 0–7. The default value is 0.
Examples
Enabling DCN double tagging with 101 C-tag and 4 priority:
ML66(config)#dcn-lan-ctag ctag 101 priority 4
13.2 dcn-mode
Synopsis
dcn-mode {vlan | routed}
Description
Use this command to change between DCN-Mode VLAN and DCN-Mode Routed.
By default, DCN-Mode VLAN is selected.
Note: When changing the DCN mode to DCN-Mode Routed, the address of the
interface configured by the ip host interface command becomes the
host address.
It is recommended to remove the LAN-DCN configuration, for example,

the VLAN interface membership.
Command Mode
Options
vlan Sets DCN-Mode VLAN. This is the default DCN mode of

the NE.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 99

CLI Descriptions
routed Sets DCN-Mode Routed.
Examples
Changing to DCN-Mode Routed:
ML66(config)#dcn-mode routed
13.3 pingtargethost
Synopsis
— pingtargethost <IPADDR>
— no pingtargethost [<IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to define a Ping Target Host that is pinged while the Local
Access (USB) interface is disabled. If Ping Target Host is unreachable from the
NE the Local Access (USB) interface is enabled, regardless of its admin status is
set to down.
Use the no option to remove the Ping Target Host address.
Command Mode
Local Access configuration submode, at admin level— (interface-local-

access)
Operands
IPADDR The Ping Target Host IPv4 address in <A.B.C.D> format or

IPv6 address in <X:X::X:X> format.
The 0.0.0.0 IP address triggers a remove operation.
The following IPv4 addresses are not allowed to set as

Ping Target Host:
— Loopback addresses (subnet with 127.0.0.0/8).
— Link-local addresses (subnet with 169.254.0.0/16).
— Multicast addresses (subnet with 224.0.0.0/4).
100 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Basic Commands
— Reserved addresses (subnet with 240.0.0.0/4).
— The default host address (192.168.0.1).
— An address within the default subnet of the Local

Access (USB) interface (10.0.0.0/30).
— An address, which is already used by any active

interface (LO-DCN, LAN-DCN).
The following IPv6 addresses are not allowed to set as

Ping Target Host:
— Loopback address (::1/128) because it is not a

global unicast address.
— Link-local addresses (all addresses starting with

fe80::/10).
— Multicast addresses (all addresses starting with

ff00::/8).
— An address within the default subnet of the Local

Access (USB) interface (2001:db8::/127).
— An address within the configured subnet of the Local

Access (USB) interface.
— The address of any other active DCN interface (LO-

DCN, LAN-DCN).
Examples
Defining a Ping Target Host:
ML66(config)#pingtargethost 172.31.28.95
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 101

CLI Descriptions
14 LAN-DCN IP Commands
13.
The following command mode is applicable for the LAN-DCN IP commands:
Table 13 LAN-DCN IP Commands Overview

lan-dcn ip dhcp set the IP address of the Dynamic Host
relayaddress Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server for
which the NE is a relay
lan-dcn ip set the name of the domain to which the NE
domainname belongs
lan-dcn ip dscp set DSCP value for all IPv4 DCN services
lan-dcn ip name-server configure Domain Name System (DNS) servers
lan-dcn ip route establish IPv4 default or static routes
— show lan-dcn
— show lan-dcn ip
884.
14.1 lan-dcn ip dhcp relayaddress
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ip dhcp relayaddress <DHCPRELAYADDRESS>
— no lan-dcn ip dhcp
Description
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server allows nodes in the
network to request an IP address. The lan-dcn ip dhcp relayaddress
command makes the NE a relay for a specific DHCP server, making it possible for
nodes without direct contact with the DHCP server to request IP addresses
through the NE.
102 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LAN-DCN IP Commands
Use the no option to remove DHCP server settings.
Command Mode
Operands
DHCPRELAYADDRESS
The address of the DHCP server for which the NE is a
relay.
Examples
Setting the address of the DHCP server for which the NE is a relay:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ip dhcp relayaddress 192.168.0.1
14.2 lan-dcn ip domainname
Synopsis
[no] lan-dcn ip domainname <DOMAINNAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the domain to which the NE belongs, which
is used for name resolution.
Use the no option to remove domainname settings.
Command Mode
Operands
DOMAINNAME The name of the domain.
The maximum length of the full domain name including

dots, is 253 characters. For example, www.example.com
counts 15 characters.
The maximum length of a label, which is part of the

domain name and separated by dots, is 63 characters.
For example, in www.example.com, www, example, and
com are the labels.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 103

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the name of the domain:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ip domainname labdomain
14.3 lan-dcn ip dscp
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ip dscp <DSCP>
— no lan-dcn ip dscp
Description
Use this command to set the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value for
all IPv4 DCN service traffic originating from the node. DSCP is a field in the IPv4
packet header, which is used to achieve different QoS behavior in the network.
Use the no option to reset the default DSCP value, that is, the default forwarding.
Command Mode
Operands
DSCP The DSCP value to set. The valid range is 0–63.
Examples
Setting the DSCP value:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ip dscp 8
14.4 lan-dcn ip name-server
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ip name-server <IPADDRESS> [ <IPADDRESS>

[ <IPADDRESS> ] ]
— no lan-dcn ip name-server [<IPADDRESS> ]
104 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LAN-DCN IP Commands
Description
Use this command to add a Domain Name System (DNS) server with IP address.
The maximum number of allowed DNS servers is three. Domain names are
resolved in order by the given DNS servers.
Use the no option to remove all DNS servers or a specific DNS server.
Note: DNS server configuration is common to IPv4 and IPv6.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDRESS The address of the DNS server, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> for IPv4 or <X:X::X:X> for IPv6 addresses.
Examples
Setting an IPv4 DNS server:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ip name-server 1.1.1.1
14.5 lan-dcn ip route
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ip route <DEST/PREFIX> <NEXTHOP>
— no lan-dcn ip route <DEST/PREFIX> [<NEXTHOP>]
Description
Use this command to establish IPv4 default or static routes.
Use the no option to remove static routes.
Note: Maximum 100 LAN-DCN IPv4 static routes can be defined.
Command Mode
Operands
DEST/PREFIX The IP destination prefix, specified in decimal notation

<A.B.C.D>, followed by a prefix length, <PREFIX = 0–
32>. Use 0.0.0.0/0 to refer to the default gateway.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 105

CLI Descriptions
NEXTHOP The address of the next system on the route, specified in

decimal notation <A.B.C.D>. IP address 0.0.0.0 cannot be
used.
Examples
Establishing default route:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ip route 0.0.0.0/0 192.168.0.1
106 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LAN-DCN IPv6 Commands
15 LAN-DCN IPv6 Commands
14.
The following command mode is applicable for the LAN-DCN IPv6 commands:
Table 14 LAN-DCN IPv6 Commands Overview

lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp set the IPv6 address of a Dynamic Host
relayaddress Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server for
which the NE is a relay
lan-dcn ipv6 set the name of the domain to which the NE
domainname belongs
lan-dcn ipv6 dscp set DSCP value for all IPv6 DCN services
lan-dcn ipv6 name- configure Domain Name System (DNS) servers
server
lan-dcn ipv6 route establish IPv6 default or static routes
— show lan-dcn
— show lan-dcn ipv6
— show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress
— show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp status
884.
15.1 lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress <DHCPRELAYADDRESS>
— no lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 107

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to make the NE a relay for a specific Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. In this way, the nodes can request IPv6
addresses through the NE without direct contact with the DHCP server.
Use the no option to remove DHCP server settings.
Command Mode
Operands
DHCPRELAYADDRESS
The IPv6 address or host name of the DHCP server for
which the NE is a relay.
Examples
Setting the address of the DHCP server for which the NE is a relay:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress 2005::34
15.2 lan-dcn ipv6 domainname
Synopsis
[no] lan-dcn ipv6 domainname <DOMAINNAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the domain to which the NE belongs, which
is used for name resolution.
Use the no option to remove domain name settings.
Command Mode
Operands
DOMAINNAME The name of the domain.
The maximum length of the full domain name including

dots, is 253 characters. For example, www.example.com
counts 15 characters.
108 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

The maximum length of a label, which is part of the

domain name and separated by dots, is 63 characters.
For example, in www.example.com, www, example, and
com are the labels.
Examples
Setting the name of the domain:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ipv6 domainname labdomain
15.3 lan-dcn ipv6 dscp
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ipv6 dscp <DSCP>
— no lan-dcn ipv6 dscp
Description
Use this command to set the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value for
all IPv6 DCN service traffic originating from the node. DSCP is part of the Traffic
Class field in the IPv6 packet header, which is used to achieve different QoS
behavior in the network.
Use the no option to reset the default DSCP value, that is, the default forwarding.
Command Mode
Operands
DSCP The DSCP value to set. The valid range is 0–63.
Examples
Setting the DSCP value:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ipv6 dscp 8
15.4 lan-dcn ipv6 name-server
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 109

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ipv6 name-server <IPADDRESS> [ <IPADDRESS>

[ <IPADDRESS> ] ]
— no lan-dcn ipv6 name-server [<IPADDRESS> ]
Description
Use this command to add a Domain Name System (DNS) server with IP address.
The maximum number of allowed DNS servers is three. Domain names are
resolved in order by the given DNS servers.
Use the no option to remove all DNS servers or a specific DNS server.
Note: DNS server configuration is common to IPv4 and IPv6.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDRESS The address of the DNS server, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> for IPv4 or <X:X::X:X> for IPv6 addresses.
Examples
Setting an IPv6 DNS server:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ipv6 name-server 2005::34
15.5 lan-dcn ipv6 route
Synopsis
— lan-dcn ipv6 route <DEST/PREFIX> <NEXTHOP>
— no lan-dcn ipv6 route <DEST/PREFIX> [<NEXTHOP> ]
Description
Use this command to establish IPv6 default or static routes.
Use the no option to remove the given static routes. When executing the no
option without the next hop operand, multiple static routes are deleted.
Note: Maximum 100 LAN-DCN IPv6 static routes can be defined.
110 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
DEST/PREFIX The IPv6 destination prefix, specified in <X:X::X:X>

format, followed by a prefix length, <PREFIX = 0–128>.
Use 0::0/0 to refer to the default gateway.

<X:X::X:X> format. IPv6 address 0::0 cannot be used.
Examples
Establishing default route:
ML66(config)#lan-dcn ipv6 route 0::0/0 2005::34
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 111

CLI Descriptions
16 LAN-DCN Interface Commands
15.
The following command modes are applicable for the LAN-DCN interface
commands:
— LAN-DCN Interface configuration submode — (interface-lan-dcn)
Table 15 LAN-DCN Interface Commands Overview

interface ip configure the IP parameters of a LAN-
DCN IP interface
interface lan-dcn configure the LAN-DCN interface
ip address set the IP address of the LAN-DCN
interface
ipv6 address set the IPv6 address of the LAN-DCN
interface
mtu set Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) size
trapenable enable alarms and events
— show confirm
— show current
— show interface (DCN)
— show interface ip
— show ip interface host
884.
16.1 interface ip
Synopsis
interface ip [<IFNAME_RSP>]
112 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LAN-DCN Interface Commands
Description
Use this command to configure the IP parameters of an IP interface for both IPv4
and IPv6 parameters.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the LAN-DCN IP

interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port>. The
default value is 1/6/0 if the operand is not specified.
Examples
Configuring IP parameters of the LAN-DCN IP interface:
ML66(config)#interface ip
16.2 interface lan-dcn
Synopsis
— interface lan-dcn
— interface ip lan-dcn
Description
Use this command to configure the IP parameters of the LAN-DCN interface. The
command also changes to the (interface-lan-dcn) submode.
This command is the alias for the interface ip 1/6/0 command.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring the IP parameters of the LAN-DCN interface:
ML66(config)#interface lan-dcn
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#
16.3 ip address
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 113

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— ip address <ADDR/PREFIX>
— no ip address [<ADDR/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use this command to set the IP address of the LAN-DCN IP interface.
Use the no option to reset or remove the IP address.
Note: The IP address of the LAN-DCN interface cannot be removed. The no ip

address command sets it to the default value of 192.168.0.1/24.
Command Mode
LAN-DCN Interface configuration submode — (interface-lan-dcn)
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX The IP address and network prefix of the interface.

Specified in decimal notation <A.B.C.D/P> , for example
1.2.3.4/24.
The 0.0.0.0/0 IP address triggers a reset operation.
For IPv4 address limitations, see Table 114.
Examples
Setting the IP address of the LAN-DCN IP interface:
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#ip address 172.31.29.48/24
Removing the IP address:

ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#no ip address
or
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#no ip address 172.31.29.48/24
16.4 ipv6 address
Synopsis
— ipv6 address <ADDR/PREFIX>
114 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LAN-DCN Interface Commands
— no ipv6 address [<ADDR/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use this command to set the IPv6 address on the LAN-DCN IP interface.
Use the no option to remove the IPv6 address.
Command Mode
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX The IPv6 address and network prefix of the interface,

specified in <X:X::X:X/P> format, for example
2005::23/64.
The 0::0/0 IPv6 address triggers a remove operation.
Examples
Setting the IPv6 address of the LAN-DCN IP interface:
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#ipv6 address 2005::23/64
Removing the IPv6 address:

ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#no ipv6 address
or
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#no ipv6 address 2005::23/64
16.5 mtu
Synopsis
— mtu <MTU>
— no mtu
Description
Use this command to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of a Data
Communication Network (DCN) interface, that is, to set the maximum size of the
packets.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 115

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to set the MTU size to its default value.
Command Mode
Operands
MTU Size of the MTU in bytes. The valid range is 576–9000.

For IPv6, the MTU size must be at least 1280 bytes.
Attention!
The MTU size must be the same in the whole network.
Changing the MTU size in one node could affect the DCN
traffic.
Examples
Setting MTU size to 1400 bytes:
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#mtu 1400
16.6 trapenable
Synopsis
[no] trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable alarms and events.
Use the no option to disable alarms and events.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling alarms and events:
ML66(interface-lan-dcn)#trapenable
116 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Loopback Interface Commands
17 DCN Loopback Interface Commands
16.
The following command modes are applicable for the DCN loopback interface
commands:
— Interface DCN Loopback configuration mode — (interface-lo-dcn)
Table 16 DCN Loopback Interface Commands Overview

interface lo-dcn configure the DCN loopback interface
ip address set the IPv4 address of the DCN
loopback interface
ipv6 address set the IPv6 address of the DCN
loopback interface
— show confirm
— show current
— show interface
884.
17.1 interface lo-dcn
Synopsis
— interface lo-dcn
— interface ip lo-dcn
Description
Use this command to configure the DCN loopback interface. The command also
changes to the (interface-lo-dcn) submode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 117

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring the DCN loopback interface:
ML66(config)#interface lo-dcn
ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#
17.2 ip address
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the IP address of the DCN loopback interface. When
specifying the IP address for the first time, the host address of the node becomes
the address of the DCN loopback interface. This makes the address of the DCN
loopback interface the primary IP address to access the node.
Use the no option to remove the IP address of the DCN loopback interface. In this
case the IP address of the LAN-DCN interface becomes the host address of the
node again.
Command Mode
Interface DCN Loopback configuration mode — (interface-lo-dcn)
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX The IP address and network prefix of the DCN loopback

interface. Specified in decimal notation <A.B.C.D/P> , for
example, 1.2.3.4/32.
The network prefix is fixed as /32, that is, the subnet

mask is 255.255.255.255. The 0.0.0.0/0 IP address
triggers a remove operation.
Examples
Setting the IP address of the DCN loopback interface:
118 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Loopback Interface Commands
ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#ip address 172.31.29.47/32
Removing the IP address of the DCN loopback interface:

ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#no ip address
or
ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#no ip address 172.31.29.47/32
17.3 ipv6 address
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the IPv6 address of the DCN loopback interface. When
specifying the IPv6 address for the first time, the IPv6 host address of the node
becomes the address of the DCN loopback interface. This makes the address of
the DCN loopback interface the primary IPv6 address to access the node.
Use the no option to remove the IPv6 address of the DCN loopback interface. In
this case the IPv6 address of the LAN-DCN interface becomes the IPv6 host
address of the node again.
Command Mode
Interface DCN Loopback configuration mode — (interface-lo-dcn)
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX The IPv6 address and network prefix of the DCN

loopback interface. Specified in decimal notation
<X:X::X:X/P> format, for example 2005::47/128.
The network prefix is fixed as /128. The 0::0/0 IPv6

address triggers a remove operation.
Examples
Setting the IPv6 address of the DCN loopback interface:
ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#ipv6 address 2005::47/128
Removing the IPv6 address of the DCN loopback interface:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 119

CLI Descriptions
ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#no ipv6 address
or
ML66(interface-lo-dcn)#no ipv6 address 2005::47/128
120 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Local Access (USB) Interface Commands
18 DCN Local Access (USB) Interface

Commands
17.
The following command modes are applicable for the DCN Local Access (USB)
interface commands:
— Local Access configuration submode — (interface-local-access)
Table 17 DCN Local Access (USB) Interface Commands Overview

interface local-access configure the Local Access (USB)
interface
ipv6 address set the IPv6 address of the DCN Local
Access (USB) interface
pingtargethost define a Ping Target Host that is
pinged
shutdown disable local access to the NE
— show confirm
— show current
— show interface
884.
18.1 interface local-access
Synopsis
— interface local-access [<IFNAME_RSP>]
— interface ip local-access [<IFNAME_RSP>]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 121

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to configure the Local Access (USB) interface. The command
also changes to the (interface-local-access) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the Local Access (USB)
interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port>. The
default value is 1/6/1 if the operand is not specified.
Examples
Configuring a Local Access (USB) port:
ML66(config)#interface local-access
ML66(interface-local-access)#
18.2 ipv6 address
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the IPv6 address of the DCN Local Access (USB)
interface.
Use the no option to reset the IPv6 address of the DCN Local Access (USB)
interface.
Note: The IPv6 address of the DCN Local Access (USB) interface cannot be
removed.
The no ipv6 address command sets it to the default value of

2001:db8::/127.
Command Mode
Local Access configuration submode — (interface-local-access)
122 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Local Access (USB) Interface Commands
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX The IPv6 address and network prefix of the DCN Local
Access (USB) interface. Specified in <X:X::X:X/P> format,
for example 2007::48/127.
The network prefix is fixed as /127. The 0::0/0 IPv6

address triggers a reset operation.
For the IPv6 address limitations, see Table 115.
Examples
Setting the IPv6 address of the DCN Local Access (USB) interface:
ML66(interface-local-access)#ipv6 address 2007::48/127
Resetting the IPv6 address of the DCN Local Access (USB) interface:
ML66(interface-local-access)#no ipv6 address
or
ML66(interface-local-access)#no ipv6 address 2007::48/127
18.3 pingtargethost
For a detailed description of this command, see pingtargethost on page 100.
18.4 shutdown
Synopsis
shutdown
Description
Use this command together with the pingtargethost command to disable local
access to the NE by disabling the Local Access (USB) port.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 123

CLI Descriptions
Note: — If the NE cannot access the defined Ping Target Host, the NE
enables the Local Access (USB) interface regardless of it has been
disabled by the shutdown command. This prevents the
inaccessibility of the NE on all interfaces.
— If the Local Access (USB) port is disabled, it is no longer possible to

access the Data Communication Network (DCN) and the NE on-site.
— If the Local Access (USB) interface is disabled, the NE tries to access

the Ping Target Host every 15 minutes.
— If the Ping Target Host (SNMP or CLI) is changed, a ping test is

immediately performed.
Command Mode
Local Access configuration submode, at admin level — (interface-local-
access)
Examples
Disabling local access to the NE:
ML66(interface-local-access)#shutdown
124 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router Basic Commands
19 Router Basic Commands
18.
The following command modes are applicable for the router IP commands:
— Privileged Exec mode, at admin level — #
Table 18 Router Basic Commands Overview

access-list create and configure access-list
capability enable Virtual Routing and
Forwarding lite (VRF-lite) support
debug turn on extra logging
match as-path match an autonomous system (AS)
path access list
match community specify a community to be matched
match extcommunity match a BGP external community list
match interface define an interface match criterion
match ip address specify the match address of a route
match ip address prefix-list match entries of a prefix list
match ip next-hop specify a next hop address to be
matched in a route map
match ip next-hop prefix-list specify the next hop IP address match
criterion using the prefix list
match ip peer specify the match peer IPv4 address
of a route
match metric match a metric of a route
match origin match origin code
match route-type match specified external route type
match tag match the specified tag value
route-map enter Route-map mode and permit or
deny match and set operations
router-id specify a router ID common for Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF), Border
Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 125

CLI Descriptions
Distribution Protocol (LDP), and so on

processes
set aggregator set the AS number for the route map
and router ID
set as-path modify an AS path for a route
set atomic-aggregate set an atomic aggregate attribute
set comm-list delete the matching communities from
the community attribute of an inbound
or outbound update when applying
route-map
set community set the community attributes and
group destinations in a certain
community, as well as apply routing
decisions according to those
communities
set dampening enable route-flap dampening and set
parameter
set extcommunity set an extended community attribute
set extcomm-list delete the matched extended
communities
set ip next-hop set the specified next hop value
set level set the IS-IS level to export a route
set local-preference set the BGP local preference path
attribute
set metric set a metric value for a route and
influence external neighbors about the
preferred path into an autonomous
system (AS)
set metric-type set the metric type for the destination
routing protocol
set origin set the BGP origin code
set originator-id set the originator ID attribute
set tag set a specified tag value
set vpnv4 next-hop set a VPNv4 next hop address
set weight set weights for the routing table
— show access-list
— show capability vrf-lite
— show debug
126 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— show route-map
— show router-id
884.
19.1 access-list
Synopsis
— [no] access-list {<NAME> | <NUMBER1> | <NUMBER2> | <NUMBER3>

| <NUMBER4>}
— [no] access-list <NAME> {deny | permit} any
— [no] access-list <NAME> {deny | permit} <IPADDR/PREFIX> exact-

match
— [no] access-list {<NUMBER1> | <NUMBER3>} {deny | permit}

<IPADDR> <IPADDR2>
— [no] access-list {<NUMBER1> | <NUMBER3>} {deny | permit} any
— [no] access-list {<NUMBER1> | <NUMBER3>} {deny | permit} host

<IPADDR>
— [no] access-list {<NUMBER2> | <NUMBER4>} {deny | permit} {<IANA>

| ah | any | esp | gre | icmp | igmp | ip | ipcomp | ipv4 | ospf | pim | rsvp |
tcp | udp | vrrp} {<SOURCE/PREFIX> | any} {<DEST/PREFIX> | any}
[fragments | log | interface {in | out} {<IFNAME_VLAN> |
<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo.<VRF>} | label <LABEL> | {pkt-size {gt
| lt} <PKTSIZE> | pkt-size range <PKTSIZE_LOW> <PKTSIZE_HIGH>} |
precedence <PRECEDENCE> | {tos <TOS> | tos range <TOS_LOW>
<TOS_HIGH>}]
— [no] access-list {<NAME> | <NUMBER1> | <NUMBER2> | <NUMBER3>

| <NUMBER4>} remark <LINE>
Description
Use this command to create and configure access-list.
Use the no option to remove a specified access list.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 127

CLI Descriptions
Options
deny Specifies packets to reject.
permit Specifies packets to forward.
remark Specify comment for access-list entry.
any Any source/destination host.
host A single host address.
exact-match Exact match of the prefix.
Operands
NAME The name of the access list.
SOURCE/PREFIX
Source IP address with prefix length, where the format is
<A.B.C.D/P> .
DEST/PREFIX Destination IP address with prefix length, where the

format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
IPADDR IP address, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
IPADDR2 Wildcard bits, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
LINE A string of up to 80 characters that describe the access

list.
IFNAME_VLAN The VLAN number of the L3 VLAN interface, where the

format is vlan.<VLAN>, for example, vlan.100.
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The Rack, Slot, and Port values and VLAN number of the
L3 VLAN subinterface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/
Port.VLAN> , for example, 1/9/4.500.
lo The router loopback interface.
lo.VRF The loopback interface of a VRF instance, for example

lo.vrf_1.
NUMBER1 IP standard access list, valid range is 1–99.
NUMBER2 IP extended access list, valid range is 100–199.
128 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

NUMBER3 IP standard access list with expanded range, valid range

is 1300–1999.
NUMBER4 IP extended access list with expanded range, valid range

is 2000–2699.
IANA IANA assigned protocol number. Valid range is 0–255.
LABEL Label value. Valid range is 1–65535.
PKTSIZE Packet size greater/less than. Valid range is 0–65535.
PKTSIZE_LOW Packet size range low value. Valid range is 0–65535.
PKTSIZE_HIGH Packet size range high value. Valid range is 0–65535.
PRECEDENCE Precedence value. Valid range is 0–7.
TOS Type of Service value. Valid range is 0–255.
TOS_LOW Type of Service lowest value in the range. Valid range is

0–255.
TOS_HIGH Type of Service highest value in the range. Valid range is

0–255.
VRF The name of the VRF instance.
Examples
ML66# access-list 150 permit any 1.2.3.4/32 any fragments label 5 log precedence 7
19.2 capability
Synopsis
[no] capability vrf-lite
Description
Use this command to enable Virtual Routing and Forwarding lite (VRF-lite)
support. To enable Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) commands and Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) Provider Edge-Customer Edge (PE-CE) support, this
parameter must be disabled.
Use the no option to disable VRF-lite support.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 129

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Turning off VRF-lite support (for L3 VPN):
ML66(config)#no capability vrf-lite
19.3 debug
Synopsis
[no] debug [bfd | bgp | hal | imi | isis | ldp | nsm | ospf | rsvp]
Description
Use this command to turn on extra logging for the associated router feature or
protocol. The log file is included in the next bug report.
The command is not persistent if entered in Exec mode, and persistent if entered
in Global Configuration mode.
Use the no option to turn off extra logging. It is recommended to disable logging
unless it is needed.
Command Mode
Options
bfd Extra logging for Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

(BFD).
bgp Extra logging for Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).
hal Extra logging for Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL).
imi Extra logging for Integrated Management Interface

(IMI).
isis Extra logging for the IS-IS routing protocol.
130 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ldp Extra logging for Label Distribution Protocol (LDP).
nsm Extra logging for Network Services Manager (NSM).
ospf Extra logging for Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).
rsvp Extra logging for Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
Examples
Turning on OSPF Link State Advertisement (LSA) debugging (non-persistent):
ML66#debug ospf lsa
Turning on OSPF LSA debugging (persistent):

ML66(config)#debug ospf lsa
Turning off OSPF LSA debugging (persistent):

ML66(config)#no debug ospf lsa
19.4 match as-path
Synopsis
match as-path <PATHNAME>
no match as-path [<PATHNAME>]
Description
Use this command to match an Autonomous System (AS) path access list by
specifying its skipped name.
There are four possible scenarios when executing this command:
— If the AS path access list is empty, the match rule is ignored and the match is
therefore skipped.
— If there is a match for the specified AS path access list and if the AS path
access list is empty, the match rule is ignored and the match is specified as
permit. The route is redistributed or controlled, as specified by the set action.
— If the match criteria are met and is specified, the route is not redistributed or
controlled.
— If the match criteria are not met, the route is neither accepted nor forwarded,
irrespective of permit or deny specifications.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 131

CLI Descriptions
The route specified by match as-path criteria, can differ from the one specified by
the routing protocols. Setting policies enable packets to take different routes,
depending on their length or content. Packet forwarding based on configured
policies overrides packet forwarding specified in routing tables.
Note: This command is valid only for BGP.
Use the no form of this command to remove a path list entry.
Command Mode
Route-map mode — (config-route-map)
Operands
PATHNAME Specifies an AS path access list by its name.
Examples
Setting the AS path access list to myaccesslist:
ML66(config-route-map)# match as-path myaccesslist
19.5 match community
Synopsis
match community {<NUMBER> | <NAME>} [exact-match]
no match community [<NUMBER> | <NAME> exact-match]
Description
Use this command to specify a community to be matched.
Communities are used to group and filter routes. They are designed to provide
the ability to apply policies to large number of routes by using match and set
commands. Community lists are used to identify and filter routes by their
common attributes. This command allows the matching based on community
lists.
The values set by the match community command overrides the global values.
The route that does not match at least one match clause is ignored.
Note: This command is only valid for BGP.
Use the no option to remove a community list entry.
132 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
NUMBER The community list number. The standard value is 1-99,

the expanded value is 100-199.
NAME The community list name.
Options
exact-match Exact matching of communities.
Examples
Setting the community list name to mylist:
ML66(config-route-map)# match community mylist
19.6 match extcommunity
Synopsis
[no] match extcommunity {<NUMBER> | <NAME>} [exact-match]
Description
Use this command to match a BGP external community list.
Communities are used to group and filter routes. They are designed to provide
the ability to apply policies to large number of routes by using match and set
commands. Community lists are used to identify and filter routes by their
common attributes. This command allows the matching based on community
lists.
The values set by this command overrides the global values. The route that does
not match at least one match clause is ignored.
Use the no form of this command to remove an external community list entry.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 133

CLI Descriptions
Operands
NUMBER The community list number The standard value is 1-99,

the expanded value is 100-199.
NAME The community list name.
Options
exact-match Exact matching of communities.
Examples
Setting the community list name to mylist:
ML66(config-route-map)# match extcommunity mylist
19.7 match interface
Synopsis
[no] match interface {<R/S/P.VLAN> | <vlan.VLAN> | <lo> | <R/S/P-
HIERARCHY>}
Description
Use this command to define an interface match criterion. This command specifies
the next hop interface name of a route to be matched.
Use the no form of this command to remove an interface match crietrion.
This function is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The Rack, Slot, and Port values and VLAN number, where
the format is <Rack/Slot/Port.VLAN> , for example,
1/9/4.500.
IFNAME_RSP_H The Rack, Slot, Port, and Hierarchy values of the

interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port-
Hierarchy>, for example, 1/5/5-RS:D1-3.
134 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the next hop interface to eth0:
ML66(config-route-map)# match interface eth0
19.8 match ip address
Synopsis
match ip address {STANDARD | EXPANDED | NAME}
no match ip address [STANDARD | EXPANDED | NAME]
Description
Use this command to specify the match address of a route. If there is a match for
the specified IP address and permit is specified, the route is redistributed or
controlled, as specified by the set action. If the match criteria are met and deny is
specified, then the route is not redistributed or controlled. If the match criteria are
not met, the route is neither accepted nor forwarded, irrespective of permit or
deny specifications.
The route specified by the policies can differ from the one specified by the routing
protocols. Setting policies enable packets to take different routes, depending on
their length or content. Packet forwarding based on configured policies overrides
packet forwarding specified in routing tables.
Use the no form of this command to remove a match IP address entry.
Command Mode
Operands
STANDARD The IP access list number (standard: 1-99).
EXPANDED The IP access list number (expanded: 1300-2699).
NAME The IP access list name.
Examples
Setting the IP list access name to list 1:
ML66(config-route-map)# match ip address list 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 135

CLI Descriptions
19.9 match ip address prefix-list
Synopsis
match ip address prefix-list <NAME>
no match ip address prefix-list [<NAME>]
Description
Use this command to match entries of a prefix list. If the specified prefix list is
empty, this match rule is ignored and the match is skipped.
The route specified by match ip address prefix-list criteria could be different as

specified by the routing protocols. set policies enable packets to take different
routes depending on their length or content. Packet forwarding based on the
configured policies overrides packet forwarding specified in routing tables.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME Specifies the IP prefix list name.
Examples
Setting the IP address prefix-list name to mylist:
ML66(config-route-map)# match ip address prefix-list mylist
19.10 match ip next-hop
Synopsis
match ip next-hop {<STANDARD> | <EXPANDED> | <NAME>}
no match ip next-hop [<STANDARD> | <EXPANDED> | <NAME>]
Description
Use this command to specify a next hop address to be matched in a route map.
The route specified by the policies could be different as specified by the routing
protocols. Setting policies enable packets to take different routes depending on
136 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30


Command Mode
Operands
STANDARD Specify the IP access list number. The standard range is

1–99.
EXPANDED Specify the IP access list number. The expanded range is

1300–2699.
NAME Specifies the IP access list name.
Examples
Setting the next-hop address IP access list name to mylist:
ML66(config-route-map)# match ip next-hop mylist
19.11 match ip next-hop prefix-list
Synopsis
match ip next-hop <NAME>
no match ip next-hop [prefix-list <NAME>]
Description
Use this command to specify the next hop IP address match criterion using the
prefix list. This command matches the next hop IP address of a route.
Use the no form of this command to remove a match criterion.
This function is disabled by default.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 137

CLI Descriptions
Operands
NAME Specifies the IP prefix list name.
Examples:
Setting the next hop IP prefix list to list 1:
ML66(config-route-map)# match ip next-hop prefix-list list1
19.12 match ip peer
Synopsis
match ip peer {<STANDARD> | <EXPANDED> | <NAME>}
no match ip peer [<STANDARD> | <EXPANDED> | <NAME>]
Description
Use this command to specify the match peer IPv4 address of a route.
Use the no form of this command to remove a match criterion.
Command Mode
Operands
STANDARD Specifies the IP access list number. The standard range is

1–99.
EXPANDED Specifies the IP access list number. The expanded range

is 1300–2699.
NAME Specifies the IP access list name.
Examples
Specifying IP peer 123:
ML66(config-route-map)# match ip peer 123
Removing IP peer 123:

ML66(config-route-map)# no match ip peer 123
138 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.13 match metric
Synopsis
[no] match metric <METRIC>
Description
Use this command to match a metric of a route. The route specified by the
policies could be different as specified by the routing protocols. Setting policies
enable packets to take different routes depending on their length or content.
Packet forwarding based on configured policies overrides packet forwarding
specified in routing tables.
Note: This command is valid only for BGP, OSPF, RIP, and IS-IS.
Command Mode
Operands
METRIC Specifies the metric value. The valid range is 0–

4294967295.
Examples
Setting the metric value to 888999:
ML66(config-route-map)# match metric 888999
19.14 match origin
Synopsis
match origin {egp | igp | incomplete
no match origin [egp | igp | incomplete]
Description
Use this command to match origin code. The following origin attributes define
the origins of the path information:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 139

CLI Descriptions
— EQP — This parameter is indicated as an e in the routing table, and it

indicates that the origin of the information is learned via Exterior Gateway
Protocol (EGP).
— IGP — This parameter is indicated as an i in the routing table, and it

indicates the origin of the path information is interior to the originating AS.
— Incomplete — This parameter is indicated as a ? in the routing table, and

indicates that the origin of the path information is unknown or learned
through other means. If a static route is redistributed into BGP, the origin of
the route is incomplete.
This command specifies the origin to be matched. If there is a match for the
specified origin, and permit is specified when you created the route-map, the
route is redistributed or controlled as specified by the set action. If the match
criteria are met, and denies are specified, the route is not redistributed or
controlled. If the match criteria are not met, the route is neither accepted nor
forwarded, irrespective of permit or deny specifications.
The route specified by the policies could be different as specified by the routing
protocols. Setting policies enable packets to take different routes depending on
Use the no form of this command to disable the matching.
Command Mode
Operands
EQP Remote exterior gateway protocol.
IQP Local internal gateway protocol.
Incomplete Unknown heritage.
Examples
Matching origin code EQP:
ML66(config-route-map)# match origin eqp
140 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.15 match route-type
Synopsis
match route-type external {type-1 | type-2}
no match route-type external [type-1 | type-2]
Description
Use this command to match specified external route type. AS-external LSA is
either Type-1 or Type-2. External type-1 matches only Type 1 external routes
and external type-2 matches only Type 2 external routes.
Use the no form of this command to disable the matching.
Command Mode
Operands
TYPE-1 Matches OSPF External Type 1 metrics.
TYPE-2 Matches OSPF External Type 2 metrics.
Examples
Matching the external router type to Type-1:
ML66(config-route-map)# match route-type external type-1
19.16 match tag
Synopsis
match tag <TAG>
no match tag [<TAG>]
Description
Use this command to match the specified tag value.
Use the no form of this command to disable the declaration.
The matching is disabled by default.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 141

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
TAG The tag value.
Examples
Setting the tag vaule to 100:
ML66(config-route-map)# match tag 100
19.17 router-id
Synopsis
— router-id <ROUTER_ID>
— no router-id [<ROUTER_ID> ]
Description
Use this command to specify a router ID common for Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), and
so on processes. Use router-id command to set a process specific router ID.
Use the no option to remove the router ID.
Command Mode
Operands
ROUTER_ID Router ID in IPv4 address format, that is, <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Specifying a common router ID:
ML66(config)#router-id 10.10.10.60
142 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.18 route-map
Synopsis
[no] route-map <MAPNAME> {permit | deny} <SEQUENCE>
Description
Use this command to enter Route-map mode and to permit or deny match and
set operations.
This command controls and modifies routing information to allow route

redistribution. It has a list of match and set commands associated with it. The
match commands specify the conditions under which redistribution is allowed,
and the set commands specify the particular redistribution actions to be
performed if the criteria enforced by match commands are met. Route maps are
used for detailed control over route distribution between routing processes.
Route maps also allow policy routing, and might route packets to a different
route than the obvious shortest path.
Use the no form of this command to disable the declaration.
Note: A route map tag can be an alphanumeric string up to 80 characters,

including spaces. The string cannot begin with a number.
Command Mode
Operands
MAPNAME The route-map tag.
SEQUENCE The sequence to insert into or delete from an existing

route-map entry.
Options
permit Route map permits set operations. If this parameter is

specified and the match criteria are met, the route is
redistributed as specified by set actions. If the match
criteria are not met, the next route map with the same tag
is tested.
deny Route map denies set operations. If this parameter is

specified and the match criteria are met, the route is not
redistributed and any other route maps with the same
map tag are not examined.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 143

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Entering the route-map submode and permitting set operations:
ML66#configure terminal
ML66(config)#route-map route1 permit 1
ML66(config-route-map)#
19.19 set aggregator
Synopsis
set aggregator AS {<NUMBER> | <IPADDR>}
no set aggregator AS[<NUMBER> | <IPADDR>]
Description
Use this command to set the AS number for the route map and router ID. An
autonomous system (AS) is a collection of networks under a common
administration sharing a common routing strategy. It is subdivided by areas, and
is assigned a unique 16-bit number. Use the set aggregator command to assign
an AS number for the aggregator.
This command requires a match clause.
Command Mode
Operands
AS Specifies the AS number of the aggregator.
NUMBER The AS number.
IPADDR Specifies the IP address of the aggregator.
Examples
Setting the aggregator to AS number 43 and IP address 10.10.0.3:
ML66(config-route-map)# set aggregator AS 43 10.10.0.3
144 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.20 set as-path
Synopsis
set as-path prepend <NUMBER>
no set as-path prepend [<NUMBER>]
Description
Use this command to modify an AS path for a route. By specifying the length of
the AS path, the router influences the best path selection by a neighbor. Use the
prepend parameter with this command to prepend an AS path string to routes
increasing the AS path length.
Command Mode
Operands
PREPEND Prepends the AS path.
NUMBER The AS number.
Examples
Modifying the AS path:
ML66(config-route-map)# set as-path prepend 8 24
19.21 set atomic-aggregate
Synopsis
[no] set atomic-aggregate
Description
Use this command to set an atomic aggregate attribute.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 145

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples:
Setting atomic-aggregate:
ML66(config-route-map)# set atomic aggregate
19.22 set comm-list
Synopsis
[no] set comm-list {<NUMBER> | <NAME>} delete
Description
Use this command to delete the matching communities from the community
attribute of an inbound or outbound update when applying route-map.
Command Mode
Operands
NUMBER Specify the community list number (standard: 1–99,

expanded: 100–199).
NAME Specifies the community list name.
WORD Specifies the community list name.
DELETE Deletes the matching communities.
Examples
Deleting matching community 34:
ML66(config-route-map)# set comm-list 34 delete
146 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.23 set community
Synopsis
[no] set community none
set community {<NUMBER> | <AA:NN> | internet | local-AS | no-advertise

| no-export}
no set community [<NUMBER> | <AA:NN> | internet | local-AS | no-

advertise | no-export]
Description
Use this command to set the community attributes and group destinations in a
certain community, as well as apply routing decisions according to those
communities.
Use the no form of this command to delete an entry.
Command Mode
Operands
NONE Removes the community attribute from the prefixes that

pass the route-map.
ADDITIVE BGP community attribute (Adds to the existing

community).
AA:NN Community number in aa:nn format.
NUMBER Community number. The valid range is 1–65535.
INTERNET Internet (well-known community).
LOCAL-AS Do not send outside local AS (well-known community).
NO-ADVERTISE Do not advertise to any peer (well-known community).
NO-EXPORT Do not export to next AS (well-known community).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 147

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the community attributes to no-export and no advertise:
ML66(config-route-map)# set community no-export no-advertise
Setting the community attributes to no-advertise:

ML66(config-route-map)# set community no-advertise
19.24 set dampening
Synopsis
[no] set dampening <TIME1>
[no] set dampening <TIME1> <REUSE> [<SUPPRESS> | <TIME2> | <TIME3>]
Description
Use this command to enable route-flap dampening and set parameter in ML66.
Set the unreachability half-life time to be equal to or greater than the reachability
half-life time. The suppress-limit value must be greater than or equal to the reuse
limit value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME1 Specifies the reachability half-life time (1–45) in minutes.

The time for the penalty to decrease to one-half of its
current value. The default value is 15 minutes.
REUSE Specifies the reuse-limit value (1–20000). When the

penalty for a suppressed route decays below the reuse
value, the routes become unsuppressed. The default
reuse limit value is 750.
SUPPRESS Specifies the suppress-limit value (1–20000). When the

penalty for a route exceeds the suppress value, the route
is suppressed. The default suppress limit value is 2000.
TIME2 Specifies the max-suppress-time (1–255). Maximum

time that a dampened route is suppressed. The default
148 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

max-suppress value is 4 times the half-life time (60

minutes).
TIME3 Specifies the unreachability half-life time (1–45) for

penalty, in minutes. The default value is 15 minutes.
Examples
Setting the dampening parameters:
ML66(config-route-map)# set dampening 20 333 534 30
19.25 set extcommunity
Synopsis
set extcommunity soo ASN:nn_or_IPaddr:nn
no set extcommunity soo [ASN:nn_or_IPaddr:nn]
set extcommunity rt ASN:nn_or_IPaddr:nn [additive]
no set extcommunity rt [ASN:nn_or_IPaddr:nn | additive]
Description
Use this command to set an extended community attribute.
To use this command, you must first have a match clause.
Command Mode
Operands
SOO Specifies the Site-of-Origin extended community.
ASN:NN_or_IPADDR:NN
Specifies the VPN extended community.
RT Specifies the Route Target extended community.
ADDITIVE BGP community attribute (Adds to the existing extended

community).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 149

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the Route Target extended community to 06:01:
ML66(config-route-map)# set extcommunity rt 06:01
Setting the Route Target extended community to 0.0.0.6:01:

ML66(config-route-map)# set extcommunity rt 0.0.0.6:01
Setting the Site-of-Origin extended community to 06:01:

ML66(config-route-map)# set extcommunity soo 06:01
Setting the Site-of-Origin extended community to 0.0.0.6:01:

ML66(config-route-map)# set extcommunity soo 0.0.0.6:01
19.26 set extcomm-list
Synopsis
[no] set extcomm-list <LISTNUMBER> | <NAME> [delete]
Description
Use this command to delete the matched extended communities.
Use the no form of this command to remove the configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME Specifies a community list by its name.
DELETE Deletes the matching extended communities.
Examples
Deleting matched extended list 34:
ML66(config-route-map)#set extcomm-list 34 delete
150 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.27 set ip next-hop
Synopsis
set ip next-hop <IPADDR> [primary]
no set ip next-hop [<IPADDR> | primary]
Description
Use this command to set the specified next hop value.
Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
The setting is disabled by default.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR Specifies the IP address of the next hop.
PRIMARY Specifies the next hop as primary.
Examples
Setting the next hop value to 10.10.0.67:
ML66(config-route-map)# set ip next-hop 10.10.0.67
19.28 set level
Synopsis
set level {level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2}
no set level [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2]
Description
Use this command to set the IS-IS level to export a route.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 151

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
LEVEL-1 Exports into a level-1 area.
LEVEL-2 Exports into level-2 sub-domain.
LEVEL-1-2 Exports into level-1 and level-2.
Exapmles
Setting the IS-IS level to exoprt into level 1:
ML66(config-route-map)# set level level-1
19.29 set local-preference
Synopsis
set local-preference <SEQUENCE>
no set local-preference [<SEQUENCE>]
Description
Use this command to set the BGP local preference path attribute.
Command Mode
Operands
SEQUENCE The sequence value. The default value is 0–4294967295.
EXAMPLES
Setting the local preference path attribute to 12:
ML66(config-route-map)# set local preference 12
152 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.30 set metric
Synopsis
set metric {<VALUE> | <+/-METRIC>}
no set metric [<VALUE> | <+/-METRIC>]
Description
Use this command to set a metric value for a route and influence external
neighbors about the preferred path into an autonomous system (AS).
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The metric value. The valid range is 0–4294967295.
+/- METRIC Adds or subtracts a metric.
Examples
Setting the metric value to 600:
ML66(config-route-map)# set metric 600
19.31 set metric-type
Synopsis
[no] set metric-type [type-1 | type-2]
[no] set metric-type [internal | external]
no set metric-type
Description
Use this command to set the metric type for the destination routing protocol.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 153

CLI Descriptions
Use the no form of this command to restore the default.
Select a type to be either Type-1 or Type- 2 in the AS-external-LSA when the

route-map matches the condition.
Note: This command is only for OSPF, OSPFv3, or IS-IS.
Command Mode
Operands
TYPE-1 Specifies an OSPF external type 1 metric.
TYPE-2 Specifies an OSPF external type 2 metric.
INTERNAL Specifies an IS-IS internal metric.
EXTERNAL Specifies an IS-IS external metric.
Examples
Setting the metric type of the destination protocol to OSPF external type 1:
ML66(config-route-map)# set metric-type 1
19.32 set origin
Synopsis
set origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
no set origin [egp | igp | incomplete]
Description
Use this command to set the BGP origin code.
The origin attribute defines the origin of the path information. The following
parameters with this command indicate different values:
— IGP— It is interior to the originating AS. This happens if IGP is redistributed

into the BGP.
154 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— EQP — It is learned through an Exterior Gateway Protocol.
— Incomplete — It is unknown or learned through some other means. This

happens when static route is redistributed in BGP and the origin of the route
is incomplete.
Command Mode
Operands
EQP Specifies a remote EGP system.
IGP Specifies a local IGP system.
INCOMPLETE Specifies a system of unknown heritage.
Examples
Setting the BGP origin code to EQP:
ML66(config-route-map)# set origin eqp
19.33 set originator-id
Synopsis
set originator-id <IPADDR>
no set originator-id [<IPADDR>]
Description
Use this command to set the originator ID attribute.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR Specifies the IP address of the originator
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 155

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the originator ID to 1.1.1.1:
ML66(config-route-map)# set originator id 1.1.1.1
19.34 set tag
Synopsis
set tag <value>
no set tag [<value>]
Description
Use this command to set a specified tag value.
Use the no form of this command to restore the default.
The Tag parameter is the route tag that is labeled by another routing protocol, for
example, BGP or other IGPs when redistributing, because AS-external-LSA has a
route-tag field in its LSAs. In addition, when using route-map, ML66 can tag the
LSAs with the appropriate tag value. The tag can either match with route-map or
it is used by another application.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The tag value. The valid range is 0–4294967295.
Examples
Setting the tag value to 6:
ML66(config-route-map)# set tag 6
19.35 set vpnv4 next-hop
Synopsis
set vpnv4 next-hop <IPADDR>
no set vpnv4 next-hop [<IPADDR>]
156 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set a VPNv4 next hop address.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR Specifies the IP address of the next hop.
Examples
Set the VPNv4 next hop address to 6.6.6.6:
ML66(config-route-map)#set vpnv4 next-hop 6.6.6.6
19.36 set weight
Synopsis
set weight <VALUE>
no set weight [<VALUE>]
Description
Use this command to set weights for the routing table.
The weight value is used to assist in best path selection. It is assigned locally to a
router. When there are several routes with a common destination, the routes with
a higher weight values are preferred.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 157

CLI Descriptions
Operands
VALUE The weight value. The valid range is 0–4294967295
Examples
Setting the weight value to 400:
ML66(config-route-map)# set weight 400
158 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router IP Commands
20 Router IP Commands
19.
The following command modes are applicable for the router IP commands:
Table 19 Router IP Commands Overview

clear arp-cache clear the router Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) cache
ip host interface set the host interface for DCN-Mode
Routed
ip host mtu set the Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) size of the internal DCN
interface
ip prefix-list create an entry for a prefix-list
ip route establish IPv4 default or static routes
for the router
ip vrf create a Virtual Routing and
Forwarding (VRF) instance in the
router
— show ip host interface
— show ip host mtu
— show ip prefix-list
— show ip route
— show ip vrf
884.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 159

CLI Descriptions
20.1 clear arp-cache
Synopsis
clear arp-cache
Description
Use this command to clear the router Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
Command Mode
Examples
Clearing the router ARP cache:
ML66#clear arp-cache
20.2 ip host interface
Synopsis
— ip host interface [<IFNAME_RSP_H> | <IFNAME_VLAN> |

<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo]
— no ip host interface
Description
Use this command to set the host interface for DCN-Mode Routed.
Use the no option to set the host interface to be auto-selected by the NE, in the
following order of precedence:
— The Router Loopback interface if it has a valid IP address
— The first L3 VLAN interface in the default VRF having an IP address defined
— The first L3 VLAN subinterface in the default VRF having an IP address

defined
— The first serial (PPP) interface having an IP address defined
This setting is ineffective in DCN-Mode VLAN; however, the configuration is

retained.
160 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router IP Commands
In DCN-Mode VLAN, if an IPv4 or an IPv6 address is defined on the loopback

interface, that interface is the host interface. Otherwise, the LAN-DCN interface is
the host interface.
Command Mode
Operands

IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Port.VLAN>, for example, 1/9/4.500. The interface
should be associated with the DCN (default) VRF.
IFNAME_RSP_H The Rack, Slot, Port, and Hierarchy values of the serial
(PPP) interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port-
Options
Examples
Setting the L3 VLAN subinterface 1/6/5.500 as the host:
ML66(config)#ip host interface 1/6/5.500
Setting the host interface to be auto-selected by the NE:

ML66(config)#no ip host interface
20.3 ip host mtu
Synopsis
— ip host mtu <MTU>
— no ip host mtu
Description
Use this command to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of the
internal DCN interface, that is, to set the maximum size of the packets.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 161

CLI Descriptions
This command is an alias of the mtu command in the (config-router-if)

submode. When using DCN-Mode Routed, all L3 VLAN subinterfaces within the
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) must have the same MTU, otherwise the
connection does not work.
Changing the host MTU affects the MTU of the LAN-DCN interface in DCN-Mode
VLAN.
Use the no option to set the MTU size to its default value.
Command Mode
Operands

Attention!
traffic.
Examples
Setting MTU size to 9000 bytes:
ML66(config)#ip host mtu 9000
20.4 ip prefix-list
Synopsis
— [no] ip prefix-list <NAME>
— [no] ip prefix-list <NAME> {deny | permit} <IPADDR/PREFIX> [le

<NUMBER> | ge <NUMBER> ]
— [no] ip prefix-list <NAME> {deny | permit} any
— [no] ip prefix-list <NAME> seq <SEQNO> {deny | permit} <IPADDR/

PREFIX> [le <NUMBER> | ge <NUMBER> ]
— [no] ip prefix-list <NAME> seq <SEQNO> {deny | permit} any
162 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router IP Commands
— ip prefix-list <NAME> description <LINE>
— [no] ip prefix-list <NAME> description
— [no] ip prefix-list sequence-number
Description
Use this command to create an entry for a prefix list.
Use the no option to delete a prefix-list.
Use this command with description to add a description to the prefix list.
Use the no option to remove the description.
Use this command with sequence-number to include sequence number in

nonvolatile generation (NVGEN).
Use the no option to exclude sequence number in NVGEN.
Command Mode
Options
deny Specify packets to be rejected.
permit Specify packets to be accepted.
any Take packets of any length.
le Specify the maximum prefix length to be matched.
ge Specify the minimum prefix length to be matched.
seq Specify the sequence number of an entry.
description Specify the prefix list-specific description.
sequence-number
Include and exclude sequence numbers in NVGEN.
Operands
NAME The name of a prefix-list.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 163

CLI Descriptions
LINE A string of up to 80 characters that describes the prefix

list.
IPADDR/PREFIX IP address with prefix length, where the format is

<A.B.C.D/P> .
NUMBER Maximum/minimum prefix length to be matched. Valid

range is 0–32.
SEQNO Sequence number of the prefix list. Valid range is 1–

4294967295.
Examples
ML66(config)#ip prefix-list sample permit 1.2.3.4/30
20.5 ip route
Synopsis
— ip route [vrf <VRF>] <DEST/PREFIX> <NEXTHOP>
— no ip route [vrf <VRF>] <DEST/PREFIX> [<NEXTHOP>]
Description
Use this command to establish IPv4 default or static routes for the router. Use the
vrf option to define the IPv4 static route in a Virtual Routing and Forwarding
(VRF) instance other than the default. The router supports Equal-Cost Multi-Path
(ECMP) routing.
Use the no option to remove static routes. When executing the no option without
the next hop operand, multiple static routes are deleted.
Note: Maximum 100 router IPv4 static routes can be defined.
Command Mode
Operands
DEST/PREFIX The IP destination prefix, specified in decimal notation

<A.B.C.D>, followed by a prefix length, <PREFIX = 0–
32>. Use 0.0.0.0/0 to refer to the default gateway.
164 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router IP Commands

decimal notation <A.B.C.D>. IP address 0.0.0.0 cannot be
used.
Options
Examples
Establishing default route for the router:
ML66(config)#ip route 0.0.0.0/0 192.168.0.1
Establishing default route for the router in the VRF instance vrf_1:
ML66(config)#ip route vrf vrf_1 0.0.0.0/0 172.31.0.1
20.6 ip vrf
Synopsis
[no] ip vrf <VRF>
Description
Use this command to create a Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance in
the router. This command also changes to the (config-router-vrf) submode.
Use the no option to remove a VRF instance.
Note: — A maximum of 250 VRFs can be defined for NPU 1002 and a
maximum of 126 VRFs for NPU 1003.
— The loopback interface is automatically created for the VRF, and is

named as lo.<VRF>.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
Creating a VRF instance:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 165

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config)#ip vrf vrf_1

ML66(config-router-vrf)#
Removing the VRF instance vrf_1:

ML66(config)#no ip vrf vrf_1
166 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IP VRF Commands
21 IP VRF Commands
20.
The following command mode is applicable for the IP Virtual Routing and
Forwarding (VRF) commands:
— VRF configuration submode — (config-router-vrf)
Table 20 IP VRF Commands Overview

description add a description for the Virtual
Routing and Forwarding (VRF)
rd assign a Route Distinguisher (RD) for
the VRF
route-target create a list of import and export route
target extended communities to the
VRF
— show ip vrf
884.
21.1 description
Synopsis
— description <LINE>
— no description
Description
Use this command to add a description for the Virtual Routing and Forwarding
(VRF) instance.
Use the no option to remove the description of the VRF instance.
Command Mode
VRF configuration submode — (config-router-vrf)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 167

CLI Descriptions
Operands
LINE The description of the VRF.
Examples
Adding a description for the VRF:
ML66(config-router-vrf)#description "My favourite VRF"
21.2 rd
Synopsis
[no] rd <RD>
Description
Use this command to assign a Route Distinguisher (RD) for the Virtual Routing
and Forwarding (VRF). The command creates routing and forwarding tables and
specifies the default RD for a VPN. The RD is added to the IPv4 prefixes of the
customer, changing them into globally unique VPN-IPv4 prefixes.
Command Mode
Operands
RD The unique RD value on the router as follows:
— An Autonomous System (AS) number and an

arbitrary number, for example, 100:1.
— A 32-bit IP address and an arbitrary number, for

example, 192.16.10.1:1.
Examples
Creating an RD:
ML66(config-router-vrf)#rd 100:10
21.3 route-target
168 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IP VRF Commands
Synopsis
[no] route-target {import | export | both} <RD>
Description
Use this command to create a list of import and export route target extended
communities to the Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF). This command also
specifies a target VPN extended community. All routes with the specific route
target extended community are imported into all VRFs with the same extended
community as an import route target.
Note: Execute the command once for each community.
Use the no option to remove a route target.
Command Mode
Operands
RD The unique Route Distinguisher (RD) value on the router

as follows:

— A 32-bit IP address and an arbitrary number, for

example, 192.16.10.1:1.
Options
import Adds a route target to the import routing information.
export Adds a route target to the export routing information.
both Adds a route target to both import and export routing

information.
Examples
Adding route target 100:10 to both import and export routing information:
ML66(config-router-vrf)#route-target both 100:10
Adding route target 100:20 to import routing information:

ML66(config-router-vrf)#route-target import 100:20
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 169

CLI Descriptions
22 Serial (PPP) Interface Commands
21.
Note: — DCN over PPP is only supported when the DCN mode is set to DCN-
Mode Routed, see dcn-mode .
— These commands are only valid for ETSI.
The following command modes are applicable for the serial (PPP) interface
commands:
— Interface Serial configuration submode — (config-serial-if)
Table 21 Serial (PPP) Interface Commands Overview

interface serial configure a serial interface for Point-
to-Point Protocol (PPP)
ip address set the IP address of a serial (PPP)
interface
ip unnumbered set the serial (PPP) interface to
numbered
mru set the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU)
size of a serial (PPP) interface
shutdown set the Administrative Status of a
serial (PPP) interface to disabled
— show interface
— show interface serial
884.
22.1 interface serial
170 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Serial (PPP) Interface Commands
Synopsis
— interface serial <IFNAME_RSP_H>
— interface ip <IFNAME_RSP_H>
Description
Use this command to configure a serial interface for Point-to-Point Protocol
(PPP). The command also changes to the (config-serial-if) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_H The Rack, Slot, Port, and Hierarchy values of the

interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port-
Examples
Configuring serial interface for PPP:
ML66(config)#interface serial 1/5/5-RS:D1-3
ML66(config-serial-if)#
22.2 ip address
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the IP address of a serial (PPP) interface.
Use the no option to disable the IP address of a serial (PPP) interface. After
removing the current IP address, the interface remains as a numbered interface.
Command Mode
Interface Serial configuration submode — (config-serial-if)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 171

CLI Descriptions
Operands

1.2.3.4/32.

Examples
Setting the IP address of a serial interface:
ML66(config-serial-if)#ip address 1.2.3.4/32
Removing the IP address of the serial interface:

ML66(config-serial-if)#no ip address
or
ML66(config-serial-if)#no ip address 1.2.3.4/32
22.3 ip unnumbered
Synopsis
[no] ip unnumbered
Description
Use this command to set the interface to unnumbered. This is the default setting
of the serial (PPP) interfaces.
Use the no option to set the interface to numbered. For proper operation, specify
an IP address.
Command Mode
Examples
Setting the interface to unnumbered:
ML66(config-serial-if)#ip unnumbered
172 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Serial (PPP) Interface Commands
22.4 mru
Synopsis
[no] mru <MRU>
Description
Use this command to set the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) of the serial interface.
If the serial interface is used for DCN in DCN-Mode Routed, its MRU size must be
aligned with the MTU size of the internal DCN interface set by the ip host mtu
command, otherwise the DCN connection does not work.
Use the no option to restore the default value.
Command Mode
Operands
MRU The MRU size in bytes. The valid range is 64–2048. The
default value is 1500.
Attention!
The MRU size must be the same in the whole network.
Changing the MRU size in one node can affect the DCN traffic.
Examples
Setting the MRU size to 1540 bytes:
ML66(config-serial-if)#mru 1540
22.5 shutdown
Synopsis
[no] shutdown
Description
Use this command to set the Administrative Status of a serial (PPP) interface to
disabled.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 173

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to set the Administrative Status to enabled.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling the interface:
ML66(config-serial-if)#shutdown
22.6 trapenable
Synopsis
[no] trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable alarms and events.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-serial-if)#no trapenable
174 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router Loopback Interface Commands
23 Router Loopback Interface Commands
22.
The following command modes are applicable for the router loopback interface
commands:
— Router Loopback Interface configuration submode — (config-router-lo)
Table 22 Router Loopback Interface Commands Overview

interface ip lo configure the router loopback
interface or the loopback interface of a
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)
instance
ip address set the IP address of the router
loopback interface or the loopback
interface of a VRF instance
— show confirm
— show current
— show interface
884.
23.1 interface ip lo
Synopsis
— interface ip {lo | lo.<VRF> }
— interface lo
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 175

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to configure the router loopback interface or the loopback
interface of a Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance. The command also
changes to the (config-router-lo) submode.
Command Mode
Operands

lo.vrf_1.
Examples
Configuring the router loopback interface:
ML66(config)#interface ip lo
ML66(config-router-lo)#
23.2 ip address
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the IP address of the router loopback interface or the
loopback interface of a Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance.
Use the no option to remove the IP address of the router loopback interface.
Command Mode
Router Loopback Interface configuration submode — (config-router-lo)
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX The IP address and network prefix of the router loopback

interface. Specified in decimal notation <A.B.C.D/P> , for
example 1.2.3.4/32.
176 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Router Loopback Interface Commands

Examples
Setting the IP address of the router loopback interface:
ML66(config-router-lo)#ip address 12.31.29.47/32
Removing the IP address of the router loopback interface:

ML66(config-router-lo)#no ip address
or
ML66(config-router-lo)#no ip address 12.31.29.47/32
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 177

CLI Descriptions
24 L3 Interface Commands
23.
The following command modes are applicable for the L3 interface commands:
— Bridgeport configuration submode — (config-bridgeport)
— VLAN configuration submode — (config-vlan)
— Router VLAN Interface configuration submode — (config-router-if-

vlan)
— Router Interface configuration submode — (config-router-if)
Table 23 L3 Interface Commands Overview

interface ip configure the IP parameters of an L3
interface
ip address set the IP address of the L3 interface
ip unnumbered enable IPv4 processing without an
explicit IPv4 address
ip vrf forwarding associate the L3 interface with a
specific Virtual Routing and
Forwarding (VRF) instance
l3enable create an L3 VLAN subinterface for an
Ethernet port
l3enable create an L3 VLAN interface for a
VLAN
mtu set the Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) size of an L3 interface
name set an alias name for the interface
shutdown set the Administrative Status of an L3
interface
The related protocol interface commands are the following:
— BFD Interface Commands
— OSPF Interface Commands
178 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

L3 Interface Commands
— IS-IS Interface Commands
— LDP Interface Commands
— MPLS Interface Commands
— RSVP-TE Interface Commands
— show confirm
— show current
— show interface
884.
24.1 interface ip
Synopsis
interface ip { <IFNAME_VLAN> | <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> }
Description
Use this command to configure the IP parameters of an L3 interface. The
command also changes to the (config-router-if-vlan) or (config-router-if)
submode.
Command Mode
Operands

IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The Rack, Slot, and Port values and the VLAN number of
the L3 VLAN subinterface, where the format is <Rack/
Slot/Port.VLAN>, for example, 1/6/4.500.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 179

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Configuring IP parameters of a L3 VLAN interface:
ML66(config)#interface ip vlan.100
ML66(config-router-if-vlan)#
Configuring IP parameters of an L3 VLAN subinterface:

ML66(config)#interface ip 1/6/4.500
ML66(config-router-if)#
24.2 ip address
Synopsis
— no ip address [ADDR/PREFIX]
Description
Use this command to set the IP address of the L3 interface.
Use the no option to remove the IP address.
Command Mode
Router VLAN Interface configuration submode — (config-router-if-vlan)
Router Interface configuration submode — (config-router-if)
Operands

Specified in decimal notation <A.B.C.D/P> , for example
1.2.3.4/24.
The 0.0.0.0/0 IP address triggers a remove operation.
Examples
Setting the IP address of an L3 VLAN subinterface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip address 10.31.29.48/24
Removing the IP address:

ML66(config-router-if)#no ip address
180 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

or
ML66(config-router-if)#no ip address 10.31.29.48/24
24.3 ip unnumbered
Synopsis
[no] ip unnumbered
Description
Use this command to enable IPv4 processing without an explicit IPv4 address.
The L3 VLAN subinterface inherits the IPv4 address of the loopback interface of
the Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance it is associated with.
Use the no option to disable IPv4 processing without an explicit IPv4 address.
Note: Running this command removes the IPv4 address from the interface.
Unnumbered Ethernet interface must be point-to-point, it does not work
over broadcast medium. OSPF must be configured for the loopback
interface for the connection to work.
Command Mode
Examples
Setting the L3 VLAN subinterface to unnumbered:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip unnumbered
24.4 ip vrf forwarding
Synopsis
— ip vrf forwarding <VRF>
— no ip vrf forwarding [<VRF> ]
Description
Use this command to associate the L3 interface with a specific Virtual Routing
and Forwarding (VRF) instance.
Use the no option to unbind the L3 interface from the VRF it is associated with.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 181

CLI Descriptions
Note: Running this command removes the IP address and other attributes of
the interface from the interface. The IP address and the other attributes
of the interface must be configured in context of the VRF.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
Associating the L3 VLAN subinterface with VRF instance vrf_1:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip vrf forwarding vrf_1
Unbinding the L3 VLAN subinterface from VRF vrf_1:

ML66(config-router-if)#no ip vrf forwarding vrf_1
24.5 l3enable (VLAN)
Synopsis
[no] l3enable
Description
Use this command to create a L3 VLAN interface for a VLAN.
Note: — To be able to create a L3 VLAN interface, the LAN-DCN port cannot

be set as an untagged egress port of the VLAN.
— In provider mode, Routed DCN VLANs and L3 VLAN interfaces can

only be used for single S-tagged DCN.
— The total number of L3 interfaces per node is limited to 512.
Use the no option to remove the L3 VLAN interface of the VLAN. All interface
configuration will be lost.
Command Mode
VLAN configuration submode — (config-vlan)
VLANs configuration submode — (config-vlans)
182 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Creating an L3 VLAN interface for VLAN 100:
ML66(config)#vlan 100
ML66(config-vlan)#l3enable
Removing the L3 VLAN interface of VLAN 100:

ML66(config)#vlan 100
ML66(config-vlan)#no l3enable
24.6 l3enable (Ethernet Port)
Synopsis
[no] l3enable [<VLAN-ID>] [untagged]
Description
Use this command to create an L3 VLAN subinterface with the given VLAN for
the Ethernet port.
Use the no option to remove an L3 VLAN subinterface. All interface configuration

will be lost.
Note: The total number of L3 interfaces per node is limited to 512.
Command Mode
Bridgeport configuration submode — (config-bridgeport)
Operands
VLAN-ID The ID number of the VLAN.
Options
untagged If the untagged parameter is specified, the VLAN header

is removed from the outgoing packets. Incoming
untagged packets are routed on this port.
Examples
Creating an L3 VLAN subinterface connected to port 1/6/4 with VLAN 10:
ML66(config)#interface ethernet 1/6/4
ML66(config-eth)#bridge-port
ML66(config-bridgeport)#l3enable 10
Creating an untagged L3 VLAN subinterface connected to port 1/6/7 with VLAN

10:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 183

CLI Descriptions

ML66(config-bridgeport)#l3enable 10 untagged
Removing the untagged L3 VLAN subinterface 1/6/7.10:

ML66(config-bridgeport)#no l3enable 10
24.7 mtu
Synopsis
— mtu <MTU>
— no mtu
Description
Use this command to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of an L3
interface, that is, to set the maximum size of the packets.
If the L3 interface is used for DCN in DCN-Mode Routed, its MTU size must be
aligned with the MTU size of the internal DCN interface set by the ip host mtu
command, otherwise the DCN connection does not work.
Command Mode
Operands

Attention!
Changing the MTU size in one node can affect the DCN traffic.
Examples
Setting the MTU size to 1400 bytes:
184 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-router-if)#mtu 1400
24.8 name
Synopsis
— name <NAME>
— no name
Description
Use this command to set an alias name for the interface.
Use the no option to set the alias name to the default empty string.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The alias name of the interface.
Examples
Setting an alias name for the interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#name “my alias”
24.9 shutdown
Synopsis
[no] shutdown
Description
Use this command to set the Administrative Status of an L3 interface to disabled.
Use the no option to set the Administrative Status to enabled.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 185

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the Administrative Status to enabled:
ML66(config-router-if)#no shutdown
24.10 trapenable
Synopsis
[no] trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable alarms and events for the interface.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#trapenable
186 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BFD Configuration Commands
25 BFD Configuration Commands
24.
The following command mode is applicable for the Bidirectional Forwarding

Detection (BFD) configuration commands:
Table 24 BFD Configuration Commands Overview

bfd multihop-peer configure BFD multihop peer timer
values
The related configuration commands are the following:
— area virtual-link
— bfd all-interfaces (IS-IS)
— bfd all-interfaces (OSPF)
— bfd disable
— bfd interval
— bfd session
— bfd slow-timer
— neighbor fall-over bfd
25.1 bfd multihop-peer
Synopsis
[no] bfd multihop-peer <SOURCE/PREFIX> <DEST/PREFIX> interval
<TRANSMIT> minrx <MINRX> multiplier <MULTIPLIER>
Description
Use this command to configure BFD multihop peer timer values.
Use the no form of this command to reset the multihop peer timer values to
default.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 187

CLI Descriptions
BFD multihop sessions are dynamically created by the neighbor fall-over

bfd command.
Note: For the changes to take effect, the clear bgp * command has to be
issued.
Command Mode
Operands
SOURCE/PREFIX
The IPv4 source address and its prefix length, where the
format is <A.B.C.D/P>.
DEST/PREFIX The IPv4 destination address and its prefix length, where
the format is <A.B.C.D/P>.
TRANSMIT The BFD transmit interval in milliseconds. The valid range

is 10–4294967 ms. The default value is 300 ms.
MINRX The BFD minimum receive interval in milliseconds. The

valid range is 10–4294967 ms. The default value is 300
ms.
MULTIPLIER The failure detection multiplier. The valid range is 1–255.

Options
interval Specifies the BFD transmit interval.
minrx Specifies the BFD minimum receive interval.
multiplier Specifies the failure detection multiplier.
Examples
Configuring a multihop BFD session from 192.0.2.1/32 towards 10.1.1.1/32:
ML66(config)#bfd multihop-peer 192.0.2.1/32 10.1.1.1/32 interval 100 minrx 100 mul →
tiplier 3
188 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BFD Interface Commands
26 BFD Interface Commands
25.
The following command modes are applicable for the Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection (BFD) interface commands:

vlan)
Table 25 BFD Interface Commands Overview

bfd disable disable all BFD sessions on an
interface
bfd interval configure BFD transmit and receive
intervals and the failure detection
multiplier
bfd session configure a BFD session
bfd slow-timer set the BFD slow timer interval
26.1 bfd disable
Synopsis
[no] bfd disable
Description
Use this command to disable all BFD sessions on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to enable all BFD sessions on an interface.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 189

CLI Descriptions
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#bfd disable
26.2 bfd interval
Synopsis
[no] bfd interval <TRANSMIT> minrx <MINRX> multiplier
<MULTIPLIER>
Description
Use this command to configure BFD transmit and receive intervals and the failure
detection multiplier.
Use the no form of this command to reset the transmit and receive intervals and
the failure detection multiplier to their default values.
Command Mode
Operands
TRANSMIT The BFD transmit interval in milliseconds. The valid range

is 1–4294967 ms. The default value is 300 ms.
MINRX The BFD minimum receive interval in milliseconds. The

valid range is 1–4294967 ms. The default value is 300
ms.
MULTIPLIER The failure detection multiplier. The valid range is 1–255.

Options
interval Specifies the BFD transmit interval.
minrx Specifies the BFD minimum receive interval.
multiplier Specifies the failure detection multiplier.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#bfd interval 100 minrx 100 multiplier 5
190 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BFD Interface Commands
26.3 bfd session
Synopsis
[no] bfd session <SOURCE> <DEST> {demand-mode | non-persistent |
admin-down}
Description
Use this command to configure a BFD session.
Using this command, a standalone BFD session can be configured without any
existing BFD client (such as OSPF, RSVP-TE, or IS-IS). This can be useful in
scenarios where the peer has a BFD application and requires the BFD session to
be sustained.
Use the no form of this command to remove a BFD session.
Command Mode
Operands
SOURCE The source IPv4 address.
DEST The destination IPv4 address.
Options
demand-mode Specifies that the session is in demand mode.
non-persistent Specifies that the session is not a persistent session.
admin-down Specifies that the session is admin down.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#bfd session 1.2.3.4 5.6.7.8 non-persistent admin-down
26.4 bfd slow-timer
Synopsis
[no] bfd slow-timer <TIMER>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 191

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the BFD slow timer interval.
Use the no form of this command to unset the BFD slow timer interval.
Command Mode
Operands
TIMER The BFD slow timer in milliseconds. The valid range is

1000–4294967 ms.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#bfd slow-timer 1500
192 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

OSPF Configuration Commands
27 OSPF Configuration Commands
26.
The following command modes are applicable for OSPF configuration

commands:
— OSPF Router configuration submode — (config-router-ospf)
Table 26 OSPF Configuration Commands Overview

area authentication enable authentication for an OSPF
area
area default-cost specify a cost for the default summary
route sent into a stub area or a Not-
so-stubby Area (NSSA).
area filter-list configure filters to advertise summary
routes on Area Border Routers (ABRs)
area multi-area-adjacency enable multi-area adjacency on an
interface
area nssa set an area as an NSSA
area range summarize OSPF routes at an area
boundary
area shortcut configure the short-cutting mode of an
area
area stub set an area as a stub area
area virtual-link configure a link between two
backbone areas
auto-cost calculate OSPF interface cost
bfd all-interfaces enable Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection (BFD) on all interfaces
clear ip ospf clear and restart all OSPF routing
processes or a selected OSPF routing
process
compatible restore the method used to calculate
summary route costs per RFC
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 193

CLI Descriptions
default-information create a default external route into an

OSPF routing domain
default-metric set default metric values for the OSPF
routing protocol
distance define OSPF route administrative
distances based on route type
distribute-list filter networks in routing updates
domain-id specify a domain ID for an OSPF VRF
instance
dscp set the OSPF DSCP value
enable db-summary-opt enable database summary list
optimization for OSPF
host configure an OSPF stub host entry
neighbor configure OSPF routers
interconnecting to non-broadcast
multiple access networks
network enable OSPF routing on interfaces
with IP addresses that match the
specified network address
ospf abr-type set an OSPF ABR type
ospf router-id specify a router ID for an OSPF
process
passive-interface suppress routing updates on an
interface
redistribute redistribute routes from a routing
protocol, static routes and kernel
routes into an OSPF routing table
router ospf create and configure an OSPF process
and change to the (config-router-ospf)
submode
router-id specify a router ID for an OSPF
process
summary-address configure IP address summaries
timers adjust minimum Link State
Advertisement (LSA) arrival interval
— show ip ospf
— show ip ospf border-routers
— show ip ospf database
194 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— show ip ospf igp-shortcut-lsp
— show ip ospf igp-shortcut-route
— show ip ospf interface
— show ip ospf multi-area-adjacencies
— show ip ospf neighbor
— show ip ospf route
— show ip ospf virtual-links
884.
27.1 area authentication
Synopsis
— area <AREA> authentication [message-digest]
— no area <AREA> authentication
Description
Use this command to enable authentication for an OSPF area. Running the
command without any parameter will enable simple text password
authentication.
Use the no option to remove the configuration.
Use the ip ospf authentication-key command to specify a simple text

password.
Use the ip ospf message-digest-key command to specify an MD5 password.
Command Mode
OSPF Router configuration submode — (config-router-ospf)
Operands
AREA OSPF area ID in IPv4 address format <A.B.C.D> or

decimal value. The valid range of the decimal value is 0–
4294967295.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 195

CLI Descriptions
Options
message-digest Enables MD5 authentication on the area.
Examples
Enabling authentication for an OSPF area:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 authentication message-digest
27.2 area default-cost
Synopsis
area <AREA> default-cost <COST>
Description
Use this command to specify a cost for the default summary route sent into a
stub area or a Not-so-stubby Area (NSSA).
Command Mode
Operands

4294967295.
COST Default summary cost advertised by the stub. The valid

range is 0–16777215. The default value is 1.
Examples
Setting the default cost to 10 for area 1:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 default-cost 10
27.3 area filter-list
Synopsis
— [no] area <AREA> filter-list access <ACL> [in | out]
196 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— [no] area <AREA> filter-list prefix <ACL> [in | out]
Description
Use this command to configure filters to advertise summary routes on Area
Border Routers (ABRs).
Command Mode
Operands

4294967295.
ACL The name of the access list or prefix list.
Options
access Uses an access list to filter networks.
prefix Uses a prefix list to filter networks.
in Filters routes sent to this area.
out Filters routes sent from this area.
Examples
Configuring filters to advertise summary routes:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 filter-list access 1 in
27.4 area multi-area-adjacency
Synopsis
— area <AREA> multi-area-adjacency { <IFNAME_RSP_H> |

<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo. <VRF>} neighbor <IPADDR>
— no area <AREA> multi-area-adjacency {<IFNAME_RSP_H> | | lo |

<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN>lo. <VRF>} [neighbor <IPADDR>]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 197

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable multi-area adjacency on an interface.
Use the no option to disable multi-area adjacency.
Command Mode
Operands
AREA OSPF area ID in IPv4 address format <<A.B.C.D> or

4294967295.
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Port.VLAN>, for example, 1/9/4.500.
IPADDR The IP address of the neighbor, where the format is

<A.B.C.D>.
Options
neighbor Specifies a neighbor.
lo Specifies the router loopback interface.
lo.VRF Specifies the loopback interface of a Virtual Routing and

Forwarding (VRF) instance, for example lo.vrf_1.
Examples
Enabling multi-area adjacency:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 multi-area-adjacency 1/9/4.500 neighbor 20.20.20.1 →
0
27.5 area nssa
198 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— [no] area <AREA> nssa
— area <AREA> nssa [translate-candidate | translate-never |

translate-always]
— area <AREA> nssa {translator-role [candidate | never | always] | no-

redistribution | default-information-originate [metric <METRIC> |
metric-type <METRIC_TYPE> | metric <METRIC> metric-type
<METRIC_TYPE> | metric-type <METRIC_TYPE> metric <METRIC> ] |
no-summary}
— no area <AREA> nssa {translator-role | no-redistribution |

default-information-originate | no-summary}
Description
Use this command to set an area as a Not-So-Stubby-Area (NSSA).
Command Mode
Operands

4294967295.
METRIC OSPF metric value.
METRIC_TYPE OSPF external link type. The following types can be used:
— 1 — Sets OSPF external type 1 metrics.
Options
translate-candidate
Sets NSSA-ABR for translate election. By default, this
option is selected.
translate-never Sets NSSA-ABR to never translate.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 199

CLI Descriptions
translate-always
Sets NSSA-ABR to always translate.
translator-role Specifies an NSSA-ABR translator role.
candidate Sets to candidate for translation.
never Sets to not translate.
always Sets to always translate.
no-redistribution
Sets to no redistribution into this NSSA area.
default-information-originate
Originates Type 7 default into this NSSA area.
metric Sets an OSPF metric.
metric-type Sets a metric type for default routes.
no-summary Sets not to send summary Link State Advertisement

(LSA) into NSSA.
Examples
Setting an area as an NSSA area:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 3 nssa translator-role candidate no-redistribution / →
/
default-information-originate metric 34 metric-type 2
27.6 area range
Synopsis
[no] area <AREA> range <IPADDR/PREFIX> [advertise | not-advertise]
Description
Use this command to summarize OSPF routes at an area boundary.
Command Mode
200 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands

4294967295.
IPADDR/PREFIX IP address with prefix length, where the format is

<A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
advertise Sets to advertise the range. By default, this option is

selected.
not-advertise Sets not to advertise the range.
Examples
Summarizing OSPF routes:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 range 192.16.0.0/24
27.7 area shortcut
Synopsis
— area <AREA> shortcut [default | enable | disable]
— no area <AREA> shortcut [enable | disable]
Description
Use this command to configure the short-cutting mode of an area.
Command Mode
Operands

4294967295.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 201

CLI Descriptions
Options
default Sets the default short-cutting behavior.
enable Enables short-cutting through the area.
disable Disables short-cutting through the area.
Examples
Disabling short-cutting through the area:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 52 shortcut disable
27.8 area stub
Synopsis
[no] area <AREA> stub [no-summary]
Description
Use this command to set an area as a stub area. By default, no stub area is
specified.
Command Mode
Operands

4294967295.
Options
no-summary Disables the sending of summary link advertisements into

the stub area.
Examples
Setting an area as a stub area:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 stub no-summary
202 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

27.9 area virtual-link
Synopsis
— [no] area <AREA> virtual-link <VIRTUAL_LINK_ID> [fall-over bfd]
— area <AREA> virtual-link <VIRTUAL_LINK_ID> {authentication

[message-digest | null] | authentication-key <AUTHKEY> | message-
digest-key <KEY_ID> md5 <PASSWORD> | dead-interval
<DEAD_INTERVAL> | hello-interval <HELLO_PACKET_INTERVAL> |
retransmit-interval <RETRANSMIT_INTERVAL> | transmit-delay
<DELAY>}
— no area <AREA> virtual-link <VIRTUAL_LINK_ID> {authentication |

authentication-key | message-digest-key <KEY-ID> | dead-interval |
hello-interval | retransmit-interval | transmit-delay}
Description
Use this command to configure a link between two backbone areas that are
physically separated through other non-backbone area.
Command Mode
Operands

4294967295.
VIRTUAL_LINK_ID
The ID associated with a virtual link neighbor, where the
format is <A.B.C.D>.
AUTHKEY Authentication key. The maximum key length is 8

characters.
KEY_ID Key ID. The valid range is 1–255.
PASSWORD The MD5 password. The maximum password length is 16

characters.
DEAD_INTERVAL Dead interval. The valid range is 1–65535 seconds.
HELLO_PACKET_INTERVAL
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 203

CLI Descriptions
Hello packet interval. The valid range is 1–65535

seconds.
RETRANSMIT_INTERVAL
Link State Advertisement (LSA) retransmit interval. The
valid range is 1–3600 seconds.
DELAY LSA transmission delay. The valid range is 1–3600

seconds.
Options
fall-over Sets fall-over detection.
bfd Sets Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) fall-over

detection.
authentication Enables authentication on the virtual link.
message-digest Uses message-digest authentication.
null Uses null authentication.
authentication-key
Sets the authentication key.
message-digest-key
Sets the message digest key.
md5 Uses MD5 algorithm.
dead-interval Sets the interval during which no packets are received

and after which the router acknowledges a neighboring
router as off-line. The default value is 40 seconds.
hello-interval Sets the interval the router waits before it sends a hello
packet. The default value is 10 seconds.
retransmit-interval
Sets the interval the router waits before it retransmits a
packet. The default value is 5 seconds.
transmit-delay Sets the interval the router waits before it transmits a

packet. The default value is 1 second.
Examples
Configuring a link between two backbone areas:
204 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-router-ospf)#area 1 virtual-link 10.10.11.50 hello 5 dead 10
27.10 auto-cost
Synopsis
— auto-cost reference-bandwidth <REF_BANDWIDTH>
— no auto-cost reference-bandwidth
Description
Use this command to calculate OSPF interface cost.
Use the no option to assign cost, based only on the interface bandwidth.
Command Mode
Operands
REF_BANDWIDTH Reference bandwidth in Mbps. The default value is 100

Mbps.
Examples
Calculating OSPF interface cost:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#auto-cost reference-bandwidth 50
27.11 bfd all-interfaces
Synopsis
[no] bfd all-interfaces
Description
Use this command to enable Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on all
interfaces.
Use the no option to disable BFD on all interfaces.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 205

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Enabling BFD on all interfaces:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#bfd all-interfaces
27.12 clear ip ospf
Synopsis
clear ip ospf [<PROC_ID>] process
Description
Use this command to clear and restart all OSPF routing processes or a selected
OSPF routing process.
Command Mode
Operands
PROC_ID The ID of the OSPF process. The valid range is 0–65535.
Examples
Clearing and restarting all OSPF routing processes:
ML66#clear ip ospf process
Clearing and restarting OSPF routing process 555:

ML66#clear ip ospf 555 process
27.13 compatible
Synopsis
[no] compatible rfc1583
Description
Use this command to restore the method used to calculate summary route costs
per RFC. By default, OSPF is RFC 2328 compatible.
Prior to RFC 2328, OSPF has been compliant with RFC 1583, that specified
method for calculating the metric for summary routes based on the minimum
206 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

metric of the component paths available. RFC 2328 specifies a method for
calculating metrics based on maximum cost. With this change, it is possible that
all of the Area Border Routers (ABRs) in an area are not upgraded to the new
code at the same time. The compatible rfc1583 command addresses this issue
and allows the selective disabling of compatibility with RFC 2328.
Use the no option to disable RFC 1583 compatibility.
Command Mode
Examples
Restoring the method used to calculate summary route costs per RFC:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#compatible rfc1583
27.14 default-information
Synopsis
— default-information originate [metric <METRIC> | metric-type

<METRIC_TYPE> | route-map <MAPNAME> | always]
— no default-information originate [metric | metric-type | route-map

| always]
Description
Use this command to create a default external route into an OSPF routing
domain.
Note: The system acts like an Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR)
when the default-information originate command is used to
redistribute routes into an OSPF routing domain. An ASBR does not, by
default, generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain.
Command Mode
Operands
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 207

CLI Descriptions
MAPNAME The route map name.
Options
metric Sets the OSPF metric used in creating the default route.
The default metric value is 10. The used value is specific
to the protocol.
metric-type Sets the OSPF external link type for default routes.
route-map References a route map.
always Advertises the default route regardless of whether the

software has a default route.
Examples
Creating a default external route into an OSPF routing domain:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#default-information originate always metric 23 metrictype →
2
27.15 default-metric
Synopsis
— default-metric <METRIC>
— no default-metric [<METRIC> ]
Description
Use this command to set default metric values for the OSPF routing protocol.
Use the no option to restore the default state.
Command Mode
208 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
METRIC The metric value for the specified routing protocol. The
valid range is 1–16777214.
Examples
Setting default metric value to 100 for the OSPF routing protocol:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#default-metric 100
27.16 distance
Synopsis
— distance [<DISTANCE> | ospf] {intra-area <INTRA_AREA> | inter-

area <INTER_AREA> | external <EXTERNAL> }
— no distance <DISTANCE>
— no distance ospf
Description
Use this command to define OSPF route administrative distances based on route
type. This command sets the distance for an entire group of routes, rather than a
specific route that passes an access list.
Command Mode
Operands
DISTANCE OSPF administrative distance. The valid range is 1–255.
INTRA_AREA Distance for intra-area routes. The valid range is 1–255.

INTER_AREA Distance for inter-area routes. The valid range is 1–255.

EXTERNAL Distance for external routes. The valid range is 1–255.

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 209

CLI Descriptions
Options
ospf Selects OSPF routes administrative distance.
intra-area Sets the distance for intra-area routes.
inter-area Sets the distance for inter-area routes.
external Sets the distance for external routes.
Examples
Defining OSPF route administrative distances:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#distance ospf inter-area 20 intra-area 10 external 40
27.17 distribute-list
Synopsis
[no] distribute-list <NAME> in
[no] distribute-list <NAME> out {bgp | connected | isis | kernel |

static | ospf [<PROC_ID> ]}
Description
Use this command to filter networks in routing updates. This command also
redistributes other routing protocols into the OSPF routing table.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of a distribute list.
PROC_ID The ID of an OSPF process. The valid range is 0–65535.
Options
in Filters incoming route updates.
out Filters outgoing route updates.
210 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

kernel Sets kernel routes.
connected Sets connected routes.
static Sets static routes.
bgp Sets Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes.
isis Sets Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

routes.
ospf Sets OSPF routes.
Examples
Filtering outgoing BGP routes:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#distribute-list list1 out bgp
27.18 domain-id
Synopsis
[no] domain-id {<DOMAIN_ID> [secondary] | NULL}
[no] domain-id type {type-as | type-as4 | type-back-comp} value

<EXT_COMM>
Description
Use this command to specify a domain ID for an OSPF Virtual Routing and
Forwarding (VRF) instance. By default, no domain ID is specified.
Command Mode
Operands
DOMAIN_ID OSPF domain ID in IPv4 address format <A.B.C.D> .
EXT_COMM OSPF domain ID extended community value in Hex

format.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 211

CLI Descriptions
Options
secondary When specified, the domain ID is considered as

secondary. If not specified, the domain ID is considered
as primary.
NULL Null domain ID.
type Sets the value type of the domain ID.
type-as Sets value type to AS format. The hex value is 0x0005.
type-as4 Sets value type to AS4 format. The hex value is 0x0205.
type-back-comp Sets value type for backward compatibility. Hex value is

0x8000.
Examples
Configuring a primary domain ID in IP address format:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#domain-id 12.12.12.12
Configuring a secondary domain ID in IP address format:

ML66(config-router-ospf)#domain-id 13.13.13.13 secondary
Configuring a primary domain ID in AS type format:

ML66(config-router-ospf)#domain-id type type-as value 123456abcdef
27.19 dscp
Synopsis
— dscp <DSCP>
— no dscp
Description
Use this command to set the OSPF DSCP value.
Use the no option to reset the default value.
Command Mode
212 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
DSCP The DSCP value. The valid range is 0–63. The default
value is 48.
Examples
Setting the OSPF DSCP value to 16:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#dscp 16
27.20 enable db-summary-opt
Synopsis
[no] enable db-summary-opt
Description
Use this command to enable database summary list optimization for OSPF. By
default, the function is disabled.
Use the no option to disable database summary list optimization.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling database summary list optimization:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#enable db-summary-opt
27.21 host
Synopsis
— host <IPADDR> area <AREA> [cost <COST> ]
— no host <IPADDR> area <AREA> [cost [<COST> ] ]
Description
Use this command to configure an OSPF stub host entry. By default, no stub host
is configured.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 213

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR The IP address of a stub host, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .

4294967295.
COST Cost value. The valid range is 0–65535.
Options
cost Sets the cost for a stub host.
Examples
Configuring OSPF stub host entry:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#host 172.16.10.100 area 1
ML66(config-router-ospf)#host 172.16.10.101 area 2 cost 10
27.22 neighbor
Synopsis
— neighbor <IPADDR> [cost <COST>]
— neighbor <IPADDR> {priority <PRIORITY> | poll-interval

<POLL_INTERVAL>}
— no neighbor <IPADDR> [cost [<COST>]]
— no neighbor <IPADDR> {priority [<PRIORITY>] | poll-interval

[<POLL_INTERVAL>]}
Description
Use this command to configure OSPF routers interconnecting to non-broadcast
multiple access networks.
214 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR The IP address of the neighbor, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
COST OSPF cost. The valid range is 1–65535.
PRIORITY Neighbor priority. The valid range is 0–255. The default

value is 0.
POLL_INTERVAL The inactive neighbor polling interval. The valid range is

1–65535. The default value is 120 seconds.
Options
cost Sets the OSPF cost for the neighbor.
priority Sets the 8-bit number indicating the router priority value
of the non-broadcast neighbor associated with the
specified IP address. This option does not apply to point-
to-multipoint interfaces.
poll-interval Sets the inactive neighbor polling interval.
Examples
Specifying a neighbor router:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#neighbor 1.2.3.4 priority 1 poll-interval 90
ML66(config-router-ospf)#neighbor 1.2.3.4 cost 15
27.23 network
Synopsis
— [no] network <IPADDR/PREFIX> area <AREA> [instance-id

<INSTANCE_ID>]
— [no] network <IPADDR> area <AREA> [instance-id <INSTANCE_ID>]
Description
Use this command to enable OSPF routing on interfaces with IP addresses that
match the specified network address.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 215

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to disable OSPF routing on the interfaces.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The IPv4 network address with prefix length, where the
IPADDR The IPv4 network address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D>.

4294967295.
INSTANCE_ID Instance ID. The valid range is 0–255.
Options
area Sets an OSPF area by its ID.
instance-id Sets the interface instance ID.
Examples
Enabling OSPF routing:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#network 10.0.0.0/8 area 3
27.24 ospf abr-type
Synopsis
[no] ospf abr-type [cisco | ibm | standard | shortcut]
Description
Use this command to set an OSPF Area Border Router (ABR) type. By default, the
ABR type is Cisco.
Use the no option to set the ABR type to default.
Command Mode
216 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
cisco Sets an alternative ABR using Cisco implementation.
ibm Sets an alternative ABR using IBM implementation.
standard Sets a standard behavior ABR.
shortcut Sets a shortcut ABR.
Examples
Setting OSPF ABR type to IBM:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#ospf abr-type ibm
27.25 ospf router-id
Synopsis
— ospf router-id <ROUTER_ID>
— no ospf router-id [<ROUTER-ID> ]
Description
Use this command to specify a router ID for an OSPF process.
Command Mode
Operands
ROUTER_ID OSPF router ID in IPv4 address format, that is,

<A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Specifying a router ID for an OSPF process:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#ospf router-id 2.3.4.5
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 217

CLI Descriptions
27.26 passive-interface
Synopsis
— passive-interface {<IFNAME_RSP_H> | <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo.

<VRF>} [<IPADDR>]
— no passive-interface [{<IFNAME_RSP_H> | <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo

| lo. <VRF>} [<IPADDR>]]
Description
Use this command to suppress routing updates on an interface.
Use the no option to enable routing updates on an interface.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
IPADDR The IP address of the interface, where the format is

<A.B.C.D>.
Options
lo.VRF The loopback interface of a Virtual Routing and

Examples
Suppressing routing updates on L3 VLAN subinterface 1/9/4.500:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#passive-interface 1/9/4.500
218 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

27.27 redistribute
Synopsis
— redistribute [kernel | connected | static | bgp | isis | ospf

[<PROC_ID>] ] {metric <METRIC> | metric-type [<METRIC_TYPE>] | tag
<ROUTE_TAG>}
— no redistribute [kernel | connected | static | bgp | isis | ospf

[<PROC_ID>] ] {metric | metric-type | tag}
Description
Use this command to redistribute routes from a routing protocol, static routes and
kernel routes into an OSPF routing table.
Use the no option to disable the function.
Command Mode
Operands
ROUTE_TAG The external route tag. The valid range is 0–

4294967295.
Options
kernel Sets kernel routes.
connected Sets connected routes.
static Sets static routes.
bgp Sets Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 219

CLI Descriptions
isis Sets Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

routes.
ospf Sets OSPF routes.
metric Sets an OSPF metric.
metric-type Sets a metric type for the redistributed routes.
tag Sets an external route tag.
Examples
Redistributing information from another routing protocol:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#redistribute bgp metric 12
27.28 router ospf
Synopsis
[no] router ospf [<PROC_ID> [vrf <VRF>]]
Description
Use this command to create an OSPF process. This command also changes to
(config-router-ospf) submode.
Use the no option to remove an OSPF process.
Command Mode
Operands
PROC_ID The ID of the OSPF process. The valid range is 0–65535.


instance that the OSPF process is bound to.
Options
vrf Specifies to bind the OSPF process to a VRF instance.
220 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Creating an OSPF process and changing to the (config-router-ospf) submode:
ML66(config)#router ospf 0
ML66(config-router-ospf)#
27.29 router-id
Synopsis
— router-id <ROUTER_ID>
— no router-id [<ROUTER_ID> ]
Description
Use this command to specify a router ID for an OSPF process. This router ID
overrides the common router ID of the router set by the router-id command.
Command Mode
Operands
ROUTER_ID OSPF router ID in IPv4 address format, that is,

<A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Specifying a router ID for an OSPF process:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#router-id 10.10.10.60
27.30 summary-address
Synopsis
[no] summary-address <IPADDR/PREFIX> [not-advertise | tag <TAG> ]
Description
Use this command to configure IP address summaries.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 221

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to disable the configuration of IP address summaries.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX
TAG Tag value. The valid range is 0–4294967295. The default

value is 0.
Options
not-advertise Suppresses external routes that match the prefix.
tag Sets a tag.
Examples
Configure IP address summaries:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#summary-address 172.16.0.0/16 tag 3
27.31 timers
Synopsis
timers [lsa arrival <SAME_LSA_MIN_DELAY> | spf
[<SPF_RECEIVING_DELAY> <SPF_CALC_HOLD_TIME> | exp
<SPF_MIN_RECEIVING_DELAY> ] | throttle lsa all
<THROTTLE_STARTING_DELAY> ]
Description
Use this command to adjust minimum Link State Advertisement (LSA) arrival
interval.
Command Mode
Operands
SAME_LSA_MIN_DELAY
222 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

The minimum delay in acceptance of the same LSA in ms.

SPF_RECEIVING_DELAY
The delay between receiving a change to SPF calculation
in ms. The valid range is 0–2147483647.
SPF_CALC_HOLD_TIME
The hold time between consecutive SPF calculations in
ms. The valid range is 0–2147483647.
SPF_MIN_RECEIVING_DELAY
The minimum delay between receiving a change to SPF
calculation in ms. The valid range is 0–2147483647.
THROTTLE_STARTING_DELAY
The starting delay for LSA generation calculation in ms.
Options
lsa Sets LSA.
spf Sets OSPF SPF timers.
throttle Sets OSPF LSA throttle timers.
Examples
Adjusting minimum LSA arrival interval:
ML66(config-router-ospf)#timers lsa arrival 3
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 223

CLI Descriptions
28 OSPF Interface Commands
27.
The following command modes are applicable for OSPF interface commands:

vlan)
Table 27 OSPF Interface Commands Overview

ip ospf authentication enable authentication
ip ospf authentication-key set an OSPF authentication password
for the neighboring routers
ip ospf bfd enable Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection (BFD) on an OSPF interface
ip ospf cost set the interface cost
ip ospf database-filter filter OSPF Link State Advertisement
(LSA) during synchronization and
flooding
ip ospf dead-interval set the interval during which no hello
packets are received
ip ospf disable disable OSPF packet processing on an
interface
ip ospf hello-interval set the time between hello packets
ip ospf message-digest-key set an MD5 authentication password
ip ospf mtu set the Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) size of the OSPF interface
ip ospf mtu-ignore configure OSPF to not check the MTU
size
ip ospf network set the OSPF network type
ip ospf priority set the router priority
ip ospf retransmit-interval set the time between retransmitting
lost LSAs
ip ospf transmit-delay set the link state transmit delay
224 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

OSPF Interface Commands
— show ip ospf
— show ip ospf border-routers
— show ip ospf database
— show ip ospf igp-shortcut-lsp
— show ip ospf igp-shortcut-route
— show ip ospf interface
— show ip ospf multi-area-adjacencies
— show ip ospf neighbor
— show ip ospf route
— show ip ospf virtual-links
884.
28.1 ip ospf authentication
Synopsis
— ip ospf authentication [null | message-digest]
— no ip ospf authentication
Description
Use this command to enable authentication.
Use the no option to disable authentication.
Command Mode
Options
null Uses no authentication. Overrides password or message-

digest authentication of the interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 225

CLI Descriptions
message-digest Uses message-digest authentication.
Examples
Setting no authentication:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf authentication null
28.2 ip ospf authentication-key
Synopsis
— ip ospf authentication-key <AUTHKEY>
— no ip ospf authentication-key
Description
Use this command to specify a simple text OSPF authentication password for the
neighboring routers.
Command Mode
Operands
AUTHKEY Authentication key. The maximum key length is 8

characters.
Examples
Setting authentication password mypwd:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf authentication-key mypwd
28.3 ip ospf bfd
Synopsis
— ip ospf bfd [disable]
226 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— no ip ospf bfd
Description
Use this command to enable Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on an
OSPF interface.
Use the no option to disable BFD on an OSPF interface.
Command Mode
Options
disable Disables BFD.
Examples
Enabling BFD on an OSPF interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf bfd
28.4 ip ospf cost
Synopsis
— ip ospf cost <COST>
— no ip ospf cost
Description
Use this command to set the interface cost.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 227

CLI Descriptions
Operands
COST The cost of the interface. The valid range is 1–65535. The
Examples
Setting the interface cost to 10:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf cost 10
28.5 ip ospf databse-filter
Synopsis
— ip ospf database-filter all out
— no ip ospf database-filter
Description
Use this command to filter OSPF Link State Advertisement (LSA) during
synchronization and flooding.
Use the no option to turn off the filter.
Command Mode
Options
all Filters all LSAs.
out Filters outgoing LSAs.
Examples
Filtering OSPF LSAs:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf database-filter all out
228 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

28.6 ip ospf dead-interval
Synopsis
— ip ospf dead-interval <DEAD_INTERVAL>
— no ip ospf dead-interval
Description
Use this command to set the interval during which no hello packets are received
and after which a neighbor is declared inactive.
Use the no option to restore the default.
Command Mode
Operands
DEAD_INTERVAL The dead interval- The valid range is 1–65535. The

default value is 40 seconds.
Examples
Setting the dead interval to 10 seconds:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf dead-interval 10
28.7 ip ospf disable
Synopsis
[no] ip ospf disable all
Description
Use this command to disable OSPF packet processing on an interface.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 229

CLI Descriptions
Options
all Disables all functionality.
Examples
Disabling OSPF:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf disable all
28.8 ip ospf hello-interval
Synopsis
— ip ospf hello-interval <HELLO_INTERVAL>
— no ip ospf hello-interval
Description
Use this command to set the time between hello packets.
Command Mode
Operands
HELLO_INTERVAL
The hello interval. The valid range is 1–65535 seconds.
The default value is 10 seconds.
Examples
Setting the hello interval to 3 seconds:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf hello-interval 3
28.9 ip ospf message-digest-key
Synopsis
— ip ospf message-digest-key <KEY_ID> md5 <PASSWORD>
230 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— no ip ospf message-digest-key <KEY_ID>
Description
Use this command to register a key for OSPF MD5 authentication.
The router uses an algorithm based on the OSPF packet, the key and the key ID
to generate a message digest that gets appended to the packet. This command
supports uninterrupted transition between passwords. The system begins a
rollover process until all the neighbors have adopted the new password.
Command Mode
Operands
KEY_ID Key ID. The valid range is 1–255.
PASSWORD OSPF key, a string of 1 to 16 characters. The maximum

key length is 16 characters.
Options
md5 Uses the MD5 algorithm.
Examples
Setting MD5 authentication password yourpass:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf message-digest-key 1 md5 yourpass
Change MD5 authentication password to yourpass2:

ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf message-digest-key 2 md5 yourpass2
Removing the old MD5 authentication password:

ML66(config-router-if)#no ip ospf message-digest-key 1
28.10 ip ospf mtu
Synopsis
— ip ospf mtu <MTU>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 231

CLI Descriptions
— no ip ospf mtu
Description
Use this command to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of the
OSPF interface.
Command Mode
Operands
Attention!
traffic.
Examples
Setting the MTU size to 1480 bytes:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf mtu 1480
28.11 ip ospf mtu-ignore
Synopsis
[no] ip ospf mtu-ignore
Description
Use this command to configure OSPF to not check the MTU size during database
description exchange.
Use the no option to configure OSPF to check the MTU size during database
description exchange.
232 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Examples
Configuring OSPF to not check the MTU size:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf mtu-ignore
28.12 ip ospf network
Synopsis
ip ospf network [broadcast | non-broadcast | point-to-multipoint |
point-to-point]
Description
Use this command to set the OSPF network type. By default, the OSPF network
type is broadcast.
Command Mode
Options
broadcast Sets OSPF broadcast multi-access network type.
non-broadcast Sets OSPF Non-Broadcast Multiple Access (NBMA)

network type.
point-to-multipoint
Sets OSPF point-to-multipoint network type.
point-to-point Sets OSPF point-to-point network type.
Examples
Setting the OSPF network type to point-to-point:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf network point-to-point
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 233

CLI Descriptions
28.13 ip ospf priority
Synopsis
— ip ospf priority <PRIORITY>
— no ip ospf priority
Description
Use this command to set the router priority.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The router priority. The valid range is 0–255. The default
value is 1.
Examples
Setting the router priority to 3:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf priority 3
28.14 ip ospf retransmit-interval
Synopsis
— ip ospf retransmit-interval <RETRANSMISSION_INTERVAL>
— no ip ospf retransmit-interval
Description
Use this command to set the time between retransmitting lost Link State
Advertisements (LSAs).
234 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
RETRANSMISSION_INTERVAL
LSA retransmission interval. The valid range is 1–65535
seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.
Examples
Setting the OSPF retransmission interval to 6 seconds:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf retransmit-interval 6
28.15 ip ospf transmit-delay
Synopsis
— ip ospf transmit-delay <DELAY>
— no ip ospf transmit-delay
Description
Use this command to set the link state transmit delay.
Command Mode
Operands
DELAY The transmit delay. The valid range is 1–65535.
Examples
Setting the OSPF transmit delay to 3 seconds:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip ospf transmit-delay 3
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 235

CLI Descriptions
29 IS-IS Commands
28.
The following command modes are applicable for the Intermediate System–
Intermediate System (IS-IS) commands:
— Exec mode — >
— IS-IS Router configuration submode — (config-router-isis)
— Keychain submode — (config-keychain)
— Keychain key submode — (config-keychain-key)
Table 28 IS-IS Commands Overview

accept-lifetime specify the time period during which
the authentication on a keychain is
received as valid
area-password set the authentication password for
the Level-1 area, and set
authentication on Level-1 SNP PDUs
authentication key-chain set the keychain to be used for
authentication at the instance level
authentication mode set the authentication mode at the
instance level
authentication send-only set the send-only option at the
instance level
bfd all-interfaces enable the Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection (BFD) feature on the
interfaces enabled with an IS-IS
instance
clear clns is-neighbors clear IS neighbor adjacencies
clear clns neighbors clear CLNS neighbor adjacencies
clear ip isis clear IS-IS routing information
clear isis clear and restart a selected IS-IS
routing instance
236 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
domain-password set the authentication password for

the Level-2 domain and to set the
authentication password on Level-2
SNP PDUs
ip route high-priority assign a high priority to an IS-IS IP
prefix
is-type set the IS to the specified level of
routing
key manage, add, or delete authentication
keys in a keychain
key chain enter the keychain management
submode, and configure a keychain
with a keychain name
key-string specify a password to be used by a key
lsp-gen-interval set the minimum interval before
regenerating the same LSP
lsp-mtu set the MTU size of LSPs
lsp-refresh-interval set the LSP refresh interval
max-area-address configure the maximum number of
addresses for an IS-IS area
max-lsp-lifetime set the maximum LSP lifetime
metric-style configure the IS-IS metric style
net add a Network Entity Title (NET) to an
instance
redistribute enable redistribution of information
from another routing protocol
router isis initiate an IS-IS routing instance and
enter IS-IS mode
send-lifetime specify the time period during which
the authentication key on a keychain
can be sent
set-overload-bit set the overload-bit in self-LSPs
spf-interval-exp set the minimum and maximum hold
intervals between Shortest Path First
(SPF) calculations
summary-address configure a summary address to
summarize IPv4 reachability
information
— show clns is-neighbors
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 237

CLI Descriptions
— show clns neighbors
— show ip isis igp-shortcut-lsp
— show ip isis route
— show ip isis route igp-shortcut
— show isis counter
— show isis database
— show isis interface
— show isis topology
— show running-config router
29.1 accept-lifetime
Synopsis
— accept-lifetime <STARTTIME> <STARTDATE> {<ENDTIME>

<ENDDATE> | duration <DURATION> | infinite}
— no accept-lifetime
Description
Use this command to specify the time period during which the authentication on
a keychain is received as valid.
— key
— key chain
— key-string
— send-lifetime
Command Mode
Keychain key submode — (config-keychain-key)
238 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Operands
STARTTIME The start time of the accept lifetime in hours, minutes and
seconds, in the show rsvp interf: <HH:MM:SS> .
STARTDATE The start date of the accept lifetime in the following

format: <MONTH DAY YEAR> — Month of the year using
the first three letters of the month, day of the month, and
year using four digits. For example, Feb 3 2018.
ENDTIME The end time of the accept lifetime in hours, minutes and
seconds, in the following format: <HH:MM:SS> .
ENDDATE The end date of the accept lifetime in the following

format: <MONTH DAY YEAR> — Month of the year using
the first three letters of the month, day of the month, and
year using four digits. For example, Feb 3 2018.
DURATION The duration of the accept lifetime in seconds. The valid

range is 1–2147483646 s.
Options
duration Specifies the duration of the accept lifetime.
infinite Specifies the accept lifetime to never expire.
Examples
Setting the accept lifetime for key 1 on the keychain named mychain:
ML66(config-keychain-key)#accept-lifetime 03:03:01 Dec 3 2004 04:04:02 Dec 3 2006
ML66(config-keychain-key)#no accept-lifetime
29.2 area-password
Synopsis
— area-password <PASSWORD> [authenticate snp {send-only | validate
— no area-password
Description
Use this command to set the authentication password for the Level-1 area and to
set authentication on Level-1 SNP PDUs. This command enables authentication
when receiving and sending LSP and SNP PDU in Level-1 areas. The area
password must be the same for all the IS-IS routers in the same area.}]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 239

CLI Descriptions
— domain-password
Command Mode
IS-IS Router configuration submode — (config-router-isis)
Operands
PASSWORD The area password. The maximum password length is

254 characters. In the default setting, the area password
is not configured.
Options
send-only Specifies to only insert the password into the Level-1 SNP
PDUs, but not to check the password in SNP PDUs that it
receives. Use this keyword during a software upgrade to
ease the transition.
validate Specifies to insert the password into the Level-1 SNP

PDUs and to check the password in SNPs that it receives.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#area-password mypasswd
ML66(config-router-isis)#area-password mypasswd authenticate snp send-only
ML66(config-router-isis)#no area-password
29.3 authentication key-chain
Synopsis
— authentication key-chain <NAME> [level-1 | level-2]
— no authentication key-chain [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the keychain to be used for authentication at the
instance level. Authentication mode must be set to md5 to configure the keychain.
If no keychain is configured with the key command, no keychain authentication
is performed.
Only one authentication keychain is applied to a IS-IS interface at a time. That is,
executing a second isis authentication key-chain command overrides the
240 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
first isis authentication key-chain command. If neither the level-1 nor

the level-2 keyword is configured, the chain applies to both levels.
Authentication can be specified for an individual IS-IS interface using the isis
authentication key-chain command.
Use the no form of this command to unset the keychain used for authentication.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The keychain name (valid authentication keys). In the

default setting, the keychain applies to the levels on
which authentication mode is configured as MD5 if no
level is specified.
Options
level-1 Specifies an authentication keychain for level-1 PDUs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#authentication mode md5
ML66(config-router-isis)#authentication key-chain ipi level-1
29.4 authentication mode
Synopsis
[no] authentication mode {md5 | text} [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the authentication mode at the instance level.
If clear-text authentication was configured using the area-password or domain-

password commands, the authentication mode command overrides both of
those commands (based on the level at which MD5 is configured). If the
authentication mode command was used first, and subsequently an attempt is
made to use the area-password or domain-password commands, the attempt
fails. To configure clear-text authentication using the area-password or domain-
password commands, first use the no authentication mode command.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the authentication
mode applies to both levels.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 241

CLI Descriptions
The type of authentication and the level to which it applies can be specified for a
single IS-IS interface, rather than per IS-IS instance, using the isis
authentication mode command.
Use the no form of this command to unset the MD5 authentication mode.
— authentication key-chain
— authentication send-only
Command Mode
Options
md5 Specifies the keyed message digest mode (MD5). In the

default setting, the authentication mode is set to MD5 for
both levels if no level is specified.
text Specifies the text mode.
level-1 Specifies the authentication mode for level-1 PDUs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#authentication mode md5 level-1
ML66(config-router-isis)#no authentication mode md5 level-1
29.5 authentication send-only
Synopsis
[no] authentication send-only [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the send-only option at the instance level.
Use this command before configuring the authentication mode and the
authentication keychain, so that the implementation of authentication goes
smoothly. That is, the routers will have more time for the keys to be configured on
each router if authentication is inserted only on the packets being sent, but not
checked on packets being received. After all routers that must communicate are
242 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
configured with this command, enable the authentication mode and the keychain
on each router. Then specify the no authentication send-only command to
disable the send-only feature.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the send-only
feature applies to both levels. The send-only option applies to both levels if no
level is specified.
In the default setting, the send-only option is disabled.
Use the no form of this command to unset the send-only option.
— authentication key-chain
— authentication mode
Command Mode
Options
level-1 Specifies authentication send-only for level-1 PDUs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#authentication send-only level-1
ML66(config-router-isis)#no authentication send-only level-1
29.6 bfd all-interfaces
Synopsis
[no] bfd all-interfaces
Description
Use this command to enable the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)
feature on the interfaces enabled with an IS-IS instance.
This command sets BFD fall-over check for all the neighbors under a specified
process.
In the default setting, the BFD feature is disabled.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 243

CLI Descriptions
Use the no form of this command to disable BFD functionality for a IS-IS
instance.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#bfd all-interfaces
ML66(config-router-isis)#no bfd all-interfaces
29.7 clear clns is-neighbors
Synopsis
clear clns is-neighbors <SYSTEM-ID>
Description
Use this command to clear IS neighbor adjacencies.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
SYSTEM-ID Specify the neighbor system ID in the format of

<XXXX.XXXX.XXXX> .
Examples
ML66>clear clns is-neighbors 0000.0000.0001
29.8 clear clns neighbors
Synopsis
clear clns neighbors
Description
Use this command to clear CLNS neighbor adjacencies.
244 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>clear clns neighbors
29.9 clear ip isis
Synopsis
clear ip isis [<TAG> ] route {all | redistribution}
Description
Use this command to clear IS-IS routing information.
Command Mode
Operands
TAG The routing instance tag.
Options
all Specifies to clear all of the IS-IS routing table.
redistribution Specifies to clear IS-IS IP local redistribution routes.
Examples
ML66#clear ip isis route all
29.10 clear isis
Synopsis
clear isis [<TAG>] process
Description
Use this command to clear and restart a selected IS-IS routing instance.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 245

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
Clearing and restarting ISIS routing instance is1:
ML66#clear isis is1 process
29.11 domain-password
Synopsis
— domain-password <PASSWORD> [authenticate snp {send-only |

validate}]
— no domain-password
Description
Use this command to set the authentication password for the Level-2 domain
and, optionally, to set the authentication password on Level-2 SNP PDUs.
Use this command to enable authentication when receiving and sending LSP and
SNP PDUs in the Level-2 domain. The domain password must be the same in the
Level-2 domain.
Use the no form of this command to clear the domain password.
— area-password
Command Mode
Operands
PASSWORD Specify the password string. The maximum password

length is 254 characters. In the default setting, no
domain password is configured.
246 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Options
send-only Specifies to only insert the password into the Level-1 SNP
PDUs, but not to check the password in SNP PDUs that
are received. Use this keyword during a software upgrade
to ease the transition.
validate Specifies to insert the password into the Level-1 SNP

PDUs and to check the password in SNP PDUs that are
received.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#domain-password mypasswd
ML66(config-router-isis)#domain-password mypasswd authenticate snp send-only
ML66(config-router-isis)#no domain-password
29.12 ip route high-priority
Synopsis
— ip route high-priority tag <TAGVALUE>
— no ip route high-priority tag
Description
Use this command to assign a high priority to an IS-IS IP prefix.
Use the no form of this command to remove a high priority tag.
Command Mode
Operands
TAGVALUE Specify the tag value. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#ip route high-priority tag 42
ML66(config-router-isis)#no ip route high-priority tag
29.13 is-type
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 247

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only}
— no is-type
Description
Use this command to set the IS to the specified level of routing.
Changing is-type brings down, then brings up a particular level of routing.

There is a limitation: only one IS-IS instance can run Level-2 routing (either
Level-2 only IS, or Level-1-2 IS).
By default, IS-IS uses level-1-2 if there is neither a Level-2 instance nor a

Level-1-2 instance. Otherwise, it uses level-1.
Use the no form of this command to set the IS to the default.
Command Mode
Options
level-1 Specifies to act only as a station router.
level-1-2 Specifies to act as both a station router and an area

router.
level-2-only Specifies to act only as an area router.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#is-type level-1
ML66(config-router-isis)#no is-type
29.14 key
Synopsis
[no] key <KEY>
Description
Use this command to manage, add, or delete authentication keys in a keychain.
This command allows you to enter the keychain key submode to set a password
for the key.
248 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
— key chain
— key-string
— accept-lifetime
— send-lifetime
Command Mode
Keychain submode — (config-keychain)
Operands
KEY The key ID number. The valid range is 0–2147483647.
Examples
Configuring a key numbered 1, and changing to the keychain key command
submode:
ML66(config)#key chain mychain
ML66(config-keychain)#key 1
ML66(config-keychain-key)#
29.15 key chain
Synopsis
[no] key chain <NAME>
Description
Use this command to enter the keychain management submode and to configure
a keychain with a keychain name. This command allows you to enter the
keychain submode to specify keys on this keychain.
Use the no form of this command to remove the keychain.
— key
— key-string
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 249

CLI Descriptions
— accept-lifetime
— send-lifetime
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the keychain.
Examples
Creating a keychain named mychain, and changing to keychain submode:
ML66(config-keychain)#
29.16 key-string
Synopsis
— key-string <PASSWORD>
— no key-string
Description
Use this command to specify a password to be used by a key.
Use the no form of this command to remove the password.
— key
— key chain
— accept-lifetime
— send-lifetime
Command Mode
250 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Operands
PASSWORD The string of characters to be used as a password by the

key. The maximum length is 256 characters.
Examples
Setting the password for key 1 in the keychain named mychain to prime:
ML66(config-keychain-key)#key-string prime
Removing the password for key 1 in the keychain named mychain:
ML66(config-keychain-key)#no key-string
29.17 lsp-gen-interval
Synopsis
— lsp-gen-interval [level-1 | level-2] <INTERVAL>
— no lsp-gen-interval
Description
Use this command to set the minimum interval before regenerating the same
LSP. The smaller the interval, the faster the convergence.
Note: This setting might cause more frequent flooding.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the interval
applies to both levels.
By default, IS-IS uses 30 seconds for the interval, and the interval is applied to
both level-1 and level-2.
Use the no form of this command to set the interval to the default.
— lsp-refresh-interval
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 251

CLI Descriptions
Operands
INTERVAL The minimum interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–

120.
Options
level-1 Sets the interval only for level-1.
level-2 Sets the interval only for level-2.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#lsp-gen-interval 5
29.18 lsp-mtu
Synopsis
— lsp-mtu [level-1 | level-2] <SIZE>
— no lsp-mtu [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the MTU size of LSPs.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the MTU size
Use the no form of this command to set the MTU size to the default.
Command Mode
Operands
SIZE The MTU size in bytes. The valid range is 512–1492.
Options
level-1 Sets the LSP MTU size for level-1 PDUs.
level-2 Sets the LSP MTU size for level-2 PDUs.
252 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#lsp-mtu 555
29.19 lsp-refresh-interval
Synopsis
— lsp-refresh-interval <INTERVAL>
— no lsp-refresh-interval
Description
Use this command to set the LSP refresh interval.
It is recommended to set the lsp-refresh-interval value to be smaller than

the max-lsp-lifetime value.
Use the no form of this command to set the interval to the default value.
— lsp-gen-interval
— max-lsp-lifetime
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL TheLSP refresh interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–

65535 s. The default setting is 900 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#lsp-refresh-interval 600
ML66(config-router-isis)#no lsp-refresh-interval
29.20 max-area-address
Synopsis
— max-area-address <NUMBER>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 253

CLI Descriptions
— no max-area-address
Description
Use this command to configure the maximum number of addresses for an IS-IS
area.
Use the no form of this command to remove the configuration for an IS-IS area.
Command Mode
Operands
NUMBER Specifies the maximum number of area addresses that

can be supported. The valid range is 3–254. By default,
the maximum number of addresses is 3 for an IS-IS area.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#max-area-address 25
ML66(config-router-isis)#no max-area-address
29.21 max-lsp-lifetime
Synopsis
— max-lsp-lifetime <LIFETIME>
— no max-lsp-lifetime
Description
Use this command to set the maximum LSP lifetime.
It is recommended to set the max-lsp-lifetime value to be greater than the

lsp-refresh-interval value.
Use the no form of this command to set the lifetime to the default.
— lsp-refresh-interval
Command Mode
254 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Operands
LIFETIME Specifies the maximum LSP lifetime in seconds. The valid

range is 350–65535 s. By default, the maximum LSP
lifetime is 1200 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#max-lsp-lifetime 1500
ML66(config-router-isis)#no max-lsp-lifetime
29.22 metric-style
Synopsis
— metric-style {narrow | wide} [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2]
— no metric-style {narrow | wide} [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to configure the IS-IS metric style.
By default, IS-IS uses narrow metric style for levels 1 and 2.
Use the no form of this command to set the style to the default style of narrow.
Use Table 29 when changing the method of how TLV encodes and SPF calculates
a decision.
Table 29 Metric-Style Command Options

Metric-Style Wide SPF Wide TLV Narrow SPF Narrow TLV
Command
narrow OFF OFF ON OFF
(default)
wide ON ON OFF OFF
Here, the following SPF and TLV settings are defined:
Wide SPF Uses wide TLVs for SPF calculation.
Wide TLV Encodes wide TLVs in the LSP.
Narrow SPF Uses narrow TLVs for SPF calculation.
Narrow TLV Encodes narrow TLVs in the LSP.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 255

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Options
narrow Uses the old style of TLVs with narrow metric.
wide Uses the new style of TLVs to carry wider metric.
level-1 Specifies the metric style only for level 1.
level-1-2 Specifies the metric style for levels 1 and 2.
level-2 Specifies the metric style only for level 2.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#metric-style wide level-1
ML66(config-router-isis)#no metric-style narrow
ML66(config-router-isis)#no metric-style wide level-1
29.23 net
Synopsis
[no] net <NET>
Description
Use this command to add a Network Entity Title (NET) for an instance.
On a router running IS-IS, a NET can be 8–20 bytes in length. The last byte is
always the n-selector, and must be zero. The n-selector indicates no transport
entity, and means that the packet is for the routing software of the system. The
six bytes directly preceding the n-selector are the system ID. The system ID
length is a fixed size and cannot be changed. The system ID must be unique
throughout each area (Level 1) and throughout the backbone (Level 2).
The bytes preceding the system ID are the area ID, which can be 1–13 bytes in
length. A maximum of three NETs per router are allowed with different area ID
but the system ID should be the same for all NETs.
By default, IS-IS does not configure a NET, and routing is not enabled for an
interface.
Use the no form of this command to remove a NET.
256 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Operands
NET Specify a NET address in 1 to 13 octets in the format of

<XX.XXXX. ... .XXXX.XX> .
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#net 49.0000.0001.0002.0003.00
29.24 redistribute
Synopsis
— redistribute {bgp | connected | kernel | ospf | static} [level-1]

[level-2] [level-1-2] [metric-type {internal | external}] [metric
<METRIC>] [route-map <MAPNAME>]
— no redistribute {bgp | connected | kernel | ospf | static}
Description
Use this command to enable redistribution of information from another routing
protocol.
Use the no form of this command to disable redistribution.
Command Mode
Operands
METRIC The IS-IS default metric. The valid range is 0–

4261412864.
MAPNAME The route map name.
Options
bgp Specifies Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes.
connected Specifies connected routes.
kernel Specifies kernel routes.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 257

CLI Descriptions
ospf Specifies Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes.
static Specifies static routes.
level-1 Specifies IS-IS level-1 routes.
level-2 Specifies IS-IS level-2 routes.
level-1-2 Specifies IS-IS level-1 and level-2 routes.
metric-type Specifies an IS-IS exterior metric type for redistributed

routes.
internal Sets an IS-IS internal metric type.
external Sets an IS-IS external metric type.
metric Specifies a metric for redistributed routes.
route-map References a route map.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#redistribute connected level-1 level-2 metric 42 metric-t →
ype internal route-map name
ML66(config-router-isis)#no redistribute connected
29.25 router isis
Synopsis
[no] router isis [<TAG>]
Description
Use this command to initiate a IS-IS routing instance and enter IS-IS
configuration mode. Configure at least one NET to start routing. Also, enable a
particular interface with the ip router isis command.
Use the no form of this command to remove an IS-IS routing instance.
Note: The router supports only one IS-IS routing instance.
— ip router isis
258 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
— net
Command Mode
Operands
TAG Specifies an ISO routing instance tag, which identifies the

IS-IS routing instance.
Examples
Creating the IS-IS routing instance is1:
ML66(config)#router isis is1
ML66(config-router-isis)#
29.26 send-lifetime
Synopsis
— send-lifetime <STARTTIME> <STARTDATE> {<ENDTIME> <ENDDATE> |

duration <DURATION> | infinite}
— no send-lifetime
Description
Use this command to specify the time period during which the authentication key
on a keychain can be sent.
— key
— key chain
— key-string
— accept-lifetime
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 259

CLI Descriptions
Operands
STARTTIME The start time of send-lifetime in hours, minutes and

STARTDATE The start date of send-lifetime in the following format:

<MONTH DAY YEAR> — Month of the year using the first
three letters of the month, day of the month, and year
using four digits. For example, Feb 3 2018.
ENDTIME The end time of send-lifetime in hours, minutes and

ENDDATE The end date of send-lifetime in the following format:

<MONTH DAY YEAR> — Month of the year using the first
three letters of the month, day of the month, and year
using four digits. For example, Feb 3 2018.
DURATION The duration of send-lifetime in seconds. The valid range

is 1–2147483646 s.
Options
duration Specifies the duration of send-lifetime.
infinite Specifies send-lifetime to never expire.
Examples
Setting send-lifetime for key 1 on the keychain named mychain:
ML66(config-keychain-key)#send-lifetime 03:03:01 Jan 3 2004 04:04:02 Jan 3 2006
29.27 set-overload-bit
Synopsis
— set-overload-bit on-startup {<TIME> | wait-for-bgp} [suppress

{external | interlevel} [{interlevel | external}]]
— set-overload-bit suppress {external | interlevel} [[interlevel |

external] [on-startup {<TIME> | wait-for-bgp}]]
Description
Use this command to set the overload-bit in self-LSPs. If the overload-bit is set in
LSPs, the router is not used as a transit router during SPF calculation. This
260 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
command causes a router to update its own LSP with the overload bit set, and it
causes the other routers not to use this router as a transit or forwarding router.
The router continues to receive LSPs when the overload bit is set. If the on-
startup option is specified, the router sets the overload bit only at startup, then
clears the bit after the specified interval has elapsed. If the on-startup option is
specified using the wait-for-bgp option, the overload bit is set up at startup,
then the bit is cleared after the BGP router signals it has finished converging, or if
the router does not signal that it has finished converging in 10 minutes. If there is
no BGP process running, the overload bit clears immediately.
If the BGP process is started later than the overload bit is set, the bit clears after
the BGP router signals it has finished converging, or if the BGP router does not
signal that it has finished converging in 10 minutes. If the suppress option is
specified, the router suppresses the redistribution of specified types of
reachability data during overload state. The suppress option can be used with
the external or interlevel parameters, or both parameters.
By default, no overload-bit is set.
Use the no form of this command to clear the overload-bit from self-LSPs.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The time in seconds to advertise oneself as overloaded

after reboot. The valid range is 5–86400 s.
Options
on-startup Specifies an interval in seconds after which the overload

state is exited.
wait-for-bgp Lets BGP decide when to unset the overload bit.
suppress Suppresses specific types of IP prefixes.
external Redistributes external reachability to prevent the IP

prefixes learned from other protocols from being
advertised.
interlevel Redistributes interlevel reachability to prevent the IP

prefixes learned from another IS-IS level from being
advertised.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 261

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the overload bit at startup, not unsetting the overload bit until BGP
converges, suppressing redistribution between levels, and suppressing
redistribution from external routing protocols while the overload bit is set:
ML66(config-router-isis)#set-overload-bit on-startup wait-for-bgp suppress interle →
vel external
29.28 spf-interval-exp
Synopsis
— spf-interval-exp [level-1 | level-2] <MINDELAY> <MAXDELAY>
— no spf-interval-exp [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the minimum and maximum hold intervals between
Shortest Path First (SPF) calculations.
This command configures the minimum and maximum interval time between the
receipt of a topology change and the calculation of the SPF.
By default, IS-IS uses 500 ms for the minimum and 50,000 ms for the maximum
hold intervals, respectively. The values are applied to both level 1 and level 2 if
the level parameter is omitted.
Use the no form of this command to set the minimum and maximum hold
intervals to the default.
Command Mode
Operands
MINDELAY Specifies the minimum delay between receiving a change

and SPF calculation in milliseconds. The valid range is 0–
2147483647 ms.
MAXDELAY Specifies the maximum delay between receiving a

change and SPF calculation in milliseconds. The valid
range is 0–2147483647 ms.
Options
level-1 Specifies an interval for only level-1 IS.
262 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Commands
level-2 Specifies an interval for only level-2 IS.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#spf-interval-exp level-1 600 60000
ML66(config-router-isis)#no spf-interval-exp
29.29 summary-address
Synopsis
— summary-address <ADDR/PREFIX> [level-1] [metric <METRIC>]
— no summary-address <ADDR/PREFIX>
Description
Use this command to configure a summary address to summarize IPv4
reachability information.
By default, IS-IS does not configure the summary address.
Command Mode
Operands
ADDR/PREFIX Specifies an IPv4 network prefix in the following format:

<A.B.C.D/P> , for example, 1.2.3.0/24.
METRIC The metric value. The valid range is 1–63.
Options
level-1 Summarizes reachability information only for level 1.
metric Specifies a metric for the summary address.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#summary-address 10.10.0.0/16
ML66(config-router-isis)#no summary-address 10.10.0.0/16
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 263

CLI Descriptions
30 IS-IS Interface Commands
30.
The following command mode is applicable for the Intermediate System–

Intermediate System (IS-IS) interface commands:
— Router Loopback Interface configuration submode — (config-router-lo)

vlan)
Table 30 IS-IS Commands Overview

ip router isis enable IS-IS IPv4 routing on an
interface
isis authentication key-chain set the keychain to be used for
authentication on the interface-
related packets
isis authentication mode set the MD5 authentication mode
isis authentication send-only set the send-only option to the
interface-related packets
isis circuit-type set the circuit type for an interface
isis csnp-interval set the Complete Sequence Number
PDU (CSNP) interval in seconds
isis hello configure the padding of IS-IS Hello
packets
isis hello-interval set the hello interval
isis hello-multiplier set a multiplier for the hello holding
time
isis metric set the default metric for an interface
isis network change a broadcast interface network
type to a point-to-point network type
isis password set the authentication password of
Hello PDUs on an interface
isis priority set the priority for LAN DIS election
isis retransmit-interval set the LSP retransmission interval
264 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IS-IS Interface Commands
isis tag set a tag on the IP address configured

for an interface when this IP prefix is
put into an IS-IS LSP
isis wide-metric set the wide metric for an interface
— show clns is-neighbors
— show clns neighbors
— show ip isis igp-shortcut-lsp
— show ip isis route
— show ip isis route igp-shortcut
— show isis counter
— show isis database
— show isis interface
— show isis topology
30.1 ip router isis
Synopsis
[no] ip router isis <TAG>
Description
Use this command to enable IS-IS IPv4 routing on an interface. This command is
mandatory in an IS-IS configuration. Match the IS-IS instance tag to a tag of an
existing instance, or initiate a new instance with the tag name, otherwise routing
will not run on this interface.
This command enables the router to send IS-IS Hello with IP address TLV on this
interface. As a result, IP reachability information TLV in the LSP gets updated.
In the default setting, IPv4 routing is disabled on the router.
Use the no form of this command to disable IS-IS IPv4 routing on an interface.
This action does not clear the IS-IS database. To clear the database, unconfigure
the IS-IS routing instance.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 265

CLI Descriptions
— router isis
Command Mode
Router Loopback Interface configuration submode — (config-router-lo)
Operands
Examples
Enabling IS-IS routing on the interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ip router isis is1
30.2 isis authentication key-chain
Synopsis
— isis authentication key-chain <NAME> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis authentication key-chain [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the keychain to be used for authentication on the
interface-related packets.
Authentication mode must be set to MD5 to configure the keychain. If no

keychain is configured with the key command, no keychain authentication is
performed. Only one authentication keychain is applied to a IS-IS interface at a
time. Executing a second isis authentication key-chain command
overrides the first isis authentication key-chain command.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the keychain
applies to the levels on which the authentication mode is configured as MD5.
Authentication can be specified for an entire instance of IS-IS, instead of at the
interface level, by using the authentication key-chain command.
Use the no form of this command to unset the keychain used for authentication
on the interface-related packets.
266 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— isis authentication mode
— isis authentication send-only
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The keychain name.
Options
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis authentication mode md5
ML66(config-router-if)#isis authentication key-chain ipi level-1
30.3 isis authentication mode
Synopsis
[no] isis authentication mode {md5 | text} [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the MD5 authentication mode.
If clear text authentication was configured using the isis password command,
the isis authentication mode command overrides the isis password
command. If the isis authentication mode command was used and
subsequently an attempt is made to use the isis password command, the
attempt fails.
To configure clear text authentication using the isis password command, first
use the no isis authentication mode command. The type of authentication
and the level to which it applies can be specified for the entire IS-IS instance,
rather than per interface, using the authentication mode command.
Use the no form of this command to unset the MD5 authentication mode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 267

CLI Descriptions
— isis authentication key-chain
— isis authentication send-only
Command Mode
Options
md5 Specifies the keyed message digest mode (MD5). In the

default setting, the authentication mode is set to MD5 for
both levels if no level is specified.
text Specifies the text mode.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis authentication mode md5 level-1
30.4 isis authentication send-only
Synopsis
[no] isis authentication send-only [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the send-only option to the interface-related packets.
Use this command before configuring the IS-IS authentication mode and IS-IS
authentication key-chain, so that the implementation of authentication goes
smoothly. That is, the routers will have more time for the keys to be configured on
each router if authentication is inserted only on the packets being sent, not
checked on packets being received. After all routers that must communicate are
configured with this command, enable the authentication mode and keychain on
each router.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the option applies
to both levels.
Use the no form of this command to unset the send-only option on the interface-
related packets.
268 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— isis authentication key-chain
— isis authentication mode
Command Mode
Options
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis authentication send-only level-1
30.5 isis circuit-type
Synopsis
— isis circuit-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only}
— no isis circuit-type
Description
Use this command to set the circuit type for an interface.
If level-1 or level-2-only is specified in this command, IS-IS sends only the

specified level of PDUs. On the point-to-point interface, there is only one type of
Hello packet, so in this case IS-IS Hello will be sent regardless of circuit-type. If
the is-type command is configured as level-1 or level-2-only, routing for
this instance is performed for only the specified level. In this manner, only the
particular level of PDUs are sent on the interface.
Use the no form of this command to reset the circuit type to the default.
— is-type
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 269

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Options
level-1 Specifies that only Level-1 adjacencies are formed.
level-1-2 Specifies that Level-1-2 adjacencies are formed. This is

the default setting.
level-2-only Specifies that only Level-2 adjacencies are formed.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis circuit-type level-2-only
30.6 isis csnp-interval
Synopsis
— isis csnp-interval <INTERVAL> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis csnp-interval [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the Complete Sequence Number PDU (CSNP) interval in
seconds.
This command changes the interval between two consecutive CSNP

transmissions. By default, both Level-1 and Level-2 CSNPs are sent every 10
seconds only by LAN DIS. This parameter is only valid on a broadcast interface,
since periodic CSNPs are only sent on a broadcast interface, while CSNPs on a
Point-to-Point interface are sent only when an adjacency is initiated.
Use the no form of this command to reset the CSNP interval to the default value.
Command Mode
270 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
INTERVAL The CSNP interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–

65535 s.
Options
level-1 Specifies an interval for Level-1 CSNPs.
level-2 Specifies an interval for Level-2 CSNPs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis csnp-interval 20
30.7 isis hello
Synopsis
[no] isis hello padding
Description
Use this command to configure the padding of IS-IS Hello packets. IS-IS pads
Hello packets by default to notify neighbors of the supported MTU size.
Use the no form of this command to disable the padding.
— isis hello-interval
Command Mode
Options
padding Sets padding for IS-IS Hello packets.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis hello padding
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 271

CLI Descriptions
30.8 isis hello-interval
Synopsis
— isis hello-interval {minimal | <INTERVAL> } [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis hello-interval [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the hello interval in seconds. The hello interval is set
together with the hello-multiplier command.
This command changes the time interval between two consecutive Hello
transmissions. If a device receives its own LSP with a maximum sequence
number, then it suspends IS-IS for the hold interval. DIS sends Hello
transmissions at three times the rate of non-DIS. If IS-IS is elected as DIS on this
interface, IS-IS sends hello every 3.3 seconds.
If the minimal keyword is specified, Holding timer in Hello PDU is set to 1 second
and Hello interval is calculated by dividing by the hello-multiplier. For example, if
the hello-multiplier is configured as 4 and the hello-interval minimal command is
used, a Hello PDU is sent every 250 milliseconds.
By default, IS-IS uses 10 seconds for the interval, and the interval is applied to
both Level-1 and Level-2 IIHs.
Use the no form of this command to set the hello interval to the default.
— isis hello-multiplier
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The hello interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–65535.
Options
minimal Specifies the holding time as 1 second. The interval value

depends on the multiplier.
272 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

level-1 Specifies the hello interval for level-1 IIHs.
level-2 Specifies the hello interval for level-2 IIHs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis hello-interval 5 level-1
ML66(config-router-if)#isis hello-interval minimal
30.9 isis hello-multiplier
Synopsis
— isis hello-multiplier <MULTIPLIER> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis hello-multiplier [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set a multiplier for the hello holding time.
Changes Holding Timer in Hello PDU. Holding Timer is calculated by Hello-

Interval multiplied by this value. If the minimal keyword is specified with the
Hello-Interval, the Holding Timer is set to 1 second, and the Hello-Interval is
calculated by dividing 1 by this value.
By default, IS-IS uses 3 seconds for the multiplier value, and the multiplier is
applied to both Level-1 and Level-2.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the multiplier
Use the no form of this command to set the multiplier to the default.
— isis hello-interval
Command Mode
Operands
MULTIPLIER The hello multiplier value. The valid range is 2–100.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 273

CLI Descriptions
Options
level-1 Specifies the hello multiplier for level-1 IIHs.
level-2 Specifies the hello multiplier for level-2 IIHs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis hello-multiplier 4
30.10 isis metric
Synopsis
— isis metric <METRIC> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis metric [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the default metric for an interface. The interface default
metric is put into IP reachability information TLVs, IS reachability information
TLVs, and IPv6 reachability TLVs in LSPs. The value is used for SPF calculation,
and is applied when the metric-style is configured as narrow.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the metric applies
to both levels.
By default, IS-IS uses 10 for the metric value, and the value is applied to both
level-1 and level-2 links.
Use the no form of this command to set the default metric to the default.
— isis wide-metric
— metric-style
Command Mode
Operands
METRIC The default metric. The valid range is 1–63.
274 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
level-1 Applies a default metric to level-1 links.
level-2 Applies a default metric to level-2 links.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis metric 20
30.11 isis network
Synopsis
— isis network {broadcast | point-to-point}
— no isis network
Description
Use this command to change a broadcast interface network type to a point-to-
point network type.
By default, the network is set to a broadcast multi-access network.
Use the no form of this command to revert to the default setting of a broadcast
interface network type.
Command Mode
Options
broadcast Specifies an IS-IS broadcast multi-access network.
point-to-point Specifies an IS-IS point-to-point network.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis network point-to-point
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 275

CLI Descriptions
30.12 isis password
Synopsis
— isis password <PASSWORD> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis password [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the authentication password of Hello PDUs on an
interface.
By default, no password is configured either for level-1 or for level-2 PDUs.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the password
Note: If the network type is point-to-point, the password is always applied to

both levels.
Use the no form of this command to clear the password.
— area-password
— domain-password
Command Mode
Operands
PASSWORD The password string. The maximum password length is

254 characters.
Options
level-1 Specifies a password for level-1 PDUs.
level-2 Specifies a password for level-2 PDUs.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis password mypassword level-1
276 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

30.13 isis priority
Synopsis
— isis priority <PRIORITY> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis priority [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the priority for LAN DIS election. This command
changes the priority value in LAN IS-IS Hello PDUs. A lower priority value is less
preferred in DIS election, and a higher priority value is more preferred.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the priority applies
to both levels.
By default, IS-IS uses 64 for the priority value, and the priority is applied to both
level-1 and level-2 routing.
Note: This command is not valid for a point-to-point interface.
Use the no form of this command to set the priority to the default.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The priority value. The valid range is 0–127.
Options
level-1 Specifies a priority for level-1 routing.
level-2 Specifies a priority for level-2 routing.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis priority 127
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 277

CLI Descriptions
30.14 isis retransmit-interval
Synopsis
— isis retransmit-interval <INTERVAL>
— no isis retransmit-interval
Description
Use this command to set the LSP retransmission interval.
Use the no form of this command to set the interval to the default.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL Specify the interval between retransmissions of the same

LSP in seconds. The valid range is 0–65535 s. By default,
IS-IS uses an interval of 5 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis retransmit-interval 10
ML66(config-router-if)#no isis retransmit-interval
30.15 isis tag
Synopsis
— isis tag <TAGVALUE>
— no isis tag
Description
Use this command to set a tag on the IP address configured for an interface
when this IP prefix is put into an IS-IS link-state packet (LSP).
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the tag applies to
both levels.
Use the no form of this command to remove a tag.
278 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
TAGVALUE The tag value. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis tag 42
ML66(config-router-if)#no isis tag
30.16 isis wide-metric
Synopsis
— isis wide-metric <WIDEMETRIC> [level-1 | level-2]
— no isis wide-metric [level-1 | level-2]
Description
Use this command to set the wide metric for an interface.
Interface wide-metric is put into Extended IP reachability TLVs, Extended IS

reachability TLVs, and IPv6 reachability TLVs in LSPs. The value is used for SPF
calculation. This value is applied when metric-style is configured as wide.
If neither the level-1 nor the level-2 keyword is configured, the wide metric
By default, IS-IS uses 10 for the metric value, and the metric is applied to both
level-1 and level-2 links.
Use the no form of this command to set the wide metric to the default.
— isis metric
— metric-style
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 279

CLI Descriptions
Operands
WIDEMETRIC The wide metric. The valid range is 1–16777214.
Options
level-1 Applies a metric to level-1 links.
level-2 Applies a metric to level-2 links.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#isis wide-metric 100
ML66(config-router-if)#no isis wide-metric
280 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LDP Configuration Commands
31 LDP Configuration Commands
31.
The following command modes are applicable for the Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP) configuration commands:
— Exec mode — >
— LDP Router configuration submode — (config-router-ldp)
Table 31 LDP Configuration Commands Overview

advertisement-mode set the label advertisement mode for
all the interfaces on the current Label
Switch Router (LSR)
clear ldp adjacency clear an adjacency with a specified
peer, or to clear all adjacencies for the
current LSR
clear ldp session clear a session established with a
specified peer, or to clear all sessions
for the current LSR
clear ldp statistics clear Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
statistics
control-mode set the control mode for label
processing
dscp enable DSCP marking
explicit-null configure the router to send Explicit
Null labels for directly connected
Forwarding Equivalence Classes
(FECs) instead of Implicit Null labels
global-merge-capability override the default merge capability
setting of all the interfaces on the
current LSR
hello-interval set the interval after which hello
packets are sent out
hold-time set the global value for the hold time
after which the LSR rejects
adjacencies
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 281

CLI Descriptions
import-bgp-routes import Border Gateway Protocol

(BGP) routes into LDP
inter-area-lsp enable the creation of inter-area
Label-Switched Paths (LSPs)
keepalive-interval set the global value for the interval
after which keep alive packets are sent
out
keepalive-timeout set the time period for which an LSR
must wait for successive keepalive
messages from LDP peers
label-retention-mode set the retention mode to be used for
all labels exchanged
ldp-optimization optimize the resetting of an LDP
session
loop-detection enable loop detection on the current
LSR
loop-detection-hop-count set the loop detection hop count
loop-detection-path-vec-count set the loop detection vector count
neighbor auth md5 password set the password for each LDP peer
that is used for authentication when
communicating with the specified peer
multicast-hellos enable multicast hello exchange on all
interfaces enabled for LDP
propagate-release propagate the release of labels to
downstream routers
request-retry enable the retry of requests once a
request for a label has been rejected
for a valid reason
request-retry-timeout set the interval between retries
router ldp change to the (config-router-ldp)
submode
router-id set an LDP router ID
targeted-peer hello-interval set the interval for sending unicast
hello packets to targeted peers
targeted-peer hold-time set the timeout value that the router
waits before rejecting an adjacency
with targeted peers
transport-address ipv4 configure an IPv4 transport address
for a label space
282 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— show ldp
— show ldp adjacency
— show ldp downstream
— show ldp fec
— show ldp inter-area-fecs
— show ldp interface
— show ldp lsp
— show ldp session
— show ldp statistics
— show ldp targeted-peers
— show ldp upstream
— show mpls ldp
884.
31.1 advertisement-mode
Synopsis
— advertisement-mode {downstream-on-demand | downstream-

unsolicited}
— no advertisement-mode
Description
Use this command to set the label advertisement mode for all the interfaces on
the current Label Switch Router (LSR). Setting downstream-on-demand and
downstream-unsolicited mode affects which LSR initiates mapping requests
and mapping advertisements. By default, the downstream-unsolicited mode is
used.
Setting the advertisement mode for an interface using ldp advertisement-

mode command overrides the value set by this command. Running
advertisement-mode command before the interface is up, as all affected
sessions are closed and restarted.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 283

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to restore the default advertisement mode value.
Command Mode
LDP Router configuration submode — (config-router-ldp)
Options
downstream-on-demand
Sets the downstream-on-Demand (DoD) advertisement
mode. The mode enables the router to send a label upon
request. When a users uses this mode, a router distributes
a label to a peer only if there is a pending label request
from a peer. The reaction of the downstream router to this
request depends on the label advertising mode supported
on the next hop. This mode is typically used with the
conservative label retention mode.
downstream-unsolicited
Sets the Downstream-Unsolicited (DU) advertisement
mode. The mode enables the router to send a label
without waiting a request. This mode distributes labels to
peers without waiting for a label request, and is typically
used with the liberal label retention mode.
Examples
Using the downstream-unsolicited advertisement mode for a Label Distribution
Protocol (LDP) session on its interfaces:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#advertisement-mode downstream-unsolicited
31.2 clear ldp adjacency
Synopsis
clear ldp adjacency [* | <IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to clear an adjacency with a specified peer, or to clear all
adjacencies for the current Label Switch Router (LSR).
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
284 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
* Clears all adjacencies.
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of a peer, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Clearing an adjacency with a specified peer:
ML66#clear ldp adjacency 123.123.123.33
31.3 clear ldp session
Synopsis
clear ldp session [* | <IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to clear a session established with a specified peer, or to clear
all sessions for the current Label Switch Router (LSR).
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
* Clears all sessions.
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of a peer, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Clearing a session established with a specified peer:
ML66#clear ldp session 123.123.123.33
31.4 clear ldp statistics
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 285

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
clear ldp statistics
Description
Use this command to clear Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) statistics.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Clearing LDP statistics:
ML66#clear ldp statistics
31.5 control-mode
Synopsis
— control-mode {ordered | independent}
— no control-mode
Description
Use this command to set the control mode for label processing.
Use the no option to restore the default control mode.
Command Mode
Options
ordered Sets ordered control mode.
independent Sets independent control mode.
Examples
Setting ordered control mode:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#control-mode ordered
286 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

31.6 dscp
Synopsis
— dscp <DSCP>
— no dscp
Description
Use this command to enable DSCP marking. The default value is 48.
Use the no option to set DSCP marking to default value.
Command Mode
Operands
DSCP The DSCP value. The valid range is 0-63. The default
value is 48.
Examples
Enabling DSCP marking:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#dscp 16
31.7 explicit-null
Synopsis
[no] explicit-null
Description
Use this command to configure the router to send Explicit Null labels for directly
connected Forwarding Equivalence Classes (FECs) instead of Implicit Null labels.
By default, the router sends Implicit Null labels.
Note: Do not use this command if Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) is

concurrently used for Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)/Border
Gateway Protocol (BGP) VPNs.
Use the no option to stop sending Explicit Null labels for directly connected FECs
and resume sending Implicit Null labels for them.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 287

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Sending Explicit Null labels:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#explicit-null
31.8 global-merge-capability
Synopsis
— global-merge-capability {merge-capable | non-merge-capable}
— no global-merge-capability
Description
Use this command to override the default merge capability setting of all the
interfaces on the current Label Switch Router (LSR).
Use the no option to restore the default merge capability settings of all the
interfaces for this LSR.
Command Mode
Options
merge-capable Maps all incoming labels that are destined for the same
Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) to the same
outgoing label. This is the Ethernet default.
non-merge-capable
Maps all incoming labels, regardless of destination FEC,
to unique outgoing label. This is the non-Ethernet default.
Examples
Mapping all incoming labels that are destined for the same FEC to the same
outgoing label:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#global-merge-capability merge-capable
288 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

31.9 hello-interval
Synopsis
— hello-interval <TIME>
— no hello-interval
Description
Use this command to set the interval after which hello packets are sent out. By
default, the hello packet sending interval is 5 seconds. Setting the hello packet
sending interval on an interface using ldp hello-interval command overrides
the value set by this command.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME Specifies the interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–

21845.
Examples
Setting the hello interval value for all interfaces on a Label Switch Router (LSR):
ML66(config-router-ldp)#hello-interval 35
31.10 hold-time
Synopsis
— hold-time <TIME>
— no hold-time
Description
Use this command to set the global value for the hold time after which the Label
Switch Router (LSR) rejects adjacencies. Setting the hold time on an interface
using ldp hold-time command overrides the value set by this command.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 289

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
TIME Specifies the hold time value in seconds. The valid ranges
is 3–65535. The default value is 15 seconds.
Examples
Setting the hold time value for all interfaces on an LSR:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#hold-time 635
31.11 import-bgp-routes
Synopsis
[no] import-bgp-routes
Description
Use this command to import Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes into Label
Distribution Protocol (LDP).
Use the no option to flush out all BGP routes currently being used by LDP, and to
reject any further BGP specific routing updates.
Command Mode
Examples
Importing BGP routed into LDP:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#import-bgp-routes
31.12 inter-area-lsp
Synopsis
— inter-area-lsp [config-only]
290 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— no inter-area-lsp
Description
Use this command to enable the creation of inter-area Label-Switched Paths
(LSPs).
Use the no option to disable the configuration.
Command Mode
Options
config-only Keeps existing Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) sessions.
Examples
Creating inter-area LSPs:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#inter-area-lsp
31.13 keepalive-interval
Synopsis
— keepalive-interval <TIME>
— no keepalive-interval
Description
Use this command to set the global value for the interval after which keep alive
packets are sent out. Setting the keep alive interval on an interface using ldp
keepalive-interval command overrides the value set by this command.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The interval value in seconds. The valid range is 10–

21845. The default value is 10 seconds.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 291

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the keep alive timer for all interfaces of a Label Switch Router (LSR):
ML66(config-router-ldp)#keepalive-interval 635
31.14 keepalive-timeout
Synopsis
— keepalive-timeout <TIME>
— no keepalive-timeout
Description
Use this command to set the global value for the timeout after which sessions are
rejected. Setting the keep alive timeout value on an interface using ldp
keepalive-timeout command overrides the value set by this command.
Command Mode
Options
TIME The timeout value in seconds. The valid range is 30–

65535. The default value is 30 seconds.
Examples
Setting the keep alive timeout value for all interfaces of a Label Switch Router
(LSR):
ML66(config-router-ldp)#keepalive-timeout 635
31.15 label-retention-mode
Synopsis
— label-retention-mode {conservative | liberal}
— no label-retention-mode
292 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the retention mode to be used for all labels exchanged.
Setting the retention mode on an interface using ldp label-retention-mode
command overrides the value set by this command.
Note: All affected sessions are restarted if any changes made to the retention
mode for an interface.
Use the no option to revert to the retention mode set for the main Label
Distribution Protocol (LDP) process.
Command Mode
Options
conservative Sets conservative label retention mode. All unused labels

and Forwarding Equivalence Classes (FECs) are deleted.
liberal Sets liberal label retention mode. All labels, regardless of

use or not, are retained.
Examples
Setting the retention mode for all interfaces of a Label Switch Router (LSR):
ML66(config-router-ldp)#label-retention-mode liberal
31.16 ldp-optimization
Synopsis
[no] ldp-optimization
Description
Use this command to optimize the resetting of a Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP) session. By default, LDP optimization is disabled.
The following scalability features can be enabled for LDP:
— Resetting the session keep alive timer on receipt of a Hello message.
— Resetting the hold timer on receipt of any LDP control message.
Use the no option to disable the scalability features.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 293

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling LDP optimization:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#ldp-optimization
31.17 loop-detection
Synopsis
[no] loop-detection
Description
Use this command to enable loop detection on the current Label Switch Router
(LSR).
Use the no option to disable loop detection.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling loop detection:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#loop-detection
31.18 loop-detection-hop-count
Synopsis
— loop-detection-hop-count <COUNT>
— no loop-detection-hop-count
Description
Use this command to set the loop detection hop count, which determines the
maximum hop count value.
Use the no option to restore the default loop detection count.
294 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
COUNT Sets the loop detection hop count. The valid range is 1–
255.
Examples
Setting the loop detection hop count:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#loop-detection-hop-count 128
31.19 loop-detection-path-vec-count
Synopsis
— loop-detection-path-vec-count <COUNT>
— no loop-detection-path-vec-count
Description
Use this command to set the loop detection vector count, which determines the
maximum supported path vectors.
Use the no option to restore the default vector count.
Command Mode
Operands
COUNT Sets the loop detection vector count. The valid range is
1–255.
Examples
Setting the loop detection vector count:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#loop-detection-path-vec-count 123
31.20 neighbor auth md5 password
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 295

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
neighbor <IPADDR> auth md5 password <PASSWORD>
no neighbor <IPADDR> auth md5 password [<PASSWORD> ]
Description
Use this command to set the password for each Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
peer that is used for authentication when communicating with the specified peer.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of the neighbor, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
PASSWORD The MD5 password. The maximum password length is

256 characters.
Options
auth Specifies authentication type.
md5 Uses MD5 algorithm.
password Sets the MD5 password.
Examples
Setting the MD5 password for each LDP peer that is used for authentication:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#neighbor 192.168.3.5 auth md5 password mypwd
31.21 multicast-hellos
Synopsis
[no] multicast-hellos
296 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to enable multicast hello exchange on all interfaces enabled
for Label Distribution Protocol (LDP). By default, multicast hello exchange is
enabled.
Use the no option to disable multicast hello exchange.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling multicast hello exchnage on all interfaces enabled for LDP:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#multicast-hellos
31.22 propagate-release
Synopsis
[no] propagate-release
Description
Use this command to propagate the release of labels to downstream routers.
Use the no options to prevent the release propagation of labels.
Command Mode
Examples
Propagating the release of labels to downstream routers:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#propagate-release
31.23 request-retry
Synopsis
[no] request-retry
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 297

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable the retry of requests once a request for a label has
been rejected for a valid reason. A Label Switch Router (LSR) can send maximum
five label requests if a label request is rejected by a Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP) peer. By default, the request retry is enabled.
Use the no option to disable the retry of requests.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the retry of requests:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#request-retry
31.24 request-retry-timeout
Synopsis
— request-retry-timeout <TIME>
— no request-retry-timeout
Description
Use this command to set the interval between retries. Before this time elapses, a
request is resent to a peer.
Use the no option to restore the default request retry timeout time.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The interval between retries in seconds. The valid range is

1–65535. The default request retry timeout time is 5
seconds.
Examples
Setting the interval between retries:
298 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-router-ldp)#request-retry-timeout 512
31.25 router ldp
Synopsis
[no] router ldp
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-router-ldp) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-router-ldp) submode:
ML66(config)#router ldp
ML66(config-router-ldp)#
31.26 router-id
Synopsis
— router-id <IPADDR>
— no router-id [<IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to set a Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) router ID.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 299

CLI Descriptions
Operands
IPADDR The LDP router ID, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Setting an LDP router ID:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#router-id 123.123.123.8
31.27 targeted-peer hello-interval
Synopsis
— targeted-peer hello-interval <TIME>
— no targeted-peer hello-interval
Description
Use this command to set the interval for sending unicast hello packets to targeted
peers.
Use the no option to restore the default targeted peer hello interval value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–21845. The

Examples
Setting the interval for sending unicast hello packets:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#targeted-peer hello-interval 1
31.28 targeted-peer hold-time
Synopsis
— targeted-peer hold-time <TIME>
300 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— no targeted-peer hold-time
Description
Use this command to set the timeout value that the router waits before rejecting
an adjacency with targeted peers.
Use the no option to restore the default targeted peer hold time value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The hold time in seconds. The valid range is 3–65535.

The default value is 45 seconds.
Examples
Setting the timeout value that the router waits before rejecting an adjacency with
targeted peers:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#targeted-peer hold-time 555
31.29 transport-address ipv4
Synopsis
[no] transport-address ipv4 <IPADDR> [<LABELSPACE> ]
Description
Use this command to configure an IPv4 transport address for a label space. By
default, the loopback address is selected as the transport address.
Use the no option to stop using the transport address as the IPv4 transport
address. If the label space is not specified, a label space of zero is assumed.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 transport address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> . Only addresses bound to a loopback interface
are valid for manual transport address configuration.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 301

CLI Descriptions
LABELSPACE The name of a label space for which the transport

address is being configured.
Examples
Configuring an IPv4 transport address for a label space:
ML66(config-router-ldp)#transport-address ipv4 10.10.0.5 myspace
302 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LDP Interface Commands
32 LDP Interface Commands
32.
The following command modes are applicable for the Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP) interface commands:
Table 32 LDP Interface Commands Overview

disable-ldp disable LDP IPv4 on an interface
enable-ldp enable LDP IPv4 on an interface
ldp advertisement-mode set the label advertisement mode for
an interface for the current LSR
ldp hello-interval set the interval for sending multicast
hello packets through an interface
ldp hold-time set the hold time value after which the
LSR rejects adjacencies
ldp keepalive-interval set the interval for sending keep alive
messages to the peer to maintain a
session
ldp keepalive-timeout set the keep alive timeout value for
rejecting a session with a peer
ldp label-retention-mode set the retention mode to be used for
all labels exchanged through an
interface
ldp multicast-hellos enable multicast hello exchange on an
interface
mpls ldp-igp sync configure LDP-IGP synchronization
mpls ldp-igp sync-delay configure the delay time for LDP-
Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP)
synchronization
— show ldp
— show ldp adjacency
— show ldp downstream
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 303

CLI Descriptions
— show ldp fec
— show ldp inter-area-fecs
— show ldp interface
— show ldp lsp
— show ldp session
— show ldp statistics
— show ldp targeted-peers
— show ldp upstream
— show mpls ldp
884.
32.1 disable-ldp
Synopsis
disable-ldp ipv4
Description
Use this command to disable Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) IPv4 on an
interface. This command disables the transmission of hello packets through the
current interface, and clears all created sessions and adjacencies for the interface.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling LDP IPv4:
ML66(config-router-if)#disable-ldp ipv4
32.2 enable-ldp
304 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
enable-ldp ipv4
Description
Use this command to enable Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) IPv4 on an
interface. This command enables the transmission of hello packets through the
current interface, so that LDP adjacencies and LDP sessions can be created.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling LDP IPv4:
ML66(config-router-if)#enable-ldp ipv4
32.3 ldp advertisement-mode
Synopsis
— ldp advertisement-mode {downstream-on-demand | downstream-

unsolicited}
— no ldp advertisement-mode
Description
Use this command to set the label advertisement mode for an interface for the
current Label Switch Router (LSR). This command overrides the advertisement
set for an LSR using the global advertisement-mode command.
Use the no option to revert to the advertisement mode set for the main Label
Command Mode
Options
downstream-on-demand
Indicate that the sent label was requested. When a user
uses this parameter, a router distributes a label to a peer
only if there is a pending label request from a peer. The
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 305

CLI Descriptions
reaction of the downstream router to this request

depends on the label advertising mode supported on the
next hop. The downstream-on-demand mode is typically
used with the conservative label retention mode.
downstream-unsolicited
Indicate that the label was sent unrequested. This
parameter distributes labels to peers without waiting for
a label request. This mode is typically used with the
liberal label retention mode.
Examples
Setting the label advertisement mode for an interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ldp advertisement-mode downstream-on-demand
32.4 ldp hello-interval
Synopsis
— ldp hello-interval <TIME>
— no ldp hello-interval
Description
Use this command to set the interval for sending multicast hello packets through
an interface. This command overrides the value set for a Label Switch Router
(LSR) using the global hello-interval command.
Use the no option to revert to the hello interval value set for the main Label
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The hello interval value in seconds. The valid range is 1–

21845.
Examples
Setting the hello interval for an interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ldp hello-interval 635
306 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

32.5 ldp hold-time
Synopsis
— ldp hold-time <TIME>
— no ldp hold-time
Description
Use this command to set the hold time value after which the Label Switch Router
(LSR) rejects adjacencies. This command overrides the value set for an LSR using
the global hold-time command.
Use the no option to revert to the hold time value set for the main Label
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The hold time value in seconds. The valid range is 3–

65535.
Examples
Setting the hold time for an interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ldp hold-time 635
32.6 ldp keepalive-interval
Synopsis
— ldp keepalive-interval <TIME>
— no ldp keepalive-interval
Description
Use this command to set the interval for sending keep alive messages to the peer
to maintain a session. This command overrides the value set for a Label Switch
Router (LSR) using the global keepalive-interval command.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 307

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to revert to the keep alive interval set for the main Label
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The keep alive interval value in seconds. The valid range
is 10–21845.
Examples
Setting the keep alive sending interval for an interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ldp keepalive-interval 635
32.7 ldp keepalive-timeout
Synopsis
— ldp keepalive-timeout <TIME>
— no ldp keepalive-timeout
Description
Use this command to set the keep alive timeout value for rejecting a session with
a peer. This command overrides the value set for a Label Switch Router (LSR)
using the global keepalive-timeout command.
Use the no option to revert to the keep alive timeout set for the main Label
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The keep alive timeout value in seconds. The valid range
is 30–65535.
Examples
Setting the keep alive timeout value for an interface:
308 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-router-if)#ldp keepalive-timeout 635
32.8 ldp label-retention-mode
Synopsis
— ldp label-retention-mode {conservative | liberal}
— no ldp label-retention-mode
Description
Use this command to set the retention mode to be used for all labels exchanged
through an interface. This command overrides the setting for a Label Switch
Router (LSR) using the global label-retention-mode command.
Use the no option to revert to the retention mode set for the main Label
Command Mode
Options
conservative Deletes all unused labels and Forwarding Equivalence

Classes (FECs).
liberal Retains all labels, regardless of use.
Examples
Setting the label retention mode for an interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ldp label-retention-mode liberal
32.9 ldp multicast-hellos
Synopsis
[no] ldp multicast-hellos
Description
Use this command to enable multicast hello exchange on an interface. By default,
multicast hello exchange is enabled on an interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 309

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to disable multicast hello exchange.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling multicast hello exchange on an interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#ldp multicast-hellos
32.10 mpls ldp-igp sync
Synopsis
— mpls ldp-igp sync {isis | ospf} [holddown-timer <TIMER> ]
— mpls ldp-igp sync isis {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2} [holddown-

timer <TIMER> ]
— no mpls ldp-igp sync {isis | ospf}
— no mpls ldp-igp sync isis {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2}
Description
Use this command to configure LDP-IGP synchronization.
Command Mode
Operands
TIMER Holddown timer value in seconds. The valid range is 1–

2147483 s. The default setting is 60 s.
Options
isis Specifies IS-IS routes.
ospf Specifies Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes.
level-1 Specifies LDP-IGP synchronization for level 1 only.
310 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

level-1-2 Specifies LDP-IGP synchornization for both level 1 and

level 2.
level-2 Specifies LDP-IGP synchronization for level 2 only.
holddown-timer Specifies the holddown time.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#mpls ldp-igp sync ospf holddown-timer 180
ML66(config-router-if)#mpls ldp-igp sync isis level-1
32.11 mpls ldp-igp sync-delay
Synopsis
— mpls ldp-igp sync-delay <DELAY>
— no mpls ldp-igp sync-delay
Description
Use this command to configure the delay time for Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP)-Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) synchronization.
Command Mode
Operands
DELAY The delay time in seconds. The valid range is 5–60.
Examples
Configuring the delay time for LDP-IGP synchronization:
ML66(config-router-if)#mpls ldp-igp sync-delay 12
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 311

CLI Descriptions
33 BGP Commands
33.
The following command modes are applicable for the Border Gateway Protocol
(BGP) commands:
— Exec mode — >
— BGP Router configuration submode — (config-router-bgp)
— BGP Address family IPv4 configuration submode — (config-router-af-

ip)
— BGP Address family IPv4 labeled-unicast configuration submode —

(config-router-af-ip-labeled-ucast)
— BGP Address family IPv4 VRF configuration submode — (config-router-

af-vrf)
— BGP Address family IPv4 VPNv4 configuration submode — (config-

router-af-vpnv4)
Table 33 BGP Commands Overview

address-family change to different BGP submodes
aggregate-addres configure Border Gateway Protocol
(BGP) aggregate entries
auto-summary enable sending summarized routes
bgp additional-paths install enable additional paths
bgp dampening set the bgp route dampening
parameters
bgp default ipv4-unicast configure BGP defaults and activate
IPv4-unicast for a peer by default
bgp default local-preference change the default local preference
value
bgp inbound-route-filter enable the Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS) VPN/BGP inbound
route filter
bgp nexthop-trigger delay set the delay time for nexthop address
tracking
312 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
bgp nexthop-trigger enable enable nexthop address tracking

clear bgp * reset the BGP connection for all peers
clear bgp ASN reset the BGP connection for peers in
the specified Autonomous System
(AS)
clear bgp external reset the BGP connection for all
external peers
clear bgp ipv4 reset the BGP connection for BGP
IPv4 peers
clear bgp peer-group reset the BGP connection for all
members of a peer group
default-information distribute a default route by
configuring a BGP routing process
distance bgp define an administrative distance for
all address families
define an administrative distance per
an IPv4 family
dscp enable DSCP marking
ip as-path access-list define a BGP AS path access list
ip community-list (standard) set a standard community list that
specifies BGP community attributes
ip community-list (expanded) set an expanded community list that
specifies BGP community attributes
ip extcommunity-list (standard) create a standard extended
community list
ip extcommunity-list (expanded) create an expanded extended
community list
neighbor activate enable the exchange of the specified
AF information with a neighboring
router
neighbor advertisement-interval set the minimum interval between the
sending of BGP routing updates
neighbor allow-ebgp-vpn allow an eBGP neighbor to be a VPN
peer
neighbor allowas-in accept routes with the BGP router own
AS present in AS-PATH
neighbor as-origination-interval set the minimum interval between
sending AS-origination routing
updates
neighbor as-override configure a PE router to override the
Autonomous System Number (ASN) of
a site
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 313

CLI Descriptions
neighbor attribute-unchanged advertise unchanged BGP attributes

to the specified neighbor
neighbor capability dynamic enable the dynamic capability for a
specific peer
neighbor capability orf enable Outbound Router Filtering
(ORF), and advertise the ORF
capability to its neighbors
neighbor capability route-refresh advertise route refresh capability to
the peer
neighbor collide-established specify including a neighbor, already
in an established state, for conflict
resolution when a TCP connection
collision is detected
neighbor default-originate allow a BGP local router to send the
default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor
neighbor description associate a description with a
neighbor
neighbor disallow-infinite-holdtime disallow the configuration of the
infinite hold-time
neighbor dont-capability-negotiate disable capability negotiation
neighbor ebgp-multihop accept and attempt BGP connections
to external peers on indirectly
connected networks
neighbor enforce-multihop turn on the enforcement of eBGP
neighbors perform multihop
neighbor fall-over bfd configure fall-over detection through
BFD for BGP
neighbor filter-list set up a BGP filter
neighbor local-as set an AS number to use with BGP
neighbor
neighbor maximum-prefix control the number of prefixes that
can be received from a neighbor
neighbor next-hop-self configure the router as the next hop
for a BGP-speaking neighbor or peer
group
neighbor override-capability override a capability negotiation result
neighbor passive set a BGP neighbor as passive
neighbor password specify a password for a neighbor
neighbor peer-group create a peer group
neighbor port set the BGP port that is used by active
neighbor when establishing
connection
314 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
neighbor prefix-list specify a prefix list for filtering BGP

advertisements
neighbor remote-as set the AS number of a neighbor
neighbor remove-private-as remove the private AS number from
outbound updates
neighbor route-reflector-client configure the router as a BGP route
reflector and configure the specified
neighbor as its client
neighbor route-server-client configure a neighbor as the route
server client
neighbor send-community specify that a community attribute is
sent to a BGP neighbor
neighbor shutdown disable a neighbor
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound store updates for inbound soft
reconfiguration
neighbor soo enable site-of-origin feature
neighbor strict-capability-match close the BGP connection if the
capability value does not completely
match to the remote peer
neighbor timers set the timers for a specific BGP
neighbor
neighbor update-source allow internal BGP sessions to use any
operational interface for TCP
connections
neighbor version configure the software to accept only
a particular BGP version
neighbor weight set a weight value, per address-family,
to all routes learned from a neighbor
network specify the networks to be advertised
by the BGP routing process
redistribute inject routes from one routing process
into another
router bgp create and configure a BGP process
and change to the (config-router-bgp)
submode
synchronization enable Internal Gateway Protocol
(IGP) synchronization of Internal BGP
(iBGP) learned routes with the IGP
system
timers bgp globally set the keep alive and hold
time values for all the neighbors
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 315

CLI Descriptions
— show bgp
— show bgp community
— show bgp community-list
— show bgp dampening
— show bgp filter-list
— show bgp inconsistent-as
— show bgp ipv4
— show bgp mpls label mode
— show bgp neighbors
— show bgp nexthop-tracking
— show bgp nexthop-tree-details
— show bgp paths
— show bgp prefix-list
— show bgp quote-regexp
— show bgp regexp
— show bgp summary
— show bgp vpn4 all
— show bgp vpnv4 details
— show bgp vpnv4 rd
— show bgp vpnv4 vrf
884.
33.1 address-family
316 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Synopsis
— address-family ipv4 [{unicast | labeled-unicast | vrf <VRF> }]
— no address-family ipv4 {labeled-unicast | vrf <VRF>}
— address-family vpnv4 [unicast]
— [no] address-family vpnv4
Description
Use this command to change to different submodes as follows:
— Use address-family ipv4 or address-family ipv4 unicast commands

to change to the (config-router-af-ip) submode.
— Use address-family ipv4 labeled-unicast command to change to the

(config-router-af-ip-labeled-ucast) submode.
— Use address-family ipv4 vrf <VRF> command to change to the (config-

router-af-vrf) submode.
— Use address-family vpnv4 or address-family vpnv4 unicast

commands to change to the (config-router-af-vpnv4) submode.
Use the no option to disable this function.
Command Mode
BGP Router configuration submode — (config-router-bgp)
Operands

instance.
Options
ipv4 Sets the IPv4 address family.
unicast Sets unicast as an address family modifier.
labeled-unicast Sets labeled-unicast as an address family modifier for

IPv4
vrf Sets a VRF instance for IPv4.
vpnv4 Sets the VPNv4 address family.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 317

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Changing to the (config-router-af-ip) submode:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#address-family ipv4
ML66(config-router-af-ip)#
33.2 aggregate-address
Synopsis
— [no] aggregate-address <IPADDR/PREFIX>
— [no] aggregate-address <IPADDR/PREFIX as-set
— [no] aggregate-address <IPADDR/PREFIX> as-set summary-only
— [no] aggregate-address <IPADDR/PREFIX> summary-only
— [no] aggregate-address <IPADDR/PREFIX> summary-only as-set
Description
Use this command to configure Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) aggregate
entries.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The IPv4 aggregate address with prefix length, where the
Options
as-set Generates Autonomous System (AS) set path

information.
summary-only Filters more specific routes from updates.
318 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Configuring BGP aggregate entries:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#aggregate-address 10.0.0.0/8 as-set summary-only
33.3 auto-summary
Synopsis
[no] auto-summary
Description
Use this command to enable sending summarized routes.
Command Mode

ip)

af-vrf)
Examples
Enabling auto-summary:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#auto-summary
Enabling auto-summary:
ML66(config-router-af-ip)#auto-summary
33.4 bgp additional-paths install
Synopsis
[no] bgp additional-paths install
Description
Use this command to enable additional paths.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 319

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to disable additional paths.
Command Mode
BGP Address family IPv4 VPNv4 configuration submode — (config-router-
af-vpnv4)
Examples
ML66(config-router-af-vpnv4)#bgp additional-paths install
33.5 bgp dampening
Synopsys
— [no] bgp dampening [<HL_TIME> [<REUSE_LIM> <SUPP_LIM>

<SUPP_TIME> [<UHL_TIME>]]]
— bgp dampening route-map <MAPNAME>
— no bgp dampening route-map [<MAPNAME>]
Description
Use this command to set the bgp route dampening parameters.
Route dampening minimizes the instability caused by route flapping.
A penalty is added for every flap in a flapping route. As soon as the total penalty
reaches the suppress limit the advertisement of the route is suppressed. This
penalty is decayed according to the configured half time value. Once the penalty
is lower than the reuse limit, the route advertisement is un-suppressed.
The dampening information is purged from the router once the penalty becomes
less than half of the reuse limit.
Use the no parameter to unset the bgp dampening parameters.
Command Mode

ip)

af-vrf)
320 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
HL_TIME Reachability half-life time in minutes. The time for the

penalty to decrease to one-half of its current value. The
valid range is 1-45 minutes. The default is 15 minutes.
REUSE_LIM Reuse limit value. When the penalty for a suppressed

route decays below the reuse value, the routes become
unsuppressed. The valid range is 1-20000. The default
reuse limit is 750.
SUPP_LIM Suppress limit value. When the penalty for a route

exceeds the suppress value, the route is suppressed. The
valid range is 1-20000. The default suppress limit is
2000.
SUPP_TIME Maximum suppress-time. The maximum time that a

dampened route is suppressed. The valid range is 1-255.
The default max-suppress value is 4 times the half-life
time (60 minutes).
UHL_TIME The unreachability half-life time for penalty, in minutes.

The valid range is 1-45 minutes.
MAPNAME The name of the route map.
Options
route-map Specifies route-map to specify criteria for dampening.
Note: This option is not supported in the (config-

router-af-vpnv4) submode
Examples
ML66(config-router-bgp)#bgp dampening 20 800 2500 80 25
33.6 bgp default ipv4-unicast
Synopsys
— [no] bgp default ipv4-unicast
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 321

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to configure BGP defaults and activate IPv4-unicast for a peer
by default. This affects the BGP global configuration.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the default behavior of the
BGP routing process of exchanging IPv4 addressing information with BGP
neighbor routers.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-bgp)#bgp default ipv4-unicast
33.7 bgp default local-preference
Synopsys
— bgp default local-preference <PREF>
— no bgp default local-preference [<PREF>]
Description
Use this command to change the default local preference value.
Local preference indicates the preferred path when there are multiple paths to
the same destination. The path having a higher preference is preferred. The
preference is sent to all routers and access servers in the local autonomous
system.
Use the no parameter with this command to revert to the default setting.
Command Mode
Operands
PREF The default local preference value. The valid range is

0-4294967295. The default value is 100.
Examples
ML66(config-router-bgp)#bgp default local-preference 2345555
322 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
33.8 bgp inbound-route-filter
Synopsys
— [no] bgp inbound-route-filter
Description
Use this command to enable the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) VPN/BGP
inbound route filter.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-bgp)#bgp inbound-route-filter
33.9 bgp nexthop-trigger delay
Synopsis
— bgp nexthop-trigger delay <DELAY>
— no bgp nexthop-trigger delay
Description
Use this command to set the delay time for nexthop address tracking.
Use the no option to reset the timer value to the default value.
Command Mode
Operands
DELAY The delay time in seconds. The valid range is 1–100. The
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 323

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the delay time for nexthop address tracking:
ML66(config)#bgp nexthop-trigger delay 6
33.10 bgp nexthop-trigger enable
Synopsis
[no] bgp nexthop-trigger enable
Description
Use this command to enable nexthop address tracking.
Use the no option to disable the feature. If the no option is given when nexthop
tracking is in the process of execution, an error appears and nexthop tracking is
not disabled. However, if the nexthop tracking timer is running at the time of
negation, the nexthop tracking timer is stopped, and nexthop tracking is disabled.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling nexthop address tracking:
ML66(config)#bgp nexthop-trigger enable
33.11 clear bgp *
Synopsis
clear bgp * [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
Description
Use this command to reset the BGP connection for all peers.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
324 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Options
in Indicates that incoming advertised routes are cleared.
prefix-filter Indicates the push out prefix-list Outbound Router

Filtering (ORF) and do inbound soft reconfiguration.
out Indicates that outgoing advertised routes are cleared.
soft Indicates that both incoming and outgoing routes are

cleared.
— in — Indicates soft reconfiguration inbound update.
— out — Indicates soft reconfiguration outbound

update.
Examples
Resetting the BGP connection for all peers:
ML66#clear bgp * soft in
33.12 clear bgp ASN
Synopsis
clear bgp <ASN> [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
Description
Use this command to reset the BGP connection for peers in the specified
Autonomous System (AS).
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
ASN The number of the AS. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
Options

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 325

CLI Descriptions

cleared.

update.
Examples
Resetting the BGP connection for peers in the specified AS:
ML66#clear bgp 300 in prefix-filter
ML66#clear bgp 300 soft in
ML66#clear bgp 1 in prefix-filter
33.13 clear bgp external
Synopsis
clear bgp external [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
Description
Use this command to reset the BGP connection for all external peers.
Command mode
Exec mode — >
Options


cleared.

update.
326 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Resetting the BGP connection for all external peers:
ML66#clear bgp external soft in
33.14 clear bgp ipv4
Synopsis
— clear bgp ipv4 unicast {dampening | flap-statistics} [<IPADDR> |

<IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
— clear bgp ipv4 <IPADDR> [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
— clear bgp ipv4 vrf <VRF> {dampening | flap-statistics} [<IPADDR> |

<IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
— clear bgp ipv4 external [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
— clear bgp ipv4 * [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
— clear bgp ipv4 <ASN> [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft [in | out] ]
— clear bgp ipv4 peer-group <NAME> [in [prefix-filter] | out | soft

[in | out] ]
Description
Use this command to reset the BGP connection for BGP IPv4 peers.
Command mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The BGP IPv4 neighbor address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .

instance.
ASN The number of the Autonomous System (AS). The valid

range is 1–4294967295.
NAME The name of the peer group.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 327

CLI Descriptions
IPADDR The IP prefix network, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
IPADDR/PREFIX The IP prefix network and length, where the format is

<A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
unicast Indicates the address family modifier as unicast.
dampening Clears route flap dampening information.
flap-statistics Clears route flap statistics.
vrf Clears the VRF.
* Resets the BGP connection for all BGP IPv4 peers.
external Resets the BGP connection for all external BGP IPv4
peers.
peer-group Resets the BGP connection for all BGP IPv4 members of
a peer group.


cleared.

update.
Examples
Resetting the BGP connection for BGP IPv4 peers:
ML66#clear bgp ipv4 unicast dampening 1.1.1.1
33.15 clear bgp peer-group
328 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Synopsis
clear bgp peer-group <NAME>
Description
Use this command to reset the BGP connection for all members of a peer group.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NAME The name of the BGP peer group.
Examples
Resetting the BGP connection for all members of a peer group:
ML66#clear bgp peer-group P1
33.16 default-information
Synopsis
[no] default-information originate
Description
Use this command in BGP Router or Address family configuration mode to
distribute a default route (network 0.0.0.0) by configuring a BGP routing process.
Use the no option disable the advertisement of a default route.
Note: This command only advertises default route. A redistribution statement

must also be configured to complete this configuration, or the default
route is not advertised.
Command Mode
BGP Address family IPv4 VRF configuration submode — (config-router-af-

vrf)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 329

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Distributing a default route:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#default-information originate
33.17 distance bgp
Synopsis
— [no] distance bgp <EXT-ROUTES> <INT-ROUTES> <LO-ROUTES>
— no distance bgp
Description
BGP Router configuration submode

Use this command to define an administrative distance
for all address families.
Use the no option to remove an administrative distance.
BGP Address family submode

Use this command to define an administrative distance
per an IPv4 family.
Use the no option to remove an administrative distance.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
EXT-ROUTES The distance for BGP external routes. The valid range is
1–255. The default value is 20.
330 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
INT-ROUTES The distance for BGP internal routes. The valid range is
LO-ROUTES The distance for BGP local routes. The valid range is 1–
255. The default value is 200.
Examples
Setting the administrative distance for BGP for all address families:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#distance bgp 34 23 15
33.18 dscp
Synopsis
— dscp <DSCP>
— no dscp
Description
Use this command to enable DSCP marking.
Use the no option to set DSCP marking to default value.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
DSCP The DSCP value, which is a decimal integer. The valid

Examples
Setting BGP DSCP value for the default VRF:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#dscp 16
Setting the BGP DSCP value for a specific VRF:

ML66(config-router-af-vrf)#dscp 10
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 331

CLI Descriptions
33.19 ip as-path access-list
Synopsis
— [no] ip as-path access-list <NAME> {deny | permit} <REGEXP>
— no ip as-path access-list <NAME>
Description
Use this command to define a BGP Autonomous System (AS) path access list.
Use the no option to disable the use of the access list.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the access list.
REGEXP A regular expression, which matches to the BGP AS

paths.
Options
deny Denies access to matching conditions.
permit Permits access to matching conditions.
Examples
Defining a BGP AS path access list:
ML66(config)#ip as-path access-list mylist deny ^65535$
33.20 ip community-list (standard)
Synopsis
[no] ip community-list {<NUMBER> | standard <NAME> } {deny | permit}
[<AA:NN> | internet | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export]
332 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Description
Use this command to set a standard community list that specifies BGP
community attributes. A standard community list can be specified by assigning
either a number or a name to it.
Use the community lists to specify BGP community attributes. The community
attribute is used for implementing policy routing. It is an optional, transitive
attribute and facilitates transfer of local policies through different autonomous
systems. It includes community values that are 32 bits long.
There are two kinds of community lists: expanded and standard. The standard
community list defines the community attributes in a specified format without
regular expressions. The expanded community list defines the community
attributes with regular expressions. The standard community list is compiled into
a binary format and is directly compared with the BGP communities attribute in
the BGP updates. The comparison is faster than in the case of the expanded
community list. Any community value that does not match the standard
community value is automatically treated as expanded.
Use the no option to delete the community-list entry.
Command Mode
Operands
NUMBER The community-list number. The valid range is 1–99.
NAME The community-list name.
AA:NN The community-attribute value.
Options
deny Sets the community to reject.
permit Sets the community to accept.
internet Sets routes to be advertised to the Internet community.
local-AS Sets routes not to be advertised outside of the local

Autonomous System (AS).
no-export Sets routes not to be advertised to external BGP peers.
no-advertise Sets routes not to be advertised to other BGP peers.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 333

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting a standard community list that specifies BGP community attributes:
ML66(config)#ip community-list 55 permit 7675:80 7675:90
ML66(config)#ip community-list mylist permit 7675:80 7675:90
ML66(config)#ip community-list standard CLIST permit 7675:80 7675:90 no-export
33.21 ip community-list (expanded)
Synopsis
[no] ip community-list {<NUMBER> | expanded <NAME> } {deny | permit}
<REGEXP>
Description
Use this command to set an expanded community list that specifies BGP
community attributes. An expanded community list can be specified by assigning
either a number or a name to it.
Command Mode
Operands
REGEXP A regular expression that matches the BGP Autonomous

System (AS) paths.
Options
Examples
Setting an expanded community list that specifies BGP community attributes:
ML66(config)#ip community-list 125 permit 6789906
ML66(config)#ip community-list expanded CLIST permit .*
334 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
33.22 ip extcommunity-list (standard)
Synopsis
[no] ip extcommunity-list {<NUMBER> | standard <NAME> } {deny |
permit} [rt | soo] [<AA:NN> | <A.B.C.D:NN> ]
Description
Use this command to create or delete a standard extended community list. A
standard extended community list can be specified by assigning either a number
or a name to it.
An extended community is based on a 6-byte value. These 6 bytes are

represented in a <4bytes:2bytes> format. There are two possible formats:
— <AA:NN> : The AS number is represented in higher-order 4 bytes. The NN

assigned value is represented in low-order 2 bytes.
— <IPaddr:NN> : The higher-order 4 bytes are used to represent the IP address,

and the low-order 2 bytes are used to represent the assigned value.
Command Mode
Operands
Options
rt Route Target extended community
soo Site-of-Origin extended community
Examples
Creating a standard extended community list:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 335

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config)#ip extcommunity-list 75 permit 4567335

ML66(config)#ip extcommunity-list standard CLIST permit .*
33.23 ip extcommunity-list (expanded)
Synopsis
[no] ip extcommunity-list {<NUMBER> | expanded <NAME> } {deny |
permit} <REGEXP>
Description
Use this command to create an expanded extended community list. An expanded
extended community list can be specified by assigning either a number or a name
to it.
Command Mode
Operands
REGEXP A regular expression that matches the BGP Autonomous

System (AS) paths.
Options
Examples
Creating an expanded extended community list:
ML66(config)#ip extcommunity-list 135 permit .*
ML66(config)#ip extcommunity-list expanded CLIST permit .*
33.24 neighbor activate
336 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> activate
Description
Use this command to enable the exchange of the specified AF information with a
neighboring router.
Use the no option to disable exchange of the specified AF information with a

neighbor.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of the BGP neighbor, where the format
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Enabling the exchange of the specified AF information with a neighboring router:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 1.2.3.4 activate
33.25 neighbor advertisement-interval
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> advertisement-interval <TIME>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> advertisement-interval
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 337

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the minimum interval between the sending of BGP
routing updates.
Use the no option to set the interval time to default.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
TIME The advertisement interval in seconds. The valid range is

0–65535. the default value is 5 seconds for IBGP
neighbors and 30 seconds for EBGP neighbors.
Examples
Setting the minimum interval between the sending of BGP routing updates:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.3 advertisement-interval 45
33.26 neighbor allow-ebgp-vpn
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> allow-ebgp-vpn
Description
Use this command to allow an eBGP neighbor to be a VPN peer. By default, BGP
VPN functionality is allowed only for iBGP peers.
Command Mode

af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
338 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Allowing an eBGP neighbor to be a VPN peer:
ML66config-router-af-vrf)#neighbor 66.66.66.66 allow-ebgp-vpn
33.27 neighbor allowas-in
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> allowas-in
— neighbor <IPADDR> allowas-in <COUNT>
Description
Use this command to accept routes with the BGP router own Autonomous
System (AS) present in AS-PATH.
Use the no option to reset to default.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
COUNT Number of occurrences of AS number. The valid range is

1–10. If the value is not specified, the parameter is set to
3.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 339

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Accepting routes with the BGP router own AS present in AS-PATH:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.3 allowas-in 4
33.28 neighbor as-origination-interval
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> as-origination-interval <TIME>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> as-origination-interval
Description
Use this command to set the minimum interval between sending Autonomous
System (AS) origination routing updates.
Use the no option to set the interval time to default.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
TIME The time in seconds. The valid range is 1–65535. The

Examples
Setting the minimum interval between sending AS origination routing updates:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.75 as-origination-interval 555
33.29 neighbor as-override
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> as-override
340 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Description
Use this command to configure a PE router to override the Autonomous System
Number (ASN) of a site.
Use the no option to remove VPN IPv4 prefixes from a specified router.
Command Mode
vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Configuring a PE router to override the ASN:
ML66(config-router-af-vrf)#neighbor 10.10.0.1 as-override
33.30 neighbor attribute-unchanged
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> attribute-unchanged [as-path] [next-hop] [med]
Description
Use this command to advertise unchanged BGP attributes to the specified
neighbor.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 341

CLI Descriptions

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Options
as-path Sets Autonomous System (AS) path attribute.
next-hop Sets next hop attribute.
med Sets multi-exit discriminator attribute.
Examples
Advertising unchanged BGP attributes to the specified neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.75 attribute-unchanged as-path med
33.31 neighbor capability dynamic
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> capability dynamic
Description
Use this command to enable the dynamic capability for a specific peer.
Use the no option to disable the dynamic capability.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
342 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Enabling the dynamic capability for a specific peer:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.1 capability dynamic
33.32 neighbor capability orf
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> capability orf prefix-list {both | receive |
send}
Description
Use this command to enable Outbound Router Filtering (ORF), and advertise the
ORF capability to its neighbors.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Options
prefix-list Advertises prefix list ORF capability to this neighbor.
both Indicates that the local router can send ORF entries to its
peer, as well as receive ORF entries from its peer.
receive Indicates that the local router receives ORF entries from
its peer.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 343

CLI Descriptions
send Indicates that the local router sends ORF entries to its
peer.
Examples
Enabling ORF, and advertise the ORF capability to its neighbors:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.5 capability orf prefix-list both
33.33 neighbor capability route-refresh
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> capability route-refresh
Description
Use this command to advertise route refresh capability to the peer.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Advertising route refresh capability to the peer:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.1 capability route-refresh
33.34 neighbor collide-established
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> collide-established
344 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Description
Use this command to specify including a neighbor, already in an established
state, for conflict resolution when a TCP connection collision is detected.
Command Mode
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Specifying including a neighbor, already in an established state, for conflict
resolution:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 3.3.3.3 collide-established
33.35 neighbor default-originate
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> default-originate
Description
Use this command to allow a BGP local router to send the default route 0.0.0.0 to
a neighbor. This command can be used with standard or extended access lists.
Use the no option to send no route as a default.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 345

CLI Descriptions
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Allowing a BGP local router to send the default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.1 default-originate
33.36 neighbor description
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> description <LINE>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> description
Description
Use this command to associate a description with a neighbor.
Use the no option to remove the description.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
LINE The description of the neighbor. The maximum length is

80 characters.
Examples
Associating a description with a neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 1.2.3.4 description "Backup router"
33.37 neighbor disallow-infinite-holdtime
346 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> disallow-infinite-holdtime
Description
Use this command to disallow the configuration of the infinite hold-time.
Use the no option to allow the BGP speaker to accept a hold-time of 0.
Command Mode
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Disallowing the configuration of the infinite hold-time:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.11.4.26 disallow-infinite-holdtime
33.38 neighbor dont-capability-negotiate
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> dont-capability-negotiate
Description
Use this command to disable capability negotiation.
Use the no option to enable capability negotiation.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 347

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Disabling capability negotiation:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.34 dont-capability-negotiate
33.39 neighbor ebgp-multihop
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> ebgp-multihop [<COUNT> ]
Description
Use this command to accept and attempt BGP connections to external peers on
indirectly connected networks.
Note: Multihop is not established if the only route to the multihop peer is a
default route.
Use the no option to set the default hop count.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
COUNT The maximum hop count. The valid range is 1–255. The
default value is 1 for EBGP peers.
If the value is not set, the hop count is 255.
Examples
Accepting and attempting BGP connections to external peers on indirectly
connected networks:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.34 ebgp-multihop 5
33.40 neighbor enforce-multihop
348 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> enforce-multihop
Description
Use this command to turn on the enforcement of eBGP neighbors perform
multihop.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Turning on the enforcement of eBGP neighbors perform multihop:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.34 enforce-multihop
33.41 neighbor fall-over bfd
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> fall-over bfd [multihop]
Description
Use this command to configure fall-over detection through BFD for BGP.
BFD multihop sessions are dynamically created or removed by this command.

Use the bfd multihop-peer command to configure BFD multihop peer timer
values.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 349

CLI Descriptions
Operands
is <A.B.C.D>.
Options
bfd Sets Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD).
multihop Specifies to use multihop BFD.
Examples
Configuring fall-over detection for BGP through multihop BFD:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.34 fall-over bfd multihop
33.42 neighbor filter-list
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> filter-list <NAME> {in | out}
Description
Use this command to set up a BGP filter.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
350 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
NAME The name of an Autonomous System (AS) path filter list.
Options
in Indicates that incoming advertised routes are filtered.
out Indicates that outgoing advertised routes are filtered.
Examples
Setting up a BGP filter:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.34 filter-list out
33.43 neighbor local-as
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> local-as <ASN>
Description
Use this command to set an Autonomous System (AS) number to use with BGP
neighbor.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
ASN The number of the AS. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
Examples
Setting a AS number to use with BGP neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.34 local-as 12345
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 351

CLI Descriptions
33.44 neighbor maximum-prefix
Synopsis
— neighbor <IPADDR> maximum-prefix <COUNT> [<NUMBER>] [warning-

only]
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> maximum-prefix [<COUNT> [warning-only]]
Description
Use this command to control the number of prefixes that can be received from a
neighbor.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D>.
COUNT Sets the maximum number of prefixes accepted. The

NUMBER Sets the threshold value. The valid range is 1–100

percent. If no threshold is given, the default 75%
threshold is set.
Options
warning-only Only gives a warning message when the limit is

exceeded.
352 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Controlling the number of prefixes that can be received from a neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.72 maximum-prefix 1244 warning-only
33.45 neighbor next-hop-self
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> next-hop-self
Description
Use this command to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP-speaking
neighbor or peer group.
Use the no option to disable the feature.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operand
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Configuring the router as the next hop for a BGP-speaking neighbor or peer
group:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.72 next-hop-self
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 353

CLI Descriptions
33.46 neighbor override-capability
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> override-capability
Description
Use this command to override a capability negotiation result.
Command Mode
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Overriding a capability negotiation result:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 override-capability
33.47 neighbor passive
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> passive
Description
Use this command to set a BGP neighbor as passive.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
354 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Setting a BGP neighbor as passive:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 passive
33.48 neighbor password
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> password <PASSWORD>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> password
Description
Use this command to specify a password for a neighbor. This password is used
with TCP MD5 signature option.
Note: For the command to take effect, the neighbor session has to be cleared.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function.
Command Mode
Operands
is <A.B.C.D>.
PASSWORD The password for a neighbor. The maximum password

length is 80 characters.
Examples
Setting a password for a BGP neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 password ABC
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 355

CLI Descriptions
33.49 neighbor peer-group
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> peer-group <NAME>
Description
Use this command to create a peer group.
Use the no option to remove neighbor from the peer group.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
NAME The name of the peer group.
Examples
Creating a peer group:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.63 peer-group PeerGroup
33.50 neighbor port
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> port <PORT>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> port
Description
Use this command to set the BGP port that is used by active neighbor when
establishing connection.
356 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
PORT The number of the TCP port.
Examples
Setting the BGP port:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 port 32768
33.51 neighbor prefix-list
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> prefix-list <NAME> {in | out}
Description
Use this command to specify a prefix list for filtering BGP advertisements.
Use the no option to remove prefix list configurations from the neighbor.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 357

CLI Descriptions
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
NAME The name of the prefix list.
Options
in Specifies that the access list applies to incoming

advertisements.
out Specifies that the access list applies to outgoing

advertisements.
Examples
Specifying a prefix list for filtering BGP advertisements:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 prefix-list list1 in
33.52 neighbor remote-as
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> remote-as <ASN>
Description
Use this command to set the Autonomous System (AS) number of a neighbor.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
ASN The AS number of the neighbor. The valid range is 1–

4294967295.
358 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Setting the AS number of a neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.73 remote-as 345
33.53 neighbor remove-private-as
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> remove-private-as
Description
Use this command to remove the private Autonomous System (AS) number from
outbound updates.
Use the no option to revert to default.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Removing the private AS number from outbound updates:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.63 remove-private-as
33.54 neighbor route-reflector-client
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 359

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> route-reflector-client
Description
Use this command to configure the router as a BGP route reflector and configure
the specified neighbor as its client.
Use the no option to indicate that the neighbor is not a client.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Configuring the router as a BGP route reflector and configure the specified
neighbor as its client:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 3.3.3.3 route-reflector-client
33.55 neighbor route-server-client
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> route-server-client
Description
Use this command to configure a neighbor as the route server client.
360 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Use the no option to revert to default.
Command Mode

ip)


router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Configuring a neighbor as the route server client:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.72 route-server-client
33.56 neighbor send-community
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> send-community [both | extended | standard]
Description
Use this command to specify that a community attribute is sent to a BGP
neighbor.
Use the no option to remove the entry.
Command Mode

ip)

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 361

CLI Descriptions

af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Options
both Sends Standard and Extended Community attributes.
extended Sends Extended Community attributes.
standard Sends Standard Community attributes.
Examples
Specifying that extended community attributes are sent to a BGP neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.72 send-community extended
33.57 neighbor shutdown
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> shutdown
Description
Use this command to disable a neighbor. This command shuts down any active
session for the specified neighbor and clears all related routing data.
Use the no option to enable the neighbor again.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
362 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Disabling a neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.72 shutdown
33.58 neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> soft-reconfiguration inbound
Description
Use this command to store updates for inbound soft reconfiguration.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Storing updates for inbound soft reconfiguration:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 soft-reconfiguration inbound
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 363

CLI Descriptions
33.59 neighbor soo
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> soo [<RD> ]
Description
Use this command to enable site-of-origin feature.
Use the no option to disable the feature.
Command Mode
vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .

as follows:
— ◦An Autonomous System (AS) number and an

— ◦A 32-bit IP address and an arbitrary number, for

example, 192.16.10.1:1.
Options
soo Indicates the site of origin.
Examples
Enabling site-of-origin feature:
ML66(config-router-af-vrf)#neighbor 10.10.0.1 soo 100:1
33.60 neighbor strict-capability-match
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> strict-capability-match
364 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Description
Use this command to close the BGP connection if the capability value does not
completely match to the remote peer.
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Examples
Closing the BGP connection:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 strict-capability-match
33.61 neighbor timers
Synopsis
— neighbor <IPADDR> timers connect <TIME>
— neighbor <IPADDR> timers <INTERVAL> <HOLDTIME>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> timers
— no neighbor <IPADDR> timers connect
Description
Use this command to set the timers for a specific BGP neighbor.
Use the no option to clear the timers for a specific BGP neighbor.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 365

CLI Descriptions
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
TIME The connect timer. The valid range is 1–65535.
INTERVAL Interval after which, on not receiving a keep alive

message, the router declares a neighbor dead. The valid
range is 0–65535. The default value is 180 seconds.
HOLDTIME The hold time value. The valid range is 0–65535.
Examples
Setting the timers for a specific BGP neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 timers 60 120
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 timers connect 10
33.62 neighbor update-source
Synopsis
[no] neighbor <IPADDR> update-source {<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> |
lo.<VRF> | lo | <IPADDR2>}
Description
Use this command to allow internal BGP sessions to use any operational
interface for TCP connections.
Use the no option to reset the configuration.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D>.
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
366 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
The Rack, Slot, and Port values and the VLAN number of
the L3 VLAN subinterface, where the format is <Rack/
Slot/Port.VLAN>, for example, 1/9/4.500.

lo.vrf_1.
IPADDR2 The IP address of the interface, where the format is

<A.B.C.D>.
Examples
Allowing internal BGP sessions to use any operational interface for TCP
connections:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.0.72 update-source 1.2.3.4
33.63 neighbor version
Synopsis
— neighbor <IPADDR> version 4
— no neighbor <IPADDR> version
Description
Use this command to configure the software to accept only a particular BGP
version.
Use the no option to use the default version level of a neighbor.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 367

CLI Descriptions
Options
4 Sets the BGP version number.
Examples
Configuring the software to accept only BGP version 4:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 version 4
33.64 neighbor weight
Synopsis
— [no] neighbor <IPADDR> weight <NUMBER>
— no neighbor <IPADDR> weight
Description
Use this command to set a weight value, per address-family, to all routes learned
from a neighbor. The weights assigned using the set weight command override
the weights assigned using this command.
Use the no option to remove a weight assignment.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)

router-af-vpnv4)
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .
NUMBER The weight value. The valid range is 0–65535.
368 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Setting a weight value, per address-family, to all routes learned from a neighbor:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#neighbor 10.10.10.10 weight 60
33.65 network
Synopsis
— [no] network {<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> } [backdoor]
— [no] network synchronization
Description
Use this command to specify the networks to be advertised by the BGP routing
process.
Use the no option to remove a network route entry.
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)
Operands
IPADDR The IP prefix network, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .

<A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
backdoor Sets a BGP backdoor route.
synchronization Performs IGP synchronization on the network routes.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 369

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Specifying the networks to be advertised by the BGP routing process:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#network 2.0.0.0
Enabling IGP synchronization of BGP static network routes:

ML66(config-router-bgp)#network synchronization
33.66 redistribute
Synopsis
[no] redistribute {connected | isis | kernel | static | ospf {<PROC_ID>}}
Description
Use this command to inject routes from one routing process into another.
Command Mode

af-vrf)
Operands
Options
connected Redistributes connected routes.
isis Redistributes IS-IS routes.
kernel Redistributes connected kernel routes.
static Redistributes static routes.
ospf Redistributes OSPF routes.
Examples
Injecting routes from one routing process into another:
370 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
ML66(config-router-bgp)#redistribute isis
33.67 router bgp
Synopsis
[no] router bgp <ASN>
Description
Use this command to create a BGP process. This command also changes to the
(config-router-bgp) submode.
Use the no option to remove a BGP process.
Command Mode
Operands
ASN The number of the Autonomous System (AS). The valid

range is 1–65535.
Examples
Changing to the (config-router-bgp) submode:
ML66(config)#router bgp 1
ML66(config-router-bgp)#
33.68 synchronization
Synopsis
[no] synchronization
Description
Use this command to enable Internal Gateway Protocol (IGP) synchronization of
Internal BGP (iBGP) learned routes with the IGP system.
Use the no option to disable IGP synchronization.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 371

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode

ip)


af-vrf)
Examples
Enabling IGP synchronization of iBGP routes:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#synchronization
33.69 timers bgp
Synopsis
— [no] timers bgp <KEEPALIVE> <HOLDTIME>
— no timers bgp
Description
Use this command to globally set the keep alive and hold time values for all the
neighbors.
Use the no options to reset the timers to default value.
Command Mode
Operands
KEEPALIVE The frequency with which the keep alive messages are
sent to the neighbors. The valid range is 0–65535. The
default keep alive value is 30 seconds.
HOLDTIME The interval after which the neighbor is considered dead

if keep alive messages are not received. The valid range is
0–65535. The default hold time value is 90 seconds.
372 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

BGP Commands
Examples
Setting the keep alive and hold time values:
ML66(config-router-bgp)#timers bgp 40 120
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 373

CLI Descriptions
34 MPLS Basic Commands
34.
The following command mode is applicable for the MPLS basic commands:
— Exec mode — >
Table 34 MPLS Basic Commands Overview

ping mpls initiate the sending of echo request
packets in a specified MPLS protocol
traceroute mpls initiate tracing the route traversed by
a specified echo request packet in an
MPLS protocol
34.1 ping mpls
Synopsis
ping mpls ldp <IPADDR/PREFIX> [reply-mode {1 | 2} | validate-fec |
destination <DEST> | source <SOURCE> | ttl <TTL> | timeout <TIMEOUT> |
repeat <REPEAT> | interval <INTERVAL> | force-explicit-null | detail |
pad <PADDING> | reply-pad {1 | 2} | size <SIZE>]
Description
Use this command to initiate the sending of echo request packets in a specified
MPLS protocol.
— ping
— show mpls ldp
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The LDP FEC prefix address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D/P>.
374 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

MPLS Basic Commands
DEST The destination IP address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D>. This must be from the range 127/8 excluding
the default local loopback address.
SOURCE The source IP address, where the format is <A.B.C.D>.

The default setting is the router ID.
TTL The Time to Live (TTL) value, which specifies the reply
ping packet TTL value in seconds. The valid range is 1–
225 s. The default value is 225 s.
TIMEOUT The reply time to wait in seconds before rejecting the sent
probe as a failure. The valid range is 1–500 s. The default
value is 60 s.
REPEAT Specifies the number of ping packets to be sent. The valid

INTERVAL The interval in milliseconds between MPLS ping packets.

The valid range is 2–20000 ms. The default value is 2 ms.
PADDING Specifies the padding pattern in a 4-byte hexadecimal

format.
SIZE Packet size. The valid range is 48–500.
Options
ldp Specifies the FEC type as LDP.
reply-mode Specifies the reply modes defined in RFC.
1 – Specifies not to request reply.
2 – Specifies the reply with IP UDP packet. This is the

default setting.
validate-fec Specifies that the received LSR must do an FEC stack

validation. The default setting is disabled.
destination Specifies the destination IPv4 address field in the UPD

ping packet.
source Specifies the reply source IPv4 address field in the UPD
packet.
ttl Specifies the reply ping packet TTL value in seconds.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 375

CLI Descriptions
timeout Specifies the reply time to wait in seconds before

rejecting the sent probe as a failure.
repeat Specifies the number of ping packets to be sent.
interval Specifies the interval in milliseconds between MPLS ping

packets.
force-explicit-null
Forces Explicit Null label.
detail Specifies to print the detailed output of the ping

command.
pad Specifies the padding pattern.
reply-pad Specifies the handling of pad TLV in reply.
1 — Drop Pad TLV from reply.
2 — Copy Pad TLV to reply.
size Specifies the packet size.
Examples
ML66#ping mpls ldp 10.10.0.0/24 detail
ML66#ping mpls ldp 10.10.0.0/24 reply-mode 2 validate-fec destination 127.1.2.3 so →

urce
10.10.0.1 ttl 226 timeout 65 repeat 6 interval 3 detail force-explicit-null
34.2 traceroute mpls
Synopsis
traceroute mpls ldp <IPADDR/PREFIX> [reply-mode {1 | 2} | validate-fec
| destination <DEST> | source <SOURCE> | ttl <TTL> | timeout <TIMEOUT>
| force-explicit-null | detail]
Description
Use this command to initiate tracing the route traversed by a specified echo
request packet in an MPLS protocol.
— traceroute
376 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

MPLS Basic Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The LDP FEC prefix address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D/P> .
DEST The destination IP address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> . This must be from the range 127/8 excluding
the default local loopback address.
SOURCE The source IP address, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .

The default setting is the router ID.
TTL The Time to Live (TTL) value, which specifies the reply
ping packet TTL value in seconds. The valid range is 1–
TIMEOUT The reply time to wait in seconds before rejecting the sent
probe as a failure. The valid range is 1–500 s. The default
value is 60 s.
Options
ldp Specifies the FEC type as LDP.
reply-mode Specifies the reply modes defined in RFC.
1 – Requests no reply with IP UDP packet.
2 – Specifies the reply with IP UDP packet. This is the

default setting.
validate-fec Specifies that the received LSR must do an FEC stack

validation. The default setting is disabled.
destination Specifies the destination IPv4 address field in the UPD

ping packet.
source Specifies the reply source IPv4 address field in the UPD
packet.
ttl Specifies the reply ping packet TTL value in seconds.
timeout Specifies the reply time to wait in seconds before

rejecting the sent probe as a failure.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 377

CLI Descriptions
force-explicit-null
Force Explicit Null label.
detail Specifies to print the detailed output of the ping

command.
Examples
ML66#traceroute mpls ldp 10.10.0.0/24 reply-mode 2 validate-fec destination 127.1. →
2.3 source
10.10.0.1 ttl 226 timeout 65 detail force-explicit-null
378 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

MPLS Configuration Commands
35 MPLS Configuration Commands
35.
The following command mode is applicable for the Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) configuration commands:
— IS-IS Router configuration submode — (config-router-isis)
Table 35 MPLS Configuration Commands Overview

mpls ac-group create a new access circuit group for
MPLS
mpls admin-groups create a name-to-value binding for an
administrative group
mpls bfd configure a BFD session for MPLS
mpls disable-all-interfaces disable all interfaces for MPLS
mpls egress-ttl set a custom Time to Live (TTL) value
for LSPs for which this LSR is the
egressThe related configuration
commands are the following:
mpls enable-all-interfaces enable all interfaces for MPLS
mpls ftn-entry create FTN entries in the FTN table of
the MPLS forwarder
mpls ilm-entry pop create an Incoming Label Map (ILM)
entry in the ILM table to which a pop
incoming interface is bound
mpls ilm-entry swap The related configuration
commandscreate an ILM entry in the
ILM table to which a swap incoming
interface is bound
mpls ilm-entry vpnpop create an ILM entry in the ILM table
for vpnpop operation
mpls ingress-ttl set an enable TTL propagation value
for LSPs for which this LSR is the
ingress
mpls label mode configure per Virtual Routing and
Forwarding (VRF) labels
mpls label-range
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 379

CLI Descriptions
mpls map-route map a prefix to a Forwarding

Equivalence Class (FEC)
mpls propagate-ttl enable TTL propagation
mpls traffic-eng configure MPLS Traffic Engineering
feature for IS-IS
configure non-overlapping dynamic
and/or static label ranges for use
during MPLS VPN route forwarding
— capability
— show bgp label mode globals
— show mpls
— show mpls cross-connect-table
— show mpls forwarding-table
— show mpls ftn-table
— show mpls ilm-table
— show mpls in-segment-table
— show mpls interface
— show mpls ldp
— show mpls mapped-routes
— show mpls out-segment-table
— show mpls vc-table
— show mpls vrf-table
884.
35.1 mpls ac-group
380 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— mpls ac-group <NAME> <ID>
— no mpls ac-group <NAME>
Description
Use this command to create a new access circuit group for MPLS.
Use the no option to remove an access circuit group.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the access circuit group.
ID The identifier of the group, which is used in LDP. The valid

range is 1–4294967295.
Examples
Creating a new access circuit group for MPLS:
ML66(config)#mpls ac-group new-ac 123
35.2 mpls admin-groups
Synopsis
[no] mpls admin-group <NAME> <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to create a name-to-value binding for an administrative
group.
Note: Only 32 administrative groups can be configured at one time.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the specified administrative
group.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 381

CLI Descriptions
Operands
NAME The name of the administrative group.
VALUE The value of the administrative group. The valid range is

0–31.
Examples
ML66(config)#mpls admin-group sample 1
35.3 mpls bfd
Synopsis
— mpls bfd rsvp [tunnel name <NAME> | all] {lsp-ping-intv

<INTERVAL> l min-tx <TX> | min-rx <RX> | multiplier <MULTIPLIER> |
force-explicit-null | disable}
— no mpls bfd rsvp [tunnel-name <NAME> | all] {disable}
— no mpls bfd rsvp [tunnel-name <NAME> | all] {lsp-ping-intvl

<INTERVAL> | min-tx <TX> | min-rx <RX> | multiplier <MULTIPLIER> |
force-explicit-null}
Description
Use this command to configure a BFD session for RSVP MPLS paths.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove a configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the RSVP tunnel.
INTERVAL The LSP ping interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–

RX The minimum reception interval in milliseconds. The valid

range is 50–4294967 ms. The default value is 50 ms.
TX The minimum transmit interval in milliseconds. The valid

range is 50–4294967 ms. The default value is 50 ms.
382 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

MULTIPLIER The detection multiplier value. The valid range is 1–255.

Options
rsvp Configures a BFD session for RSVP.
tunnel-name Specifies an RSVP tunnel name.
all Specifies all RSVP switched paths.
lsp-ping-intvl Sets an LSP ping interval.
min-tx Sets the minimum transmit interval.
min-rx Sets the minimum reception interval.
multiplier Sets the BFD detection multiplier.
force-explicit-null
Forces the Explicit NULL label.
disable Disables BFD for the LSP.
Examples
Configuring a BFD session specifying all RSVP switched paths forcing Explicit
Null labels:
ML66(config)#mpls bfd rsvp all force-explicit-null
35.4 mpls disable-all-interfaces
Synopsis
mpls disable-all-interfaces
Description
Use this command to disable all interfaces for MPLS. This command completely
stops all signaling on the router.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 383

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Disabling all interfaces for MPLS:
ML66(config)#mpls disable-all-interfaces
35.5 mpls egress-ttl
Synopsis
— mpls egress-ttl <TTL>
— no mpls egress-ttl
Description
Use this command to set a custom Time to Live (TTL) value for LSPs for which
this LSR is the egress.
Use the no option to remove a custom TTL value.
Command Mode
Operands
TTL The TTL value. The valid range is 0–255.
Examples
Setting a TTL value:
ML66(config)#mpls egress-ttl 45
35.6 mpls enable-all-interfaces
Synopsis
mpls enable-all-interfaces
Description
Use this command to enable all interfaces for MPLS. This command enables all
interfaces on a router for label switching.
384 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: Executing this command does not enable any signaling protocol
interaction through all the interfaces. Each protocol needs to be
explicitly enabled per interface.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling all interfaces for MPLS:
ML66(config)#mpls enable-all-interfaces
35.7 mpls ftn-entry
Synopsis
— [no] mpls ftn-entry <IPADDR/PREFIX> <IPADDR>

<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> [<STACK_LABEL> | 0 | 3]
— [no] mpls ftn-entry tunnel-id <TUNNEL_ID> <IPADDR/PREFIX>

<LABEL> <IPADDR> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> [<FTN> ] [primary |
secondary]
Description
Use this command to create FTN entries in the FTN table of the MPLS forwarder.
For all incoming IP packets on an MPLS-enabled router, a best-match lookup is
done in the FTN table based on the destination address of the incoming IP
packet. If a match is found, the packet is labeled, and switched. All interfaces are
disabled by default.
Use the no option to remove the entry.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The forwarding equivalence class with prefix length,

where the format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
IPADDR The nexthop IPv4 address, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 385

CLI Descriptions
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The name of the outgoing interface name, where the
format is <Rack/Slot/Port.VLAN> .
STACK_LABEL Stack of outgoing labels. The valid range is 16–1048575.
LABEL The outgoing label. The valid range is 16–1048575.
TUNNEL_ID The tunnel ID value. The valid range is 1–100.
FTN The FTN index for updating an existing entry. The valid
range is 1–4294967295.
Options
0 Sets the outgoing label to IPv4 Explicit Null label (0).
3 Sets the outgoing label to Implicit Null label (3).
tunnel-id Sets a tunnel identifier.
primary Sets the primary LSP.
secondary Sets the secondary LSP.
Examples
Creating FTN entries in the FTN table of the MPLS forwarder:
ML66(config)#mpls ftn-entry 2 10.10.0.0/24 16 1.2.3.4 1/9/4.500 secondary
35.8 mpls ilm-entry pop
Synopsis
— mpls ilm-entry <LABEL> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> pop

[<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> <IPADDR> <IPADDR/PREFIX> [<ILM> ] ]
— no mpls ilm-entry <LABEL> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN>
Description
Use this command to create an Incoming Label Map (ILM) entry in the ILM table
to which a pop incoming interface is bound. Upon receipt of a labeled packet on
an MPLS-enabled router, a lookup is done based on the incoming label in the ILM
table. If a match is found, the packet is popped and passed over IP or next label.
In a pop operation, an outgoing label is not needed as is either accepted or
386 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

forwarded over IP. The nexthop option is also not mandatory because the
Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) IP address could be a local IP address.
Use the no option to remove an ILM entry. If there is no match, an error message
is displayed.
Command Mode
Operands
LABEL The incoming label value.
IFNAME_RSP_sVLAN
The incoming interface name, where the format is <Rack/
Slot/Port.VLAN> .

<A.B.C.D> .
IPADDR/PREFIX The FEC for which this ILM entry is being created with
prefix length, where the format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
ILM The ILM index for updating an existing entry. The valid
range is 1–4294967295.
Options
pop Pops the incoming label.
Examples
Creating an ILM entry in the ILM table to which a pop incoming interface is
bound:
ML66(config)#mpls ilm-entry 100 1/9/4.500 pop
35.9 mpls ilm-entry swap
Synopsis
— mpls ilm-entry <LABEL> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_IN> swap {0 | 3 |

<OUT_LABEL>} <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_OUT> <IPADDR> <IPADDR/
PREFIX> [<ILM>]
— no mpls ilm-entry <LABEL> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_IN>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 387

CLI Descriptions
Description
to which a swap incoming interface is bound. Upon receipt of a labeled packet on
an MPLS-enabled router, a lookup is done based on the incoming label in the ILM
table. If a match is found, the packet is swapped and label-switched
downstream.
is displayed.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_IN
Slot/Port.VLAN>.
OUT_LABEL The outgoing label value. The valid range is 16–

1048575.
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_OUT
The outgoing interface name, where the format is <Rack/
Slot/Port.VLAN>.

<A.B.C.D>.
IPADDR/PREFIX The Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) for which this

ILM entry is being created with prefix length, where the
range is 1–4294967295.
Options
swap Sets swap for the incoming label.
0 Sets the outgoing label to IPv4 Explicit Null label (0).
3 Sets the outgoing label to Implicit Null label (3).
388 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Creating an ILM entry in the ILM table to which a swap incoming interface is
bound:
ML66(config)#mpls ilm-entry 100 1/9/4.500 swap 0 1/9/4.501 1.2.3.4 10.10.0.0/24 1
35.10 mpls ilm-entry vpnpop
Synopsis
— mpls ilm-entry <LABEL> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_IN> vpnpop

<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_OUT> <IPADDR> <IPADDR/PREFIX> [<ILM>]
— no mpls ilm-entry <LABEL> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_IN>
Description
for vpnpop operation. Upon receipt of a labeled packet on an MPLS-enabled
router, a lookup is done based on the incoming label in the ILM table. If a match
is found and operation is vpnpop, the packet is delivered to local VRF.
is displayed.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_IN
Slot/Port.VLAN>.
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN_OUT
The outgoing interface name, where the format is <Rack/
Slot/Port.VLAN>.

<A.B.C.D>.
IPADDR/PREFIX The Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) for which this

ILM entry is being created with prefix length, where the
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 389

CLI Descriptions
range is 1–4294967295.
Options
vpnpop Pops the incoming label and forward the VPN packet.
Examples
Creating an ILM entry in the ILM table for vpnpop operation:
ML66(config)#mpls ilm-entry 100 1/9/4.500 vpnpop 1/9/4.501 1.2.3.4 10.10.0.0/24 1
35.11 mpls ingress-ttl
Synopsis
— mpls ingress-ttl <TTL>
— no mpls ingress-ttl
Description
Use this command to set a Time to Live (TTL) value for LSPs for which this LSR is
the ingress.
Command Mode
Operands
TTL The TTL value. The valid range is 0–255.
Examples
Setting a TTL value for LSPs for which this LSR is the ingress:
ML66(config)#mpls ingress-ttl 5
390 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

35.12 mpls label mode
Synopsis
[no] mpls label mode {vrf <VRF> | all-vrfs} protocol bgp vpnv4 {per-
prefix | per-vrf}
Description
Use this command to configure per Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) labels.
The label mode can be configured at two levels: at a global level or at a VRF
level. The configuration at the global level affects all VRFs except those that are
configured at the VRF level. To apply the global level configuration to a specific
VRF, the configuration at the VRF level must be removed. The per-prefix label
mode is the default mode.
Use the no parameter with this command to reset the configuration to the default
mode.
— show bgp label mode globals
Command Mode
Operands
Options
vrf Specifies to configure a single VPN VRF domain.
all-vrfs Specifies to configure a label mode for all VRFs on the

router.
bgp-vpnv4 Specifies to apply the configuration to BGP VPNv4.
per-prefix Specifies the per-prefix label mode.
per-vrf Specifies the per-vrf label mode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 391

CLI Descriptions
Examples
ML66#mpls label mode vrf vrf_1 protocol bgp-vpnv4 per-vrf
35.13 mpls label-range
Synopsis
— mpls label-range <DYNAMIC_LABEL_LOW> <DYNAMIC_LABEL_UP>
— no mpls label-range
Description
Use this command to configure non-overlapping dynamic label ranges for use
during MPLS VPN route forwarding. These labels are assigned dynamically
(dynamic range) on request by a protocol (BGP/LDP/OSPF-SR).
Use the no option to reset the label range to 16000–1048575.
Command Mode
Operands
DYNAMIC_LABEL_LOW
The dynamic label range lower bound. The valid range is
16000–1048575.
DYNAMIC_LABEL_UP
The dynamic label range upper bound. The valid range is
16000–1048575.
Examples
Configuring non-overlapping dynamic range for use during MPLS VPN route
forwarding:
ML66(config)#mpls label-range 16020 16030
35.14 mpls map-route
Synopsis
[no] mpls map-route <FEC/PREFIX> <IPADDR/PREFIX>
392 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to map a prefix to a Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC).
Command Mode
Operands
FEC/PREFIX The IPv4 forwarding equivalence class with prefix length

for route to map, where the format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
IPADDR/PREFIX The IPv4 address with prefix length to map, where the
Examples
Mapping 1.2.3.4 prefix to 5.6.7.8/32 FEC:
ML66(config)#mpls map-route 1.2.3.4/32 5.6.7.8/32
35.15 mpls propagate-ttl
Synopsis
[no] mpls propagate-ttl
Description
Use this command to enable Time to Live (TTL) propagation. Enabling TTL
propagation causes the TTL value in the IP header to be copied onto the TTL
field in the shim header, at the LSP ingress. By default, TTL propagation is
enabled.
Use the no to disable TTL propagation.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling TTL propagation:
ML66(config)#mpls propagate-ttl
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 393

CLI Descriptions
35.16 mpls traffic-eng
Synopsis
— [no] mpls traffic-eng level-1
— mpls traffic-eng router-id <IPADDR>
— no mpls traffic-eng router-id
Description
Use this command to configure the MPLS Traffic Engineering feature for
Intermediate System–Intermediate System (IS-IS).
When mpls traffic-eng is enabled, CSPF will be enable automatically.
Note: Currently, CSPF is based on the Dijkstra algorithm, and the link metrics
are of higher priority during the calculation. As a result, the calculation
could fail if the result path is excluded by link affinities or explicit paths.
In field deployment with link affinities and explicit paths, the
downstream path is recommended.
By default, if this command is not used, traffic engineering TLVs and Sub-TLVs do
not get encoded by IS-IS.
Use the no parameter to turn off the feature.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR The IS-IS router-ID in IPv4 address format.
Options
level-1 Specifies the level-1 MPLS Traffic Engineering feature.
router-id Speficies a Traffic Engineering stable IP address for the

system.
Examples
ML66(config-router-isis)#mpls traffic-eng router-id 2.2.2.2
394 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

MPLS Interface Commands
36 MPLS Interface Commands
36.
The following command mode is applicable for the Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) interface command:
Table 36 MPLS Interface Commands Overview

label-switching enable label switching on an interface
— show mpls
— show mpls cross-connect-table
— show mpls forwarding-table
— show mpls ftn-table
— show mpls ilm-table
— show mpls in-segment-table
— show mpls interface
— show mpls ldp
— show mpls mapped-routes
— show mpls out-segment-table
— show mpls vc-table
— show mpls vrf-table
884.
36.1 label-switching
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 395

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
[no] label-switching
Description
Use this command to enable label switching on an interface.
Use the no option to disable label switching on an interface.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling label switching:
ML66(config-router-if)#label-switching
396 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
37 RSVP-TE Commands
37.
The following command modes are applicable for the Intermediate Resource
Reservation Protocol - Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE) commands:
— Exec mode — >
— RSVP-TE Router configuration submode — (config-router-rsvp)
— RSVP-TE Trunk submode — (config-rsvp-trunk-ip)
— RSVP-TE Path submode — (config-rsvp-path)
Table 37 RSVP-TE Commands Overview

<IPADDR> define an explicit IPv4 route sub-
object as either loose or strict
ack-wait-timeout configure the acknowledgement wait
timeout for all RSVP-TE neighbors
clear rsvp session reset either all or specified sessions
originating from a specific ingress and
terminating on a specific egress
clear rsvp statistics reset all RSVP statistics counters to
zero
clear rsvp trunk clear a specific RSVP trunk or all
trunks
detour-identification set a detour Label Switched Path
(LSP) identification method
dscp set the RSVP-TE DSCP value
explicit-null send Explicit Null labels to directly-
connected FECs instead of Implicit
Null labels
ext-tunnel-id configure an extended tunnel
identifier used in RSVP messages
from <IPADDR> identify the source address of IPv4
packets sent out by the RSVP daemon
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 397

CLI Descriptions
hello-interval set the time interval between

successive Hello packets
hello-timeout set how long an RSVP node waits for
a Hello message before declaring a
neighbor to be down
keep-multiplier configure the constant to be used to
calculate a valid reservation lifetime
for a Labeled Switched Path (LSP)
loop-detection turn on loop detection for Path and
Reservation messages exchanged
between Label Switched Routers
(LSRs)
map-route map routes to a given RSVP trunk
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize trigger the LSP reoptimization
manually
php enable Penultimate-Hop-Popping for
the router
primary affinity enable the sending out of session-
attribute objects with resource-affinity
data
primary exclude-any specify the Administrative Groups that
are excluded from an LSP
configuration
primary fast-reroute exclude-any specify the Administrative Groups that
are excluded from a Fast Reroute
(FRR) backup LSP configuration
primary fast-reroute hop-limit set the hop limit for an FRR detour
LSP
primary fast-reroute include-any include any of the Administrative
Groups in an FRR backup LSP
primary fast-reroute protection one- create an FRR backup and set an LSP
to-one one-to-one protection mechanism
primary hop-limit specify a limit of hops for an RSVP
trunk
primary include-any include any of the Administrative
Groups in an LSP
primary label-record record all labels exchanged between
RSVP-enabled routers during the
reservation setup process
primary path specify an RSVP path to be used
primary record enable or disable the recording of the
route taken by Path and Reservation
Request (Resv) messages to confirm
398 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
the establishment of reservations and

identify errors
refresh-path-parsing disable the parsing of Refresh PATH
messages received from upstream
nodes
refresh-resv-parsing disable the parsing of Refresh RESV
messages received from upstream
nodes
refresh-time configure the RSVP refresh interval
timer
reoptimize-lockdown disable the reoptimization for a
specific RSVP-TE trunk, while the
global LSP reoptimization is enabled
reoptimize timers frequency set the frequency of reoptimize timers
router rsvp enter RSVP-TE Router configuration
submode from Global Configuration
mode, and enable the RSVP daemon
rsvp-path create a new RSVP path, or enter
RSVP-TE Path submode
rsvp-trunk create a new RSVP trunk, or enter the
RSVP-TE Trunk submode to perform
maintenance on a specific trunk
rsvp-trunk-restart restart an RSVP trunk
select-preference configure a selected preference for an
RSVP trunk
to <IPADDR> specify an IPv4 egress for an LSP
— show rsvp
— show rsvp admin-groups
— show rsvp interface
— show rsvp neighbor
— show rsvp nexthop-cache
— show rsvp path
— show rsvp session
— show rsvp session count
— show rsvp session egress
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 399

CLI Descriptions
— show rsvp session ingress
— show rsvp session <LSP-NAME>
— show rsvp session transit
— show rsvp statistics
— show rsvp summary-refresh
— show rsvp trunk
— show rsvp version
884.
37.1 <IPADDR>
Synopsis
[no] <IPADDR> {loose | strict}
Description
Use this command to define an explicit IPv4 route sub-object as either loose or
strict. A list of sub-objects specifies an explicit route to the egress router for a
Label Switched Path (LSP).
For the strict type of route addresses, the route taken from the previous router to
the current router must be a directly connected path and a message exchanged
between the two routers should not pass any intermediate routers. This ensures
that routing is enforced on the basis of each link.
For the loose type of route addresses, the route taken from the previous router to
the current router does not need to be a direct path and a message exchanged
between the two routers can pass other routers.
A.B.C.D is the TE router ID or the incoming/outgoing interface address of the

router in the explicit route, and it indicates the router itself instead of the router
interface.
Note: If A.B.C.D is the incoming/outgoing interface address of the router, the

router should have Intermediate System–Intermediate System (IS-IS)
adjacency on that link.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the configuration.
400 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Command Mode
RSVP-TE Path submode — (config-rsvp-path)
Options
loose Specifies the node as loose.
strict Specifies the node as strict.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-path)#1.2.3.4 strict
37.2 ack-wait-timeout
Synopsis
[no] ack-wait-timeout <TIMEOUT>
Description
Use this command to configure the acknowledgement wait timeout for all RSVP-
TE neighbors.
Use the no parameter with this command to revert to the default

acknowledgement wait timeout.
Command Mode
RSVP-TE Router configuration submode — (config-router-rsvp)
Operands
TIMEOUT The acknowledgement wait timeout in seconds. The valid

range is 1–65535 s. The default value is 10 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#ack-wait-timeout 65535
37.3 clear rsvp session
Synopsis
clear rsvp session *
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 401

CLI Descriptions
clear rsvp session <TUNNEL-ID> <LSP-ID> <IPADDR_IN>

<IPADDR2_OUT>
Description
Use this command to reset either all or specified sessions originating from a
specific ingress and terminating on a specific egress.
Note: If an affected session originates from the router where the command is
issued, the session is stopped and started. If the affected session does
not originate from the router where the command is issued, the session
is stopped and deleted.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
TUNNEL-ID The tunnel ID for the session. The valid range is 1–

65535.
LSP-ID The LSP ID for the session. The valid range is 1–65535.
IPADDR_IN The ingress IPv4 address for the session, where the
IPADDR_OUT The egress IPv4 address for the session, where the
Options
* Specifies to clear all RSVP sessions.
Examples
ML66#clear rsvp session 1 1 1.2.3.4 192.168.1.1
37.4 clear rsvp statistics
Synopsis
clear rsvp statistics
Description
Use this command to reset all RSVP statistics counters to zero. This command
sets the path receipt and sent counters to zero. Once this command is executed,
402 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
all counters read zero, and if a new message is sent or received, it shows up in the
statistics.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66#clear rsvp statistics
37.5 clear rsvp trunk
Synopsis
— clear rsvp trunk *
— clear rsvp trunk {<TRUNKNAME> | *} primary
— clear rsvp trunk ingress {<TRUNKNAME> | *}
— clear rsvp trunk non-ingress {<TRUNKNAME> | *}
Description
Use this command to clear a specific RSVP trunk or all trunks. Keep in mind that
while clearing a trunk, this command also kills any session associated with the
trunk. This command is useful when a created trunk is missing certain required
data. The trunk is in an incomplete state at this point, and clearing the trunk
correctly re-initializes the session.
Note: If the affected session on the Ingress router is where the command is
issued, the session is stopped and started. If the affected session on the
Egress router is where the command is issued, the session is not cleared.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
TRUNKNAME The name of a trunk.
Options
* Specifies all RSVP trunks.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 403

CLI Descriptions
ingress Specifies an RSVP ingress trunk.
non-ingress Specifies an RSVP non-ingress trunk.
primary Resets the primary sessions of the specified trunk or of all

trunks.
Examples
ML66#clear rsvp trunk trunk1 primary
37.6 detour-identification
Synopsis
[no] detour-identification {path | sender-template}
Description
Use this command to set a detour Label Switched Path (LSP) identification
method.
Use the no parameter with this command to unset the detour LSP identification
method.
Note: This command can be used to configure the backup LSP identification
method only for one-to-one protection.
Command Mode
Options
path Specifies a path-specific detour identification method

(using a detour object).
sender-template
Specifies a sender-template-specific detour identification
method.
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#detour-identification path
404 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
37.7 dscp
Synopsis
— dscp <DSCP>
— no dscp
Description
Use this command to set the RSVP-TE DSCP value.
Use the no option to reset to the default value.
Command Mode
Operands
DSCP The DSCP value. The valid range is 0-63. The default
value is 48.
Examples
Setting the RSVP-TE DSCP value to 16::
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#dscp 16
37.8 explicit-null
Synopsis
[no] explicit-null
Description
Use this command to send Explicit Null labels to directly-connected FECs instead
of Implicit Null labels.
This command controls the label value advertised on the Egress router of an LSP.
By default, the Implicit Null label (label 3) is advertised to directly-connected
FECs. If the Implicit Null label is advertised, the penultimate hop removes the
label and sends the packet as a plain IP packet to the Egress router. The Explicit
Null command advertises the label 0 and retains the label so the Egress router
can pop it. For details on Explicit Null, refer to RFC 3032.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 405

CLI Descriptions
Use the no parameter to stop sending Explicit Null labels to directly connected
FECs and resume sending Implicit Null labels to them.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#explicit-null
37.9 ext-tunnel-id
Synopsis
— ext-tunnel-id <IPADDR>
— no ext-tunnel-id
Description
Use this command to configure an extended tunnel identifier used in RSVP
messages. If no extended tunnel ID is specified, the LSR-ID for the router is used
as the extended tunnel ID for all LSPs. The extended tunnel ID is a simple way of
identifying all LSPs belonging to the same trunk.
Use the no form of this command to unset the pre-configured extended tunnel ID.
Command Mode
RSVP-TE Trunk submode — (config-rsvp-trunk-ip)
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 representation of the extended tunnel ID.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#ext-tunnel-id 10.10.10.30
37.10 from <IPADDR>
406 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Synopsis
— from <IPADDR>
— no from [<IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to identify the source address of IPv4 packets sent out by the
RSVP daemon. In addition, the sender’s IPv4 address can also be specified in the
sender template object in Path messages.
This command can be used either in RSVP-TE Router configuration submode or

in RSVP-TE Trunk submode. In RSVP-TE Router configuration submode, this
command specifies the source address of IPv4 packets sent out by the RSVP
daemon. In RSVP-TE Trunk submode, this command specifies the sender address
in the sender template object used in Path messages.
Use the no parameter to revert to the default settings.
Command Mode
RSVP-TE Router configuration submode — (config-router-rsvp) and RSVP-
TE Trunk submode — (config-rsvp-trunk-ip)
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of tunnel ingress.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#from 10.10.10.30
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#from 10.10.10.30
37.11 hello-interval
Synopsis
— hello-interval <INTERVAL>
— no hello-interval
Description
Use this command to set the time interval between successive Hello packets.
Used as a global command, this value is overridden by the hello interval set on
the interface (see rsvp hello-interval ). For optimum performance, set this
value to no more than one-third of the hello timeout value.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 407

CLI Descriptions
Use the no parameter to revert to the default hello interval value.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The time in seconds after which Hello packets are to be

sent. The valid range is 1–65535 s. The default value is 2
s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#hello-interval 10
37.12 hello-timeout
Synopsis
— hello-timeout <TIMEOUT>
— no hello-timeout
Description
Use this command to set how long an RSVP node waits for a Hello message
before declaring a neighbor to be down. If a Labeled Switched Router (LSR) has
not received a Hello message from a peer within the time period specified by this
command, all sessions shared with this are reset.
Use the no parameter to revert to the default hello timeout value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIMEOUT The time period an RSVP node waits to receive a Hello

message, specified in seconds. The valid range is 1–
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#hello-timeout 20
408 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
37.13 keep-multiplier
Synopsis
— keep-multiplier <MULTIPLIER>
— no keep-multiplier [<MULTIPLIER> ]
Description
Use this command to configure the constant to be used to calculate a valid
reservation lifetime for an LSP.
The refresh time and keep multiplier are two interrelated timing parameters used
to calculate the valid reservation lifetime for an LSP. Use the following formula to
calculate the reservation lifetime for an LSP:
L ≥ (K + 0.5) * 1.5 * R K = keep multiplier

R = refresh timer
Refresh messages are sent periodically by the router so that the neighbors do not
timeout.
Use the no parameter to reset to the keep multiplier to the default setting.
Command Mode
Operands
MULTIPLIER The keep multiplier value. The valid range is 1–255. The
default value is 3.
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#keep-multiplier 10
37.14 loop-detection
Synopsis
[no] loop-detection
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 409

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to turn on loop detection for Path and Reservation messages
exchanged between LSRs. When a Path or Reservation message is received, the
primary IP address of the incoming interface is compared with the received route
record list.
By default, loop detection for Path and Reservation messages is disabled.
Use the no parameter with this command to revert to the default settings.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#loop-detection
37.15 map-route
Synopsis
[no] map-route <IPADDR/PREFIX>
Description
Use this command to map routes to a given RSVP trunk. If the primary LSP for a
trunk is not available, all the mapped routes automatically use a secondary LSP
configured as backup for the primary LSP.
Use the no parameter with this command to unmap routes from specified trunks.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The IPv4 address to be mapped, with prefix length,

where the format is <A.B.C.D/P>.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#map-route 2.2.2.2/16
410 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
37.16 mpls traffic-eng reoptimize
Synopsis
mpls traffic-eng reoptimize {all | <TRUNKNAME>}
Description
Use this command to trigger the LSP reoptimization manually.
This command starts the reoptimization immediately. Enter all or

<TRUNKNAME> to reoptimize all RSVP-TE trunks or a specific one.
Note: Use the reoptimize timers frequency command to set up intervals

of automatic reoptimization, which is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Operands
TRUNKNAME The name of a trunk.
Examples
Triggering the reoptimization of all RSVP-TE trunks:
ML66(config)#mpls traffic-eng reoptimize all
Triggering the reoptimization of a specific RSVP-TE trunk:

ML66(config)#mpls traffic-eng reoptimize trunk1
37.17 php
Synopsis
[no] php
Description
Use this command to enable Penultimate-Hop-Popping for the router.
An egress router sends either the Implicit Null or the Explicit Null label for LSPs.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 411

CLI Descriptions
Note: Use the show rsvp command to display the status of Penultimate-Hop-
Popping.
By default, Penultimate-Hop-Popping is enabled.
Use the no php command to disable this setting. If the no php command has
been used, the egress router sends non-reserved labels (labels from the label pool
range allotted to RSVP) to the upstream router.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#php
37.18 primary affinity
Synopsis
— primary affinity
— primary no-affinity
Description
Use this command to enable the sending out of session-attribute objects with
resource-affinity data.
By default, this feature is enabled.
Use the no-affinity command to disable the sending out of session-attribute

objects.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary affinity
37.19 primary exclude-any
412 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Synopsis
[no] primary exclude-any <GROUP>
Description
Use this command to specify the Administrative Groups that are excluded from
an LSP configuration.
Administrative Groups are manually-assigned attributes that describe the colors

of links, so that links with the same color are in one class. These groups are used
to implement different policy-based LSP setups. Administrative Groups can be
defined to be excluded for an LSP or for the primary and secondary paths of a
path. If an exclude list is specified, any link that includes even one of the colors
specified in the exclude list will not be chosen.
Use the no parameter to remove a previously set group in the Exclude Any list.
Command Mode
Operands
GROUP The Administrative Group name.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary exclude-any sample
37.20 primary fast-reroute exclude-any
Synopsis
[no] primary fast-reroute exclude-any <GROUP>
Description
Use this command to specify the Administrative Groups that are excluded from a
Fast Reroute (FRR) backup LSP configuration.
Use the no parameter to remove a previously set group in the Exclude Any list.
Note: This command can be used to configure the FRR backup LSP for either
one-to-one or facility backup protection.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 413

CLI Descriptions
Operands
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary fast-reroute exclude-any sample
37.21 primary fast-reroute hop-limit
Synopsis
— primary fast-reroute hop-limit <LIMIT>
— [no] primary fast-reroute hop-limit [<LIMIT>]
Description
Use this command to set the hop limit for a Fast Reroute (FRR) detour LSP.
Use the no parameter with this command to unset the detour LSP hop-limit.
Note: This command can be used to configure the FRR backup LSP only for
one-to-one backup protection.
Command Mode
Operands
LIMIT The acceptable number of hops. The valid range is 1–

255.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary fast-reroute hop-limit 5
37.22 primary fast-reroute include-any
Syopsis
[no] primary fast-reroute include-any <GROUP>
414 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Description
Use this command to include any of the Administrative Groups in a Fast Reroute
(FRR) backup LSP.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove a previously set group in the
Include Any list of Administrative Groups.
Note: This command can be used to configure the FRR backup LSP only for
one-to-one backup protection.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary fast-reroute include-any sample
37.23 primary fast-reroute protection one-to-one
Synopsis
[no] primary fast-reroute protection one-to-one
Description
Use this command to create a Fast Reroute (FRR) backup and to set an LSP one-
to-one protection mechanism.
Use the no parameter with this command to unset the LSP protection
mechanism.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary fast-reroute protection one-to-one
37.24 primary hop-limit
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 415

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— primary hop-limit <LIMIT>
— no primary hop-limit [<LIMIT> ]
Description
Use this command to specify a limit of hops for an RSVP trunk.
Hop-limit data are sent to the CSPF server if CSPF is used. Upon configuration of
an arbitrary hop limit, the hop limit is compared with the number of hops
configured in the primary path, if a primary path has been configured. If the
number of hops in the primary path exceeds the hop limit configured, no Path
messages are sent, and any existing session is torn down. If no primary path is
configured, the trunk is processed normally, and Path messages are sent.
Command Mode
Operands
LIMIT The acceptable number of hops. The valid range is 1–

255.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary hop-limit 5
37.25 primary include-any
Synopsis
[no] primary include-any <GROUP>
Description
Use this command to include any of the Administrative Groups in an LSP.
Administrative Groups, also known as link coloring or resource classes, are

manually-assigned attributes that ensure that links with the same color belong to
the same class. These groups are used to implement different policy-based LSP
setups. If an include-any list is configured, all chosen links must belong to at least
one of the Administrative Groups enumerated in the include-any list.
Use the no parameter to remove a previously set group in the Include Any list of
Administrative Groups.
416 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary include-any sample
37.26 primary label-record
Synopsis
[no] primary label-record
Description
Use this command to record all labels exchanged between RSVP-enabled routers
during the reservation setup process.
By default, the recording of all labels is enabled.
Use the no parameter to turn off recording.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary label-record
37.27 primary path
Synopsis
— primary path <PATHNAME>
— no primary path
Description
Use this command to specify an RSVP path to be used.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 417

CLI Descriptions
The <PATHNAME> in this command is the string used to identify an RSVP path
defined for the node (see the rsvp-path command).
Use the no parameter to unset the configured RSVP path.
Command Mode
Operands
PATHNAME The name of the path.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary path sample
37.28 primary record
Synopsis
primary {record | no-record}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the recording of the route taken by Path
and Reservation Request (Resv) messages to confirm the establishment of
reservations and identify errors.
Routes are recorded by means of the Route Record Object (RRO) in RSVP
messages. By default, the recording of routes is enabled.
Command Mode
Options
record Enables the recording of routes.
no-record Disables the recording of routes.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#primary record
418 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
37.29 refresh-path-parsing
Synopsis
[no] refresh-path-parsing
Description
Use this command to disable the parsing of Refresh PATH messages received
from upstream nodes.
Enable this feature to minimize message processing by RSVP if a particular

router does not need to parse Refresh-PATH messages to check for changes,
because LSPs passing through this router are not required to be updated
simultaneously.
Use the no parameter to enable the parsing of Refresh PATH messages received
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#refresh-path-parsing
37.30 refresh-resv-parsing
Synopsis
[no] refresh-resv-parsing
Description
Use this command to disable the parsing of Refresh RESV messages received
Enable this feature to minimize message processing by RSVP if a particular

router does not need to parse Refresh RESV messages to check for changes,
because LSPs passing through this router are not required to be updated
simultaneously.
Use the no parameter to enable the parsing of Refresh PATH messages received
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 419

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#refresh-resv-parsing
37.31 refresh-time
Synopsis
— refresh-time <TIME>
— no refresh-time [<TIME> ]
Description
Use this command to configure the RSVP refresh interval timer. The timer
specifies the interval after which Path and/or Reservation Request (Resv)
messages are sent out.
Refresh time and keep multiplier are two interrelated timing parameters used to
calculate the valid Reservation Lifetime for an LSP. Refresh time regulates the
interval between Refresh messages, which include Path and Reservation Request
(Resv) messages. Refresh messages are sent periodically so that reservation does
not timeout in the neighboring nodes. Each sender and receiver host sends Path
and Resv messages, downstream and upstream respectively, along the paths.
Use the no parameter to revert to the default refresh interval.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The time interval in seconds after which messages are

sent. The valid range is 1–65535 s. The default interval is
30 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-rsvp)#refresh-time 20
420 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
37.32 reoptimize-lockdown
Synopsis
[no] reoptimize-lockdown
Description
Use this command to disable the reoptimization for a specific RSVP-TE trunk,
while the global LSP reoptimization is enabled.
When an LSP is locked down, the reoptimization is disabled, even when it is

triggered manually.
Use the no option with this command to unlock the reoptimization.
Note: By default, the reoptimization is unlocked.
Use the mpls traffic-eng reoptimize command to manually trigger

the reoptimization.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling the reoptimization for a specific RSVP-TE trunk:
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#reoptimize-lockdown
Unlocking the reoptimization:

ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#no reoptimize-lockdown
37.33 reoptimize timers frequency
Synopsis
reoptimize timers frequency [<INTERVAL>]
no reoptimize timers frequency
Description
Use this command to set the frequency of reoptimize timers.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 421

CLI Descriptions
The default value of the timer frequency is 3600 seconds. To set the default
value, use reoptimize timers frequency without operand.
At given intervals, LSP trunks are scanned for a better LSP path.
Use the no option to disable reoptimization.
Note: By default, the reoptimization of RSVP-TE trunks is enabled. The default

interval is 3600 seconds.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL Specifies a value of the timer frequency in seconds. The

valid range is 60-604800. The default value is 3600
seconds.
Examples
Setting reoptimize timers:
ML66(config-router-rsvp)# reoptimize timers frequency 100
37.34 router rsvp
Synopsis
[no] router rsvp
Description
Use this command to enter RSVP-TE Router configuration submode from Global
Configuration mode and to enable the RSVP daemon, if it is not enabled yet.
The RSVP internal state machine starts up only if this command is executed.
Use the no parameter in Global Configuration mode to disable RSVP on the node.
Command Mode
422 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Examples
ML66(config)#router rsvp
ML66(config-router-rsvp)
37.35 rsvp-path
Synopsis
[no] rsvp-path <PATHNAME>
Description
Use this command to create a new RSVP path or to enter RSVP-TE Path
submode. In this mode, you can add or delete paths and specify the path to be
loose or strict.
Use the no parameter to delete the path and the specified hops of the path.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
ML66(config)#rsvp-path sample
ML66(config-rsvp-path)
37.36 rsvp-trunk
Synopsis
— rsvp-trunk <TRUNKNAME> ipv4
— no rsvp-trunk <TRUNKNAME>
Description
Use this command to create a new RSVP trunk or to enter RSVP-TE Trunk
submode to perform maintenance on a specific trunk.
This command creates a new RSVP trunk and adds the attributes required to
configure an explicitly-routed or traditionally-routed Label Switched Path (LSP).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 423

CLI Descriptions
Once the trunk is configured with the required attributes, an RSVP session (and
PSB) is created for this trunk, which enables the exchange of messages and
completes the LSP setup.
This command also modifies an existing RSVP Path to configure an explicitly-

routed or traditionally-routed LSP.
This command can also be used to set the address family of an RSVP trunk. If no
address family is specified, the default value of IPv4 is used. If the address family
is already set, a check is made to see if the address family configured and the one
already in the database are the same. An error message is sent if the two do not
match.
Use the no option with this command to remove a RSVP trunk and all the
configured attributes, except for the specified primary path.
Command Mode
Operands
TRUNKNAME The name of the specific PSB trunk.
Options
ipv4 Specifies the IPv4 address family.
Examples
ML66(config)#rsvp-trunk sample ipv4
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)
37.37 rsvp-trunk-restart
Synopsis
rsvp-trunk-restart
Description
Use this command to restart the RSVP trunk. This command is used to kill the
existing LSP and to re-start the LSP setup procedure.
Command Mode
424 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Commands
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#rsvp-trunk-restart
37.38 select-preference
Synopsis
— select-preference <PREFERENCE>
— no select-preference
Description
Use this command to configure a selected preference for an RSVP trunk. The level
of preference is measured by the value of the number from 0 to 7. A greater
number indicates higher level of preference. If multiple trunks are defined
towards the same destination, the trunk with higher preference is selected as the
primary trunk. When the two trunks are with the same preference, the system
randomly selects one of them.
Use the no parameter with this command to unset the configuration.
Note: Do not configure select-preference and primary fast-reroute

protection at the same time. These are mutually exclusive.
Command Mode
RSVP Trunk submode — (config-rsvp-trunk-ip)
Operands
PREFERENCE Value that indicates the level of preference. Valid range is

0-7. The default value is 0.
Examples
Configure a selected preference for an RSVP trunk:
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#select-preference 7
37.39 to <IPADDR>
Synopsis
— to <IPADDR>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 425

CLI Descriptions
— no to
Description
Use this command to specify an IPv4 egress for an LSP.
When configuring an LSP, the egress router address must be specified using this
command in the trunk node. The egress definition is a mandatory attribute, and
an RSVP session will not be created if an egress is not defined.
Command Mode
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of the tunnel egress.
Examples
ML66(config-rsvp-trunk-ip)#to 10.10.0.10
426 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

RSVP-TE Interface Commands
38 RSVP-TE Interface Commands
38.
The following command mode is applicable for the Intermediate Resource

Reservation Protocol - Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE) interface commands:
Table 38 RSVP-TE Commands Overview

admin-group create an Administrative Group to be
used for links
disable-rsvp disable RSVP message exchange on
an interface
enable-rsvp enable RSVP message exchange on
an interface
rsvp ack-wait-timeout configure the acknowledgement wait
timeout for all neighbors detected
through the specific interface
rsvp bfd enable or disable BFD for RSVP on the
interface
rsvp hello enable or disable the receipt of Hello
messages from peers connected
through the specific interface
rsvp hello-interval enable the sending of Hello packets on
the interface, and set the time interval
between successive Hello packets
rsvp hello-timeout set how long an RSVP node waits for
a Hello message before declaring a
neighbor to be down
rsvp keep-multiplier configure the constant for calculating
a valid reservation lifetime for an LSP
for messages exchanged through this
interface
rsvp refresh-reduction enable Refresh Reduction capability
advertisement for a specific interface
rsvp refresh-time configure the RSVP refresh interval
timer for the specific interface
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 427

CLI Descriptions
— show rsvp
— show rsvp admin-groups
— show rsvp interface
— show rsvp neighbor
— show rsvp nexthop-cache
— show rsvp path
— show rsvp session
— show rsvp session count
— show rsvp session egress
— show rsvp session ingress
— show rsvp session <LSP-NAME>
— show rsvp session transit
— show rsvp statistics
— show rsvp summary-refresh
— show rsvp trunk
— show rsvp version
884
38.1 admin-group
Synopsis
[no] admin-group <NAME>
Description
Use this command to create an Administrative Group to be used for links. Each
link can be a member of one or more or no Administrative Groups.
When used in Router Interface configuration submode, this command adds a link
between an interface and a group. The name is the name of the group previously
428 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

configured. There can be multiple groups per interface. The group is created in
Global Configurarion mode, then interfaces are added to the group in Router
Interface configuration submode.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this command.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the admin group.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#admin-group sample
38.2 disable-rsvp
Synopsis
disable-rsvp
Description
Use this command to disable RSVP message exchange on an interface. RSVP
message exchange can be enabled using the enable-rsvp command.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#disable-rsvp
38.3 enable-rsvp
Synopsis
enable-rsvp
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 429

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable RSVP message exchange on an interface. RSVP
message exchange can be disabled using the disable-rsvp command.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#enable-rsvp
38.4 rsvp ack-wait-timeout
Synopsis
— rsvp ack-wait-timeout <TIMEOUT>
— no rsvp ack-wait-timeout [<TIMEOUT> ]
Description
Use this command to configure the acknowledgement wait timeout for all
neighbors detected through the specific interface.
Use the no parameter with this command to revert to the default

acknowledgement wait timeout for the specified interface.
Command Mode
Operands
TIMEOUT The acknowledgement wait timeout value in seconds.

The valid range is 1–65535 s. The default timeout value
is 10 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp ack-wait-timeout 200
430 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

38.5 rsvp bfd
Synopsis
rsvp bfd {enable | disable}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)
for RSVP on the interface.
Command Mode
Options
enable Enables BFD for RSVP on the interface.
disable Disables BFD for RSVP on the interface.
Examples
Enabling BFD for RSVP on the interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp bfd enable
38.6 rsvp hello
Synopsis
rsvp hello {enable | disable}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the receipt of Hello messages from peers
connected through the specific interface.
By default, the receipt of Hello messages is disabled.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 431

CLI Descriptions
Options
enable Enables the receipt of Hello messages.
disable Disables the receipt of Hello messages.
Examples
Enabling the receipt of Hello messages from peers connected through the
interface:
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp hello enable
38.7 rsvp hello-interval
Synopsis
— rsvp hello-interval <INTERVAL>
— no rsvp hello-interval
Description
Use this command to enable the sending of Hello packets on the interface and to
set the time interval between successive Hello packets. For optimum
performance, set this value to less than one-third of the specified rsvp hello
timeout value.
This is an interface-specific command, and when it is not specified, the global

hello-interval state applies.
Use the no parameter to revert to default hello interval value.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–65535 s.

The default value is 1 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp hello-interval 10
432 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

38.8 rsvp hello-timeout
Synopsis
— rsvp hello-timeout <TIMEOUT>
— no rsvp hello-timeout
Description
Use this command to set how long an RSVP node waits for a Hello message
before declaring a neighbor to be down. If an LSR has not received a Hello
message from a peer connected through the specific interface within the time
period specified using this command, the LSR resets all sessions shared with this
particular peer.

hello-timeout state applies.
Use the no parameter to revert to the default hello timeout value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIMEOUT The time period an RSVP node waits to receive a Hello

message, specified in seconds. The valid range is 1–
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp hello-timeout 5
38.9 rsvp keep-multiplier
Synopsis
[no] rsvp keep-multiplier <MULTIPLIER>
Description
Use this command to configure the constant for calculating a valid reservation
lifetime for an LSP for messages exchanged through this interface.
Reservation lifetime is the duration of bandwidth reservation for the LSP. Refresh
time and keep multiplier are two interrelated timing parameters used to calculate
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 433

CLI Descriptions
the valid Reservation Lifetime for an LSP. Use the following formula to calculate
the reservation lifetime for an LSP:
L ≥ (K + 0.5) * 1.5 * R K = keep multiplier

R = refresh timer
Command Mode
Operands
MULTIPLIER The keep multiplier value. The valid range is 1–255.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp keep-multiplier 20
38.10 rsvp refresh-reduction
Synopsis
[no] rsvp refresh-reduction
Description
Use this command to enable Refresh Reduction capability advertisement for a
specific interface.
By default, Refresh Reduction the mechanism is enabled for all interfaces.
Use the no parameter with this command disable Refresh Reduction capability
advertisement for the specified interface.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp refresh-reduction
38.11 rsvp refresh-time
434 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— rsvp refresh-time <TIME>
— no rsvp refresh-time [<TIME> ]
Description
Use this command to configure the RSVP refresh interval timer for the specific
interface.

refresh-time state applies.
Refresh time and keep multiplier are two interrelated timing parameters used to
calculate the valid Reservation Lifetime for an LSP. Refresh time regulates the
interval between Refresh messages, which include Path and Reservation Request
(Resv) messages. Refresh messages are sent periodically so that the reservation
does not timeout in the neighboring nodes. Each sender and receiver host sends
Path and Resv messages, downstream and upstream respectively, along the
paths.
Use the no parameter with this command to revert to the refresh time value set in
RSVP-TE Router configuration submode.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME The time interval in seconds after which messages are

sent. The valid range is 1–65535 s. The default refresh-
time interval is 3 s.
Examples
ML66(config-router-if)#rsvp refresh-time 10
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 435

CLI Descriptions
39 DCN Remote Syslog Commands
39.
The following command mode is applicable for the DCN remote syslog
commands:
Table 39 DCN Remote Syslog Commands Overview

rsyslog enable enable remote syslog
rsyslog server add or modify a server for remote syslog
rsyslog6 server add a remote syslog server with IPv6 address
rsyslog trapseverity specify trap severities
— show rsyslog
— show rsyslog6
884.
39.1 rsyslog enable
Synopsis
[no] rsyslog enable
Description
Use this command to enable the remote syslog.
Use the no option to disable the remote syslog.
Command Mode
436 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Remote Syslog Commands
Examples
Enabling the remote syslog:
ML66(config)#rsyslog enable
39.2 rsyslog server
Synopsis
[no] rsyslog server <INDEX> <IPADDRESS> [<PORT> ]
Description
Use this command to add a remote syslog server.
Use the no option with the operand <INDEX> to remove a remote syslog server.
Command Mode
Operands
INDEX The index number of the remote syslog server. All servers
must have a unique index number.
IPADDRESS The address of the remote syslog server. Specified in

decimal notation <A.B.C.D> .
PORT The port to use on the remote syslog server.
Examples
Adding a remote syslog server with index 1 and port 514:
ML66(config)#rsyslog server 1 192.168.0.1 514
39.3 rsyslog6 server
Synopsis
[no] rsyslog6 server <INDEX> <IPV6ADDRESS> [<PORT> ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 437

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to add a remote syslog server with IPv6 address.
Use the no option with the operand <INDEX> to remove an IPv6 remote syslog
server.
Command Mode
Operands
INDEX The unique number of the remote syslog server. The valid
range is 1–3.
IPV6ADDRESS The IPv6 address of the remote syslog server, where the
format is <X:X::X:X> .
PORT The used UDP port on the remote syslog server.
Examples
Adding an IPv6 remote syslog server with index 1 and port 514:
ML66(config)#rsyslog6 server 1 2001:1b70:8180:c001::1011 514
39.4 rsyslog trapseverity
Synopsis
— rsyslog trapseverity <HEXSTRINGBITMAP>
— no rsyslog trapseverity
Description
Use this command to specify trap severities. Only alarms and events with a
severity that are registered with this command are sent to the remote syslog.
Use the no option to remove all trap severities.
Command Mode
438 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

DCN Remote Syslog Commands
Operands
HEXSTRINGBITMAP
Bitwise OR for the wanted severities, where the different
severities are represented by the following hexadecimal
strings: Indeterminate = 0x80, Critical = 0x40, Major =
0x20, Minor = 0x10, Warning = 0x08, Cleared = 0x04
Examples
Specifying that alarms and events with severities Critical and Major are sent to
the remote syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslog trapseverity 0x60
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 439

CLI Descriptions
40 Security Remote Syslog Commands
40.
The following command mode is applicable for the security remote syslog
commands:
Table 40 Security Remote Syslog Commands Overview

rsyslogsec enable enable the sending of selected security
events to an external syslog server in
syslog format
rsyslogsec events auditlog send all security events to the syslog
globalsettings server
rsyslogsec events localauth select which local authentication
events to send to the syslog server
rsyslogsec events login select which login events to send to
the syslog server
rsyslogsec events protocols select which security protocols events
to send to the syslog server
rsyslogsec events radius select which Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service (RADIUS) events
to send to the syslog server
rsyslogsec events tacacs select which Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System Plus
(TACACS+) events to send to the
syslog server
rsyslogsec server add a server to the server list for
security events
rsyslogsec6 server add a server with IPv6 address to the
server list for security events
— show rsyslogsec
— show rsyslogsec6
884.
440 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Security Remote Syslog Commands
40.1 rsyslogsec enable
Synopsis
[no] rsyslogsec enable
Description
Use this command to enable the sending of selected security events to an
external syslog server in syslog format.
Use the no option to disable the sending of selected security events to an external
syslog server in syslog format.
Command mode
Examples
Enabling remote syslog for security events:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec enable
40.2 rsyslogsec events auditlog globalsettings
Synopsis
rsyslogsec events auditlog globalsettings { yes | no }
Description
Use this command with the yes option to send all security events to the syslog
server.
Use the no option not to send security events to the syslog server.
Command Mode
Examples
Sending all security events to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events auditlog globalsettings yes
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 441

CLI Descriptions
Not sending security events to the syslog server:

ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events auditlog globalsettings no
40.3 rsyslogsec events localauth
Synopsis
rsyslogsec events localauth { aaa | localuseren | parammod | pwdchange
| pwdchangefailure | pwdreset } { yes | no }
Description
Use this command with the yes option to select which local authentication events
to send to the syslog server.
Use the no option not to send the previously selected local authentication events
to the syslog server.
Command mode
Options
aaa Selects AAA change events for logging.
localuseren Selects Local User Enable events for logging.
parammod Selects Local User Parameter Modified events for logging.
pwdchange Selects Password Change events for logging.
pwdchangefailure
Selects Password Change Failure events for logging.
pwdreset Selects Password Reset events for logging.
Examples
Selecting AAA change events to send to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events localauth aaa yes
Not sending AAA change events to the syslog server:

ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events localauth aaa no
442 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

40.4 rsyslogsec events login
Synopsis
rsyslogsec events login { centralfailure | centralsuccess |
localfailure | localsuccess } { yes | no }
Description
Use this command with the yes option to select which login events to send to the
syslog server.
Use the no option not to send the previously selected login events to the syslog
server.
Command mode
Options
centralfailure Selects failed centralized user login events for logging.
centralsuccess Selects successfully centralized user login events for

logging.
localfailure Selects failed local user login events for logging.
localsuccess Selects successfully local user login events for logging.
Examples
Selecting failed centralized user login events to send to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events login centralfailure yes
Not sending failed centralized user login events to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events login centralfailure no
40.5 rsyslogsec events protocols
Synopsis
rsyslogsec events protocols { brute | clien | cliprot | ftpprot |
ntpprot | ntpset | snmpperm | snmpv3priv } { yes | no }
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 443

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command with the yes option to select which security protocols events to
send to the syslog server.
Use the no option not to send the previously selected security protocols events to
the syslog server.
Command mode
Options
brute Selects brute force defence settings events for logging.
clien Selects CLI enabling events for logging.
cliprot Selects protocol settings events for logging.
ftpprot Selects FTP protocol settings events for logging.
ntpprot Selects Network Time Protocol (NTP) protocol settings

events for logging.
ntpset Selects NTP settings events for logging.
snmpperm Selects changes in Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) v1/2 permissions events for logging.
snmpv3priv Selects SNMPv3 privacy settings events for logging.
Examples
Selecting brute force defence settings events to send to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events protocols brute yes
Not sending brute force defence settings events to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events protocols brute no
40.6 rsyslogsec events radius
Synopsis
rsyslogsec events radius { serveradddel | serveravailability |
serverchanged | serverunknown } { yes | no }
444 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command with the yes option to select which Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service (RADIUS) events to send to the syslog server.
Use the no option not to send the previously selected RADIUS events to the
syslog server.
Command mode
Options
serveradddel Selects RADIUS server added or deleted events for

logging.
serveravailability
Selects server availability events for logging.
serverchanged Selects server parameter change events for logging.
serverunknown Selects server unknown status events for logging.
Examples
Selecting server availability events to send to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events radius server availability yes
Not sending server availability events to the syslog server:

ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events radius server availability no
40.7 rsyslogsec events tacacs
Synopsis
rsyslogsec events tacacs { serveradddel | serveravailability |
serverchanged | serverunknown } { yes | no }
Description
Use this command with the yes option to select which Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) events to send to the syslog server.
Use the no option not to send the previously selected TACACS+ events to the
syslog server.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 445

CLI Descriptions
Command mode
Options
serveradddel Selects TACACS+ server added or deleted events for

logging.
serveravailability
Selects server availability events for logging.
serverchanged Selects server parameter change events for logging.
serverunknown Selects server unknown status events for logging.
Examples
Selecting server availability events to send to the syslog server:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events tacacs serveravailability yes
Not sending server availability events to the syslog server:

ML66(config)#rsyslogsec events tacacs server availability no
40.8 rsyslogsec server
Synopsis
[no] rsyslogsec server <INDEX> <IPADDRESS> [<PORT> ]
Description
Use this command to add a server to the server list for security events.
Use the no option with the operand <INDEX> to remove the server.
Command mode
Operands
INDEX The index number of the server. All servers must have a
unique index number.
446 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IPADDRESS The address of the server. Specified in decimal notation

<A.B.C.D> .
PORT The port to use on the server.
Examples
Adding a server with index 1 and port 514 to the server list:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec server 1 10.120.58.18 514
40.9 rsyslogsec6 server
Synopsis
[no] rsyslogsec6 server <INDEX> <IPV6ADDRESS> [<PORT> ]
Description
Use this command to add a server with IPv6 address to the server list for security
events.
Use the no option with the operand <INDEX> to remove the IPv6 server.
Command mode
Operands
INDEX The unique number of the server. The valid range is 1–3.
IPV6ADDRESS The IPv6 address of the server, where the format is

<X:X::X:X> .
PORT The used UDP port on the server.
Examples
Adding a server with index 1 and port 514 to the server list:
ML66(config)#rsyslogsec6 server 1 2001:1:1::18 514
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 447

CLI Descriptions
41 Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001

and MMU 1002 - RLT
41.
The following command modes are applicable for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
Radio Link Terminal (RLT) commands:
— Near End Radio Link Terminal submode — (config-rlt)
— Far End Radio Link Terminal submode — (config-ferlt)
Table 41 MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Radio Link Terminal Commands
Overview
aes-encryption-oth enable or disable AES Encryption
Over-the-Hop (OTH) for the specified
Radio Link Terminal (RLT)
aes-encryption-oth-mk set the master key for AES Encryption
OTH
eqp-protection-switch-mode configure the mode in which the EQP
switching mechanism is configured
eqp-active-unit set the active MMU in EQP
configuration
expected-far-end-id set the expected ID of the RLT at far
end
fade-notification-timer set the notification suppression timer
far-end-id-check enable or disable the checking of the
RLT ID at the far end
ferlt configure a specific RLT at far end
id set the RLT ID
manual-switch move the active Tx from one CT to the
other CT at the near end
mode set the mode of the RLT at near end
protection-switch-mode set the switching mechanism mode
reset reset the default RLT settings
448 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Radio Link Terminal Commands: RLT
reset-tx-switch-alarm manually reset the remote Tx

switchover and the Tx switchover
alarms
revertive-preferred-tx define the preferred CT of the RLT in
auto-revertive protection mode
revertive-wait-to-restore set the waiting time in seconds before
switching back to the preferred Tx in
auto-revertive mode
rlt configure a specific RLT at near end
tx-switch-far-end enable or disable the remote Tx
switchover and the Tx switchover
functions and the related alarm
notifications
— show ferlt
— show rlt
884.
41.1 aes-encryption-oth
Synopsis
aes-encryption-oth {enable | disable}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable AES Encryption Over-the-Hop (OTH) for
the specified Radio Link Terminal (RLT).
By default, AES Encryption OTH is disabled.
Note: This command is available only on MMU 1002, but not on MMU 1001.
Command Mode
Near End Radio Link Terminal submode — (config-rlt)
Options
enable Enables AES Encryption OTH.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 449

CLI Descriptions
disable Disables AES Encryption OTH.
Examples
Enabling AES Encryption OTH:
ML66(config-rlt)#aes-encryption-oth enable
41.2 aes-encryption-oth-mk
Synopsis
aes-encryption-oth-mk <MASTER-KEY>
Description
Use this command to set the master key for AES Encryption Over-The-Hop
(OTH).
By default, the master key is empty and must be set.
Note: This command is available only on MMU 1002, but not on MMU 1001.
Command Mode
Operands
MASTER-KEY The master encryption key, which is 12–64 characters.
Examples
Setting the master key for AES Encryption OTH to
D8qsUppDGEL4q120gZxj3qvDDn8dM48M:
ML66(config-rlt)#aes-encryption-oth-mk D8qsUppDGEL4q120gZxj3qvDDn →
8dM48M
41.3 eqp-protection-switch-mode
Synopsis
eqp-protection-switch-mode <SWITCH-MODE>
450 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to configure the mode in which the EQP switching mechanism
is configured. The default value is AUTO.
Note: The command is only applicable in radio link equipment protection

configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
SWITCH-MODE — auto — The system automatically switches from one

MMU to the other MMU.
— manual — Automatic switching is disabled, and the

operator can select the active MMU manually.
Examples
Setting the SWITCH-MODE to MANUAL:
ML66(config-rlt)# eqp-protection-switch-mode manual
41.4 eqp-active-unit
Synopsis
eqp-active-unit <UNIT>
Description
Use this command to set the active MMU in EQP configuration.
Note: This command is only applicable in equipment protection configuration.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 451

CLI Descriptions
Operands
UNIT — low-unit — MMU in lower slot of the EQP group
— high-unit — MMU in higher slot of the EQP group
Examples
Setting the MMU in the lower slot of the EQP group as the active MMU:
ML66(config-rlt)# eqp-active-unit low-unit
41.5 expected-far-end-id
Synopsis
expected-far-end-id <NAME>
Description
Use this command to set the expected ID of the Radio Link Terminal (RLT) at far
end.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The expected ID of the RLT at the far end. The maximum
length of the ID is 32 characters.
Examples
Setting the expected ID of the RLT at far end to LindholmenB:
ML66(config-rlt)#expected-far-end-id LindholmenB
41.6 fade-notification-timer
Synopsis
fade-notification-timer <INTERVAL>
452 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the notification suppression timer. Alarms, caused by
fading, with duration less than the specified time are not reported.
Note: — This command is applicable only in radio link protection

configuration.
— When the timer is set to 0, the suppression is disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The value of the notification suppression timer. The valid

range is 0–1000 seconds. The default value is 200.
Examples
Setting the notification suppression timer to 300 seconds:
ML66(config-rlt)#fade-notification-timer 300
41.7 far-end-id-check
Synopsis
far-end-id-check <ID-CHECK>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the checking of the Radio Link Terminal
(RLT) ID at far end. By default, the ID checking is disabled.
When enabled, the system verifies that the far end RLT ID is the same as the
expected far end RLT ID. If the verification succeeds, the RLT status is UP,
otherwise it is DOWN.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 453

CLI Descriptions
Operands
ID-CHECK — enable — Enables the checking of the RLT ID at far

end.
— disable — Disables the checking of the RLT ID at far

end.
Examples
Enabling the checking of the RLT ID at far end:
ML66(config-rlt)#far-end-id-check enable
41.8 ferlt
Synopsis
ferlt <DISTINGUISHED-NAME>
Description
Use this command to configure a specific Radio Link Terminal (RLT) at far end.
The command also changes to the (config-ferlt) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
DISTINGUISHED-NAME
The relative distinguished name of the RLT where the
format is <Rack/Slot/Port>. The Port number is the RLT
number, that is, 1 or 2.
Note: When equipment protection (EQP) is enabled,

for example between slots 1 and 3, the
distinguished name is changed as follows: R/
S1+S2/P. Still, the RLT is entered using only the
lower slot (rlt 1/1/1 and ferlt 1/1/1).
Examples
Configuring RLT 1:
ML66(config)#ferlt 1/1/1
ML66(config-ferlt)#
454 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

41.9 id
Synopsis
id <NAME>
Description
Use this command to set the Radio Link Terminal (RLT) ID.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The ID of the RLT. The maximum length of the ID is 32

characters.
Note: The ID is used by the far end when checking that

it is connected to the correct RLT.
Examples
Setting the RLT ID as LindholmenA:
ML66(config-rlt)#id LindholmenA
41.10 manual-switch
Synopsis
manual-switch
Description
Use this command in hot standby protection mode to move the active Tx from
one Carrier Termination (CT) to the other CT at near end.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 455

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Moving the active Tx from one CT to the other CT at near end:
ML66(config-rlt)#manaul-switch
41.11 mode
Synopsis
mode <RLT-MODE>
Description
Use this command to set the mode of the Radio Link Terminal (RLT) at near end.
The default mode is 1+0.
Note: All modes are available on MMU 1002, but not on MMU 1001.
Command Mode
Operands
RLT-MODE The mode of the RLT. The valid values are the following:
— 1+0
— 2+0RLB
— 1+1RLP
— 1+1RLPEQP
— 2+0RLBEQP
— 2+2RLPEQP
— 4+0RLBEQP
Examples
Setting the mode of the RLT to 2+0RLB:
ML66(config-rlt)#mode 2+0RLB
456 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

41.12 protection-switch-mode
Synopsis
protection-switch-mode <SWITCH-MODE>
Description
Use this command to set the switching mechanism mode. The default mode is
AUTO.
Note: The command is only applicable in radio link protection configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
SWITCH-MODE — auto — The system automatically switches from the

degraded Tx to the other Tx.
— manual — Automatic switching is disabled and the

Tx can be selected manually. Once the active Tx is
selected manually, it functions as the active Tx.
— auto-revertive — The preferred active Tx can be

selected manually. The active Tx selection is
automatic but once the fault is cleared, the active Tx
changes back to the preferred active Tx.
— disabled — Automatic switching is disabled and no

Tx can be selected manually. The diversity CT is Rx
only.
Examples
Setting the switching mechanism mode to manual:
ML66(config-rlt)#protection-switch-mode manual
41.13 reset
Synopsis
reset
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 457

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to reset the default Radio Link Terminal (RLT) settings at near
end.
Note: Before resetting the default RLT settings, check the following:
— WAN interface is connected to a switch port
— TDM is assigned to the RLT with a not null number of tributaries
— XPIC is enabled
— Carrier Termination (CT) is assigned to the RLT
Command Mode
Examples
Resetting the default RLT settings:
ML66(config-rlt)#reset
41.14 reset-tx-switch-alarm
Synopsis
reset-tx-switch-alarm
Description
Use this command to manually reset the remote Tx switchover and the Tx
switchover alarms.
Command Mode
Examples
Resetting the remote Tx switchover and the Tx switchover alarms:
ML66(config-rlt)#reset-tx-switch-alarm
458 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

41.15 revertive-preferred-tx
Synopsis
revertive-preferred-tx <CT>
Description
Use this command to define the preferred Carrier Termination (CT) of the Radio
Link Terminal (RLT) in auto-revertive protection mode.
Note: The command is only applicable in radio link protection configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
CT Defines the Tx of the CT R/S/P, where the format is

<Rack/Slot/Port> .
Examples
Defining the preferred CT of the RLT:
ML66(config-rlt)#revertive-preferred-tx 1/2/1
41.16 revertive-wait-to-restore
Synopsis
revertive-wait-to-restore <INTERVAL>
Description
Use this command to set the waiting time in seconds before switching back to the
preferred Tx in auto-revertive mode.
Note: This command is only applicable in radio link protection configuration

and in auto-revertive mode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 459

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The number of seconds to wait before switching back to

the preferred Tx. The default value is 0 second.
Examples
Setting the waiting time to 10 seconds:
ML66(config-rlt)#revertive-wait-to-restore 10
41.17 rlt
Synopsis
rlt <DISTINGUISHED-NAME>
Description
Use this command to configure a specific Radio Link Terminal (RLT) at near end.
The command also changes to the (config-rlt) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
DISTINGUISHED-NAME
The relative distinguished name of the RLT where the
format is <Rack/Slot/Port> . The Port number is the RLT
Examples
Configuring RLT 1:
ML66(config)#rlt 1/1/1
ML66(config-rlt)#
41.18 tx-switch-far-end
460 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
tx-switch-far-end <TX-SWITCH>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the remote Tx switchover and the Tx
switchover functions and the related alarm notifications. By default, the
functions and the related alarm notifications are disabled.
Note: This command is only applicable in radio link protection configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
TX-SWITCH — enable — Enables the remote Tx switchover and the

Tx switchover functions and the related alarm
notifications.
— disable — Disables the remote Tx switchover and the

Tx switchover functions and the related alarm
notifications.
Examples
Enabling the remote Tx switchover and the Tx switchover functions and the
related alarm notifications:
ML66(config-rlt)#tx-switch-far-end enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 461

CLI Descriptions

- XPIC
42.
The following command modes are applicable for MMU 1002 XPIC commands:
— Near End Radio Link Terminal XPIC submode — (config-rlt-xpic)
Table 42 MMU 1002 - XPIC Commands Overview

mode enable or disable the XPIC associated
with the upper-level Radio Link
Terminal (RLT)
xpic create an XPIC pair associated with
the upper-level RLT
xpic-auto-restore enable or disable the automatic XPIC
restore function
xpic-recovery enable or disable the automatic XPIC
recovery procedure
xpic-restore restore XPIC functionality after XPIC
recovery has been triggered and the
fault has been repaired
— show xpic
884.
42.1 mode
Synopsis
mode {CT-Pair-1 | CT-Pair-2} <XPIC-MODE>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the XPIC associated with the upper-level
Radio Link Terminal (RLT). By default, the XPIC is disabled.
462 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Radio Link Terminal Commands: XPIC
Command Mode
Near End Radio Link Terminal XPIC submode — (config-rlt-xpic)
Operands
XPIC-MODE — enable — Enables the XPIC associated with the

upper-level RLT.
— disable — Disables the XPIC associated with the

upper-level RLT.
Options
CT-Pair-1 Specifies the first CT-pair. This parameter is used for

nodes in 2+0, 2 (1+0) CT 1/x/1, and CT 1/X/2
configurations. In 4+0 and 2+2 configurations, CT-Pair-1
is on the low slot.
CT-Pair-2 Specifies the second CT-pair. This parameter is used for

nodes in 4+0 and 2+2 configurations, where CT-Pair-2 is
on the high slot.
Examples
Enabling the XPIC associated with the upper-level RLT:
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#mode CT-Pair-1 enable
Enabling the XPIC on both the high and the low slot in a 4+0 configuration:
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#mode CT-Pair-1 CT-Pair-2 enable
42.2 xpic
Synopsis
xpic
Description
Use this command to create an XPIC pair associated with the upper-level Radio
Link Terminal (RLT). The command also changes to the (config-rlt-xpic)
submode.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 463

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Creating an XPIC pair associated with the upper-level RLT:
ML66(config-rlt)#xpic
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#
42.3 xpic-auto-restore
Synopsis
xpic-auto-restore {CT-Pair-1 | CT-Pair-2} <AUTO-RESTORE>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the automatic XPIC restore function. By
default, the automatic XPIC restore function is disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
AUTO-RESTORE — enable — Enables automatic XPIC restore function.
— disable — Disables automatic XPIC restore function.
Options

is on the low slot.

on the high slot.
Examples
Enabling the automatic XPIC restore function:
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#xpic-auto-restore CT-Pair-1 enable
42.4 xpic-recovery
464 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Radio Link Terminal Commands: XPIC
Synopsis
xpic-recovery {CT-Pair-1 | CT-Pair-2} <RECOVERY>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the automatic XPIC recovery procedure.
By default, automatic XPIC recovery is disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
RECOVERY — enable — Enables automatic XPIC recovery

procedure.
— disable — Disables automatic XPIC recovery

procedure.
Options

is on the low slot.

on the high slot.
Examples
Enabling the automatic XPIC recovery procedure for CT-Pair-1:
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#xpic-recovery CT-Pair-1 enable
42.5 xpic-restore
Synopsis
xpic-restore {CT-Pair-1 | CT-Pair-2}
Description
Use this command to restore XPIC functionality after XPIC recovery has been
triggered and the fault has been repaired.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 465

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Options

is on the low slot.

on the high slot.
Examples
Restoring the XPIC functionality for CT-Pair-1:
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#xpic-restore CT-Pair-1
466 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Radio Link Terminal Commands: TDM

and MMU 1002 - TDM
43.
The following command modes are applicable for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
TDM commands:
— Near End Radio Link Terminal TDM submode — (config-rlt-tdm)
— Far End Radio Link Terminal TDM submode — (config-ferlt-fetdm)
Table 43 MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - TDM Commands Overview

fetdm change to the (config-ferlt-fetdm)
submode of the upper level Radio Link
Terminal (RLT) at far end
rx-loop enable or disable the Rx loop
tdm change to the (config-rlt-tdm)
submode of the upper level RLT at
near end
tdm-connect connect or disconnect TDM to the
upper level Radio Link Terminal (RLT)
wanted-tdm-tributaries-allocation allocate TDM tributaries
— show fetdm
— show tdm
884.
43.1 fetdm
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 467

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
fetdm
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-ferlt-fetdm) submode of the upper
level Radio Link Terminal (RLT) at far end.
Command Mode
Far End Radio Link Terminal submode — (config-ferlt)
Examples
Changing to the (config-ferlt-fetdm) submode:
ML66(config-ferlt)#fetdm
ML66(config-ferlt-fetdm)#
43.2 rx-loop
Synopsis
rx-loop <LOOP>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the Rx loop. By default, the Rx loop is
disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
LOOP — enable — Enables the Rx loop.
— disable — Disables the Rx loop.
Examples
Enabling the Rx loop:
ML66(config-rlt-tdm)#rx-loop enable
468 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

43.3 tdm
Synopsis
tdm
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-rlt-tdm) submode of the upper level
Radio Link Terminal (RLT) at near end.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-rlt-tdm) submode:
ML66(config-rlt)#tdm
ML66(config-rlt-tdm)#
43.4 tdm-connect
Synopsis
tdm-connect <CONNECT>
Description
Use this command to connect or disconnect TDM to the upper level Radio Link
Terminal (RLT). By default, the connection is disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
CONNECT — enable — Connects TDM to the upper level RLT.
— disable — Disconnects TDM from the upper level RLT.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 469

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Connecting TDM to the upper level RLT:
ML66(config-rlt-tdm)#tdm-connect enable
43.5 wanted-tdm-tributaries-allocation
Synopsis
wanted-tdm-tributaries-allocation <TDM-ALLOCATION>
Description
Use this command to allocate TDM tributaries.
Command Mode
Operands
TDM-ALLOCATION
The allocated TDM tributaries as ranges or single values.
Note: — When more than one tributaries are

specified, the values must be surrounded by
quotation marks and separated by commas.
— Use show tdm command to display the

maximum number of TDM tributaries, which
can be less than 80, in available-tdm-
tributaries row. The maximum number of
TDM tributaries supported by the current
configuration depends on the frame ID, the
maximum modulation, and the licensed
capacity.
Examples
Allocating 1–10 TDM tributaries:
ML66(config-rlt-tdm)#wanted-tdm-tributaries-allocation 1-10
Allocating 1–10, 15, and 55 TDM tributaries:
470 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-rlt-tdm)#wanted-tdm-tributaries-allocation "1-10,15,55"
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 471

CLI Descriptions
44 Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001

and MMU 1002
44.
The following command mode is applicable for the Carrier Termination (CT)
MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 command:
— Near End Carrier Termination submode — (config-ct)
Table 44 Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 Overview
ct configure a specific Carrier
Termination (CT)
farend change to the (config-ct-far) submode
— show carrier-termination
— show carrier-termination-capability
884.
44.1 ct
Synopsis
ct <DISTINGUISHED-NAME>
Description
Use this command to configure a specific Carrier Termination (CT). The command
also changes to the (config-ct) submode.
Command Mode
472 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Carrier Termination Commands
Operands
DISTINGUISHED-NAME
The relative distinguished name of the CT where the
format is <Rack/Slot/Port> . The Port number is the CT
Examples
Configuring CT 1:
ML66(config)#ct 1/1/1
ML66(config-ct)#
44.2 farend
Synopsis
farend
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-ct-far) submode.
Command Mode
Near End Carrier Termination submode — (config-ct)
Examples
Changing to the (config-ct-far) submode:
ML66(config-ct)#farend
ML66(config-ct-far)#
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 473

CLI Descriptions

and MMU 1002 - Carrier
45.
The following command mode is applicable for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
carrier commands:
— Far End Carrier Termination submode — (config-ct-far)
Table 45 MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Carrier Commands Overview

auto-remove-loop remove the IF and RF loops
automatically after 15 minutes
ber-alarm-threshold set the threshold for the Bit Error Ratio
(BER) alarm
carrier-id set the carrier ID, that is, the preamble
value of the radio frame
continuous_wave_mode enable or disable Continuous Wave
mode
description add a description about the CT
frame-id set the radio frame
if-loop enable or disable the IF loop
polarization set the antenna polarization
associated with the CT
reference-sec set the reference Spectrum Efficiency
Class (SEC)
reset reset the default CT settings
restore clear the IF and RF loops, turn the
RAU transmitter on, and set the
protection switch mode to Auto
rf-loop enable or disable the RF loop
sel-minAcm-maxAcm-Rsec set the minimum and maximum
Adaptive Coding and Modulation
(ACM) and the reference SEC at the
same time
selected-max-acm set the maximum ACM value
selected-min-acm set the minimum ACM value
474 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Carrier Termination Commands: Carrier
wanted-licensed-capacity set the wanted licensed capacity in

kbps
— show carrier-termination
— show carrier-termination-capability
884.
45.1 auto-remove-loop
Synopsis
auto-remove-loop <LOOP>
Description
Use this command to remove the IF and RF loops automatically after 15 minutes.
By default, the automatic removal of the loops is disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
LOOP — enable — Enables the automatic removal of the IF

and RF loops.
— disable — Disables the automatic removal of the IF

and RF loops.
Examples
Enabling the automatic removal of the IF and RF loops:
ML66(config-ct)#auto-remove-loop enable
45.2 ber-alarm-threshold
Synopsis
ber-alarm-threshold <BER>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 475

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the threshold for the Bit Error Ratio (BER) alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
BER The BER level. The default value is Ber1e3. The valid
values are the following:
— Ber1e3 — 10-3
— Ber1e4 — 10-4
— Ber1e5 — 10-5
— Ber1e6 — 10-6
Examples
Setting the threshold for the BER alarm to Ber1e6:
ML66(config-ct)#ber-alarm-threshold Ber1e6
45.3 carrier-id
Synopsis
carrier-id <PREAMBLE>
Description
Use this command to set the carrier ID, that is, the preamble value of the radio
frame.
Command Mode
476 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
PREAMBLE The carrier ID, that is, the preamble value of the radio
frame. The preamble value is used in XPIC and MIMO
configurations and it must be the same on both sides of
the hop. The default value is A. The valid values are the
following:
— A
— B
— C
— D
Examples
Setting the carrier ID to B:
ML66(config-ct)#carrier-id B
45.4 continuous_wave_mode
Synopsis
continuous_wave_mode {enable | disable}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable Continuous Wave mode.
Note: Only admin_user can enable or disable Continuous Wave mode.
Continuous Wave is traffic-interrupting and is only to be used for

homologation or advanced troubleshooting.
This is a non-persistent configuration that is cleared after a warm

restart.
Command Mode
Options
enable Enables Continuous Wave mode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 477

CLI Descriptions
disable Disables Continuous Wave mode.
Examples
Enabling Continuous Wave mode:
ML66(config-ct)#continuous_wave_mode enable
45.5 description
Synopsis
description <LABEL>
Description
Use this command to add a description about the Carrier Termination (CT).
Command Mode
Operands
LABEL The description of the CT. The maximum length of the

description is 32 characters.
Examples
Adding Site3A as description of the CT:
ML66(config-ct)#description Site3A
45.6 frame-id
Synopsis
frame-id <IDENTIFIER>
Description
Use this command to set the radio frame.
Note: To list the available frame IDs, use show carrier-termination-

capability command.
478 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
IDENTIFIER The unique identifier of the radio frame.
Examples
Setting the radio frame to 256:
ML66(config-ct)#frame-id 256
45.7 if-loop
Synopsis
if-looop <LOOP>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the IF loop. By default, the IF loop is
disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
LOOP — enable — Enables the IF loop.
— disable — Disables the IF loop.
Examples
Enabling the IF loop:
ML66(config-ct)#if-loop enable
45.8 polarization
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 479

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
polarization <POL>
Description
Use this command to set the antenna polarization associated with the Carrier
Termination (CT). By default, the antenna polarization is not specified.
Command Mode
Operands
POL The antenna polarization associated with the CT when it

is used in XPIC and MIMO configurations. The
polarization must be the same on both sides of the hop.
The default value is NotSpecified. The valid values are
the following:
— horizontal
— vertical
— NotSpecified
Examples
Setting the antenna polarization to horizontal:
ML66(config-ct)#polarization horizontal
45.9 reference-sec
Synopsis
reference-sec <SEC>
Description
Use this command to set the reference Spectrum Efficiency Class (SEC).
480 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
SEC The value of the SEC. The default value is 2. The valid
— 2
— 4L
— 4H
— 5B
— 5LB
— 5HB
— 6B
— 6LB
— 6HB
— 7B
Examples
Setting the reference SEC to 4H:
ML66(config-ct)#reference-sec 4h
45.10 reset
Synopsis
reset
Description
Use this command to reset the default Carrier Termination (CT) settings.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 481

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Resetting the default CT settings:
ML66(config-ct)#reset
45.11 restore
Synopsis
restore
Description
Use this command to clear the IF and RF loops, turn the RAU transmitter on, and
set the protection switch mode to Auto.
Command Mode
Examples
Clearing the IF and RF loops and turning the RAU transmitter on:
ML66(config-ct)#restore
45.12 rf-loop
Synopsis
rf-loop <LOOP>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the RF loop. By default, the RF loop is
disabled.
Command Mode
482 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
LOOP — enable — Enables the RF loop.
— disable — Disables the RF loop.
Examples
Enabling the RF loop:
ML66(config-ct)#rf-loop enable
45.13 sel-minAcm-maxAcm-Rsec
Synopsis
sel-minAcm-max-Acm-Rsec <MINACM> selected-max-acm <MAXACM>
reference-sec <SEC>
Description
Use this command to set the minimum and maximum Adaptive Coding and
Modulation (ACM) and the reference Spectrum Efficiency Class (SEC) at the same
time.
Command Mode
Operands
MINACM / MAXACM
The minimum and the maximum value of the ACM in the
selected radio frame. The valid values are the following:
— 4_QAM_STRONG
— 4_QAM
— 4_QAM_LIGHT
— 16_QAM_STRONG
— 16_QAM
— 16_QAM_LIGHT
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 483

CLI Descriptions
— 32_QAM_STRONG
— 32_QAM
— 32_QAM_LIGHT
— 64_QAM_STRONG
— 64_QAM
— 64_QAM_LIGHT
— 128_QAM_STRONG
— 128_QAM
— 128_QAM_LIGHT
— 256_QAM_STRONG
— 256_QAM
— 256_QAM_LIGHT
— 512_QAM_STRONG
— 512_QAM
— 512_QAM_LIGHT
— 1024_QAM_STRONG
— 1024_QAM
— 1024_QAM_LIGHT
— 2048_QAM_STRONG
— 2048_QAM
— 2048_QAM_LIGHT
— 4096_QAM_STRONG
— 4094_QAM
— 4096_QAM_LIGHT
SEC The value of the SEC. The default value is 2. The valid
484 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 2
— 4L
— 4H
— 5B
— 5LB
— 5HB
— 6B
— 6LB
— 6HB
— 7B
Examples
Setting the minimum ACM to 4QAM, the maximum ACM to 64QAM, and the
reference SEC to 4H:
ML66(config-ct)#sel-minAcm-maxAcm-Rsec 4_qam selected-max-acm 64_qam reference-sec →
4h
45.14 selected-max-acm
Synopsis
selected-max-acm <MAXACM>
Description
Use this command to set the maximum Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM)
value.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 485

CLI Descriptions
Operands
MINACM The maximum value of the ACM in the selected radio

frame. The valid values are the following:
— 4_QAM_STRONG
— 4_QAM
— 4_QAM_LIGHT
— 16_QAM_STRONG
— 16_QAM
— 16_QAM_LIGHT
— 32_QAM_STRONG
— 32_QAM
— 32_QAM_LIGHT
— 64_QAM_STRONG
— 64_QAM
— 64_QAM_LIGHT
— 128_QAM_STRONG
— 128_QAM
— 128_QAM_LIGHT
— 256_QAM_STRONG
— 256_QAM
— 256_QAM_LIGHT
— 512_QAM_STRONG
— 512_QAM
— 512_QAM_LIGHT
— 1024_QAM_STRONG
— 1024_QAM
486 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 1024_QAM_LIGHT
— 2048_QAM_STRONG
— 2048_QAM
— 2048_QAM_LIGHT
— 4096_QAM_STRONG
— 4094_QAM
— 4096_QAM_LIGHT
Examples
Setting the maximum ACM to 64QAM:
ML66(config-ct)#selected-max-acm 64_qam
45.15 selected-min-acm
Synopsis
selected-min-acm <MINACM>
Description
Use this command to set the minimum Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM)
value.
Command Mode
Operands
MINACM The minimum value of the ACM in the selected radio

frame. The valid values are the following:
— 4_QAM_STRONG
— 4_QAM
— 4_QAM_LIGHT
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 487

CLI Descriptions
— 16_QAM_STRONG
— 16_QAM
— 16_QAM_LIGHT
— 32_QAM_STRONG
— 32_QAM
— 32_QAM_LIGHT
— 64_QAM_STRONG
— 64_QAM
— 64_QAM_LIGHT
— 128_QAM_STRONG
— 128_QAM
— 128_QAM_LIGHT
— 256_QAM_STRONG
— 256_QAM
— 256_QAM_LIGHT
— 512_QAM_STRONG
— 512_QAM
— 512_QAM_LIGHT
— 1024_QAM_STRONG
— 1024_QAM
— 1024_QAM_LIGHT
— 2048_QAM_STRONG
— 2048_QAM
— 2048_QAM_LIGHT
— 4096_QAM_STRONG
— 4094_QAM
488 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 4096_QAM_LIGHT
Examples
Setting the minimum ACM to 16QAM Strong:
ML66(config-ct)#selected-min-acm 16_qam_strong
45.16 wanted-licensed-capacity
Synopsis
wanted-licensed-capacity <LICENSE>
Description
Use this command to set the wanted licensed capacity in kbps.
Command Mode
Operands
LICENSE The wanted traffic licensed capacity in kbps. The default

value is 0, that is, the capacity is not selected by the user.
Examples
Setting the wanted licensed capacity to 25000 kbps:
ML66(config-ct)#wanted-licensed-capacity 25000
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 489

CLI Descriptions

and MMU 1002 - Frequency
46.
The following command mode is applicable for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
frequency commands:
Table 46 MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Frequency Commands Overview

duplex-configuration enable or disable duplex configuration
duplex-distance set the distance between the Tx and
Rx frequencies
rx-frequency set the receiver frequency
tx-admin-status set the administrative status of the
transmitter
tx-frequency set the transmitter frequency
— show rf-frequency
— show rx-frequency
— show tx-frequency
884.
46.1 duplex-configuration
Synopsis
duplex-configuration <DUPLEX-CONF>
490 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Carrier Termination Commands: Frequency
Description
Use this command to enable or disable duplex configuration. By default, the
duplex configuration is disabled.
Command Mode
Operands
DUPLEX-CONF — enable — Enables duplex configuration, that is, the

Rx frequency is calculated from the Tx frequency and
the duplex distance.
Note: Only applicable if the duplex type is

variable, otherwise the duplex
configuration is disabled.
— disable — Disables duplex configuration, that is, the

Rx frequency and the Tx frequency are directly
specified.
Examples
Enabling the duplex configuration:
ML66(config-ct)#duplex-configuration enable
46.2 duplex-distance
Synopsis
duplex-distance <DUPLEX-DIST>
Description
Use this command to set the distance between the Tx and Rx frequencies.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 491

CLI Descriptions
Operands
DUPLEX-DIST The distance between the Tx and the Rx frequencies in

MHz.
Note: Only applicable if the duplex type is variable

and the duplex configuration is enabled.
Examples
Setting the distance between the Tx and Rx frequencies to 266 MHz:
ML66(config-ct)#duplex-distance 266
46.3 rx-frequency
Synopsis
rx-frequency <FREQUENCY>
Description
Use this command to set the receiver frequency.
Note: The Rx frequency can only be set if the duplex configuration is disabled,
otherwise it is read-only.
Command Mode
Operands
FREQUENCY The Rx frequency in kHz.
Examples
Setting the Rx frequency to 7604000 kHz:
ML66(config-ct)#rx-frequency 7604000
46.4 tx-admin-status
492 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Carrier Termination Commands: Frequency
Synopsis
tx-admin-status <STATUS>
Description
Use this command to set the administrative status of the transmitter.
Command Mode
Operands
STATUS The administrative status of the transmitter. The default

value is Off. The valid values are the following:
— Off
— On
Examples
Setting the administrative status of the transmitter to on:
ML66(config-ct)#tx-admin-status On
46.5 tx-frequency
Synopsis
tx-frequency <FREQUENCY>
Description
Use this command to set the transmitter frequency.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 493

CLI Descriptions
Operands
FREQUENCY The Tx frequency in kHz.
Examples
Setting the Tx frequency to 7450000 kHz:
ML66(config-ct)#tx-frequency 7450000
494 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Carrier Termination Commands: Spectrum Diagnostics

and MMU 1002 - Spectrum Diagnostics
47.
The following command mode is applicable for the MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
Spectrum Diagnostics commands:
Table 47 MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 Spectrum Diagnostics Commands

Overview
spectrum_diagnostics scan_start on perform a scan of the channel around
page 495 the operating Rx frequency or of the
sub-band of the connected RAU
spectrum_diagnostics scan_stop on stop a Spectrum Diagnostics scan
page 496
— show spectrum-diagnostics-result
— show spectrum-diagnostics-status
884.
47.1 spectrum_diagnostics scan_start
Synopsis
spectrum_diagnostics scan_start {channel | subband}
Description
Use this command to perform a scan of the channel around the operating Rx
frequency or of the sub-band of the connected RAU.
The channel scan is performed between (operating Rx frequency − (channel

space ÷ 2) + 1 MHz) and (operating Rx frequency + (channel space ÷ 2) − 1 MHz)
in 2 MHz steps.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 495

CLI Descriptions
The sub-band scan is performed between (Rx lower edge + 1 MHz) and (Rx
upper edge − 1 MHz) in 2 MHz steps.
Use the spectrum_diagnostics scan_stop command to stop a running scan.
Command Mode
Options
channel Specifies to start a Spectrum Diagnostics scan on the

channel around the configured Rx frequency.
subband Specifies to start a Spectrum Diagnostics scan on the

RAU sub-band.
Examples
Starting a channel scan:
ML66#spectrum_diagnostics scan_start channel
47.2 spectrum_diagnostics scan_stop
Synopsis
spectrum_diagnostics scan_stop
Description
Use this command to stop a Spectrum Diagnostics scan.
Command Mode
Examples
Stopping a running scan:
ML66(config-ct)#spectrum_diagnostics scan_stop
496 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Carrier Termination Commands: Power

and MMU 1002 - Power
48.
The following command mode is applicable for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 power
commands:
Table 48 MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Power Commands Overview

input-power-alarm-threshold set the threshold for the input power
alarm
selected-max-output-power set the maximum output power of the
transmitter
selected-min-output-power set the minimum output power of the
transmitter
selected-output-power set the minimum and maximum
output power of the transmitter at the
same time
selected-output-power-type set the output power type
taps enable or disable Traffic Aware Power
Save (TAPS)
target-input-power-far-end set the target input power at the far
end
— show rf-power
— show taps
884.
48.1 input-power-alarm-threshold
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 497

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
input-power-alarm-threshold <POWER>
Description
Use this command to set the threshold for the input power alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
POWER The threshold for the input power of the receiver in dBm.
The valid range is from −99 to −30 dBm. The default
value is −93 dBm.
Examples
Setting the threshold for the input power alarm to −70 dBm:
ML66(config-ct)#input-power-alarm-threshold -70
48.2 selected-max-output-power
Synopsis
selected-max-output-power <POWER>
Description
Use this command to set the maximum output power of the transmitter. By
default, the output power is 10 dBm.
Command Mode
Operands
POWER The maximum output power of the transmitter in dBm.
498 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the maximum output power of the transmitter to 15 dBm:
ML66(config-ct)#selected-max-output-power 15
48.3 selected-min-output-power
Synopsis
selected-min-output-power <POWER>
Description
Use this command to set the minimum output power of the transmitter. By
default, the output power is 10 dBm.
Command Mode
Operands
POWER The minimum output power of the transmitter in dBm.
Examples
Setting the minimum output power of the transmitter to −5 dBm:
ML66(config-ct)#selected-min-output-power -5
48.4 selected-output-power
Synopsis
selected-output-power <MINPOWER> <MAXPOWER>
Description
Use this command to set the minimum and maximum output power of the
transmitter at the same time. By default, the output power is 10 dBm.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 499

CLI Descriptions
Note: The maximum output power must be greater or equal to the minimum
output power.
Command Mode
Operands
MINPOWER The minimum output power of the transmitter in dBm.
MAXPOWER The maximum output power of the transmitter in dBm.
Examples
Setting the minimum output power to −5 dBm and the maximum output power
to 15 dBm:
ML66(config-ct)#selected-output-power -5 15
48.5 selected-output-power-type
Synopsis
selected-output-power-type <POWERTYPE>
Description
Use this command to set the output power type.
Command Mode
Operands
POWERTYPE The type of the output power. The default value is

standard. The valid values are the following:
— standard
— high
500 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: When the output power type is high, an HP

license key is required.
Examples
Setting the output power type to high:
ML66(config-ct)#selected-output-power-type high
48.6 taps
Synopsis
taps <TAPS>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable Traffic Aware Power Save (TAPS).
Command Mode
Operands
TAPS The wanted setting of TAPS. The valid values are the
following:
— enable
— disable
Note: When the setting is enabled, an Energy Efficiency license is needed.
Examples
Enabling TAPS:
ML66(config-ct)#taps enable
Disabling TAPS:
ML66(config-ct)#taps disable
48.7 target-input-power-far-end
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 501

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
target-input-power-far-end <POWER>
Description
Use this command to set the target input power at the far end.
Command Mode
Operands
POWER The target input power of the receiver in dBm at the far
end. The valid range is from −99 to −30 dBm. The default
value is −35 dBm.
Examples
Setting the target input power of the receiver to −45 dBm:
ML66(config-ct)#target-input-power-far-end -45
502 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Interfaces
49 Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Interfaces
49.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet interfaces
commands:
— Ethernet interface configuration submode — (config-eth)
— Ethernet MAC White List configuration submode — (config-eth-mac-

whitelist)
— LAN configuration submode — (config-lan)
— WAN configuration submode — (config-wan)
Table 49 Ethernet Interfaces Commands Overview

alarm-enable enable or disable alarms
autoneg set the port to auto negotiation
flowcontrol activate flow control on the port
interface ethernet change to the (config-eth) submode
lan change to the (config-lan) submode
lock-to-service lock the interface to the common Ethernet
service parameters
mdix set the Medium Dependent Interface/Medium
Dependent Interface Crossover (MDI/MDIX)
configuration for the Ethernet port
name set an alias name for the interface
qos change to the (config-qos) submode
shutdown disable the interface
speed set the Ethernet speed
sync-enable enable or disable sync Ethernet
wan change to the (config-wan) submode
— show alarms
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 503

CLI Descriptions
— show bridge-port
— show interface ethernet
— show interface ethernet status
— show qos
884.
49.1 alarm-enable
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable [ sync-unsupported | ethernet-down ]
Description
Use this command to enable or disable sync unsupported or Ethernet down
alarms.
Command Mode
LAN configuration submode — (config-lan)
Options
sync-unsupported
Enables or disables synch unsupported alarm.
ethernet-down Enables or disables Ethernet down alarm.
Examples
Enabling sync unsupported alarm:
ML66(config-lan)#alarm-enable sync-unsupported
49.2 autoneg
Synopsis
[no] autoneg
504 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the port to auto negotiation. This is the default
behavior.
Use the no option to disable auto negotiation.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling auto negotiation:
ML66(config-lan)#no autoneg
49.3 flowcontrol
Synopsis
[no] flowcontrol [autoneg]
Description
Use this command to activate flow control on the port.
Use the no option to deactivate flow control.
Command Mode
Options
autoneg Enables flow control using the Auto Negotiation protocol.
Examples
Deactivating flow control:
ML66(config-lan)#no flowcontrol
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 505

CLI Descriptions
49.4 interface ethernet
Synopsis
interface ethernet <RSP>
Description
Use this command to configure a selected interface. The command also changes
to the (config-eth) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the interface where the
format is <Rack/Slot/Port>.
Examples
Configuring LAN interface:
ML66(config-eth)#
49.5 lan
Synopsis
lan
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-lan) submode.
Command Mode
Ethernet interface configuration submode — (config-eth)
Examples
Changing to the (config-lan) submode:
ML66(config-eth)#lan
ML66(config-lan)#
506 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

49.6 lock-to-service
Synopsis
[no] lock-to-service
Description
Use this command to lock the interface to the common Ethernet service
parameters. This means that the interface inherits the bridge level scheduler and
queue-set profiles and that these profiles cannot be changed at interface level.
This is the default behavior.
Use the no option to unlock the interface from the common Ethernet service
parameters. This means that the interface does not inherit the bridge level
scheduler and queue-set profiles, so the assignment of these profiles is done
individually at interface level.
Command Mode
Interface QoS configuration submode — (config-qos)
Examples
Unlocking the interface from Ethernet service parameters:
ML66(config-qos)#no lock-to-service
49.7 mdix
Synopsis
[no] mdix { manual-switched | manual-normal | auto }
Description
Use this command to set the Medium Dependent Interface/Medium Dependent
Interface Crossover (MDI/MDIX) configuration for the Ethernet interface.
Command Mode
Options
manual-switched Sets the configuration to MDIX.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 507

CLI Descriptions
manual-normal Sets the configuration to MDI.
auto Makes the system set the MDI/MDIX configuration

automatically.
Examples
Setting configuration to MDIX:
ML66(config-lan)#mdix manual-switched
49.8 name
Synopsis
— name <NAME>
— no name
Description
Use this command to set an alias name for the interface.
Use the no option to set the alias name to the default empty string.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The alias name of the interface.
Examples
Setting an alias name for the interface:
ML66(config-eth)#name "my alias"
49.9 qos
Synopsis
qos
508 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to change to the (config-qos) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-qos) submode:
ML66(config-eth)#qos
ML66(config-qos)#
49.10 shutdown
Synopsis
[no] shutdown
Description
Use this command to disable the interface.
Use the no option to enable the interface.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling the interface:
ML66(config-eth)#shutdown
49.11 speed
Synopsis
speed { auto-detect | full-duplex10 | full-duplex100 | full-
duplexSlave100 | full-duplexMaster100 | full-duplex1000 | full-
duplexSlave1000 | full-duplexMaster1000 | full-duplex2500 }
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 509

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the Ethernet speed. By default, the speed is set to auto
detect.
Command Mode
Options
auto-detect Makes the system detect the speed automatically.
full-duplex10 Sets the speed to 10 Mbps full-duplex.
full-duplexSlave100
Sets the speed to 100 Mbps full-duplex and configures
the port as receiver of Ethernet sync.
full-duplexMaster100
the port as transmitter of Ethernet sync.
full-duplexSlave1000
the port as receiver of Ethernet sync.
full-duplexMaster1000
the port as transmitter of Ethernet sync.
full-duplex2500 Sets the speed to 2500 Mbps full-duplex when applicable

optical SFP is used.
Examples
Setting the speed to 100 Mbps full-duplex:
ML66(config-lan)#speed full-duplex100
49.12 sync-enable
510 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— sync-enable [noESMC]
— no synch-enable
Description
Use this command to enable or disable sync Ethernet.
Command Mode
Operands
noESMC Enables sync Ethernet without Ethernet Synchronization

Messaging Channel (ESMC) signaling.
Examples
Enabling sync Ethernet:
ML66(config-lan)#sync-enable
49.13 trapenable
Synopsis
[no] trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable alarms and events. This command overrules media-
specific settings.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling alarms and events:
ML66(config-eth)#no trapenable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 511

CLI Descriptions
49.14 wan
Synopsis
wan
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-wan) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-wan) submode:
ML66(config-eth)#wan
ML66(config-wan)#
512 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Bridging and Switching
50 Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Bridging and

Switching
Table 50.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet bridging in and
switching commands:
— Privileged Exec mode — #This section contains detailed information about

the commands listed
— Layer 1 configuration submode — (config-eth-epl)
— VLANs configuration submode — (config-vlans)
— VLAN FDB configuration submode — (config-vlan-fdb)
— QinQ configuration submode — (config-qinqtermination)
Table 50 Ethernet Bridging and Switching Commands Overview

add add a row to the termination table of the
bridge port
add-egressports add ports as member of a VLAN
add-untagged-ports add untagged ports to VLAN
bridge mode set the bridge mode to customer or provider
bridge-port configure bridge ports
bridge tp-agingtime set the time-out period for aging of
dynamically-learned forwarding information
clear mac-address-table clear the MAC address table
egressports specify the list of ports that are members of
this VLAN
ethernet-epl configure a Layer 1 connection between two
Layer service ports
fdb configure Forwarding of Database (FDB)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 513

CLI Descriptions
forward-unregistered-multicast specify if multicast frames are forwarded to all

member ports of the VLAN
l3enable (Ethernet Port) create an L3 interface with the given VLAN for
the Ethernet port
llf-enable enable link loss forwarding
maxfs set the maximum frame size for this port
name set a name for this VLAN
port-ether-type set the EtherType of the outer VLAN on the
configured interface
qinqtermination configure the QinQ termination table for the
bridge port
remove remove a row from the termination table of the
bridge port
role set the role of the port
static-multicast specify set of ports that must be forwarded
static-unicast define which port unicast packets can be
routed
untagged-ports specify the ports of this VLAN that transmit
untagged egress packets
vlan create a new VLAN entry or modify an existing
VLAN entry
vlans create and configure a range of new VLANs
vlan-statistics-enable on page enable or disable VLAN statistics
532
— show bridge-port
— show current
— show epl
— show vlan
884.
50.1 add
514 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
Adding a single row to the termination table:
add <CeVID> <PeVID>
Description
Use this command to add a row to the termination table of the bridge port. After
the execution of the command, the termination entry is active on the port.
Note: By default Ethernet frames are transmitted unchanged over a bridge

port if the termination does not contain any matching entries for them.
Command Mode
QinQ configuration submode — (config-qinqtermination)
Operands
CeVID The incoming VLAN tag. It can be extended by the outer

VLAN tag. The valid range is 0–4094.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 515

CLI Descriptions
Note: — A UNI port might give different outer VLAN

tags to different incoming VLAN tags. The
rule is the following:
• Ingress frames with Ce VLAN IDs

explicitly specified get the
corresponding Pe VLAN IDs.
• Ingress frames with VLAN IDs not

specified either as Ce VLAN ID or Pe
VLAN ID are forwarded without the
addition of a second VLAN tag if the
port is configured to be member of the
VLAN.
• When there is no default mapping rule

specified for a port, if a VLAN ID is
configured as Pe VLAN ID for a port,
and there is no entry for that port with
that ID as Ce VLAN ID, ingress frames
with that VLAN ID are dropped for that
port.
• When the operand is set to 0, a default

mapping rule is specified. If none of the
above rules apply for an ingress C-
tagged frame, it is tagged with an
additional C-tag, using the
corresponding (default) Pe VLAN ID.
When QinQ is configured for a port, the
port can be an untagged member of a
VLAN only if there is a default QinQ
mapping rule specified.
PeVID The outer VLAN tag. The valid range is 1–4094.
Examples
Adding a row to the termination table of the bridge port:
ML66(config-qinqtermination)#add 100 201
50.2 add-egressports
Synopsis
add-egressports <PORTLIST>
Description
Use this command to add egress ports to VLAN. Already existing ports are kept.
516 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
PORTLIST List of ports in <Rack/Slot/Port> format. The RSP values

are separated by commas.
Examples
Adding VLAN member ports:
ML66(config-vlan)#add-egressports 1/6/0,1/6/5
50.3 add-untagged-ports
Synopsis
add-untagged-ports <PORTLIST>
Description
Use this command to add egressports as untagged ports in a VLAN. Only ports
that are already added as egressports can be added as untagged.
Command Mode
Operands

Examples
Adding untagged ports to VLAN:
ML66(config-vlan)#add-untagged-ports 1/6/4,1/6/5
50.4 bridge mode
Synopsis
bridge mode dot1 { q | ad }
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 517

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the bridge mode to customer or provider.
Command Mode
Options
q Sets the bridge mode to customer mode.
ad Sets the bridge mode to provider mode.
Examples
Setting the bridge mode to provider mode:
ML66(config)#bridge mode dot1 ad
50.5 bridge-port
Synopsis
bridge-port
Description
Use this command to configure the bridge ports in the Ethernet bridge. The
command also changes to the (config-bridgeport) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring bridge port:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#
50.6 bridge tp-agingtime
518 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— bridge tp-agingtime <TIME>
— no bridge tp-agingtime
Description
Use this command to set the time-out period for aging of dynamically-learned
forwarding information.
Use the no option to reset the default value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME Time-out period in seconds. The value can be set from 10

to 1000000. The default value is 300 seconds.
Examples
Setting the aging to 200 seconds:
ML66(config)#bridge tp-agingtime 200
50.7 clear mac-address-table
Synopsis
clear mac-address-table
Description
Use this command to clear the Media Access Control (MAC) address table.
Command Mode
Examples
Clearing the MAC address table:
ML66#clear mac-address-table
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 519

CLI Descriptions
50.8 egressports
Synopsis
— egressports <PORTLIST>
— no egressports [<PORTLIST>]
Description
In the (config-vlan) submode, use this command as follows:
— Specify the list of ports that are members of this VLAN. For the available
ports in customer and provider mode, see Table 51.
Note: This command replaces any existing port list. See add-egressports
for adding ports to an existing port list.
— Use the no option without <PORTLIST> operand to clear the whole port list.
Use the no option with <PORTLIST> operand to remove only the selected
ports from the port list.
In the (config-vlans) submode, use this command as follows:
— Specify the list of ports that are members of all VLANs in the range of VLANs
added by the vlans command. For the available ports in customer and
provider mode, see Table 51.
Note: This command replaces any existing port list.
— Use the no option without <PORTLIST> operand to clear the whole port list.
Use the no option with <PORTLIST> operand to remove only the selected
ports from the port list.
Table 51 Egressports in Customer and Provider mode

Switch Mode Port Role Allowed to Be Egressport
UNI Yes
Customer mode
I-NNI Yes
CE-UNI No
Provider mode CN-UNI Yes
I-NNI (PN) Yes
Note: Ports with mirror role cannot be added to a VLAN.
520 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
PORTLIST The egress port list in <Rack/Slot/Port> format. The RSP

values are separated by commas.
Examples
Specifying the egress port list for this VLAN as 1/6/4 and 1/6/5:
ML66(config-vlan)#egressports 1/6/4,1/6/5
50.9 ethernet-epl
Synopsis
— [no] ethernet-epl <RSP> <RSP>
— [no] ethernet-epl port1 <RSP> port2 <RSP>
Description
Use this command to configure a Layer 1 connection between two Layer 1
interfaces. The command also changes to the (config-eth-epl) submode.
Use the no option to remove the connection.
Note: EPL configuration cannot be deleted if any EPL interfaces are used in
DCN over VLAN for a Layer 1 connection. For more information see
Configuring DCN over VLAN for Layer 1 Connections.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
Configuring Layer 1 connection between interfaces 1/6/4 and 1/6/5:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 521

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config)#ethernet-epl port1 1/6/4 port2 1/6/5

ML66(config-eth-epl)#
50.10 fdb
Synopsis
[no] fdb
Description
Use this command to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB) of this VLAN.
The command also changes to the (config-vlan-fdb) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring FDB:
ML66(config-vlan)#fdb
ML66(config-vlan-fdb)#
50.11 forward-unregistered-multicast
Synopsis
[no] forward-unregistered-multicast
Description
— Specify if multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no more

specific forwarding information are to be forwarded to all member ports of
the VLAN or not. Default value is Forward.
— Use the no option to switch to Filter mode.
— Specify if multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no more

specific forwarding information are to be forwarded to all member ports of
all VLANs or not in the range of VLANs added by the vlans command.
Default value is Forward.
522 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— Use the no option to switch to Filter mode.
Command Mode
Examples
Forwarding frames to all member ports of the VLAN:
ML66(config-vlan)#forward-unregistered-multicast
50.12 llf-enable
Synopsis
[no] llf-enable
Description
Use this command to enable link loss forwarding.
Use the no option to disable link loss forwarding.
Command Mode
Layer 1 configuration submode — (config-eth-epl)
Examples
Enabling link loss forwarding:
ML66(config-eth-epl)#llf-enable
50.13 maxfs
Synopsis
maxfs <MAXFRAMESIZE>
Description
Use this command to set the maximum frame size for this port. The frame size
can be set for UNI, CE-UNI, and CN-UNI ports.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 523

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
MAXFRAMESIZE The maximum frame size. The valid range is 1518–9216.

Examples
Setting the maximum frame size to 1518:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#maxfs 1518
50.14 name
Synopsis
— name <NAME>
— no name
Description
— Set the name of this VLAN.
— Use the no option to clear the name of the VLAN.
— Set the name of all VLANs to the same value in the range of VLANs added by
the vlans command.
— Use the no option to clear the name of all VLANs.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the VLAN.
524 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the name for this VLAN to DCN:
ML66(config-vlan)#name DCN
50.15 port-ether-type
Synopsis
port-ether-type <ETHERTYPE>
Description
Use this command to set the Ethertype, also known as Tag Protocol Identifier
(TPID), of the outer VLAN on the configured interface.
Ethertype changing is used when at the other end of the connection a legacy
hardware is placed that is only able to handle a specific VLAN type, typically with
0x8100 (also known as C-tag) value in the TPID field. When the TPID is changed
on the edge node interface of the provider bridge, frames received from the QinQ
domain are swapped from TPID 0x8100 to TPID 0x88A8, while frames
transmitted to the QinQ domain are swapped from TPID 0x88A8 to TPID
0x8100.
Note: Ethertype changing is only supported on I-NNI ports in Provider Bridge

mode.
Command Mode
Operands
ETHERTYPE The Ethertype or TPID value. The valid values are

0x8100 and 0x88A8.
Examples
Changing the Ethertype from 0x88A8 to 0x8100:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#port-ether-type 0x8100
50.16 qinqtermination
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 525

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
qinqtermination
Description
Use this command to configure the QinQ termination table for the bridge port in
the Ethernet bridge. The command also changes to the (config-qinqtermination)
submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring the QinQ termination table:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#qinqtermination
ML66(config-qinqtermination)#
50.17 remove
Synopsis
Removing a single row from the termination table:
remove <CeVID>
Description
Use this command to remove a row from the termination table of the bridge port.
After the execution of the command, the termination entry is no longer available
in the termination table.
Command Mode
QinQ configuration submode — (config-qinqtermination)
Operands
CeVID The incoming VLAN tag. The valid range is 0–4094.
526 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: — After removing the default mapping rule, all

C-tagged frames with Ce VLAN IDs not
specified in the QinQ Termination table are
discarded.
— If a port with QinQ Termination configured

is set to be member of VLANs which have
VLAN IDs configured neither as Ce VLAN ID
nor Pe VLAN ID of a QinQ Termination rule,
ingress traffic with those VLAN IDs is
accepted without the addition of a second C-
VLAN tag.
Examples
Removing a row from the termination table of the bridge port:
ML66(config-qinqtermination)#remove 100
50.18 role
Synopsis
role {uni | inni | mirror | cep | cnp | layer1}
Description
Use this command to set the role of the port.
Command Mode
Options
uni Sets the role to UNI. Only applicable for customer mode.
inni Sets the role to I-NNI. Applicable for both customer and
provider mode.
mirror Sets the role of the port to mirror. Applicable for both
customer and provider mode.
cep Sets the role to Customer Edge Port (CEP). This role is
called CE-UNI in MINI-LINK Node GUI. Only applicable
for provider mode.
cnp Sets the role to Customer Network Port (CNP). This role is
called CN-UNI in MINI-LINK Node GUI. Only applicable
for provider mode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 527

CLI Descriptions
layer1 Sets the role to Layer 1. Applicable for both customer and
provider mode.
Examples
Setting the role to CE-UNI:
ML66(config-eth)#role cep
50.19 static-multicast
Synopsis
— static-multicast dest-mac <MAC> egressports <PORTLIST>
— no static-multicast dest-mac <MAC>
Description
Use this command to specify the set of ports to which frames destined for a
specific Multicast or Broadcast Media Access Control (MAC) address must be
forwarded.
Command Mode
VLAN FDB configuration submode — (config-vlan-fdb)
Operands
MAC Destination MAC address.

Examples
Adding a static multicast filter where packets can be forwarded to ports 1/6/4
and 1/6/5:
ML66(config-vlan-fdb)#static-multicast dest-mac 0C:0C:0B:14:CD:F3 //
egressport 1/6/4,1/6/5
50.20 static-unicast
Synopsis
— static-unicast dest-mac <MAC> allowedtogotoports <RSP>
528 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— no static-unicast dest-mac <MAC>
Description
Use this command to define to which port unicast packets destined for a specific
Media Access Control (MAC) address must be forwarded.
Command Mode
VLAN FDB configuration submode — (config-vlan-fdb)
Operands
MAC Destination MAC address.
RSP Egress port in <Rack/Slot/Port> format.
Examples
Defining unicast packets that can be routed:
ML66(config-vlan-fdb)#static-unicast dest-mac 0C:0C:0B:14:CD:F3 //
allowedtogotoports 1/6/5
50.21 untagged-ports
Synopsis
[noPORTLIST]> untagged-ports
Description
Use this command to define the port list of untagged ports to be included in a
VLAN. Only ports that are already added as egressports can be added as
untagged. For the available ports in customer and provider mode, see Table 52.
Note: This command replaces any existing port list. See add-untagged-ports
for adding ports to an existing port list.
Use the no option without <PORTLIST> operand to clear the whole port list.
Use the no option with <PORTLIST> operand to remove only the selected ports
from the port list.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 529

CLI Descriptions
Table 52 Untagged Ports in Customer and Provider mode

Switch Mode Port Role Allowed to Be Untagged
Port
UNI Yes
Customer mode
I-NNI No
CE-UNI No
Provider mode CN-UNI Yes
I-NNI (PN) No
Command Mode
Operands
PORTLIST The port list in <<Rack/Slot/Port> format. The RSP

Examples
Specifying that port 1/6/5 transmits untagged egress packets:
ML66(config-vlan)#untagged-ports 1/6/5
50.22 vlan
Synopsis
[no] vlan <VLANID> [<NAME> ]
Description
Use this command to create a new VLAN entry or to modify an existing VLAN
entry by using the ID of the specified VLAN. The command also changes to the
(config-vlan) submode.
Use the no option to delete the VLAN entry. Only allowed if the specified VLAN
does not have egressport and untagged-port or an L3 VLAN interface.
Command Mode
530 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
VLANID The ID of the VLAN. The valid range is 1–4094. The

maximum number of VLANs per switch is 1000.
NAME Descriptive name of the VLAN.
Examples
Creating a new VLAN entry with VLAN ID 2:
ML66(config)#vlan 2
ML66(config-vlan)#
50.23 vlans
Synopsis
[no] vlans <X–Y>
Description
Use this command to create and configure a range of new VLANs. The command
also changes to the (config-vlans) submode.
Use the no option to remove a range of VLANs.
Note: When a wide range of VLANs are added or removed, the execution of
the command takes some time.
Command Mode
Operands
X–Y The range of the VLANs, where X is the first VLAN ID

(VID) and Y is the last VID in the selected range of
VLANs.
Examples
Adding a range of new VLANs from 100 to 200:
ML66(config)#vlans 100-200
ML66(config-vlans)#
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 531

CLI Descriptions
50.24 vlan-statistics-enable
Synopsis
[no] vlan-statistics-enable
Description
Use this command to enable VLAN statistics on a specific VLAN.
Use the no option to disable VLAN statistics on a specific VLAN.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling VLAN statistics:
ML66(config-vlan)#vlan-statistics-enable
532 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Ring Protection
51 Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Ring

Protection
53.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet Ring Protection
(ERP) commands:
— Ethernet Ring Protection Group submode — (erp-group)
Table 53 ERP Commands Overview

alarm enable alarm notifications
clear-counters reset the switchover counter
description set the ring description
enable enable protection on the ring
erp-group create a new ERP ring with the given
ring ID
erp-port configure the given logical port
mode set the Ring Protection Link (RPL)
owner mode
propagateTC enable topology change propagation
raps configure the Ring Automatic
Protection Switching (RAPS) channel
switchover set or clear user defined switchovers,
either manual or forced, on the current
node
timer set the timer values
traffic-channel add listed VLANs as managed traffic
VLANs to the ring
— show current
— show erp-group
— show status
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 533

CLI Descriptions
884.
51.1 alarm
Synopsis
[no] alarm {link-loss | protocol-error | unable-to-protect}
Description
Use this command to enable alarm notifications.
Use the no option to disable alarm notifications.
Command Mode
Ethernet Ring Protection Group submode — (erp-group)
Options
link-loss Enables link loss alarm notifications.
protocol-error Enables protocol error alarm notifications.
unable-to-protect
Enables unable to protect alarm notifications.
Examples
Enabling protocol error alarm notifications:
ML66(erp-group)#protocol-error-alarm
51.2 clear-counters
Synopsis
clear-counters
Description
Use this command to reset the switchover counter.
534 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Examples
Resetting the switchover counter:
ML66(erp-group)#clear-counters
51.3 description
Synopsis
description <DESCRIPTION>
Description
Use this command to set the ring description.
Command Mode
Operands
DESCRIPTION The description of the ring.
Examples
Setting the ring description:
ML66(erp-group)#description main-erp-ring
51.4 enable
Synopsis
[no] enable
Description
Use this command to enable protection on the ring.
Use the no option to disable protection on the ring.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 535

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling protection on the ring:
ML66(erp-group)#enable
51.5 erp-group
Synopsis
— erp-group <RINGID> [raps-vlan <RAPSVLAN> ]
— no erp-group <RINGID>
Description
Use this command to create a new Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ring with the
given ring ID. The command also changes to the (erp-group) submode.
Use the no option to delete the ERP ring with the given ring ID.
Command Mode
Operands
RINGID The ID of the ring.
RAPSVLAN The ID of the VLAN.
Options
raps-vlan Assigns the given VLAN as control VLAN to the ring.
Examples
Creating a new ERP ring and assigning VLAN 100 as control VLAN:
ML66(config)#erp-group 2 raps-vlan 100
ML66(erp-group)#
Deleting ERP ring with ring ID 2:
536 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config)#no erp-group 2
51.6 erp-port
Synopsis
— erp-port {east | west} {bind {interface-name <RSP> | subring-

endpoint} | role {normal | rpl-neighbor | rpl-owner} | rmep <RMEPID>}
— no erp-port {east | west} {bind | rmep}
Description
Use this command to configure the given logical port.
Command Mode
Operands
RMEPID The ID of the RMEP.
Options
east Configures logical port east.
west Configures logical port west.
bind interface-name — Binds an interface to the logical ERP

port
subring-endpoint — Sets the selected ERP port to subring

endpoint.
role normal — Sets port role to Ring Protection Line (RPL)

normal.
rpl-neighbor — Sets port role to RPL neighbor.
rpl-owner — Sets port role to RPL owner.
rmep Subscribes to a Remote Maintenance End Point (RMEP)

to receive Continuity Check Message (CCM) missing
notifications.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 537

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Configuring the east port:
ML66(erp-group)#erp-port east bind interface-name 1/6/4
ML66(erp-group)#erp-port east role normal
ML66(erp-group)#erp-port east rmep 15
51.7 mode
Synopsis
mode {reverting | no-reverting}
Description
Use this command to set the Ring Protection Link (RPL) owner mode.
Command Mode
Options
reverting Sets RPL owner mode to reverting.
no-reverting Sets RPL owner mode to no-reverting.
Examples
Setting RPL owner mode to reverting:
ML66(erp-group)#mode reverting
51.8 propagateTC
Synopsis
[no] propagateTC
Description
This command enables topology change propagation. If it is enabled, on a
topology change event in the subring, every node of the connected main rings
performs a flush. Otherwise, only the interconnection nodes flush.
538 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Examples
ML66(erp-group)#propagateTC
51.9 raps
Synopsis
raps {vlan <VLANID> | vlan-priority <VLANPRIORITY> | ring-mdl
<MAINTENANCEDOMAINLEVEL> | subring-raps {vraps | no-vraps} }
Description
Use this command to configure the Ring Automatic Protection Switching (RAPS)
channel.
Command Mode
Operands
VLANID The RAPS VLAN value.
VLANPRIORITY The priority of the RAPS channel.
MAINTENANCEDOMAINLEVEL
The Maintenance Domain Level.
Options
vlan Sets RAPS VLAN.
vlan-priority Sets the RAPS channel priority.
ring-mdl Sets the Maintenance Domain Level for the RAPS

channel.
subring-raps vraps — Enables RAPS virtual channel on the ring. This is

the default setting for every ring.
no-vraps — Disables RAPS virtual channel on the ring.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 539

CLI Descriptions
Note: This option command should not be used with

the no-vraps parameter in a ring that is intended
to be a main ring.
Examples
Configuring the RAPS channel:
ML66(erp-group)#raps vlan 100
ML66(erp-group)#raps vlan-priority 7
ML66(erp-group)#raps ring-mdl 5
ML66(erp-group)#raps subring-raps vraps
51.10 switchover
Synopsis
— switchover forced {east | west}
— swithcover manual {east | west}
— switchover clear switch
— switchover clear
Description
Use this command to set or clear user defined switchovers, either manual or
forced, on the current node.
Command Mode
Options
forced east Sets forced switchover on port east.
forced west Sets forced switchover on port west.
manual east Sets manual switchover on port east.
manual west Sets manual switchover on port west.
clear switch Clears all previously set manual switchovers.
clear Reverts the node from pending state.
540 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting forced switchover on port east, then clearing all previously set manual
switchovers:
ML66(erp-group)#switchover forced east
ML66(erp-group)#switchover clear switch
51.11 timer
Synopsis
timer {hold-off | guard | wait-to-block | wait-to-restore}
<TIMER_VALUE>
Description
Use this command to set the timer values.
Command Mode
Operands
TIMER_VALUE The timer value.
— For the hold-off timer value, the valid range is 0–

10000 ms, in 100 ms steps.
— For the guard timer value, the valid range is 10–2000

ms, in 10 ms steps.
— For the wait-to-block timer value, the minimum value

is the guard timer value + 5000 ms, in 10 ms steps.
— For the wait-to-restore timer value, the valid range is

1–12 minutes, in 1 minute steps.
Options
hold-off Sets the hold-off timer value.
guard Sets the guard timer value.
wait-to-block Sets the wait-to-block timer value.
wait-to-restore Sets the wait-to-restore timer value.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 541

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the hold-off timer value to 5000 ms:
ML66(erp-group)#timer hold-off 5000
Setting the guard timer value to 2000 ms:

ML66(erp-group)#timer guard-time 2000
Setting the wait-to-block timer value to 8000 ms:

ML66(erp-group)#timer wait-to-block 8000
Setting the wait-to-restore timer value to 1 minute:

ML66(erp-group)#timer wait-to-restore 1
51.12 traffic-channel
Synopsis
[no] traffic-channel <VLANIDS>
Description
Use this command to add listed VLANs as managed traffic VLANs to the ring.
Use the no option to remove listed VLANs from managed traffic VLANs in the
ring.
Command Mode
Operands
VLANIDS The IDs of the VLANs, separated by commas. The valid

range is 1–4095.
Maximum 1000 traffic VLANs can be assigned to one

ERP group.
Examples
Adding VLANs 3, 7–10, and 50:
ML66(erp-group)#traffic-channel 3,7-10,50
Removing VLANs 7–9:
542 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(erp-group)#traffic-channel 7-9
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 543

CLI Descriptions
52 Ethernet Commands: RSTP
54.
The following command modes are applicable for the Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) commands:
Table 54 RSTP Commands Overview

spanning-tree admin-edgeport configure the port as an edge port
spanning-tree admin- set the point-to-point status of the LAN
pointtopoint network segment attached to this port
spanning-tree autoedge set automatic edge port operation
spanning-tree enable enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP)
spanning-tree force-version instructs Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) to emulate additional aspects of
earlier versions of the spanning tree protocol
spanning-tree forward-delay set how fast a port changes its spanning tree
state when moving towards the Forwarding
state
spanning-tree mac-enable enable Media Access Control (MAC)
addressing for the port
spanning-tree max-age set the maximum age of STP information
before it is discarded
spanning-tree max-hops defines the initial value of remaining hops
spanning-tree path-cost set the cost contribution of this port
spanning-tree port-enable enable the port
spanning-tree port-priority set the priority of the port
spanning-tree priority set the priority of a spanning tree
spanning-tree protocol-migration force the port to transmit Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs) for a short period of time
spanning-tree restricted-role set Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) port restricted role
544 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: RSTP
spanning-tree restricted-tcn indicate the state of restricted Topology

Change Notification (TCN)
spanning-tree transmit-holdcount limit the maximum transmission rate
spanning-tree type set spanning tree protocol
— show spanning-tree
884.
52.1 spanning-tree admin-edgeport
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree admin-edgeport
Description
Use this command to configure the port as an edge port. A bridge port attached
to an interface that has no other bridges attached to it can be configured as an
edge port. By default, ports are configured as non-edge ports.
Use the no option to configure the port as a non-edge port.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring the port as an edge port:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree admin-edgeport
52.2 spanning-tree admin-pointtopoint
Synopsis
— spanning-tree admin-pointtopoint [auto]
— no spanning-tree admin-pointtopoint
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 545

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the point-to-point status of the LAN network segment
attached to this port. The status can be point-to-point link, shared media
connection, or auto. The default value is auto for I-NNI and I-NNI (PN) ports, and
shared media connection for UNI and CN-UNI ports.
Use spanning-tree admin-pointtopoint to set the status to point-to-point

link. This is equivalent to the value forceTrue in MINI-LINK Node GUI.
Use the no option to set the status to shared media connection. This is equivalent
to the value forceFalse in MINI-LINK Node GUI.
Command Mode
Options
auto Sets the status to point-to-point link in the following

scenarios:
— The port is an aggregator and all of its members can

be aggregated.
— The MAC entity is configured for full duplex

operation.
Otherwise, sets the status to shared media connection.
Examples
Setting the status to point-to-point link:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree admin-pointtopoint
52.3 spanning-tree autoedge
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree autoedge
Description
Use this command to detect automatically if the port operates as edge port or
not.
546 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Examples
Detecting edge port operation:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree autoedge
52.4 spanning-tree enable
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree enable
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). STP is
enabled by default.
Use the no option to disable this functionality.
Command Mode
Examples
Enable STP:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree enable
52.5 spanning-tree force-version
Synopsis
— spanning-tree force-version { stp | rstp | mstp }
— no spanning-tree force-version
Description
Use this command to instruct Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) to emulate
additional aspects of earlier versions of the behavior of the spanning tree
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 547

CLI Descriptions
protocol. The no spanning-tree enable command must be executed prior to

usage of this command.
Command Mode
Options
stp Forces version to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
rstp Forces version to Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
mstp Forces version to MSTP. This is the default behavior.
Examples
Force version to RSTP:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree force-version rstp
52.6 spanning-tree forward-delay
Synopsis
— spanning-tree forward-delay <DELAY>
— no spanning-tree forward-delay
Description
Use this command to set how fast a port changes its spanning tree state when
moving towards the Forwarding state when the bridge is acting as the root.
Command Mode
Operands
DELAY Sets the delay of how fast a port shall change its
spanning-tree state when moving towards the
548 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Forwarding state when the bridge is acting as the root.

Default value is 1500 (centiseconds).
Note: This parameter has the following constraint

compared to max-age:
2 × (DELAY - 1) ≥ AGE
See also spanning-tree max-age on page 549.
Examples
Set forward-delay to 1200 (centiseconds):
ML66(config)#spanning-tree forward-delay 1200
52.7 spanning-tree mac-enable
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree mac-enable
Description
Use this command to enable Media Access Control (MAC) addressing for the port.
MAC addressing is enabled by default.
Use the no option to disable MAC addressing for the port.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling MAC addressing for the port:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#no spanning-tree mac-enable
52.8 spanning-tree max-age
Synopsis
— spanning-tree max-age <AGE>
— no spanning-tree max-age
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 549

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
information learned from the network on any port before it is discarded.
Use the no option to set the maximum age to its default value.
Command Mode
Operands
AGE Sets the maximum age of spanning-tree information. The

valid range is 600–4000 (centiseconds) in steps of 100.
Default value is 20.
Note: This parameter has the following constraint

compared to forward_delay:
2 × (DELAY - 1) ≥ AGE
See also spanning-tree forward-delay on page

548.
Examples
Set max-age to 800:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree max-age 800
52.9 spanning-tree max-hops
Synopsis
— spanning-tree max-hops <MAX-HOPS>
— no spanning-tree max-hops
Description
Use this command to set the initial value of remaining hops for Multiple Spanning
Tree Instance (MSTI) information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region.
Command Mode
550 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
MAX-HOPS Initial value of remaining hops. The valid range is 6–40.

Default value is 20.
Examples
Set max-hops to 15:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree max-hops 15
52.10 spanning-tree path-cost
Synopsis
— spanning-tree path-cost <COST>
— no spanning-tree path-cost
Description
Use this command to set the cost contribution of this port. This cost is added to
the path cost toward the spanning tree root. The default value is 0.
Use the no option to reset the cost to 0.
Command Mode
Operands
COST The cost contribution. The valid range is 0–200000000.

The value 0 can be used instead of the value 200000 (the
equivalent of 100 megabits).
Examples
Setting the cost contribution to 100000:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree path-cost 100000
52.11 spanning-tree port-enable
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree port-enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 551

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable the port. By default, the port is disabled.
Use the no option to disable the port.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the port:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree port-enable
52.12 spanning-tree port-priority
Synopsis
— spanning-tree port-priority <PRIORITY>
— no spanning-tree port-priority
Description
Use this command to set the priority of the port.
Use the no option to set the priority to 0.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The priority. The valid range is 0–240, in steps of 16. The
Examples
Setting the port priority to 64:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree port-priority 64
52.13 spanning-tree priority
552 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— spanning-tree priority <PRIORITY>
— no spanning-tree priority
Description
Use this command to set the priority of a spanning-tree.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY Sets the priority of a spanning-tree. The valid range is 0–

61440 in steps of 4096. Default value is 32768.
Examples
Set priority to 4096:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree priority 4096
52.14 spanning-tree protocol-migration
Synopsis
spanning-tree protocol-migration
Description
Use this command to force the port to transmit Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) for a short period of time. This
command is only valid when operating in RSTP (version 2) mode.
Command Mode
Examples
Forcing the port to transmit RSTP BPDUs:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree protocol-migration
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 553

CLI Descriptions
52.15 spanning-tree restricted-role
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree restricted-role
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the restricted role for the port. If this
parameter is enabled, the port is not selected as root port for the Common and
Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) or any Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI),
even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector. The port is selected as an
alternate port after the root port is selected.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the restricted role for a port:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree restricted-role
52.16 spanning-tree restricted-tcn
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree restricted-tcn
Description
Use this command to indicate the current state of restricted Topology Change
Notification (TCN) for the port.
Command Mode
Examples
Indicating the state of TCN:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree restricted-tcn
554 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

52.17 spanning-tree transmit-holdcount
Synopsis
— spanning-tree transmit-holdcount <COUNT>
— no spanning-tree transmit-holdcount
Description
Use this command to limit the maximum transmission rate.
Use the no option to set the value to default 3.
Command Mode
Operands
COUNT Maximum transmission rate. The valid range is 1–10.
Examples
Set the maximum transmission rate to 2:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree hold-count 2
52.18 spanning-tree type
Synopsis
spanning-tree type { rstp | mstp }
Description
Use this command to set spanning tree protocol.
Command Mode
Options
rstp Selects Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). This is the

default value.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 555

CLI Descriptions
mstp Selects Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).
Examples
Select RSTP:
ML66(config)#spanning-tree type rstp
556 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: MSTP
53 Ethernet Commands: MSTP
55.
The following command modes are applicable for the Multiple Spanning Tree
Protocol (MSTP) commands:
— MST configuration submode — (config-mst)
Table 55 MSTP Commands Overview

instance map VLAN to the Multiple Spanning Tree
Instance (MSTI) and set the Bridge priority for
the current instance
name set the configuration name
revision set the revision level
reset reset the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) setting
spanning-tree cist- set the Common and Internal Spanning Tree
path-cost (CIST) path cost
spanning-tree mst set the cost contribution of this port in the
path-cost Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) instance
spanning-tree mst enable the port in the MST instance
port-enable
spanning-tree mst set the priority for the port in the MST instance
priority
— show spanning-tree
884.
53.1 instance
Synopsis
[no] instance <INSTANCE-ID> [ vlan <VLAN_RANGE> | priority
<PRIORITY> ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 557

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to create Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) Instances, specify
VLAN members, and set the priority part of the Bridge Identifier for the instance.
Use the no option without parameters to remove the instance. Use the no option
with vlan or priority parameter to reset it to default value.
Command Mode
MST configuration submode — (config-mst)
Options
vlan Selects settings for VLAN_RANGE.
priority Selects settings for PRIORITY.
Operands
INSTANCE-ID The ID of the instance. The valid range is 1–16.
VLAN_RANGE The valid range is 1–4094. Single numbers or ranges can

be assigned, such as 298 or 300–302.
PRIORITY The priority of the Bridge Identifier of the Spanning Tree

instance. The default value is 32768. The valid range is
0–61440 in steps of 4096.
Examples
Creating MST instance with ID 3:
ML66(config-mst)#instance 3
Setting the VLAN range 300 to 304 for instance ID 3:

ML66(config-mst)#instance 3 vlan 300-304
Setting the priority for instance 3 to 16384:

ML66(config-mst)#instance 3 priority 16384
53.2 name
Synopsis
— name <NAME>
558 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— no name
Description
Use this command to set the name of the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST)
configuration.
Use the no option to reset the name to unconfigured.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the configuration. Maximum length is 32

characters. The default name is the Media Access Control
(MAC) address for the node.
Examples
Set the name of the spanning-tree to MyMST:
ML66(config-mst)#name MyMST
53.3 revision
Synopsis
— revision <REVISION>
— no revision
Description
Use this command to set revision level.
Use the no option to set revision back to default value.
Command Mode
Operands
REVISION The level of the revision. Default value is 0.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 559

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Set the revision of the spanning-tree to 1:
ML66(config-mst)#revision 1
53.4 reset
Synopsis
reset
Description
Use this command to reset the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) setting.
Command Mode
Examples
Reset a spanning-tree:
ML66(config-mst)#reset
53.5 spanning-tree cist-path-cost
Synopsis
— spanning-tree cist-path-cost <PATH-COST>
— no spanning-tree cist-path-cost
Description
Use this command to set the Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) path
cost from the transmitting bridge to the CIST Regional Root. The default cost is 0.
Use the no option to reset the CIST path cost.
Command Mode
560 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
PATH-COST The CIST path cost. The valid range is 0–200000000.
Examples
Setting the CIST path cost to 50000000:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree cist-path-cost 50000000
53.6 spanning-tree mst path-cost
Synopsis
— spanning-tree mst <INSTANCE-ID> path-cost <COST>
— no spanning-tree mst <INSTANCE-ID> path-cost
Description
Use this command to set the cost contribution of this port. This cost is added to
the path cost toward the spanning tree instance root which includes this port.
Use the no option to reset the cost to 0.
Command Mode
Operands
INSTANCE-ID The ID of the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) instance. The

COST The cost contribution. The valid range is 0–200000000.
Examples
Setting the cost for the MST instance 3 to 10000000:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree mst 3 path-cost 10000000
53.7 spanning-tree mst port-enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 561

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
[no] spanning-tree mst <INSTANCE-ID> port-enable
Description
Use this command to enable the port in the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST)
instance. By default, the port is disabled.
Use the no option to disable the port in the MST instance.
Command Mode
Operands
INSTANCE-ID The ID of the MST instance. The valid range is 1–4094.
Examples
Enabling the port for the MST instance 3:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree mst 3 port-enable
53.8 spanning-tree mst priority
Synopsis
— spanning-tree mst <INSTANCE-ID> priority <PRIORITY>
— no spanning-tree mst <INSTANCE-ID> priority
Description
Use this command to set the priority for the port in the Multiple Spanning Tree
(MST) instance. The default value is 128.
Use the no option to reset the priority to 0.
Command Mode
Operands
INSTANCE-ID The ID of the MST instance. The valid range is 1–4094.
562 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

PRIORITY The priority. The valid range is 0–255.
Examples
Setting the priority for the MST instance 3 to 7:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#spanning-tree mst 3 priority 7
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 563

CLI Descriptions
54 Ethernet Commands: Security and Admission

Control
56.
The following command modes are applicable for the security and admission
control commands:
— Ethernet Alarms configuration submode — (config-eth-alarms)
Table 56 Security and Admission Control Commands Overview

admit specify which frame types to accept on a UNI
or a CN-UNI port
bridge customer-BPDU specify how to handle customer Bridge
Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) on all CE-UNI
and CN-UNI ports of the bridge in provider
mode
bridge l2cpmacdesttunnel set the Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) MAC
destination tunneling address
bridge l2cppriority set the Priority Code Point (PCP) priority for
L2CP tunneling
ethernet-alarms change to the (config-eth-alarms) submode
forbidden-egressports define a list of forbidden egress ports
l2cp specify the filtering behavior of a Layer 2
Control Protocol (L2CP)
loop-alarm configure Ethernet loop detection
maclearning (per port) enable MAC address learning on a specific
bridge port
mac-whitelist associate a Media Access Control (MAC) white
list with a port
max-learned-addresses set the maximum number of MAC addresses
that the port is allowed to learn
stormctrl bc enable storm control for broadcast frames
564 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Security and Admission Control
stormctrl dlf enable storm control for destination look-up

failures
stormctrl mc enable storm control for multicast frames
stormctrl maxbcbw set the maximum transmission rate for
broadcast frames
stormctrl maxdlfbw set the maximum transmission rate for
destination look-up failures
stormctrl maxmcbw set the maximum transmission rate for
multicast frames
— show (Ethernet alarms)
— show mac-whitelist
884.
54.1 admit
Synopsis
— admit untagged [priority-tagged] [vlan-tagged]
— admit priority-tagged [untagged] [vlan-tagged]
— admit vlan-tagged [untagged] [priority-tagged]
— no admit
Description
Use this command to specify which frame types to accept on a UNI or a CN-UNI
port.
The following frame type combinations are possible:
— untagged, priority-tagged, and vlan-tagged, that is, admit all frames
— untagged and priority-tagged
— vlan-tagged
By default, the port admits all frame types.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 565

CLI Descriptions
Note: Enter one or more of the three options for the synopsis.
Use the no option to reset the frame type to untagged and priority-tagged.
Command Mode
Options
untagged Admits untagged frames.
priority-tagged Admits priority-tagged frames.
vlan-tagged Admits VLAN-tagged frames.
Examples
Admitting VLAN-tagged frames:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#admit vlan-tagged
54.2 bridge customer-BPDU
Synopsis
bridge customer-BPDU { discard | forward }
Description
Use this command to specify how to handle customer Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs) on all CE-UNI and CN-UNI ports of the bridge in provider mode.
Command Mode
Options
discard Discards customer BPDUs when the bridge is in provider

mode.
forward Forwards customer BPDUs unchanged when the bridge is

in provider mode.
566 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Specifying that customer BPDUs are forwarded unchanged when the bridge is in
provider mode:
ML66(config)#bridge customer-BPDU forward
54.3 bridge l2cpmacdesttunnel
Synopsis
[no] bridge l2cpmacdesttunnel <ADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to set the Layer 2 Control Protocol (L2CP) MAC destination
tunneling address on UNI, CE-UNI, and CN-UNI ports.
Use the no option to clear the previously set L2CP MAC destination tunneling
address and set back the default configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
ADDRESS The MAC address, which is used for tunneling. The

default MAC destination tunneling address is
01:A0:AD:xx:xx:xx.
Examples
Setting L2CP MAC destination tunneling address to xx:AB:AE:xx:xx:xx:
ML66(config)#bridge l2cpmacdesttunnel xx:AB:AE:xx:xx:xx
54.4 bridge l2cppriority
Synopsis
bridge l2cppriority <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to set the VLAN priority bits in case of Layer 2 Control
Protocol (L2CP) tunneling for untagged frames.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 567

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The VLAN priority bits to be used when tunneling

untagged L2CP frames. The valid range is 0–7. The
default value is 0.
Examples
Setting VLAN priority bits to 5 in case of L2CP tunneling:
ML66(config)# bridge l2cppriority 5
54.5 ethernet-alarms
Synopsis
ethernet-alarms
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-eth-alarms) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-eth-alarms) submode:
ML66(config)#ethernet-alarms
ML66(config-eth-alarms)#
54.6 forbidden-egressports
Synopsis
— forbidden-egressports <PORTLIST>
— no forbidden-egressports
568 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to specify that the port cannot send packets to specific ports,
even if they are on the same VLAN. The list of forbidden ports is defined by the
PORTLIST operand.
Use the no option to clear the list of forbidden egress ports.
Command Mode
Operands
PORTLIST The list of forbidden egress ports in <Rack/Slot/Port>

format.
Examples
Defining a list of forbidden egress ports:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#forbidden-egressports 1/6/4,1/6/5
54.7 l2cp
Synopsis
l2cp { allbridgeaddr | bpdu | esmc | futurestdbridge | futurestdgarp |
futurestdslow | gmrp | gvrp | pgvrp | lacp | lldp | lamp | linkoam | macpause
| pbpdu | portauth802dot1x } { peer | discard | forward | tunnel }
Description
Use this command to specify the filtering behavior of a Layer 2 Control Protocol
(L2CP).
In case of Layer 2 service this can be configured on UNI, CE-UNI, and CN-UNI
ports. On I-NNI and I-NNI (PN) ports, the behavior depends on the protocol
running in the node. The default behavior on all port types is discard. Table 57
shows the supported filtering behavior on the different protocols.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 569

CLI Descriptions
Table 57 Filtering Behavior on UNI, CE-UNI, and CN-UNI Ports

Protocol Filtering Behavior
Discard Peer Forward Tunnel
Unchanged
allbridgeaddr Supported Not Not Supported
(default) supported supported
customer- Supported Supported in Supported in Supported
BPDU (default) Customer Provider
Mode Mode
esmc Supported Supported Not Not
futurestdbridge Supported Not Not Supported
futurestdgarp Supported Not Not Supported
futurestdslow Supported Not Not Supported
gmrp Supported Not Not Supported
gvrp Supported Not Not Supported
pgvrp Supported Not Not Supported
lacp Supported Supported Not Supported
(default) supported
lldp Supported Supported(1) Not Supported
(default) supported
lamp Supported Supported Not Supported
(default) supported
linkoam Supported Supported Not Supported
(default) supported
macpause Supported Not Not Not
(default) supported supported supported
pbpdu Supported Supported in Not Supported
(default) Provider supported
Mode
portauth802do Supported Supported Not Supported
t1x (default) supported
(1) When LLDP is enabled on a port it is peered regardless of the configured L2CP behavior. The
configured L2CP behavior is applied when LLDP is disabled.
570 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

In case of Layer 1 service Table 58 shows the supported filtering behaviors.

Tunneling is not supported in case of Layer 1 ports.
Table 58 Filtering Behavior on Layer 1 Ports

Protocol Filtering Behavior
Discard Forward Peer
Unchanged
allbridgeaddr Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
customer-BPDU Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
esmc Supported Supported Supported
(default)
futurestdbridge Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
futurestdgarp Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
futurestdslow Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
gmrp Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
gvrp Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
pgvrp Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
lacp Supported Supported Not supported
(default)
lldp Supported Supported Supported(1)
(default)
lamp Supported Supported Not supported
(default)
linkoam Supported Supported Supported
(default)
macpause Supported Not supported Not supported
(default)
pbpdu Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
portauth802dot1x Not supported Supported Not supported
(default)
(1) When LLDP is enabled on a port it is peered regardless of the configured L2CP behavior. The
configured L2CP behavior is applied when LLDP is disabled.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 571

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Bridgeport configuration submode — (config-bridgeport) for both Layer 1
service ports and Layer 2 service ports
Options
allbridgeaddr Specifies that the application is All LANs Bridge

Management Group Address.
Note: It is not recommended to use this option.
bpdu Specifies that the application is Bridge Group Address

(BPDUs).
esmc Specifies that the application is Ethernet Synchronization

Messaging Channel (ESMC).
futurestdbridge Specifies that the application is future standard bridge

protocols.
futurestdgarp Specifies that the application is future standard Generic

Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP).
futurestdslow Specifies that the application is future standard slow

protocols (sub type 0x04–0x09).
gmrp Specifies that the application is GARP Multicast

Registration Protocol.
gvrp Specifies that the application is GARP VLAN Registration

Protocol.
pgvrp Specifies that the application is Provider GARP VLAN

Registration Protocol.
lacp Specifies that the application is Link Aggregation Control

Protocol (LACP).
lldp Specifies that the application is Link Layer Discovery

Protocol (LLDP).
lamp Specifies that the application is Location Aware MAC

Protocol.
linkoam Specifies that the application is Link Operation,

Administration, and Maintenance (OAM).
macpause Specifies that the application is MAC Pause.
572 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

pbpdu Specifies that the application is Provider Bridge Group

Address (PBPDUs).
portauth802dot1x
Specifies that the application is 802.1X Port
Authentication.
peer Sets the filtering behavior to peer.
discard Sets the filtering behavior to discard.
forward Sets the filtering behavior to forward unchanged.
tunnel Sets the filtering behavior to tunneling.
Examples
Setting the filtering behavior for Provider Bridge Group Address to peer:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#l2cp pbpdu peer
54.8 loop-alarm
Synopsis
— loop-alarm { address <MAC_ADDRESS> | members { <PORTLIST> | all }

| threshold <SECONDS> | vlan { <VLAN> | all } }
— [no] loop-alarm enable
Description
Use this command to configure Ethernet loop detection.
Use the no option to disable Ethernet loop detection.
Command Mode
Ethernet Alarms configuration submode — (config-eth-alarms)
Operands
MAC_ADDRESS The target MAC address. The default value is

ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff.

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 573

CLI Descriptions
SECONDS The alarm threshold value in seconds. The valid range is

10–200 seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.
VLAN The VLAN identification number. The valid range is 1–

4094.
Options
address Specifies the target MAC address where the test frames
are sent.
enable Enables or disables Ethernet loop detection.
members Specifies which ports are used for Ethernet loop

detection.
threshold Specifies the alarm threshold in seconds.
vlan Specifies which VLANs are used for Ethernet loop

detection.
all Uses all ports or VLANs for Ethernet loop detection.
Examples
Enabling Ethernet loop detection:
ML66(config-eth-alarms)#loop-alarm enable
54.9 maclearning (per port)
Synopsis
[no] maclearning
Description
Use this command to enable MAC address learning on a specific bridge port. By
default, per port MAC address learning is enabled.
Use the no option to disable per port MAC address learning for new MAC
addresses. Before disabling MAC address learning, make sure that it will not
cause any issues in the network, as unicast frames entering on the port will be
flooded to all other ports in the VLAN.
Note: Disabling per port MAC address learning does not flush the table, so
there is no immediate change on existing flows.
574 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Examples
Disabling MAC learning on the current bridge port:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#no maclearning
54.10 mac-whitelist
Synopsis
— mac-whitelist <LISTNO>
— no mac-whitelist
Description
Use this command to associate a Media Access Control (MAC) white list with a
port. If no white list is selected, all MAC addresses are allowed. When a white list
is selected, only traffic from addresses in the white list are allowed; other traffic is
discarded. The ethernet-mac-whitelist command manages the white lists.
Use the no option to disassociate a white list from a port.
Command Mode
Operands
LISTNO The number of the MAC address list. The value 0

indicates that there is no MAC address white list access
control for the port. The default value is 0.
Examples
Specifying MAC address list 3 as white list:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#mac-whitelist 3
54.11 max-learned-addresses
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 575

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— max-learned-addresses <MAXNUMBER>
— no max-learned-addresses
Description
Use this command to define the maximum number of source Media Access
Control (MAC) addresses to be supported on the port. When the limit is reached
packets are discarded. 0 means that the function is turned off, that is, only limited
by the capacity of the switch.
Command Mode
Operands
MAXNUMBER The maximum number of MAC addresses. The valid

range is 0–16383. 0 means that the function is turned off,
that is, the maximum number is limited by bridge
capacity. The default value is 0 for all port roles.
Examples
Setting the maximum number of MAC addresses to 30:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#max-learned-addresses 30
54.12 stormctrl bc
Synopsis
[no] stormctrl bc
Description
Use this command to enable storm control for broadcast frames. By default,
storm control is disabled.
Use the no option to disable storm control for broadcast frames.
The command is only applicable for the following port roles:
— UNI for customer mode
— CN-UNI for provider mode
576 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— CE-UNI for provider mode
— I-NNI for customer mode
— I-NNI (PN) for provider mode
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling storm control for broadcast frames:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#stormctrl bc
54.13 stormctrl dlf
Synopsis
[no] stormctrl dlf
Description
Use this command to enable storm control for unknown unicast frames causing
destination look-up failures. By default, storm control is disabled.
Use the no option to disable storm control for destination look-up failures.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling storm control for destination look-up failures:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 577

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config-bridgeport)#stormctrl dlf
54.14 stormctrl mc
Synopsis
[no] stormctrl mc
Description
Use this command to enable storm control for multicast frames. By default, storm
control is disabled.
Use the no option to disable storm control for multicast frames.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling storm control for multicast frames:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#stormctrl mc
54.15 stormctrl maxbcbw
Synopsis
— stormctrl maxbcbw <MAXBCBW>
— no stormctrl maxbcbw
578 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the maximum transmission rate for broadcast frames.
The maximum rate is only applicable if storm control for broadcast frames is
enabled.
Use the no option to set the default value.
Command Mode
Operands
MAXBCBW The maximum allowed transmission rate in frames per

second. The valid range is 2–65534, and only even
numbers are supported. The default value is 100.
Examples
Setting the maximum transmission rate to 50:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#stormctrl maxbcbw 50
54.16 stormctrl maxdlfbw
Synopsis
— stormctrl maxdlfbw <MAXDLFBW>
— no stormctrl maxdlfbw
Description
Use this command to set the maximum transmission rate for destination look-up
failures. The maximum rate is only applicable if storm control for destination
look-up failures is enabled.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 579

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
MAXDLFBW The maximum allowed transmission rate in frames per

Examples
ML66(config-bridgeport)#stormctrl maxdlfbw 50
54.17 stormctrl maxmcbw
Synopsis
— stormctrl maxmcbw <MAXMCBW>
— no stormctrl maxmcbw
Description
Use this command to set the maximum transmission rate for multicast frames.
The maximum rate is only applicable if storm control for multicast frames is
enabled.
580 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
MAXMCBW The maximum allowed transmission rate in frames per

Examples
ML66(config-bridgeport)#stormctrl maxmcbw 50
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 581

CLI Descriptions
55 Ethernet Commands: Buffering
59.
The following command mode is applicable for the buffering commands:
— Interface QoS configuration submode — (config-qos)
Table 59 Buffering Commands Overview

deep-buffering enable/disable deep buffering on an
Ethernet interface
55.1 deep-buffering
Synopsis
[no] deep-buffering
Description
Use this command to enable deep buffering on an Ethernet interface.
Use the no option to disable deep buffering. If deep-buffering is disabled on an

interface, the WRED and Colordrop features are automatically disabled.
Note: Changing the deep buffering setting of an interface results in 2–3

seconds of traffic loss on that interface. It might cause the same
disturbance on few other interfaces, and consequently a short outage in
DCN connectivity might also happen.
Command Mode
Examples
Disabling deep-buffering on an Ethernet interface:
ML66(config-qos)# no deep-buffering
582 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Traffic Classes
56 Ethernet Commands: Traffic Classes
60.
The following command mode is applicable for the traffic classes commands:
Table 60 QoS - Traffic Class Mapping Commands Overview

bridge priority-mapping map map a priority to a traffic class
bridge priority-mapping type specify the type of priority mapping used
56.1 bridge priority-mapping map
Synopsis
bridge priority-mapping map <NETWORKPRIORITY> <TC-QUEUE>
Description
Use this command to map a priority to a traffic class. The command is only used
when the type is set to userdefined and applies for both Layer 1 service ports
and Layer 2 service ports.
Command Mode
Operands
NETWORKPRIORITY
The priority. The valid range is 0–7.
TC-QUEUE The traffic class.
Examples
Mapping the priority 1 to traffic class 2:
ML66(config)#bridge priority-mapping map 1 2
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 583

CLI Descriptions
56.2 bridge priority-mapping type
Synopsis
bridge priority-mapping type { d-std | q-std | userdefined }
Description
Use this command to specify the type of priority mapping used for both Layer 1
service ports and Layer 2 service ports: D-Standard (see Table 61), Q-Standard
(see Table 62), or user-defined. The default mapping is D-Standard.
Table 61 D-Standard Priority to Traffic Class Mapping

Priority Traffic Class
0 2
1 0
2 1
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
Table 62 Q-Standard Priority to Traffic Class Mapping

Priority Traffic Class
0 1
1 0
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
Command Mode
584 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Traffic Classes
Options
d-std Sets priority mapping to D-Standard.
q-std Sets priority mapping to Q-Standard.
userdefined Sets priority mapping to user-defined.
Examples
Setting the priority mapping to Q-standard:
ML66(config)#bridge priority-mapping type q-std
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 585

CLI Descriptions
57 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Aging
63.
The following command mode is applicable for the aging command:
Table 63 QoS - Aging Commands Overview

bridge aging set the time-out period in seconds for frame
aging per traffic class
bridge aging enable enable aging for all Traffic Classes (TCs)
57.1 bridge aging
Synopsis
bridge aging <TRAFFICCLASS> <AGING>
Description
Use this command to set the time-out period in seconds for frame aging per
traffic class for both Layer 1 service ports and Layer 2 service ports.
For UNI, CNP, and Layer 1 ports the incoming PCP value is considered as network
priority value from aging point of view. The ingress port QoS settings, that is, the
Trust Port Configuration and the User Priority to Network Priority Mapping are
ignored. For frames entering on NNI, CEP, or QinQ ports, the frame aging
configuration is in line with the queuing.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAFFICCLASS The traffic class. The valid range is 0–7.
AGING Time-out period in milliseconds.
The valid values are 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, and 84 ms. The
default value is 84 ms for all traffic classes.
586 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - Aging
Examples
Setting the aging to 60 ms for traffic class 3:
ML66(config)#bridge aging 3 60
57.2 bridge aging enable
Synopsis
[no] bridge aging enable
Description
Aging is disabled by default. Use this command to enable aging for all Traffic
Classes (TCs).
Use the no option to disable aging for all TCs.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling aging for all TCs:
ML66(config)#bridge aging enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 587

CLI Descriptions
58 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Scheduling
64.
The following command modes are applicable for the scheduling commands:
— Scheduler Profile configuration submode — (config-scheduler-profile)
— Ethernet Profile configuration submode — (config-ethernet-profiles)
Table 64 QoS - Scheduling Commands Overview

bridge scheduler- assign a scheduler profile at service level
profile
ethernet-profiles configure Ethernet profiles
name change the name of the profile
scheduler-profile create or edit a scheduler profile
scheduler-profile assign a scheduler profile at interface level
tc-scheduler-type-and- specify the scheduler type and Deficit
weight Weighted Round Robin (DWRR) weight
— show current
— show scheduler-profile
884.
The following four scheduler profiles cannot be removed:
— All strict priority (index 1)
— 3 strict priority and 5 weighted (index 2)
— 3 strict priority and 5 weighted with Best Effort (index 3)
— 4 strict priority and 4 weighted with Best Effort (index 4)
588 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - Scheduling
58.1 bridge scheduler-profile
Synopsis
bridge scheduler-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to assign a scheduler profile at service level, that is, to provide
common settings for all Layer 1 service ports and Layer 2 service ports. This
setting applies only for lock-to-service ports.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
The unique index of the scheduler profile.
Examples
Configuring bridge scheduler profile:
ML66(config)#bridge scheduler-profile 5
58.2 ethernet-profiles
Synopsis
ethernet-profiles
Description
Use this command to configure Ethernet profiles, such as Weighted Random
Early Detection (WRED) profile and scheduler profile. The command also
changes to the (config-ethernet-profiles) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring Ethernet profiles:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 589

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config)#ethernet-profiles
ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#
58.3 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to change the name of the scheduler profile. The name can
only be changed if the profile is not in use.
Command Mode
Scheduler Profile configuration submode — (config-scheduler-profile)
Operands
NAME Name of the scheduler profile. Must be unique and at

least one character long.
Examples
Changing the name of the scheduler profile:
ML66(config-scheduler-profile)#name SchedulerProfile5
58.4 scheduler-profile
Synopsis
Creating a scheduler profile:
— scheduler-profile <PROFILENUMBER> name <NAME>
Editing a scheduler profile:
— scheduler-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Removing a scheduler profile:
— no scheduler-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
590 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - Scheduling
Description
Use this command to create or edit a scheduler profile. The command also
changes to the (config-scheduler-profile) submode.
Use the no option to remove the scheduler profile.
Command Mode
Ethernet Profile configuration submode — (config-ethernet-profiles)
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
NAME The name of the scheduler profile.
Options
name Sets the name of the scheduler profile.
Examples
Creating a new scheduler profile:
ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#scheduler-profile 5 name newschedulerprofile
ML66(config-scheduler-profile)#
Removing scheduler profile number 5:

ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#no scheduler-profile 5
58.5 scheduler-profile
Synopsis
scheduler-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to assign a scheduler profile to an Ethernet interface, that is,
to override common Ethernet service settings. These settings apply only for no
lock-to-service interfaces.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 591

CLI Descriptions
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Assigning scheduler profile number 5 at interface level:
ML66(config-qos)#scheduler-profile 5
58.6 tc-scheduler-type-and-weight
Synopsis
tc-scheduler-type-and-weight <TC> { strict-priority | dwrr
<DWRRWEIGHT> }
Description
Use this command to specify the scheduler type and Deficit Weighted Round
Robin (DWRR) weight.
Command Mode
Scheduler Profile configuration submode — (config-scheduler-profile)
Operands
TC Traffic class.
DWRRWEIGHT The default weight, as an integer, to be used when the

traffic class is served as DWRR. The valid range is 1–100.
Examples
Setting the scheduler type for traffic class 2 to DWRR with a weight of 40:
ML66(config-scheduler-profile)#tc-scheduler-type-and-weight 2 dwrr 40
592 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - WRED
59 Ethernet Commands: QoS - WRED
65.
The following command modes are applicable for the Weighted Random Early
Detection (WRED) commands:
— WRED Profile configuration submode — (config-wred-profile)
Table 65 QoS - WRED Commands Overview

exponentWeight specify how quickly WRED reacts
maxThreshold specify upper threshold for WRED
minThreshold specify lower threshold for WRED
name change the name of the profile
p-mark specify the probability for packet dropping
wred-profile create or edit a WRED profile
A WRED profile can be used by many users and it cannot be removed as long as
it is in use. A profile must have a non-empty unique name.
To display current mode settings, see the command show current .
The read-only profile (index 1) has the following parameters:
— name = Standard WRED
— minThreshold = 15 (15×64 KB)
— maxThreshold = 48 (48×64 KB)
— p-mark = 10% (0.1)
— exponentWeight = 9
— show current
— show wred-profile
884.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 593

CLI Descriptions
59.1 exponentWeight
Synopsis
exponentWeight <GAIN>
Description
Use this command to specify how quickly Weighted Random Early Detection
(WRED) reacts. A low gain value makes WRED react quickly. This makes it
sensitive to short bursts. A high gain values makes WRED react slowly on
transients. This can result in buffer overflow and tail drop.
Command Mode
WRED Profile configuration submode — (config-wred-profile)
Operands
GAIN The convergence speed of the average queue size. The

valid range is 0–15. The default value is 9.
Examples
Specifying how quickly WRED reacts:
ML66(config-wred-profile)#exponentWeight 7
59.2 maxThreshold
Synopsis
maxThreshold <THRESHOLDMAXBYTES>
Description
Use this command to specify the Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED)
upper threshold.
Command Mode
Operands
THRESHOLDMAXBYTES
594 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

The upper threshold for WRED expressed in bytes in n×64

KB units. When the average buffer size crosses
<THRESHOLDMAXBYTES> , all incoming packets are
dropped. If the difference between
<THRESHOLDMINBYTES> and
<THRESHOLDMAXBYTES> is too small, many packets
can be dropped at once. This can lead to global
synchronization issues. The threshold values can be set
between 0×64 KB and 5625×64 KB. The default value is
48×64 KB.
Examples
Setting the WRED upper threshold to 3072 KB:
ML66(config-wred-profile)#maxThreshold 48
59.3 minThreshold
Synopsis
minThreshold <THRESHOLDMINBYTES>
Description
Use this command to specify the Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED)
lower threshold.
Command Mode
Operands
THRESHOLDMINBYTES
The lower threshold for WRED expressed in bytes in n×64
KB units. When the average buffer size crosses
<THRESHOLDMINBYTES> , WRED is activated. Set
<THRESHOLDMINBYTES> high enough to maximize link
use. If it is set too low, packets can be dropped
unnecessarily. If the difference between
<THRESHOLDMINBYTES> and
<THRESHOLDMAXBYTES> is too small, many packets
can be dropped at once. This can lead to global
synchronization issues. The threshold values can be set
between 0×64 KB and 5625×64 KB. The default value is
15×64 KB.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 595

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the WRED lower threshold to 960 KB:
ML66(config-wred-profile)#minThreshold 15
59.4 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to change the name of the Weighted Random Early Detection
(WRED) profile.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME Name of the WRED profile. Must be unique and at least

one character long.
Examples
Changing the name of the WRED profile:
ML66(config-wred-profile)#name WREDProfile2
59.5 p-mark
Synopsis
p-mark <MAXDROPPROBABILITY>
Description
Use this command to specify the probability for packet dropping.
Command Mode
596 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
MAXDROPPROBABILITY
The maximum probability for packet dropping expressed
as a percentage. Weighted Random Early Detection
(WRED) starts to drop packets randomly when the WRED
lower threshold is crossed and the drop probability
increases linearly with queue size up to
<MAXDROPPROBABILITY>. The valid values are 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 25, 50, 75, and 100. The default value is
10 (that is, 0.1 probability).
Examples
Set the maximum probability for packet dropping to 25%:
ML66(config-wred-profile)#p-mark 25
59.6 wred-profile
Synopsis
Creating a WRED profile:
— wred-profile <PROFILENUMBER> name <NAME>
Editing a WRED profile:
— wred-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Removing a WRED profile:
— no wred-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to create or edit a Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED)
profile. The command also changes to the (config-wred-profile) submode.
Use the no option to remove a WRED profile.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 597

CLI Descriptions
The unique index of the WRED profile.
NAME Name of the new WRED profile. Must be unique and at

least one character long.
Options
name Sets the name of the WRED profile.
Examples
Creating a new WRED profile:
ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#wred-profile 2 name WREDProfileB
ML66(config-wred-profile)#
598 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - Queue-Set
60 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Queue-Set
66.
The following command modes are applicable for the queue-set commands:
— Queue Set Profile submode — (queue-set-profile)
Table 66 QoS - Queue-Set Commands Overview

bridge queue-set-profile assign a queue-set profile at service
level
name change the name of the queue-set
profile
queue-set-profile create a new queue-set profile
queue-set-profile assign a queue-set profile at interface
level
tc-queue configure Weighted Random Early
Detection (WRED), color-aware
WRED, or color-dropping for a set of 8
Traffic Class (TC) queues
— show queue-set-profile
884.
60.1 bridge queue-set-profile
Synopsis
bridge queue-set-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 599

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to assign a queue-set profile at service level, that is, to provide
common settings for all Layer 1 service ports and Layer 2 service ports that
support WRED and color dropping. This setting applies only for lock-to-service
ports with enabled deep-buffer.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
The number of the queue-set profile.
Examples
Assigning a queue-set profile at service level:
ML66(config)#bridge queue-set-profile 4
60.2 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to change the name of the queue-set profile.
Command Mode
Queue Set Profile submode — (queue-set-profile)
Operands
NAME The name of the queue-set profile.
Examples
Changing the name of the queue-set profile:
ML66(queue-set-profile)#name ProfileName
600 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

60.3 queue-set-profile
Synopsis
— queue-set-profile <PROFILENUMBER> name <NAME>
— queue-set-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
— no queue-set-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to create a new queue-set profile. The queue-set-profile
<PROFILENUMBER> command also changes to the (queue-set-profile)
submode.
Use the no option to remove the queue-set profile.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
NAME The name of the queue-set profile.
Options
name Sets the name of the queue-set profile.
Examples
Configuring a queue-set profile:
ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#queue-set-profile 5
ML66(queue-set-profile)#
60.4 queue-set-profile
Synopsis
queue-set-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 601

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to assign a queue-set profile at Ethernet interface level, that
is, to override common Ethernet service settings. These settings are available
only to no lock-to-service interfaces with enabled deep-buffer.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Assigning a queue-set profile at Ethernet interface level:
ML66(config-qos)#queue-set-profile 3
60.5 tc-queue
Synopsis
tc-queue <TC> {wred-profile <PROFILENUMBER> [yellow-wred-profile
<YELLOWPROFILENUMBER>] | color-dropping <YELLOWLIMIT> | taildrop
[queuesize <QUEUESIZE>]}
Description
Use this command to configure Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED),
color-aware WRED, or color-dropping for a set of 8 Traffic Class (TC) queues. It is
possible to configure either WRED or color-dropping for a single TC.
Command Mode
Queue Set Profile configuration submode — (queue-set-profile)
Operands
TC Traffic class. The valid range is 0–7.
PROFILENUMBER
The number of the WRED profile.
YELLOWPROFILENUMBER
The number of the color-aware WRED profile.
602 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

YELLOWLIMIT The buffer level, as the ration of the total buffer size, at
which all yellow packets are dropped. The buffer level is
configured in percentage of the buffer size. The valid
values are 12.5, 25, 37.5, 50, 62.5, 75, and 87.5.
QUEUESIZE The hard limit of the queue size when tail dropping is
enabled. The queue cannot exceed this size in the shared
buffer, even when more buffer space is available. 0 value
disables the hard limit and the queue size is only limited
by the dynamically calculated discard threshold. The valid
values (expressed in KB) are between 0 and 360000.
Options
wred-profile Sets the queue-set profile to WRED for a TC.
yellow-wred-profile
Sets the queue-set profile to color-aware WRED for a TC.
color-dropping Sets the queue-set profile to color-dropping for a TC.
taildrop Disables the drop function for the TC, that is, the queue
size is limited by the buffer size. This is the default setting
for all TCs.
queuesize Sets hard limit for tail dropping queue.
Examples
Configuring WRED for traffic class 3:
ML66(queue-set-profile)#tc-queue 3 wred-profile 2
Configuring color-aware WRED for traffic class 3:

ML66(queue-set-profile)#tc-queue 3 wred-profile 2 yellow-wred-profile 3
Configuring tail drop with user defined limit of 1440 KB for traffic class 4:
ML66(queue-set-profile)#tc-queue 4 taildrop queuesize 1440
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 603

CLI Descriptions
61 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Policing and

Color Marking
67.
The following command modes are applicable for the policing and color marking
commands:
— Policing Bandwidth Profile configuration submode — (config-pol-bw-

profile)
— QoS Policing configuration submode — (config-qos-policing)
— QoS Policing CoS Group configuration submode — (config-qos-pol-cos-

group)
— QoS Policing CoS Group Mapping configuration submode — (config-qos-

pol-cos-group-mapping)
— QoS Policing VLAN Group configuration submode — (config-qos-pol-vlan-

group)
— QoS Policing VLAN Group Mapping configuration submode — (config-qos-

pol-vlan-group-mapping)
Table 67 QoS - Policing and Color Marking Commands Overview

cbs set Committed Burst Size (CBS) value
cir set Committed Information Rate (CIR) value
default-cos set default Class of Service (CoS) value
ebs set Excess Burst Size (EBS) value
eir set Excess Information Rate (EIR) value
mode set policing
policing change to the (config-qos-policing) submode
policing-bandwidth- create or edit a bandwidth profile
profile
policing-cos-group enable policing, and change to the (config-
qos-pol-cos-group) submode
604 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - Policing and Color Marking
policing-cos-group- set the default CoS group for all CoSs

mapping
policing-vlan-group change to QoS Policing VLAN Group
configuration submode
policing-vlan-group- configure policing VLAN mapping, and change
mapping to QoS Policing VLAN Group Mapping
pol-cos-and-cos- define CoS value and CoS group
group
pol-cos-group-and- define according to which bandwidth profile
bandwidth-profile the CoS group is policedset the default VLAN
group for all VLANs, and change to QoS
Policing VLAN Group Mapping configuration
submode
pol-vlan-and-vlan- map a VLAN ID to a VLAN group
group
pol-vlan-group-and- define according to which bandwidth profile
bandwidth-profile the VLAN group is policed
port-bandwidth- associate a bandwidth profile with a port
profile
— show policing
— show policing-bandwidth-profile
— show policing-cos-groups
— show policing-cos-group-mapping
— show policing-vlan-groups
— show policing-vlan-group-mapping
884.
61.1 cbs
Synopsis
cbs [ 0 | 16k | 32k | 64k | 128k | 256k | 512k | 1024k | 2048k | 4096k | 8192k
| 16384k ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 605

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the Committed Burst Size (CBS) value in kilobytes.
Command Mode
Policing Bandwidth Profile configuration submode — (config-pol-bw-
profile)
Examples
Setting CBS to 32 KB:
ML66(config-pol-bw-profile)#cbs 32k
61.2 cir
Synopsis
cir <COMMITTEDINFORMATIONRATE>
Description
Use this command to set the Committed Information Rate (CIR) value in n×64
kbps units.
Command Mode
profile)
Operands
COMMITTEDINFORMATIONRATE
The CIR value. The valid range is 1–15625 (×64 kbps) for
1 Gbps ports and 1–156250 (×64 kbps) for 10 Gbps
ports.
Examples
Setting CIR value to 640 Mbps:
ML66(config-pol-bw-profile)#cir 10000
61.3 default-cos
606 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
default-cos <DEFAULTCOS>
Description
Use this command to set the default Class of Service (CoS) value.
Command Mode
QoS Policing configuration submode — (config-qos-policing)
Operands
DEFAULTCOS The default CoS value. Valid range depends on the type
of Trusted Port:
— DSCP IPv4 — The valid range is 0–63.
— DSCP IPv6 — The valid range is 0–63.
— DSCP IPv4/IPv6 — The valid range is 0–63.
— MPLS — The valid range is 0–7.
Examples
Setting default CoS value to 2:
ML66(config-qos-policing)#default-cos 2
61.4 ebs
Synopsis
ebs [ 0 | 16k | 32k | 64k | 128k | 256k | 512k | 1024k ]
Description
Use this command to set the Excess Burst Size (EBS) value in kilobytes.
Command Mode
profile)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 607

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting EBS to 16 KB:
ML66(config-pol-bw-profile)#ebs 16k
61.5 eir
Synopsis
eir <EXCESSINFORMATIONRATE>
Description
Use this command to set the Excess Information Rate (EIR) value in n×64 kbps
units.
Command Mode
profile)
Operands
EXCESSINFORMATIONRATE
The EIR value. The valid range is 1–15625 (×64 kbps) for
1 Gbps ports and 1–156250 (×64 kbps) for 10 Gbps
ports.
Examples
Setting EIR value to 64 Mbps:
ML66(config-pol-bw-profile)#eir 1000
61.6 mode
Synopsis
mode {policePortAndVlan | policePortAndCos | policePort | noPolice}
Description
Use this command to set policing mode.
608 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Options
policePortAndVlan
Activate policing per port and VLAN ID.
policePortAndCos
Activate policing per port and class of service.
policePort Activate policing on port level.
noPolice No policing.
Examples
Activating policing on port level:
ML66(config-qos-policing)#mode policePort
61.7 policing
Synopsis
policing
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-qos-policing) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-qos-policing) submode:
ML66(config-qos)#policing
ML66(config-qos-policing)#
61.8 policing-bandwidth-profile
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 609

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
Creating a bandwidth profile:
— policing-bandwidth-profile <PROFILENUMBER> name <NAME>
Editing a bandwidth profile:
— policing-bandwidth-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Removing a bandwidth profile:
— no policing-bandwidth-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to create or edit a bandwidth profile. The command also
changes to the (config-pol-bw-profile) submode.
Use the no option to remove the bandwidth profile.
Note: The dropNone and dropAll default profiles cannot be modified.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
The unique index of the bandwidth profile.
NAME The name of the bandwidth profile.
Options
name Sets the name of the bandwidth profile.
Examples
Creating a bandwidth profile:
ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#policing-bandwidth-profile 3 name "My profile"
ML66(config-pol-bw-profile)#
61.9 policing-cos-group
610 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
policing-cos-group
Description
Use this command to enable policing. The command also changes to the (config-
qos-pol-cos-group) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling policing:
ML66(config-qos)#policing-cos-group
ML66(config-qos-pol-cos-group)#
61.10 policing-cos-group-mapping
Synopsis
policing-cos-group-mapping
Description
Use this command to configure policing CoS mapping. The command also
changes to the (config-qos-pol-cos-group-mapping) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-qos-pol-cos-group-mapping) submode:
ML66(config-qos)#policing-cos-group-mapping
ML66(config-qos-pol-cos-group-mapping)#
61.11 policing-vlan-group
Synopsis
policing-vlan-group
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 611

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to change to QoS Policing VLAN Group configuration
submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to QoS Policing VLAN Group configuration submode:
ML66(config-qos)#policing-vlan-group
ML66(config-qos-pol-vlan-group)#
61.12 policing-vlan-group-mapping
Synopsis
[no] policing-vlan-group-mapping
Description
Use this command to configure policing VLAN mapping. The command also
changes to QoS Policing VLAN Group Mapping configuration submode.
Use the no option to set the default VLAN group for all VLANs, that is, all VLANs
to be mapped to VLAN group 0.
Command Mode
Examples
Setting the default VLAN group for all VLANs:
ML66(config-qos)#no policing-vlan-group-mapping
ML66(config-qos-pol-vlan-group-mapping)#
61.13 pol-cos-and-cos-group
Synopsis
pol-cos-and-cos-group <COS> <COSGROUP>
612 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to map Class of Service (CoS) value to CoS group.
Command Mode
QoS Policing CoS Group Mapping configuration submode — (config-qos-pol-
cos-group-mapping)
Operands
COS The CoS value.
COSGROUP The CoS group.
Examples
Mapping CoS value 1 to CoS group 2:
ML66(config-qos-pol-cos-group-mapping)#pol-cos-and-cos-group 1 2
61.14 pol-cos-group-and-bandwidth-profile
Synopsis
pol-cos-group-and-bandwidth-profile <GROUP> <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to define according to which bandwidth profile the Class of
Service (CoS) group is policed. Create bandwidth profiles with commands in the
(config-pol-bw-profile) submode.
Command Mode
QoS Policing CoS Group configuration submode — (config-qos-pol-cos-
group)
Operands
GROUP The CoS group.
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Specifying that CoS group 2 is policed by bandwidth profile 5:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 613

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config-qos-pol-cos-group)#pol-cos-group-and-bandwidth-profile 2 5
61.15 pol-vlan-and-vlan-group
Synopsis
pol-vlan-and-vlan-group <VLAN> <VLANGROUP>
Description
Use this command to map a VLAN ID to a VLAN group.
Command Mode
QoS Policing VLAN Group Mapping configuration submode — (config-qos-pol-
vlan-group-mapping)
Operands
VLAN The VLAN ID.
VLANGROUP The VLAN group.
Examples
Mapping VLAN 1 to VLAN group 2:
ML66(config-qos-pol-vlan-group-mapping)#pol-vlan-and-vlan-group 1 2
61.16 pol-vlan-group-and-bandwidth-profile
Synopsis
pol-vlan-group-and-bandwidth-profile <GROUP> <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to define according to which bandwidth profile the VLAN
group is policed.
To create bandwidth profiles, use the commands available in the (config-pol-

bw-profile) submode.
Command Mode
QoS Policing VLAN Group configuration submode — (config-qos-pol-vlan-group)
614 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
GROUP The VLAN group.
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Specifying that VLAN group 2 is policed according to bandwidth profile 5:
ML66(config-qos-pol-vlan-group)#pol-vlan-group-and-bandwidth-profile 2 5
61.17 port-bandwidth-profile
Synopsis
port-bandwidth-profile <PROFILENUMBER>
Description
Use this command to associate a bandwidth profile with a port.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Associating bandwidth profile 1 to a port:
ML66(config-qos-policing)#port-bandwidth-profile 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 615

CLI Descriptions
62 Ethernet Commands: QoS - Port Shaping
68.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet Commands: QoS -
Port Shaping commands.
Table 68 Shaper Commands Overview

shaper set traffic shaping for selected port
(interface)
62.1 shaper
Synopsis
— shaper [cir <RATE> | cbs <BURSTSIZE>]
— no shaper
Description
Use this command to enable traffic shaping on the selected port.
Use the no option to disable traffic port shaping.
Note: Port shaping is not supported on Layer 1 ports.
Command Mode
Operands
RATE The committed information rate limit in 64 kbps steps.

The actual bandwidth rate limit is calculated as <RATE> *
64 kbps. If not configured, shaper is enabled with
maximum traffic rate of the port. For example, in case of
a 1G LAN port cir=15625 or for a 10G LAN port
cir=156250.
616 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: QoS - Port Shaping
BURSTSIZE The committed maximum burst size in kilobytes. Only the

following burst values are valid: 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 2048. If not provided, shaper is enabled with
default 128 kB burst size.
Examples
Enabling port shaping with 64,000 kbps rate and 1024 kBytes burst size:
ML66(config-qos)#shaper cir 10000 cbs 1024
Disabling port shaper:

ML66(config-qos)#no shaper
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 617

CLI Descriptions
63 Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Node and

Profile Configuration Commands
69.
The following command modes are applicable for the HQoS - Node and Profile
Configuration commands.
— HQoS Profile configuration submode — (config-hqos-profile)
— HQoS Node configuration submode — (config-hqos-node)
Table 69 HQoS Node and Profile Commands Overview

child-node create a Hierarchical Quality of Service
(HQoS) child node in selected profile
hierarchy
hqos-node manage an HQoS node of a profile
hqos-profile create and manage an HQoS profile
h-scheduler set child node hierarchical scheduler
priority at parent node
map set VLAN traffic mapping for the
selected HQoS node
name name an HQoS profile
order change child order within parent node
shaper set VLAN traffic shaping for the
selected HQoS node
— show current
884.
618 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Node and Profile Configuration Commands
63.1 child-node
Synopsis
— child-node <CHILDNODENAME> order <ORDER> [h-scheduler {strict

| weighted <WEIGHT>}]
— no child-node <CHILDNODENAME>
Description
Use this command to create a Hierarchical Quality of Service (HQoS) child node
in the selected profile hierarchy, with the specified parameter settings.
Use the no option to delete an HQoS child node and any of its descendants.
Note: Node configuration parameters can be set or modified using separate

commands as well.
Command Mode
HQoS Node configuration submode — (config-hqos-node)
Operands
CHILDNODENAME
The name of the child node.
ORDER The order of child nodes under a parent. The lowest ID is

scheduled first.
WEIGHT The weight for the selected HQoS child node. The valid
range is 1–100.
Options
order Sets the order of the child nodes under its parent node.
strict Sets strict priority scheduling for the selected HQoS child
node. Considering nodes under the same parent, strict
priority can be set for a child node only if it has lower
order than all others with WDRR priority.
weighted Sets WDRR priority scheduling for the selected HQoS

child node.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 619

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Creating an HQoS child node:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#child-node Child_1 order 20 h-scheduler weighted 10
Deleting an HQoS child node and any possible descendants from a parent node:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#no child-node Child_1
63.2 hqos-node
Synopsis
[no] hqos-node {root | default | <NODENAME>}
Description
Use this command to configure a Hierarchical Quality of Service (HQoS) node
resource. This command also changes to the (config-hqos-node) submode.
Note: Only those HQoS node names are accepted that are already exist in the
profile.
The following specific purpose nodes are reserved and created automatically for
each profile when the profile is created:
root It is the root of the hierarchy within the profile. The root
node is connected to a port when the profile is assigned
to it.
default The non-hierarchical default queue system, where all

traffic which is not matched to any VLAN mapping rule is
enqueued. This traffic is called any traffic.
Note: Root and default nodes cannot be renamed or deleted.
In the (config-hqos-node) submode, it is possible to configure the following:

— child nodes
— node order
— hierarchical scheduling type and weight
— VLAN mapping
— shaper
— scheduling profile
620 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

For the allowed configuration commands for different node types, see the
following table:
Table 70 Allowed Configuration Commands for Node Types

root default leaf node internal node
child-node X - - X
order - X X X
h-scheduler - X X X
map - - X -
shaper - X X X
Use the no option to delete an HQoS node.
Command Mode
HQoS Profile configuration submode — (config-hqos-profile)
Operands
NODENAME The unique profile name of the HQoS node.
Options
root Selects the root node of the profile.
default Selects the default hierarchy node of the profile that

handles any unicast and replicated traffic.
Examples
Entering HQoS Node configuration submode selecting the root node of the
profile:
ML66(config-hqos-profile)#hqos-node root
ML66(config-hqos-node)#
Entering HQoS Node configuration submode selecting the default node of the
profile:
ML66(config-hqos-profile)#hqos-node default
Entering HQoS Node configuration submode selecting an existing HQoS node

name:
ML66(config-hqos-profile)#hqos-node HNode_1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 621

CLI Descriptions
Deleting an HQoS node:

ML66(config-hqos-profile)#no hqos-node HNode_1
63.3 hqos-profile
Synopsis
[no] hqos-profile <PROFILEID> [name <PROFILENAME>]
Description
Use this command to create a Hierarchical Quality of Service (HQoS) profile or
manage an existing one. This command also changes to the (config-hqos-profile)
submode.
If the profile does not exist, this command creates the HQoS profile and its root
and default nodes connected.
Further configuration of HQoS hierarchy is possible by entering the root node or

its descendant nodes in HQoS Node configuration submode.
Use the no option to delete an HQoS profile.
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILEID The unique identifier of an HQoS profile in range 2 .. 32.

Profile=1 is reserved for the default traffic.
PROFILENAME The unique name of an HQoS profile. It is mandatory,

when the profile is first created.
Options
name Names the new HQoS profile to be created.
Examples
Creating an HQoS profile:
ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#hqos-profile 12 name Profile_1
ML66(config-hqos-profile)#
622 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Changing to an existing HQoS profile:

ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#hqos-profile 12
ML66(config-hqos-profile)#
Deleting an HQoS profile:

ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#no hqos-profile 12
63.4 h-scheduler
Synopsis
h-scheduler {strict | weighted <WEIGHT>}
Description
Use this command to set the scheduler priority of the Hierarchical Quality of
Service (HQoS) child node on its parent node scheduler.
Only strict priority or Weighted Deficit Round Robin (WDRR) scheduling priority
can be selected.
Command Mode
Operands
WEIGHT The weight for the selected HQoS child node. The valid
range is 1–100.
Options
strict Sets strict priority scheduling for the selected HQoS child
node. Considering nodes under the same parent, strict
priority can be set for a child node only if it has lower
order than all others with WDRR priority.
weighted Sets WDRR priority scheduling for the selected HQoS

child node.
Examples
Setting strict priority for an HQoS child node:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#h-scheduler strict
Setting WDRR priority for an HQoS child node:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 623

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config-hqos-node)#h-scheduler weighted 30
63.5 map
Synopsis
[no] map {any | outer-vid <OUTERVID> [inner-vid <INNERVID>]}
Description
Use this command to set VLAN traffic mapping on the selected Hierarchical
Quality of Service (HQoS) leaf node.
One map command can include one outer and one inner VLAN ID (VID).
To map multiple VIDs to the same node, use the command as many times as
many VIDs are required.
Note: The number of total mapping values is limited.
VLAN mapping must be unique within a profile.
When using only the outer-vid option, the inner VID, if any exists, is handled as
any.
Command Mode
Operands
OUTERVID The outer VLAN identifier.
INNERVID The inner VLAN identifier.
Options
any Maps traffic belonging to non-specified VLANs to a user-

defined leaf node.
Note: This option overwrites the implicit any mapping

of the default node that is automatically created
at profile creation.
outer-vid Maps the VID from the Ethernet header to the leaf node.
In case of a double-tagged Ethernet header, the outer
VID is mapped.
624 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

inner-vid Maps the VID from the inner VLAN tag in the case of a
double-tagged Ethernet frame. In case of double tagging
in Provider Mode, the outer tag is called Service VLAN tag
(S-tag), and the inner tag is called Customer VLAN tag
(C-tag).
Note: The option inner-vid cannot be used together

with any, use outer VID only.
Examples
Mapping non-specified VIDs:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#map any
Mapping outer VID 105:

ML66(config-hqos-node)#map outer-vid 105
Mapping outer VID 105 and inner VID 201:

ML66(config-hqos-node)#map outer-vid 105 inner-vid 201
Deleting an already mapped VID:

ML66(config-hqos-node)#no map any
ML66(config-hqos-node)#no map outer-vid 105
ML66(config-hqos-node)#no map outer-vid 105 inner-vid 201
63.6 name
Synopsis
name <PROFILENAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the selected Hierarchical Quality of Service
(HQoS) profile.
Command Mode
HQoS Profile configuration submode — (config-hqos-profile)
Operands
PROFILENAME The name of the HQoS profile.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 625

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Naming an HQoS profile:
ML66(config-hqos-profile)#name Profile_2
63.7 order
Synopsis
order <NODEORDER>
Description
Use this command to change the order of the Hierarchical Quality of Service
(HQoS) child nodes to define proper scheduling priority among them.
The lowest ordered child is assigned to the highest priority when using strict
priority.
Note: All child nodes with strict h-scheduler priority have to have lower order
number than child nodes with weighted h-scheduler priority.
The order is effective on the selected HQoS node.
Command Mode
Operands
NODEORDER The new order for the child node. The valid range is 1–
1024. In order to make later reordering easier, it is
recommended to leave room between consecutive child
nodes.
Examples
Changing the order of a child node:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#order 25
63.8 shaper
Synopsis
[no] shaper cir <CIRVALUE> [cbs <CBSVALUE>]
626 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to add or modify bandwidth shaping on the selected
Hierarchical Quality of Service (HQoS) node. Bandwidth shaping can be
configured to limit bandwidth rate and to limit burst size.
Use the no option to delete the bandwidth shaping on the selected HQoS node.
Command Mode
Operands
CIRVALUE The committed information rate limit in 64 kbps chunks.

The bandwidth rate limit is calculated as <CIRVALUE> *
64 kbps.
CBSVALUE The committed maximum burst size in kilobytes. Only the

following values are valid: 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 2048.
Options
cir Configures the committed information rate limit.
cbs Configures the committed maximum burst size.
Examples
Changing bandwidth rate limit to 300 Mbps on an HQoS child node:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#shaper cir 4688
Changing bandwidth rate limit to 300 Mbps with 32 kBytes burst size on an
HQoS child node:
ML66(config-hqos-node)#shaper cir 4688 cbs 32
Removing all bandwidth rate limit:

ML66(config-hqos-node)#no shaper
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 627

CLI Descriptions
64 Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Profile

Assignment Commands
This section contains detailed information about the commands listed in Ethernet
Commands: HQoS - Profile Assignment Commands on page 628.
The following command modes are applicable for the HQoS - Profile Assignment
commands.
Table 71 HQoS Profile Assignment Commands Overview

hqos-profile assign a Hierarchical Quality of
Service (HQoS) profile to a selected
interface or port
64.1 hqos-profile
Synopsis
hqos-profile <PROFILEID>
Description
Use this command to assign a Hierarchical Quality of Service (HQoS) profile to
the selected Ethernet interface.
Note: Short traffic loss might be experienced during the change of an HQoS
profile as the egress queues need to be reconfigured.
The same profile can be assigned to different interfaces.
Any further changes to the HQoS profile is automatically updated on the

interface(s) it is assigned to.
Removing hierarchical profile from an interface can be done by returning

to the default HQoS profile (PROFILEID = 1).
Command Mode
628 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Profile Assignment Commands
Operands
PROFILEID The unique identifier of the HQoS profile. It can take the
value of 1 ..32.
Examples
Assigning an HQoS profile to an interface:
ML66(config-qos)#hqos-profile 10
Disabling the HQoS feature by assigning the default profile to an interface:

ML66(config-qos)#hqos-profile 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 629

CLI Descriptions
65 Ethernet Commands: Diagnostics Tools
72.
The following command mode is applicable for the diagnostics tools commands:
Table 72 Diagnostics Tools Commands Overview

mirror mirrored-port mirror a port
mirror mode specify which type of traffic to mirror
mirror mtp-vlan specify mtp vlan
65.1 mirror mirrored-port
Synopsis
mirror mirrored-port <RSP>
Description
Use this command to mirror a port.
Note: Port role must be set to mirror for port mirroring.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the port to be mirrored
in <Rack/Slot/Port> format.
Examples
Mirroring port 1/6/5:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#mirror mirrored-port 1/6/5
65.2 mirror mode
630 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Diagnostics Tools
Synopsis
mirror mode { ingress | egress | ingressEgress }
Description
Use this command to specify which type of traffic to mirror. The default behavior
is to mirror both ingress and egress traffic.
Note: Port role must be set to mirror for port mirroring.
Command Mode
Options
ingress Sets mirroring to ingress traffic only.
egress Sets mirroring to egress traffic only.
ingressEgress Sets mirroring to both ingress and egress traffic.
Examples
Setting mirroring to ingress traffic only:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#mirror mode ingress
65.3 mirror mtp-vlan
Synopsis
mirror mtp-vlan <VLAN>
Description
Use this command to tag the mirrored egress and ingress traffic on the mirror-to-
port with the MTP VLAN tag as outer tag. The MTP VLAN tag allows to route the
mirrored packets to a remote packet analyzer.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 631

CLI Descriptions
Operands
VLAN Identification number of the VLAN. The value can be set

from 0 to 4094.
Setting the value 0 disables tagging of the mirrored

traffic.
Examples
Adding VLAN tagging of egress traffic:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#mirror mtp-vlan 1
632 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: Classification and Tagging
66 Ethernet Commands: Classification and

Tagging
73.
The following command modes are applicable for the classification and tagging
commands:
Table 73 Classification and Tagging Commands Overview

bridge network-pcp-selection set the Priority Code Point (PCP) selection
cep-pvid set the port VID (PVID) for a CE-UNI port
cvid-registration add a C-VID–S-VID pair to the C-VID
registration table
default-network-priority set the default network priority for a UNI, CE-
UNI, CN-UNI, or Layer 1 service port
trusted specify which priority field in the incoming
packet is trusted on a UNI, CE-UNI, CN-UNI, or
Layer 1 service port
user-priority-mapping add a user priority to network priority mapping
66.1 bridge network-pcp-selection
Synopsis
— bridge network-pcp-selection { 8p0d | 7p1d | 6p2d | 5p3d | 8p8d }
— no bridge network-pcp-selection
Description
Use this command to set the Priority Code Point (PCP) selection, which defines
the priority to traffic class mapping for both Layer 1 service ports and Layer 2
service ports.
Note: If priority to traffic class mapping is set to 802.1 D standard, only the
8p0d value is available.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 633

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to reset default values.
Command Mode
Options
8p0d Sets the PCP selection to 8 priorities, 0 priorities with

color dropping.
7p1d Sets the PCP selection to 7 priorities 1 priority with color

dropping.

color dropping.

color dropping.
8p8d Sets the PCP selection to 8 priorities, the Drop Eligible

Indicator (DEI) bit in the S-VLAN tag is used to retrieve or
indicate the drop eligibility of frames. Only available in
provider mode.
Examples
Setting the PCP selection to 6p2d:
ML66(config)#bridge network-pcp-selection 6p2d
66.2 cep-pvid
Synopsis
cep-pvid <PVID>
Description
Use this command to set the PVID for a CE-UNI port when the bridge is in
provider mode.
Command Mode
634 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
PVID The PVID. The value can be set from 0 to 4094.
Examples
Setting the PVID to 2:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#cep-pvid 2
66.3 cvid-registration
Synopsis
Adding a single C-VID–S-VID pair to the C-VID registration table:
[no] cvid-registration <CVID> <SVID>
Description
Use this command to add a C-VID–S-VID pair to the C-VID registration table.
Use the no option to remove a C-VID–S-VID pair from the C-VID registration
table.
Command Mode
Operands
CVID The C-VID of the pair. The valid range is 0–4094.
SVID The S-VID of the pair. The valid range is 1–4094.
Examples
Adding the C-VID–S-VID pair 3 12:
ML66(config-bridgeport)#cvid-registration 3 12
66.4 default-network-priority
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 635

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— default-network-priority <PRIORITY>
— no default-network-priority
Description
Use this command to set the default network priority for a UNI, CE-UNI, CN-UNI,
or Layer 1 service port. The default value is 0 on LAN and WAN interfaces, and 4
on the LAN-DCN interface.
Use the no option to reset the default network priority.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The network priority. The value can be set from 0 to 7.
Examples
Setting the default network priority to 7:
ML66(config-qos)#default-network-priority 7
66.5 trusted
Synopsis
— trusted { stagPcp | exp | dscpIPv6 | dscpIPv4 | dscpIPv4IPv6 | ctagPcp |

expDscp }
— no trusted
Description
Use this command to specify which priority field in the incoming packet is trusted
on a UNI, CE-UNI, CN-UNI, or Layer 1 service port. By default, no priority field in
the incoming packet is trusted, and the default priority is used.
Use the no option to specify that no priority field in the incoming packet is
trusted.
Command Mode
636 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
stagPcp Specifies the Priority Code Point (PCP) field on the S-tag
as trusted. Only valid for Layer 1, and CN-UNI in provider
mode for Layer 2. If the packet is untagged, the default
priority is used.
exp Specifies the Experimental, redefined as Traffic Class,

field on Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) as trusted.
If the packet is not MPLS, the default priority is used.
dscpIPv6 Specifies the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)

field on IPv6 as trusted. If the packet is not IPv6, the
default priority is used.
dscpIPv4 Specifies the DSCP field on IPv4 as trusted. If the packet

is not IPv4, the default priority is used.
dscpIPv4IPv6 Specifies the DSCP field on either IPv4 or IPv6 as trusted.

If the packet is neither IPv4 nor IPv6, the default priority
is used.
ctagPcp Specifies the PCP field on the C-tag as trusted. It is valid

for Layer 1. For Layer 2, it is valid for UNI in customer
mode and CE-UNI in provider mode. It is valid for CN-UNI
in provider mode only if the acceptable frame type of the
CN-UNI port is set to admit only untagged and priority-
tagged frames. If the packet is untagged, the default
priority is used.
expDscp Specifies the Experimental, redefined as Traffic Class,

field on MPLS as trusted. If the packet is not MPLS, it
specifies the DSCP field on IPv4/IPv6 as trusted. If the
packet is not IP, the default priority is used.
Examples
Specifying the PCP field on the C-tag as trusted:
ML66(config-qos)#trusted ctagPcp
66.6 user-priority-mapping
Synopsis
— user-priority-mapping <PRIORITY> <NETWORKPRIORITY>
— no user-priority-mapping <PRIORITY>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 637

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to add a user priority to network priority mapping.
Use the no option to load the default mapping.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The user priority.
NETWORKPRIORITY
The network priority.
Examples
Adding the user priority to network priority mapping 2 to 3:
ML66(config-qos)#user-priority-mapping 2 3
638 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: LAG
67 Ethernet Commands: LAG
74.
The following command modes are applicable for the Link Aggregation Group
(LAG) commands:
— LAG configuration submode — (config-lag)
Table 74 LAG Commands Overview

alarm-enable-degraded-service enable or disable the degraded
service alarm
alarm-enable-no-traffic enable or disable no traffic alarm
alarm-enable-unable-to-protect enable or disable unable to protect
alarm
clear lag counters clear LAG-level Switchovers
counter and the LACP counters on
all member links of the LAG
hash-type define the hashing algorithm
lacp activity define Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP) Activity
lacp controlmode enable or disable LACP
lacp lag-sys-priority define LACP system priority
lacp max-delay set collector maximum delay
lacp revertive enable revertive mode for a LAG
lacp timeout set the length of LACP timeout
lag create Link Aggregation Group
(LAG)
members define LAG member ports
— show lag
— show lag lacpstats
— show lag status
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 639

CLI Descriptions
884.
67.1 alarm-enable-degraded-service
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable-degraded-service
Description
Use this command to enable the degraded service alarm.
Use the no option to disable the degraded service alarm.
Command Mode
LAG configuration submode — (config-lag)
Examples
Enabling degraded service alarm:
ML66(config-lag)#alarm-enable-degraded-service
67.2 alarm-enable-no-traffic
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable-no-traffic
Description
Use this command to enable the no traffic alarm.
Use the no option to disable no traffic alarm.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling no traffic alarm:
640 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-lag)#alarm-enable-no-traffic
67.3 alarm-enable-unable-to-protect
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable-unable-to-protect
Description
Use this command to enable the unable to protect alarm.
This alarm is raised if one of the links is faulty in 1+1 mode.
Use the no option to disable the unable to protect alarm.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-lag)#alarm-enable-unable-to-protect
67.4 clear lag counters
Synopsis
clear lag counters <LAGID>
Description
Use this command to clear LAG-level Switchovers counter and the LACP counters
on all member links of the LAG.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
LAGID The Link Aggregation Group (LAG) ID in <Rack/Slot/

Port> format.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 641

CLI Descriptions
Examples
ML66>clear lag counters 1/6/5
67.5 hash-type
Synopsis
hash-type { mac-sa-da | mac-sa | mac-da | ip-src-dst | ip-src | ip-dst }
Description
Use this command to define the hashing algorithm for Link Aggregation Group
(LAG) load balancing.
Note: This command is not applicable to LACP 1+1 mode.
The default hashing algorithm is mac-sa-da.
Attention!
The reconfiguration of the hashing algorithm may lead to traffic errors on the receiver
side. Changing the hashing algorithm causes packet reordering for the traffic flows, due
to the different traffic distribution in the LAG.
Command Mode
Options
mac-sa-da The hashing algorithm is based on source Media Access

Control (MAC) address, destination MAC address, VLAN
ID, Ethertype, and source bridge port ID.
mac-sa The hashing algorithm is based on source MAC address,

VLAN ID, Ethertype, and source bridge port ID.
mac-da The hashing algorithm is based on destination MAC

address, VLAN ID, Ethertype, and source bridge port ID.
ip-src-dst The hashing algorithm is based on source IP address,

destination IP address, source TCP/UDP port, and
destination TCP/UDP port.
642 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ip-src The hashing algorithm is based on source IP address and

source TCP/UDP port.
ip-dst The hashing algorithm is based on destination IP address

and destination TCP/UDP port.
Examples
Define the hashing algorithm based on source MAC address, destination MAC
address, VLAN ID, Ethertype, and source bridge port ID:
ML66(config-lag)#hash-type mac-sa-da
67.6 lacp activity
Synopsis
lacp activity { active | passive }
Description
Use this command to define Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Activity.
Note: The default setting of the LACP Activity must be changed to Active
manually, at least on one side of the LAG.
Command Mode
Options
active Sets LACP Activity to active. The LACP in the current LAG
is able to start negotiation with the peer.
passive Sets LACP Activity to passive. The LACP is waiting for the
Protocol Data Unit (PDU) sent by the peer to start
negotiation.
Examples
Setting LACP Activity to active:
ML66(config-lag)#lacp activity active
67.7 lacp controlmode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 643

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
lacp controlmode {active | static | 1+1}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP).
Note: If the LACP is enabled, the default setting of the LACP Activity must be
changed to Active manually, at least on one side of the LAG.
Command Mode
Options
active Enables LACP.
static Disables LACP.
1+1 Enables LACP 1+1 mode.
Examples
Enabling LACP:
ML66(config-lag)#lacp controlmode active
67.8 lacp lag-sys-priority
Synopsis
lacp lag-sys-priority <PRIO>
Description
Use this command to define Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) system
priority.
644 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Attention!
This command takes effect on all LAGs that use LACP. It may entail a short traffic
disturbance until the LACP protocol adapts to the changed value.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIO The system priority. The valid range is 0–65535.
Examples
Defining LACP system priority to 100:
ML66(config)#lacp lag-sys-priority 100
67.9 lacp max-delay
Synopsis
lacp max-delay <MAXDELAY>
Description
Use this command to set collector maximum delay.
Command Mode
Operands
MAXDELAY The value of the collector maximum delay in tens of

milliseconds.
Examples
Setting collector maximum delay to 10 ms:
ML66(config-lag)#lacp max-delay 10
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 645

CLI Descriptions
67.10 lacp revertive
Synopsis
[no] lacp revertive
Description
Use this command to enable revertive mode for a LAG.
If revertive mode is enabled, the higher priority link will regain the active role
after its recovery.
Note: This command is only applicable to 1+1 mode.
Use the no option to disable revertive mode.
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-lag)#lacp revertive
67.11 lacp timeout
Synopsis
lacp timeout { short | long }
Description
Use this command to set the length of Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
timeout.
Command Mode
Options
short Sets short timeout with 3s length.
long Sets long timeout with 90s length.
646 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting short timeout with 3s:
ML66(config-lag)#lacp timeout short
67.12 lag
Synopsis
— lag <LAGID> [<NAME>]
— no lag <LAGID>
Description
Use this command to configure Link Aggregation Group (LAG) for Ethernet
protection. The command also changes to the (config-lag) submode.
Use the no option to remove the LAG.
Command Mode
Operands
LAGID The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the master port of the
LAG in <Rack/Slot/Port> format.
NAME The name of the LAG. The length of the string must be
between 0 and 32 characters.
Examples
Creating LAG:
ML66(config)#lag 1/6/5
ML66(config-lag)#
67.13 members
Synopsis
members <PORTLIST>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 647

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to define Link Aggregation Group (LAG) member ports.
Command Mode
Operands
PORTLIST A list of ports that shows all members of the group in

<Rack/Slot/Port> format. The RSP values are separated
by commas.
Examples
Defining LAG member ports:
ML66(config-lag)#members 1/6/4,1/6/5
648 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: LLDP
68 Ethernet Commands: LLDP
75.
The following command modes are applicable for the Link Layer Discovery
Protocol (LLDP) commands:
— LLDP interface level configuration submode — (config-lldp)
— Exec mode — >
Table 75 LLDP Commands Overview

admin-status change the LLDP admin status on the
Ethernet interface
clear counters clear LLDP counters
clear lldp counters clear LLDP counters
lldp dest-mac-address nearest-bridge enter LLDP interface level
configuration (config-lldp) submode
lldp message-fast-tx set the time interval between LLDP
Data Unit (LLDPDU) transmissions
during fast transmission periods
lldp message-tx-hold-multiplier set the multiplier used for Time To Live
(TTL) calculation of LLDPDUs
lldp message-tx-interval set the time interval between periodic
LLDPDU transmissions
lldp notification-enable enable LLDP notifications about
changes in the LLDP remote systems
database
lldp notification-interval set the minimum time interval
between LLDP notifications about
changes in the LLDP remote systems
database
lldp tx-fast-init set the number of LLDPDUs that are
transmitted during fast transmission
periods
tlvs-tx-enable enable Type-Length-Value (TLV)
types in transmitted LLDP packets
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 649

CLI Descriptions
— show counters
— show current
— show lldp config
— show lldp counters
— show lldp local-info
— show lldp neighbors
— show local-info
— show neighbors
884.
68.1 admin-status
Synopsis
admin-status {tx-and-rx | disabled}
Description
Use this command to change the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) admin
status on the Ethernet interface.
By default, the LLDP admin status is disabled on Ethernet interfaces.
Command Mode
LLDP interface level configuration submode — (config-lldp)
Options
tx-and-rx Enables LLDP packet transmission and reception.
disabled Disables LLDP packet transmission and reception.
Examples
Enabling LLDP packet transmission on the Ethernet interface:
ML66(config-lldp)#admin-status tx-and-rx
650 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

68.2 clear counters
Synopsis
clear counters
Description
Use this command to clear the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) counters of
the accessed Ethernet interface.
Command Mode
Examples
Clearing LLDP counters on the Ethernet interface:
ML66(config-lldp)#clear counters
68.3 clear lldp counters
Synopsis
clear lldp counters [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to clear Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) counters.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The rack, slot, and port values of the interface whose
current LLDP counters are to be cleared, in the following
format: <Rack/Slot/Port>.
Examples
Clearing all LLDP counters:
ML66>clear lldp counters
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 651

CLI Descriptions
Clearing the LLDP counters of LAN 1/6/4 only:

ML66>clear lldp counters 1/6/4
68.4 lldp dest-mac-address nearest-bridge
Synopsis
[no] lldp dest-mac-address nearest-bridge
Description
Use this command to enter Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) interface level
configuration (config-lldp) submode, where interface level LLDP configuration
commands are available.
Use the no option to delete the interface LLDP configuration. As a result, LLDP
packet transmission and reception on that interface stops.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to LLDP interface level configuration submode:
ML66(config-eth)#lldp dest-mac-address nearest-bridge
ML66(config-lldp)#
68.5 lldp message-fast-tx
Synopsis
lldp message-fast-tx <INTERVAL>
Description
Use this command to set the time interval between Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Data Unit (LLDPDU) transmissions during fast transmission periods.
652 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Attention!
This command takes effect on all interfaces with enabled LLDP configuration.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The LLDPDU fast transmission interval in seconds. The

valid range is 1–3600. The default value is 1.
Examples
Setting the fast transmission interval to 3 s:
ML66(config)#lldp message-fast-tx 3
68.6 lldp message-tx-hold-multiplier
Synopsis
lldp message-tx-hold-multiplier <MULTIPLIER>
Description
Use this command to set the multiplier used for the Time To Live (TTL)
calculation of Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDUs).
The TTL of the sent LLDPDUs is calculated as follows: TTL = message-tx-interval

× tx-hold-multiplier + 1.
Attention!
Command Mode
Operands
MULTIPLIER The Tx Hold multiplier value. The valid range is 2–10. The
default value is 4.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 653

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the Tx Hold multiplier to 6:
ML66(config)#lldp message-tx-hold-multiplier 6
68.7 lldp message-tx-interval
Synopsis
lldp message-tx-interval <INTERVAL>
Description
Use this command to set the time interval between periodic Link Layer Discovery
Protocol Data Unit (LLDPDU) transmissions.
Attention!
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The LLDPDU transmission interval in seconds. The valid

Examples
Setting the LLDPDU transmission interval to 40 s:
ML66(config)#lldp message-tx-interval 40
68.8 lldp notification-enable
Synopsis
[no] lldp notification-enable
654 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to enable sending Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
notifications about changes in the LLDP remote systems database.
Use the no option to disable LLDP notifications.
By default, LLDP notifications are disabled.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling LLDP notifications:
ML66(config)#lldp notification-enable
68.9 lldp notification-interval
Synopsis
lldp notification-interval <INTERVAL>
Description
Use this command to set the minimum time interval between Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP) notifications about changes in the LLDP remote
systems database.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The LLDP notification interval in seconds. The valid range

is 5–3600. The default value is 30.
Examples
Setting the LLDP notification interval to 50 s:
ML66(config)#lldp notification-interval 50
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 655

CLI Descriptions
68.10 lldp tx-fast-init
Synopsis
lldp tx-fast-init <NUM>
Description
Use this command to set the number of Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units
(LLDPDUs) that are transmitted during fast transmission periods.
Attention!
Command Mode
Operands
NUM The number of LLDPDUs sent during a fast transmission

period. The valid range is 1–8. The default value is 4.
Examples
Setting the number of LLDPDUs sent to 2:
ML66(config)#lldp tx-fast-init 2
68.11 tlvs-tx-enable
Synopsis
[no] tlvs-tx-enable {man-addr-ipv4 | man-addr-ipv6 | sys-desc | sys-
name}
Description
Use this command to enable Type-Length-Value (TLV) types in transmitted Link
Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) packets.
Use the no option to disable TLV types in transmitted LLDP packets.
By default, the following optional TLVs are enabled on an Ethernet interface:
656 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— man-addr-ipv4
— sys-desc
— sys-name
Command Mode
Options
man-addr-ipv4 Enables or disables the IPv4 Management Address TLV.
man-addr-ipv6 Enables or disables the IPv6 Management Address TLV.
sys-desc Enables or disables the System Description TLV.
sys-name Enables or disables the System Name TLV.
Examples
Enabling the IPv4 Management Address to be sent in LLDP packets:
ML66(config-lldp)#tlvs-tx-enable man-addr-ipv4
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 657

CLI Descriptions
69 Ethernet Commands: L1 Bonding
76.
The following command modes are applicable for the L1-bonding commands:
— L1 bonding submode — (l1-bonding)
Table 76 Layer 1 Bonding Commands Overview

alarm-enable-degraded-service enable or disable the Degraded
Service alarm
alarm-enable-no-traffic enable or disable the No Traffic alarm
enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping enable the dynamic remapping of
VLANs
l1-bonding create an L1-bonding group
mapping map traffic forwarding with specific
priorities or VLAN towards L1-
bonding member interfaces
members define L1-bonding member interfaces
set-dynamic-vlan-mapping-list set the list of VLANs to be included in
dynamic VLAN mapping
— show l1-bonding
884.
69.1 alarm-enable-degraded-service
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable-degraded-service
Description
Use this command to enable the Degraded Service alarm.
658 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Commands: L1 Bonding
Use the no option to disable the Degraded Service alarm.
Command Mode
L1 bonding submode — (l1-bonding)
Examples
Enabling the Degraded Service alarm:
ML66(l1-bonding)#alarm-enable-degraded-service
69.2 alarm-enable-no-traffic
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable-no-traffic
Description
Use this command to enable the No Traffic alarm.
Use the no option to disable the No Traffic alarm.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the No Traffic alarm:
ML66(l1-bonding)#alarm-enable-no-traffic
69.3 enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping
Synopsis
— enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping <VLANS>
— no enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping
Description
Use this command to enable the dynamic remapping of VLANs.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 659

CLI Descriptions
If used without a VLAN list, dynamic VLAN mapping is enabled for all VLANs in
which the specific bonding is a member and which do not have explicit VLAN
mapping configured. For example, if the L1-bonding instance is a member of
VLANs 2, 3, 4, and 5 and there is a manual VLAN mapping configured for VLAN
3, then dynamic VLAN mapping only handles VLANs 2, 4, and 5.
If a VLAN list is defined, dynamic VLAN handling is enabled only for the VLANs
included in the list. For example, enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping 2,6 enables
the dynamic remapping of VLANs 2 and 6. Dynamic mapping consumes one
VLAN mapping rule for each VLAN that is part of the scope of dynamic mapping.
Dynamic VLAN handling operates as follows:
— After dynamic VLAN handling is enabled, there is a 30 s measurement period

while the necessary bandwidth information is collected.
— The 30 s measurement period is repeated after each mapping action, which

means that there is at least 30 s between two consecutive mapping actions.
However, if more than 30 s have passed since the last mapping action,
reaction to events is close to instantaneous.
— If the bandwidth utilization of the traditional link is below 60%, a mapping

action is triggered, during which the functionality tries to achieve 70%
utilization on the traditional link. The 70% target is selected to leave enough
room for unexpected, quick traffic bursts.
— If the bandwidth utilization of the traditional link exceeds 80%, a new

mapping action is triggered to determine a new VLAN set to reach 70%
utilization on the traditional link. If the bandwidth utilization exceeds the
80% limit within 30 s after the last mapping action, the new mapping action
is executed once the 30 s measurement period is over. Otherwise, the new
mapping action is executed in the next second.
— Disabling dynamic VLAN handling resets the rules created by dynamic

mapping, so the traffic is then mapped based on the manually configured
priority mapping rules.
Command Mode
Operands
VLANS The list of VLANs to be included in the scope of dynamic

VLAN handling, separated by commas.
Examples
Enabling dynamic VLAN handling for VLANs in which the current bonding
instance is member:
ML66(l1-bonding)#enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping
660 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Enabling dynamic VLAN handling for specific VLANs:

ML66(l1-bonding)#enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping 10,17
Disabling dynamic VLAN handling:

ML66(l1-bonding)#no enable-dynamic-vlan-mapping
69.4 l1-bonding
Synopsis
[no] l1-bonding <RSP>
Description
Use this command to change to L1-bonding submode and to create an L1-
bonding group.
The interface passed here becomes the Master. By default, all PCP values are
mapped to the Master interface.
Use the no option to remove an L1 bonding group.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the Master interface
selected for the L1-bonding group, in the following
format: <R/S/P> .
Examples
Entering L1-bonding submode and creating an L1-bonding group:
ML66(config)#l1-bonding 1/1/1
ML66(l1-bonding)#
69.5 mapping
Synopsis
— mapping <RSP> {pcp <PRIOLIST> | dscp <PRIOLIST> | mpls <PRIOLIST> |

vlan <VLAN>}[protected]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 661

CLI Descriptions
— no mapping <RSP> {pcp | dscp | mpls | vlan}
Description
Use this command to map traffic forwarding towards L1-bonding member
interfaces.
Use this command with the pcp option to map traffic forwarding with specific
priorities towards L1-bonding member interfaces. All Priority Code Point (PCP)
values must be mapped to an interface, thus, PCP-mappings cannot be deleted,
only remapped or reset to Master. PCP-mappings are protected, so in case of link
failure, all values are remapped to the working interface.
Use the no option with the pcp option to reset all PCP mappings of the specified
interface to the Master interface. PCP-mappings from the Master interface
cannot be reset, so the Master interface is an invalid parameter.
Use this command with the dscp option to map the traffic forwarding of specific
DSCP values towards L1-bonding member interfaces. The maximum number of
allowed DSCP-mappings is 144 for all L1-bonding instances. DSCP-mappings are
protected, so in case of link failure, all values are remapped to the working
interface. DSCP-mapping is stronger than priority mapping, which means that for
the mapped DSCP values, the PCP field says “don’t care”. DSCP-mappings can be
remapped to other members on the fly, without resetting first. MPLS traffic
cannot be mapped with DSCP rules even if there are not any MPLS TC rules
configured.
Use the no option with the dscp option to remove the specified DSCP-mapping.
Use this command with the mpls option to map the traffic forwarding of a
specific MPLS traffic class values towards L1-bonding member interfaces. As
MPLS-mappings are protected, in case of link failure, all values are remapped to
the working interface. MPLS-mapping is stronger than priority and DSCP
mappings, which means that the PCP and DSCP fields disregard the mapped
MPLS values. MPLS-mapping can be reconfigured without resetting first.
Use the no option with the mpls option to remove the specified MPLS-mapping.
Use this command with the vlan option to map the traffic forwarding of a specific
VLAN towards L1-bonding member interfaces. The maximum number of allowed
VLAN-mappings is 44 for all layer 1 bonding instances. The L1-bonding group
must be a member interface in the specific VLAN if the vlan parameter is used.
VLAN-mappings can be unprotected, so they are not remapped to the working
interface in case of link failure or protected if the protected option is used. VLAN-
mapping is stronger than any priority mapping (PCP, DSCP, MPLS), which means
that the PCP field disregard the mapped VLAN. VLAN-mapping can be
reconfigured without resetting first.
Use the no option with the vlan option to remove the specified VLAN-mapping.
662 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the L1-bonding

member interface to which traffic is mapped, in the
following format: <Rack/Slot/Port>.
PRIOLIST A list of the PCP, DSCP or MPLS TC values separated by

commas, for example, 0,1,2,3.
VLAN The VLAN from which traffic is to be forwarded towards

the selected L1-bonding member interface.
Options
pcp Specifies to map the traffic forwarding of the selected

PCP towards the selected L1-bonding member interface.
dscp Specifies to map the traffic forwarding of the selected

DSCP towards the selected L1-bonding member
interface.
mpls Specifies to map the traffic forwarding of the selected

MPLS TC towards the selected L1-bonding member
interface.
vlan Specifies to map the traffic forwarding of the selected

VLAN towards the selected L1-bonding member
interface.
protected When VLAN mapping is configured, it specifies to map

the specific traffic as protected.
Examples
Mapping traffic forwarding with the PCP values 0,1,2,3 to the L1-bonding
interface:
ML66(l1-bonding)#mapping 1/6/7 pcp 0,1,2,3
Mapping traffic forwarding with the DSCP values 1,59,63 to the L1-bonding
interface:
ML66(l1-bonding)#mapping 1/6/7 dscp 1,59,63
Mapping traffic forwarding with the MPLS TC values 0,1,2,3 to the L1-bonding
interface:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 663

CLI Descriptions
ML66(l1-bonding)#mapping 1/6/7 mpls 0,1,2,3
Mapping traffic forwarding from VLAN 100 to the L1-bonding interface:

ML66(l1-bonding)#mapping 1/6/7 vlan 100
Mapping traffic forwarding from VLAN 200 to the L1-bonding interface as

protected traffic:
ML66(l1-bonding)#mapping 1/6/7 vlan 200 protected
69.6 members
Synopsis
members <INTERFACELIST>
Description
Use this command to define L1-bonding member interfaces.
The maximum number of members is two, including the Master interface.
The Master interface cannot be removed from the member list and is not
required, although possible, to define in the <INTERFACELIST>.
To remove a member, list only the Master interface in the <INTERFACELIST>.
Note: If an interface with active PCP mappings is removed, all PCP mappings
are reset to the Master, and VLAN mappings are deleted automatically.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERFACELIST The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the Master interface or
of the L1-bonding member interface to be added, in the
Examples
Adding an L1-bonding member:
ML66(l1-bonding)#members 1/6/7
ML66(l1-bonding)#show current l1-bonding 1/1/1
members 1/1/1,1/6/7
mapping 1/1/1 pcp 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
alarm-enable-degraded-service
alarm-enable-no-traffic
Removing all L1-bonding members:
664 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(l1-bonding)#members 1/1/1
ML66(l1-bonding)#show current l1-bonding 1/1/1
members 1/1/1
mapping 1/1/1 pcp 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
alarm-enable-degraded-service
alarm-enable-no-traffic
69.7 set-dynamic-vlan-mapping-list
Synopsis
set-dynamic-vlan-mapping-list <VLANS>
Description
Use this command to set a list of VLANs to be included in dynamic VLAN
handling.
Using this command, the VLAN scope of dynamic VLAN handling can be changed
even if the feature has already been enabled.
Command Mode
Operands
VLANS The list of VLANs to be included in the scope of dynamic

VLAN handling.
Examples
Setting a VLAN list for dynamic VLAN handling:
ML66(l1-bonding)#set-dynamic-vlan-mapping-list 11
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 665

CLI Descriptions
70 TDM Cross-Connection Commands
77.
The following command modes are applicable for the Time Division Multiplex
(TDM) Cross-Connection commands:
Table 77 TDM Cross-Connection Commands Overview

connect-cc cross-connect a TDM port with
another TDM port
— show connect-cc
— show tdm-interfaces
884.
70.1 connect-cc
Synopsis
— connect-cc <NAME> <PORTTYPE1> <PORT1> <PORTTYPE2> <PORT2>
— no connect-cc {<PORT1> | <PORT2>}
Description
Use this command to cross-connect a TDM port with another TDM port.
Use the no option to delete a cross-connection.
Command Mode
666 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

TDM Cross-Connection Commands
Operands
NAME The description of the connection in free text.
PORTTYPE1 The type of the first port. The valid values are E1 and DS1.
Note: This parameter is not case-sensitive.
PORT1 The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the first port, in the
PORTTYPE2 The type of the second port. The valid values are E1 and
DS1.
Note: This parameter is not case-sensitive.
PORT2 The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the second port, in the
Examples
Setting a TDM port cross-connection:
ML66(config)#connect-cc name e1 "1/1/101 1" e1 "1/1/101 2"
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 667

CLI Descriptions
71 CES Commands
78.
Note: These commands are only valid for LTU 1002 with ETSI.
The following command modes are applicable for the Circuit Emulation Service
(CES) commands:
— CES Server configuration submode — (config-ces-server)
— CES PW configuration submode — (config-ces-server-pw)
— CES Ethernet configuration submode — (config-ces-server-pw-eth)
— CES TDM Profile configuration submode — (config-ces-tdm-profile)
Table 78 CES Commands Overview

ces server
ces tdm-profile create a CES TDM profile, and enter
CES TDM Profile configuration
submodeselect the CES server to
configure, and switch to CES Server
clock-recovery-mode set Clock Recovery Mode
description set the description of a Pseudo-Wire
(PW)
encap set the encapsulation type of the PW,
and enter CES Ethernet configuration
submode
jitter-buffer-playout-level set the level of Jitter Buffer Playout
jitter-buffer-size set the size of Jitter Buffer
lops-clear-threshold set the number of consecutive packets
with sequential sequence numbers to
exit LOPS
lops-set-threshold set the number of consecutive missing
packets that are required to enter
LOPS
668 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
mac-address configure the MAC address of the CES

server
name (PW) set the name of a PW
name (TDM Profile) set the name of a TDM profile
pw create or delete a PW, and enter CES
PW configuration submode
packet-reorder enable or disable the Packet Reorder
feature
packet-replace-policy define the packet replacement policy
in case of Jitter buffer Underrun
payload-size set payload size
payload-suppression enable or disable payload suppression
receive-ecid set the remote Emulated Circuit
Identifier (ECID)
remote-mac set the remote MAC address
shutdown set the PW admin status to Down or
Up
tdm-profile set the TDM configuration profile
timing-input set the timing input
transmit-ecid set the local ECID
trapenable enable sending alarms for the PW
vlanid set a VLAN
vlan-priority set the VLAN priority value
— show (CES)
— show ces server
— show ces tdm-profile
— show connect-cc
— show current
— show memory
— show status
— show tdm-interfaces
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 669

CLI Descriptions
884.
71.1 ces server
Synopsis
ces server <RSC>
Description
Use this command to select the Circuit Emulation Service (CES) server to
configure and to switch to CES Server configuration submode.
Command Mode
Operands
RSC The Rack, Slot, and CesServerId values of the CES server
to be configured, in the following format: <Rack/Slot/
CesServerId>.
Examples
Setting CES server 1/6/101:
ML66(config)#ces server 1/6/101
ML66(config-ces-server)#
71.2 ces tdm-profile
Synopsis
ces tdm-profile [<ID>]
Description
Use this command to create a Circuit Emulation Service (CES) TDM profile and
enter CES TDM Profile configuration submode.
Command Mode
670 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
Operands
ID The ID of the TDM profile.
Examples
Displaying the next available TDM profile ID:
ML66(config)#ces tdm-profile
% INFO Next available unassigned TDM profile index: 4
Creating TDM profile 4:

ML66(config)#ces tdm-profile 4
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#
71.3 clock-recovery-mode
Synopsis
clock-recovery-mode {adaptive}
Description
Use this command to set Clock Recovery Mode.
Command Mode
CES TDM Profile configuration submode — (config-ces-tdm-profile)
Options
adaptive Sets Clock Recovery Mode to adaptive.
Examples
Setting Clock Recovery Mode to adaptive:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#clock-recovery-mode adaptive
71.4 description
Synopsis
description <PWDESCR>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 671

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the description of a Pseudo-Wire (PW).
Command Mode
CES PW configuration submode — (config-ces-server-pw)
Operands
PWDESCR The description of the PW in free text.
Examples
Setting the description of a PW:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#description "My favorite PW"
71.5 encap
Synopsis
encap eth
Description
Use this command to set the encapsulation type of the Pseudo-Wire (PW) and to
switch to CES Ethernet configuration submode.
Note: The encapsulation type must be configured before the admin status of
the PW can be set to Up.
Command Mode
Options
eth Sets the encapsulation type to Ethernet (MEF-8).
Examples
Setting the encapsulation type:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#encap eth
ML66(config-ces-server-pw-eth)#
672 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
71.6 jitter-buffer-playout-level
Synopsis
jitter-buffer-playout-level <LIMIT>
Description
Use this command to set the level of Jitter Buffer for Playout in units of packets.
Command Mode
Operands
LIMIT The level of Jitter Buffer for Playout in units of packets.

Examples
Setting the level of Jitter Buffer for Playout to 5:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#jitter-buffer-playout-level 5
71.7 jitter-buffer-size
Synopsis
jitter-buffer-size <SIZE>
Description
Use this command to set the size of Jitter Buffer in units of packets.
Command Mode
Operands
SIZE The size of Jitter Buffer in units of packets. The valid

range is 1–512.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 673

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the size of Jitter Buffer to 128:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#jitter-buffer-size 128
71.8 lops-clear-threshold
Synopsis
lops-clear-threshold <PACKETNUMBER>
Description
Use this command to set the number of consecutive packets with sequential
sequence numbers to exit LOPS.
Command Mode
Operands
PACKETNUMBER The number of consecutive packets to exit LOPS. The

Examples
Setting the number of packets to exit LOPS to 6:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#lops-clear-threshold 6
71.9 lops-set-threshold
Synopsis
lops-set-threshold <PACKETNUMBER>
Description
Use this command to set the number of consecutive missing packets that are
required to enter LOPS.
Command Mode
674 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
Operands
PACKETNUMBER The number of consecutive missing packets that are

required to enter LOPS. The valid range is 4–15.
Examples
Setting the number of missing packets required to enter LOPS to 6:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#lops-set-threshold 6
71.10 mac-address
Synopsis
mac-address <MACADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to configure the MAC address of the Circuit Emulation Service
(CES) server.
Command Mode
CES Server configuration submode — (config-ces-server)
Operands
MACADDRESS The MAC address to be set for the CES server, in the
following format: <AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF>.
Examples
Setting the MAC address of the CES server:
ML66(config-ces-server)#mac-address 00:A0:C9:14:C8:29
71.11 name (PW)
Synopsis
name <PWNAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of a Pseudo-Wire (PW).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 675

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
PWNAME The name of the PW in free text.
Examples
Setting a PW name:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#name pw-test1
71.12 name (TDM Profile)
Synopsis
name <TPNAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of a TDM profile.
Command Mode
Operands
TPNAME The name of the TDM profile in free text.
Examples
Setting a TDM profile name:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#name tdm-test1
71.13 pw
Synopsis
[no] pw satop [<ID>]
676 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
Description
Use this command to create a Pseudo-Wire (PW) and to enter CES PW
configuration submode for a specific PW.
Use the no option to delete a PW.
Command Mode
Operands
ID The ID of the PW.
Options
satop Sets Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet (SAToP) mode.
Examples
Displaying the next available PW ID on the Circuit Emulation Service (CES)
server:
ML66(config-ces-server)#pw satop
% INFO Next available Pw identifier: 7
Creating PW 7 and entering CES PW configuration submode:

ML66(config-ces-server)#pw satop 7
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#
71.14 packet-reorder
Synopsis
[no] packet-reorder
Description
Use this command to enable the Packet Reorder feature.
Use the no option to disable the Packet Reorder feature.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 677

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Enabling Packet Reorder:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#packet-reorder
71.15 packet-replace-policy
Synopsis
packet-replace-policy {allones | filler <FILLER>}
Description
Use this command to define the packet replacement policy in case of Jitter Buffer
Underrun.
Command Mode
Options
allones Sets the packet replacement policy to allOnes. The byte

pattern that is sent (played) on the TDM line in case of
Jitter Buffer Underrun consists of all 1s for every bit. This
is the default setting.
filler Sets the packet replacement policy to filler. The byte

pattern that is sent (played) on the TDM line in case of
Jitter Buffer Underrun consists of a user-defined byte
pattern.
Operands
FILLER The filler byte pattern. The valid range is 0x00-0xFF.
Examples
Setting packet replacement policy to filler:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#packet-replace-policy filler 0x55
678 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
71.16 payload-size
Synopsis
payload-size <PAYLOADSIZE>
Description
Use this command to set the size of payload of the TDM profile.
Command Mode
Operands
PAYLOADSIZE The size of the payload in bytes. The valid values are 256,
256 + N, 256 + 2 × N, 256 + 3 × N, and so on up to 1440 −
256, where N = 32.
Examples
Setting the payload size to 320:
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#payload-size 320
71.17 payload-suppression
Synopsis
[no] payload-suppression
Description
Use this command to enable payload suppression.
Use the no option to disable payload suppression.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling payload suppression:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 679

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#payload-suppression
71.18 receive-ecid
Synopsis
receive-ecid <ECID>
Description
Use this command to set the remote Emulated Circuit Identifier (ECID).
Note: The remote ECID must not be zero, and it must be unique on the CES
server.
Command Mode
CES Ethernet configuration submode — (config-ces-server-pw-eth)
Operands
ECID The remote ECID. The valid range is 1-1048575.
Examples
Setting the remote ECID:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw-eth)#receive-ecid 1048575
71.19 remote-mac
Synopsis
remote-mac <MACADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to set the remote MAC address.
Command Mode
680 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
Operands
MACADDRESS The remote MAC address, in the following format:

<AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF>.
Examples
Setting the remote MAC address:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw-eth)#remote-mac 20:A0:C9:14:C8:29
71.20 shutdown
Synopsis
[no] shutdown
Description
Use this command to set the Pseudo-Wire (PW) admin status to Down.
Use the no option to set the PW admin status to Up.
Note: The PW admin status must be set to Down before configuring any other
PW parameters.
Command Mode
Examples
Setting the PW status to Down:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#shutdown
71.21 tdm-profile
Synopsis
tdm-profile <ID>
Description
Use this command to set the TDM configuration profile.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 681

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
ID The ID of the TDM configuration profile.
Examples
Configuring TDM configuration profile 2:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#tdm-profile 2
71.22 timing-input
Synopsis
timing-input {looped | netsync | recovered}
Description
Use this command to set the timing input.
Command Mode
Options
looped Sets TDM timing input to looped. TDM transmit clock is

derived from the received TDM signal.
netsync Sets TDM timing input to netsync. TDM transmit clock is

derived from the SEC in network frequency
synchronization mode.
recovered Sets TDM timing input to recovered. TDM transmit clock is

derived from the packet arrival rate over the emulated
circuit.
Examples
Setting TDM timing input to looped:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#timing-input looped
682 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
71.23 transmit-ecid
Synopsis
transmit-ecid <ECID>
Description
Use this command to set the local Emulated Circuit Identifier (ECID).
The local ECID is used as the Pseudo-Wire (PW) label for Circuit Emulation
Service (CES) over Ethernet PWs. The PW label is used to demultiplex ingress
PW packets and must be unique across all PWs in one CES server.
Command Mode
Operands
ECID The local ECID. The valid range is 0-1048575.
Examples
Setting the local ECID:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw-eth)#transmit-ecid 1048575
71.24 trapenable
Synopsis
trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable sending alarms for the Pseudo-Wire (PW).
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling sending alarms for the PW:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 683

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config-ces-server-pw)#trapenable
71.25 vlanid
Synopsis
vlanid <VLANID>
Description
Use this command to set a VLAN.
Note: The Pseudo-Wire (PW) VLAN ID is not used for PW demultiplex;

different VLAN IDs can be set for the nodes connected by the PW.
Command Mode
Operands
VLANID The ID of the VLAN. The valid range is 1–4094.
Examples
Setting the VLAN ID:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw-eth)#vlanid 1000
71.26 vlan-priority
Synopsis
vlan-priority <VLANPRIO>
Description
Use this command to set the VLAN priority value.
Command Mode
684 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CES Commands
Operands
VLANPRIO The VLAN priority value. The valid range is 0–7, where
the highest value is 7.
Examples
Setting the VLAN priority to 1:
ML66(config-ces-server-pw-eth)#vlan-priority 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 685

CLI Descriptions
72 Performance Monitoring Commands
By default, the 15 minutes or 24 hours Ethernet PM counters are enabled in the

node. For more information about PM, see Monitoring Ethernet Performance.
To see which interfaces are active and can be used for Ethernet PM, use the
Packet - ethernet performance monitoring overview page in MINI-LINK Node
GUI.
79.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet PM commands:
— PM submode — (pm)
— Ethernet PM submode — (eth-pm)
— LAN configuration submode — (config-lan)
— WAN configuration submode — (config-wan)
Table 79 Ethernet PM Commands Overview

clear clear Ethernet Performance Monitoring (PM)
data for the selected Ethernet interface
clear-if-counters clear PM counters for the interface
ethernet-pm select an Ethernet interface
ethernet-pm clear-all clear all Ethernet PM data
pm switch to PM Mode configuration mode
pmalarmview enable or disable the PM alarms
pm15minsetthreshold set the PM alarm thresholds for each 15
minutes measurement
pm24hsetthreshold set the PM alarm thresholds for each 24 hour
measurement
pm-start-time set the PM start time
686 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Performance Monitoring Commands
— show current
— show interface ethernet-pm
884.
72.1 clear
Synopsis
clear
Description
Use this command to clear Ethernet Performance Monitoring (PM) data for the
selected Ethernet interface. Use the command ethernet-pm to select an Ethernet
interface.
Note: The PM data is cleared immediately, but the current interval is not
marked as invalid until it is completed. To clear PM data and mark the
current interval as invalid immediately, use MINI-LINK Node GUI.
Command Mode
Ethernet PM submode — (eth-pm)
Examples
Clearing Ethernet PM data for the selected Ethernet interface:
ML66(eth-pm)#clear
72.2 clear-if-counters
Synopsis
clear-if-counters
Description
Use this command to clear the counters that are displayed on the MINI-LINK
Node GUI status page of an interface.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 687

CLI Descriptions
WAN configuration submode — (config-wan)
Examples
Clearing Performance Monitoring (PM) counters:
ML66(config-lan)#clear-if-counters
72.3 ethernet-pm
Synopsis
ethernet-pm <RSP> {wan | lan}
Description
Use this command to change to the (eth-pm) submode for the Ethernet interface
specified by the given Rack, Slot, and Port. The clear command can then be
used to clear the Ethernet Performance Monitoring (PM) data for this interface.
Command Mode
Options
wan Specifies that this is a WAN interface.
lan Specifies that this is a LAN interface.
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port of the interface to select. The
format is <Rack/Slot/Port>, for example, 1/6/1.
Note: Port refers to a WAN or LAN interface, not to a

switch port.
Examples
Entering the (eth-pm) submode for Ethernet interface 1/6/1:
ML66(config)#ethernet-pm 1/6/1 lan
ML66(eth-pm)#
688 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

72.4 ethernet-pm clear-all
Synopsis
ethernet-pm clear-all
Description
Use this command to clear all Ethernet Performance Monitoring (PM) data.
Note: The PM data is cleared immediately, but the current interval is not
marked as invalid until it is completed. To clear PM data and mark the
current interval as invalid immediately, use MINI-LINK Node GUI.
Command Mode
Options
clear-all Clears all Ethernet PM data.
Examples
Clearing all Ethernet PM data:
ML66(config)#ethernet-pm clear-all
72.5 pm
Synopsis
pm
Description
Use this command to change to the (pm) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (pm) submode:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 689

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config)#pm
ML66(pm)#
72.6 pmalarmview
Synopsis
pmalarmview { enable | disable }
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the Performance Monitoring (PM) alarms.
Command Mode
Options
enable Enables the PM alarms.
disable Disables the PM alarms.
Examples
Enabling the PM alarms:
ML66(eth-pm)#pmalarmview enable
72.7 pm15minsetthreshold
Synopsis
— pm15minsetthreshold <rxLoss> <rxBandwidthUtilization> <txLoss>

<txBandwidthUtilization> [ <tc0Threshold> <tc1Threshold> <tc2Threshold>
<tc3Threshold> <tc4Threshold> <tc5Threshold> <tc6Threshold>
<tc7Threshold> ]
— pm15minsetthreshold { tx | rx } { loss | bandwidthutilization }

<threshold>
— pm15minsetthreshold tc <tcNumber> <threshold>
690 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the Performance Monitoring (PM) alarm thresholds for
each 15 minutes measurement.
Note: The TC alarm thresholds can be set only for WAN interfaces and
buffered VLAN interfaces.
Command Mode
Operands
rxLoss Sets the Rx Loss threshold value. The valid range is <0.1–
0.000000001> . The default value is 0.000001. When the
value is set to 0, the threshold is disabled.
rxBandwidthUtilization
Sets the Rx Bandwidth Utilization threshold value. The
valid range is 1–100. The default value is 95. When the
txLoss Sets the Tx Loss threshold value. The valid range is <0.1–
txBandwidthUtilization
Sets the Tx Bandwidth Utilization threshold value. The
tc0Threshold–tc7Threshold
Sets the Traffic Class (TC) discard threshold values. The
valid range is <0.1–0.000000001>. The default value is
0.000001. When the value is set to 0, the threshold is
disabled.
tcNumber Specifies for which TC the discard threshold is set. The

threshold Sets the threshold value.
— When the loss or the tc options are specified, the

valid range of the threshold is <0.1–0.000000001> .
The default value is 0.000001. When the value is set
to 0, the threshold is disabled.
— When the bandwidthutilization option is specified,

the valid range of the threshold is 1–100. The default
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 691

CLI Descriptions
value is 95. When the value is set to 100, the

threshold is disabled.
Options
tx Specifies the Tx direction for the selected alarm threshold.
rx Specifies the Rx direction for the selected alarm threshold
loss Specifies the Loss alarm threshold.
bandwidthutilization
Specifies the Bandwidth Utilization alarm threshold.
tc Specifies the TC for the selected alarm threshold.
Examples
Setting the Loss and Bandwidth Utilization alarm thresholds for a 15 minutes
measurement both in Tx and Rx directions:
ML66(eth-pm)#pm15minsetthreshold 0.0001 95 0.0001 95
Setting all PM alarm thresholds for a 15 minutes measurement:

ML66(eth-pm)#pm15minsetthreshold 0.0001 95 0.0001 95 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0 →
.1
Setting a single TC threshold for a 15 minutes measurement:

ML66(eth-pm)#pm15minsetthreshold tc 0 0.1
Setting the Rx Loss alarm threshold for a 15 minutes measurement:

ML66(eth-pm)#pm15minsetthreshold rx loss 0.1
72.8 pm24hsetthreshold
Synopsis
— pm24hsetthreshold <rxLoss> <rxBandwidthUtilization> <txLoss>

<txBandwidthUtilization> [ <tc0Threshold> <tc1Threshold> <tc2Threshold>
<tc3Threshold> <tc4Threshold> <tc5Threshold> <tc6Threshold>
<tc7Threshold> ]
— pm24hsetthreshold { tx | rx } { loss | bandwidthutilization }

<threshold>
— pm24hsetthreshold tc <tcNumber> <threshold>
692 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the Performance Monitoring (PM) alarm thresholds for
each 24 hour measurement.
Note: The TC alarm thresholds can be set only for WAN interfaces and
buffered VLAN interfaces.
Command Mode
Operands
rxLoss Sets the Rx Loss threshold value. The valid range is <0.1–
rxBandwidthUtilization
Sets the Rx Bandwidth Utilization threshold value. The
txLoss Sets the Tx Loss threshold value. The valid range is <0.1–
txBandwidthUtilization
Sets the Tx Bandwidth Utilization threshold value. The
tc0Threshold–tc7Threshold
Sets the Traffic Class (TC) discard threshold values. The
valid range is <0.1–0.000000001> . The default value is
0.000001. When the value is set to 0, the threshold is
disabled.
tcNumber Specifies for which TC the discard threshold is set. The

threshold Sets the threshold value.
— When the loss or the tc options are specified, the

valid range of the threshold is <0.1–0.000000001> .
The default value is 0.000001. When the value is set
to 0, the threshold is disabled.
— When the bandwidthutilization option is specified,

the valid range of the threshold is 1–100. The default
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 693

CLI Descriptions
value is 95. When the value is set to 100, the

threshold is disabled.
Options
tx Specifies the Tx direction for the selected alarm threshold.
rx Specifies the Rx direction for the selected alarm threshold
loss Specifies the Loss alarm threshold.
bandwidthutilization
Specifies the Bandwidth Utilization alarm threshold.
tc Specifies the TC for the selected alarm threshold.
Examples
Setting the Loss and Bandwidth Utilization alarm thresholds for a 24 hour
measurement both in Tx and Rx directions:
ML66(eth-pm)#pm24hsetthreshold 0.0001 95 0.0001 95
Setting all PM alarm thresholds for a 24 hour measurement:

ML66(eth-pm)#pm24hsetthreshold 0.0001 95 0.0001 95 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Setting a single TC threshold for a 24 hour measurement:

ML66(eth-pm)#pm24hsetthreshold tc 0 0.1
Setting the Rx Loss alarm threshold for a 24 hour measurement:

ML66(eth-pm)#pm24hsetthreshold rx loss 0.1
72.9 pm-start-time
Synopsis
pm-start-time <HOUR> <MINUTE> <SECOND>
Description
Use this command to set the Performance Monitoring (PM) start time during the
day. Start time is the beginning of the 24h interval.
Command Mode
PM submode — (pm)
694 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
HOUR Hours in two digits.
MINUTE Minutes in two digits.
SECOND Seconds in two digits.
Examples
Setting the PM start time:
ML66(pm)#pm-start-time 15 30 00
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 695

CLI Descriptions
73 TWAMP Commands
80.
The following command mode is applicable for the Two-Way Active

Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) commands:
Table 80 TWAMP Commands Overview

twamp-reflector-light configure a TWAMP reflector light
session
twamp reset-statistics reset all TWAMP statistics to zero
— show twamp sessions
— show twamp statistics
884.
73.1 twamp-reflector-light
Synopsis
— twamp-reflector-light <SESSION_ID> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> <UDP>
— no twamp-reflector-light <SESSION_ID>
— twamp-reflector-light <SESSION_ID> {enable | disable}
— twamp-reflector-light <SESSION_ID> use-dscp <DSCP>
— no twamp-reflector-light <SESSION_ID> use-dscp
Description
Use this command to configure a TWAMP reflector light session.
Use the no option to delete the TWAMP reflector light session.
696 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

TWAMP Commands
Command Mode
Operands
SESSION_ID The unique ID of the TWAMP reflector light session. The

IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The name of the interface where the TWAMP reflector
light session is assigned, in the following format <R/S/
P.VLANID>.
UDP The UDP port where the TWAMP reflector light session is
assigned. The valid range is 862–49151.
DSCP The value of the DSCP field. The valid range is 0–63.
Options
enable Enables the TWAMP reflector light session.
disable Disables the TWAMP reflector light session.
Note: The TWAMP reflector light session is not deleted

when this option is used.
use-dscp Specifies to configure DSCP.
Note: When DSCP is enabled, the reflector instance

sends the response test packet with the
configured DSCP value. When DSCP is disabled,
the reflector copies the DSCP value from the
received test packet.
By default, DSCP is disabled in a newly created

TWAMP reflector light session.
Examples
Creating a TWAMP reflector light session with session number 1 for interface
1/6/5.6 and UDP port 862:
ML66(config)#twamp-reflector-light 1 1/6/5.6 862
Deleting the TWAMP reflector light session with session number 1:

ML66(config)#no twamp-reflector-light 1
Disabling the TWAMP reflector light session with session number 1:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 697

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config)#twamp-reflector-light 1 disable
Configuring the TWAMP reflector light session with session number 1 to enable
DSCP and use DSCP value 52:
ML66(config)#twamp-reflector-light 1 use-dscp 52
73.2 twamp reset-statistics
Synopsis
twamp reset-statistics
Description
Use this command to reset all TWAMP statistics to zero.
Command Mode
Examples
Resetting all TWAMP statistics to zero:
ML66#twamp reset-statistics
698 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet MAC White List Commands
74 Ethernet MAC White List Commands
81.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet list commands:
— Ethernet MAC White List configuration submode — (config-eth-mac-

whitelist)
Table 81 Ethernet List Commands Overview

ethernet-mac-whitelist specify a Media Access Control (MAC)
address white list
mac create a MAC entry
name set the name of the white list
74.1 ethernet-mac-whitelist
Synopsis
[no] ethernet-mac-whitelist { <LISTNO> | name <NAME> }
Description
Use this command to create a Media Access Control (MAC) white list where MAC
addresses can be added to or removed from the list. The command also changes
to the (config-eth-mac-whitelist) submode. The white list can be associated with
a port using the command mac-whitelist in the (config-bridgeport) submode.
Use the no option to delete the MAC white list identified by either number or
name.
Command Mode
Operands
LISTNO The number of the MAC address list. The value 0

indicates that there is no MAC address white list access
control for the port. The default value is 0.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 699

CLI Descriptions
NAME The name of the MAC address list.
Examples
Creating or configuring Ethernet MAC white list:
ML66(config)#ethernet-mac-whitelist 3
ML66(config-eth-mac-whitelist)#
74.2 mac
Synopsis
[no] mac <MACADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to create a MAC entry with the specified Media Access Control
(MAC) address.
Command Mode
Ethernet MAC White List configuration submode — (config-eth-mac-
whitelist)
Operands
MACADDRESS The specified MAC address, where the format is

<AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF> .
Examples
Creating a MAC entry with F0:A0:C9:14:C8:29:
ML66(config-eth-mac-whitelist)#mac F0:A0:C9:14:C8:29
74.3 name
Synopsis
— name <NAME>
— no name
700 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet MAC White List Commands
Description
Use this command to set the name of the white list.
Use the no option to set the name to the default empty string.
Command Mode
Ethernet MAC White List configuration submode — (config-eth-mac-
whitelist)
Operands
NAME The name of the white list.
Examples
Setting the name of the white list:
ML66(config-eth-mac-whitelist)#name MacListName
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 701

CLI Descriptions
75 ETU 1002 Commands: Equipment
82.
Note: 1x10G can only be used in MINI-LINK 6691, MINI-LINK 6692, MINI-
LINK 6693, and MINI-LINK 6694.
The following command mode is applicable for the ETU 1002 equipment
commands:
Table 82 ETU 1002 Equipment Commands Overview

board configure the board
— show board
884.
75.1 board
Synopsis
board <R/S> profile <ID>
Description
Use this command to select the board profile.
Note: 1x10G can only be used in MINI-LINK 6691, MINI-LINK 6692, MINI-
LINK 6693, and MINI-LINK 6694.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S The Rack and Slot values of the board to configure, in the
following format: <Rack/Slot>.
702 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ETU 1002 Commands: Equipment
ID The ID of the board profile. The valid values are the

following:
— 1 — 4x1G
— 2 — 1x10G
Options
profile Configures the board profile.
Examples
Selecting board profile 1x10G for board 1/2:
ML66(config)#board 1/2 profile 2
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 703

CLI Descriptions
76 LTU 1002 Commands: Equipment
83.
Note: These commands are only valid for ETSI.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 equipment
commands:
— Controller Protection Equipment submode — (controller-xfprotection-

eq)
Table 83 LTU 1002 Equipment Commands Overview

activeunit set active unit
board configure the board
controller xfprotection-equipment change to the (controller-xfprotection-
eq) submode
mode set protection mode
trapenable enable or disable notifications
— show board
884.
76.1 activeunit
Synopsis
— activeunit <INDEX>
— no activeunit
Description
Use this command to set the active unit.
Use the no option to reset the setting to the default value 1.
704 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: Equipment
Note: If protection mode is automatic, the new active unit is rejected if the unit
is down.
Command Mode
Controller Protection Equipment submode — (controller-xfprotection-eq)
Operands
INDEX 1 — Low slot
2 — High slot
Examples
Setting active unit to low slot:
ML66(controller-xfprotection-eq)#activeunit 1
76.2 board
Synopsis
board <R/S> [profile <ID>]
Description
Use this command to configure the board.
Use this command with the profile option to select the board profile. By default,
when LTU 1002 is inserted, it is first started with the PDH and SDH profile.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S The Rack and Slot values of the board to configure, in the
following format: <Rack/Slot>.
ID The ID of the board profile. The valid values are the

following:
— 1 — PDH and SDH
— 2 — PDH and CES
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 705

CLI Descriptions
— 3 — CES only
— 4 — SDH48 and CES32
— 5 — SDH63 and CES16
— 6 — PDH and SDH48 and CES16
Options
profile Configures the board profile.
Examples
Selecting board profile PDH and CES for board 1/11:
ML66(config)#board 1/11 profile 2
76.3 controller xfprotection-equipment
Synopsis
controller xfprotection-equipment <RS>
Description
Use this command to change to the (controller-xfprotection-eq) submode for the
specified Rack/Slot.
Command Mode
Operands
RS The Rack and Slot value of the interface where the

format is <Rack/Slot> .
Examples
Changing to the (controller-xfprotection-eq) submode for 1/1:
ML66(config)#controller xfprotection-equipment 1/1
ML66(controller-xfprotection-eq)#
76.4 mode
706 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: Equipment
Synopsis
— mode <MODE>
— no mode
Description
Use this command to set the protection mode in the (controller-xfprotection-eq)
submode.
Note: The protection mode affects both equipment and line protection.
Use the no option to reset the setting to the default value automatic.
Command Mode
Operands
MODE 1 — Automatic
2 — Manual
Examples
Setting protection mode to automatic:
ML66(controller-xfprotection-eq)#mode 1
76.5 trapenable
Synopsis
[no] trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable notifications.
Use the no option to disable notifications.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 707

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Enabling notifications:
ML66(controller-xfprotection-eq)#trapenable
708 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: SDH STM-1
77 LTU 1002 Commands: SDH STM-1
84.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 SDH STM-1
commands:
— Controller SDH STM-1 submode — (controller-xfsdhstm1)
Table 84 LTU 1002 SDH STM-1 Commands Overview

admstatus configure status of Synchronous
Transport Module level 1 (STM-1)
board
controller sdhstm1porttable change to the (controller-xfsdhstm1)
submode
77.1 admstatus
Synopsis
— admstatus <STATUS>
— no admstatus
Description
Use this command to configure the status of the LTU 1002 plug-in unit.
Use the no option to reset the setting to the default value Not configured.
Command Mode
Controller SDH STM-1 submode — (controller-xfsdhstm1)
Operands
STATUS The following modes are available for LTU 1002:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 709

CLI Descriptions
— 1 — Not configured
In this mode, the LTU 1002 is not configured for

traffic. The RS and MS interfaces are available and
can be used for DCC traffic. The MS interface can also
be used as a sync source.
— 2 — Standalone
Configures the LTU 1002 for traffic. In addition to the

RS and MS interface, one VC-4, 63 VC-12, and 63 E1
interfaces are created. The Signal Label for VC-4 is
TUG-structure and for VC-12 it is asynchronous
mapping.
— 3 — MSP 1+1
Configures the LTU 1002 for traffic with equipment

and line protection. Creates protected interfaces, such
as 1 MSP, 1 VC-4, 63 VC-12, and 63 E1. The DCC and
Sync interfaces are also protected. Signal Label for
VC-4 is TUG-structure and for VC-12 it is
asynchronous mapping.
Note: This value can only be configured for the low

slot plug-in unit in a protection pair. The
high slot plug-in unit must be in Not
configured mode.
Examples
Configuring standalone status for the LTU 1002 plug-in unit:
ML66(controller-xfsdhstm1)#admstatus 2
77.2 controller sdhstm1porttable
Synopsis
controller sdhstm1porttable <RSP>
Description
Use this command to change to the (controller-xfsdhstm1) submode for the
specified <Rack/Slot/Port> .
Command Mode
710 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: SDH STM-1
Operands
format is <Rack/Slot/Port> .
Examples
Changing to the (controller-xfsdhstm1) submode for 1/1/1:
ML66(config)#controller sdhstm1porttable 1/1/1
ML66(controller-xfsdhstm1)#
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 711

CLI Descriptions
78 LTU 1002 Commands: Line
85.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 line commands:
— Controller Protection Line submode — (controller-xfprotection-line)
Table 85 LTU 1002 Line Commands Overview

controller xfprotection-line change to the (controller-xfprotection-
line) submode
working-rx set active line
78.1 controller xfprotection-line
Synopsis
controller xfprotection-line <RSP>
Description
Use this command to change to the (controller-xfprotection-line) submode for
the specified Rack/Slot/Plot.
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
Changing to the (controller-xfprotection-line) submode for 1/1/1:
712 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: Line
ML66(config)#controller xfprotection-line 1/1/1

ML66(controller-xfprotection-line)#
78.2 working-rx
Synopsis
— working-rx <WORKING_RX>
— no working-rx
Description
Use this command to set the active line to 1 or 2.
Use the no option to reset the setting to the default value 1.
Note: If protection mode is automatic, the new active line is rejected if the
quality of it is less than the quality of the current line.
Command Mode
Controller Protection Line submode — (controller-xfprotection-line)
Operands
WORKING_RX 1 — Line on the low slot board
2 — Line on the high slot board
Examples
Setting the active unit to 1:
ML66(controller-xfprotection-line)#working-rx 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 713

CLI Descriptions
79 LTU 1002 Commands: RS
86.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 RS commands:
— RS submode — (controller-rsttp)
Table 86 LTU 1002 RS Commands Overview

am-severity-lof set the severity of the Loss of Frame
(LOF) alarm
am-severity-tim set the severity of the Trace Identifier
Mismatch (TIM) alarm
am-severity-uastne set the severity of the Unavailable
State alarm
controller rsttp change to the (controller-rsttp)
submode
enable-pm-point enable Performance Monitoring (PM)
on the RS interface
if-link-trap-enabled enable notifications for the RS
interface
name set the name of the RS interface
reset-cur-15min-ne-regs reset the current 15 minute
performance data of the near end
reset-cur-24h-ne-regs reset the current 24 hour performance
data of the near end
trail-trace-enabled enable the controlling of tail trace ID
supervision
trail-trace-expected set the expected identifier of the
received payload
trail-trace-send set the identifier of the transmitted
payload
79.1 am-severity-lof
714 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: RS
Synopsis
— am-severity-lof <AM_SEVERITY_LOF>
— no am-severity-lof
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Loss of Frame (LOF) alarm.
Command Mode
RS submode — (controller-rsttp)
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_LOF
Severity of the LOS failure. The following values are
available:
— 1 — undetermined
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the LOS alarm:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#am-severity-lof 5
79.2 am-severity-tim
Synopsis
— am-severity-tim <AM_SEVERITY_TIM>
— no am-severity-tim
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 715

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_TIM
Severity of the TIM failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the TIM alarm:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#am-severity-tim 4
79.3 am-severity-uastne
Synopsis
— am-severity-uastne <AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE>
— no am-severity-uastne
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Unavailable State alarm.
716 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE
Severity of the Unavailable State failure. The following
values are available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Unavailable State alarm:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#am-severity-uastne 5
79.4 controller rsttp
Synopsis
controller rsttp <R/S/Index>
Description
Use this command to configure an RS interface. The command also changes to
the (controller-rsttp) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S/Index The Rack, Slot, and Index value of the RS interface where
the format is R/S/Index.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 717

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Configuring the RS interface and changing to the (controller-rsttp) submode:
ML66(config)#controller rsttp 1/3/1
ML66(controller-rsttp)#
79.5 enable-pm-point
Synopsis
— enable-pm-point <ENABLE_PERF_MON_POINT>
— no enable-pm-point
Description
Use this command to enable Performance Monitoring (PM) on the RS interface.
Use the no option to disable PM on the RS interface.
Command Mode
Operands
ENABLE_PERF_MON_POINT
1 — Enables PM on the RS interface.
2 — Disables PM on the RS interface.
Examples
Enabling PM on the RS interface:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#enable-pm-point 1
79.6 if-link-trap-enabled
Synopsis
— if-link-trap-enabled <TRAP_ENABLED>
— no if-link-trap-enabled
718 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to enable notifications for the RS interface.
Use the no option to disable notifications for the RS interface.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAP_ENABLED 1 — Enables notifications for the RS interface.
2 — Disables notifications for the RS interface.
Examples
Enabling notifications for the RS interface:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#if-link-trap-enabled 1
79.7 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the RS interface.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the RS interface.
Examples
Setting the name of the RS interface to 'RSInterface':
ML66(controller-rsttp)#name RSInterface
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 719

CLI Descriptions
79.8 reset-cur-15min-ne-regs
Synopsis
reset-cur-15min-ne-regs <RESET_CUR_15MIN_NE_REGS>
Description
Use this command to reset the current 15 minute performance data of the near
end.
Command Mode
Operands
RESET_CUR_15MIN_NE_REGS
1 — Resets the current 15 minute performance data of
the near end.
Examples
Resetting the current 15 minute performance data of the near end:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 1
79.9 reset-cur-24h-ne-regs
Synopsis
reset-cur-24h-ne-regs <RESET_CUR_24H_NE_REGS>
Description
Use this command to reset the current 24 hour performance data of the near end.
Command Mode
Operands
RESET_CUR_24H_NE_REGS
720 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

1 — Resets the current 24 hour performance data of the

near end.
Examples
Resetting the current 24 hour performance data of the near end:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 1
79.10 trail-trace-enabled
Synopsis
— trail-trace-enabled <TRAIL_TRACE_ENABLED>
— no trail-trace-enabled
Description
Use this command to enable the controlling of trail trace ID supervision.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_ENABLED
1 — Enables trail trace.
2 — Disables trail trace.
Examples
Enabling the controlling of trail trace ID supervision:
ML66(controller-rsttp)#trail-trace-enabled 1
79.11 trail-trace-expected
Synopsis
— trail-trace-expected <TRAIL_TRACE_EXPECTED>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 721

CLI Descriptions
— no trail-trace-expected
Description
Use this command to set the expected identifier of the received payload.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_EXPECTED
The name of the expected identifier.
Examples
Setting the expected identifier of the received payload to 'NoTraceAssigned':
ML66(controller-rsttp)#trail-trace-expected NoTraceAssigned
79.12 trail-trace-send
Synopsis
— trail-trace-send <TRAIL_TRACE_SEND>
— no trail-trace-send
Description
Use this command to set the identifier of the transmitted payload.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_SEND
The name of the identifier.
722 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the identifier of the transmitted payload to 'NoTraceAssigned':
ML66(controller-rsttp)#trail-trace-send NoTraceAssigned
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 723

CLI Descriptions
80 LTU 1002 Commands: MS
87.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 MS commands:
— MS submode — (controller-msttp)
Table 87 LTU 1002 MS Commands Overview

am-severity-ais set the severity of the Multiplex
Section Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
alarm
am-severity-deg set the severity of the Degraded alarm
am-severity-exc set the severity of the Excessive Errors
alarm
am-severity-k2mis set the severity of the K2 Mismatch
alarm
am-severity-rdi set the severity of the Remote Defect
Indication (RDI) alarm
am-severity-uastfe set the severity of the Unavailable
State Far End alarm
State alarm
controller msttp change to the (controller-msttp)
submode
degm set the monitoring period, Degraded
Monitoring (DEGM), used to declare
Degraded Signal (DEG
degthr set the Degraded Threshold (DEGTHR)
value used to detect a degraded defect
at MS
for the MS interface
if-link-trap-enabled enable notifications for the MS
interface
724 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: MS
lineloop set the line loop state on the MS

interface
name set the name of the MS interface
rei enable or disable Multiplex Section
Remote Error Indication (MS-REI)
reset-cur-15min-fe-regs reset the current 15 minute
performance data of the far end
reset-cur-24h-fe-regs reset the current 24 hour performance
data of the far end
squelch enable clock squelching for the
interface
80.1 am-severity-ais
Synopsis
— am-severity-ais <AM_SEVERITY_AIS>
— no am-severity-ais
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Multiplex Section Alarm Indication
Signal (AIS) alarm.
Command Mode
MS submode — (controller-msttp)
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_AIS
Severity of the Multiplex Section AIS failure. The
following values are available:
— 2 — warning
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 725

CLI Descriptions
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Multiplex Section AIS alarm:
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-ais 3
80.2 am-severity-deg
Synopsis
— am-severity-deg <AM_SEVERITY_DEG>
— no am-severity-deg
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Degraded alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_DEG
Severity of the Degraded failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
726 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the severity of the Degraded alarm:
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-deg 3
80.3 am-severity-exc
Synopsis
— am-severity-exc <AM_SEVERITY_EXC>
— no am-severity-exc
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Excessive Errors alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_EXC
Severity of the Excessive Errors failure. The following
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Excessive Errors alarm:
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-exc 2
80.4 am-severity-k2mis
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 727

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
am-severity-k2mis <AM_SEVERITY_K2MIS>
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the K2 Mismatch alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_K2MIS
Severity of the K2 Mismatch failure. The following values
are available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the K2 Mismatch alarm:
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-k2mis 3
80.5 am-severity-rdi
Synopsis
— am-severity-rdi <AM_SEVERITY_RDI>
— no am-severity-rdi
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Remote Defect Indication (RDI)
alarm.
728 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_RDI
Severity of the RDI failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the RDI alarm:
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-rdi 4
80.6 am-severity-uastfe
Synopsis
— am-severity-uastfe <AM_SEVERITY_UASTFE>
— no am-severity-uastfe
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Unavailable State Far End alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTFE
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 729

CLI Descriptions
Severity of the Unavailable State Far End failure. The

— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Unavailable State Far End alarm:
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-uastfe 5
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
730 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-msttp)#am-severity-uastne 5
80.8 controller msttp
Synopsis
controller msttp <R/S/Index>
Description
Use this command to configure an MS interface. The command also changes to
the (controller-msttp) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S/Index The Rack, Slot, and Index value of the MS interface

where the format is R/S/Index.
Examples
Configuring the MS interface and changing to the (controller-msttp) submode:
ML66(config)#controller msttp 1/3/1
ML66(controller-msttp)#
80.9 degm
Synopsis
degm <VALUE>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 731

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the monitoring period, Degraded Monitoring (DEGM),
used to declare Degraded Signal (DEG).
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The monitoring period in seconds. The valid range is 2–

Examples
Setting the monitoring period to 4 seconds:
ML66(controller-msttp)#degm 4
80.10 degthr
Synopsis
degthr <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to set the Degraded Threshold (DEGTHR) value used to detect
a degraded defect at MS.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The DEGTHR value. The valid range is 1–100. The

Examples
Setting the DEGTHR value to 50:
ML66(controller-msttp)#degthr 50
732 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable Performance Monitoring (PM) on the MS interface.
Use the no option to disable PM on the MS interface.
Command Mode
Operands
1 — Enables PM on the MS interface.
2 — Disables PM on the MS interface.
Examples
Enabling PM on the MS interface:
ML66(controller-msttp)#enable-pm-point 1
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable notifications for the MS interface.
Use the no option to disable notifications for the MS interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 733

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
TRAP_ENABLED 1 — Enables notifications for the MS interface.
2 — Enables notifications for the MS interface.
Examples
Enabling notifications for the MS interface:
ML66(controller-msttp)#if-link-trap-enabled 1
80.13 lineloop
Synopsis
lineloop <LINE>
Description
Use this command to set the line loop state on the MS interface.
Command Mode
Operands
LINE 0 — No loop.
1 — Line loop.
2 — Local loop.
3 — Line + local loop.
Examples
Setting the line loop state on the MS interface to line loop:
ML66(controller-msttp)#lineloop 1
734 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

80.14 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the MS interface.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the MS interface.
Examples
Setting the name of the MS interface to 'MSInterface':
ML66(controller-msttp)#name MSInterface
80.15 rei
Synopsis
rei <REI_VALUE>
Description
Use this command to enable or disable Performance Monitoring (PM) for
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS-REI).
Command Mode
Operands
REI_VALUE 1 — Enables PM for MS-REI.
2 — Disables PM for MS-REI.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 735

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Enabling PM for MS-REI:
ML66(controller-msttp)#rei 1
80.16 reset-cur-15min-fe-regs
Synopsis
reset-cur-15min-fe-regs <RESET_CUR_15MIN_FE_REGS>
Description
Use this command to reset the current 15 minute performance data of the far
end.
Command Mode
Operands
RESET_CUR_15MIN_FE_REGS
the far end.
Examples
Resetting the current 15 minute performance data of the far end:
ML66(controller-msttp)#reset-cur-15min-fe-regs 1
Synopsis
Description
end.
736 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
the near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-msttp)#reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 1
80.18 reset-cur-24h-fe-regs
Synopsis
reset-cur-24h-fe-regs <RESET_CUR_24H_FE_REGS>
Description
Use this command to reset the current 24 hour performance data of the far end.
Command Mode
Operands
RESET_CUR_24H_FE_REGS
far end.
Examples
Resetting the current 24 hour performance data of the far end:
ML66(controller-msttp)#reset-cur-24h-fe-regs 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 737

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-msttp)#reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 1
80.20 squelch
Synopsis
— squelch <SQUELCH>
— no squelch
Description
Use this command to enable SDH STM clock squelch for the interface.
Use the no option to disable SDH STM clock squelch.
Command Mode
Operands
SQUELCH 1 — Enables clock squelch.
2 — Disables clock squelch.
738 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Enabling SDH STM clock squelch:
ML66(controller-msttp)#squelch 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 739

CLI Descriptions
81 LTU 1002 Commands: MSP
88.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 MSP commands:
— MSP submode — (controller-msp)
Table 88 LTU 1002 MSP Commands Overview

am-severity-ais set the severity of the Multiplex
Section Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
alarm
alarm
am-severity-k2mis set the severity of the K2 Mismatch
alarm
State Far End alarm
State alarm
controller msp change to the (controller-msp)
submode
on the MSP interface
if-link-trap-enabled enable notifications for the MSP
interface
name set the name of the MSP interface
data of the far end
740 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: MSP

Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Multiplex Section Alarm Indication
Signal (AIS) alarm.
Command Mode
MSP submode — (controller-msp)
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_AIS
Severity of the Multiplex Section AIS failure. The
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Multiplex Section AIS alarm:
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-ais 3
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 741

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_DEG
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-deg 3
Synopsis
Description
742 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_EXC
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-exc 2
81.4 am-severity-k2mis
Synopsis
am-severity-k2mis <AM_SEVERITY_K2MIS>
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the K2 Mismatch alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_K2MIS
Severity of the K2 Mismatch failure. The following values
are available:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 743

CLI Descriptions
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the K2 Mismatch alarm:
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-k2mis 3
Synopsis
Description
alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_RDI
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
744 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-rdi 4
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTFE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-uastfe 5
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 745

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#am-severity-uastne 5
81.8 controller msp
Synopsis
controller msp <R/S/Index>
746 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to configure an MSP interface. The command also changes to
the (controller-msp) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S/Index The Rack, Slot, and Index value of the MSP interface
Examples
Configuring the MSP interface and changing to the (controller-msp) submode:
ML66(config)#controller msp 1/3/1
ML66(controller-msp)#
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable Performance Monitoring (PM) on the MSP interface.
Use the no option to disable PM on the MSP interface.
Command Mode
Operands
1 — Enables PM on the MSP interface.
2 — Disables PM on the MSP interface.
Examples
Enabling PM on the MSP interface:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 747

CLI Descriptions
ML66(controller-msp)#enable-pm-point 1
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable notifications for the MSP interface.
Use the no option to disable notifications for the MSP interface.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAP_ENABLED 1 — Enables notifications for the MSP interface.
2 — Disables notifications for the MSP interface.
Examples
Enabling notifications for the MSP interface:
ML66(controller-msp)#if-link-trap-enabled 1
81.11 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the MSP interface.
Command Mode
748 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
NAME The name of the MSP interface.
Examples
Setting the name of the MSP interface to 'MSPInterface':
ML66(controller-msp)#name MSPInterface
Synopsis
Description
end.
Command Mode
Operands
the far end.
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#reset-cur-15min-fe-regs 1
Synopsis
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 749

CLI Descriptions
Description
end.
Command Mode
Operands
the near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 1
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
far end.
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#reset-cur-24h-fe-regs 1
750 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-msp)#reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 751

CLI Descriptions
82 LTU 1002 Commands: AU-4 and VC-4
89.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 AU-4 and VC-4
commands:
— AU-4 and VC-4 submode — (controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)
Table 89 LTU 1002 AU-4 and VC-4 Commands Overview

controller au4ctp-vc4ttp configure an AU-4 or a VC-4 interface
Degraded Signal (DEG)
at VC-4
if-link-trap-enabled enable notifications for the VC-4
interface
name set the name of the VC-4 interface
trail-trace-enabled enable the controlling of trail trace ID
supervision
received payload
payload
vc4-am-severity-ais set the severity of the AU Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS) alarm
vc4-am-severity-deg set the severity of the Degraded alarm
vc4-am-severity-exc set the severity of the Excessive Errors
alarm
vc4-am-severity-lom set the severity of the Loss of
Multiframe (LOM) alarm
vc4-am-severity-lop set the severity of the AU Loss of
Pointer (LOP) alarm
752 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: AU-4 and VC-4
vc4-am-severity-plm set the severity of the Payload

Mismatch (PLM) alarm
vc4-am-severity-rdi set the severity of the Remote Defect
vc4-am-severity-tim set the severity of the VC-4 Trace
Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm
vc4-am-severity-uastfe set the severity of the Unavailable
State Far End alarm
vc4-am-severity-uastne set the severity of the Unavailable
State alarm
vc4-am-severity-uneq set the severity of the Unequipped
Indication alarm
vc4-enable-pm-point enable Performance Monitoring (PM)
on the VC-4 interface
vc4-reset-cur-15min-fe-regs reset the current 15 minute
vc4-reset-cur-15min-ne-regs reset the current 15 minute
vc4-reset-cur-24h-fe-regs reset the current 24 hour performance
data of the far end
vc4-reset-cur-24h-ne-regs reset the current 24 hour performance
82.1 controller au4ctp-vc4ttp
Synopsis
controller au4ctp-vc4ttp <R/S/Index>
Description
Use this command to configure an AU-4 or a VC-4 interface. The command also
changes to the (controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp) submode.
Command Mode
Operands
R/S/Index The Rack, Slot, and Index value of the AU-4 or the VC-4
interface where the format is R/S/Index.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 753

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Configuring the VC-4 interface and changing to the (controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)
submode:
ML66(config)#controller au4ctp-vc4ttp 1/3/5
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#
82.2 degm
Synopsis
degm <VALUE>
Description
Command Mode
AU-4 and VC-4 submode — (controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)
Operands

Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#degm 4
82.3 degthr
Synopsis
degthr <VALUE>
Description
a degraded defect at VC-4.
754 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands

Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#degthr 50
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable notifications for the VC-4 interface.
Use the no option to disable notifications for the VC-4 interface.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAP_ENABLED 1 — Enables notifications for the VC-4 interface.
2 — Disables notifications for the VC-4 interface.
Examples
Enabling notifications for the VC-4 interface:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#if-link-trap-enabled 1
82.5 name
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 755

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
name <NAME>
Description
Use this command to set the name of the VC-4 interface.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the VC-4 interface.
Examples
Setting the name of the VC-4 interface to 'VC4Interface':
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#name VC4Interface
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_ENABLED
756 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#trail-trace-enabled 1
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#trail-trace-expected NoTraceAssigned
Synopsis
Description
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 757

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_SEND
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#trail-trace-send NoTraceAssigned
82.9 vc4-am-severity-ais
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-ais <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_AIS>
— no vc4-am-severity-ais
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the AU Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_AIS
Severity of the AU AIS failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
758 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the AU AIS alarm:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-ais 3
82.10 vc4-am-severity-deg
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-deg <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_DEG>
— no vc4-am-severity-deg
Description
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_DEG
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 759

CLI Descriptions
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-deg 3
82.11 vc4-am-severity-exc
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-exc <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_EXC>
— no vc4-am-severity-exc
Description
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_EXC
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-exc 2
82.12 vc4-am-severity-lom
760 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-lom <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_LOM>
— no vc4-am-severity-lom
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Loss of Multiframe (LOM) alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_LOM
Severity of the LOM failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the LOM alarm:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-am-severity-lom 4
82.13 vc4-am-severity-lop
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-lop <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_LOP>
— no vc4-am-severity-lop
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the AU Loss of Pointer (LOP) alarm.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 761

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_LOP
Severity of the AU LOP failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the AU LOP alarm:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-am-severity-lop 4
82.14 vc4-am-severity-plm
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-plm <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_PLM>
— no vc4-am-severity-plm
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Payload Mismatch (PLM) alarm.
Command Mode
762 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_PLM
Severity of the PLM failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the PLM alarm:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-am-severity-plm 4
82.15 vc4-am-severity-rdi
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-rdi <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_RDI>
— no vc4-am-severity-rdi
Description
alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_RDI
available:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 763

CLI Descriptions
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-rdi 4
82.16 vc4-am-severity-tim
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-tim <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_TIM>
— no vc4-am-severity-tim
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the VC-4 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_TIM
Severity of the VC-4 TIM failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
764 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the severity of the VC-4 TIM alarm:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-tim 4
82.17 vc4-am-severity-uastfe
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-uastfe <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_UASTFE>
— no vc4-am-severity-uastfe
Description
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_UASTFE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-uastfe 5
82.18 vc4-am-severity-uastne
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 765

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-uastne <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE>
— no vc4-am-severity-uastne
Description
Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#am-severity-uastne 5
82.19 vc4-am-severity-uneq
Synopsis
— vc4-am-severity-uneq <VC4_AM_SEVERITY_UNEQ>
— no vc4-am-severity-uneq
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Unequipped Indication alarm.
766 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
VC4_AM_SEVERITY_UNEQ
Severity of the Unequipped Indication failure. The
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Unequipped Indication alarm:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-am-severity-uneq 4
82.20 vc4-enable-pm-point
Synopsis
— vc4-enable-pm-point <ENABLE_PERF_MON_POINT>
— no vc4-enable-pm-point
Description
Use this command to enable Performance Monitoring (PM) on the VC-4 interface.
Use the no option to disable PM on the VC-4 interface.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 767

CLI Descriptions
Operands
1 — Enables PM on the VC-4 interface.
2 — Disables PM on the VC-4 interface.
Examples
Enabling PM on the VC-4 interface:
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-enable-pm-point 1
82.21 vc4-reset-cur-15min-fe-regs
Synopsis
vc4-reset-cur-15min-fe-regs <RESET_CUR_15MIN_FE_REGS>
Description
end.
Command Mode
Operands
the far end.
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-reset-cur-15min-fe-regs 1
82.22 vc4-reset-cur-15min-ne-regs
Synopsis
vc4-reset-cur-15min-ne-regs <RESET_CUR_15MIN_NE_REGS>
768 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
end.
Command Mode
Operands
the near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 1
82.23 vc4-reset-cur-24h-fe-regs
Synopsis
vc4-reset-cur-24h-fe-regs <RESET_CUR_24H_FE_REGS>
Description
Command Mode
Operands
far end.
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-reset-cur-24h-fe-regs 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 769

CLI Descriptions
82.24 vc4-reset-cur-24h-ne-regs
Synopsis
vc4-reset-cur-24h-ne-regs <RESET_CUR_24H_NE_REGS>
Description
Command Mode
Operands
near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-au4ctp-vc4ttp)#vc4-reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 1
770 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

LTU 1002 Commands: VC-12
83 LTU 1002 Commands: VC-12
90.
The following command modes are applicable for the LTU 1002 VC-12
commands:
— VC-12 submode — (controller-vc12ttp)
Table 90 LTU 1002 VC-12 Commands Overview

am-severity-ais set the severity of the TU Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS) alarm
alarm
am-severity-lom set the severity of the Loss of
Multiframe (LOM) alarm
am-severity-lop set the severity of the TU Loss of
Pointer (LOP) alarm
am-severity-plm set the severity of the Payload
Mismatch (PLM) alarm
am-severity-tim set the severity of the VC-12 Trace
Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm
State Far End alarm
State alarm
am-severity-uneq set the severity of the Unequipped
Indication alarm
controller vc12ttp change to the (controller-vc12ttp)
submode
Degraded Signal (DEG)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 771

CLI Descriptions

at VC-12
on the VC-12 interface
if-link-trap-enabled enable notifications for the VC-12
interface
name set the name of the VC-12 interface
data of the far end
trail-trace-enabled enable the controlling of trail trace ID
supervision
received payload
payload
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the TU Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
alarm.
Command Mode
VC-12 submode — (controller-vc12ttp)
772 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
AM_SEVERITY_AIS
Severity of the TU AIS failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the TU AIS alarm:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-ais 3
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_DEG
available:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 773

CLI Descriptions
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-deg 3
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_EXC
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
774 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-exc 2
83.4 am-severity-lom
Synopsis
— am-severity-lom <AM_SEVERITY_LOM>
— no am-severity-lom
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Loss of Multiframe (LOM) alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_LOM
Severity of the LOM failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the LOM alarm:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#vc4-am-severity-lom 4
83.5 am-severity-lop
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 775

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— am-severity-lop <AM_SEVERITY_LOP>
— no am-severity-lop
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the TU Loss of Pointer (LOP) alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_LOP
Severity of the TU LOP failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the TU LOP alarm:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#vc4-am-severity-lop 4
83.6 am-severity-plm
Synopsis
— am-severity-plm <AM_SEVERITY_PLM>
— no am-severity-plm
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Payload Mismatch (PLM) alarm.
776 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_PLM
Severity of the PLM failure. The following values are
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the PLM alarm:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#vc4-am-severity-plm 4
Synopsis
Description
alarm.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 777

CLI Descriptions
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_RDI
available:
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-rdi 4
83.8 am-severity-tim
Synopsis
— am-severity-tim <AM_SEVERITY_TIM>
— no am-severity-tim
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the VC-12 Trace Identifier Mismatch
(TIM) alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_TIM
Severity of the VC-12 TIM failure. The following values
are available:
778 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the VC-12 TIM alarm:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-tim 4
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTFE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 779

CLI Descriptions
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-uastfe 5
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UASTNE
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#am-severity-uastne 5
83.11 am-severity-uneq
780 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— am-severity-uneq <AM_SEVERITY_UNEQ>
— no am-severity-uneq
Description
Use this command to set the severity of the Unequipped Indication alarm.
Command Mode
Operands
AM_SEVERITY_UNEQ
Severity of the Unequipped Indication failure. The
— 2 — warning
— 3 — minor
— 4 — major
— 5 — critical
Examples
Setting the severity of the Unequipped Indication alarm:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#vc4-am-severity-uneq 4
83.12 controller vc12ttp
Synopsis
controller vc12ttp <R/S/Index>
Description
Use this command to configure a VC-12 interface. The command also changes to
the (controller-vc12ttp) submode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 781

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
R/S/Index The Rack, Slot, and Index value of the VC-12 interface
Examples
Configuring the VC-12 interface and changing to the (controller-vc12ttp)
submode:
ML66(config)#controller vc12ttp 1/3/1
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#
83.13 degm
Synopsis
degm <VALUE>
Description
Command Mode
Operands

Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#degm 4
83.14 degthr
782 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
degthr <VALUE>
Description
a degraded defect at VC-12.
Command Mode
Operands

Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#degthr 50
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable Performance Monitoring (PM) on the VC-12
interface.
Use the no option to disable PM on the VC-12 interface.
Command Mode
Operands
1 — Enables PM on the VC-12 interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 783

CLI Descriptions
2 — Disables PM on the VC-12 interface.
Examples
Enabling PM on the VC-12 interface:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#enable-pm-point 1
Synopsis
Description
Use this command to enable notifications for the VC-12 interface.
Use the no option to disable notifications for the VC-12 interface.
Command Mode
Operands
TRAP_ENABLED 1 — Enables notifications for the VC-12 interface.
2 — Disables notifications for the VC-12 interface.
Examples
Enabling notifications for the VC-12 interface:
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#if-link-trap-enabled1 1
83.17 name
Synopsis
name <NAME>
784 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to set the name of the VC-12 interface.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the VC-12 interface.
Examples
Setting the name of the VC-12 interface to 'VC12Interface':
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#name VC12Interface
Synopsis
Description
end.
Command Mode
Operands
the far end.
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#reset-cur-15min-fe-regs 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 785

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
Description
end.
Command Mode
Operands
the near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#reset-cur-15min-ne-regs 1
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
far end.
Examples
786 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#reset-cur-24h-fe-regs 1
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
near end.
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#reset-cur-24h-ne-regs 1/1/5
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 787

CLI Descriptions
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_ENABLED
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#trail-trace-enabled 1
Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#trail-trace-expected NoTraceAssigned
788 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
Description
Command Mode
Operands
TRAIL_TRACE_SEND
Examples
ML66(controller-vc12ttp)#trail-trace-send NoTraceAssigned
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 789

CLI Descriptions
84 Synchronization Commands
91.
The following command modes are applicable for the synchronizations

commands:
— Synch Nominee configuration submode — (config-synch-nominee)
Table 91 Synchronization Commands Overview

assigned-qlevel assign quality level to a nominee
holdoff-time set holdoff time
lockout exclude nominee from synchronization
selection
network-synch enable enable network synchronization
network-synch forced-switch perform forced switch to the selected
synchronization source
network-synch node-clock enable fixed E1/DS1 as 2 MHz clock
input or output
network-synch nominee enable or disable the selected interface
network-synch selection-mode set selection mode
network-synch squelch enable squelching
priority set the priority for the synchronization
source
signal-degrade enable the use of signal degrade
wait-to-restore-time set the wait to restore time
84.1 assigned-qlevel
Synopsis
assigned-qlevel <QUALITYLEVEL>
Description
Use this command to assign a quality level to the nominee.
790 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synchronization Commands
Command Mode
Synch Nominee configuration submode — (config-synch-nominee)
Operands
QUALITYLEVEL Selects the level of the quality.
For ETSI, the following values are available:
— 1 — PRC
— 2 — SSU-A
— 3 — SSU-B
— 4 — SEC
— 5 — NOT assigned
For ANSI, the following values are available:
— 5 — NOT assigned
— 6 — PRS
— 7 — STU
— 8 — ST2
— 9 — TNC
— 10 — ST3E
— 11 — STE
— 12 — SMC
Default value is SSU-B for ETSI.
Examples
For ETSI, assigning SSU-B quality level to the nominee:
ML66(config-synch-nominee)#assigned-qlevel 3
For ANSI, assigning PRS quality level to the nominee:

ML66(config-synch-nominee)#assigned-qlevel 6
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 791

CLI Descriptions
84.2 holdoff-time
Synopsis
— holdoff-time <TIME-IN-MS>
— no holdoff-time
Description
Use this command to set holdoff time in milliseconds.
Use the no option to set back the default value.
Command Mode
Operands
TIME-IN-MS The holdoff time value. The default value is 500 ms.
Examples
Setting holdoff time to 500 ms:
ML66(config-synch-nominee)#holdoff-time 500
84.3 lockout
Synopsis
[no] lockout
Description
Use this command to exclude the nominated interface from the synchronization
source selection process.
Use the no option to remove the lockout.
Command Mode
792 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Excluding the nominee from the synchronization selection:
ML66(config-synch-nominee)#lockout
84.4 network-synch enable
Synopsis
[no] network-synch enable
Description
Use this command to enable network synchronization.
Use the no option to disable network synchronization.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling network synchronization:
ML66(config)#network-synch enable
84.5 network-synch forced-switch
Synopsis
— network-synch forced-switch { <IFNAME> | holdover }
— no network-synch forced-switch
Description
Use this command to perform a forced switch to the selected synchronization
source.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 793

CLI Descriptions
Operands
IFNAME The synchronization source interface.
Options
holdover Execute a forced switch to holdover.
Examples
Performing forced switch to holdover:
ML66(config)#network-synch forced-switch holdover
84.6 network-synch node-clock
Synopsis
[no] network-synch node-clock
Description
Use this command to enable the fixed E1/DS1 as 2 MHz clock input or output
instead of being an E1/DS1.
Note: The E1/DS1 can only be enabled as clock input or output if it is not used
by any other services.
Use the no option to disable the fixed E1/DS1 as 2 MHz clock input or output.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the fixed E1/DS1 as 2 MHz clock input:
ML66(config)#network-synch node-clock
84.7 network-synch nominee
Synopsis
[no] network-synch nominee <IFNAME>
794 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to enable the selected interface as synchronization nominee.
The command also changes to the (config-synch-nominee) submode.
Use the no option to disable the selected interface.
Command Mode
Operands
IFNAME Name of the selected interface.
Note: The operand must be surrounded by " if it

contains space characters.
Examples
Enabling the selected interface as synchronization nominee:
ML66(config)#network-synch nominee 1/6/1
84.8 network-synch selection-mode
Synopsis
— network-synch selection-mode { ql-enabled | ql-disabled }
— no network-synch selection-mode
Description
Use this command to set selection mode.
Use the no option to reset to the default setting of QL-Enabled.
Command Mode
Options
ql-enabled Sets selection mode to QL-Enabled mode where the

selection logic selects the synchronization source.
ql-disabled Sets selection mode to QL-Disabled more where the

selection logic selects the synchronization source.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 795

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting QL-Enabled selection mode:
ML66(config)#network-synch selection-mode ql-enabled
84.9 network-synch squelch
Synopsis
[no] network-synch squelch
Description
Use this command to enable squelching, that is, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
propagation.
Use the no option to disable squelching.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling squelching:
ML66(config)#network-synch squelch
84.10 priority
Synopsis
priority <INTEGER>
Description
Use this command to set the priority for the synchronization source.
Command Mode
796 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
INTEGER The priority value. It can be set from 1 to 4, where 1 is the

highest priority. The default value is 4.
Examples
Setting the priority to 4:
ML66(config-synch-nominee)#priority 4
84.11 signal-degrade
Synopsis
[no] signal-degrade
Description
Use this command to enable the use of signal degrade.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the use of signal degrade:
ML66(config-synch-nominee)#signal-degrade
84.12 wait-to-restore-time
Synopsis
wait-to-restore-time <TIME-IN-SECONDS>
Description
Use this command to assure that a synchronization input signal is stable before it
is used.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 797

CLI Descriptions
Operands
TIME-IN-SECONDS
Waiting time before using synchronization input signal in
seconds.
The value can be 0 or 10. The default value is 10.
Examples
Waiting 10 seconds before using synchronization input signal:
ML66(config-synch-nominee)#wait-to-restore-time 10
798 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: General Configuration
85 Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands:

General Configuration
92.
The following command modes are applicable for the synchronization PTP
1588v2 general configuration commands:
— PTP configuration submode — (config-ptp)
Table 92 General Configuration Overview

alarm-enable enable a specific alarm or all alarms
clear ptp clock-port statistics clear performance counters
clock configure the Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
clock
clock-local-priority set the clock level local priority value when
the clock mode is set to G.8275.1
clock-port create a new clock port
domain configure the domain value
event-enable enable a specific event or all events
holdover-timeout set the time/phase holdover timeout value
for the clock
interface compensate the link delay asymmetry
link-delay-compensation set the link delay on Ethernet LAN interfaces
log-clock-servo record the timestamps of the transmitted and
received 1588 packets
network-synch-assistance enable the use of network synchronization
frequency in Real Time Clock (RTC)
priority1 set priority1 value of the local clock
priority2 set priority2 value of the local clock
ptp change to the (config-ptp) submode
sync-port enable the PTP synchronization port
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 799

CLI Descriptions
— show interface (PTP)
— show ptp alarms-and-events
— show ptp clock
— show ptp clock current-ds
— show ptp clock default-ds
— show ptp clock parent-ds
— show ptp clock settings
— show ptp clock time-properties-ds
— show ptp clock-port
— show ptp config
— show ptp interface
— show ptp peers
— show ptp sync
884.
85.1 alarm-enable
Synopsis
[no] alarm-enable [ clockProtectionLost | freeRunningMode |
holdoverEntered | incompatibleHardware | traceabilityLost ]
Description
Use this command to enable a specific alarm or all alarms.
Use the no option to disable a specific alarm or all alarms.
Command Mode
PTP configuration submode — (config-ptp)
800 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
clockProtectionLost
Enables loss of master clock protection alarm.
freeRunningMode
Enables phase free running mode entered alarm.
holdoverEntered Enables phase holdover mode entered alarm.
incompatibleHardware
Enables IEEE1588 incompatible hardware alarm.
traceabilityLost Enables loss of grand master traceability alarm.
Examples
Enabling loss of master clock protection alarm:
ML66(config-ptp)#alarm-enbale clockProtectionLost
85.2 clear ptp clock-port statistics
Synopsis
clear ptp clock-port <NAME> statistics
Description
Use this command to clear the performance counters on the given port.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME The name of the clock port.
Examples
Clearing the performance counters on cp1 port:
ML66#clear ptp clock-port cp1 statistics
85.3 clock
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 801

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
clock {ieee1588v2 | g82651 | g82751} [{ordinary | boundary | transparent}]
[{unicast | multicast}] [{grandmaster | slave-only | bmc}]
Description
Use this command to configure the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock.
Command Mode
Options
ieee1588v2 Selects IEEE 1588v2 profile.
g82651 Selects G.8265.1 profile.
g82751 Selects G.8275.1 profile.
ordinary Selects ordinary clock.
boundary Selects boundary clock.
transparent Selects transparent clock.
unicast Selects unicast configuration.
multicast Selects multicast configuration.
grandmaster Uses the node as PTP Grandmaster.
slave-only Selects slave-only mode.
bmc Uses best master clock algorithm.
Examples
Configuring PTP clock as boundary clock for IEEE 1588v2:
ML66(config-ptp)#clock ieee1588v2 boundary unicast bmc
85.4 clock-local-priority
802 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
clock-local-priority <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to set the clock level local priority value when the clock mode
is set to G.8275.1.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The clock level local priority value. The valid range is 1–
Examples
Setting the clock level local priority value to 200:
ML66(config-ptp)#clock-local-priority 200
85.5 clock-port
Synopsis
[no] clock-port <NAME>
Description
Use this command to create a new clock port. The command also changes to
(config-clock-port) submode. To use this command, the clock needs to be
configured as an ordinary or a boundary clock.
Use the no option to delete a clock port. Time-stamping remains enabled after
this command is used. Time-stamping can be switched off manually with the no
interface command in ptp submode. Use the no option and omit the clock port
name to list the existing clock ports.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 803

CLI Descriptions
Operands
NAME The name of the clock port. The name must be unique.
Examples
Creating a new clock port:
ML66(config-ptp)#clock-port myPort1
ML66(config-clock-port)#
Deleting an existing clock port:

ML66(config-ptp)#no clock-port myPort1
Listing the existing clock ports:

ML66(config-ptp)#no clock-port
85.6 domain
Synopsis
domain <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to configure the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) domain value.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE PTP domain value.
When the clock mode is set to G.8275.1, the valid range is

Examples
Configuring PTP domain value when the clock mode is set to G.8275.1:
ML66(config-ptp)#domain 24
85.7 event-enable
804 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
[no] event-enable [clockSwitch]
Description
Use this command to enable a specific event or all events.
Use the no option to disable a specific event or all events.
Command Mode
Options
clockSwitch Enables switch of parent clock event.
Examples
Enabling switch of parent clock event:
ML66(config-ptp)#event-enbale clockSwitch
85.8 holdover-timeout
Synopsis
[no] holdover-timeout <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to set the time/phase holdover timeout value for the clock.
Use the no option to disable the holdover timeout, in this case there is no timeout.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The holdover timeout value in seconds. The valid range is

0–10000. The default value is 3000 seconds.
If the value expires, the clock leaves the time/phase

holdover state and switches back to free running mode.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 805

CLI Descriptions
If the value is set to 0, the clock never switches to time/

phase holdover state.
Examples
Setting the holdover timeout value to 1000 seconds:
ML66(config-ptp)#holdover-timeout 1000
85.9 interface
Synopsis
[no] interface <RSP> [<linkdelayAsymmetry>]
Description
Use this command to compensate for the link delay asymmetry per physical
interface and switch on time-stamping on the given physical interface.
Use the no option to switch off explicitly the time-stamping on the current
interface. The no option is not allowed when the clock mode is set to boundary
and a clock port is present on the given physical interface.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the selected interface,
where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port>.
linkdelayAsymmetry
(masterToSlaveDelay − slaveToMasterDelay) ÷ 2 in
nanoseconds.
Examples
Setting 100 ns link delay asymmetry on the 1/1/2 interface:
ML66(config-ptp)#interface 1/1/2 100
Switching on time-stamping on the 1/1/2 interface without setting link delay

asymmetry:
ML66(config-ptp)#interface 1/1/2
Switching off time-stamping on the 1/1/2 interface:
806 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(config-ptp)#no interface 1/1/2
85.10 link-delay-compensation
Synopsis
link-delay-compensation <NAME> <LINK_DELAY_COMPENSATION>
Description
Use this command to set the link delay on Ethernet LAN interfaces, when
multiple links are grouped (LAG) to provide equal delays on all links within the
group.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME Specifies the name of the LAN interface, where the

LINK_DELAY_COMPENSATION
Specifies the value of the link delay compensation. The
valid range is from −5000 to 5000 ns. The default value is
0. A positive value increases, a negative value decreases
the real link delay.
Examples
Setting 100 ns link delay on 1/6/1 interface, which is a LAN interface:
ML66(config-ptp)#link-delay-compensation 1/6/1 100
85.11 log-clock-servo
Synopsis
log-clock-servo <FREQUENCY> <SECONDS>
Description
Use this command to record the timestamps of the transmitted and received
1588 packets. The recorded samples are available in the local.log.cslog file
generated by the Bug Reporting Tool within the tn_local_logs_*.tgz file. This
file contains the timestamps in a compressed format.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 807

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
FREQUENCY Specifies the frequency of the logging. Every nth sample

is saved. The valid range is 1–1000.
SECONDS Specifies the time duration for the logging in seconds. The
valid range is 0–100000. The value 0 stops the logging.
Examples
Recording the timestamps of the transmitted and received 1588 packets for 100
seconds:
ML66(config-ptp)#log-clock-servo 1 100
85.12 network-synch-assistance
Synopsis
network-synch-assistance {enabled | disabled}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the use of network synchronization
frequency in Real Time Clock (RTC). Default state is disabled.
Command Mode
Options
enabled Enables the use of network synchronization frequency.
disabled Disables the use of network synchronization frequency.
Examples
Enabling the usage of network synchronization frequency:
ML66(config-ptp)#network-synch-assistance enabled
808 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

85.13 priority1
Synopsis
priority1 <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to set the Priority1 value of the local clock.
Note: The command is not applicable when the clock mode is set to G.8275.1.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The Priority1 value. The valid range is 0–255.
Examples
Setting Priority1 value:
ML66(config-ptp)#priority1 140
85.14 priority2
Synopsis
priority2 <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to set the Priority2 value of the local clock.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The Priority2 value. The valid range is 0–255.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 809

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting Priority2 value:
ML66(config-ptp)#priority2 128
85.15 ptp
Synopsis
ptp
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-ptp) submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-ptp) submode:
ML66(config)#ptp
ML66(config-ptp)#
85.16 sync-port
Synopsis
sync-port {enabled | disabled}
Description
Use this command to enable or disable the Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
synchronization port.
Note: When configuring a Packet Slave node using the G.8265.1 Telecom
profile, the sync-port must be enabled.
Command Mode
810 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Options
enabled Enables the PTP synchronization port.
disabled Disables the PTP synchronization port.
Examples
Enabling the PTP synchronization port:
ML66(config-ptp)#sync-port enabled
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 811

CLI Descriptions

Clock Port Configuration
93.
The following command mode is applicable for the synchronization PTP 1588v2
clock port configuration commands:
— Clock Port configuration submode — (config-clock-port)
Table 93 Clock Port Configuration Overview

delay-mechanism configure the delay mechanism for a clock port
dscp configure the Differentiated Services Code Point
(DSCP) field in IP header
enabled enable Precision Time Protocol (PTP) on the
current clock port
inner-tag enable inner VLAN tagging
interface configure destination MAC address
ip-interface select an IP interface to which the current PTP
clock port is connected
local-priority set the clock-port level local priority value when
the clock mode is set to G.8275.1
multicast-configuration change to the (config-multicast) submode
not-slave set the boundary clock as Not Slave
port select the LAN or WAN interface to which the
current PTP port is connected
unicast-configuration change to the (config-unicast) submode
vlan specify the VLAN to which the current clock port
is assigned
vlan-priority configure VLAN priority
— show current
884.
812 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Clock Port Configuration
86.1 delay-mechanism
Synopsis
delay-mechanism {e2e}
Description
Use this command to configure the delay mechanism for a clock port.
Configuration of the delay mechanism is allowed only for boundary clock.
Command Mode
Clock Port configuration submode — (config-clock-port)
Options
e2e Sets delay mechanism to end-to-end.
Examples
Configuring delay mechanism to end-to-end:
ML66(config-clock-port)#delay-mechanism e2e
86.2 dscp
Synopsis
dscp <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to configure the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
field in the IP header. This command is valid only on clock ports connected to an
IP interface.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE Sets DSCP in the IP header. The valid range is 0–63. The
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 813

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Setting the DSCP:
ML66(config-clock-port)#dscp 54
86.3 enabled
Synopsis
[no] enabled
Description
Use this command to enable Precision Time Protocol (PTP) on the current clock
port. The command also enables time-stamping on the underlying physical
interface.
Use the no option to disable PTP on the current clock port, but not time-
stamping. Time-stamping can be switched off manually with the no interface
command in ptp submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling PTP:
ML66(config-clock-port)#enabled
86.4 inner-tag
Synopsis
— inner-tag {<VLAN-ID> <PRIORITY> }
— no inner-tag
Description
Use this command to enable inner VLAN tagging and to specify VLAN ID and
customer VLAN priority.
Use the no option to disable inner VLAN tagging.
814 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Note: Customer VLAN is only applicable in Provider Bridge mode.
This command is only valid for clock ports connected to L2 interfaces.
Command Mode
Operands
VLAN-ID Sets inner tag VLAN ID.
PRIORITY Sets inner tag VLAN priority.
Examples
Enabling customer VLAN tagging:
ML66(config-clock-port)#inner-tag 7 7
86.5 interface
Synopsis
interface ieee8023 {forwardable | non-forwardable}
Description
Use this command to configure the destination MAC address for a clock port
using Ethernet multicast.
Command Mode
Options
forwardable Sets the multicast MAC address to forwardable:

01-1B-19-00-00-00.
non-forwardable Sets the multicast MAC address to non-forwardable:

01-80-C2-00-00-0E.
Examples
Configuring a clock port to use non-forwardable MAC:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 815

CLI Descriptions
ML66(config-clock-port)#interface ieee8023 non-forwardable
86.6 ip-interface
Synopsis
ip-interface <RSP_VLAN>
Description
Use this command to select an IP interface to which the current Precision Time
Protocol (PTP) clock port is connected. To execute this command, the clock has to
be configured as boundary.
Omit the parameter to list the existing L3 interfaces.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP_VLAN The name of the IP interface, where the format is <Rack/

Slot/Port.VLAN>.
Examples
Connecting the clock port to IP interface 1/6/7.1588:
ML66(config-clock-port)#ip-interface 1/6/7.1588
Listing the existing L3 interfaces:

ML66(config-clock-port)#ip-interface
Timestamping Capable IP Interfaces:
1/6/7.1588
86.7 local-priority
Synopsis
local-priority <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to set the clock-port level local priority value when the clock
mode is set to G.8275.1.
816 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The clock-port level local priority value. The valid range is
Examples
Setting the clock-port level local priority value to 200:
ML66(config-clock-port)#local-priority 200
86.8 multicast-configuration
Synopsis
multicast-configuration
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-multicast) submode. To use this
command, the clock needs to be configured for multicast.
Note: IPv4 multicast configuration is not supported.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-multicast) submode:
ML66(config-clock-port)#multicast-configuration
ML66(config-multicast)#
86.9 not-slave
Synopsis
not-slave {true | false}
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 817

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to set the boundary clock as Not Slave.
Command Mode
Options
true Sets the boundary clock-port role to master.
false Best Master Clock (BMC) algorithm sets the clock-port

role.
Examples
Setting the boundary clock as Not Slave:
ML66(config-clock-port)#not-slave true
86.10 port
Synopsis
port <RSP>
Description
Use this command to select an L2 LAN or WAN interface to which the current
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock port is connected. To execute this command,
the clock has to be configured as boundary.
Omit the parameter to list the existing L2 interfaces capable of time-stamping.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP The name of the L2 LAN or WAN interface, where the

Examples
Connecting the clock port to interface LAN 1/6/4:
ML66(config-clock-port)#port 1/6/4
818 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Listing the existing L2 interfaces capable of time-stamping:

ML66(config-clock-port)#port
Timestamping Capable LAN and WAN Interfaces:
1/6/4
1/6/5
86.11 unicast-configuration
Synopsis
unicast-configuration
Description
Use this command to change to the (config-unicast) submode. To use this
command, the clock needs to be configured for unicast.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (config-unicast) submode:
ML66(config-clock-port)#unicast-configuration
ML66(config-unicast)#
86.12 vlan
Synopsis
[no] vlan <VLAN>
Description
Use this command to specify the VLAN to which the current clock port is
assigned.
This command is only valid for clock ports connected to L2 interfaces.
The no option is available only when the clock mode is set to G.8275.1. Use the
no option to remove the VLAN.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 819

CLI Descriptions
Operands
VLAN Number of the VLAN.
Examples
Configuring VLAN:
ML66(config-clock-port)#vlan 7
86.13 vlan-priority
Synopsis
vlan-priority <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to configure VLAN priority. This command is only valid for
clock ports connected to L2 interfaces.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The VLAN priority. The valid range is from 0 to 7.
Examples
Configuring VLAN priority:
ML66(config-clock-port)#vlan-priority 7
820 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast and Multicast Configuration

Unicast and Multicast Configuration
94.
The following command modes are applicable for the synchronization PTP
1588v2 unicast and multicast configuration commands:
— Unicast configuration submode — (config-unicast)
— Multicast configuration submode — (config-multicast)
Table 94 Unicast and Multicast Configuration Overview

announce-interval specify the requested mean time interval between
successive Announce messages
announce-timeout specify the number of announce-intervals that
have to pass without receipt of an Announce
message
delay-resp-interval specify the requested mean time interval between
successive Delay Response messages
delay-resp-timeout specify the number of delay response intervals
that have to pass without receipt of a Delay
Response message
duration configure the requested number of seconds for
which the requested messages are transmitted
min-delay-req-interval set minimum delay request transmission interval
query-interval configure the mean interval in seconds between
requests from a node, for example, for a unicast
Announce message
sync-interval specify the requested mean time interval between
successive Sync messages
sync-timeout specify the number of synchronization intervals
that have to pass without receipt of a Sync
message
unicast-master create a new master
wait-to-restore-time configure the time for which a disqualified master
has to operate adequately after a fault before it is
considered again
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 821

CLI Descriptions
— show current
884.
87.1 announce-interval
Synopsis
announce-interval <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to specify the requested mean time interval between
successive Announce messages from the unicast master.
Note: In the (config-multicast) submode, the value of the interval is always −3

when the clock mode is set to G.8275.1.
Command Mode
Unicast configuration submode — (config-unicast)
Multicast configuration submode — (config-multicast)
Operands
VALUE The logarithm to base 2 of the requested mean period

between messages, in seconds. The valid range is from −3
to 4. The default value is 1.
— 4 at every 16 seconds
— 1 at 0.5 Hz, that is, at every 2 seconds
— 0 at 1 Hz
— −1 at 2 Hz
— −2 at 4 Hz
— −3 at 8 Hz
822 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Specifying the requested mean time interval:
ML66(config-unicast)#announce-interval 0
87.2 announce-timeout
Synopsis
announce-timeout <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to specify the number of announce-intervals that have to pass
without receipt of an Announce message before a timeout event is generated.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE Number of announce-intervals. The valid range is from 2

Examples
Specifying the number of announce-intervals:
ML66(config-multicast)#announce-timeout 5
87.3 delay-resp-interval
Synopsis
delay-resp-interval <VALUE>
Description
successive Delay Response messages from a unicast master.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 823

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The logarithm to base 2 of the requested mean period

between messages, in seconds. The valid range is from −6
— 1 at 0.5 Hz, that is, at every 2 seconds
— 0 at 1 Hz
— −1 at 2 Hz
— −2 at 4 Hz
— −3 at 8 Hz
— −4 at 16 Hz
— −5 at 32 Hz
— −6 at 64 Hz
Examples
ML66(config-unicast)#delay-resp-interval 0
87.4 delay-resp-timeout
Synopsis
delay-resp-timeout <VALUE>
824 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to specify the number of delay response intervals that have to
pass without receipt of a Delay Response message before a timeout event is
generated.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE Number of Delay Response intervals. The valid range is

from 2 to 64. The default value is 3.
Examples
Specifying the number of delay response intervals:
ML66(config-unicast)#delay-resp-timeout 16
87.5 duration
Synopsis
duration <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to configure the requested number of seconds for which the
requested messages are transmitted.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The requested number of seconds. The valid range is 10–

1000 seconds. Default value is 300 seconds.
Examples
Configuring the requested number of seconds:
ML66(config-unicast)#duration 300
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 825

CLI Descriptions
87.6 min-delay-req-interval
Synopsis
min-delay-req-interval <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to set the minimum delay request transmission interval.
Note: The value of the interval is always −4 when the clock mode is set to
G.8275.1.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The value of the interval. The valid range is between 5

and −6, but never more frequent than the rate of the Sync
messages. It is recommended to use the same rate as for
the Sync messages.
— 1 at every 0.5 Hz, that is, at every 2 seconds
— 0 at 1 Hz
— −1 at 2 Hz
— −2 at 4 Hz
— −3 at 8 Hz
— −4 at 16 Hz
— −5 at 32 Hz
— −6 at 64 Hz
826 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Setting the minimum delay request transmission interval at 1 Hz:
ML66(config-multicast)#min-delay-req-interval 0
87.7 query-interval
Synopsis
query-interval <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to configure the mean interval in seconds between requests
from a node, for example, for a unicast Announce message.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The logarithm to base 2 of the interval in seconds. The

valid range is from 0 to 7.
— 0 at every second
Examples
Configuring the mean interval:
ML66(config-unicast)#query-interval 0
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 827

CLI Descriptions
87.8 sync-interval
Synopsis
sync-interval <VALUE>
Description
successive Sync messages from a unicast master.
Note: In the (config-multicast) submode, the value of the interval is always −4

when the clock mode is set to G.8275.1.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The logarithm to base 2 of the requested mean period in

seconds. The valid range is from −6 to −3.
— −3 at 8 Hz
— −4 at 16 Hz
— −5 at 32 Hz
— −6 at 64 Hz
Examples
ML66(config-unicast)#sync-interval 0
87.9 sync-timeout
Synopsis
sync-timeout <VALUE>
828 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to specify the number of synchronization intervals that have
to pass without receipt of a Sync message before a timeout event is generated.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE Number of sync intervals. The valid range is from 2 to 64.

Examples
Specifying the number of synchronization intervals:
ML66(config-unicast)#sync-timeout 16
87.10 unicast-master
Synopsis
[no] unicast-master <NAME>
Description
Use this command to create a new master. The command also changes to the
(config-unicast-master) submode.
Use the no option to delete an existing master.
Command Mode
Operands
NAME Name of the new master. The name must be unique.
Examples
Creating a new master:
ML66(config-unicast)#unicast-master myMaster1
ML66(config-unicast-master)#
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 829

CLI Descriptions
87.11 wait-to-restore-time
Synopsis
wait-to-restore-time <VALUE>
Description
Use this command to configure the time for which a disqualified master has to
operate adequately after a fault before it is considered again.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The time, in minutes, to wait before using a disqualified

master again. The valid range is from 0 to 12. The default
value is 5.
Examples
Waiting 5 minutes before using a disqualified master again:
ML66(config-unicast)#wait-to-restore-time 5
830 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast Master Configuration

Unicast Master Configuration
95.
The following command mode is applicable for the synchronization PTP 1588v2
unicast master configuration commands:
— Unicast Master configuration submode — (config-unicast-master)
Table 95 Unicast Master Configuration Overview

address configure the address of the unicast
master candidate
enabled enable the current unicast master
local-priority configure the master priority
— show current
884.
88.1 address
Synopsis
address {ieee8023 <MAC-ADDRESS> | udpipv4 <IP-ADDRESS>}
Description
Use this command to configure the address of the unicast master candidate.
Command Mode
Unicast Master configuration submode — (config-unicast-master)
Operands
MAC-ADDRESS Media Access Control (MAC) address in

<AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF> format. Need to be configured
when the communication protocol is set to IEEE 802.3.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 831

CLI Descriptions
IP-ADDRESS IP adress in <A.B.C.D> format. This parameter needs to

be configured when the communication protocol is set to
UDP over IPv4.
Options
ieee8023 Sets the communication protocol to IEEE 802.3.
udpipv4 Sets the unicast master communication protocol to UDP

over IPV4. This option is only valid if the clock port is
connected to an IP interface.
Examples
Configuring the MAC address of the unicast master candidate:
ML66(config-unicast-master)#address ieee8023 ac:60:b6:99:a5:8d
Configuring the IP address of the unicast master candidate:

ML66(config-unicast-master)#address udpipv4 192.168.0.2
88.2 enabled
Synopsis
[no] enabled
Description
Use this command to enable the current unicast master.
Use the no option to disable the current unicast master.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the current unicast master:
ML66(config-unicast-master)#enabled
88.3 local-priority
832 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast Master Configuration
Synopsis
local-priority <VALUE>
Descriptions
Use this command to configure the master priority.
Command Mode
Operands
VALUE The master priority value. The valid range is 1–16.

Default value is 8.
Examples
Configuring master priority:
ML66(config-unicast-master)#local-priority 16
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 833

CLI Descriptions
89 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: General

Configuration
96.
The following command mode is applicable for the Ethernet Service Operation,
Administration, and Maintenance (SOAM) general configuration commands:
Table 96 General Configuration Overview

cfm configure Ethernet Service Operation,
Administration, and Maintenance
(OAM)
soam logmask set Ethernet Service OAM logmask
89.1 cfm
Synopsis
cfm
Description
Use this command to change to the (cfm) submode for Ethernet Service
Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) configuration.
Command Mode
Examples
Configuring Ethernet Service OAM:
ML66(config)#cfm
ML66(cfm)#
89.2 soam logmask
834 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: General Configuration
Synopsis
soam logmask <MASK>
Description
Use this command to set Ethernet Service Operation, Administration, and
Maintenance (OAM) log mask.
Command Mode
Operands
MASK The log mask value.
Examples
Setting Ethernet Service OAM log mask:
ML66(config)#soam logmask 135
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 835

CLI Descriptions
90 Ethernet Service OAM Commands:

Maintenance Domain Configuration
97.
Administration, and Maintenance (SOAM) Maintenance Domain (MD)
configuration commands:
— Ethernet Service OAM submode — (cfm)
Table 97 Maintenance Domain Configuration Overview

md set Maintenance Domain (MD) name
format type
— show cfm md
— show config
— show status
884.
90.1 md
Synopsis
— md { string <NAME> <LEVEL> | none <LEVEL> }
— no md { string <NAME> | none <LEVEL> }
Description
Use this command to set the Maintenance Domain (MD) name format type. The
command also changes to the (cfm-md) submode.
Use the no option to delete an MD.
836 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Domain Configuration
Command Mode
Ethernet Service OAM submode — (cfm)
Operands
LEVEL The level of the MD. The valid range is 0–7.
NAME The name of the MD.
Options
none Sets the domain name format type to none.
string Sets the domain name format type to string.
Examples
Setting the MD name format type to string:
Note: The system automatically generates an index number at the end of the
line.
ML66(cfm)#md string PB 3 1
ML66(cfm-md)#
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 837

CLI Descriptions

Maintenance Association Configuration
98.
The following command modes are applicable for the Ethernet Service
Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (SOAM) Maintenance Association
(MA) configuration commands:
— Ethernet Service OAM MD submode — (cfm-md)
— Ethernet Service OAM MD MA submode — (cfm-md-ma)
Table 98 Maintenance Association Configuration Overview

interface-tlv-enable enable the inclusion of the Interface
Status TLV in transmitted CCM frames
ma configure a Maintenance Association
(MA)
port-tlv-enable enable the inclusion of the Port Status
TLV in transmitted CCM frames
— show cfm ma
— show config
— show status
884.
91.1 interface-tlv-enable
Synopsis
[no] interface-tlv-enable
Description
Use this command to enable the inclusion of the Interface Status Type Length
Value (TLV) in transmitted Continuity Check Message (CCM) frames.
838 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Association Configuration
Use the no option to disable the inclusion of the Interface Status TLV in
transmitted CCM frames.
Command Mode
Ethernet Service OAM MD MA submode — (cfm-md-ma)
Examples
Enabling the inclusion of the Interface Status TLV in transmitted CCM frames:
ML66(cfm-md-ma)#interface-tlv-enable
91.2 ma
Synopsis
— ma { string | icc } <NAME> <INTERVAL> <VLANTYPE> <VLANID>

<PORTSTATUS> <INTERFACESTATUS>
— no ma { string | icc } <NAME>
Description
Use this command to configure a Maintenance Association (MA). The command
also changes to the (cfm-md-ma) submode.
Use the no option to delete an MA.
Command Mode
Ethernet Service OAM MD submode — (cfm-md)
Operands
INTERFACESTATUS
The interface status Type Length Value (TLV).
— 0 — Do not send interface status TLV.
— 1 — Send interface status TLV.
INTERVAL The length of the interval.
— 4 — Sets the interval to 1 second.
— 5 — Sets the interval to 10 seconds.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 839

CLI Descriptions
— 6 — Sets the interval to 1 minute.
— 7 — Sets the interval to 10 minutes.
NAME The name of the MA.
PORTSTATUS The port status TLV.
— 0 — Do not send port status TLV.
— 1 — Send port status TLV.
VLANID The VLAN ID of the MA.
— 0 — No VLAN.
— 1–4094 — The valid range of the VLAN ID.
VLANTYPE The type of the VLAN.
— 0 — No VLAN.
— 1 — Sets the MA VLAN type to C-VID.
— 2 — Sets the MA VLAN type to S-VID.
Options
icc Sets the format of the MA to ITU Carrier Code (ICC).
string Sets the format of the MA to string.
Examples
Configuring an MA:
Note: The system automatically generates an index number at the end of the
line.
ML66(cfm-md)#ma string Blue 5 2 200 1 1 1

ML66(cfm-md-ma)#
91.3 port-tlv-enable
Synopsis
[no] port-tlv-enable
840 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Association Configuration
Description
Use this command to enable the inclusion of the Port Status Type Length Value
(TLV) in transmitted Continuity Check Message (CCM) frames.
Use the no option to disable the inclusion of the Port Status TLV in transmitted
CCM frames.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling the inclusion of the Port Status TLV in transmitted CCM frames:
ML66(cfm-md-ma)#port-tlv-enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 841

CLI Descriptions

Maintenance End Point and Maintenance
Intermediate Point Configuration
99.
Administration, and Maintenance (SOAM) Maintenance End Point (MEP) and
Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP) configuration commands:
Table 99 Maintenance End Point and Maintenance Intermediate Point

Configuration Overview
alarm enable Connectivity Fault
Management (CFM) and Performance
Monitoring (PM) alarms
mep configure a Maintenance End Point
(MEP)
mep-list add a remote MEP
mip configure a Maintenance Intermediate
Point (MIP)
— show cfm alarms
— show cfm mep
— show cfm mep-peer
— show cfm mip
— show config
— show status
884.
92.1 alarm
842 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance End Point and Maintenance Intermediate Point Configuration
Synopsis
— alarm { cfm <TYPE> | pm }
— no alarm { cfm | pm }
Description
Use this command to enable Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) and PM
alarms.
Use the no option to disable CFM and PM alarms.
Command Mode
Operands
TYPE Specifies the CFM alarm type.
— 0 — Enables 802.1 alarms.
— 1 — Enables Y.1731 alarms.
Options
cfm Enables CFM alarm.
pm Enables PM alarm.
Examples
Enabling 802.1 CFM alarms:
ML66(cfm-md-ma)#alarm cfm 0
92.2 mep
Synopsis
— mep <MEPID> {down | up} <PRIMARYVID> <PRIORITY> <CCMENABLE>

{port <RSP> | lag <LAGID>}
— no mep <MEPID>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 843

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to configure a Maintenance End Point (MEP). The command
also changes to the (cfm-md-ma-mep) submode.
Use the no option to delete a MEP.
Command Mode
Operands
CCMENABLE Enables or disables the Continuity Check Message (CCM).
— 0 — Disables CCM.
— 1 — Enables CCM.

Port> format.
MEPID The MEP ID.
RSP The Rack, Slot, Port value of the port where the format is
<Rack/Slot/Port>.
PRIMARYVID The primary VLAN ID.
PRIORITY The Protocol Data Unit (PDU) priority. The valid range is
0–7.
Options
down Specifies the MEP direction to down.
lag Configures MEP on a LAG.
port Configures MEP on a LAN or WAN port.
up Specifies the MEP direction to up.
Examples
Configuring a MEP:
ML66(cmf-md-ma)#mep 61 up 200 7 1 port 1/6/5
844 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance End Point and Maintenance Intermediate Point Configuration
92.3 mep-list
Synopsis
[no] mep-list <MEPID>
Description
Use this command to add a remote MEP.
Use the no option to remove a remote MEP.
Command Mode
Operands
MEPID Specifies the remote MEP ID.
Examples
Adding a remote MEP:
ML66(cfm-md-ma)#mep-list 61
92.4 mip
Synopsis
[no] mip {port <RSP> | lag <LAGID>}
Description
Use this command to add a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP).
Use the no option to delete a MIP.
Command Mode
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the MIP port where the
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 845

CLI Descriptions

Port> format.
Options
port Configures MIP on a LAN or WAN port.
lag Configures MIP on a LAG.
Examples
Adding a MIP:
ML66(cfm-md-ma)#mip port 1/6/5
846 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Linktrace and Loopback Configuration
93 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Linktrace

and Loopback Configuration
100.
Administration, and Maintenance (SOAM) linktrace and loopback configuration
commands:
— Ethernet Service OAM MD MA MEP submode — (cfm-md-ma-mep)
Table 100 Linktrace and Loopback Configuration Overview

ccm-enable enable Continuity Check Message
(CCM)
ccm-state-update-enable enable link status change triggers on
the Maintenance End Point (MEP)
interface in case of CCM failures
linktrace start linktrace
loopback start loopback
pm configure a PM session
— show config
— show linktrace
— show loopback
— show status
884.
93.1 ccm-enable
Synopsis
[no] ccm-enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 847

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable Continuity Check Message (CCM).
Use the no option to disable CCM.
Command Mode
Ethernet Service OAM MD MA MEP submode — (cfm-md-ma-mep)
Examples
Enabling CCM:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#ccm-enable
93.2 ccm-state-update-enable
Synopsis
[no] ccm-state-update-enable
Description
Use this command to enable link status change triggers on the Maintenance End
Point (MEP) interface in case of Continuity Check Message (CCM) failures.
In case of Remote Defect Indication (RDI) or Loss of Continuity (LOC) defects,

the MEP interface link status is set to DOWN. Occasionally, this can trigger
switchovers in the following features:
— Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
— L1 Bonding
Use the no option to disable updates. If the MEP is removed or the status update
is disabled, the link status is reset to UP.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling CCM state updates:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#ccm-state-update-enable
848 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

93.3 linktrace
Synopsis
linktrace <TTL> <USEFDBONLY> { <TARGETMEPID> | <MACADDRESS> }
Description
Use this command to start a linktrace.
Command Mode
Operands
MACADDRESS The Media Access Control (MAC) address of the

traceroute target in <AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF> format.
TARGETMEPID The Maintenance End Point (MEP) ID of the traceroute

target. The valid range is 1–8191.
TTL Time To Live (TTL) value in the traceroute. The valid

range is 1–255.
USEFDBONLY Selects which database is used by intermediate bridges to

forward the Linktrace Message (LTM) frame.
— 0 — Uses the MIP Continuity Check Message (CCM)

database.
— 1 — Uses the Forwarding Database.
Examples
Starting a linktrace:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#linktrace 64 1 3
93.4 loopback
Synopsis
loopback <LBM> <INTERVAL> <DATATLVLENGTH> <DATAPATTERN>
<TIMEOUT> <PRIORITY> <DROP> { <DESTMEPID> | <MACADDRESS> }
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 849

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to start a loopback.
Command Mode
Operands
DATAPATTERN The content of the data Type Length Value (TLV) of the
ping packet. The maximum length of the string is 32
characters.
DATATLVLENGTH
The length of the data TLV in bytes. The valid range is 0–
9186.
DESTMEPID The target MEP ID of the ping packet. The valid range is
0–8191.
DROP The Drop Eligibility Indicator Bit. The value is 0 if the

Loopback Message (LBM) cannot be dropped. The value
is 1 if the LBM can be dropped.
INTERVAL The PDU interval in milliseconds. The valid range is

1000–60000 with a granularity of 100.
LBM The number of Loopback Messages (LBMs) to be sent.

MACADDRESS The target MAC address of the ping packet in

<AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF> format.
PRIORITY The PDU priority value. The valid range is 0–7.
TIMEOUT Timeout in milliseconds. The valid range is 100–10000.
Examples
Starting a loopback:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#loopback 10 1000 1024 testpattern 100 7 0 62
93.5 pm
850 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
— pm <SESSIONID> <CONFINT> <DMMCOSPRIO> { <DESTMEPID> |

<MACADDRESS> }
— no pm
Description
Use this command to set a PM session. The command also changes to the (cfm-
md-ma-mep-pm) submode.
Use the no option to remove a PM session.
Command Mode
Operands
CONFINT The confident interval in percent. The valid range is 1–

100.
DESTMEPID The destination MEP ID.
DMMCOSPRIO The Delay Measurement Message (DMM) CoS priority.

MACADDRESS The MAC address in <AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF> format.
SESSIONID The session ID. The valid range is 1–128.
Examples
Setting a PM session:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#pm 1 10 2 186
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 851

CLI Descriptions
94 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Ethernet

Bandwidth Notification
101.
The following command modes are applicable for Ethernet Bandwidth

Notification (ETH-BN) commands:
— Ethernet Bandwidth Notification submode — (bnm)
— Send Options submode — (send-options)
Table 101 Ethernet Bandwidth Notification Overview

bandwidth-notification change to the (bnm) submode to
configure Ethernet Bandwidth
Notification (ETH-BN)
enable enable a Bandwidth Notification
Message (BNM) instance on the
Maintenance End Point (MEP) for the
configured interface
failed-link-message send one BNM once the link fails and
the hold-timer expires
format set the L2 frame format of the
Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
full-link-speed-message send one more BNM once the link
speed is restored
hold-time set the timeout between the
degradation time and sending BNM
with the updated bandwidth
interface configure an interface to be monitored
for the bandwidth changes
interval set the interval between BNM frames
level set the Maintenance Entity Group
(MEG) level on which immediate
Maintenance Intermediate Points
(MIPs) and MEPs interact with the
BNM
port-id set the port ID and make the interface
unique
852 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
priority set the priority of the Ethernet frame

send-frequently-after-hold-time send BNM more frequently once the
hold-timer expires
send-options configure when to send and not send
BNMs
— show bandwidth-notification
— show bandwidth-notification brief
— show current
884.
94.1 bandwidth-notification
Synopsis
bandwidth-notification
Description
Use this command to change to the (bnm) submode to configure Ethernet
Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN).
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (bnm) submode:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#bandwidth-notification
ML66(bnm)#
94.2 enable
Synopsis
[no] enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 853

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable a Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) instance
on the Maintenance End Point (MEP) for the configured interface.
Use the no option to disable a BNM instance on the MEP for the configured
interface.
Command Mode
Ethernet Bandwidth Notification submode — (bnm)
Examples
Enabling a BNM instance on the MEP:
ML66(bnm)#enable
94.3 failed-link-message
Synopsis
[no] failed-link-message [always]
Description
Use this command to send one Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) once the
link fails and the hold-timer expires.
Use the no option to not send BNM when the link is down.
Command Mode
Send Options submode — (send-options)
Options
always Sends BNM frames periodically when the link is down.
Examples
Sending BNM frames periodically when the link is down:
ML66(send-options)#failed-link-message always
94.4 format
854 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Synopsis
format {itu-t | cisco}
Description
Use this command to set the L2 frame format of the Ethernet Bandwidth
Notification (ETH-BN).
Command Mode
Options
itu-t Sets the frame format to ITU-T. This is the default value.
cisco Sets the frame format to Cisco.
Examples
Setting the L2 frame format of the ETH-BN to ITU-T:
ML66(bnm)#format itu-t
94.5 full-link-speed-message
Synopsis
[no] full-link-speed-message [always]
Description
Use this command to send one more Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM)
once the link speed is restored.
Use the no option to not send BNM when the link speed is restored.
Command Mode
Options
always Always sends BNM when the link is at full speed.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 855

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Always sending BNM when the link is at full speed:
ML66(send-options)#full-link-speed-message always
94.6 hold-time
Synopsis
hold-time <HOLD-TIME>
Description
Use this command to set the timeout between the degradation time and sending
Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) with the updated bandwidth.
Command Mode
Operands
HOLD-TIME The timeout value in seconds. The valid range is 0–10.
Examples
Setting the timeout value to 2 seconds:
ML66(bnm)#hold-time 2
94.7 interface
Synopsis
[no] interface <RSP>
Description
Use this command to configure an interface to be monitored for the bandwidth
changes.
Use the no option to reset the Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) interface.
Command Mode
856 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
Examples
Configuring an interface to be monitored for the bandwidth changes:
ML66(bnm)#interface 1/6/5
94.8 interval
Synopsis
interval <INTERVAL>
Description
Use this command to set the interval between Bandwidth Notification Message
(BNM) frames.
Command Mode
Operands
INTERVAL The interval between BNM frames in seconds. The valid

— 1s
— 10s
— 1min
Examples
Setting the interval between BNM frames to 10 seconds:
ML66(bnm)#interval 10s
94.9 level
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 857

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
level <LEVEL>
Description
Use this command to set the Maintenance Entity Group (MEG) level on which
immediate Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs) and Maintenance End
Points (MEPs) interact with the Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM).
Command Mode
Operands
LEVEL The MEG level. The valid range is 1–7.
Examples
Setting the MEG level to 2:
ML66(bnm)#level 2
94.10 port-id
Synopsis
port-id <PORTID>
Description
Use this command to set the port ID and make the interface unique when more
Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) instances exist in the network.
Command Mode
Operands
PORTID A 32 bit length unique identifier.
Examples
Setting the port ID to 1234567890:
858 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

ML66(bnm)#port-id 1234567890
94.11 priority
Synopsis
priority <PRIORITY>
Description
Use this command to set the priority of the Ethernet frame.
Command Mode
Operands
PRIORITY The priority of the Ethernet frame. The valid range is 0–7.
Examples
Setting the priority of the Ethernet frame to 7:
ML66(bnm)#priority 7
94.12 send-frequently-after-hold-time
Synopsis
[no] send-frequently-after-hold-time
Description
Use this command to send Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM) more
frequently once the hold-timer expires.
Use the no option to send BNM at the default frequency when the hold-timer
expires.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 859

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Sending BNM more frequently once the hold-timer expires:
ML66(send-options)#send-frequently-after-hold-time
94.13 send-options
Synopsis
send-options
Description
Use this command to configure when to send and not send Bandwidth
Notification Messages (BNMs). The command also changes to the (send-options)
submode.
Command Mode
Examples
Changing to the (send-options) submode to configure when to send BNMs:
ML66(bnm)#send-options
ML66(send-options)#
860 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Session Configuration
95 Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Session

Configuration
102.
Administration, and Maintenance (SOAM) session configuration commands:
— Ethernet Service OAM MD MA MEP PM submode — (cfm-md-ma-mep-pm)
Table 102 Session Configuration Overview

dm start a Delay Measurement (DM)
session
— show dm
884.
95.1 dm
Synopsis
— dm <INTERVAL> <DELAYPERCENTILE> <DELAYVARIARTION>

<DELAYTHRESHOLD> <DELAYVARTHRESHOLD>
— no dm
Description
Use this command to start a Delay Measurement (DM) session.
Use the no option to terminate a DM session.
Command Mode
Ethernet Service OAM MD MA MEP PM submode — (cfm-md-ma-mep-pm)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 861

CLI Descriptions
Operands
DELAYPERCENTILE
The percentile of the frame delay performance. The valid
range is 1–100.
DELAYTHRESHOLD
The delay threshold value in milliseconds. The valid range
is 1–10000.
DELAYVARTHRESHOLD
The delay variation threshold value in milliseconds. The
DELAYVARIATION
The variation percentile of the frame delay performance.
INTERVAL The Delay Measurement Message (DMM) interval in

seconds. Only the values 1 and 10 are supported.
Examples
Starting a DM session:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep-pm)#dm 1 90 90 100 100
862 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

IGMP and MLD Snooping Commands
96 IGMP and MLD Snooping Commands
103, Table 104, and Table 105.
The following command modes are applicable for the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping
commands:
— IGMP Snooping VLAN configuration submode — (config-igmp-snooping-

vlan)
— MLD Snooping VLAN configuration submode — (config-mld-snooping-

vlan)
Table 103 IGMP Snooping Commands Overview

clear snooping counters reset the counters to 0
igmp snooping config-clear delete all Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) snooping
configuration on the NE
igmp snooping enable enable IGMP snooping on the NE
igmp snooping vlan enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN
mfib alarm-enable enable the IP Multicast Forwarding
Table Full alarm
Table 104 MLD Snooping Commands Overview

clear snooping counters reset the counters to 0
mld snooping config-clear delete all Multicast Listener Discovery
(MLD) snooping configuration on the
NE
mld snooping enable enable MLD snooping on the NE
mld snooping vlan enable MLD snooping on a VLAN
mfib alarm-enable enable the IP Multicast Forwarding
Table Full alarm
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 863

CLI Descriptions
Table 105 VLAN-level IGMP and MLD Snooping Commands Overview

immediate-leave enable immediate leave on the selected
ports
proxy-reporting enable proxy reporting
query-interval set the query interval of the IGMPv2
(IPv4), respectively MLDv1 (IPv6)
querier routers
robust set the robustness value of the IGMPv2
(IPv4), respectively MLDv1 (IPv6)
querier routers
— show igmp snooping
— show igmp snooping config
— show igmp snooping group
— show igmp snooping mrouter
— show igmp snooping vlan
— show mfib status
— show mld snooping
— show mld snooping config
— show mld snooping group
— show mld snooping mrouter
— show mld snooping vlan
884.
96.1 clear snooping counters
Synopsis
clear snooping counters
864 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Description
Use this command to reset the counters, displayed by show igmp snooping
vlan and show mld snooping vlan commands, to 0.
Command Mode
Examples
Resetting the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and Multicast
Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping counters to 0:
ML66#clear snooping counters
96.2 igmp snooping config-clear
Synopsis
igmp snooping config-clear
Description
Use this command to delete all Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
snooping configuration on the NE. The command also resets the default disabled
state of the IGMP snooping.
Command Mode
Examples
Deleting IGMP snooping configuration:
ML66#igmp snooping config-clear
96.3 igmp snooping enable
Synopsis
[no] igmp snooping enable
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 865

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
snooping on the NE. When IGMP snooping is enabled, IGMP messages are sent
to the switch CPU for processing. Otherwise, the IGMP messages are forwarded
as ordinary multicast packets.
Use the no option to disable IGMP snooping on the NE.
Note: While IGMP snooping is disabled on the NE, the VLAN-level IGMP
snooping settings take no effect.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling IGMP snooping on the NE:
ML66(config)#igmp snooping enable
96.4 igmp snooping vlan
Synopsis
[no] igmp snooping vlan <VLANID> [ ctag <CVID> ]
Description
Use this command to enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
snooping on a VLAN. The command also changes to the (config-igmp-snooping-
vlan) submode.
Use the no option to disable IGMP snooping and to delete the IGMP
configuration and the learned group membership information on a VLAN.
Note: When IGMP snooping is disabled globally on the NE, snooping can still
be configured per VLAN, but the settings does not take effect until the
snooping is re-enabled globally.
IGMP snooping is disabled on all VLANs by default.
Command Mode
866 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Operands
VLANID The VLAN identification number in the outer VLAN tag.

CVID The C-VID identification number in the inner VLAN tag.

Options
ctag The customer VLAN tag.
Examples
Enabling IGMP snooping on VLAN 2:
ML66(config)#igmp snooping vlan 2
ML66(config-igmp-snooping-vlan)#
96.5 immediate-leave
Synopsis
— immediate-leave ports <PORTLIST>
— immediate-leave add <PORTLIST>
— no immediate-leave
— no immediate-leave ports <PORTLIST>
Description
Use this command to enable immediate leave on the selected ports of the VLAN.
By default the immediate leave is disabled.
Note: — Enable immediate leave only on VLAN ports to which a single host
is attached. Otherwise, some hosts can be inadvertently dropped.
— When executing immediate-leave ports <PORTLIST> command,

the current port list is overwritten. Use the immediate-leave add
<PORTLIST> command to add ports to the current port list.
Use the no immediate-leave command to remove all ports from the port list.
Use the no immediate-leave ports <PORTLIST> command to remove the

selected ports from the port list.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 867

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
For IGMP snooping (IPv4):

vlan)
For MLD snooping (IPv6):

vlan)
Operands
PORTLIST The list of the ports in <Rack/Slot/Port> format. The RSP

Options
add Adds new ports to the current port list.
Examples
Enabling immediate leave on ports 1/6/4 and 1/6/5 in an IPv4 network:
ML66(config-igmp-snooping-vlan)#immediate-leave ports 1/6/4,1/6/5
Enabling immediate leave on ports 1/6/4 and 1/6/5 in an IPv6 network:

ML66(config-mld-snooping-vlan)#immediate-leave ports 1/6/4,1/6/5
96.6 mfib alarm-enable
Synopsis
[no] mfib alarm-enable
Description
Use this command to enable the IP Multicast Forwarding Table Full alarm.
Use the no option to disable the IP Multicast Forwarding Table Full alarm.
Command Mode
868 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Enabling the IP multicast forwarding table related alarm:
ML66(config)#mfib alarm-enable
96.7 mld snooping config-clear
Synopsis
mld snooping config-clear
Description
Use this command to delete all Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping
configuration on the NE. The command also resets the default disabled state of
the MLD snooping.
Command Mode
Examples
Deleting MLD snooping configuration:
ML66#mld snooping config-clear
96.8 mld snooping enable
Synopsis
[no] mld snooping enable
Description
Use this command to enable Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping on the
NE. When MLD snooping is enabled, MLD messages are sent to the switch CPU
for processing. Otherwise, the MLD messages are forwarded as ordinary
multicast packets.
Use the no option to disable MLD snooping on the NE.
Note: While MLD snooping is disabled on the NE, the VLAN-level MLD
snooping settings take no effect.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 869

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling MLD snooping on the NE:
ML66(config)#mld snooping enable
96.9 mld snooping vlan
Synopsis
[no] mld snooping vlan <VLANID> [ ctag <CVID> ]
Description
Use this command to enable Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping on a
VLAN. The command also changes to the (config-mld-snooping-vlan) submode.
Use the no option to disable MLD snooping and to delete the MLD configuration
and the learned group membership information on a VLAN.
Note: When MLD snooping is disabled globally on the NE, snooping can still be
configured per VLAN, but the settings does not take effect until the
snooping is re-enabled globally.
MLD snooping is disabled on all VLANs by default.
Command Mode
Operands


Options
870 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Examples
Enabling MLD snooping on VLAN 2:
ML66(config)#mld snooping vlan 2
ML66(config-mld-snooping-vlan)#
96.10 proxy-reporting
Synopsis
[no] proxy-reporting
Description
Use this command to enable proxy reporting on a VLAN.
Use the no option to disable proxy reporting.
Proxy reporting is disabled by default and the switch performs snooping by

transparently forwarding all IGMP (IPv4), respectively MLD (IPv6) messages
between the hosts and the routers.
Command Mode

vlan)

vlan)
Examples
Enabling proxy reporting in an IPv4 network:
ML66(config-igmp-snooping-vlan)#proxy-reporting
Enabling proxy reporting in an IPv6 network:

ML66(config-mld-snooping-vlan)#proxy-reporting
96.11 query-interval
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 871

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
query-interval <SECONDS>
Description
Use this command to set the query interval of the IGMPv2 (IPv4), respectively
MLDv1 (IPv6) querier routers.
In the presence of an IGMPv2 (IPv4) or MLDv1 (IPv6) querier, the switch uses
the configured values of query-interval and robust to calculate the Host
membership timeout as follows:
Host membership timeout = query interval × robust + Max Resp Time
The Host membership timeout determines how long a port is kept in the
forwarding table for a multicast group, if the last host left without sending an
IGMP Leave or MLD Done message.
Note: If the querier is IGMPv3 (IPv4) or MLDv2 (IPv6), the switch extracts the
query interval and robustness variable of the querier either from the
IGMP General Query or the MLD General Query. The configured values
are ignored.
Command Mode

vlan)

vlan)
Operands
SECONDS Sets the query interval in seconds. The valid range is 1–

Examples
Setting the query interval to 125 seconds in an IPv4 network:
ML66(config-igmp-snooping-vlan)#query-interval 125
Setting the query interval to 125 seconds in an IPv6 network:

ML66(config-mld-snooping-vlan)#query-interval 125
872 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

96.12 robust
Synopsis
robust <COUNT>
Description
Use this command to set the robustness variable of the IGMPv2 (IPv4),
respectively MLDv1 (IPv6) querier routers.
For more information about how to use this value, see the query-interval
command.
Command Mode

vlan)

vlan)
Operands
COUNT Sets the robustness variable. The valid range is 2–7. The
default value is 2.
Examples
Setting the robustness variable to 2 in an IPv4 network:
ML66(config-igmp-snooping-vlan)#robust 2
Setting the robustness variable to 2 in an IPv6 network:

ML66(config-mld-snooping-vlan)#robust 2
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 873

CLI Descriptions
97 SFP Commands
106.
The following command modes are applicable for the Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) commands:
— SFP submode — (sfp)
Table 106 SFP Commands Overview

alarm-threshold configure the SFP alarm thresholds
als specify the Automatic Laser Shutdown
(ALS) mode and to initiate a manual
restart of the laser transmitter
reset reset the default factory alarm
thresholds of the SFP
select select the SFP application
sfp configure the parameters of a selected
SFP
shutdown set the SFP admin status to non-
operating mode
trapenable enable sending notifications
— show sfph
884.
97.1 alarm-threshold
Synopsis
— alarm-threshold { RXPower <LOW-ALARM> <LOW-WARNING> <HIGH-

WARNING> <HIGH-ALARM> | TXBias <LOW-ALARM> <LOW-WARNING>
<HIGH-WARNING> <HIGH-ALARM> | TXPower <LOW-ALARM> <LOW-
WARNING> <HIGH-WARNING> <HIGH-ALARM> | Temperature <LOW-
ALARM> <LOW-WARNING> <HIGH-WARNING> <HIGH-ALARM> |
874 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

SFP Commands
Voltage <LOW-ALARM> <LOW-WARNING> <HIGH-WARNING> <HIGH-

ALARM> }
— [no] alarm-threshold { RXPower | TXBias | TXPower | Temperature |

Voltage }
Description
Use this command to configure the SFP alarm thresholds.
Use the no option to disable the configured SFP alarm thresholds.
Command Mode
SFP submode — (sfp)
Operands
LOW-ALARM Sets the low alarm threshold value.
LOW-WARNING Sets the low warning alarm threshold value.
HIGH-WARNING Sets the high warning alarm threshold value.
HIGH-ALARM Sets the high alarm threshold value.
Options
RXPower Specifies the Rx power of the SFP in mW.
TXBias Specifies the bias current of the SFP in mA.
TXPower Specifies the Tx power of the SFP in mW.
Temperature Specifies the temperature of the SFP in ºC.
Voltage Specifies the supply voltage of the SFP in V.
Examples
Specifying the temperature of the SFP:
ML66(sfp)#alarm-threshold Temperature −45 −40 95 100
97.2 als
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 875

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— als { mode <MODE> | restart <CMD> }
— no als
Description
Use this command to specify the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) mode and to
initiate a manual restart of the laser transmitter.
Note: Configuring the restart interval of the laser is only possible if the ALS
mode is set tho automatic.
Use the no option to set the default ALS mode.
Command Mode
Operands
MODE Specifies the mode of the ALS.
— 1 — Sets the laser to constantly on.
— 2 — Sets the laser to constantly off.
— 3 — Sets automatic mode. Automatic mode is the

default mode of the ALS.
CMD Specifies the length of the restart.
— 1 — Initiates one 2 second restart test, that is, the

laser is restarted once for 2 seconds.


Options
mode The mode of the ALS.
restart The length of the restart.
876 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

SFP Commands
Examples
Setting the laser to constantly on:
ML66(sfp)#als mode 3
97.3 reset
Synopsis
reset { RXPower | TXBias | TXPower | Temperature | Voltage | all }
Description
Use this command to reset the default factory alarm thresholds of the SFP.
Command Mode
Options
RXPower Resets the configured Rx power thresholds of the SFP.
TXBias Resets the configured bias current thresholds of the SFP.
TXPower Resets the configured Tx power thresholds of the SFP.
Temperature Resets the configured temperature thresholds of the SFP.
Voltage Resets the configured supply voltage thresholds of the

SFP.
all Resets all configured thresholds of the SFP.
Examples
Resetting the default factory Rx power threshold of the SFP:
ML66(sfp)#reset RXPower
97.4 select
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 877

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
— select <APPLICATION>
— no select
Description
Use this command to select an SFP application for the SFP, which has just been
plugged in.
Note: If multiple applications are available, the user has to select one
supported application before the SFP is taken into operation. If only one
application is available, the system automatically selects that
application.
Use the no option to delete the selected SFP application type if multiple
application types are available.
Command Mode
Operands
APPLICATION The SFP application. The value of the SFP application

can be displayed by using show sfph subslot
command.
Examples
Selecting the SFP application:
ML66(sfp)#select 0x380c
97.5 sfp
Synopsis
[no] sfp <SLOT/SUBSLOT>
Description
Use this command to change to the (sfp) submode for a selected SFP.
Use the no option to clear the SFP configuration for unplugged SFPs.
878 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

SFP Commands
Command Mode
Operands
SLOT/SUBSLOT The Slot and Subslot value of the SFP, where the format
is Slot/Subslot.
Examples
Changing to the (sfp) submode for the SFP in subslot 6/3:
ML66(config)#sfp 6/3
ML66(sfp)#
97.6 shutdown
Synopsis
[no] shutdown
Description
Use this command to set the SFP admin status to non-operating mode.
Use the no option to set the SFP status to operating mode.
Command Mode
Examples
Setting the SFP admin status to operating mode:
ML66(sfp)#no shutdown
97.7 trapenable
Synopsis
[no] trapenable
Description
Use this command to enable sending notifications.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 879

CLI Descriptions
Use the no option to disable sending notifications.
Command Mode
Examples
Enabling notifications:
ML66(sfp)#trapenable
880 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Report Commands
98 Report Commands
107.
The following command mode is applicable for the report commands:
— Exec mode — >
Table 107 Report Commands Overview

bug-report generate a bug report and upload it to
an FTP server
generate-report generate a report of the configuration
and inventory data of the NE
98.1 bug-report
Synopsis
bug-report description <DESC> ftp <NAME> <OPTIONALS>
Description
Use this command to generate a bug report and upload it to an FTP server.
The parameters of the bug report can be configured using mandatory and
optional parameters. The optional parameters can be used in any combination
and in any order, independently of one another.
By default, all parameters are included, and a zip archive is used as a container.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
DESCRIPTION The bug description, with a maximum of 1,000

characters. If the description contains more than one
word, it must be entered between quotation marks.
NAME The FTP server to upload to. The server must already be
configured in the FTP manager of the node. The
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 881

CLI Descriptions
parameters value should be the name of the desired

server configured in the FTP manager.
OPTIONALS The following optional parameters can be specified:
— ftp-path <PATH> — Specifies the target directory

on the FTP server.
— nefiles <yes/no> — Includes the NE log files in the

bug report. The default value is yes.
— neinfo <yes/no> — Includes NE information in the

bug report. The default value is yes.
— configreport <yes/no> — Includes the

configuration report log in the bug report. The default
value is yes.
— snmpwalk <yes/no> — Includes the SNMP walk log

in the bug report. The default value is yes.
— nrlogs <NUM> — Specifies the number of recent

backup log files to collect. The default value is 5.
— nrnotif <NUM> — Specifies the number of recent

backup notification history files to collect. The default
value is 10.
— format <zip/tar> — Specifies the bug report archive

format. The default format is zip.
Options
description Specifies the bug description.
ftp Specifies the FTP server to upload to.
Examples
Generating a default bug report and uploading it to the FTP server named
remote:
ML66>bug-report description "Example of bug report collection" ftp remote
Generating a bug report with optional parameters and uploading it to a specified

directory of the FTP server named remote:
ML66>bug-report description "Example of bug report collection" ftp remote snmpwalk →
no ftp-path data/bug_reports
882 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Report Commands
98.2 generate-report
Synopsis
generate-report report-data-content <REPORT-CATEGORIES>
Description
Use this command to generate XML report and transfer it to FTP server defined
for the report service. The report contains the configuration of the specified
categories or all of them if no category is specified.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
REPORT-CATEGORIES
The following categories can be specified:
— all
— ces
— equipment
— ethernet
— inventory
— ne
— pdh
— rl
— sdh
— security
Examples
Generating report for NE, equipment, and inventory:
ML66>generate-report report-data-content ne equipment inventory
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 883

CLI Descriptions
99 Show Commands
108.
The following command modes are applicable for the monitoring commands:
— Exec mode — >
— Ethernet Alarms configuration submode — (config-eth-alarms)
— License Request submode — (license-request)
— Ethernet Service OAM submode — (cfm)
— Ethernet Service OAM MD submode — (cfm-md)
— Ethernet Service OAM MD MA MEP PM submode — (cfm-md-ma-mep-pm)
— Near End Radio Link Terminal XPIC submode — (config-rlt-xpic)
— Local Access configuration submode — (interface-local-access)
— PTP configuration submode — (config-ptp)
— LLDP interface level configuration submode — (config-lldp)
— CES Server configuration submode — (config-ces-server)
884 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Table 108 Monitoring Commands Overview

show (PW) list the Pseudo-Wires (PWs) hosted on the
Circuit Emulation Service (CES) server
show (Ethernet display configuration information and the
alarms) status of the Ethernet alarms
show (license) display the requested licenses
show (license display the currently monitored licenses
monitoring)
show aaa accounting display session accounting configuration
network default group
show aaaPolicyStatus display the status of the Authentication,
Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) policy
show access-list display access lists
show alarms display alarm information
show arp display Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
Management Information Base (MIB)
show backplane display configuration information for a
backplane
show bandwidth- display the configured Bandwidth Notification
notification Message (BNM) instances
show bandwidth- display a brief summary of the configured
notification brief BNM instances
show bgp display BGP route information
show bgp community display unicast route information that match
communities within an IPv4 environment
show bgp community- display BGP route information that match
list specified community list
show bgp dampening display detailed BGP dampening information
show bgp filter-list display BGP routes conforming to the specified
filter list
show bgp inconsistent- display BGP routes with inconsistent
as Autonomous System (AS) paths
show bgp ipv4 display unicast route information for a single
IP in an IPv4 environment
show bgp label mode display detailed information about label mode
globals settings at a global level
show bgp mpls label display the global BGP MPLS label mode and
mode the VRF label mode
show bgp neighbors display detailed information on TCP and BGP
neighbor connections
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 885

CLI Descriptions
show bgp nexthop- display BGP nexthop-tracking status

tracking
show bgp nexthop- display BGP nexthop-tree details
tree-details
show bgp paths display BGP path information
show bgp prefix-list display unicast route information that match a
prefix list within an IPv4 environment.
show bgp quote- display unicast route information for an AS
regexp path regular expression within an IPv4
environment
show bgp regexp display unicast route information that match
the AS path regular expression within an IPv4
environment
show bgp summary display BGP neighbor status summary
show bgp vpnv4 all display information about all VPNv4 NLRIs
show bgp vpnv4
details
show bgp vpnv4 rd display information for a VPNv4 Route
Distinguisher
show bgp vpnv4 vrf display BGP VPNv4 routing or forwarding
instance information
show board display configuration information for a board
show bridge-basics display bridge basic configuration
show bridge-port display bridge-port configuration
show bridge-port display bridge port settings of the interface
show capability vrf-lite display Virtual Routing and Forwarding lite
(VRF-lite) support status
show carrier- display the Carrier Termination (CT)
termination configuration
show carrier- display CT capability information
termination-capability
show ces server display available CES servers and the PWs
available on them
show ces tdm-profile display available TDM configuration profiles
show cfm alarms display active Ethernet Service Operation,
Administration, and Maintenance (OAM)
alarms
show cfm ma display a Maintenance Association (MA)
show cfm md display a Maintenance Domain (MD)
show cfm mep display a Maintenance End Point (MEP)
886 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
show cfm mep-peer display MEP peers or remote MEPs

show cfm mip display a Maintenance Intermediate Point
(MIP)
show cliprotocol display the current CLI protocol setting
show clns is-neighbors display all IS neighbor adjacencies
show clns neighbors display IS neighbor adjacencies
show clock display the system clock
show config display configuration information
show config-changed- display the value of the timer set for the NE
timer Configuration Changed event
show config- display the configuration information list
validation-info
show confirm display the confirmed IP address
show confirm timer display the status of the confirm timer
show connect-cc display TDM cross-connections
show copy display the status of ongoing software updates
show counters display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP) interface level counters of the current
Ethernet interface
show current display current mode settings
show dcn-lan-ctag display double tagged Data Communication
Network (DCN) traffic
show dcn-mode display the current DCN mode
show debug display debugging configuration
show dm display Delay Measurement (DM) statistics
show display the status of local users (admin_user
enableLocalUsers and view_user) when centralized
authentication is configured
show epl display configured Layer 1 connections
show erp-group display the configured Ethernet Ring
Protection (ERP) rings
show ferlt display the RLT configuration at far end
show fetdm display information regarding TDM at far end
show file-integrity- display the status of the file integrity
alarm on page 955 monitoring function
show ftpprotocol display the current default FTP protocol
setting
show ftp active display the associated FTP server for all
services
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 887

CLI Descriptions
show ftp activeftp display the default FTP server

show ftp configtable display the FTP server entries of the FTP
configuration table
show history display the command history
show igmp snooping display the global status of IGMP snooping on
the NE
show igmp snooping display IGMP snooping configuration
config
show igmp snooping display a list of IGMP multicast groups and the
group associated member ports on a specific VLAN
show igmp snooping display the multicast router ports on a specific
mrouter VLAN
show igmp snooping display IGMP snooping status on a specific
vlan VLAN
show interface (DCN) display the configuration and counter values of
a DCN or a router interface
show interface (PTP) display the available interfaces capable of
time-stamping and their statuse
show interface display the current configuration of the
ethernet Ethernet interface
show interface display Ethernet PM data
ethernet-pm
show interface display status information for all Ethernet
ethernet status interfaces
show interface ip display the IP parameters of an IP interface
show interface serial display the configuration parameters of a
serial (PPP) interface
show investigation- display the status of additional
mode troubleshooting possibilities
show ip forwarding display IP forwarding status
show ip host interface display the host interface configuration for
DCN-Mode Routed
show ip host mtu display the host Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) configuration
show ip interface host display the configuration of the current host
interface
show ip isis igp- display the IS-IS IGP shortcut LSP entries
shortcut-lsp
show ip isis route display IS-IS routing table for IPv4
888 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
show ip isis route igp- display the IS-IS IGP shortcut routing table
shortcut
show ip ospf display general information about OSPF
routing processes
show ip ospf border- display the Area Border Routers (ABRs) and
routers Autonomous System Border Routers (ASBRs)
for an OSPF instance
show ip ospf database display a database summary for OSPF
information
show ip ospf igp- display Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP)
shortcut-lsp Shortcut Labeled Switch Paths (LSPs) used by
OSPF
show ip ospf igp- display IGP Shortcut routes calculated by
shortcut-route OSPF
show ip ospf interface display interface information for OSPF
show ip ospf multi- display multi-area adjacency information for
area-adjacencies OSPF instances
show ip ospf neighbor display information on OSPF neighbors
show ip ospf route display OSPF routing table
show ip ospf virtual- display virtual link information
links
show ip prefix-list display IP prefix lists
show ip route display the IP routing table for a protocol or
from a particular table
show ip vrf display Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)
information
show iptables display IPv4 firewall status information
show ip6tables display IPv6 firewall status information
show isis counter display the IS-IS system counter entry MIBs
show isis database display link state database information
show isis interface display detailed interface information
show isis topology display IS-IS topology information
show l1-bonding display members and configured mappings for
a specific L1 bonding group or for all L1
bonding groups
show lag display Link Aggregation Group (LAG)
show lag lacpstats display Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) statistics
show lag status display status information about the Link
Aggregation Group (LAG)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 889

CLI Descriptions
show lan-dcn display information about the LAN-DCN

network
show lan-dcn ip display information about the DCN IP network
and interfaces
show lan-dcn ipv6 display information about the DCN IPv6
network and interfaces
show lan-dcn ipv6 display the configured Dynamic Host
dhcp relayaddress Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server address
show lan-dcn ipv6 display the running state of the DHCP relay
dhcp status agent
show ldp display basic Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)
attributes defined for the current Label Switch
Router (LSR)
show ldp adjacency display all the adjacencies for the current LSR
show ldp downstream display the status of all downstream sessions
and the label information exchanged
show ldp fec display all Forwarding Equivalence Classes
(FECs) known to the current LSR
show ldp inter-area- all FECs using the LPM-based mapping
fecs procedure
show ldp interface display the list of all interfaces on the current
LSR, and to indicate whether a given interface
is label-switching or not
show ldp lsp display LDP LSPs and, optionally, advertise-
label information
show ldp session display all sessions established between the
current LSR and other LSRs
show ldp statistics display LDP packet statistics
show ldp targeted- display the targeted peers configured on the
peers current LSR
show ldp upstream display the status of all upstream sessions and
label information exchanged
show legalnotice display the customized legal notice
show license install display the status of the License Key File (LKF)
status installation
show license restrict- display the current status of the unlocked
unlocked-period period restriction for control_user
show license status display the licensing status of the NE
show license status display detailed information on license usage
ports on the NE
890 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
show license display status information of the licensing

unlockedperiod unlocked periods
show license upload display the upload status of the License
status Request File (LRF)
show linktrace display linktrace results
show lldp config display the current Link Layer Discovery
Protocol (LLDP) configuration
show lldp counters display LLDP counters
show lldp local-info display the LLDP-related local system
information that is advertised to LLDP
neighbors
show lldp neighbors display the LLDP information received from
LLDP neighbors
show local-info display the LLDP-related local system
information that is advertised to LLDP
neighbors
show display the idle timeout for local users
localuseridletimer
show loopback display loopback results
show mac-address- display MAC address table
table
show mac-whitelist display MAC white lists
show memory display information about memory processes
show mfib status display the status of the IP multicast
forwarding table
show mld snooping display the global status of MLD snooping on
the NE
show mld snooping display MLD snooping configuration
config
show mld snooping display a list of MLD multicast groups and the
group associated member ports on a specific VLAN
show mld snooping display the multicast router ports on a specific
mrouter VLAN
show mld snooping display MLD snooping status on a specific
vlan VLAN
show mpls display MPLS data
show mpls cross- display detailed information for all entries
connect-table created in the MPLS cross-connect table
show mpls forwarding- display Diffserv configuration information and
table the forwarding table entries
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 891

CLI Descriptions
show mpls ftn-table display MPLS FEC-To-NHLFE (FTN) table

information
show mpls ilm-table display MPLS Incoming Label Map (ILM) table
information
show mpls in-segment- display detailed information about all entries
table in the ILM table
show mpls interface display all interfaces bound to an MPLS
interface
show mpls ldp display MPLS Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP) data
show mpls mapped- display MPLS mapped routes
routes
show mpls out- display detailed information of out-segment
segment-table entries table
show mpls vc-table display configured virtual circuit components
show mpls vrf-table display detailed information for all the
installed FTN entries for a Virtual Routing and
Forwarding (VRF) instance
show mst display spanning tree Multiple Spanning Tree
(MST) configuration
show neighbors display the LLDP information received from
LLDP neighbors
show netstat display netstatistics
show network-synch display status information about the Netsync
status and configured Netsync Nominees
show notification-log display notification-log
show ntp-status display NTP configuration and status
show pingtargethost display the Ping Target Host address
show policing display policing configuration
show policing- display policing-bandwidth profiles
bandwidth-profile
show policing-cos- display policing Class of Service (CoS) groups
groups configuration
show policing-cos- display policing CoS group mapping
group-mapping configuration
show policing-vlan- display policing VLAN groups configuration
groups
show policing-vlan- display policing VLAN group mapping
group-mapping configuration
show processes display running processes
892 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
show ptp alarms-and- display alarm and event status of the Precision
events Time Protocol (PTP) function
show ptp clock display clock status information
show ptp clock current- display the current values in the current
ds Dataset (DS)
show ptp clock default- display the current values in the default DS
ds
show ptp clock parent- display the current values in the parent DS
ds
show ptp clock settings display the general settings of the clock
show ptp clock time- display the current values in time properties
properties-ds DS
show ptp clock-port display the clock port related objects
show ptp config display PTP configuration
show ptp interface display the available interfaces capable of
time-stamping
show ptp peers display the connected peers
show ptp sync display the status of the frequency
synchronization signal that is recovered from
the IEEE1588 session and can be used as
nominee for the Network Synchronization
function
show qos display QoS settings of the interface
show queue-set-profile display the queue-set profile settings
show display the IP protocol type of the Remote
radius_address_Type Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)
server
show radius-server display RADIUS server configuration
config
show radius-server display RADIUS server statistics
statistics
show radius-server display RADIUS server status
status
show rf-frequency display the RF parameters for MMU 1001 and
MMU 1002
show rf-power display the RF Power data for MMU 1001 and
MMU 1002
show rlt display the RLT configuration at near end
show route-map display route-map information
show router-id display the router ID common for OSPF, BGP,
LDP, and so on processes
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 893

CLI Descriptions
show rsvp display RSVP information

show rsvp admin- display RSVP Administrative Group
groups information
show rsvp interface display RSVP interface information
show rsvp neighbor display RSVP neighbor information
show rsvp nexthop- display nexthop information cached in RSVP
cache
show rsvp path display RSVP path information
show rsvp session display RSVP session information
show rsvp session display the count of existing RSVP sessions on
count a router
show rsvp session display RSVP sessions that end at a router
egress
show rsvp session display RSVP sessions that originate from the
ingress router
show rsvp session display RSVP sessions for an LSP specified by
<LSP-NAME> the LSP name
show rsvp session display RSVP sessions that pass through the
transit router
show rsvp statistics display RSVP statistics
show rsvp summary- display RSVP Summary Refresh information
refresh
show rsvp trunk display RSVP trunk information
show rsvp version display the RSVP version
show rsyslog display the remote syslog configuration for
alarms and events
show rsyslog6 display the remote syslog configuration for
alarms and events for IPv6
show rsyslogsec display the remote syslog configuration for
security events
show rsyslogsec6 display the remote syslog configuration for
security events for IPv6
show running-config display currently running configuration file
show running-config display router configuration
router
show rx-frequency display the Rx frequency for MMU 1001 and
MMU 1002
show scheduler-profile display scheduler profiles
show secure-ssh display the status of the file ssh-server security
function
894 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
show sfph display Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP)

information
show slot-capacity display the maximum supported, respectively
the allocated backplane Ethernet capacity
between the NPU and APU slots
show display the SNMPv3 authentication protocol
snmpv3authprotocol
show display the SNMPv3 privacy protocol
snmpv3privprotocol
show snmpv3protocol display the SNMPv3 data encryption type
show spanning-tree display the current spanning-tree
configuration
show spectrum- display the measured values of the latest sub-
diagnostics-result on band or channel scan
page 1096
show spectrum- display the status of sub-band and channel
diagnostics-status on scans
page 1096
show startup-config display current saved configuration
show status display status information
show strongpasswd display strong password enforcement
show subrack display configuration information for a subrack
show system display configuration information for the
system
show sys_notes display the added information related to the
site
show display the IP protocol type of the Terminal
tacacs_address_Type Access Controller Access Control System Plus
(TACACS+) address
show tacacs-server display TACACS+ server configuration
config
show tacacs-server display TACACS+ server statistics
statistics
show tacacs-server display TACACS+ server status
status
show taps display Traffic Aware Power Save (TAPS)
configuration status
show tdm display information regarding TDM at near
end
show tdm-interfaces display all the available TDM interfaces that
can be used in cross-connection for a specific
slot
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 895

CLI Descriptions
show temp display the temperature of the unit

show timezone display the time zone currently set
show twamp sessions display configured Two-Way Active
Measurement Protocol (TWAMP) sessions
show twamp statistics display TWAMP statistics
show tx-frequency display the Tx frequency for MMU 1001 and
MMU 1002
show userio display user Input/Output (I/O) configuration
and status of the NPU
show version display software and hardware revision
information
show vlan display Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)
show wred-profile display WRED profiles
show x display log information
show xpic display information regarding the XPIC pair
associated with the RLT
99.1 show (PW)
Synopsis
show
Description
Use this command to list the Pseudo-Wires (PWs) hosted on the Circuit
Emulation Service (CES) server.
The related configuration commands can be found in the following section:
— CES Commands
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the PWs hosted on the CES server:
ML66(config-ces-server)#show
896 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.2 show (Ethernet alarms)
Synopsis
show { current | loop }
Description
Use this command to display configuration information and the status of the
Ethernet alarms.
— Ethernet Commands: Security and Admission Control
Command Mode
Ethernet Alarms configuration submode — (config-eth-alarms)
Options
current Displays the current mode settings.
loop Displays the currently active loop alarms.
Examples
Displaying configuration information:
ML66(config-eth-alarms)#show current
99.3 show (license)
Synopsis
show
Description
Use this command to display the requested licenses.
— License Handling Commands
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 897

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Table 109 Displayed Information of the Requested Licenses

Ins Displays the number of the installed licenses.
Us Displays the number of the used licenses.
e
Qt Displays how many new licenses are requested by the License Request
y File (LRF). The default value is the number of the missing licenses.
Displaying the amount of the requested licenses:

ML66(license-request)#show
Prod NO |Product Name |Ins|Use|Qty| Status
------------+--------------------------------------------+---+---+---+--------
FAL1241479|Emergency Unlock | 0| 1| 1| Ok
FAL1241480|Maintenance Unlock | 0| 1| 1| Ok
FAL1242515|M-L 669x R1 Basic SW | 1| 1| 0| Ok
FAL1242517|M-L 6600 Eth ProviderMode | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242518|M-L 6600 Eth SOAM FM/PM | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242519|M-L 6600 IGMP snooping | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242520|M-L 6600 1588v2 BasicSync | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242521|M-L 6600 1588v2 Enh Sync | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242522|M-L 6600 1588v2 Sync Distr | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242523|M-L 6600 PDH Network Prot | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242524|M-L 6600 Enable Eth port | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242525|M-L 6600 UG 25to50Mbps | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242536|M-L 6600 1+1 RL Prot | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242537|M-L 6600 XPIC | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242538|M-L 6600 RL Bonding | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242540|M-L 6600 Header Compr | 1| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242541|M-L 6600 2nd carrier | 1| 1| 0| Ok
FAL1242542|M-L 6600 TX HP | 0| 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242543|M-L 6600 Mod Agile RAU Xu | 0| 0| 0| Ok
99.4 show (license monitoring)
Synopsis
show [monitoring-auto-unlock]
898 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display the currently monitored licenses and their status.
— License Handling Commands in Monitoring Mode
Command Mode
License Monitoring submode — (license-monitoring), at admin level
Options
monitoring-auto-unlock
Displays the current status of automatic license
provisioning.
Examples
Table 110 Displayed Information of the Monitored Licenses

Use Displays the number of the used
licenses.
Ins Displays the number of the installed
licenses.
Unl Displays the total number of unlocked
licenses for the feature.
Sum Displays the total number of licenses
unlocked and installed.
Displaying the number of the currently monitored licenses:

ML66(license-monitoring)#show
NE License Status: Ok
NE License Mode: Locked
RMM fingerprint: 6801135122667f051120ffff
Prod NO |Product Name |Use|Ins| Status
------------+------------------------------------------------+---+---+--------
FAL1241479|Emergency Unlock | 1| 0| Ok
FAL1241480|Maintenance Unlock | 1| 0| Ok
FAL1242515|M-L 669x R1 Basic SW | 1| 1| Ok
FAL1242517|M-L 6600 Eth ProviderMode | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242518|M-L 6600 Eth SOAM FM/PM | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242519|M-L 6600 IGMP snooping | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242520|M-L 6600 1588v2 BasicSync | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242521|M-L 6600 1588v2 Enh Sync | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242522|M-L 6600 1588v2 Sync Distr | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242523|M-L 6600 PDH Network Prot | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242524|M-L 6600 Enable Eth port | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242525|M-L 6600 UG 25to50Mbps | 0| 0| Ok
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 899

CLI Descriptions

FAL1242536|M-L 6600 1+1 RL Prot | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242537|M-L 6600 XPIC | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242538|M-L 6600 RL Bonding | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242540|M-L 6600 Header Compr | 0| 1| Ok
FAL1242541|M-L 6600 2nd carrier | 1| 1| Ok
FAL1242542|M-L 6600 TX HP | 0| 0| Ok
FAL1242543|M-L 6600 Mod Agile RAU Xu | 0| 0| Ok
Displaying the current status of automatic license provisioning:

ML66(license-monitoring)#show monitoring-auto-unlock
Automatic license provisioning is disable
99.5 show aaa accounting network default group
Synopsis
show aaa accounting network default group {tacacs+ | radius}
Description
Use this command to display session accounting configuration.
— Security Commands
Command Mode
Options
tacacs+ Displays Terminal Access Controller Access-Control

System Plus (TACACS+) session accounting
configuration.
radius Displays Remote Authentication Dial In User Service

(RADIUS) session accounting configuration.
Examples
Displaying TACACS+ session accounting configuration:
900 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
ML66#show aaa accounting network default group tacacs+

tacacs session accounting sent at session start and stop
99.6 show aaaPolicyStatus
Synopsis
show aaaPolicyStatus
Description
Use this command to display the status of the Authentication, Authorization, and
Accounting (AAA) policy.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of the AAA policy:
ML66>show aaaPolicyStatus
AAAPolicyStatus is radiusUpLocUsrEn
99.7 show access-list
Synopsis
show access-list
Description
Use this command to display access lists.
— Router Basic Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 901

CLI Descriptions
Examples
ML66#show access-list
99.8 show alarms
Synopsis
show alarms
Description
Use this command to show alarm information.
— Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Interfaces
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying alarm information:
ML66>show alarms
Alarm ID 3
Severity critical
Alarm Type equipment Alarm
Alarm Time 2000-2-1 23:52:6.1 UTC +0:0
Source SFP 1000BASE-LX (SMF 10 km) I-t 1/4.4
Specific Problem SFP RX Power Low at NPU1002
Alarm ID 5
Severity major
Alarm Type equipment Alarm
Alarm Time 2000-2-1 23:52:14.9 UTC +0:0
Source MINI-LINK Traffic Node ML66-172-19-82-100
Specific Problem Power Failure (upper input)
99.9 show arp
Synopsis
— show lan-dcn arp
— show arp [vrf <VRF>]
or
— show arp lan-dcn
902 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— show arp router [vrf <VRF>]
Description
Use this command to display the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
If no parameter is specified, the command displays the ARP cache of the router
network for the default Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF).
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
lan-dcn Displays the ARP cache of the LAN-DCN network.
vrf Displays the router ARP cache for the VRF instance.
router Displays the ARP cache of the router network.
Examples
Displaying the ARP cache of the LAN-DCN network:
ML66>show arp lan-dcn
ARP output:
Address HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask Iface →
Port CVLAN SVLAN
10.41.96.1 ether 00:30:88:04:1e:4d C 1/6/0 →
0 0 0
Displaying the ARP cache of the router network for the default VRF:
ML66>show arp router
ARP output:
Address HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask Iface
192.168.35.32 ether ac:60:b6:a1:e5:1c C 1/6/4.50→
0
99.10 show backplane
Synopsis
show backplane <RACK> [ hw | eeprom ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 903

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display configuration information for a backplane.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RACK The number of the rack.
Options
hw Displays hardware configuration information.
eeprom Displays Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only

Memory (EEPROM) configuration information.
Examples
Displaying hardware configuration information for rack 1:
ML66>show backplane 1 hw
EEPROM identifiers:
Board Product Number: ROJR 609 006/1
Board Revision: R1E
Product Serial Number: TY12749610
Date of Manufacturing: 20110623
Place of Manufacturing: TY1
SPI CPLD Product Number:
SPI CPLD Revision:
Power Capability: 3
99.11 show bandwidth-notification
Synopsis
— show bandwidth-notification
— show bandwidth-notification md <mdName>
— show bandwidth-notification md <mdName> ma <maName>
Description
Use this command to display the configured Bandwidth Notification Message
(BNM) instances.
Running the command without any options all parameters are displayed.
904 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Ethernet Bandwidth Notification
Command Mode
Operands
mdName The name of the Maintenance Domain (MD).
maName The name of the Maintenance Association (MA).
Options
md Displays the configured BNM instances in the MD.
ma Displays the configured BNM instances in the MA.
Examples
Displaying the configured BNM instances with all parameters:
ML66#show bandwidth-notification
md string md1
ma string ma1
mep 150
interface 1/3/2
format itu-t
hold time 2
interval 1s
priority 0
level 5
portID 456
enable
send
full-link-message always
failed-link-message
send-frequently-after-hold-time
md string md2
99.12 show bandwidth-notification brief
Synopsis
— show bandwidth-notification brief
— show bandwidth-notification brief md <mdName>
— show bandwidth-notification brief md <mdName> ma <maName>
— show bandwidth-notification brief md <mdName> ma <maName> mep

<mepId>
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 905

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display a brief summary of the configured Bandwidth
Notification Message (BNM) instances.
Running the command without any options all parameters are displayed.
Command Mode
Operands
mdName The name of the Maintenance Domain (MD).
maName The name of the Maintenance Association (MA).
mepId The ID of the Maintenance End Point (MEP).
Options
md Displays a brief summary of the configured BNM

instances in the MD.
ma Displays a brief summary of the configured BNM

instances in the MA.
mep Displays a brief summary of the configured BNM

instances in the MEP.
Examples
Displaying a brief summary of the configured BNM instances:
ML66#show bandwidth-notification brief
MD MA MEP interface enable
md1 ma1 140 1/3/1 disabled
md1 ma2 150 1/3/2 enabled
md2 ma3 160 1/2/1 enabled
99.13 show bgp
Synopsis
show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast}
906 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display BGP route information.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying BGP route information:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 labeled-unicast
99.14 show bgp community
Synopsis
— show bgp community
— show bgp ipv4 unicast community
— show bgp community [<AA:NN> | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export]
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} community [<NUMBER> |

local-AS | no-advertise | no-export]
Description
Use this command to display unicast route information that match communities
within an IPv4 environment.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
AA:NN A valid value for a community number.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 907

CLI Descriptions
Options
ipv4 Sets IPv4 address family.
labeled-unicast Indicates the address family modifier as labeled-unicast.
local-AS Do not send outside local Autonomous System (AS) (well-

known community).
no-advertise Do not advertise to any peer (well-known community).
no-export Do not export to next AS (well-known community).
Examples
Displaying unicast route information that match communities:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast community 12:34
99.15 show bgp community-list
Synopsis
— show bgp community-list <NAME> exact-match
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} community-list <NAME>

[exact-match]
Description
Use this command to display BGP route information that match specified
community list.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NAME The name of the community list.
908 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
exact-match Sets that the exact match of the communities are

displayed.
Examples
Displaying BGP route information that match specified community list:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast community-list mylist exact-match
99.16 show bgp dampening
Synopsis
— show bgp dampening {dampened-paths | flap-statistics | parameters}
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} dampening {dampened-

paths | flap-statistics | parameters}
Description
Use this command to display detailed BGP dampening information.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
dampened-paths Displays paths suppressed due to dampening.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 909

CLI Descriptions
flap-statistics Displays flap statistics of routes.
parameters Displays details of configured dampening parameters.
Examples
Displaying detailed BGP dampening information:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast dampening dampened-paths
99.17 show bgp filter-list
Synopsis
— show bgp filter-list <NAME>
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} filter-list <NAME>
Description
Use this command to display BGP routes conforming to the specified filter list.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NAME The name of the regular-expression access list.
Options
Examples
Displaying BGP routes conforming to the specified filter list:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast filter-list mylist
910 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.18 show bgp inconsistent-as
Synopsis
— show bgp inconsistent-as
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} inconsistent-as
Description
Use this command to display BGP routes with inconsistent Autonomous System
(AS) paths.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying BGP routes with inconsistent AS paths:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast inconsistent-as
99.19 show bgp ipv4
Synopsis
show bgp ipv4 unicast {<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> [longer-
prefixes] }
Description
Use this command to display unicast route information in an IPv4 environment.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 911

CLI Descriptions
Operands
is <A.B.C.D> .

<A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
longer-prefixes Displays route and more specific routes.
Examples
Displaying unicast route information:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 multicast 1.2.3.4
99.20 show bgp label mode globals
Synopsis
show bgp label mode globals
Description
Use this command to display detailed information about label mode settings at a
global level.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show bgp label mode globals
912 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.21 show bgp mpls label mode
Synopsis
show bgp mpls label mode [vrf <VRF>]
Description
Use this command to display the global BGP MPLS label mode and the Virtual
Routing and Forwarding (VRF) label mode. The VRF label mode configuration of
per-vrf is in preference to the global configuration of per-prefix.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
ML66>show bgp mpls label mode vrf vrf_1

BGP vpnv4 label allocation global mode: per-prefix
BGP vpnv6 label allocation global mode: per-prefix
VRF Address-family Mode

vrf_1 bgp-vpnv4 per-prefix
bgp-vpnv6 per-prefix
99.22 show bgp neighbors
Synopsis
— show bgp neighbors [<IPADDR> [advertised-routes | received

prefix-filter | received-routes | routes] ]
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} neighbors [<IPADDR>

[advertised-routes | received prefix-filter | received-routes |
routes] ]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 913

CLI Descriptions
— show bgp vpn4 neighbors <IPADDR> {advertised-routes | routes}
Description
Use this command to display detailed information on TCP and BGP neighbor
connections.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of the neighbor, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
Options
advertised-routes
Displays the routes advertised to a BGP neighbor.
received-routes Displays the received routes from a neighbor. To display

all the received routes from the neighbor, configure the
BGP soft reconfigure first.
received prefix-filter
Displays the prefix list filter.
routes Displays all accepted routes learned from neighbors.
Examples
Displaying detailed information about the routes advertised to a BGP neighbor:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast neighbors 1.2.3.4 advertised-routes
99.23 show bgp nexthop-tracking
914 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show bgp nexthop-tracking
Description
Use this command to display BGP nexthop-tracking status.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Display BGP nexthop-tracking status:
ML66#show bgp nexthop-tracking
99.24 show bgp nexthop-tree-details
Synopsis
show bgp nexthop-tree-details
Description
Use this command to display BGP nexthop-tree details.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying BGP nexthop-tree details:
ML66#show bgp nexthop-tree-details
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 915

CLI Descriptions
99.25 show bgp paths
Synopsis
— show bgp paths
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} paths
Description
Use this command to display BGP path information.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
Examples
Displaying BGP path information:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast paths
99.26 show bgp prefix-list
Synopsis
— show bgp prefix-list <NAME>
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} prefix-list <NAME>
Description
Use this command to display unicast route information that match a prefix list
within an IPv4 environment.
916 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NAME The name of the IP prefix list.
Options
Examples
Displaying unicast route information that match a prefix list:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast prefix-list mylist
99.27 show bgp quote-regexp
Synopsis
— show bgp quote-regexp <NAME>
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} quote-regexp <REGEXP>
Description
Use this command to display unicast route information for an Autonomous
System (AS) path regular expression within an IPv4 environment.
Note: Use quotes to enclose the regular expression.
— BGP Commands
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 917

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
REGEXP A regular-expression to match the BGP AS paths.
Options
Examples
Displaying unicast route information for an AS path regular expression:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast quote-regexp “IPI”
99.28 show bgp regexp
Synopsis
— show bgp regexp <REGEXP>
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} regexp <REGEXP>
Description
Use this command to display unicast route information that match the
Autonomous System (AS) path regular expression within an IPv4 environment.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
REGEXP A regular-expression to match the BGP AS paths.
918 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
Examples
Displaying unicast route information that match the AS path regular expression:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast regexp myexpression
99.29 show bgp summary
Synopsis
— show bgp summary
— show bgp ipv4 {unicast | labeled-unicast} summary
Description
Use this command to display BGP neighbor status summary.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
Examples
Display BGP neighbor status summary:
ML66#show bgp ipv4 unicast summary
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 919

CLI Descriptions
99.30 show bgp vpnv4 all
Synopsys
— show bgp vpnv4 all [{<NETWORK> | summary | tags}]
Description
Use this command to display information about all VPNv4 NLRIs.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NETWORK The network of which the information is displayed in the

BGP routing table. The format is <A.B.C.D>.
Options
summary Displays the summary BGP neighbor status.
tags Displays BGP tags for prefixes.
Examples
ML66>show bgp vpnv4 all summary
99.31 show bgp vpnv4 details
Synopsys
— show bgp vpnv4 details
Description
Use this command to display detailed information about all VPNv4 Routes.
920 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show bgp vpnv4 details
99.32 show bgp vpnv4 rd
Synopsys
— show bgp vpnv4 rd <RD> [{<NETWORK> | label | summary}]
Description
Use this command to display information for a VPNv4 Route Distinguisher.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands

as follows:
arbitrary number. For example, 100:1.
— A 32-bit IP address and an arbitrary number. For

example, 192.16.10.1:1.

Options
label Displays BGP tags for prefixes.
summary Displays the summary of BGP neighbor status.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 921

CLI Descriptions
Examples
ML66>show bgp vpnv4 rd 100:1 summary
99.33 show bgp vpnv4 vrf
Synopsys
— show bgp vpnv4 vrf <VRF> [{<NETWORK> | label | summary}]
Description
Use this command to display BGP VPNv4 routing or forwarding instance
information.
— BGP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands

Options
label Displays Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) labels for

prefixes.
summary Displays the summary BGP neighbor status.
Examples
ML66>show bgp vpnv4 vrf vrf_1 label
99.34 show board
Synopsis
show board <R/S> [status | hw | eeprom | config]
922 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display configuration information for a board.
Use the command without any options to display all information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
R/S The Rack and Slot values, where the format is <Rack/
Slot>.
Options
status Displays the status of the board.
hw Displays hardware configuration information.
eeprom Displays EEPROM configuration information.
config Displays configuration information.
Examples
Displaying the hardware configuration for 1/6:
ML66>show board 1/6
EEPROM identifiers:
Board Product Number: ROJ 208 1323/1
Board Revision: P1E
Product Serial Number: A2310FN9LD
Place of Manufacturing: A23
SPI CPLD Product Number: CDAR 101 027/22
SPI CPLD Revision: R1A04
Primary/First MAC Address: AC:60:B6:9F:D3:7B
PCI FPGA Product Number:
PCI FPGA Revision:
Power Capability: 0
TDM BB Variant: 15
Load Module SW Product: CXP 902 9630/1
Load Module SW Min Rev: R1A01
Last MAC Address: AC:60:B6:9F:D3:AA
PRI Status:
APV-NP/NPV: 1
Displaying the hardware configuration for LTU 1002 1/11 with ETSI:
ML66>show board 1/11
EEPROM identifiers:
Board Revision: R1D
Product Serial Number: A2310G46XQ
SPI CPLD Revision: R1A07
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 923

CLI Descriptions
Primary/First MAC Address: 34:6E:9D:45:26:B7

PCI FPGA Revision:
Power Capability: 0
TDM BB Variant: 13
Load Module SW Product: CXP 903 4290/1
Last MAC Address:
PRI Status:
APV-NP/NPV: 1
Supported Board Profiles:
[Profile ID] [Description]
1 PDH and SDH
2 PDH and CES
3 (active) CES only
Displaying the hardware configuration for ETU 1002 1/2:

ML66>show board 1/2
EEPROM identifiers:
Board Revision: P1B
Product Serial Number: A2310G5D3T
SPI CPLD Revision: R2A
Primary/First MAC Address: 34:6E:9D:46:10:F4
PCI FPGA Revision:
Power Capability: 0
TDM BB Variant: 13
Load Module SW Product: CDA 102 0659/2
Last MAC Address:
PRI Status:
APV-NP/NPV: 1
Supported Board Profiles:
[Profile ID] [Description]
1 4x1G
2 1x10G
99.35 show bridge-basics
Synopsis
show bridge-basics
Description
Use this command to display the basic bridge configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying basic bridge configuration:
ML66>show bridge-basics
924 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.36 show bridge-port
Synopsis
show bridge-port [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display bridge-port configuration.
— Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Bridging and Switching
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the bridge port where
the format is <Rack/Slot/Port>.
Examples
Displaying bridge-port information:
ML66>show bridge-port 1/6/5
99.37 show bridge-port
Synopsis
show bridge-port
Description
Use this command to display bridge port settings of the interface.
Command Mode
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 925

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying bridge port setting of the interface:
ML66(config-eth)#show bridge-port
99.38 show capability vrf-lite
Synopsis
show capability vrf-lite
Description
Use this command to display Virtual Routing and Forwarding lite (VRF-lite)
support status.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying VRF-lite support status:
ML66>show capability vrf-lite
VRF-Lite is disabled
99.39 show carrier-termination
Synopsis
show carrier-termination
Description
Use this command to display the Carrier Termination (CT) configuration.
The related configuration commands can be found in the following sections:
— Carrier Termination Commands MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
926 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 – Carrier
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying CT configuration:
ML66(config-ct)#show carrier-termination
Carrier Termination 1/1/1
--------------------------------------------
distinguished-name: CT 1/1/1
description: CT 1/1/1
status: Up(3)
frame-id: 259
carrier-id: C(4)
selected-min-acm: acm64QAMStd(11)
actual-tx-acm: acm512QAMStd(20)
selected-max-acm: acm512QAMStd(20)
reference-sec: SEC4l(3)
wanted-licensed-capacity[kb/s]: 80000
actual-licensed-capacity[kb/s]: 100000
actual-tx-capacity[kb/s]: 80000
polarization: Horizontal(2)
xpic-status NotApplicable(5)
mimo-status: NotApplicable(5)
actual-snir: 486
actual-xpi: Unknown
auto-remove-loop-enable: Disabled(2)
ber-alarm-treshold: Ber1e3(2)
actual-rx-acm: acm512QAMStd(20)
if-loop: Disable(3)
rf-loop: Disable(3)
channel-spacing[MHz] 40
frame-format-type standard
available-min-capacity[kb/s] 53352
available-max-capacity[kb/s] 334507
available-min-acm 4QAMStrong
available-max-acm 1024QAML66ight
selected-min-capacity[kb/s] 53352
selected-max-capacity[kb/s] 334507
99.40 show carrier-termination-capability
Synopsis
show carrier-termination-capability
Description
Use this command to display Carrier Termination (CT) capability information.
— Carrier Termination Commands MMU 1001 and MMU 1002
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 927

CLI Descriptions
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 – Carrier
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying CT capability information:
ML66(config-ct)#show carrier-termination-capability
Available Frame-id, ChannelSpace, Capacity and ACMProfile
-------------------------------------------------------------
Frameid: 256
-----------------------------------
ChannelSpace: chsp7MHz
Modulation Capacity [Kb/s]
-----------------------------------
qam4Strong(1) 18594
qam4Std(2) 21693
qam16Strong(4) 37189
qam16Std(5) 43387
qam32Std(8) 54408
qam64Std(11) 68179
qam128Std(14) 80575
qam256Std(17) 92972
qam512Std(20) 99170
qam512Light(21) 105368
Frameid: 257
-----------------------------------
ChannelSpace: chsp14MHz
Modulation Capacity [Kb/s]
-----------------------------------
qam4Strong(1) 18594
qam4Std(2) 21693
qam16Strong(4) 37189
qam16Std(5) 43387
qam32Std(8) 54408
qam64Std(11) 68179
qam128Std(14) 80575
qam256Std(17) 92972
qam512Std(20) 99170
qam512Light(21) 105368
99.41 show ces server
Synopsis
— show ces server [<RSC>]
— show ces server <RSC> pw [<ID>]
928 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display available Circuit Emulation Service (CES) servers
and the Pseudo-Wires (PWs) available on them.
— CES Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSC The Rack, Slot, and CesServerId values of the CES server,
in the following format: <Rack/Slot/CesServerId>.
ID The ID of the PW.
Options
pw Specifies to display the PWs available on the CES server.
Examples
Displaying all the available CES servers:
ML66>show ces server
CES server | Ports | Free | Source MAC address
1/1/101 | 16 | 10 | 98:c5:db:78:17:d3 (HW)
Displaying the configuration of CES server 1/11/101:

ML66>show ces server 1/11/101
ces server 1/11/101
mac-address aa:aa:aa:aa:aa:11
pw satop 1
name "1/11/101 1"
description ""
tdm-profile 1
timing-input recovered
encap eth
remote-mac aa:aa:aa:aa:aa:12
receive-ecid 11
transmit-ecid 12
no vlan
exit
no shutdown
exit
exit
Displaying the PWs available on CES server 1/1/101:

ML66>show ces server 1/11/101 pw
Pseudo Wire | Associated E1 | Admin status | Oper status | Summary | Name →
| Description
PW 1/1/101 1 | E1 1/1/101 1 | Down | Down | N/A | 1/1/101 1 →
| -------
PW 1/1/101 2 | E1 1/1/101 2 | Down | Down | N/A | 1/1/101 2 →
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 929

CLI Descriptions
|
PW 1/1/101 3 | E1 1/1/101 3 | Up | Down | N/A | 1/1/101 3 →
| IWF loop 1
PW 1/1/101 4 | E1 1/1/101 4 | Up | Down | N/A | 1/1/101 4 →
| IWF loop 2
PW 1/1/101 5 | E1 1/1/101 5 | Down | Down | N/A | 1/1/101 5 →
|
PW 1/1/101 6 | E1 1/1/101 6 | Down | Down | N/A | 1/1/101 6 →
|
Displaying the status of PW 2 on CES server 1/1/101:

ML66>show ces server 1/11/101 pw 2
CES Pseudo Wire 1/1/101 2 status
Oper status Down
Admin status Down
Name 1/1/101 2
Description
Type E1 SAToP
Timing Recovered
TDM profile TDM profile 2
PSN type Ethernet
Trap Enabled
CES Pseudo Wire 1/1/101 2 Ethernet configuration
Source MAC address 98:c5:db:78:17:d3
Destination MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00
Receive ECID 4
Transmit ECID 0
VLAN tagging disabled
99.42 show ces tdm-profile
Synopsis
show ces tdm-profile [<ID> [status]]
Description
Use this command to display available TDM configuration profiles.
— CES Commands
Command Mode
Operands
ID The ID of the TDM configuration profile.
Examples
Displaying all the available TDM profiles:
ML66#show ces tdm-profile
Index | Name | Used by PWs
930 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
1 | TDM profile one | 1/1/101 1, 1/4/101 16

2 | TDM profile two | -
Displaying TDM profile 1:

ML66#show ces tdm-profile 1
ces tdm-profile 1
name "IWF loop"
payload-size 256
packet-reorder
jtr-bfr-size 1792
! jitter-buffer-size 7
jtr-bfr-depth 3000
! jitter-buffer-playout-level 3
no payload-suppression
lops-clear-threshold 10
lops-set-threshold 10
packet-replace-policy allOnes
clock-recovery-mode adaptive
Displaying the status of TDM profile 1:

ML66#show ces tdm-profile 1 status
CES TDM Config profile details
Index 1
Name IWF loop
Payload size 256 bytes
Jitter buffer size 7 pkt
1792 bytes
1792.000 ms
Jitter buffer playout level 3 pkt
768 bytes
3.000 ms
Payload-suppression disabled
LOPS clear threshold 10 pkt
LOPS set threshold 10 pkt
Packet reorder enabled
Packet replace policy Fill with 0xFF bytes
Clock recovery mode Adaptive
Used by Pseudo Wire(s) 1/1/101 3, 1/1/101 4
99.43 show cfm alarms
Synopsis
show cfm alarms
Description
Use this command to display the active Ethernet Service Operation,
Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) alarms.
— Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance End Point and Maintenance

Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 931

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying the active Ethernet Service OAM alarms:
ML66>show cfm alarms
99.44 show cfm ma
Synopsis
show cfm ma { string <MDNAME> [<MANAME> ] | none <LEVEL>
[<MANAME> ] }
Description
Use this command to display a Maintenance Association (MA).
— Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Association Configuration
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
LEVEL The level of the domain.
MANAME The name of the MA.
MDNAME The name of the domain.
Options
Examples
Displaying an MA with string domain name:
ML66>show cfm ma string MDName
99.45 show cfm md
932 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show cfm md [ string <MDNAME> | none <LEVEL> ]
Description
Use this command to display a Maintenance Domain (MD).
— Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Maintenance Domain Configuration
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
Displaying an MD with none domain name:
ML66>show cfm md none 0
99.46 show cfm mep
Synopsis
show cfm mep { string <MDNAME> <MANAME> [<MEPID> ] | none <LEVEL>
<MANAME> [<MEPID> ] }
Description
Use this command to display Maintenance End Points (MEPs).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 933

CLI Descriptions

Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
MEPID The ID of the MEP.
Options
Examples
Displaying a MEP with string domain name:
ML66>show cfm mep string MDName MAName
99.47 show cfm mep-peer
Synopsis
show cfm mep-peer { string <MDNAME> <MANAME> <MEPID> [<RMEPID> ]
| none <LEVEL> <MANAME> <MEPID> [<RMEPID> ] }
Description
Use this command to display Maintenance End Point (MEP) peers or remote
MEPs.

934 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
MEPID The ID of the MEP.
RMEPID The ID of the remote MEP.
Options
Examples
Displaying a remote MEP with none domain name:
ML66>show cfm mep-peer none 0 MAName 1 1
99.48 show cfm mip
Synopsis
show cfm mip { string <MDNAME> <MANAME> [port <RSP> | lag <LAGID> ]
| none <LEVEL> <MANAME> [port <RSP> | lag <LAGID> ] }
Description
Use this command to display a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP).

Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 935

CLI Descriptions
Operands

Port> format.
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the port where the
Options
port Specifies the port value.
lag Specifies the LAG ID.
Examples
Displaying a MIP with string domain name:
ML66>show cfm mip string MDName MAName
99.49 show cliprotocol
Synopsis
show cliprotocol
Description
Use this command to display the current CLI protocol setting. The displayed CLI
protocol setting is one of the following:
— telnet
— ssh
936 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the CLI protocol setting:
ML66>show cliprotocol
CLI protocol = telnet
99.50 show clns is-neighbors
Synopsis
show clns [<TAG>] is-neighbors [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN>] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display all IS neighbor adjacencies.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Options
detail Displays detailed information.
Examples
ML66>show clns is-neighbors detail
Area is1:
System Id Interface State Type Priority Circuit Id
0000.0000.0001 1/9/4.500 Up L1 64 0000.0000.000
Up L2 64 0000.0000.000
L1 Adjacency ID: 1
L2 Adjacency ID: 2
Uptime: 13:52:00
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 937

CLI Descriptions
Area Address(es): 49
IP Address(es): 40.40.0.3
Topology: IPv4
Level-1 Protocols Supported: IPv4
Level-2 Protocols Supported: IPv4
Adjacency advertisement: Advertise
99.51 show clns neighbors
Synopsis
show clns [<TAG>] neighbors [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN>] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display IS neighbor adjacencies.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Options
Examples
ML66>show clns neighbors detail
Area is1:
System Id Interface SNPA State Holdtime Type Protocol
0000.0000.0001 1/9/4.500 0000.0CFA.F002 Up 22 L2 IS-IS
Area Address(es): 49.0000
Uptime: 00:10:17
0000.0000.0099 1/9/4.600 0003.4797.5E4C Up 6 L2 IS-IS
Area Address(es): 00.0001 4900.00
Uptime: 00:10:16
000F.0000.0002 1/9/4.700 0006.5B0E.D27D Up 27 L1 IS-IS
Up 27 L2 IS-IS
Area Address(es): 49.000f
938 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Uptime: 00:06:15
99.52 show clock
Synopsis
show clock
Description
Use this command to display the system date and time.
— Basic Configuration Commands
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the system clock:
ML66#show clock
Fri Oct 9 15:38:23 CEST 2009
99.53 show config
Synopsis
show config
Description
Use this command to display configuration information.

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 939

CLI Descriptions
— Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Linktrace and Loopback Configuration
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying configuration information:
ML66(cfm)#show config
99.54 show config-changed-timer
Synopsis
show config-changed-timer
Description
Use this command to display the value of the timer set for the NE Configuration
Changed event.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the value of the timer set for the NE Configuration Changed event:
ML66>show config-changed-timer
99.55 show config-validation-info
940 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show config-validation-info source ftp
Description
Use this command to view information about the configuration file copied to the
node from local FTP before applying the configuration.
— Installation Mode Commands
— Software, Configuration, and Log File Handling Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying startup-configuration on local FTP:
ML66>config-validation-info source ftp
----------------------------------------
File: Loaded from FTP
----------------------------------------
NE Name: ML66-192-168-0-1
Created: Default
----------------------------------------
DCN Settings
DCN-Mode: vlan(3)
IP Host address: 10.80.45.214
IP Host Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
----------------------------------------
Hardware Inventory
Backplane Product Number: ROJR 609 006/1
Backplane Revision: R1E
Position Product Number Release

1 ROJR 219 014/1 R1A
3 ROJ 208 357/1 R1A
4 ROJ 208 357/1 R1C
7 ROJR 211 006/2 R1A
8 ROJR 211 007/1 P1B
----------------------------------------
99.56 show confirm
Synopsis
show confirm { ip | ip6 }
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 941

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display the confirmed IP address.
— LAN-DCN Interface Commands
— DCN Loopback Interface Commands
— DCN Local Access (USB) Interface Commands
— L3 VLAN Subinterface Commands
— Router Loopback Interface Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
ip Selects the confirmed IPv4 address.
ip6 Selects the confirmed IPv6 address.
Examples
Displaying the confirmed IPv4 address:
ML66>show confirm ip
99.57 show confirm timer
Synopsis
show confirm timer
Description
Some commands can cause loss of the Data Communication Network (DCN)
channel. After running such a command you have to save your configurations
within 15 minutes or the NE makes a warm restart, restoring the saved
configurations, and your unconfirmed changes are lost. Use this command to
display the remaining time until a configuration confirmation must be done. For
more information, see CLI User Guide.
942 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— Basic and Navigation Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of the confirm timer:
ML66>show confirm timer
confirm timer is not running!
In the example, confirm timer is not running! means that there are no
configuration changes that need to be confirmed.
See Also
write
99.58 show connect-cc
Synopsis
show connect-cc
Description
Use this command to display TDM cross-connections.
— TDM Cross-Connection Commands
— CES Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying TDM cross-connections:
ML66>show connect-cc
Cross connections
Interface1 Interface2 Name
-----------------------------------------------
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 943

CLI Descriptions
1/12/101 1 1/12/1D
1/11/101 1 1/11/1A
99.59 show copy
Synopsis
show copy
Description
Use this command to display the status of ongoing software upgrades.
— Software, Configuration, and Log File Handling Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of ongoing software upgrades:
ML66#show copy
Command: copy ftp filename /tn_system_release/ml_tn_software/CXP9036600_1/CXP9036 →
600_1_MINI-LINK_6600_6366_1.3_R4A190 flash nowait
Status: Downloading
Progress: 93%
99.60 show counters
Synopsis
show counters
Description
Use this command to display the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) interface
level counters of the current Ethernet interface.
— Ethernet Commands: LLDP
944 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the LLDP interface level counters of the Ethernet interface:
ML66(config-lldp)#show counters
LAN 1/6/4
Tx Frames total : 34
Rx Frames total : 33
Rx Frames discarded : 0
Rx Frames error : 0
Unknown TLVs total : 0
Ageouts total : 0
99.61 show current
Synopsis
show current
Description
Use this command to display current mode settings.
— Ethernet Commands: Ethernet Ring Protection
— Ethernet Commands: QoS - Scheduling
— Ethernet Commands: QoS - WRED
— Ethernet Commands: HQoS - Node and Profile Configuration Commands
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 945

CLI Descriptions
— Performance Monitoring Commands
— Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Clock Port Configuration
— Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast and Multicast

Configuration
— Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: Unicast Master Configuration
— CES Commands
Command Mode
All Ethernet Configuration submodes
For displaying Circuit Emulation Service (CES) configuration, CES Server

configuration submode — (config-ces-server).
For displaying CES TDM profile configuration, CES TDM Profile configuration
submode — (config-ces-tdm-profile).
Examples
Displaying current mode settings for Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED):
ML66(config-wred-profile)#show current
wred-profile 1 (read-only)
name StandardWRED
number-of-users 0
minThreshold 15 * 64 KByte(s)
maxThreshold 48 * 64 KByte(s)
p-mark 10 %
exponentWeight 9
Displaying current mode settings for scheduler:

ML66(config-scheduler-profile)#show current
scheduler-profile 5
name NEW_SCHEDULER_PROFILE
number-of-users 0
tc-queue 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
scheduler-type strict strict strict strict strict dwrr dwrr dwrr
weight - - - - - 3 1 1
Displaying current mode settings for QinQ:

ML66(config-qinqtermination)#show current
+-----------------------------+
| Interface | CeId | PeId |
+-----------------------------+
| LAN 1/6/4 | 100 | 201 |
+-----------------------------+
Displaying information about the current Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)

configuration:
946 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
ML66(erp-group)#show current
erp-group 2 raps-vlan 200
description "erp-ring-1"
timer hold-off 0
timer guard 500
raps vlan-priority 7
raps ring-mdl 7
raps subring-raps vraps
erp-port east role normal
erp-port east bind interface-name 1/6/4
no erp-port east rmep
erp-port west role normal
erp-port west bind interface-name 1/6/8
no erp-port west rmep
alarm link-loss
no alarm unable-to-protect
alarm protocol-error
enable
exit
Displaying the current Ethernet Bandwidth Notification settings:

ML66(bnm)#show current
interface 1/6/1
format itu-t
hold-time 1s
interval 10s
priority 4
level 5
portID 32442
enable
send
full-link-message always
failed-link-message
send-frequently-after-hold-time
Displaying the LLDP configuration for the current interface:

ML66(config-lldp)#show current
interface ethernet 1/6/4
! LLDP configuration
lldp dest-mac-address nearest-bridge
admin-status tx-and-rx
tlvs-tx-enable sys-name
tlvs-tx-enable sys-desc
tlvs-tx-enable man-addr-ipv4
exit
Listing the HQoS child nodes of a parent node:

ML66(config-hqos-node)#show current
Listing the HQoS nodes of a profile:

ML66(config-hqos-profile)#show current
Listing all QoS related profiles, including HQoS ones:

ML66(config-ethernet-profiles)#show current
Displaying the current CES configuration:

ML66(config-ces-server)#show current
ces tdm-profile 3
name "TDM profile 3"
payload-size 256
packet-reorder
rtp-header
jtr-bfr-size 1536
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 947

CLI Descriptions
jtr-bfr-depth 3000
timestamp-mode differential
Displaying the current CES TDM profile configuration:

ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#show current
ces tdm-profile 1
name "IWF loop"
payload-size 256
packet-reorder
jtr-bfr-size 1792
jtr-bfr-depth 3000
clock-recovery-mode adaptive
99.62 show dcn-mode
Synopsis
show dcn-mode
Description
Use this command to display the current DCN mode.
— DCN Basic Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the DCN mode:
ML66>show dcn-mode
dcn-mode vlan
99.63 show dcn-lan-ctag
Synopsis
show dcn-lan-ctag
948 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display double tagged Data Communication Network
(DCN) traffic on Provider Bridge.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying double tagged DCN traffic:
ML66>show dcn-lan-ctag
99.64 show debug
Synopsis
show debug {bfd | bgp | hal | imi | isis | ldp | nsm | ospf | rsvp}
Description
Use this command to display debugging configuration.
Command Mode
Options
bfd Displays the debugging configuration of Bidirectional

Forwarding Detection (BFD).
hal Extra logging for Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL).
bgp Displays the debugging configuration of Border Gateway

Protocol (BGP).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 949

CLI Descriptions
imi Displays the debugging configuration of Integrated

Management Interface (IMI).
isis Displays the debugging configuration of Intermediate

System–Intermediate System (IS-IS).
ldp Displays the debugging configuration of Label

Distribution Protocol (LDP).
nsm Displays the debugging configuration of Network

Services Manager (NSM).
ospf Displays the debugging configuration of Open Shortest

Path First (OSPF).
rsvp Extra logging for Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
Examples
Displaying the debugging configuration of BFD:
ML66>show debug bfd
99.65 show dm
Synopsis
show dm [ 15m [<INTERVAL> ] | 24h [<INTERVAL> ] ]
Description
Use this command to display Delay Measurement (DM) statistics.
— Ethernet Service OAM Commands: Session Configuration
Command Mode
Ethernet Service OAM MD MA MEP PM submode — (cfm-md-ma-mep-pm)
Operands
INTERVAL The number of the completed interval. The valid range is

1–96, where 1 is the most recently completed interval.
950 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
15m Displays DM 15 minute interval statistics.
24h Displays DM 24 hour statistics.
Examples
Displaying DM statistics:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep-pm)#show dm 15m 1
[15m] History Delay Measurement Result (1 of 1):
[start_time:2012-09-11 02:59:50 , end_time:2012-09-11 03:00:00]
Interval number : 1
Configured DMM interval : 1 s
Configured Delay Percentile : 90 %
Configured Delay Variation : 90 %
Configured Delay Threshold : 100 ms
Configured Delay Var Threshold : 100 ms
Valid : FALSE
Sent DMM Num : 10
Received DMR_OK Num : 10
Received DMR_NOK Num : 0
Min Delay : 2597.000 us
Max Delay : 4318.000 us
Average Delay : 2792.300 us
90-percentile Delay : 4318.000 us
Min Delay Variation : 5.000 us
Max Delay Variation : 1721.000 us
Average Delay Variation : 218.222 us
90-percentile Delay Variation : 1721.000 us
99.66 show enableLocalUsers
Synopsis
show enableLocalUsers
Description
Use this command to display the status of local users (admin_user and
view_user) when centralized authentication is configured.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of local users when centralized authentication is
configured:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 951

CLI Descriptions
ML66>show enableLocalUsers
local users status is enabled
99.67 show epl
Synopsis
show epl
Description
Use this command to display configured Layer 1 connections.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying Layer 1 Connection:
ML66#show epl
ethernet-epl port1 1/6/4 port2 1/1/1
no llf-enable
99.68 show erp-group
Synopsis
show erp-group [<RINGID> ]
Description
Use this command to display the configured Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)
rings.
Use <RINGID> operand to display a selected ERP ring.
952 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RINGID The ID of the selected ring.
Examples
Displaying all configured ERP rings:
ML66#show erp-group
ID VLAN Port East Port West Status Description
----- ----- ---------- ---------- --------- -------------------
1 0 1/9/4 1/9/8 Disabled
----- ----- ---------- ---------- --------- -------------------
Total ERP ring count: 1
99.69 show ferlt
Synopsis
show ferlt
Description
Use this command to display the Radio Link Terminal (RLT) configuration at far
end.
— Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 – RLT
Command Mode
Far End Radio Link Terminal submode — (config-ferlt)
Examples
Displaying the RLT configuration at far end:
ML66(config-ferlt)#show ferlt
R/S/P: 1/1/1
distinguished-name: FRLT 1/1/1
ne-ip-address: 10.120.54.62
ne-ipv6-address:
ne-name: ML66-TN62
ne-type: MINI-LINK Traffic Node
id: Milano
expected-far-end-id: RLT 1/1/1
far-end-id-check: disable
status: up
mode: 2+0RLB
actual-tx-total-capacity[kbps]: 533518000
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 953

CLI Descriptions
actual-tx-packet-capacity[kbps]: 427612000
limited-total-capacity[kbps]: 0
protection-switch-mode: manual
protection-status: unprotected
revertive-preferred-tx: off
revertive-wait-to-restore[seconds]: 0
fade-notification-timer[seconds]: 200
tx-switch-over-far-end: RLTNOTSUP
Displaying the RLT configuration at far end in case of EQP configuration:

ML66(config-rlt)#show ferlt
R/S/P: 1/3/1
distinguished-name: FRLT 1/1+3/1
ne-ip-address: 10.120.54.112
ne-ipv6-address:
ne-name: ML66-10-120-54-112
id: RLT 1/1+3/1
expected-far-end-id:
status: down
mode: 1+1RLP
protection-status: protected
eqp-protection-switch-mode: manual
eqp-active-unit: low-unit
eqp-distinguished-name: 1/1+3/1
99.70 show fetdm
Synopsis
show fetdm
Description
Use this command to display information regarding TDM at far end.
— Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 – TDM
Command Mode
Far End Radio Link Terminal TDM submode — (config-ferlt-fetdm)
Examples
Displaying TDM information at far end:
ML66(config-ferlt-fetdm)#show fetdm
R/S/P: 1/1/1
tdm-connect: enable
954 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
actual-tdm-tributaries: 50
wanted-tributaries-allocation: 1-50
actual-tributaries-allocation: 1-50
distinguished-name: FTDM 1/1/1
available-tdm-tributaries: 0
99.71 show file-integrity-alarm
Synopsis
show file-integrity-alarm
Description
Use this command to display the status of the file integrity monitoring function.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of the file integrity monitoring function:
ML66>show file-integrity-alarm
99.72 show ftpprotocol
Synopsis
show ftpprotocol
Description
Use this command to display the current default FTP protocol setting. The
displayed FTP protocol setting is one of the following:
— ftp
— sftp
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 955

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying the default FTP protocol setting:
ML66>show ftpprotocol
Default FTP protocol = FTP
99.73 show ftp active
Synopsis
show ftp active
Description
Use this command to display the associated FTP server for all services.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the associated FTP server for all services:
ML66#show ftp active
Service name FTP server ID name
Audit log 1 remotehost
Config automatic backup 1 remotehost
Config load 3 mlftp
Config report 1 remotehost
Diagnostics log 1 remotehost
Directory list 1 remotehost
Error log 1 remotehost
File Integrity upload 1 remotehost
File Integrity view 1 remotehost
License install 1 remotehost
License report 1 remotehost
NE Performance 1 remotehost
NTP key 1 remotehost
SOAM Performance 1 remotehost
Software upgrade 3 mlftp
99.74 show ftp activeftp
Synopsis
show ftp activeftp
Description
Use this command to display the default FTP server.
956 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the default FTP server:
ML66>show ftp activeftp
FTP server ID name
1 remotehost
99.75 show ftp configtable
Synopsis
show ftp configtable
Description
Use this command to display the FTP server entries of the FTP configuration
table.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the FTP configuration table:
ML66#show ftp configtable
ID host/IPaddr port user conn name
1 10.0.0.2 21 anonymous 2 remotehost
2 10.0.0.2 21 anonymous 2 localhost
3 10.20.30.1 21 ericsson 2 mlftp
99.76 show history
Synopsis
show history
Description
Use this command to display the commands used during the current session. For
more information, see CLI User Guide.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 957

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the command history:
ML66>show history
show interface
enable
debug ospf ifsm events
no debug ospf ifsm events
show history
99.77 show igmp snooping
Synopsis
show igmp snooping
Description
Use this command to display the global status of Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the NE.
— IGMP and MLD Snooping Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the global status of IGMP snooping:
ML66>show igmp snooping
IGMP snooping Admin State: Enabled
IGMP snooping Oper State: Up
99.78 show igmp snooping config
Synopsis
show igmp snooping config
958 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
snooping configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying IGMP snooping configuration:
ML66>show igmp snooping config
igmp snooping enable
igmp snooping vlan 10
proxy-reporting
query-interval 125
robust 2
exit
99.79 show igmp snooping group
Synopsis
show igmp snooping group [<GRPADDR> [source <SRCADDR>]] vlan
<VLANID> [ctag <CVID>]
Description
Use this command to display a list of Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) multicast groups and the associated member ports on a specific VLAN.
Use the optional <GRPADDR> and <SRCADDR> operands to display detailed

port membership information for a specific multicast group or channel.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
GRPADDR Specifies the multicast group address.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 959

CLI Descriptions
SRCADDR Specifies the IP address of the multicast source.


Options
source The IP address of the multicast source.
Examples
Displaying the list of multicast groups and channels on VLAN 10:
ML66>show igmp snooping group vlan 10
VLAN:10 CVLAN:-
Group Addr: 239.195.7.1, Source Addr: 10.1.1.1, Members: 1/6/4
Group Addr: 239.195.7.1, Source Addr: 10.2.2.2, Members: 1/6/4
Group Addr: 239.195.7.2, Source Addr: * , Members: 1/6/4,1/1/2
Displaying detailed information for multicast group 239.195.7.2 on VLAN 10:

ML66>show igmp snooping group 239.195.7.2 vlan 10
Multicast Group details
Group Addr: 239.195.7.2, Source Addr: *, VLAN/CVLAN: 10/-
LAN 1/6/4 Expires: 198 s, Uptime: 00:26:59
WAN 1/1/2 Expires: 195 s, Uptime: 00:03:23
99.80 show igmp snooping mrouter
Synopsis
show igmp snooping mrouter [vlan <VLANID> [ctag <CVID>]]
Description
Use this command to display the multicast router ports on a specific VLAN.
Use this command without the vlan option to display multicast router ports on all
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping enabled VLANs.
960 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands


Options
Examples
Displaying multicast router ports of VLAN 10:
ML66>show igmp snooping mrouter vlan 10
Multicast router ports
VLAN:10 CVLAN:-
99.81 show igmp snooping vlan
Synopsis
show igmp snooping vlan <VLANID> [ctag <CVID>] [counter]
Description
Use this command to display IGMP snooping status on a specific VLAN.
Use the counter option to also display the per VLAN port IGMP message
counters.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 961

CLI Descriptions

Options
counter Displays the port counters.
Examples
Displaying IGMP snooping status of VLAN 10:
ML66>show igmp snooping vlan 10 counter
VLAN:10 CVLAN:-
Querier address: 0.0.0.72
Querier version: 3
Query interval: 125 s
Robustness variable: 2
Query response interval: 10 s
Group count: 3
Router port count: 1
IGMP counters
LAN 1/6/4
Joins received: 254
Leaves received: 0
Gen.queries received: 121
Spec.queries sent: 0
Spec.queries received: 0
Invalid IGMP msg. rec.: 0
WAN 1/1/2
Joins received: 123
Leaves received: 0
Invalid IGMP msg. rec.: 0
99.82 show interface
Synopsis
— show interface [<IFNAME_RSP> | lo-dcn]
— show interface {lan-dcn | local-access} [<IFNAME_RSP>]
— show interface host [ip | ipv6]
— show interface [<IFNAME_VLAN> | <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> |

<IFNAME_RSP_H> | lo | lo.<VRF> | router]
Description
Use this command to display the configuration and counter values of a DCN IP or
a router interface.
962 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— Serial (PPP) Interface Commands
— L3 Interface Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode —>
Operands
IFNAME_RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the DCN IP interface,
where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port>, for example,
1/6/0.

IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Options
lan-dcn Displays the parameters of the LAN-DCN interface.
lo-dcn Displays the parameters of the DCN loopback interface.
local-access Displays parameters of the Local Access (USB) interface.
host Displays the IPv4 or the IPv6 host interface configuration

(defaults to IPv4).
lo Displays parameters of the router loopback interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 963

CLI Descriptions
lo.VRF Displays parameters of the loopback interface of a Virtual

Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance, for example
lo.vrf_1
router Displays the parameters of the LAN-DCNDisplays

parameters of all router interfaces, including loopback
and L3 VLAN subinterfaces.
Examples
Displaying the configuration of the LAN-DCN interface:
ML66#show interface lan-dcn
Interface LAN-DCN 1/9/0
Hardware is Ethernet Current HW addr: ac60.b699.ab89
Physical:ac60.b699.ab89
speed 100 mtu 1500
<ENABLED,UP>
inet 10.41.97.22/23 broadcast 10.41.97.255
inet6 2005::21/64
input packets 11087, bytes 1331883, discarded 0, error 0
output packets 6192, bytes 1111232, discarded 0, error 0
Displaying the configuration of the DCN loopback interface:

ML66#show interface lo-dcn
Interface LO-DCN
Hardware is Loopback
<ENABLED,UP>
inet 10.1.54.1/32
Displaying the configuration of the Local Access (USB) interface:

ML66#show interface local-access
Interface LOCAL-ACCESS 1/9/1
Hardware is USB Current HW addr: 3220.ab46.4aef
Physical:3220.ab46.4aef
speed 12 mtu 1500
<ENABLED,UP>
inet 10.0.0.1/30 broadcast 10.0.0.3
inet6 2001:db8::/127
input packets 228, bytes 46035, discarded 0, error 0
output packets 280, bytes 37668, discarded 0, error 0
Displaying the configuration and counters of the router loopback interface:

ML66#show interface lo
Interface lo
Hardware is Loopback index 4001 metric 1 mtu 16436 duplex-full arp ageing timeo →
ut 0
<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING>
VRF Binding: Not bound
Label switching is disabled
Administrative Group(s): None
inet 127.0.0.1/8
input packets 4, bytes 304
output packets 4, bytes 304
Displaying the configuration and counters of an L3 VLAN interface:

ML66#show interface vlan.100
Interface ip vlan.100
Hardware is VLAN Current HW addr: ac60.b699.ab8d
Physical:ac60.b699.ab8d
index 8 metric 1 mtu 1500 duplex-full arp ageing timeout 180
<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,MULTICAST>
964 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands

Bandwidth 1g
inet 10.20.19.30/24 broadcast 10.20.19.255
Displaying the configuration and counters of an L3 VLAN subinterface:

ML66#show interface 1/6/4.400
Interface ip 1/6/4.400 (untagged)
Hardware is Ethernet Current HW addr: ac60.b699.ab90
Physical:ac60.b699.ab90
index 5 metric 1 mtu 1500 duplex-full arp ageing timeout 180
<UP,BROADCAST,MULTICAST>
Bandwidth 1g
inet 1.45.67.2/30 broadcast 1.45.67.3
Note: (untagged) indicates an untagged L3 VLAN subinterface.
99.83 show interface (PTP)
Synopsis
show interface
Description
Use this command to display the available interfaces capable of time-stamping
and their statuses. For details, see the show ptp interface command.
— Synchronization PTP 1588v2 Commands: General Configuration
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the status of the interfaces capable of time-stamping:
ML66(config-ptp)#show interface
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 965

CLI Descriptions
99.84 show interface ethernet
Synopsis
show interface ethernet <RSP>
Description
Use this command to display the current configuration of the Ethernet interface.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port of the interface where the format
is <Rack/Slot/Port>.
Examples
Displaying the current configuration of 1/6/4:
ML66>show interface ethernet 1/6/4
!LAN 1/6/4 - Port 4
no shutdown
trapenable
role inni
lan
no alarm-enable ethernet-down
speed auto-detect
mdix auto
no flowcontrol
autoneg
no sync-enable
no alarm-enable sync-unsupported
! Ethernet link OAM
ethernet-oam
no admin-state
mode passive
ignore-loopback
frame window 10
frame threshold 1
frame-period threshold 1
frame-secs-summary window 100
frame-secs-summary threshold 1
no symbol-period
no frame-period
no frame
no frame-secs-summary
no dying-gasp
no critical-event
no alarm-enable linkfault
no alarm-enable loopback
no disable-support loopback
no disable-support event
symbol-period threshold 1
966 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
exit
exit
ifName "1/6/4"
operstatus:up
clock-port:cp1
RX bytes:65452 packets:324 multicast:478 broadcast:0 dropped:0 errors:0
TX bytes:105580 packets:323 multicast:947 broadcast:1 dropped:0 errors:0
99.85 show interface ethernet-pm
Synopsis
show interface ethernet-pm <RSP> {wan | lan} {tc <TRAFFICCLASS> |
interval <INTERVAL> | current | all | 24} {bandwidth}
Description
Use this command to display Ethernet Performance Monitoring (PM) data.
— Performance Monitoring Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port of the interface to select. The
Note: Port refers to a WAN or LAN interface, not to a

switch port.
TRAFFICCLASS The traffic class for which PM data is displayed.
INTERVAL The interval for which PM data is displayed.
Options
wan Displays PM data for a WAN interface.
lan Displays PM data for a LAN interface.
tc Displays PM data for the specified traffic class on the

selected interface.
interval Displays PM data for the specified interval on the selected

interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 967

CLI Descriptions
current Displays current PM data for the selected interface.
all Displays all PM data for the selected interface.
24 Displays 24h PM data for the selected interface.
bandwidth Displays bandwidth PM data for the selected interface.
Examples
Displaying Ethernet PM bandwidth counters for a LAN interface (excerpt):
ML66>show interface ethernet-pm 1/6/1 lan current bandwidth
xfBandwidthCurrent15m RX TX
TimeElapsed 226
ValidData Valid
Average 35000 25000
Maximum 35138 25098
Minimum 34383 24559
0To5PercentSecs 226 226
xfTrafficCurrent15m
TimeElapsed 226
ValidData Valid
RxOctets 988761920
RxUnicastPkts 15449405
RxMulticastPkts 0
RxBroadcastPkts 0
RxDiscards 0
RxErrors 0
TxOctets 706258496
TxUnicastPkts 11035289
TxMulticastPkts 0
TxBroadcastPkts 0
TxDiscards 0
TxErrors 0
99.86 show interface ethernet status
Synopsis
show interface ethernet status
Description
Use this command to display status information for all Ethernet interfaces.
968 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying status information for all Ethernet interfaces:
ML66#show interface ethernet status
Max
Admin Oper Frame
Interface Port Role Status Status Speed Size LAG membership Deep Buff →
ering Clock Port
-------------+----+------+-------+---------+------+-----+---------------+--------- →
------+-----------
LAN 1/6/4 2 uni Down Down 1000 2000 Enabled
LAN 1/6/5 3 uni Up Up 1000 2000 Enabled
LAN 1/6/7 5 inni Up Up 1000 9216 Disabled
LAN 1/6/8 6 inni Up Up 1000 9216 Enabled
WAN 1/1/1 7 inni Up Down 75 9216 Enabled
WAN 1/1/2 8 inni Down Down 221 9216 Enabled →
test
LAN-DCN 1/6/0 1 uni Up Up 0 2000 Not suppo →
rted
Deep buffer bandwidth limit: 60000 Mbit/s
Deep buffer bandwidth used: 3000 Mbit/s
LAG-ID Name Members
-------------+----------+-------
99.87 show interface ip
Synopsis
— show interface ip [<IFNAME_RSP> | <IFNAME_RSP_H> | lan-dcn | lo-

dcn | host] [brief]
— show interface ip [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo.<VRF> | router]

[brief]
or
— show ip interface [<IFNAME_RSP> | <IFNAME_RSP_H> | lan-dcn | lo-

dcn | host] [brief]
— show ip interface [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo. <VRF> | ] [brief]
Use this command to display the IP parameters of an IP interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 969

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the LAN-DCN IP

interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/Port>The
related configuration commands can be found in the
following section:, for example, 1/6/0.
IFNAME_RSP_H The related configuration commands can be found in the

followingThe Rack, Slot, Port, and Hierarchy values of the
serial (PPP) interface, where the format is <Rack/Slot/
Port-Hierarchy>, for example, 1/5/5-RS:D1-3.
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Options
lan-dcn Displays parameters of the LAN-DCN IP interface. By

default, this option is selected.
lo-dcn Displays the parameters of the DCN loopback interface.
local-access Displays parameters of the Local Access (USB) interface.
host Displays the configuration of the IPv4 host interface.
lo Displays parameters of the router loopback interface.
lo.VRF Displays parameters of the loopback interface of a Virtual

Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance, for example
lo.vrf_1
router Displays parameters of all router interfaces, including

loopback and L3 VLAN subinterfaces.
970 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
brief Displays a brief summary.
Examples
Displaying the IP parameters of the LAN-DCN IP interfaces:
ML66#show interface ip lan-dcn
interface local-access 1/6/1
ip address 10.0.0.1/30
ipv6 address 2001:db8::/127
no shutdown
mtu 1500
no pingtargethost
interface lan-dcn 1/6/0
ip address 10.41.97.22/23
no ipv6 address
mtu 1500
interface lo-dcn
ip address 12.24.23.1/32
ML66#show ip interface lan-dcn brief

ip address 10.41.97.22/23
no ipv6 address
interface lo-dcn
ip address 12.24.23.1/32
Displaying IP parameters of the router IP interfaces:

ML66#show interface ip router
1/6/5.500, Interface Status: admin up
IP MTU:1500 bytes (using link MTU)
lo, Interface Status: link up/admin up
IP address: 10.10.0.1, IP subnet: 10.10.0.1/32
Displaying IP parameters of a router IP interface:

ML66#show interface ip 1/6/4.500
1/6/5.500, Interface Status: admin up
IP MTU:1500 bytes (using link MTU)
name “my alias”
trapenable
clock-port:cp1
Displaying a brief summary of the IP parameters of the router IP interfaces:

ML66#show interface ip router brief
Interface IP-Address Status Protocol
1/6/5.500 unassigned down down
lo 127.0.0.1 up up
99.88 show interface serial
Synopsis
show interface serial [<IFNAME_RSP_H>]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 971

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display the configuration parameters of a serial (PPP)
interface.
Running the command without the <IFNAME_RSP_H> operand, configuration

parameters are displayed for all serial (PPP) interfaces.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_H The Rack, Slot, Port, and Hierarchy value of the serial
Examples
Displaying the configuration parameters of the serial (PPP) interfaces 1/5/5-
RS:D1-3:
ML66#show interface serial 1/5/5-RS:D1-3

interface serial 1/5/5-RS:D1-3
ip unnumbered
no trapenable
no shutdown
mru 1500
99.89 show investigation-mode
Synopsis
show investigation-mode
Description
Use this command to display the status of additional troubleshooting
possibilities.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec mode, at admin level
972 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Examples
Displaying the status of additional troubleshooting possibilities:
ML66#show investigation-mode
Investigation mode is disabled
99.90 show ip forwarding
Synopsis
show ip forwarding
Description
Use this command to display IP forwarding status.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying IP forwarding status:
ML66#show ip forwarding
IP forwarding is on
99.91 show ip host interface
Synopsis
show ip host interface
Description
Use this command to display the host interface configuration for DCN-Mode
Routed.
In DCN-Mode VLAN, the current host interface is displayed together with the
configuration which is effective only in DCN-Mode Routed.
— Router IP Commands
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 973

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the host interface configuration in DCN-Mode VLAN:
ML66#show ip host interface
Current host interface: LAN-DCN
ip host interface lo (auto)
Note: (auto) indicates that the host interface is auto-selected by the NE.
99.92 show ip host mtu
Synopsis
show ip host mtu
Description
Use this command to display the host Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the host MTU configuration:
ML66#show ip host mtu
ip host mtu 1500
99.93 show ip interface host
Synopsis
show ip interface host [brief]
974 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display the configuration of the current host interface.
— Router IP Commands on page 159
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
brief Displays only the configured IPv4 and, if exist, IPv6

addresses.
Examples
Displaying the host interface configuration in DCN-Mode VLAN, where the IPv4
host interface is the LAN-DCN interface and the IPv6 host interface is the
loopback interface:
ML66#show ip interface host
interface lan-dcn 1/9/0 (auto)
ip address 10.41.97.32/23
mtu 1500
interface lo-dcn (auto)
ipv6 address 2010::32/128
ML66#show ip interface host brief
interface lan-dcn 1/9/0 (auto)
ip address 10.41.97.32/23
interface lo-dcn (auto)
Displaying the host interface configuration in DCN-Mode Routed:

ML66#show ip interface host
interface lo (auto)
ip address 10.41.104.30/32
99.94 show ip isis igp-shortcut-lsp
Synopsis
show ip isis [<TAG>] igp-shortcut-lsp
Description
Use this command to display the IS-IS IGP shortcut LSP entries.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 975

CLI Descriptions
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
ML66>show ip isis igp-shortcut-lsp
99.95 show ip isis route
Synopsis
show ip isis [<TAG>] route
Description
Use this command to display IS-IS routing table for IPv4.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
ML66>show ip isis route
Codes: C - connected, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2
ia - IS-IS inter area, D - discard, E - external metric
Area is1:
Destination Metric Next-Hop Interface Tag
C 10.10.0.0/24 10 -- 1/9/4.500 123
L1 10.10.11.0/24 20 10.10.0.43 1/9/4.500 124
L1 10.10.12.0/24 40 10.10.0.32 1/9/4.600 125
L2 172.16.15.1/32 30 10.10.0.25 1/9/4.700 127
976 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.96 show ip isis route igp-shortcut
Synopsis
show ip isis [<TAG>] route igp-shortcut
Description
Use this command to display the IS-IS IGP shortcut routing table.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
ML66>show ip isis is1 route igp-shortcut
Codes: C - connected, E - external, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2
ia - IS-IS inter area, D - discard, e - external metric
Area is1:
Destination Metric Tunnel-ID Tunnel-End-Point
99.97 show ip ospf
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ]
Description
Use this command to display general information about OSPF routing processes.
Running the command without the <PROC_ID> operand, all OSPF routing
processes are displayed.
Running the command with the <PROC_ID> operand, only the selected OSPF
routing process is displayed.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 977

CLI Descriptions
— OSPF Configuration Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
PROC_ID OSPF process ID. The valid range is 0–65535.
Examples
Displaying general information about OSPF routing processes:
ML66#show ip ospf
99.98 show ip ospf border-routers
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ] border-routers
Description
Use this command to display the Area Border Routers (ABRs) and Autonomous
System Border Routers (ASBRs) for an OSPF instance.
Running the command without the <PROC_ID> operand, ABRs and ASBRs are
displayed for all OSPF instances.
Running the command with the <PROC_ID> operand, ABRs and ASBRs are
displayed only for the selected OSPF instance.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
978 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Operands
Examples
Displaying ARBs and ASBRs for all OSPF instances:
ML66#show ip ospf border-routers
99.99 show ip ospf database
Synopsis
— show ip ospf database [self-originate | max-age | adv-router

<ADV_ROUTER> ]
— show ip ospf <PROC_ID> database [self-originate | max-age | adv-

router <ADV_ROUTER> ]
— show ip ospf database [asbr-summary | external | network | router |

summary | nssa-external | opaque-link | opaque-area | opaque-as]
[self-originate | adv-router <ADV_ROUTER> ]
— show ip ospf database [asbr-summary | external | network | router |

summary | nssa-external | opaque-link | opaque-area | opaque-as]
<LINK_STATE_ID> [self-originate | adv-router <ADV_ROUTER> ]
— show ip ospf <PROC_ID> database [asbr-summary | external | network

| router | summary | nssa-external | opaque-link | opaque-area |
opaque-as] [self-originate | adv-router <ADV_ROUTER> ]
— show ip ospf <PROC_ID> database [asbr-summary | external | network

| router | summary | nssa-external | opaque-link | opaque-area |
opaque-as] <LINK_STATE_ID> [self-originate | adv-router
<ADV_ROUTER> ]
Description
Use this command to display a database summary for OSPF information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 979

CLI Descriptions
Operands
ADV-ROUTER Advertising router in <A.B.C.D> format.
LINK_STATE_ID Link state ID, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
Options
asbr-summary Displays ASBR summary link states.
external Displays external link states.
network Displays network link states.
router Displays router link states.
summary Displays network summary link states.
nssa-external Displays Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) external link state.
opaque-link Displays link local Opaque-LSA.
opaque-area Displays link area Opaque-LSA.
opaque-as Displays link Autonomous System (AS) Opaque-LSA.
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
max-age Displays Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in MaxAge

list.
adv-router Displays advertising router link states.
Examples
Displaying a database summary for OSPF information:
ML66#show ip ospf database
99.100 show ip ospf igp-shortcut-lsp
Synopsis
show ip ospf igp-shortcut-lsp
980 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) Shortcut Labeled
Switch Paths (LSPs) used by OSPF.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying IGP Shortcut LSPs used by OSPF:
ML66#show ip ospf igp-shortcut-lsp
99.101 show ip ospf igp-shortcut-route
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ] igp-shortcut-route
Description
Use this command to display Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) Shortcut routes
calculated by OSPF.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
Displaying IGP Shortcut routes calculated by OSPF:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 981

CLI Descriptions
ML66#show ip ospf igp-shortcut-route
99.102 show ip ospf interface
Synopsis
show ip ospf interface [<IFNAME_RSP_H> | <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo |
lo.<VRF>]
Description
Use this command to display interface information for OSPF.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The Rack, Slot, and Port value and VLAN number of the
IFNAME_RSP_H The Rack, Slot, Port, and Hierarchy value of the serial
Options
lo.VRF The loopback interface of a VRF instance, for example,

lo.vrf_1.
Examples
Displaying interface information:
ML66#show ip ospf interface
982 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.103 show ip ospf multi-area-adjacencies
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ] multi-area-adjacencies
Description
Use this command to display multi-area adjacency information for OSPF
instances.
Running the command without the <PROC_ID> operand, multi-area adjacency

information is displayed for all OSPF instances.
Running the command with the <PROC_ID> operand, multi-area adjacency

information is displayed only for the selected OSPF instance.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
Displaying multi-area adjacency information:
ML66#show ip ospf multi-area-adjacencies
99.104 show ip ospf neighbor
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ] neighbor [all | detail | <NEIGHBOR_ID>
[detail] | detail all | interface <INTERFACE_ADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to display information on OSPF neighbors.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 983

CLI Descriptions
Running the command without the <PROC_ID> operand, information is

displayed on all OSPF neighbors.
Running the command with the <PROC_ID> operand, information is displayed

only on the selected OSPF neighbor.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NEIGHBOR_ID Neighbor ID, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
INTERFACE_ADDR
Address of the interface, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
Options
all Displays information for all neighbors.
interface Displays information for a selected interface.
Examples
Displaying information on OSPF neighbors:
ML66#show ip ospf neighbor
99.105 show ip ospf route
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ] route
Description
Use this command to display OSPF routing table.
984 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Running the command without the <PROC_ID> operand, all OSPF routing tables
are displayed.
Running the command with the <PROC_ID> operand, only the selected OSPF
routing table is displayed.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
Displaying OSPF routing tables:
ML66#show ip ospf route
99.106 show ip ospf virtual-links
Synopsis
show ip ospf [<PROC_ID> ] virtual-links
Description
Use this command to display virtual link information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 985

CLI Descriptions
Operands
Examples
Displaying virtual link information:
ML66#show ip ospf virtual-links
99.107 show ip prefix-list
Synopsis
show ip prefix-list
Description
Use this command to display IP prefix lists.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66#show ip prefix-list
99.108 show ip route
Synopsis
— show ip route [summary]
— show ip route [vrf <VRF> ] [<IPADDR> | <IPADDR/PREFIX> ]
— show ip route [vrf <VRF> ] [database] [bgp | connected | ospf | static

| isis]
986 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display the IP routing table for a protocol or from a
particular table.
An internal route selection mechanism selects the best routes, based on protocol
administrative distance and metric values. These best routes can be displayed
with this command. To display all routes (selected and not selected), use the
database option.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
VRF The Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance

name
IPADDR Specifies a network in the IP routing table to display,

where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
IPADDR/PREFIX Specifies a network address with prefix length in the IP

routing table to display, where the format is <A.B.C.D> .
Options
summary Displays summary of all routes.
vrf Specifies a VRF instance.
database Displays IP routing table database information.
bgp Specifies BGP routes.
connected Specifies connected routes.
ospf Specifies OSPF routes.
static Specifies static routes.
isis Specifies IS-IS routes.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 987

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying the active (best) routes:
ML66>show ip route
Codes: K - kernel, C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, ia - IS-IS inter area
ew - East-West API * - candidate default
C 1.2.6.7/32 is directly connected, lo
Displaying only the selected OSPF routes learned by the router:

ML66#show ip route ospf
O 1.1.1.0/24 [110/20] via 2.2.2.1, 1/9/4.500, 00:00:44
O IA 4.4.4.0/24 [110/21] via 2.2.2.1, 1/9/4.500, 00:00:44
99.109 show ip vrf
Synopsis
show ip vrf [<VRF> ]
Description
Use this command to display Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) information.
Running the command without the <VRF> operand, information is displayed for
all VRF instances.
— IP VRF Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Examples
Displaying information of VRF instance vrf_1:
ML66>show ip vrf vrf_1
988 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.110 show iptables
Synopsis
show iptables [config]
Description
Use this command to display IPv4 firewall status information or the list of IPv4
firewall user-defined rules.
Running this command without the config option, the current status of the IPv4
firewall is displayed.
— Firewall Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
config Displays the IPv4 firewall user-defined rules.
Examples
Displaying IPv4 firewall status information:
ML66>show iptables
Displaying IPv4 firewall user-defined rules:

ML66>show iptables config
! Iptables configuration
open ip snmp 172.31.28.0/23
99.111 show ip6tables
Synopsis
show ip6tables [config]
Description
Use this command to display IPv6 firewall status information or the list of IPv6
firewall user-defined rules.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 989

CLI Descriptions
Running this command without the config option, the current status of the IPv6
firewall is displayed.
— Firewall Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
config Displays the IPv6 firewall user-defined rules.
Examples
Displaying IPv6 firewall status information:
ML66>show ip6tables
Displaying IPv6 firewall user-defined rules:

ML66>show ip6tables config
! Iptables configuration
open6 ip snmp 2004::0/23
99.112 show isis counter
Synopsis
show isis counter
Description
Use this command to display the IS-IS system counter entry MIBs.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show isis counter
Area is1:
IS-IS Level-1 isisSystemCounterEntry:
isisSysStatCorrLSPs: 0
isisSysStatAuthTypeFails: 0
990 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
isisSysStatAuthFails: 0
isisSysStatLSPDbaseOloads: 0
isisSysStatManAddrDropFromAreas: 0
isisSysStatAttmptToExMaxSeqNums: 0
isisSysStatSeqNumSkips: 0
isisSysStatOwnLSPPurges: 0
isisSysStatIDFieldLenMismatches: 0
isisSysStatMaxAreaAddrMismatches: 0
isisSysStatPartChanges: 0
isisSysStatSPFRuns: 0
isisSysStatPRCRuns: 0
IS-IS Level-2 isisSystemCounterEntry:
isisSysStatCorrLSPs: 0
isisSysStatAuthTypeFails: 0
isisSysStatAuthFails: 0
isisSysStatLSPDbaseOloads: 0
isisSysStatManAddrDropFromAreas: 0
isisSysStatAttmptToExMaxSeqNums: 0
isisSysStatSeqNumSkips: 0
isisSysStatOwnLSPPurges: 0
isisSysStatIDFieldLenMismatches: 0
isisSysStatMaxAreaAddrMismatches: 0
isisSysStatPartChanges: 0
isisSysStatSPFRuns: 0
isisSysStatPRCRuns: 0
99.113 show isis database
Synopsis
show isis [<TAG>] database [<LSPID> | {detail | verbose} | {level-1 |
level-2}]
Description
Use this command to display link state database information.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
LSPID The LSP ID in the format of <XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XX-XX>.
Options
detail Displays detailed link state database information.
verbose Displays verbose database information.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 991

CLI Descriptions
level-1 Specifies IS-IS level-1 routing link state database.
level-2 Specifies IS-IS level-2 routing link state database.
Examples
ML66>show isis database detail
Area is1:
IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database:
LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL
000F.0000.0001.00-00* 0x00000007 0xE15E 1188 1/0/0
Area Address: 49.000F
NLPID: 0xCC
IP Address: 10.10.12.97
Metric: 10 IP 10.10.12.0 255.255.255.0
Metric: 10 IS 000F.0000.0001.02
000F.0000.0001.02-00* 0x00000003 0x3C66 1026 1/0/0
Metric: 0 IS 000F.0000.0001.00
Metric: 0 IS 000F.0000.0002.00
000F.0000.0002.00-00 0x00000003 0x8C4B 1025 1/0/0
Area Address: 49.000F
NLPID: 0xCC
Hostname: isisd@redhat
IP Address: 10.10.12.94
Metric: 10 IP 10.10.12.0 255.255.255.0
Metric: 10 IS 000F.0000.0001.02
99.114 show isis interface
Synopsis
show isis interface [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo.<VRF> | counter]
Description
Use this command to display detailed interface information.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
992 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
lo Specifies the router loopback interface.
lo.VRF Specifies the loopback interface of a Virtual Routing and

Forwarding (VRF) instance, for example, lo.vrf_1.
counter Specifies the interface counters.
Examples
ML66>show isis interface
1/9/4.500 is up, line protocol is up
Routing Protocol: IS-IS (123)
Network Type: Broadcast
Circuit Type: level-1-2
Local circuit ID: 0x01
Extended Local circuit ID: 0x00000007
Local SNPA: 000c.29bc.bf2a
IP interface address:
100.4.5.5/24
IPv6 interface address:
1000::1/64
fe80::20c:29ff:febc:bf2a/64
Level-1 Metric: 10/10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: 0000.0000.000B.01
Number of active level-1 adjacencies: 1
Level-1 LSP MTU: 1492
Level-2 Metric: 10/10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: 0000.0000.000B.01
Number of active level-2 adjacencies: 0
Level-2 LSP MTU: 1492
Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 2 seconds
Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds
ML66>show isis interface counter

1/9/4.500:
IS-IS LAN Level-1 isisCircuitCounterEntry:
isisCircAdjChanges: 0
isisCircNumAdj: 0
isisCircInitFails: 0
isisCircRejAdjs: 0
isisCircIDFieldLenMismatches: 0
isisCircMaxAreaAddrMismatches: 0
isisCircAuthTypeFails: 0
isisCircAuthFails: 0
isisCircLanDesISChanges: 0
IS-IS LAN Level-2 isisCircuitCounterEntry:
isisCircAdjChanges: 0
isisCircNumAdj: 0
isisCircInitFails: 0
isisCircRejAdjs: 0
isisCircIDFieldLenMismatches: 0
isisCircMaxAreaAddrMismatches: 0
isisCircAuthTypeFails: 0
isisCircAuthFails: 0
isisCircLanDesISChanges: 0
IS-IS Level-1 isisPacketCounterEntry:
isisPacketCountIIHello in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountLSP in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountCSNP in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountPSNP in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountUnknown in/out: 0/0
IS-IS Level-2 isisPacketCounterEntry:
isisPacketCountIIHello in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountLSP in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountCSNP in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountPSNP in/out: 0/0
isisPacketCountUnknown in/out: 0/0
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 993

CLI Descriptions
99.115 show isis topology
Synopsis
show isis [<TAG>] topology {level-1 | level-2}
Description
Use this command to display IS-IS topology information.
— IS-IS Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
level-1 Specifies paths to all level-1 routers in the area.
level-2 Specifies paths to all level-2 routers in the area.
Examples
ML66>show isis topology
Area is1:
IS-IS paths to level-1 routers
System Id Metric Next-Hop Interface SNPA
000F.0000.0001 --
000F.0000.0002 10 000F.0000.0002 1/9/4.500 0006.5B0E.D27D
IS-IS paths to level-2 routers
System Id Metric Next-Hop Interface SNPA
0000.0000.0001 10 0000.0000.0001 1/9/4.500 0000.0CFA.F002
0000.0000.0099 10 0000.0000.0099 1/9/4.500 0003.4797.5E4C
0001.0002.0003 20 0000.0000.0099 1/9/4.500 0003.4797.5E4C
000F.0000.0001 --
000F.0000.0002 10 000F.0000.0002 1/9/4.500 0006.5B0E.D27D
99.116 show l1-bonding
Synopsis
show l1-bonding [<RSP> ]
994 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command without the <RSP> operand to display the members and
configured mappings of all L1-bonding groups.
Use this command with the <RSP> operand to display the members and
configured mappings of a specific L1-bonding group.
— Ethernet Commands: L1 Bonding
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the selected L1-
bonding group in the following format: <Rack/Slot/
Port> .
Examples
Displaying the members and configured mappings of all L1-bonding groups:
ML66>show l1-bonding
Displaying the members and configured mappings of the L1-bonding group

1/1/1:
ML66>show l1-bonding 1/1/1
99.117 show lag
Synopsis
show lag [<LAGID>]
Description
Use this command to display Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs).
— Ethernet Commands: LAG
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 995

CLI Descriptions
Operands
LAGID The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the master port of the
LAG in <Rack/Slot/Port> format.
Examples
Displaying LAG:
ML66>show lag 1/6/5
99.118 show lag lacpstats
Synopsis
show lag lacpstats
Description
Use this command to display Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying LACP statistics:
ML66>show lag lacpstats
99.119 show lag status
Synopsis
show lag status [<LAGID> ]
Description
Use this command to display status information about the Link Aggregation
Group (LAG).
996 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
If the <LAGID> parameter is not specified, the command shows status for all
LAGs.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands

Port> format.
Examples
Displaying the status of a LAG configured to LACP Active mode:
ML66>show lag status 1/9/4
LAG 1/9/4
---------
Name:
Designated Interface: LAN 1/9/4
Alarm Status: -
Oper Status: up
Local System Priority: 32766
Local System Id: ac:60:b6:99:a5:8d
Local Oper Key: 2
Remote System Priority: 32768
Remote System Id: ac:60:b6:9f:a8:1b
Remote Oper Key: 2
LAN 1/9/4
Local Port Priority: 1
Local Port Number: 2
Local Lacp Oper State: 0xfc(Activity,Timeout,Aggregation,Synchronization,Collect →
ing,Distributing)
Remote Oper Key: 2
Remote Port Priority: 1
Remote Port Number: 3
Remote Lacp Oper State: 0x7c(Timeout,Aggregation,Synchronization,Collecting,Distr →
ibuting)
LAN 1/9/8
Local Port Priority: 32768
Local Port Number: 6
Local Lacp Oper State: 0xfc(Activity,Timeout,Aggregation,Synchronization,Collect →
ing,Distributing)
Remote Oper Key: 2
Remote Port Priority: 32768
Remote Port Number: 30
Remote Lacp Oper State: 0x7c(Timeout,Aggregation,Synchronization,Collecting,Distr →
ibuting)
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 997

CLI Descriptions
99.120 show lan-dcn
Synopsis
— show lan-dcn [arp | ip | ipv6 address | ipv6 route | networks]
— show lan-dcn interface [brief]
Description
Use this command to display information about the LAN-DCN network.
— LAN-DCN IP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. For

more information, see show arp on page 902.
interface Displays the parameters of all LAN-DCN interfaces.
ip Displays LAN-DCN IP information. For more information,

see show lan-dcn ip on page 999.
ipv6 address Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN DCN interface.
ipv6 route Displays the IPv6 routing table.
networks Show all connected DCNs.
brief Displays a brief summary.
Examples
Displaying general information about LAN-DCN:
ML66#show lan-dcn
no shutdown
mtu 1500
no pingtargethost
ip address 10.41.97.22/23
998 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
no ipv6 address
mtu 1500
interface lo-dcn
ip address 12.24.23.1/32
no ipv6 address
99.121 show lan-dcn ip
Synopsis
show lan-dcn ip [address | dhcp | domainname | dscp | interface | name-
server | route | sockets | traffic]
Description
Use this command to display information about the DCN IP network and
interfaces.
— LAN-DCN IP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
address Displays the IPv4 address of the LAN-DCN interfaces.
dhcp Displays the DHCP configuration.
domainname Displays the name of the domain.
dscp Displays the DSCP value configured for outgoing IPv4

DCN traffic.
interface Displays the properties of the LAN-DCN interfaces.
name-server Displays the Domain Name System (DNS) server settings.
route Displays the IPv4 routing table.
sockets Displays the LAN-DCN IP socket status.
traffic Displays the LAN-DCN IP statistics.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 999

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying the IP address of the LAN-DCN interfaces:
ML66#show lan-dcn ip address
ip address 10.41.97.22/23
no ipv6 address
interface lo-dcn
ip address 12.24.23.1/32
no ipv6 address
Displaying the IPv4 routing table:

ML66#show lan-dcn ip route
ew - East-West API> - selected route, * - FIB route, p - stale info
C *> 10.41.96.0/23 is directly connected, LAN-DCN 1/6/0
C 10.0.0.0/30 is directly connected, LOCAL-ACCESS 1/6/1
C *> 10.10.12.13/32 is directly connected, LO-DCN
S *> 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.41.96.1, LAN-DCN 1/6/0
Displaying the DNS server configuration:

ML66>show lan-dcn ip name-server
lan-dcn ip name-server 1.2.3.4 2005::45 0.0.0.0
99.122 show lan-dcn ipv6
Synopsis
show lan-dcn ipv6 [address | dhcp | domainname | dscp | interface | name-
server | ndp | route | sockets | traffic]
Description
Use this command to display information about the DCN IP network and
interfaces.
— LAN-DCN IPv6 Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
address Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN-DCN interfaces.
1000 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
dhcp Displays the DHCP configuration.
domainname Displays the name of the domain.
dscp Displays the DSCP value configured for outgoing IPv6

DCN traffic.
interface Displays the properties of the LAN-DCN

interfaces.Displays the DSCP value configured for
outgoing IPv6 DCN traffic.
name-server Displays the Domain Name System (DNS) server settings.
ndp Displays the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

table.
route Displays the IPv6 routing table.
sockets Displays the LAN-DCN IP socket status.
traffic Displays the LAN-DCN IP statistics.
Examples
Displaying IPv6 address of the LAN-DCN interfaces:
ML66Displays the DSCP value configured for outgoing#show lan-dcn ipv6 address
ip address 10.41.97.22/23
no ipv6 address
interface lo-dcn
ip address 12.24.23.1/32
Displaying the IPv6 routing table:

ML66#show lan-dcn ipv6 route
ew - East-West API> - selected route, * - FIB route, p - stale info
C *> 2001:db8::/127 is directly connected, LOCAL-ACCESS 1/6/1
C *> 2006::32/128 is directly connected, LO-DCN
99.123 show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress
Synopsis
show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1001

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display the configured Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) server address.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the configured DHCP server address:
ML66>show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp relayaddress
2001::1
99.124 show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp status
Synopsis
show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp status
Description
Use this command to display the running state of the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay agent.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the running state of the DHCP relay agent:
ML66>show lan-dcn ipv6 dhcp status
DHCP relay agent is running
99.125 show ldp
1002 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show ldp
Description
Use this command to display basic Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) attributes
defined for the current Label Switch Router (LSR).
— LDP Configuration Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying basic LDP attributes defined for the current LSR:
ML66#show ldp
Router ID : 5.5.5.5
LDP Version : 1
Global Merge Capability : Merge Capable
Label Advertisement Mode : Downstream Unsolicited
Label Retention Mode : Liberal
Label Control Mode : Ordered
Instance Loop Detection : Off
Request Retry : On
Propagate Release : Disabled
Graceful Restart : Disabled
Hello Interval : 5
Targeted Hello Interval : 15
Hold time : 15
Targeted Hold time : 45
Keepalive Interval : 10
Keepalive Timeout : 30
Request retry Timeout : 5
Transport Address data :
Labelspace 0 : 5.5.5.5 (in use)
Import BGP routes : No
DSCP value : 48
99.126 show ldp adjacency
Synopsis
show ldp adjacency
Description
Use this command to display all the adjacencies for the current Label Switch
Router (LSR).
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1003

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying all the adjacencies for the current LSR:
ML66#show ldp adjacency
IP Address Interface Name Holdtime LDP ID
192.168.3.5 1/9/4.500 15 10.10.0.18:0
192.168.4.5 1/9/4.501 15 10.10.0.18:0
99.127 show ldp downstream
Synopsis
show ldp downstream
Description
Use this command to display the status of all downstream sessions and the label
information exchanged.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of all downstream sessions and the label information
exchanged:
ML66#show ldp downstream
Session peer 192.168.11.50:
Downstream state: Established Label: impl-null RequestID: 0 Peer:
192.168.11.50 Attr:
192.168.11.50 Attr:
1004 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
192.168.11.50 Attr:
Downstream state: Established Label: 20 RequestID: 0 Peer: 192.168.11.50
Attr:
192.168.13.60 Attr:
Attr:
Attr:
192.168.13.60 Attr:
Attr:
192.168.13.60 Attr:
Attr: --More--
Attr:
99.128 show ldp fec
Synopsis
— show ldp fec [prefix]
— show ldp fec prefix [<FEC/PREFIX> ]
Description
Use the following command to display all Forwarding Equivalence Classes (FECs)
known to the current Label Switch Router (LSR).
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
FEC/PREFIX The IPv4 prefix, where the format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
prefix Sets a FEC prefix.
Examples
Displaying all FECs known to the current LSR:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1005

CLI Descriptions
ML66#show ldp fec

LSR codes : E/N - LSR is egress/non-egress for this FEC,
L - LSR received a label for this FEC,
> - LSR will use this route for the FEC
Code FEC Session Out Label Nexthop Addr
E> 10.10.0.0/24 non-existent none connected
NL 10.10.0.0/24 192.168.3.5 impl-null connected
NL 192.168.5.0/24 192.168.3.5 impl-null invalid
99.129 show ldp inter-area-fecs
Synopsis
show ldp inter-area-fecs [prefix [<FEC/PREFIX> ] ]
Description
Use this command to display all Forwarding Equivalence Classes (FECs) using
the LPM-based mapping procedure.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
FEC/PREFIX The IPv4 FEC for the inter area FEC, where the format is
<A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
prefix Sets a prefix for inter area FEC.
Examples
Displaying all FECs using the LPM-based mapping procedure:
ML66#show ldp inter-area-fecs
LSR codes : E/N - LSR is egress/non-egress for this FEC,
L - LSR received a label for this FEC,
> - LSR will use this route for the FEC
Code FEC Session Out Label Nexthop Addr
Matching RIB prefix - 1.1.1.0/24
1006 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
NL> 1.1.1.1/32 33.33.33.33 52485 11.11.11.1

NL> 1.1.1.2/32 33.33.33.33 52486 11.11.11.1
99.130 show ldp interface
Synopsis
show ldp interface [<IFNAME> ]
Description
Use this command to display the list of all interfaces on the current Label Switch
Router (LSR), and to indicate whether a given interface is label-switching or not.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME The name of the interface.
Examples
Displaying a list of all interfaces on the LSR:
ML66#show ldp interface
Interface LDP Identifier Label-switching Merge Capability
1/9/4.500 10.10.0.11:0 Disabled N/A
lo 10.10.0.11:0 Disabled N/A
1/9/4.501 10.10.0.11:0 Enabled Merge capable
1/9/4.502 10.10.0.11:0 Enabled Merge capable
Displaying information about interface 1/9/4.501:

ML66#show ldp interface 1/9/4.501
Status : Enabled
Primary IP Address : 192.168.3.4
Interface Type : Ethernet
Label Merge Capability : Merge Capable
Hello Interval : 5
Targeted Hello Interval : 15
Hold Time : 15
Targeted Hold Time : 45
Advertisement Mode : Downstream On Demand
Label Retention Mode : Liberal
Administrative Groups : ipi1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1007

CLI Descriptions
99.131 show ldp lsp
Synopsis
show ldp lsp {detail | host | prefix [<FEC/PREFIX> ] [detail] }
Description
Use this command to display Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) Label-Switched
Paths (LSPs) and, optionally, advertise-label information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
FEC/PREFIX The IPv4 Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) for an LSP,

where the format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
Options
detail Displays detailed onformation.
host Sets host LDPs to display.
prefix Sets prefix LSPs to display.
Examples
Displaying detailed LSP information:
ML66#show ldp lsp detail
Advertisement spec:
Prefix acl = pfx1; Peer acl = pfx1
Prevent the distribution of any assigned labels
FEC IPV4:1.1.1.0/30 -> 0.0.0.0
50.50.50.50
Attr:
Advert acl(s): Prevent the distribution of any assigned labels
FEC IPV4:3.3.3.0/30 -> 0.0.0.0
FEC IPV4:10.30.0.0/24 -> 0.0.0.0
50.50.50.50
1008 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Attr:
FEC IPV4:50.50.50.50/32 -> 1.1.1.1
Advert acl(s): Prefix acl = pfx1; Peer acl = pfx1
FEC IPV4:55.55.55.55/32 -> 3.3.3.2
FEC IPV4:169.254.0.0/16 -> 0.0.0.0
50.50.50.50
Attr:
99.132 show ldp session
Synopsis
show ldp session [<IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to display all sessions established between the current Label
Switch Router (LSR) and other LSRs. Use the IP address parameter to display
detailed information for established sessions with the peer having the specified
IPv4 address.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of the peer, where the format is

<A.B.C.D> .
Examples
Displaying detailed information about established sessions with the peer
192.168.3.5:
ML66#show ldp session 192.168.3.5
Session state : OPERATIONAL
Up Time : 1d 3h 30m 8s
Session role : Passive
TCP Connection : Established
Peer Address for TCP : 192.168.3.5
Local Address for TCP : 192.168.1.5
Interface being used : 1/9/4.500
Peer LDP ID : 10.10.0.18:0
Peer LDP Password : mypwd
Authentication type : MD5
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1009

CLI Descriptions
Adjacencies : If Name Peer Address

1/9/4.500 192.168.3.5
1/9/4.501 192.168.4.5
Advertisement mode : Downstream Unsolicited
Label retention mode : Liberal
Graceful Restart : Not Capable
Reconnect Interval : 15
Address List received : 192.168.3.5
192.168.4.5
Received Labels : Fec Label Maps To
IPV4:10.10.0.0/24 impl-null none
Sent Labels : Fec Label Maps To
99.133 show ldp statistics
Synopsis
— show ldp statistics [<IFNAME> ]
— show ldp statistics advertise-labels
Description
Use this command to display Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) packet statistics.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME The name of the interface.
Options
advertise-labels Sets an IP access list of advertise-labels.
Examples
Displaying LDP packet statistics:
1010 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
ML66#show ldp statistics

=======================================================
LSR ID = 0.0.0.0:0 : INTERFACE NAME: 1/9/4.500
=======================================================
PacketType Total
Sent Received
Notification 0 0
Hello 0 0
Initialization 0 0
Keepalive 0 0
Address 0 0
Address Withdraw 0 0
Label Mapping 0 0
Label Request 0 0
Label Withdraw 0 0
Label Release 0 0
Request Abort 0 0
=======================================================
Displaying LDP packet statistics for advertise-labels:

ML66#show ldp statistics advertise-labels
Advertisement spec:
Prefix acl = pfx1; Peer acl = pfx1
Deny : Label Mapping = 2
Label Request = 0
Prevent the distribution of any assigned labels
Deny : Label Mapping = 9
Label Request = 3
99.134 show ldp targeted-peers
Synopsis
show ldp targeted-peers
Description
Use this command to display the targeted peers configured on the current Label
Switch Router (LSR).
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the targeted peers configured on the current LSR:
ML66#show ldp targeted-peers
IP Address Interface
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1011

CLI Descriptions
192.168.201.2 1/9/4.500
99.135 show ldp upstream
Synopsis
show ldp upstream
Description
Use this command to display the status of all upstream sessions and label
information exchanged.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of all upstream sessions and label information exchanged:
ML66#show ldp upstream
Upstream state: Established Label: impl-null RequestID: 0 Peer:
192.168.11.50 Attr:
192.168.11.50 Attr:
192.168.11.50 Attr:
192.168.13.60 Attr: None
192.168.13.60 Attr: None
192.168.13.60 Attr: None
Upstream state: Established Label: 16 RequestID: 0 Peer: 192.168.13.60 Attr:
None
None
192.168.13.60 Attr: None
None
N --Mo
1012 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.136 show legalnotice
Synopsis
show legalnotice
Description
Use this command to display the customized legal notice.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the customized legal notice:
ML66#show legalnotice
This is a customized legal notice.
99.137 show license install status
Synopsis
show license install status
Description
Use this command to display the status of the License Key File (LKF) installation.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of the LKF installation:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1013

CLI Descriptions
ML66>show license install status

LKF was downloaded, stored on RMM and activated
99.138 show license restrict-unlocked-period
Synopsis
show license restrict-unlocked-period
Description
Use this command to display the current status of the unlocked period restriction
for control_user.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the current status of the unlocked period restriction:
ML66>show license restrict-unlocked-period
Unlocked period restriction is disable
99.139 show license status
Synopsis
show license status [all | brief | fal <FAL>]
Description
Use this command to display the following information regarding the licensing
status of the NE:
— NE License Status
— NE License Mode
— RMM fingerprint
— Information about every license
1014 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
all Displays the licensing status of the NE and the status of

each license.
brief Displays the licensing status of the NE in brief. This option

is selected by default.
fal Displays the status of the given license product.
Examples
Displaying the licensing status of the NE:
ML66>show license status
NE License Status: Degraded
RMM fingerprint: 6801135126a986072326ffff
Displaying the licensing status of the NE and the status of all licenses handling by
the SBL:
ML66>show license status all
NE License Status: Degraded
RMM fingerprint: 6801135126a986072326ffff
Prod NO |Product Name |Use|Ins|Unl|Sum|Feature |License
------------+------------------------------+---+---+---+---+--------+--------
FAL1241127|Enable Monitoring | 1| 1| 0| 1| Ok| Ok
FAL1242515|M-L 669x R1 Basic SW | 1| 0| 1| 1| Ok| Ok
FAL1242517|M-L 6600 Eth ProviderMode | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242518|M-L 6600 Eth SOAM FM/PM | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242519|M-L 6600 IGMP snooping | 1| 0| 0| 0|Degraded| Missing
FAL1242521|M-L 6600 1588 sync | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242523|M-L 6600 PDH Network Prot | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242524|M-L 6600 Enable Eth port | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242525|M-L 6600 UG 25to50Mbps | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242536|M-L 6600 1+1 RL Prot | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1015

CLI Descriptions
FAL1242537|M-L 6600 XPIC | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok

FAL1242538|M-L 6600 RL Bonding | 6| 0| 3| 3|Degraded| Missing
FAL1242540|M-L 6600 Header Compr | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242541|M-L 6600 2nd carrier | 3| 0| 1| 1|Degraded| Missing
FAL1242542|M-L 6600 TX HP | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242543|M-L 6600 Mod Agile RAU Xu | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242544|M-L 6600 Node GUI | 1| 0| 1| 1| Ok| Ok
FAL1242609|M-L 6600 ERP | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242692|M-L 6600 10Gb port | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242693|M-L 6600 E1 ports | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242805|M-L 6600 STM-1 port | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242806|M-L 6600 CES | 1| 0| 0| 0|Degraded| Missing
FAL1242973|M-L 6600 L3VPN Full Capacity | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1242974|M-L 6600 Basic IP/MPLS | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1243028|M-L 6600 NPU prot | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1243039|M-L 6600 Energy Eff | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
FAL1243068|M-L 6600 OTH Encryption | 0| 0| 0| 0| Ok| Ok
Displaying the licensing status of the FAL 124 2526 license:

ML66>show license status fal FAL1242526
Prod NO |Product Name |Use|Ins|Unl|Sum|Feature |License
------------+------------------------------+---+---+---+---+--------+--------
99.140 show license status ports
Synopsis
show license status ports [[degraded] | {all | fal <FAL> | node | slot
<SLOTNUMBER> | port <SLOTNUMBER> <PORTNUMBER>}]
Description
Use this command to display detailed information on license usage on the NE.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
SLOTNUMBER The slot number.
PORTNUMBER The port number.
1016 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
degraded Displays information about the degraded licenses only.
all Displays information about all licenses.
fal Displays information about licenses with the given license

product number.
node Displays information about licenses on node level.
port Displays information about licenses on the selected port.
slot Displays information about licenses on the selected slot.
Examples
Displaying all used licenses on the NE:
ML66>show license status ports
Prod NO |Product Name |Scope |Status
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+----------
FAL1241127|Enable Monitoring | node| Ok
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
FAL1242515|M-L 669x R1 Basic SW | node| Ok
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
FAL1242519|M-L 6600 IGMP snooping | node| Degraded
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
FAL1242538|M-L 6600 RL Bonding | 1/2/1| Ok
| | 1/2/2| Ok
| | 1/11/1| Ok
| | 1/11/2| Degraded
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
FAL1242541|M-L 6600 2nd carrier | 1/2/2| Ok
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
FAL1242544|M-L 6600 Node GUI | node| Ok
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
FAL1242806|M-L 6600 CES | 1/7| Degraded
------------+----------------------------------------+-----------+-----------
99.141 show license unlockedperiod
Synopsis
show license unlockedperiod [ all | brief ]
Description
Use this command to display status information of the licensing unlocked
periods.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1017

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
all Displays information about all type of unlocked periods.
brief Displays information about the current unlocked period.
Examples
Displaying information about the current unlocked period:
ML66>show license unlockedperiod
--Status---------------------------------------------
Unlocked Period Reason: N/A
Left Unlocked Time: N/A
Latest Unlocked Period Entered: 2014.08.25., 14:49:23
Displaying information about all type of unlocked periods:

ML66>show license unlockedperiod all
--Status---------------------------------------------
Unlocked Period Reason: N/A
Left Unlocked Time: N/A
Latest Unlocked Period Entered: 2014.08.25., 14:49:23
Integration Unlock Tokens: 1
Maintenance Unlock Tokens: 2
Emergency Unlock Tokens: 2
--Statistics-----------------------------------------
Unlocked by Integration: 0
Unlocked by Maintenance: 0
Unlocked by Emergency: 0
Unlocked by RMM Missing: 0
Unlocked by Software Upgrade: 1
99.142 show license upload status
Synopsis
show license upload status
Description
Use this command to display the upload status of the License Request File (LRF).
1018 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the upload status of the LRF:
ML66>show license upload status
Upload finished successfully
99.143 show linktrace
Synopsis
show linktrace
Description
Use this command to display linktrace results.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying linktrace results:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#show linktrace
Linktrace finished
Start Time:2014-11-18 12:09:05 ,TTL:64,Destination: 3
Transmitted 1 LTM and got 2 responses
Seq Number 1794766368 ,Receive Order 1

{
Ltr TTL: 63
Forwarded: YES
Terminal Mep: NO
Last Egress Identifier: 0000c8:35:b8:2f:57:47
Next Egress Identifier: 0000c8:35:b8:2f:57:34
Relay Action: RlyFDB
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1019

CLI Descriptions
Ingress Action: IngOK

Ingress MAC address: c8:35:b8:2f:57:34
}
Seq Number 1794766368 ,Receive Order 2

{
Ltr TTL: 62
Forwarded: NO
Terminal Mep: YES
Last Egress Identifier: 0000c8:35:b8:2f:57:34
Next Egress Identifier: 00003c:19:7d:4a:a1:43
Relay Action: RlyHit
Ingress Action: IngOK
Ingress MAC address: 3c:19:7d:4a:a1:43
LinkTrace hit Success
}
99.144 show lldp config
Synopsis
show lldp config [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display the current Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
current LLDP configuration is to be displayed, in the
following format: <Rack/Slot/Port> .
Examples
Displaying all LLDP configuration of the NE:
1020 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
ML66>show lldp config

LLDP global settings:
lldp message-tx-interval 30
lldp message-tx-hold-multiplier 4
lldp message-fast-tx 1
lldp tx-fast-init 4
lldp notification-interval 30
LLDP interface level settings:
exit
exit
admin-status disabled
exit
exit
Displaying LLDP configuration only for LAN 1/6/4:

ML66>show lldp config 1/6/4
exit
exit
99.145 show lldp counters
Synopsis
show lldp counters [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) counters.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1021

CLI Descriptions
Operands
current LLDP counters are to be displayed, in the
Examples
Displaying all LLDP counters on the NE:
ML66>show lldp counters
LLDP global counters:
Remote table inserts : 2
Remote table deletes : 0
Remote table drops : 0
Remote table ageouts : 0
Remote tables last changed : 0 days 0 hours 8 minutes 8 seconds ago
LAN 1/6/4
Rx Frames error : 0
Ageouts total : 0
LAN 1/6/6
Rx Frames error : 0
Ageouts total : 0
Displaying the LLDP counters of LAN 1/6/4:

ML66>show lldp counters 1/6/4
LAN 1/6/4
Rx Frames error : 0
Ageouts total : 0
99.146 show lldp local-info
Synopsis
show lldp local-info
Description
Use this command to display the LLDP-related local system information that is
advertised to LLDP neighbors.
1022 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying LLDP-related local system information:
ML66>show lldp local-info
LLDP local system data:
Chassis Id type : locally assigned(7)
Chassis Id : X912405681
System Name : ML66-10-41-105-133
System Description : MINI-LINK 6600
Management Address : 10.41.105.133
Management Address : 2001:db8::1
99.147 show lldp neighbors
Synopsis
show lldp neighbors [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display the LLDP information received from LLDP
neighbors.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The rack, slot, and port values of the selected interface, in
the following format: <Rack/Slot/Port> .
Examples
Displaying information received from all LLDP neighbors:
ML66>show lldp neighbors
+----------+-------------------+----------------------+----------------+------+--- →
-------------------+----------------------------+----------------------+
|Interface |Dest. Mac Address |Chassis ID |Port ID |TTL |Sys →
tem Name |System Description |Management Address |
+----------+-------------------+----------------------+----------------+------+--- →
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1023

CLI Descriptions
-------------------+----------------------------+----------------------+
|1/6/4 |01:80:C2:00:00:0E |X912466689 |1/6/4 |121 |ML66 →
-10-41-105-132 |MINI-LINK 6600 |10.41.105.132 |
|1/6/5 |01:80:C2:00:00:0E |X912405677 |1/6/5 |121 |ML66 →
-10-41-105-128 |MINI-LINK 6600 |10.41.105.128 |
Displaying information received from LLDP neighbors on LAN 1/6/4:

ML66>show lldp neighbors 1/6/4
Local Interface : 1/6/4
Dest. Mac Address : 01:80:C2:00:00:0E
Chassis ID Type : locally assigned(7)
Chassis ID : X912466689
Port ID Type : interface name(5)
Port ID : 1/6/4
Port Description : LAN
Time to Live : 121
System Name : ML66-10-41-105-132
99.148 show local-info
Synopsis
show local-info
Description
Use this command to display the LLDP-related local system information that is
advertised to LLDP neighbors.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying LLDP-related local system information:
ML66(config-lldp)#show local-info
LLDP local system data:
Chassis Id type : locally assigned(7)
Chassis Id : X912405681
System Name : ML66-10-41-105-133
Management Address : 2001:db8::1
99.149 show localuseridletimer
1024 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show localuseridletimer
Description
Use this command to display the inactivity timer in minutes for all local users.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the inactivity timer for local users:
ML66>show localuseridletimer
idle Timer user local = 15 min
99.150 show loopback
Synopsis
show loopback
Description
Use this command to display loopback results.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying loopback results:
ML66(cfm-md-ma-mep)#show loopback
Loopback session status: in progress
Source MEP Id: 61
Destination MAC: 00:00:00:00:00:00
LBM messages to send: 1
LBR timeout: 5000 ms
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1025

CLI Descriptions
Vlan priority: 0
Vlan drop eligibility enabled: yes
PDU secuense number: 0
Sent LBMs: 9
Received LBRs: 9
Lost LBRs: 0
Missordered LBRs: 0
99.151 show mac-address-table
Synopsis
show mac-address-table [interface <R/S/P>] [vlan <VLAN-ID>] [port
<BRIDGE-PORT-ID>] [address <MAC-ADDRESS-MASK>] [lag <LAGID>]
[static] [dynamic] [full] [count]
Description
Use this command to display the contents of the table with learned Media Access
Control (MAC) addresses.
If a filter is specified, only MAC address entries that match the filter are listed. If
no filter is specified, maximum 100 rows are displayed to prevent flooding the
user terminal. Use the full option to display all address entries.
Note: The displayed MAC address table is refreshed in every 64 seconds.The

MAC address can be visible at latest 64 seconds after it was deleted
from the lower layer forwarding table.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
R/S/P The Rack, Slot, and Port value of the interface where the
VLAN-ID Identifier of the VLAN.
BRIDGE-PORT-ID
Identifier of the port.
MAC-ADDRESS-MASK
Identifier of the MAC address. It can be complete MAC
address, like 06:fe:12:34:56:78, or incomplete MAC
address with wildcard * marks, like * 06:fe *.
LAGID Identifier of LAG, in <Rack/Slot/Port> format.
1026 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
interface Lists only the entries belonging to the specified interface.
vlan Lists only the entries belonging to the specified VLAN.
port Lists only the entries for the specified bridge port.
address Lists only the entries matching this address.
static Lists only the entries that are static.
lag Lists only the entries belonging to the LAG.
dynamic Lists only the entries that are dynamic.
full Lists all address entries.
count Displays only the count without MAC address table.
Examples
Displaying MAC address table:
ML66#show mac-address-table
VLAN MAC Address Status Port Interface
----+-----------------+-------+----+-------------
1 00:0f:66:8e:67:7e learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
1 00:0f:66:ad:b1:f3 learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
1 08:00:27:9a:c2:04 learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
1 34:64:a9:7e:3c:20 learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
1 9c:b6:54:9f:9a:44 learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
1 ac:60:b6:97:20:99 learned 1 LAN-DCN 1/6/0
1 ec:f4:bb:35:0e:ca learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
1 f0:4d:a2:4e:8f:e3 learned 3 LAN 1/6/5
----+-----------------+-------+----+-------------
Showing 8 out of 8 entries.
Aging Time 300
99.152 show mac-whitelist
Synopsis
show mac-whitelist [<LISTNO> ]
Description
Use this command to display the contents of a Media Access Control (MAC) white
list.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1027

CLI Descriptions
— Ethernet Commands: Security and Admission Control
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
LISTNO The number of the MAC address list.
Examples
Displaying the specified MAC white list:
ML66>show mac-whitelist 1
ethernet-mac-whitelist 1
name whitelist
mac 00:00:00:00:00:00
mac 00:00:00:00:00:01
mac 00:00:00:00:00:02
99.153 show memory
Synopsis
show memory process cesp
Description
Use this command to display information about memory processes.
Command Mode
Options
process cesp Displays information about the Circuit Emulation Service

(CES) process.
Examples
Displaying information about the CES process:
ML66#show memory process cesp
/proc info:
VmPeak: 9016 kB
VmSize: 9000 kB
VmLck: 0 kB
VmPin: 0 kB
VmHWM: 2452 kB
VmRSS: 2452 kB
VmData: 408 kB
1028 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
VmStk: 132 kB
VmExe: 652 kB
VmLib: 6276 kB
VmPTE: 36 kB
VmSwap: 0 kB
mallinfo():
Total space allocated (arena): 255016
number of non-inuse chunks (ordblks): 43
unused -- always zero (smblks): 0
number of mmapped regions (hblks): 0
total space in mmapped regions (hblkhd): 0
unused -- always zero (usmblks): 0
unused -- always zero (fsmblks): 0
total allocated space (uordblks): 117088
total non-inuse space (fordblks): 137928
top-most, releasable (malloc_trim) space (keepcost): 128328
99.154 show mfib status
Synopsis
show mfib status
Description
Use this command to display the alarm status, capacity, and fill level of the IP
multicast forwarding table, used by Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) and Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the status of the IP multicast forwarding table:
ML66#show mfib status
Alarm Information
MC forwarding table alarm enabled: no
MC forwarding table alarm status: 0
Max. number of MC forwarding table entries in HW: 1023
Current number of MC forwarding table entries in HW: 2
99.155 show mld snooping
Synopsis
show mld snooping
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1029

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display the global status of Multicast Listener Discovery
(MLD) snooping on the NE.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the global status of MLD snooping:
ML66#show mld snooping
MLD snooping Admin State: Enabled
MLD snooping Oper State: Up
99.156 show mld snooping config
Synopsis
show mld snooping config
Description
Use this command to display Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping
configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying MLD snooping configuration:
ML66#show mld snooping config
mld snooping enable
mld snooping vlan 10
proxy-reporting
query-interval 125
robust 2
exit
1030 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.157 show mld snooping group
Synopsis
show mld snooping group [<GRPADDR> [source <SRCADDR>]] vlan
<VLANID> [ctag <CVID>]
Description
Use this command to display a list of Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)
multicast groups and the associated member ports on a specific VLAN.
Use the optional <GRPADDR> and <SRCADDR> operands to display detailed

port membership information for a specific multicast group or channel.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
GRPADDR Specifies the multicast group address.
SRCADDR Specifies the IP address of the multicast source.


Options
source The IP address of the multicast source.
Examples
Displaying the list of multicast groups and channels on VLAN 10:
ML66#show mld snooping group vlan 10
VLAN:10 CVLAN:-
Group Addr: ff38::db8:0:1, Source Addr: 2001::1, Members: 1/6/4
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1031

CLI Descriptions
Group Addr: ff38::db8:0:1, Source Addr: 2001::2, Members: 1/6/4

Group Addr: ff38::db8:0:2, Source Addr: * , Members: 1/6/4,1/1/2
Displaying detailed information for multicast group ff38::db8:0:2 on VLAN 10:

ML66#show mld snooping group ff38::db8:0:2 vlan 10
Multicast Group details
Group Addr: ff38::db8:0:2, Source Addr: *, VLAN/CVLAN: 10/-
WAN 1/1/2 Expires: 195 s, Uptime: 00:03:23
99.158 show mld snooping mrouter
Synopsis
show mld snooping mrouter [vlan <VLANID> [ctag <CVID>]]
Description
Use this command to display the multicast router ports on a specific VLAN.
Use this command without the vlan option to display multicast router ports on all
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping enabled VLANs.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands


Options
Examples
Displaying multicast router ports of VLAN 10:
ML66#show mld snooping mrouter vlan 10
Multicast router ports
1032 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
VLAN:10 CVLAN:-
99.159 show mld snooping vlan
Synopsis
show mld snooping vlan <VLANID> [ctag <CVID>] [counter]
Description
Use this command to display Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping status
on a specific VLAN.
Use the counter option to also display the per VLAN port MLD message counters.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands


Options
counter Displays the port counters.
Examples
Displaying MLD snooping status of VLAN 10:
ML66#show mld snooping vlan 10 counter
VLAN:10 CVLAN:-
Querier address: fe80::1
Querier version: 2
Query interval: 125 s
Robustness variable: 2
Query response interval: 10 s
Group count: 3
Router port count: 1
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1033

CLI Descriptions
MLD counters
LAN 1/6/4
Joins received: 254
Leaves received: 0
Invalid MLD msg. rec.: 0
WAN 1/1/2
Joins received: 123
Leaves received: 0
Invalid MLD msg. rec.: 0
99.160 show mpls
Synopsis
show mpls
Description
Use this command to display MPLS data.
— MPLS Configuration Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying MPLS data:
ML66#show mpls
Minimum label configured: 16
Maximum label configured: 1048575
Per label-space information:
Label-space 0 is using minimum label: 16 and maximum label: 1048575
Label-space 2342 is using minimum label: 556 and maximum label: 1048575
Custom ingress TTL configured: none
Custom egress TTL configured: none
Log message detail: none
Admin group detail: none
Packets dropped IP:115167, dropped MPLS:0 sent to IP:490943, labeled:0,
switch
d:0
MPLS Differentiated Services Supported Classes data:
CLASS DSCP_value
be 000000
MPLS Differentiated Services CLASS to EXP mapping data:
CLASS DSCP_value EXP_value
be 000000 0
1034 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.161 show mpls cross-connect-table
Synopsis
show mpls cross-connect-table [<INDEX> ] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display detailed information for all entries created in the
MPLS cross-connect table.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
INDEX The cross connect entry index. The valid range is 1–

4294967295.
Options
Examples
Displaying detailed information for all entries created in the MPLS cross-connect
table:
ML66#show mpls cross-connect-table
Cross connect ix: 3, in intf: -, in label: 0, out-segment ix: 3
Owner: RSVP, Persistent: No, Admin Status: Up, Oper Status: Up
Out-segment with ix: 3, owner: RSVP, out intf: 1/9/4.500, out label: 16
Nexthop addr: 10.10.20.80, cross connect ix: 3, op code: Push
Cross connect ix: 6, in intf: -, in label: 0, out-segment ix: 6
Owner: RSVP, Persistent: No, Admin Status: Up, Oper Status: Up
Out-segment with ix: 6, owner: RSVP, out intf: 1/9/4.500, out label: 17
Nexthop addr: 10.10.20.80, cross connect ix: 6, op code: Push
99.162 show mpls forwarding-table
Synopsis
show mpls forwarding-table
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1035

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display Diffserv configuration information and the
forwarding table entries.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Display Diffserv configuration information and the forwarding table entries:
ML66#show mpls forwarding-table
Codes:> - selected FTN, p - stale FTN, B - BGP FTN, K - CLI FTN,
L - LDP FTN, R - RSVP-TE FTN, S - SNMP FTN, I - IGP-Shortcut,
U - unknown FTN, T - MPLS-TP Map FTN
Code FEC Tunnel-id FTN-ID Pri Nexthop Out-Label Out-Intf LSP-Type
T> 114.1.2.3/32 0 1 Yes - 57 1/9/4.500 LSP_DEFAULT
99.163 show mpls ftn-table
Synopsis
show mpls ftn-table [<IPADDR/PREFIX> ] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display MPLS FEC-To-NHLFE (FTN) table information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR/PREFIX The Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) for which FTN

entries are displayed with prefix length, where the format
is <A.B.C.D/P> .
1036 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options
detail Displays detailed FTN entries for the given FEC.
Examples
Displaying FTN table information:
ML66#show mpls ftn-table
99.164 show mpls ilm-table
Synopsis
show mpls ilm-table [ {<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | –} <LABEL> ]
Description
Use this command to display MPLS Incoming Label Map (ILM) table information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Slot/Port.VLAN> .
LABEL The incoming label. The valid range is 16–1048575.
Options
– Displays entries for packets on any interface.
Examples
Displaying MPLS ILM table information:
ML66#show mpls ilm-table
Codes:> - selected ILM, p - stale ILM, K - CLI ILM, T - MPLS-TP
Code In-Label Out-Label In-Intf Out-Intf Nexthop FEC ILM-ID LSP-Typ
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1037

CLI Descriptions
T> 22 N/A 1/9/4.500 N/A N/A N/A 1

LSP_DEFAULT
99.165 show mpls in-segment-table
Synopsis
show mpls in-segment-table [ {<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | –} <LABEL> ]
[detail]
Description
Use this command to display detailed information about all entries in the
Incoming Label Map (ILM) table.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Slot/Port.VLAN> .
LABEL The incoming label. The valid range is 16–1048575.
Options
– Displays entries for packets on any interface.
Examples
Displaying detailed information about all entries in the ILM table:
ML66#show mpls in-segment-table
99.166 show mpls interface
1038 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show mpls interface [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> ] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display all interfaces bound to an MPLS interface.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Options
Examples
Displaying all interfaces bound to an MPLS interface:
ML66#show mpls interface 1/9/4.500 detail
99.167 show mpls ldp
Synopsis
— show mpls ldp discovery [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo]
— show mpls ldp fec prefix [<IPADDR/PREFIX>]
— show mpls ldp igp sync [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> | lo | lo. <VRF>]
— show mpls ldp parameter
— show mpls ldp neighbor [detail]
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1039

CLI Descriptions
— show mpls ldp session [<IPADDR>]
Description
Use this command to display MPLS Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) data.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
lo.VRF The loopback interface of a Virtual Routing and

IPADDR The IPv4 address of the session peer, where the format is
<A.B.C.D>.
IPADDR/PREFIX The IPv4 address and prefix length of the session peer,
where the format is <A.B.C.D/P>.
Options
discovery Displays the sources of locally generated LDP discovery

hello PDUs.
lo Displays the router loopback interface.
fec prefix Displays the Forwarding Equivalence Class and the

Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) prefix.
igp sync Displays LDP IGP parameters and LDP IGP

synchronization parameters.
1040 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
parameter Displays LDP configuration parameters.
neighbor Displays LDP neighbor information.
detail Displays detailed neighbor information.
session Displays LDP session information.
Examples
Displaying MPLS LDP data:
ML66#show mpls ldp session 1.1.1.1
99.168 show mpls mapped-routes
Synopsis
show mpls mapped-routes
Description
Use this command to display MPLS mapped routes.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying MPLS mapped routes:
ML66#show mpls mapped-routes
Mapped-route IPv4 FEC MPLS-TP Tunnel
14.1.2.3/32 N/A NH4
99.169 show mpls out-segment-table
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1041

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
show mpls out-segment-table [<IPADDR> <IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> <LABEL> ]
Description
Use this command to display detailed information of out-segment entries table.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands

<A.B.C.D> .
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
The egress interface name, where the format is <Rack/
Slot/Port.VLAN> .
LABEL The egress label. The valid range is 0–1048575.
Examples
Displaying detailed information of out-segment entries table:
ML66#show mpls out-segment-table
99.170 show mpls vc-table
Synopsis
show mpls vc-table
Description
Use this command to display configured virtual circuit components.
1042 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying configured virtual circuit components:
ML66#show mpls vc-table
VC-ID Vlan-ID Access-Intf Network-Intf Out Label Tunnel-Label Nexthop
Status
500 N/A 1/9/4.500 1/9/4.501 544 57 N/A
Active
99.171 show mpls vrf-table
Synopsis
— show mpls vrf-table <VRFNAME> [<IPADDR/PREFIX> ] [detail]
— show mpls vrf-table [detail]
Description
Use this command to display detailed information for all the installed FTN entries
for a Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) instance.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
VRFNAME Displays the MPLS VRF table by its configured name.
IPADDR/PREFIX The Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) for which the

VRF entry is displayed, where the format is <A.B.C.D/P> .
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1043

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying detailed information for all the installed FTN entries for a VRF
instance:
ML66#show mpls vrf new_vrf
99.172 show mst
Synopsis
show mst
Description
Use this command to display Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying spanning tree MST configuration:
ML66>show mst
99.173 show neighbors
Synopsis
show neighbors
Description
Use this command to display the LLDP information received from LLDP
neighbors.
Command Mode
1044 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Examples
Displaying information received from the LLDP neighbors of the current interface:
ML66(config-lldp)#show neighbors
Local Interface : 1/6/4
Dest. Mac Address : 01:80:C2:00:00:0E
Chassis ID Type : locally assigned(7)
Chassis ID : X912466689
Port ID Type : interface name(5)
Port ID : 1/6/4
Port Description : LAN
Time to Live : 121
System Name : ML66-10-41-105-132
99.174 show netstat
Synopsis
show netstat [ udp | tcp | stats | routes | ip | interfaces | icmp ]
Description
Use this command to display netstatistics.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
udp Displays UDP statistics.
tcp Displays TCP statistics.
stats Displays statistics.
routes Displays route statistics.
ip Displays IP statistics.
interfaces Displays interface statistics.
icmp Displays Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)

statistics.
Examples
Displaying UDP statistics:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1045

CLI Descriptions
ML66>show netstat udp
99.175 show network-synch status
Synopsis
show network-synch status
Description
Use this command to display status information about the Netsync and
configured Netsync Nominees.
— Synchronization Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
For ETSI, displaying Network-Synch status:
ML66>show network-synch status
Selection mode: QL-enabled
Active NomId: 2
Forced switch: 0 (disabled)
Status: LOCKED
Availability: AVAILABLE
Netref redundancy: Yes
Holdover slot: 4
Holdover count: 1
Holdover source: NETREF2
Squelch config: Disabled
Squelch status: OFF
Egress SSM: PRC
NomId R/S/P Priority Assigned Quality Quality Level Locked Out →
Elapsed SSM
1 1/4/3 4 SSU-B SSU-B No →
99.999s NSUPP
2 1/4/8 NS 4 Not assigned PRC No →
99.999s PRC
3 - - - - - →
-.- -
4 - - - - - →
-.- -
For ANSI, displaying Network-Synch status:

ML66>show network-synch status
Selection mode: QL-enabled
Active NomId: 1
Forced switch: 0 (disabled)
Status: LOCKED
Availability: AVAILABLE
Netref redundancy: Yes
1046 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Holdover slot: 9
Holdover count: 1
Holdover source: NETREF2
Squelch config: Disabled
Squelch status: OFF
Egress SSM: ST3
NomId R/S/P Priority Assigned Quality Quality Level Locked Out →
Elapsed SSM
1 1/9/3 4 ST3 ST3 No →
99.999s NSUPP
2 1/9/4 NS 2 SMC SMC No →
99.999s INV
3 - - - - - →
-.- -
4 - - - - - →
-.- -
99.176 show notification-log
Synopsis
show notification-log { alarms | events }
Description
Use this command to display the history of notifications generated by the node.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
alarms Displays the generated alarm notifications.
events Displays the generated event notifications.
Examples
Displaying alarm notifications:
ML66>show notification-log alarms
99.177 show ntp-status
Synopsis
show ntp-status
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1047

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display NTP configuration and status.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying NTP configuration and status:
ML66>show ntp-status
NTP server Address: 10.44.66.18
NTP protocol type/version: v4Auth
FTP key file server Address: FTPWrongKey
NTP status: Service Down
99.178 show pingtargethost
Synopsis
show pingtargethost
Description
Use this command to display the Ping Target Host address.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Local Access configuration submode — (interface-local-access)
Examples
Displaying the Ping Target Host address:
ML66(interface-local-access)#show pingtargethost
1048 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.179 show policing
Synopsis
show policing [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display policing configuration.
Executing the command without <RSP> operand, all policing configuration is

displayed. Executing the command with <RSP> operand, only the specified
interface is displayed.
— Ethernet Commands: QoS - Policing and Color Marking
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the interface where the
Examples
Displaying policing configuration:
ML66>show policing 1/6/5
99.180 show policing-bandwidth-profile
Synopsis
show policing-bandwidth-profile [<PROFILENUMBER> ]
Description
Use this command to display policing bandwidth profiles.
Executing the command without <PROFILENUMBER> operand, all policing

bandwidth configuration is displayed. Executing the command with
<PROFILENUMBER> operand, only the specified profile number is displayed.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1049

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Displaying policing bandwidth profiles:
ML66>show policing-bandwidth-profile 2
99.181 show policing-cos-groups
Synopsis
show policing-cos-groups [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display policing Class of Service (CoS) groups configuration.
Executing the command without <RSP> operand, all policing CoS groups
configuration is displayed. Executing the command with <RSP> operand, only
the specified interface is displayed.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the interface, where
Examples
Displaying policing CoS groups configuration:
1050 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
ML66>show policing-cos-groups 1/6/5
99.182 show policing-cos-group-mapping
Synopsis
show policing-cos-group-mapping [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display policing CoS group mapping configuration.
Executing the command without <RSP> operand, all policing CoS group mapping
configuration is displayed. Executing the command with <RSP> operand, only
the specified interface is displayed.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the interface, where
Examples
Displaying policing CoS group mapping configuration:
ML66>show policing-cos-group-mapping 1/6/5
99.183 show policing-vlan-groups
Synopsis
show policing-vlan-groups [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display policing VLAN groups configuration.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1051

CLI Descriptions
Use the command without the <RSP> operand to display all policing VLAN
groups configuration. Execute the command with the <RSP> operand to display
only the specified interface.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the interface in the
Examples
Displaying policing VLAN groups configuration:
ML66>show policing-vlan-groups 1/6/5
99.184 show policing-vlan-group-mapping
Synopsis
show policing-vlan-group-mapping [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display policing VLAN group mapping configuration.
Use the command without the <RSP> operand to display all policing VLAN group
mapping configuration. Execute the command with the <RSP> operand to
display only the specified interface.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the interface in the
1052 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Examples
Displaying policing VLAN group mapping configuration:
ML66>show policing-vlan-group-mapping 1/6/5
99.185 show processes
Synopsis
show processes
Description
Use this command to list the running Operating System (OS) processes in the
node, such as CPU and memory use.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying OS processes:
ML66>show processes
99.186 show ptp alarms-and-events
Synopsis
show ptp alarms-and-events
Description
Use this command to display alarm and event status of the Precision Time
Protocol (PTP) function.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1053

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying alarm and event status:
ML66(config)#show ptp alarms-and-events
Alarms
============================================
freeRunningMode enabled
traceabilityLost enabled
holdoverEntered enabled
clockProtectionLost enabled
incompatibleHardware enabled
Events
============================================
clockSwitch disabled
99.187 show ptp clock
Synopsis
show ptp clock
Description
Use this command to display clock status information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying clock status information:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock
Ptp Clock:
------------
Clock-identity: AA:CC:99:FF:EE:99:CC:22
Clock state: LOCKED
RTC Time: 1418474783 sec, 2014-12-13T12:45:48Z
Locked state counter: 1
All time spent in locked state: 87130 sec, 1 days 0 hours 12 min 10 sec
Last time spent in locked state: 87130sec, 1 days 0 hours 12 min 10 sec
Master changed counter: 1
Clock-servo state: locked (5)
Clock-servo pdv: forward 124ns, backward 127ns
Clock-servo flags: 0x00000000
1054 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.188 show ptp clock current-ds
Synopsis
show ptp clock current-ds
Description
Use this command to display the current values in the current Dataset (DS). For
more information, see Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked
Measurement and Control Systems.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the current values in the current DS:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock current-ds
current-ds:n
-------------------------
steps-removed: 5
offset-from-master: -6
mean-path-delay: 1000 ns
99.189 show ptp clock default-ds
Synopsis
show ptp clock default-ds
Description
Use this command to display the current values in the default Dataset (DS). For
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1055

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the current values in default DS:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock default-ds
default-ds:
-------------------------
two-step-flag: false
clock-identity: AA:CC:99:FF:EE:99:CC:22
priority1: 128
priority2: 128
slave-only: false
quality-class: 187
quality-accuracy: unknown
quality-offset: 18944
99.190 show ptp clock parent-ds
Synopsis
show ptp clock parent-ds
Description
Use this command to display the current values in the parent Dataset (DS). For
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the current values in parent DS:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock parent-ds
parent-ds:
-------------------------
parent-port-identity: 3C:19:7D:FF:FE:48:EB:F6
parent-stats: 1
offset-scaled-logvar: 17408
phase-change-rate: 0
gm-identity: 00:B0:AE:FF:FE:00:00:30
gm-priority1: 50
gm-priority2: 50
gm-quality-class: 187
1056 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
gm-quality-accuracy: unknown
gm-quality-offset: 25600
99.191 show ptp clock settings
Synopsis
show ptp clock settings
Description
Use this command to display the general settings of the clock.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the general setting of the clock:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock settings
Domain number : 0
Device type : boundary clock
Transport mode : multicast
Profile : ieee1588v2
Role : Best Master Algorithm
User description:
99.192 show ptp clock time-properties-ds
Synopsis
show ptp clock time-properties-ds
Description
Use this command to display the current values in time properties Dataset (DS).
For more information, see Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for
Networked Measurement and Control Systems.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1057

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the current values in time properties DS:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock time-properties-ds
time-properties-ds:
-------------------------
current-utc-offset-valid: 1
current-utc-offset: 35
leap59: false
leap61: false
time-traceable: true
freq-traceable: true
ptp-timescale: true
source: gps
99.193 show ptp clock-port
Synopsis
show ptp clock-port [<NAME>] [statistics]
Description
Use this command to display the clock port related objects.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NAME The name of the clock port.
Options
statistics Displays the related statistic information for the specified

clock port.
Examples
Displaying clock port related objects:
ML66(config)#show ptp clock-port
configured L2 ports:
---------------------+------------+-----------+----------+-------------+-----+---- →
1058 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
-+-----------------+
Name |Admin State |Oper State |Port Role |Interface |Vlan |Prio →
|Local Address |
---------------------+------------+-----------+----------+-------------+-----+---- →
-+-----------------+
test |DOWN |DOWN |disabled |WAN 1/1/1 |no |7 →
|34:6E:9D:43:8B:A9|
configured L3 ports:
---------------------+------------+-----------+----------+-------------+---------- →
--------+-----+
Name |Admin State |Oper State |Port Role |Interface |IP Address →
|DSCP |
---------------------+------------+-----------+----------+-------------+---------- →
--------+-----+
1/6/5 |UP |UP |master |1/6/5.1588 |172.16.254. →
2 |46 |
Displaying 1/6/5 IP clock port related objects:

ML66(config)#show ptp clock-port 1/6/5
1/6/5
--------------------------------------------------------------
Admin state: UP
Operational state: UP
Port role: master
Transport mode: unicast
EncapsulationType: udpipv4
Interface: 1/6/5.1588
IpAddress: 172.16.254.2
Dscp: 46
Name: 1/6/5
PortIdentity: 34:6E:9D:FF:FE:43:8B:A9::00:00
DelayMech: End to end
PTPVersion: 2
Unicast Configuration:
--------------------------------------------------------------
AnnounceInterval: 1 (2.000000 sec)
AnnounceRctTimeout: 3
DelayRespInterval: -4 (0.062500 sec)
DelayRespTimeout: 3
Duration: 300 sec
QueryInterval: 0 (1.000000 sec)
SyncInterval: -4 (0.062500 sec)
SyncTimeout: 3
WaitToRestoreTime: 5 min
UnicastMaster: Calnex-1
--------------------------------------------------------------
PortId: 00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00
NetworkProtocol: udpipv4
IpAddress: 192.168.0.2
LocalPriority: 8
Enabled: true
Accessible: No
Displaying L2 clock port named test:

ML66(config)#show ptp clock-port test
test
--------------------------------------------------------------
Admin state: DOWN
Operational state: DOWN
Port role: disabled
Transport mode: unicast
EncapsulationType: ieee8023
Interface: WAN 1/1/1
Local MAC address 34:6E:9D:43:8B:A9
VlanId: 0
VlanPriority: 7
Name: test
PortIdentity: 34:6E:9D:FF:FE:43:8B:A9::00:02
DelayMech: End to end
PTPVersion: 2
Unicast Configuration:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1059

CLI Descriptions
--------------------------------------------------------------
AnnounceInterval: 1 (2.000000 sec)
AnnounceRctTimeout: 3
DelayRespInterval: -4 (0.062500 sec)
DelayRespTimeout: 3
Duration: 300 sec
QueryInterval: 0 (1.000000 sec)
SyncInterval: -4 (0.062500 sec)
SyncTimeout: 3
WaitToRestoreTime: 5 min
Displaying cp1 clock port related packet counters. Delta counters show the
transmitted and received packets of each type since the last query of the
statistics.
ML66(config)#show ptp clock-port cp1 statistics
RX TX delta_RX delta_TX
Announce : 80446 0 2 0
Synch : 1287136 0 40 0
Follow up : 0 0 0 0
Delay req : 0 1420264 0 42
Delay resp : 1420264 0 42 0
Pdelay req : 0 0 0 0
Pdelay resp: 0 0 0 0
Signaling : 0 0 0 0
99.194 show ptp config
Synopsis
show ptp config
Description
Use this command to display Precision Time Protocol (PTP) configuration. For
more information, see Configuring Network Time Synchronization.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying PTP configuration:
ML66(config)#show ptp config
priority1 128
priority2 128
clock ieee1588v2 boundary unicast bmc
holdover-timeout 3000
domain 0
sync-port disabled
network-synch-assistance enabled
interface 1/6/4 0
interface 1/6/5 0
interface 1/6/6 0
interface 1/1/1 0
1060 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
interface 1/1/2 0
link-delay-compensation 1/6/4 0
clock-port 1/6/7
!ipaddress 172.16.254.2 vrf 1
ip-interface 1/6/7.1588
dscp 46
delay-mechanism e2e
enabled
announce-interval 1
announce-timeout 3
delay-resp-interval -4
delay-resp-timeout 3
duration 300
query-interval 0
sync-interval -4
sync-timeout 3
wait-to-restore-time 5
unicast-master Calnex-1
address udpipv4 192.168.0.2
enabled
exit
exit
exit
clock-port test
port 1/1/1
delay-mechanism e2e
no enabled
announce-interval 1
announce-timeout 3
delay-resp-interval -4
delay-resp-timeout 3
duration 300
query-interval 0
sync-interval -4
sync-timeout 3
wait-to-restore-time 5
exit
exit
exit
99.195 show ptp interface
Synopsis
show ptp interface
Description
Use this command to display the available interfaces capable of time-stamping
and their statuses.
The displayed attributes are described in Table 111.
Table 111 The Attributes of the Show PTP Interface Command

L2 Interface The name of the L2 interface (<Rack/Slot/Port>).
Clockport The name of the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Clock Port
created on the interface.
Admin state The administrative status of the PTP time-stamping unit of
the interface.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1061

CLI Descriptions
Operational The operational status of the PTP time-stamping unit of the

state interface.
L3 Interface The name of the IP interface (<Rack/Slot/Port.VlanId>).
IP address The IP address of the IP interface. This attribute is displayed
only for IP interfaces.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the status of the interfaces capable of time-stamping:
ML66#show ptp interface
Timestamping capable interfaces:
L2 Interface Clockport Admin state Operational state
LAN 1/6/4 cp1 UP UP
LAN 1/6/5 cp2 UP UP
WAN 1/1/1 UP UP
L3 Interface IP address Clockport Admin state Operational state
1/6/5.1588 192.168.1.1 1/6/5 UP UP
1/6/6.555 10.1.1.1 UP UP
1/6/6.1588 172.16.254.1 1/6/6 UP UP
99.196 show ptp peers
Synopsis
show ptp peers
Description
Use this command to display the connected peers. Depending on the selected
profile, the Master peer (for example in multicast mode for boundary clocks and
ordinary clock slaves) and/or the slave peers (for example in unicast mode for
boundary clocks and ordinary clock grandmasters) are displayed.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
1062 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Examples
Displaying the connected peers:
ML66(config)#show ptp peers
Displaying the connected peers for a unicast master clock-port:

ML66#show ptp peers
SLAVES:
Local Port Name Peer Address Announce Interval Synch Interval
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
cp_master ac:60:b6:9f:a8:1b 1 -4
MASTERS:
Local Port Name Peer Address Grandmaster ClockID Accessible Ti →
mestamping Interface
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- →
------------------------
Displaying the connected peers for a unicast slave clock-port:

ML66#show ptp peers
SLAVES:
Local Port Name Peer Address Announce Interval Synch Interval
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
MASTERS:
Local Port Name Peer Address Grandmaster ClockID Accessible Ti →
mestamping Interface
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- →
------------------------
cp_slave ac:60:b6:99:a5:8d AC:60:B6:FF:FE:99:A5:8D Yes Su →
pported LAN 1/9/4
99.197 show ptp sync
Synopsis
show ptp sync
Description
Use this command to display the status of the frequency synchronization signal
that is recovered from the IEEE1588 session and can be used as nominee for the
Network Synchronization function. This is relevant in G.8265.1 profile, where the
admin status is always enabled. In IEEE1588 and G.8275.1 profiles the admin
status is disabled.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1063

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying the current values and settings of PTP synchronization:
ML66(config)#show ptp sync
PTP sync port:
--------------
Interface name: 1/6/20
Administrative status: enabled
Operational status: healty
Frequency quality: PRC
Network sync assistance: disabled
99.198 show qos
Synopsis
show qos
Description
Use this command to display QoS settings of the interface.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying QoS settings of the interface:
ML66(config-eth)#shoq qos
99.199 show queue-set-profile
Synopsis
show queue-set-profile [<PROFILENUMBER> ]
Description
Use this command to display the queue-set profile settings.
1064 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
— Ethernet Commands: QoS - Queue-Set
Command Mode
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Displaying all queue-set profile settings:
ML66#show queue-set-profile
99.200 show radius_address_Type
Synopsis
show radius_address_Type
Description
Use this command to display the IP protocol type of the Remote Authentication
Dial In User Service (RADIUS) address.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the IP protocol type of the RADIUS address:
ML66>show radius_address_Type
99.201 show radius-server config
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1065

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
show radius-server config ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to display Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
(RADIUS) server configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
Displaying RADIUS server configuration:
ML66>show radius-server config ipaddress 192.168.0.1
99.202 show radius-server statistics
Synopsis
show radius-server statistics ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
(RADIUS) server statistics.
1066 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
Displaying RADIUS server statistics for RADIUS server IP address 10.58.28.225 :
ML66>show radius-server statistics ipaddress 10.58.28.225
index: 1
ipaddress: 10.58.28.225
AccessRequestSend: 1
AccessRequestResend: 0
AccessRequestAccept: 0
AccessRequestReject: 1
AccessRequestTimeout: 0
AcctRequestSend: 0
AcctRequestResend: 0
AcctRequestAccept: 0
AcctRequestReject: 0
AcctRequestTimeout: 0
99.203 show radius-server status
Synopsis
show radius-server status ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
(RADIUS) server status.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1067

CLI Descriptions
Options
Examples
Displaying RADIUS server status:
ML66>show radius-server status
99.204 show rf-frequency
Synopsis
show rf-frequency
Description
Use this command to display the RF parameters for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002.
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Frequency
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the RF parameters for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002:
ML66(config-ct)#show rf-frequency
RF Frequency Parameters
-----------------------------------------------
min-tx-frequency[kHz]: 7582000
max-tx-frequency[kHz]: 7638000
min-rx-frequency[kHz]: 7428000
max-rx-frequency[kHz]: 7484000
base-tx-frequency[kHz]: 7581750
base-rx-frequency[kHz]: 7427750
tx-frequency[kHz]: 23303000
rx-frequency[kHz]: 22295000
tx-frequency-step-size[kHz]: 250
tx-step-limit-low: 1
tx-step-limit-high: 225
actual-tx-step-number: 177
tx-oper-status: TxOn(3)
tx-admin-status: On(3)
rx-frequency-step-size[kHz]: 250
rx-step-limit-low: 0
rx-step-limit-high: 0
1068 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
actual-rx-step-number: 0
duplex-distance[kHz]: 1008000
99.205 show rf-power
Synopsis
show rf-power
Description
Use this command to display the RF Power data for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002.
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Power
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the RF Power data for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002:
ML66(config-ct)#pe9
RF Power parameters
--------------------------------------------
selected-min-output-power[dBm]: -10
selected-max-output-power[dBm]: 10
actual-output-power[dBm]: 4
available-min-output-power[dBm]: -10
available-max-output-power[dBm]: 18
target-input-power-far-end[dBm]: -45
actual-input-power[dBm]: -44
max-input-power-last-7Days[dBm]: 0
min-input-power-last-7Days[dBm]: 0
max-input-power-since-reset[dBm]: -445
min-input-power-since-reset[dBm]: -504
input-power-alarm-threshold[dBm]: -93
output-power-4QAM[dBm]: 18
output-power-512QAM[dBm]: NotValid
max-output-power-not-limited[dBm]: NotValid
max-output-power-possible[dBm]: 2
mean-input-power-1m[dBm]: -448
max-output-power-last-7Days[dBm]: 0
min-output-power-last-7Days[dBm]: 0
max-output-power-since-reset[dBm]: 3
min-output-power-since-reset[dBm]: 3
available-output-power-type: Standard
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1069

CLI Descriptions
selected-output-power-type: Standard
taps: disabled
99.206 show rlt
Synopsis
show rlt
Description
Use this command to display the Radio Link Terminal (RLT) configuration at near
end.
— Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - RLT
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the RLT configuration at near end:
ML66(config-rlt)#show rlt
R/S/P: 1/1/1
distinguished-name: RLT 1/1/1
ne-ip-address: 10.120.54.112
ne-ipv6-address:
ne-name: TN-10-120-54-112
id: RLT 1/1/1
status: down
mode: 2+0RLB
protection-status: unprotected
aes-encryption-oth-mk:
aes-encryption-oth: other
aes-encryption-oth-status: other
Displaying the RLT configuration at the near end in case of EQP configuration:
ML66(config-rlt)#show rlt
R/S/P: 1/3/1
distinguished-name: RLT 1/1+3/1
ne-ip-address: 10.120.54.112
ne-ipv6-address:
ne-name: ML66-10-120-54-112
1070 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands

id: RLT 1/1+3/1
status: down
mode: 1+1RLP
protection-status: protected
eqp-protection-switch-mode: manual
eqp-active-unit: low-unit
eqp-distinguished-name: 1/1+3/1
aes-encryption-oth-mk:
aes-encryption-oth: other
aes-encryption-oth-status: other
99.207 show route-map
Synopsis
show route-map [<MAPNAME>]
Description
Use this command to display route-map information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
MAPNAME The route-map name.
Examples
Displaying route-map information using REGEXP:
ML66>show route-map bgp2
route-map bgp2, permit, sequence 5
Match clauses:
metric 200
Set clauses:
metric 60
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1071

CLI Descriptions
99.208 show router-id
Synopsis
show router-id
Description
Use this command to display the router ID common for OSPF, BGP, LDP, and so
on processes.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the common router ID:
ML66>show router-id
Router ID: 10.10.10.60 (config)
99.209 show rsvp
Synopsis
show rsvp
Description
Use this command to display RSVP information.
— RSVP-TE Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp
RSVP Version : 1
1072 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Process uptime : 3 hours 54 minutes

Bundle Send : Disabled
NSM Connection : Up
CSPF Connection IPv4 : Up
CSPF Connection IPv6 : Down
CSPF usage : Enabled
RSVP Refresh Timer : 30
Keep Multiplier : 3
Acknowledgement Await Timeout : 10
Explicit-Null For Direct Conn : Disabled
Local Protection : Disabled
Hello Interval : 1
Hello Timeout : 3
Loop detection : Enabled (all interface)
Ingress for IPv4 : 192.168.0.2
Ingress for IPv6 : N/A (not in use)
Penultimate Hop Popping : Enabled
Refresh PATH msg parsing : Enabled
Refresh RESV msg parsing : Enabled
99.210 show rsvp admin-groups
Synopsis
show rsvp admin-groups
Description
Use this command to display RSVP Administrative Group information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp admin-groups
Admin group summary:
Value of 1 associated with admin group 'sample'
99.211 show rsvp interface
Synopsis
show rsvp interface [<IFNAME_RSP_VLAN> ]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP interface information. If an interface is
specified by its name, this command displays information about that interface. If
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1073

CLI Descriptions
no interface is specified, this command displays information about all RSVP

interfaces on the router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IFNAME_RSP_VLAN
Examples
ML66>show rsvp interface
Interface RSVP status Interface Type
1/6/4.1500 Enabled Ethernet
99.212 show rsvp neighbor
Synopsis
show rsvp neighbor [<IPADDR> ]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP neighbor information. If a neighbor is
specified by its IPv4 address, this command displays information about that
neighbor. If no neighbor is specified, this command displays information about all
RSVP neighbors on the router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of a neighbor.
1074 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Examples
ML66>show rsvp neighbor
99.213 show rsvp nexthop-cache
Synopsis
show rsvp nexthop-cache
Description
Use this command to display nexthop information cached in RSVP.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp nexthop-cache
99.214 show rsvp path
Synopsis
show rsvp path [<PATHNAME> ]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP path information. If a path is specified by its
name, this command displays information about that path. If no path is specified,
this command displays information about all RSVP paths on the router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1075

CLI Descriptions
Operands
Examples
ML66>show rsvp path
99.215 show rsvp session
Synopsis
show rsvp session [up | down] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP session information. If no parameter is
specified, this command displays information about all RSVP sessions.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
up Specifies to display sessions that are currently

operational.
down Specifies to display sessions that are currently non-

operational.
detail Specifies to display detailed information.
Examples
ML66>show rsvp session up detail
99.216 show rsvp session count
1076 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Synopsis
show rsvp session count
Description
Use this command to display the count of existing RSVP sessions on a router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp session count
99.217 show rsvp session egress
Synopsis
— show rsvp session egress {up | down} [detail]
— show rsvp session egress <IPADDR>
— show rsvp session egress detail
Description
Use this command to display RSVP sessions that end at the router. If no
parameter is specified, this command displays information about all RSVP
sessions ending at the router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of an egress router.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1077

CLI Descriptions
Options

operational.

operational.
Examples
ML66>show rsvp session egress detail
99.218 show rsvp session ingress
Synopsis
— show rsvp session ingress {up | down} [detail]
— show rsvp session ingress <IPADDR>
— show rsvp session ingress detail
— show rsvp session ingress <LSP-NAME> primary
Description
Use this command to display RSVP sessions that originate from the router. If no
sessions originating from the router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
IPADDR The IPv4 address of an ingress router.
LSP-NAME The name of the LSP.
1078 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Options

operational.

operational.
primary Specifies to display primary sessions.
Examples
ML66>show rsvp session ingress detail
99.219 show rsvp session <LSP-NAME>
Synopsis
show rsvp session <LSP-NAME> [primary]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP sessions for an LSP specified by the LSP
name.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
LSP-NAME The name of the LSP.
Options
primary Specifies to display primary sessions.
Examples
ML66>show rsvp session sample primary
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1079

CLI Descriptions
99.220 show rsvp session transit
Synopsis
show rsvp session transit [up | down] [detail]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP sessions that pass through the router. If no
sessions passing through the router.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options

operational.

operational.
Examples
ML66>show rsvp session transit detail
99.221 show rsvp statistics
Synopsis
show rsvp statistics
Description
Use this command to display RSVP statistics.
1080 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp statistics
99.222 show rsvp summary-refresh
Synopsis
show rsvp summary-refresh
Description
Use this command to display RSVP Summary Refresh information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp summary-refresh
99.223 show rsvp trunk
Synopsis
show rsvp trunk [<NAME> | detail]
Description
Use this command to display RSVP trunk information. If no parameter is
specified, this command displays information about all trunks.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1081

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
NAME The name of the trunk to be displayed.
Options
Examples
ML66>show rsvp trunk detail
99.224 show rsvp version
Synopsis
show rsvp version
Description
Use this command to display RSVP version.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
ML66>show rsvp version
99.225 show rsyslog
Synopsis
show rsyslog
1082 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display the remote syslog configuration for alarms and
events.
— DCN Remote Syslog Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the remote syslog configuration:
ML66>show rsyslog
Remote syslog:Enabled
Trap severities=0x60
(0x80=indeterminate,0x40=critical,0x20=major,0x10=minor,0x08=warning,0x04=cleared)
Remote servers:
1: 192.168.0.1 514
2: 0
3: 0
See Also
rsyslog
99.226 show rsyslog6
Synopsis
show rsyslog6
Description
Use this command to display the remote syslog configuration for alarms and
events for IPv6.
— DCN Remote Syslog Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1083

CLI Descriptions
Examples
Displaying remote syslog configuration for IPv6:
ML66>show rsyslog6
99.227 show rsyslogsec
Synopsis
show rsyslogsec
Description
Use this command to display the remote syslog configuration for security events.
— Security Remote Syslog Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Table 112 Displayed Information of the Security Events

Any Events Mask 0x0 No event is selected in
the specific group.
Events Mask Localauth 0xfc All local authentication
events are selected.
Events Mask Login 0xf0 All login events are
selected.
Events Mask Protocols 0xff All secure protocol
Events Mask Tacacs+ 0xf0 All TACACS+ events are
selected.
Events Mask Radius 0xf0 All RADIUS events are
selected.
Displaying remote syslog configuration for security events:

ML66#show rsyslogsec
Remote security syslog:Disabled
Remote IPv4 servers:
1: 0
2: 0
3: 0
1084 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Events Mask Localauth 0x0

Events Mask Login 0x0
Events Mask Protocols 0x0
Events Mask Tacacs+ 0x0
Events Mask Radius 0x0
ML66#show rsyslogsec
Remote security syslog:Enabled
1: 10.120.58.18 514
2: 0
3: 0
Events Mask Localauth 0xfc
Events Mask Login 0xf0
Events Mask Protocols 0xff
Events Mask Tacacs+ 0xf0
Events Mask Radius 0xf0
99.228 show rsyslogsec6
Synopsis
show rsyslogsec6
Description
Use this command to display the remote syslog configuration for security events
for IPv6.
— Security Remote Syslog Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Table 113 Displayed Information of the Security Events

Any Events Mask 0x0 No event is selected in
the specific group.
Events Mask Localauth 0xfc All local authentication
Events Mask Login 0xf0 All login events are
selected.
Events Mask Protocols 0xff All secure protocol
Events Mask Tacacs+ 0xf0 All TACACS+ events are
selected.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1085

CLI Descriptions
Events Mask Radius 0xf0 All RADIUS events are

selected.
Displaying remote syslog configuration for security events:

ML66#show rsyslogsec6
Remote security syslog:Disabled
1: 0
2: 0
3: 0
Events Mask Localauth 0x0
Events Mask Login 0x0
Events Mask Protocols 0x0
Events Mask Tacacs+ 0x0
Events Mask Radius 0x0
ML66#show rsyslogsec6
Remote security syslog:Enabled
1: 2001:1:1::18 514
2: 0
3: 0
Events Mask Localauth 0xfc
Events Mask Login 0xf0
Events Mask Protocols 0xff
Events Mask Tacacs+ 0xf0
Events Mask Radius 0xf0
99.229 show running-config
Synopsis
show running-config [MAP_ENTRY | <CONFIG_ORDER>]
Description
Use this command to display the currently running configuration file.
Running the command without any parameters, the whole running configuration
is displayed, including the configuration of the router.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec mode — #<
Operands
MAP_ENTRY Sequence number of the saved configuration parameter

map. The valid range is 0–45.
CONFIG_ORDER Global order number of the configuration. The length is 4

digits, for example, 0003.
Examples
Displaying the currently running configuration file:
1086 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
ML66#show running-config
! EH (global order: 0001; local order: 0) :------
! EH configuration
telecom_standard etsi
! command group end
! LH (global order: 0003; local order: 0) :------
! LH Configuration
ftp svrs name "remotehost" …?
Note: The output from this command can be very long. The example above
includes just a small part of the actual output.
99.230 show running-config router
Synopsis
show running-config router [access-list | as-path access-list | bgp |
isis | key chain | ldp | mpls | ospf | rsvp | rsvp-path | rsvp-trunk
[<TRUNKNAME>]]
Description
Use this command to display the currently running configuration of the router.
If no parameter is specified, the whole router configuration is displayed.
Command Mode
Operands
TRUNKNAME The name of the RSVP trunk. If no trunk is specified, the

configurations for all the trunks are displayed.
Options
access-list Displays the current configuration of access-list entries.
as-path access-list
Displays the current configuration of Border Gateway
Protocol Autonomous System (BGP AS) path access lists.
bgp Displays the current configuration of BGP.
isis Displays the current configuration of the IS-IS routing

protocol.
key chain Displays the current configuration of encryption key

chains.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1087

CLI Descriptions
ldp Displays the current configuration of Label Distribution

Protocol (LDP).
mpls Displays the current configuration of Multiprotocol Label

Switching (MPLS).
ospf Displays the current configuration of Open Shortest Path

First (OSPF).
rsvp Displays the current configuration of Resource

Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
rsvp-path Displays the current configuration of RSVP paths.
rsvp-trunk Displays the current configuration of RSVP trunks.
Examples
ML66(config-router)>show running-config router isis
router isis
is-type level-1
metric-style wide
net 49.0001.0400.4004.0040.00
99.231 show rx-frequency
Synopsis
show rx-frequency
Description
Use this command to display the Rx frequency for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the Rx frequency for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002:
ML66(config-ct)#show rx-frequency
rx-frequency[kHz]: 22295000
1088 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.232 show scheduler-profile
Synopsis
show scheduler-profile [<PROFILENUMBER> ]
Description
Use this command to display scheduler profiles.
Executing the command without <PROFILENUMBER> operand lists all scheduler

profiles. Executing the command with <PROFILENUMBER> operand displays the
contents of the profile with that specified profile number.
— Ethernet Commands: QoS - Scheduling
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
Examples
Displaying scheduler profiles:
ML66>show scheduler-profile 2
99.233 show secure-ssh
Synopsis
show secure-ssh
Description
Use this command to display the status of the file ssh-server security function.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1089

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the status of the file ssh-server security function:
ML66#show secure-ssh
secure SSH configuration enabled
99.234 show sfph
Synopsis
show sfph {sfpinfo {current <SLOT/SUBSLOT> | minmax <SLOT/SUBSLOT> |
minmax15mhistory <SLOT/SUBSLOT> {all | interval <INTERVALNUMBER>}
| minmax24hhistory <SLOT/SUBSLOT> {all | current | previous} | reset
<SLOT/SUBSLOT> {all | minmax}} | alarms | boards | subslots | subslot
<SLOT/SUBSLOT> | config}
Description
Use this command to display Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) information.
— SFP Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
INTERVALNUMBER
The number of the selected interval.
SLOT/SUBSLOT The Slot and Subslot values of the SFP where the format
is <Slot/Subslot>.
Options
sfpinfo Displays SFP subslot information.
current Displays the currently measured data.
minmax Displays the absolute minimum and maximum

measurements of the SFP since the last power-on or SFP
plug-in.
1090 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
minmax15mhistory
Displays the minimum and maximum measurements of
the SFP for the last 24 hours, in 15-minute intervals.
all Displays information for all intervals.
interval Displays information for the selected interval.
minmax24hhistory
Displays the minimum and maximum measurements of
the SFP for both the current and previous 24-hour
intervals.
previous Displays the previous intervals.
reset Clears the minimum and maximum measurements

history.
alarms Displays the active alarms of the existing SFP subslots.
boards Displays the number of the available SFP slots and their
status in each slot.
subslots Displays information of all SFP subslots.
subslot Displays information of the selected SFP subslot.
config Displays the running SFP configuration.
Examples
Displaying the currently measured data of an SFP in subslot 6/6:
ML66#show sfph sfpinfo current 6/6
SFP 1/6.6:
Current data measured at: Sat Feb 25 07:47:37 2017
Vendor name: DELTA
Vendor OUI: 00-00-00
Vendor Part Number: LCP-1250B4QDRT-E
Vendor Revision: A
Saleable Entity Code: RDH90120/D0210
Vendor Serial Number: 113404100091
Identifier: 0x03
Extended identifier: 0x04
Tranceiver code: 0x0000000200000000
Manufacturing date: 11082301
Product number: RDH90120/D0210
Revision: R4A
Temperature: 33.15 C
Voltage: 3.344 V
Tx Bias: 0.000 mA
Tx Power: 0.000 mW
Rx Power: 0.000 mW
Displaying the absolute minimum and maximum measurements of the SFP in

subslot 6/6, measured since the last power-on or SFP plug-in:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1091

CLI Descriptions
ML66#show sfph sfpinfo minmax 6/6

SFP 1/6.6:
Collecting since: Thu Feb 23 12:07:30 2017
Minimum Temperature: 31.48 C
Maximum Temperature: 33.99 C
Minimum Voltage: 3.340 V
Maximum Voltage: 3.347 V
Minimum Tx Bias: 0.000 mA
Maximum Tx Bias: 0.000 mA
Minimum Tx Power: 0.000 mW
Maximum Tx Power: 0.000 mW
Minimum Rx Power: 0.000 mW
Maximum Rx Power: 0.000 mW
Displaying the minimum and maximum measurements of the SFP in subslot 6/6
for the last 24 hours in 15-minute intervals (excerpt):
ML66#show sfph sfpinfo minmax15mhistory 6/6 all
SFP 1/6.6:
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Mi →
n. Max. Min. Max.
Is Temp. Temp. Voltage Voltage TxBias TxBias Tx →
Power TxPower RxPower RxPower
No. Interval Time Valid [C] [C] [V] [V] [mA] [mA] [m →
W] [mW] [mW] [mW]
--- ------------- ----- ------- ------- ------ ------ ------- ------- -- →
----- ------- ------- -------
1 07:30-07:45 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 07:15-07:30 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
3 07:00-07:15 Yes 31.48 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
4 06:45-07:00 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
5 06:30-06:45 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
6 06:15-06:30 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
7 06:00-06:15 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
8 05:45-06:00 Yes 31.48 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
9 05:30-05:45 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
10 05:15-05:30 Yes 32.32 33.15 3.340 3.344 0.000 0.000 0. →
000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Displaying the status of all SFP subslots:

ML66#show sfph subslots
Slot 6: state
subslot 6: IDLE
subslot 7: IDLE
subslot 8: IDLE
99.235 show slot-capacity
Synopsis
show slot-capacity
Description
Use this command to display the maximum supported, respectively the allocated
backplane Ethernet capacity between the NPU and APU slots.
1092 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying slot capacity:
ML66#show slot-capacity
Slot Slot Ethernet Capacity (Gbps) APU Allocated Ethernet Capacit →
y (Gbps)
1 2.5 + 2.5 MMU 1002 2.5 + 2.5
2 10 | 2.5 + 2.5 + 2.5 + 2.5 MMU 1002 2.5 + 2.5
4 2.5 + 2.5
5 2.5 + 1
99.236 show snmpv3authprotocol
Synopsis
show snmpv3authprotocol
Description
Use this command to display the SNMPv3 authentication protocol.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the SNMPv3 authentication protocol:
ML66#show snmpv3authprotocol
xfSecuritySNMPv3AuthProtocol = md5
99.237 show snmpv3privprotocol
Synopsis
show snmpv3privprotocol
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1093

CLI Descriptions
Description
Use this command to display the SNMPv3 privacy protocol.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the SNMPv3 privacy protocol:
ML66#show snmpv3privprotocol
xfSecuritySNMPv3PrivProtocol = des
99.238 show snmpv3protocol
Synopsis
show snmpv3protocol
Description
Use this command to display the SNMPv3 data encryption type.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the SNMPv3 data encryption type:
ML66#show snmpv3protocol
xfSecuritySNMPv3Protocol = noPriv
1094 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.239 show spanning-tree
Synopsis
show spanning-tree [<RSP>]
Description
Use this command to display the spanning-tree configuration.
— Ethernet Commands: RSTP
— Ethernet Commands: MSTP
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RSP The Rack, Slot, and Port values of the port, where the
Examples
Displaying the spanning-tree configuration (excerpt):
ML66>show spanning-tree
spanning-tree : enabled
stp type : rstp
protocol spec : IEEE 802.1d
priority : 32768
designated root : 80:00 90:55:AE:75:F1:EF
root cost : 20000
root port : LAN 1/6/4
max age : 2000
hello time : 200
forward-delay : 1500
br max-age : 2000
br hello time : 200
br fwd-delay : 1500
version : rstp
tx holdcount : 6
topology change : 68500
top changes : 9
LAN 1/6/4 : enabled
port number : 2
priority : 128
state : forwarding
role : root
designated root : 80:00 90:55:AE:75:F1:EF
designated cost : 0
designated bridge : 80:00 90:55:AE:75:F1:EF
designated port : 80:02
path cost : 20000
autoedge : enabled
mac-enable : true
admin-edgeport : false
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1095

CLI Descriptions
oper-edgeport : false
admin ptp : auto
oper ptp : true
admin path cost : 0
fwd transitions : 1
99.240 show spectrum-diagnostics-result
Synopsis
show spectrum-diagnostics-result
Description
Use this command to display the measured values of the latest sub-band or
channel scan. The table displays the scanned Rx frequencies and the measured
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values.
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Spectrum

Diagnostics
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-ct)#show spectrum-diagnostics-result
Spectrum Diagnostics result
+--------------------------------------+
| Rx Frequency (MHz) Rx Power (dBm) |
+--------------------------------------+
15287.000 -95.9
15289.000 -95.9
15291.000 -95.9
15293.000 -95.6
15295.000 -95.6
15297.000 -95.6
15299.000 -95.6
15301.000 -95.6
15303.000 -95.6
15305.000 -95.6
15307.000 -95.6
15309.000 -95.6
15311.000 -95.6
15313.000 -95.6
99.241 show spectrum-diagnostics-status
Synopsis
show spectrum-diagnostics-status
1096 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display the status of sub-band and channel scans.
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Spectrum

Diagnostics
Command Mode
Examples
ML66(config-ct)#show spectrum-diagnostics-status
Spectrum Diagnostics status
-------------------------------------------------------------
Oper status: Channel scan finished
Channel scan estimated time (sec): 17
Sub-band scan estimated time (sec): 71
Last completed scan time: 2018-09-12T13:35:44
Channel spacing (kHz): 28000
Current Rx frequency (MHz): 15300.000
Minimum sub-band Rx frequency: (MHz) 15055.000
Maximum sub-band Rx frequency: (MHz) 15348.000
99.242 show startup-config
Synopsis
show startup-config [<MAP_ENTRY> | <CONFIG_ORDER> | router]
Description
Use this command to display the start-up configuration file in a readable format.
This file is stored in the permanent memory.
Running the command without any parameters, the whole start-up configuration
is displayed.
Command Mode
Operands
MAP_ENTRY The sequence number of the saved configuration

parameter map. The valid range is 0–45.
CONFIG_ORDER The global order number of the configuration. The length

is 4 digits, for example, 0003.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1097

CLI Descriptions
Options
router Displays the start-up configuration of the router.
Examples
Displaying the start-up configuration file:
ML66#show startup-config
! EH configuration
telecom_standard etsi
! command group end
! LH configuration
Note: The output from this command can be very long. The example above
includes just a small part of the actual output.
99.243 show status
Synopsis
show status
Description
Use this command to display status information.

— CES Commands
Command Mode
1098 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
CES TDM Profile configuration submode — (config-ces-tdm-profile).
Examples
Displaying status information:
ML66(cfm)#show status
Displaying information about the current Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) ring
status:
ML66(erp-group)#show status
Ring ID: 1 ENABLED
-----------------------------------------------------------
Description: erp-ring-1
Ring status: Signal failure present
Ports
-----------------------------------------------------------
Interface Role Local Remote
EAST: 1/6/4 normal Idle SF BLOCKED
WEST: 1/6/8 normal Idle SF
RAPS
-----------------------------------------------------------
VLAN Priority MDL Subring VRAPS
100 7 7 Yes
Traffic VLANS
-----------------------------------------------------------
none
Guard time: 2000 ms
Hold-off time: 0 ms
Performance data
-----------------------------------------------------------
Collected since: Fri Apr 28 08:21:34 2017
Link failure: 1
RPL failure: 0
Manual switch: 0
Forced switch: 0
Notifications
-----------------------------------------------------------
Link loss: enabled
Unable to protect: disabled
Protocol error: enabled
Displaying the status of the current CES TDM profile configuration:

ML66(config-ces-tdm-profile)#show status
CES TDM Config profile details
Index 1
Name IWF loop
Payload size 256 bytes
Jitter buffer size 7 pkt
1792 bytes
1792.000 ms
Jitter buffer playout level 3 pkt
768 bytes
3.000 ms
Payload-suppression disabled
LOPS clear threshold 10 pkt
LOPS set threshold 10 pkt
Packet reorder enabled
Packet replace policy Fill with 0xFF bytes
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1099

CLI Descriptions
Clock recovery mode Adaptive

Used by Pseudo Wire(s) 1/1/101 3, 1/1/101 4
99.244 show strongpasswd
Synopsis
show strongpasswd
Description
Use this command to display the status of the strong password enforcement.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying strong password enforcement:
ML66>show strongpasswd
99.245 show subrack
Synopsis
show subrack <RACK>
Description
Use this command to display the configuration information for a subrack.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
RACK The number of the rack.
1100 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Examples
Displaying subrack information for rack 1:
ML66#show subrack 1
MINI-LINK 6693 BFL
0
3 |---o|-#o#-PFU 1301-|---#o#-NPU 1002---| 6
2 |FAU |-###------------|-###------------| 5
1 |1301|-###------------|-#o#-LTU 1001---| 4
0 BFB 109 046/1
1
2
3 ROJ 119 2519/1 [ROJ 119 2519/1 P1A]
4 ROJ 119 2515/1 [ROJ 119 2515/1 P1A]
5
6 ROJ 208 1323/1 [ROJ 208 1323/1 P1E]
99.246 show system
Synopsis
show system { restart | mode | hw }
Description
Use this command to display the state information for the system.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
restart Displays restart state of the system.
mode Displays mode state of the system.
hw Displays hardware state of the system.
Examples
Displaying restart state of the system:
ML66>show system restart
99.247 show sys_notes
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1101

CLI Descriptions
Synopsis
show sys_notes
Description
Use this command to display the added information related to the site.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the added information related to the site:
ML66>show sys_notes
This is notes for the node
99.248 show tacacs_address_Type
Synopsis
show tacacs_address_Type
Description
Use this command to display the IP protocol type of the Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) address.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the IP protocol type of the TACACS+ address:
ML66>show tacacs_address_Type
1102 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
99.249 show tacacs-server config
Synopsis
show tacacs-server config ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to display Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System
Plus (TACACS+) server configuration.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
Displaying TACACS+ server configuration:
ML66>show tacacs-server config ipaddress 192.168.0.1
99.250 show tacacs-server statistics
Synopsis
show tacacs-server statistics ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to display Terminal Access Controller Access Control System
Plus (TACACS+) server statistics.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1103

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
Displaying TACACS+ server statistics for TACACS+ server IP address
10.58.25.225:
ML66>show tacacs-server statistics ipaddress 10.58.25.225
index: 1
ipaddress: 10.58.25.225
ActiveSession: 0
PacketTransmitted: 0
PacketReceived: 0
ConnectionError: 13
TransmitError: 0
ReceiveError: 0
AcctPacketTransmitted: 0
AcctPacketReceived: 0
AcctConnectionError: 0
AcctTransmitError: 0
AcctReceiveError: 0
AuthenTimeout: 0
AuthorTimeout: 0
AcctTimeout: 0
99.251 show tacacs-server status
Synopsis
show tacacs-server status ipaddress <IPADDRESS>
Description
Use this command to display Terminal Access Controller Access Control System
Plus (TACACS+) server status.
1104 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
Options
Examples
Displaying TACACS+ server status:
ML66>show tacacs-server status
99.252 show taps
Synopsis
show taps
Description
Use this command to display Traffic Aware Power Save (TAPS) configuration
status.
— Carrier Termination Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - Power
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying TAPS configuration status:
ML66(config)#show taps
Traffic Aware Power Save (TAPS) configuration
---------------------------------------------
slot 1:
CT 1: TAPS disabled
CT 2: TAPS disabled
slot 3:
CT 1: TAPS disabled
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1105

CLI Descriptions
99.253 show tdm
Synopsis
show tdm
Description
Use this command to display information regarding TDM at near end.
— Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - TDM
Command Mode
Near End Radio Link Terminal TDM submode — (config-rlt-tdm)
Examples
Displaying TDM information at near end:
ML66(config-rlt-tdm)#show tdm
R/S/P: 1/1/1
tdm-connect: enable
actual-tdm-tributaries: 0
wanted-tributaries-allocation: 1-10
actual-tributaries-allocation: 0
rx-loop: disable
distinguished-name: TDM 1/1/1
available-tdm-tributaries: 34
99.254 show tdm-interfaces
Synopsis
show tdm-interfaces <SLOT>
Description
Use this command to display all the available TDM interfaces that can be used in
cross-connection for a specific slot.
— TDM Cross-Connection Commands
— CES Commands
1106 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
SLOT The slot number.
Examples
Displaying the available TDM interfaces for slot 11:
ML66>show tdm-interfaces 11
TDM interfaces on slot 1/11 for board ROJ 119 2518/1
--- 1/11/101 1 ---
--- 1/11/4A ---
--- 1/11/4B ---
--- 1/11/4C ---
--- 1/11/4D ---
--- 1/11/3A ---
--- 1/11/3B ---
--- 1/11/3C ---
--- 1/11/3D ---
--- 1/11/2A ---
--- 1/11/2B ---
--- 1/11/2C ---
--- 1/11/2D ---
--- 1/11/1A ---
--- 1/11/1B ---
--- 1/11/1C ---
--- 1/11/1D ---
99.255 show temp
Synopsis
show temp
Description
Use this command to display the following information for each equipped board
slot in the NE:
— Temperature measured by the board temperature sensor.
— High temperature threshold, which is defined for each board type. When the
threshold is reached, High Temperature alarm is raised.
— Excessive temperature threshold, which is defined for each board type. When
the threshold is reached, the board is shut down as a hardware protection
action.
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1107

CLI Descriptions
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the temperature measured by the board temperature sensor:
ML66>show temp
99.256 show timezone
Synopsis
show timezone
Description
Use this command to display the time zone currently set.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying the time zone:
ML66>show timezone
Europe/Stockholm
See Also
timezone
99.257 show twamp sessions
Synopsis
show twamp sessions
1108 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display the configured TWAMP sessions.
Note: Disabled TWAMP sessions are also displayed when this command is
executed.
DSCP values are also displayed if DSCP is enabled.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the configured TWAMP sessions:
ML66#show twamp sessions
twamp timestamp-source ieee1588
twamp-reflector-light 1 1/6/5.10 862
twamp-reflector-light 5 1/6/5.10 889
twamp-reflector-light 5 use-dscp 23
twamp-reflector-light 5 disable
99.258 show twamp statistics
Synopsis
show twamp statistics {global | <SESSION_ID>}
Description
Use this command to display TWAMP statistics.
Command Mode
Operands
SESSION_ID The unique ID of a particular TWAMP session. The valid

range is 1–4294967295.
Options
global Specifies to display a sum of the statistics of all TWAMP

sessions.
Examples
Displaying a sum of the statistics of all TWAMP sessions:
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1109

CLI Descriptions
ML66#show twamp statistics global

last reset: 2018-06-21 15:42:08
received packets: 20
received bytes: 2200
handled packets: 20
sent packets: 20
sent bytes: 2120
Displaying the statistics of the TWAMP session with session number 20:
ML66#show twamp statistics 20
twamp-reflector-light session 20 (enabled) ip interface: 1/6/5.6 - ip address: 10. →
41.103.15 - udp port: 908
last reset: 2018-08-07 11:24:03
received packets: 20
received bytes: 2200
handled packets: 20
sent packets: 20
sent bytes: 2120
99.259 show tx-frequency
Synopsis
show tx-frequency
Description
Use this command to display the Tx frequency for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002.
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying the Tx frequency for MMU 1001 and MMU 1002:
ML66(config-ct)#show tx-frequency
tx-frequency[kHz]: 23303000
99.260 show userio
Synopsis
show userio
1110 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Description
Use this command to display user Input/Output (I/O) configuration and status of
the NPU.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying user I/O configuration and status of the NPU:
ML66>show userio
99.261 show version
Synopsis
show version
Description
Use this command to display software and hardware revision information.
— Installation Mode Commands
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Examples
Displaying software and hardware revision information:
ML66#show version
Active SBL : CXP: 9036600/1 MINI-LINK 6600 6366 1.3 R4D209
Passive SBL : CXP: 9036600/1 MINI-LINK 6600 6366 1.3 R4C250
NPU Passive SW : CXP: 9029630/1 R4C250
Active BNS : CXCR: 102 007/2 -debug - Sep 27 2017
Subrack : MINI-LINK Traffic Node - MINI-LINK 6693 R2A
CPU : e5500
CPU Clock : 1000.000000MHz
CPU Revision : 2.1 (pvr 8024 1021)
CPU BogoMips : 50.00
Memory : 0MB
Mode : OPERATIONAL
Last Restart Reason : Node warm restart issued by management
Last Restart Time : 09:19:26, August 10, 2017
Uptime : 5 hours, 7 minutes, 10 seconds
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1111

CLI Descriptions
99.262 show vlan
Synopsis
show vlan [<ID> ]
Description
Use this command to display VLAN configuration.
Use the command without <ID> operand to display all VLAN configurations.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Operands
ID Identifier of the VLAN.
Examples
Displaying the VLAN configuration:
ML66>show vlan 3
99.263 show wred-profile
Synopsis
show wred-profile [<PROFILENUMBER> ]
Description
Use this command to display Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) profiles.
— Ethernet Commands: QoS - WRED
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
1112 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Show Commands
Operands
PROFILENUMBER
The unique index of the WRED profile.
Examples
Displaying WRED profiles:
ML66>show wred-profile 2
99.264 show x
Synopsis
show x { crashlog | syslog | tail-syslog }
Description
Use this command to display log information.
Command Mode
Exec mode — >
Options
crashlog Displays the FLASH crash-log.
syslog Displays the whole syslog.
tail-syslog Displays the last part of the syslog.
Examples
Displaying the whole syslog:
ML66>show x syslog
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1113

CLI Descriptions
99.265 show xpic
Synopsis
show xpic
Description
Use this command to display information regarding the XPIC pair associated
with the Radio Link Terminal (RLT).
— Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 - XPIC
Command Mode
Examples
Displaying XPIC information:
ML66(config-rlt-xpic)#show xpic
R/S/P: 1/1/1
xpic-member1: CT 1/1/2
xpic-member2: CT 1/1/2
mode: enable
recovery: disable
auto-restore: disable
number: 34
1114 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Appendix
100 Appendix
100.1 DCN over IPv4 Address Limitations

Table 114 displays DCN over IPv4 address limitations for the different interfaces.
Table 114 DCN over IPv4 Address Limitations

Interface
IPv4 Address
Node Host LAN-DCN LO-DCN
Link-local Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
addresses (subnet use use use
with
169.254.0.0/16)
Loopback Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
with
127.0.0.0/8)
Multicast Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
with
224.0.0.0/4)
Reserved Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
with
240.0.0.0/4)
NAT64/DNS64 Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
Discovery use use use
addresses (subnet
with
192.0.0.170/31)
6to4 Relay Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
Anycast use use use
addresses (subnet
with
192.88.99.0/24)
Documentation Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
(TEST-NET-1) use use use
addresses (subnet
with
192.0.2.0/24)
addresses (subnet
with
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1115

CLI Descriptions
Interface
IPv4 Address
Node Host LAN-DCN LO-DCN
198.51.100.0/2
4)
addresses (subnet
with
203.0.113.0/24)
Network address, Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
which is the use use use
lowest address in
the subnet
Broadcast Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
address, which is use use use
the highest
address in the
subnet
Default host Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
address use use use
(192.168.0.1/24
)
"This host on this Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
network" address use use use
(0.0.0.0/8)
An address within Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
the default subnet use use use
of the Local
Access interface
(10.0.0.0/30)
Ping Target Host Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
address use use use
The address of Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
any other active use use use
interface (LO-
DCN, LAN-DCN,
Local Access)
Addresses within Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
a subnet already use use use
used by any other
active interface
(LO-DCN, LAN-
DCN, Local
Access)
1116 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

Appendix
100.2 DCN over IPv6 Address Limitations

Table 115 displays DCN over IPv6 address limitations for the different interfaces.
Table 115 DCN over IPv6 Address Limitations

Interface
IPv6 Address Node Host LAN-DCN Local Access
(USB)
Global unicast Allowed to use(1) Allowed to use (1) Allowed to use (1)
addresses
Odd IPv6 Allowed to use Allowed to use Not allowed to
addresses use(2)
IPv4 compatible Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
addresses, using use use use
legacy format
(::a.b.c.d)
IPv4 mapped Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
addresses, for use use use
example ::ffff:
10.0.0.5
Loopback address Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
(::1/128) use use use
because it is not a
global unicast
address
Link-local Not allowed to Allowed to use Allowed to use
addresses (all use
addresses starting
with fe80::/8)
Multicast Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
addresses (all use use use
addresses starting
with ff00::/8)
Site-local Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
addresses starting
with fec::/10)
IPv4-embedded Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
IPv6 addresses use use use
(all addresses
starting with
64:ff9b::/96)
IETF Protocol Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
Assignments use use use
addresses (all
54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30 1117

CLI Descriptions
Interface
IPv6 Address Node Host LAN-DCN Local Access
(USB)
addresses starting
with 2001::/23)
Benchmarking Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
addresses starting
with
2001:2::/48)
addresses starting
with
2001:db8::/32)
Overlay Routable Not allowed to Not allowed to Not allowed to
Cryptographic use use use
Hash Identifiers
(ORCHID)
addresses (all
addresses starting
with
2001:10::/28)
IPv6 Ping Target use use use
Host
any other active use use use
interface (LO-
DCN, LAN-DCN,
Local Access)
An address within Not allowed to Not allowed to Allowed to use
the default Local use use
Access (USB)
subnet
(2001:db8::/127
)
An address within Not allowed to Not allowed to Allowed to use
the configured use use
Local Access
(USB) subnet
(1) Only global unicast addresses are allowed to use.
(2) Only set even IP address (odd pair is for the USB client).
1118 54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

CLI Descriptions ML 6600

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLI Descriptions ML 6600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLI Descriptions

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

3 CLI Command Definition Structure 4

4 Installation Mode Commands 5

5 Basic and Navigation Commands 11

6 User Access Commands 26

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

9 Software, Configuration, and Log File Handling Commands 68

10 License Handling Commands 77

11 License Handling Commands in Monitoring Mode 85

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

11.2 license monitoring 86

12 Basic Configuration Commands 90

13 DCN Basic Commands 98

14 LAN-DCN IP Commands 102

15 LAN-DCN IPv6 Commands 107

16 LAN-DCN Interface Commands 112

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

16.4 ipv6 address 114

17 DCN Loopback Interface Commands 117

18 DCN Local Access (USB) Interface Commands 121

19 Router Basic Commands 125

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

19.23 set community 147

20 Router IP Commands 159

21 IP VRF Commands 167

22 Serial (PPP) Interface Commands 170

23 Router Loopback Interface Commands 175

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

24 L3 Interface Commands 178

25 BFD Configuration Commands 187

26 BFD Interface Commands 189

27 OSPF Configuration Commands 193

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

27.17 distribute-list 210

28 OSPF Interface Commands 224

29 IS-IS Commands 236

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

29.5 authentication send-only 242

30 IS-IS Interface Commands 264

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

30.11 isis network 275

31 LDP Configuration Commands 281

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

32 LDP Interface Commands 303

33 BGP Commands 312

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

33.24 neighbor activate 336

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

33.61 neighbor timers 365

34 MPLS Basic Commands 374

35 MPLS Configuration Commands 379

36 MPLS Interface Commands 395

37 RSVP-TE Commands 397

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

37.4 clear rsvp statistics 402

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30

38 RSVP-TE Interface Commands 427

39 DCN Remote Syslog Commands 436

40 Security Remote Syslog Commands 440

41 Radio Link Terminal Commands: MMU 1001 and MMU 1002 -

54/1551-HRA 901 20/11-V80 Uen L | 2019-08-30